t r >*-r\^ ?srt AN INTRODUCTION PRACTICAL PHARMACY: DESIGNED AS A TEIT-B00K FOR THE STUDENT, GUIDE TO THE PHYSICIAN AND PHARMACEUTIST. MANY FORMULAS AND PRESCRIPTIONS. BY EDWARD PARRISH, y GRADUATE IN PHARMACY J MEMBER OP THE PHILADELPHIA COLLEGE OF PHARMACY, AND OF THE AMERICAN PHARMACEUTICAL ASSOCIATION ; AND PRINCIPAL OF THE SCHOOL OF PRACTICAL PHARMACY, PHILADELPHIA. WITH TWO HUNDRED AND FORTY-THREE ILLUSTRATIONS. PHILADELPHIA: BLANCHARD A.N D LEA 1856. w . P&.&11, I2&L Entered according to the Act of Congress, in the year 1855, by BLANCHARD AND LEA, in the Office of the Clerk of the District Court of the United States in and for the Eastern District of Pennsylvania. PHILADELPHIA: T. K. AND P. 0. COLLINS, PRINXEES. TO WILLIAM PROCTER, Jr., > PROFESSOR OF THEORY AND PRACTICE OF PHARMACY IN THE PHILADELPHIA COLLEGE OF PHARMACY, EDITOR OF THE AMERICAN JOURNAL OF PHARMACY, ETC. iT'ljiH fflwk ia 3trsrritofr AS A TESTIMONIAL TO HIS ZEAL AND ABILITY IN PROSECUTING THE SCIENCE AND ART OF PHARMACY, AND AS A TRIBUTE OF THE ENDURING FRIENDSHIP AND ESTEEM or THE AUTHOR. J PEEEACE. The labor of writing, arranging, and correcting for the press, the facts and observations embodied in these pages, is at length at an end, and the final duty is reached of explaining the design and arrangement of the whole, and of commending it, by a suitable prefatory address, to those for whom it has been written. As a teacher of pharmacy to medical students, I long since expe- rienced the want of a book which should contain the leading facts and principles of the science arranged for study, and with special reference to those features of the subject which possess a practical interest to the physician; there are in the United States some thousands of practitioners of medicine, to whom pharmacy is neces- sarily a collateral pursuit; to many of these and to the numerous students under their charge, an elementary work, designed as an introduction to pharmacy, has been felt to be a desideratum. To prepare such a work has been the primary object of the undertaking now brought to a conclusion. The large and increasing class of students who are qualifying themselves for an honorable position in the profession of pharmacy, has, however, been kept steadily in view. Identified by kindred pursuits and interests with the pharmaceutical fraternity, it would not be expected that in a treatise, however elementary, on the spe- cial subject of our study and practice, I should overlook those branches of the general subject which specially interest the phar- maceutist. With a high appreciation of the value of a systematic arrangement of subjects, I have attempted a pharmaceutical classi* fication of the materia medica, which, however imperfect as here produced, cannot fail to be of use to the student who would master the science of pharmacy. To the practical pharmaceutist, also, I have endeavored to ren- der this work valuable by the introduction of a large number of formulas for new and improved remedies, obtained chiefly, though VI PREFACE. not entirely, from the American Journal of Pharmacy, to whose contributors we are indebted for most that is new in strictly Galenical pharmacy. There are few apothecaries who may not de- rive advantage fromlhis compilation of the "new remedies" in a compact form. By the attempt to adapt the work to both the physician and pharmaceutist, the student of medicine and of pharmacy, the under- taking has been rendered difficult of execution, and as a whole somewhat incongruous, and yet I believe in some respects its value is increased. So little is the scope and meaning of the subject, in its relations to the healing art, understood by many who assume its duties, especially throughout the more newly settled sections of the country, that a work which presents a general, though perhaps defective outline, may serve a better purpose than one devoted to special departments of the subject, and to full and scientific details. We are already supplied with ample works of reference: in this we have a text book for study and practice. In Part I. are grouped several chapters of a preliminary charac- ter, among which, metrology, including weights and measures, and specific gravity, holds a prominent place; it is treated with an effort at simplicity, which should attract the student to its careful study. Galenical Pharmacy occupies Part II.; the mode of preparing each of the various classes of permanent vegetable preparations prefaces a tabular statement of the relative strength, doses, and medical properties of the individual members. This compact form of displaying the leading facts of the subject will be observed as a conspicuous feature of the work, and is designed to adapt it particularly to the use of the student. For making the officinal preparations, distinct and definite formulas are omitted, being given in the Pharmacopoeia, which, as now published in a cheap form, it is presumed every physician and apothecary will possess and use. Unofncinal preparations are treated of more in detail, and hence occupy relatively a larger space. The order in which the preparations are introduced, is that which experience in the "School of Practical Pharmacy" has indicated as best for the student; those most easily prepared are first treated of, and by gradations the more complex are brought forward; the whole arrangement of Galenical preparations being thus founded primarily upon the several processes of pulverization, solution, maceration, displace- PREFACE. vii ment, evaporation, and distillation, and secondarily upon the men- strua used in making them, their medical properties and uses. Part III. is devoted to the classification of plants, giving in extensive syllabi almost all the leading articles of the materia medica, arranged on the basis of chemical composition. The vague and uncertain analysis of many plants, and parts of plants, and our ignorance in regard to the real composition of many of their active principles, takes from this part of the work much of the value it would otherwise possess. Advantage is taken of these headings to introduce a variety of secondary organic pro- ducts of great interest and importance, among which are the entire classes of vegetable acids and alkaloids. In Part TV. the essential facts in regard to the inorganic medi- cines are briefly stated, and shown also in syllabi. Part V. contains practical directions for prescribing, selecting, combining, and dispensing medicines, illustrated by a considerable number of formulas or prescriptions variously written in Latin and English, abbreviated and unabbreviated. The attention of physicians is asked to this part of the work as showing the best modes of prescribing many of the more important drugs; it will be observed, that in the selection of prescriptions for publication in this connection, I have availed myself of the skill of numerous practitioners of medicine, some of whom are well known, besides introducing many standard extemporaneous preparations which the physician often finds occasion to prescribe, and the pharma- ceutist to prepare and dispense. The chapter devoted to dispensing is less in detail than was ori- ginally intended, as the limits assigned to the work had been greatly exceeded before reaching that important practical branch; the instructions under that head will, however, be found useful to the country practitioner, for whom, especially, they were written. That the work contains errors of omission and of commission, the author is well aware. It has been written during hours literally stolen from cares and duties which none but the pharmaceutical reader can appreciate; it is the production of a practical man, who, amid various difficulties, has earnestly aimed to add a useful and substantial contribution to the much neglected literature of his profession ; as such, let it go forth to meet its fate. Before closing this preface, it is proper to remark that I have freely used all the latest works upon materia medica and phar- viii PREFACE. macy, among which, Dr. Garrod's Essentials of Materia Medica, Dorvault's l'Ofncine, Gmelin and Loewig's works, and the late edi- tions of Pereira's Materia Medica and Therapeutics, and Wood and Bache's Dispensatory, may be mentioned. To my pharmaceutical friends who have aided me in the analy- sis of prescriptions, contained in the chapter on that subject, and to several medical friends, whose criticisms on the proof-sheets have added finish and accuracy to some of the concluding chapters, I must acknowledge my obligations, while to the publishers, the printer, and the engraver, my acknowledgments are due for many valuable suggestions in regard to the mechanical execution of the work. CONTENTS. PART I. PRELIMINARY. CHAPTER I. PAGE ON THE FUENITUEE AND IMPLEMENTS NECESSARY TO THE DISPENSING OFFICE OR SHOP ......... 17 Implements . . . . . . . .23 CHAPTER II. ON WEIGHTS AND MEASURES, AND SPECIFIC GRAVITY .... 37 CHAPTER III. ON THE PHAEMACOPCEIA ....... 54 PART II. GALENICAL PHARMACY. CHAPTER I. ON THE COLLECTION AND DESICCATION OF PLANTS .... 63 On the powdering of drugs, and on powders .... 65 CHAPTER II. ON SOLUTION, FILTRATION, AND THE MEDICATED WATERS ... 74 The medicated waters ....... 76 Aquse medicatse, U. S. (syllabus) ..... 77 X CONTENTS. CHAPTER III. On maceration and the infusions Infusa, U. S. (syllabus) Unofficinal infusions page 92 95 96 CHAPTER IV. Percolation, or the displacement process CHAPTER V. TlNCTUEES . Officinal (syllabus) Unofficinal . 110 118 117 CHAPTER VI. Medicated wines and vinegars Vina medicata, U. S. (syllabus) Unofficinal wines Aceta, U. S. (syllabus) . Unofficinal ethereal tinctures . 120 120 121 123 125 CHAPTER VII. Galenical preparations of opium Officinal solutions (syllabus) Unofficinal solutions 126 127 130 CHAPTER VIII. The geneeation of heat foe phaemaceutical pueposes Thermometers ...... 135 144 CHAPTER IX. On the modes of applying heat for pharmaceutical purposes, and on the decoctions ........ Processes requiring heat ...... Decocta U. S. (syllabus) ...... CHAPTER X. On evaporation and the exteacts ...... Extracta, U. S. (syllabi) ...... Unofficinal and pseudo-extracts . "Concentrated''or resinoid extracts . 145 149 151 151 155 159 163 CHAPTER XI. Fluid exteacts Extracta fluida, U. S. (syllabi) 1G6 167 CONTENTS. xi Unofficinal fluid extracts (syllabus) Unofficinal fluid extracts of the second class Unofficinal fluid extracts of the third class page 170 177 181 CHAPTER XII. Of syeups .... Syrupi, U. S. . Unclassified syrups Unofficinal syrups Unofficinal syrups of the second class Unofficinal syrups of the fourth class Unclassified unofficinal syrups . Mineral-water syrups . 183 185 189 190 193 195 195 198 CHAPTER XIII. Of pulps, conserves, confections, electuaries, pastes, lozenges, and )IES .....204 Pulpse, U.S. . .....205 Confectiones, U. S. 205 Unofficinal confections . .....206 Pastes . .....207 Lozenges 209 Trochisci, U.S. .....211 CHAPTER XIV. On distillation and spirits . Apparatus for distillation The process of distillation Officinal preparations made by distillation Spiritus, U. S. . Cologne water, &c. . 216 217 225 227 228 229 PART III ON THE PHARMACY OF PLANTS, THEIR PRODUCTS, &c. CHAPTER I. LlGNIN and its derivatives . Lignin . Collodium Carbo ligni and carbo animalis 233 234 235 243 Xll CONTENTS. Acidum aceticum • Acetone, pyroacetic spirit, and pyroxylic spirit, wood naphtha Creasotum ...•••• page 244 245 245 CHAPTER II. On farinaceous, mucilaginous, and saccharine principles 247 CHAPTER III. The protein and similar principles Gelatin . 255 259 CHAPTER IV. Fermentation, alcohol, and the ethers Alcohol .... iEtherea, U. S. . Chloroformum . 261 264 266 270 Fixed oils and fats Lead plaster CHAPTER V. 271 272 CHAPTER VI. On volatile oils, camphors, and resins Volatile or essential oils Carbo-hydrogen essential oils Oxygenated oils Sulphuretted oils Camphors Resins, gum resins, oleo-resins, and balsams 280 280 284 285 287 287 288, 290 CHAPTER VII. On neuteal oeganic peinciples, mostly peculiar to a limited number of plants, and possessed of medicinal properties .... 292 Syllabus of neutral organic peculiar principles, with the drugs which yield them ........ 294 Coloring matters . . . . . . . 297 CHAPTER VIII. ON VEGETABLE ACIDS ....... Syllabus of the principal vegetable acids, their sources, composition, &c First group.—Fruit acids ..... Second group.—Astringent acids .... Third or balsamic group ..... Fourth group.—Acids naturally combined with alkaloids 298 299 800 301 304 308 CONTENTS. Xlll CHAPTER IX. On the alkaloids Syllabus The opium alkaloids The cinchona alkaloids . Tests for distinguishing the alkaloids page 309 311 312 316 324 PART IV. INORGANIC PHARMACEUTICAL PREPARATIONS CHAPTER I. On mineral acids Acida, U. S. Phosphatic acids, &c. 325 326 331 The alkalies and their salts Potassa salts Soda salts Alkaline tartrates Native alkaline salts, &c. Preparations of ammonia On the earths and their preparations Preparations of lime Preparations of magnesia Preparations of baryta , Preparations of alumina CHAPTER II. 332 333 339 343 345 i. 346 CHAPTER III. ARATIONS 349 349 , . . . . 355 . 355 . 355 CHAPTER IV. ON THE NON-METALLIC ELEMENTS AND THEIR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS Preparations of iodine ...... Preparations of bromine ..... Preparations of sulphur ..... Phosphorus ....... 361 361 364 365 367 CHAPTER V. Iron and manganese . Ferrum . Preparations of iron Preparations of manganese 368 368 368 380 XIV CONTENTS. CHAPTER VI. Preparations of copper and zinc Cuprum Copper preparations Zincum Preparations of zinc page 383 383 383 384 385 CHAPTER VII. On lead, silver, and bismuth Plumbum Preparations of lead Argentum Preparations of silver Bismuthum 389 389 389 393 393 395 CHAPTER VIII Antimony and arsenic preparations Antimony Preparations of antimony Arsenicum*.* . Preparations of arsenic 396 396 396 399 399 CHAPTER IX. Mercury Hydrargyrum . Mercurial compounds 401 401 402 PART V. EXTEMPORANEOUS PHARMACY. CHAPTER I. On prescriptions The language used in prescriptions 409 412 CHAPTER II. On the weiting of prescriptions 417 CONTENTS. XV CHAPTER III. On the art of selecting and combining medicines On the art of combining medicines page 423 425 CHAPTER IV. On powdebs and pills Pulveres Pilulse . Astringents Tonics and aromatics Nervous stimulants; antispasmodics Arterial stimulants Cerebral stimulants, or narcotics " Excito-motor stimulants" Arterial sedatives Emetics Cathartics and laxatives Diuretics and expectorants Diaphoretics Alteratives Emmenagogues . Suppositoria CHAPTER V. Liquid preparations, solutions, mixtures, *c. Astringents Tonics . Arterial stimulants Nervous stimulants Narcotics Arterial and nervous sedatives Cathartics Diuretics Diaphoretics Expectorants, &c. CHAPTER VI. External applications, &c. Collyria Injections Gargles Baths . Inhalations Cerates and ointments Plasters Cataplasms Liniments XVI CONTENTS. CHAPTER VII. On the art of dispensing medicines Furniture of the dispensing office Folding of powders Preparation and dispensing of pills The dispensing of liquids Labelling, &c. . PAGE 495 496 499 501 503 506 APPENDIX. Physicians' outfits ........ 509 Seventy-five dollar outfit . . . . . . 509 Fifty dollar outfit . . . . . . . 511 Twenty-five dollar outfit . . . . . .513 List of plants growing in Philadelphia City limits, and the adjacent parts of New Jersey, with their habitat, time of flowering, &c. . . . 514 Preparations used as articles of diet for the sick and convalescent . . 519 Recipes for some of the more important "patent medicines" . . 522 LIST OE ILLUSTRATIONS. FIG. 1. 3. 4. 5. 6. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23, 27, 29. 30. 31. 32. 33, 35. 36. 37. 38, 41. 42. 43. glass Broad German salt-mouth, adapted to materia medica specimens German mushroom stopper American blown salt-mouth Moulded salt-mouth, showing hollow stopper Moulded salt-mouth Long-neck German tincture American moulded tincture Ordinary American blown tincture Specia jar . Common wide-mouth packer Extra wide-mouth packer. Flint Common packing bottle Extra packing bottle Canopy-top jar Tie-over jar Flat-top covered jar Gallipot Bottle of extract . Box of Tilden's extract Prescription scales and case, with for use Prescription scales without upright Cheap tea scales 24, 25, 26. Weights of sheet brass 28. Avery's weight Series of apothecaries' or cup weights Four-fluidounce graduated measure Medicine chest measure Minim measure . • '\ / w 34. Wedgewood mortar and pestle <* -S'/-' Porcelain mortar . • ' 1 V Mortar and pestle for contusion . \ Spice-mill . • • • • 39, 40. Spatulas • ^fcfc Graduated pill tile . Pill machine • The porcelain funnel 2 the sash raised to the proper hei Giii, fr\ XV111 LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS. 44, 45. Tin displacers, with upper and lower diaphragm 46, 47. Porcelain displacer, with two diaphragms 48. Fluted long prescription vial, of flint glass 49. Wide-mouth flint fluted vial 50. Plain prescription vial,' of flint glass 51. Plain German flint vial . 52. Old fashioned long green vial 53. Short prescription vial, green glass 54. Series of apothecaries' or cup weights 55. Commercial or avoirdupois weights 56. Four-fluidounce graduated measure 57. Minim measure 58, 59. Bottle with drop machine 60, 61, 62. Stoppered specific gravity bottle, tin box, and counterpoise 63. Specific gravity bottle, unstoppered 64. Hydrometer for liquids lighter than water 65. Urinometer box containing thermometer, graduated glass vessel 66. Urinometer in use 67, 68. Hydrometer, with vessel for floating it 69. Saccharometer 70. Mortar and pestle for contusion 71, 72. Wedgewood mortar and pestle 73. Tobacco knife 74. Swift's drug-mill . 75. Spice-mill 76. Porcelain mortar . 77, 78. Flannel strainer 79, 80. Apparatus for straining syrups, &c 81. Physick's jelly strainer . 82, 83. Diagrams for folding filter 84. Plain filter 85, 86. Diagrams for folding filter 87, 88, 89, 90, 91. Diagrams for folding plaited filter 92, 93, 94. Plaited filters 95. Section of a well-formed funnel 96. Filter support 97. Filter for volatile liquids . 98. Pouring with a guiding rod 99. Bernhard & Co.'s mineral water apparatus 100, 101. Nichols's patent mineral water fountain 102. Section of Alsop's infusion mug . 103. Section of Squire's infusion pot . 104, 105. Tin displacer, with upper and lower diaphragm 106, 107. Porcelain displacer, with two diaphragms 108, 109. Lamp-chimney displacers with supports 110. Receiving bottle for displacement 111. Tin displacer for volatile liquids 112. Glass displacer .... 113. Small syringe pattern displacer . LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS. xix FIG. 114. Graduated receiving bottle 115. Bottle for continuous filtration and displacement 116. Smith's steam displacer . 117. Extemporaneous glass displacers 118. Glass spirit lamp 119. Extemporaneous glass lamp 120. French hand furnace 121, 122. Tin alcohol lamp and stand 123. Mitchell's lamp .... 124. Mitchell's retort stand and lamp 125. Berzelius's lamp .... 126. Lamp chimney .... J 27. Russian or alcohol blast lamp and stove 128. Crucible jacket .... 129. Portable gas apparatus . 130. Gas burner with mercury cup and cap 131. Ground gas burner and cap 132. Argand burner .... 133. Gas burner for small jets 134. Screen and wipport for gas heating operations 135. Gas stove 136. Gas furnace upon an argand burner 137. Small gas stove .... 138. Metallic chimney and crucible support . 139. Thermometer . • . . 140. Diagram of different thermometers 141. Extemporaneous water bath 142. Application of radiated heat 143. Metallic water bath 144. Porcelain water bath . ' 145, 146, 147. Hecker's farina boiler . 148. Water bath for drying filters 149. Apparatus for hot filtration 150. Berlin evaporating dish . 151. Application of radiated heat 152. Part of Wiegand's retort stand . 153, 154. Tilden's extract bottle and box 155. Canopy-top jar .... 156. Tie-over jar .... 157. Flat-top covered jar 158. Gallipot ..... 159. Flannel strainer .... 160, 161. Apparatus for straining 162. Board, roller, and punch, for making lozenges 163. Tubulated retort .... 164. Plain retort, tubulated receiver, and adapter 165. Retort with quilled receiver 166. Distillation with plain retort and receiver 167. Tin retort with water joint XX LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS. FIG. 168. Liebig's condenser 169. Cork borer 170. Rat-tail file 171. Brass Liebig's condenser in retort stand 172. Small glass condenser and flask . 173. Retort stand for use in distillation 174. Complete apparatus for distillation 175. Flask and safety tube 176. Section of pharmaceutical still . 177. Collodion vial 178. Starch granules as seen under a microscope 179. Displacers for making tannic acid 180. Evaporating dish and lamp 181. Water-bath funnel 182. Digestion in a flask 183. Arrangement for filtration 184. Apparatus for making nitric acid 185. Carbonic acid apparatus . 186, 187. Crucibles 188. Small crucible in use 189. Preparation of liquor potassas 190. Plain siphon 191. Siphon with suction tube 192, 193. Wedgewood mortar and pestle 194, 195. Wide-mouth packers suited to precipitation 196, 197, 198. Apparatus for making iodide of sulphur 199. Preparation of liquor potassa3 200, 201. Spritz and its use . 202. Graduated receiving bottle 203. Clpsed filter 204. Capsule 205, 206. Bottle and filter for precipitating iodide of lead 207. Precipitating jar 208. Four-ounce fluted vial 209. Plain filter 210. Pill box for weighing mercury 211. Tube and piston for introducing supposit 212. Tin strainer 213. Beaker glass 214. Glass funnel 215. Two forms of inhaling apparatus 216. Ointment jar 217. Pattern for blisters 218. Small syringe pattern displacer . 219. Vial for blistering collodion 220, 221. Plaster irons 222. Counter lamps 223. Spritz ... 224. Cork-screw LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS. XXI 225. Retort stand 226. Paper for package 227. Paper package 228. Upright reel 229. Paper for powder 230. "Powder" 231. Envelop for single powder; 232. Wiegand's powder folder 233. Powder folder . 234. Bottle for moistening pill masses 235. Bottle with drop machine 236. Pill tile . 237. Pill machine 238. Dusting bottle 239. Manner of holding the measure, bottle, and stopper 240. Well-shaped vial . 241. Cork presser 242. Paste bottle and brush 243. Farina boiler * ALPHABETICAL INDEX OF CLASSES OF MEDICINES AND PREPARATIONS, CHIEFLY OFFICINAL, DISPLAYED IN THE FORM OF SYLLABI. PAGE PAGE Acids, mineral, 327 Magnesia preparations, 355 " vegetable, 299 Manganese, preparations, 380 Alkaline tartrates, 343 Medicines suited to form of powder, 435 Alkaloids, 311 " " liquid form, 455 Ammonia, preparations, 346 " " pilular form 437 Antimony, preparations, 396 Medicated waters, 77 Arsenic, preparations, 399 Mercury, preparations, 402 Astringents, vegetable, 304 Neutral crystalline principles, 294 Balsams, 290 Oils, fixed, Baryta, preparations, 359 " volatile, carbo-hydrogen, 284 Benzyle series, 284 " " oxygenated, 286 Bismuth, preparations, 395 " " sulphuretted, 287 Bromine, preparations, 364 Ointments and cerates, 481, 483 486 Camphene series, 283 Oleo-resins, 289 Cerates and ointments, 481, 483 486 Opium, preparations, 127 Cinnamyle series, 284 Pharmaceutical incompatibles, 458 Confections, 205 206 Plasters, 491 Copper preparations, 383 Potassa salts, 333 343 Decoctions, 151 Preparations used in mixtures, 456 Earths, and their preparations, 349 " to be prescribed sir g*y> 458 Extractive matters, 294 Pulps, 205 Electuaries, 206 Resinous drugs, 290 Extracts, 158 159 Resins, proper, 289 Fecula, in its various forms, 249 Silver, preparations, 389 Fluid extracts, 167 168 , 170 Soda salts, 339 Gum resins, 290 Spirits, 228 Gums, in their various forms, 248 Starchy and mucilaginous drugs 250 Infusions, 95, 96 Sulphur, preparations, 365 Iodine, preparations, 361 Syrups, 167, 168, 185, 186, 188 , 189 Iron, preparations, 368 Tinctures, 113, 114, 115 , 116 Lead, preparations, 389 " ammoniated, 117 Liniments, 493 , 494 Vinegars, medicated, 125 Lozenges, 211 Wines, medicated, 121 Xxiv CLASSES OF MEDICINES AND PREPARATIONS. MISCELLANEOUS TABLES. PAGE Officinal weights, 39 Commercial weights, 39 Value of officinal in com. weights, 39 Officinal measures, 40 Imperial measure, 41 Of drops of different liquids (Durand) 43 (Procter), 43 (Parrish), 43 " water, 44 Specific gravity of water at dif. temp., 48 PAGE Specific gravity of liquids lighter than water, 53 " " " henvierthan water, 54 Table of the strength of wines, 264 " " " vinegars, 245 " " " fluid extract, 169 " approximate measurement, 43 " for apportioning quantities in prescription, 419 AN INTRODUCTION PRACTICAL PHARMACY. PART I. PRELIMINARY./^ ^-g&Gtf GI CHAPTER I. ON THE FURNITURE AND IMPLEMENTS NECESSARY TO THE DISPENSING OFFICE OR SHOP. The various forms of apparatus required by the apothecary and physician in the preparation and dispensing of medicines, will be brought into view in connection with the pharmaceutical processes, successively described and illustrated throughout this work. In the present preliminary chapter, it will suffice to describe those most sim- ple kinds of apparatus which are indispensable to the country prac- titioner in the performance of the manipulations coming within the range of his office practice, and are also useful as part of the necessary outfit of the apothecary. Fis- *■ The Furniture Bottles.—Much depends upon the selection of suitable bottles to contain a stock of medicines. They should be of flint glass, and fitted with well-ground glass stoppers. Recently our market has been supplied exten- sively with German glassware, which possesses the advantage of cheapness and excellence of quality. German bottles are generally of greater diameter in proportion to their height, and those designed for solids, possess wider mouths, and consequently larger stoppers than American bottles of the same capacity. Fig. 1 represents one of this description. They are preferred by many for ordinary purposes, and are certainly well adapted for putting up specimens of the materia medica, for the purpose of study and 2 Broad German salt- mouth, adapted to ma- teria medica specimens. 18 THE DISPENSING OFFICE. illustration. Besides these, there is a variety of German bottles known as mushroom stoppers, shown in Fig. 2, which are of a very different shape, being tall, and of small diameter. The stopper is less liable to be broken in loosening it when it has become tight in its place, and the shape is considered by many as in better taste. Fie. 2. Fie. 3. American blown salt-mouth. German mushroom stopper. The American made bottles are of two kinds, those blown and finished without a mould (Fig. 3), which are the most transparent Fig. 4. Fig. 5. Moulded salt-mouth, showing hollow stopper. Moulded salt-mouth. FURNITURE BOTTLES. 19 and smoothest kind, and those blown in a mould (Figs. 4 and 5), to which I usually give preference from their greater uniformity of size and shape, adapting them to the furniture of a physician's office or shop. The hollow stopper, shown in Fig. 4, is also moulded and afterwards ground; it has advantages over any other description of stopper. Bottles with wide mouths and ground glass stoppers, used for solids, are called salt-mouths; those with narrow mouths and ground glass stoppers, used for liquids, are called tinctures. Tinctures, with very long necks and narrow mouths, as shown in Fig. 6, though desirable sometimes for containing very volatile liquids, are inconvenient for syrups and the fixed oils, and very ill adapted to dropping. They are also less readily cleaned than the ordinary tincture bottles, shown in Figs. 7 and 8, which have necks Fig. 6. Long-neck German tincture. American moulded Ordinary American blown tincture. tincture. no longer than that of a salt-mouth; it is necessary, however, that the stoppers of these should be well fitted and ground. Resides the foregoing, there are two kinds of bottles frequently employed in furnishing the physician's outfit, where cheapness is the chief consideration, viz:— The specia jar, which consists of a wide-mouth bottle without a lip, the mouth of which is covered by a tin top. This is objection- 20 THE DISPENSING OFFICE. able as not excluding the air, and it is also less cleanly and neat than the salt-mouth. It is rather cheaper. Fig. 9. Specia jar. Fig. 10. Common wide-mouth packer. Packing bottles are made, either with a wide mouth for solids, as in Figs. 10 and 11, or a narrow mouth for liquids, as in Figs. 12 and 13; these are stopped by corks, and are the least desirable Fig. 11. Fig. 12. Fig. 13. > .-: omibP' Extra wide-mouth packer. Common packing bottle. Flint glass. Extra packing bottle. FURNITURE BOTTLES. 21 kind of furniture bottle, though very useful for transporting medi- cines, or for keeping extra supplies with which to replenish the regular furniture bottles. Packing bottles are comparatively cheap, and are generally stronger than salt-mouths or tinctures. They are usually made of green glass, and may be formed without a lip, called common (Fig. 12), or with a lip, called extra (Fig. 13). Those with the lip are the most approved; they hold somewhat more than their nominal capacity. Uniformity in the size and shape of the furniture bottles, adds much to the completeness of the physician's outfit. Care should be taken to apportion the different sizes, so that there will be enough of each to fill a shelf in the medicine case allotted to them. Thus, if there are twelve quart bottles, there should be fourteen pint, sixteen half pint, twenty four-ounce, or in about this proportion. In view of this fact, I have prepared catalogues which will be found in the appendix, embracing assortments more or less complete of the most prominent articles of the Materia Medica, so apportioned as to quantity as that each shall constitute a uniform and well-arranged collection of medicines, and at a certain definite price, according to the extent and completeness of the outfit. It is the practice of some druggists in furnishing physicians' out- fits to label the furniture bottles with the common English labels used in ordinary dispensing operations. This is quite objectionable, for reasons which are sufficiently obvious. Others, though employ- ing Latin labels, printed for the purpose, disfigure each bottle by a conspicuous card, announcing their name, occupation, and address. In order to insure, as far as in their power, the use of correct nomenclature in labelling furniture bottles and drawers, the Phila- delphia College of Pharmacy have published two sets of Latin labels, each containing an assortment, embracing several different sizes, according as the articles are kept in large or small quantity. These are sold by our principal druggists, and from their com- pleteness, elegance, and cheapness, commend themselves to all who are about fitting up a shop or dispensing office. The yellow labels are sold at $1 25 per set; the bronze at $10. Specimen labels, such as shown in Fig. 1, are also published by the College. After having pasted the label on to the bottle or drawer, by means of mucilage of tragacanth, or other convenient paste, and stretched it tightly over the part, it should be smoothed by laying a piece of thin paper upon it, and pressing it uniformly with the thumb. When it has become dry, it may be sized by painting over it a thin coating of clear mucilage of gum Arabic. This should extend a very little over the edges of the label. It should be then dried again, and varnished with spirit varnish. This not only im- proves the appearance of the label, but renders it durable and impervious to moisture. 22 THE DISPENSING OFFICE. Jars.—Ointments and extracts are usually kept in jars made of porcelain or queensware. These vary in quality, in color, and in shape. They should not be made of a very Fig. 14. porous material, especially if designed for ointments, and should be well glazed, both on the inside and outside surfaces. The best are imported from England. In regard to the shape of jars; the variety called canopy-top (Fig. 14) is generally pre- ferred, as having a more finished appearance than the flat-top (Fig. 16). Jars of this kind should never be labelled on the top, as is the custom with some; the tops being about of the same size, are liable to be misplaced, and mistakes occasionally occur in this way. Ointments and extracts are also frequently put into queensware jars without tops, called gallipots and tie-overs (Figs. 15 and 17). These Canopy-top jar. are cheaper than covered jars, but are incon- venient and ill adapted to the preservation of the substances kept in them. They are usually tied over with kid, bladder, or parchment, the latter substance being the best. Extracts Fig. 15. Fig. 16. Fie. 17. Tie-over jar. Flat-top covered jar. Gallipot. rapidly lose their moisture when kept in tie-overs or gallipots, and those which contain volatile active principles, as extract of conium, soon become deteriorated. Ointments also undergo a change under these circumstances, frequently becoming rancid. When tie-over jars are used, it is well to cover the top with a piece of tin-foil, pre- vious to securing the skin over it; this obviates in part the disad- vantages to which they are liable. Tilden & Co., of New Lebanon, K Y., of whose extracts I shall have occasion to speak again, have introduced the fashion of putting them into wide-mouth bottles of various sizes, containing from one ounce to a pound of extract, with cork stoppers, capped by thick tin-foil. Each bottle is inclosed in a paper box of the proper size. Figs. 18 and 19 represent the arrangement. This is, undoubtedly, .an improvement upon the old method of keeping extracts, and has PACKAGES—SCALES. 23 but one objection, that owing to the comparative depth of the bottle and smallness of its mouth, it is sometimes difficult to get at the last portions of extract. Fie. 18. Fig. 19. Packages.—Besides the medicines usually kept in bottles and jars, there are many in the physician's outfit which are adapted to drawers; these are sent to him in paper packages, and as he is not always provided with a sufficient number of drawers to appropriate one to each article, they are frequently thrown together. Where this is the case, he should take care to have all those substances possessing a strong odor, as, for instance, valerian and serpentaria, kept separate from the others if not put into bottles; here the specia jars will be found useful. Packages of this description should be secured in two distinct papers, one of which should be thick and well glazed. When drugs are to be preserved in packages, and have to be unwrapped every time a portion is taken out, they should be tied with good linen twine, passed at least twice around the package in the same direction, and connected by a bow knot. The mode of folding, tying, and labelling paper packages, will be spoken of under the head of dispensing medicines. Implements. Of the necessary implements for preparing and dispensing medi- cines in their more ordinary forms, I shall speak in this place, leaving a reference to some of those not usually met with in the physician's office, to subsequent parts of the work. Scales.—The scales should be two in number. The pair for pre- scriptions, suitable for weighing one drachm and under, and the pair for weighing two drachms and upwards. There are many different varieties of prescription scales in use; the most approved is that with an upright pillar, into the top of which is set a fulcrum, containing planes of hard steel, on which 24 THE DISPENSING OFFICE. rest knife edges of the same material, placed at the centre of gravity of the beam; such scales are usually made of brass, the beam and scale dishes being frequently of silver. They vary in price according to their material and workmanship, from ten to twenty-five dollars. To preserve their delicacy, they should be kept in a suitable case, Fig. 20. Prescription scales and case, with the sash raised to the proper height for use. and in a position where they are not liable to a jarring motion, so prejudicial to the sharpness of the knife edges. In cleaning them, care should be taken to avoid bending in the slightest degree, one or other arm of the lever, which is thin and flexible. It is well to try the accuracy of the scales occasionally, as well by weighing exceedingly small quantities upon them when balanced by heavy weights, as by weighing the same quantity successively on the opposite plates, by which means the least deflection in one or other arm of the lever may be ascertained. Owing to the comparative expensiveness of these scales, another SCALES. 25 kind is more extensively purchased by physicians, in which the upright pillar is omitted. These are usually imported either from England, France, or Germany. They come in boxes of wood or tin, and have the advantage of being much more portable. The best are received from England, and have steel beams. The German variety is very inferior, and, indeed, is frequently worthless. The physician who administers strychnia, veratria, or morphia in his practice, may as well judge of the quantity by the eye as by the useof a pair of eommon German scales, which frequently fail to indicate it within half a grain or even a grain. Very good scales in boxes are made in this country, at prices varying from three to five dollars each; some have glass plates, Fig. 21. Prescription scales without upright. adapting them to weighing corrosive substances. Fig. 21 exhibits this description of scales, with the maimer of holding them. Fig. 22 represents a kind of scales for weighing 3ss and upwards, which are less in use among medical practitioners than they ought to be; until recently it has been customary to guess at quantities which were too large for the prescription scales, the expense of the larger kind of scales being a great objection on the part of the young practitioner to purchasing them. A pair of large brass scales, made on the principle of those in Fig. 20, costs from twelve to thirty dollars. The kind here shown is selected on account of its cheap- ness ; it is manufactured of iron, varnished, to protect it from rust, 26 THE DISPENSING OFFICE. with a movable tin pan or scoop, and a platform arrangement of the beam. It is furnished the country physician or storekeeper for one dollar and twenty-five cents, and answers a good purpose. Fig. 22. Cheap tea scales. Weights, although sometimes made in this country, are usually imported, of the smaller kinds, with the box scales. Those for ten grains and upwards are made of brass cut into squares, and marked with the officinal signs for denoting the different denominations of weight. Those for six grains and under, are of sheet brass cut into squares and variously marked with the number of grains, as shown in Figs. 23, 24, 25, and 26. Fig. 23. Fig. 24. Fig. 25. Fig. 26. 6 o 0 0 o o o o o o 0 o tet Weights of sheet brass. The inexperienced operator is liable to error in using these small weights from the fact that they frequently have, besides the marks denoting the number of grains, a stamp placed on them by the manufacturer, which is the German sign corresponding with our gr. (grana). (See Fig. 24.) This is liable to be counted with the other indentations, and to add one to the actual number of grains; a two grain weight is liable to be taken for a three grain, a three grain to be used instead of a four, and so on. Close observation, however, will exhibit a decided difference between the two kinds of indentations. The mode of marking shown in Fig. 23, is more liable to error than the others, especially when the weights become soiled and a little corroded by use. In regard to accuracy, it must be admitted that most of the WEIGHTS. 27 imported weights are very faulty; those made by our own scale makers are generally to be preferred. Within a few years past a description of weights from 3ij to 9ss has become common in our market, quite preferable to the Ger- man square weights of the same denominations. . These are round, and stamped out of brass plates, with very distinct inscriptions, as shown in Figs. 27 and 28. They are imported from England, being the manufacture of W. and T. Avery, of Birmingham. Fig. 27. Fig. 28. Avery's weight. Some trials recently made with common German weights, con- vince me that few of those commonly met with are even reasonably accurate; a 5j weight was found to weigh as high as 69.8 grains, and a gr. vj weight weighed 6.75 grains; others approximated more nearly; a 3ss weighed 30.25 grains, a 3j 60.1 grains, a 9ss 10.1 grains, a 3ij 120.5- grains, &c. None of Avery's that were tried, varied more than J^ grain from their nominal weight. The larger apothecaries' weights are almost invariably in the shape of cupsj fitting into each other, the two inmost ones (Fig. 29) representing each two drachms; the next a half ounce, the next an ounce, and so on up to sixteen ounces in the larger nests. Now, as each cup represents a certain weight by itself, and as each is double that inside of it (excepting the two smallest, which are equal), the sum of any nest will be equal to that of any weight into which it fits; thus, the 16 oz. weight will balance the nest within it, which consists of an eight ounce, a four ounce, a two ounce, a one ounce, a half ounce, and two quarter ounces, and the entire nest will weigh thirty-two ounces. Fig. 29. Series of apothecaries' or cup weights. This arrangement of weights, though very compact and conve- nient, and furnishing a prominent distinction between the officinal and ordinary commercial weights, is more expensive than might be 28 THE DISPENSING OFFICE. Fig. 30. desired, considering the great utility to the apothecary and physician of having a good supply of such important implements of his art. The physician about commencing practice in the country, and desirous of economizing in this department of his outfit, may pro- cure sets of these weights ascending as high as four ounces, the nest weighing eight ounces. They will be found to answer his purposes in preparing tinctures, syrups, &c, in small quantities; in dispensing the vegetable medicines for infusions; and in his weighing operations generally, less disadvantage would flow from the exclu- sive use of apothecaries' than of avoirdupois weights. The subject of weights and measures is more fully presented in the next chapter, where drawings will also be found of the avoirdupois weights in use. Measures.—As all liquid substances are generally dispensed by measure rather than by weight, and as our Pharmacopoeia directs the use of the officinal standard of measurement in preparations containing liquids, with but few exceptions, one or more graduated measures are necessarily embraced in the physician's outfit. The most convenient for dispensing operations, is either a four or eight ounce conical measure, such as is shown in Fig. 30. These are of flint or of green glass, and are graduated down to one fluidrachm or half a drachm, which are the lowest denominations we generally wish to measure, and they can be filled several times in succession when it is desirable to measure a pint or quart. These measures are either made by our own glass manufacturers, and graduated here by persons following it as a business, or they are imported from Germany. The German measures are not to be relied on for accu- racy, though from the quality of the glass, they are generally believed to be less liable than our own to break in measuring hot liquids. In selecting a measure, the chief points to be observed are, to have a good lip for pouring the liquids from, and clear and distinct marks both on the fluidrachm and fluidounce columns ; the glass should not be very thick, as, by refracting the light, it interferes with accuracy in the measurement of small quan- tities. Large measures, which are not to be used for quantities under an ounce, may be made of the form shown in Fig. 31. These are less liable to be broken by careless handling. One ounce gra- duates of this description are sometimes made for medicine-chests or saddle-bags where great economy f ? iv. graduated measure. Fig. 81. Medicine chest of space is necessary. MEASURES—MORTARS. 29 Minim Measures.—Tot the divisions of a fluidrachm, the minim measure is employed. This is usually an upright cylinder of glass, with a lip at one extremity, and a glass pedestal at the other, and is graduated from sixty minims (one fluidrachm) to five minims. The inconveni- ence of employing a measure of this kind has led to the use of drops in prescription, instead of minims, and as essential oils and spirituous liquids drop so differently from aqueous liquids, and as the same liquid drops very differently from different vessels, discrepancies are likely to occur, unless the dispenser sufficiently under- stands and observes the distinction. (See tables of approximate measurement in next chapter.) Tin Measures.—Tin and copper measures of half pint, one pint, or two pints capacity, will be found very useful to the dispensing physician. Minim measure. They may be used for water, alcohol, syrups, and most tinctures, whenever the full quantity they will contain is prescribed. Mortars.—Mortars are necessary in so many processes of phar- macy, as to be among the most important items of an outfit. I shall describe the kinds usually sold, with their different uses, leav- ing to the physician the choice of one or more varieties, according to circumstances. Wedgewood mortars are imported from England, and an inferior quality of similar ware is made in this country. They differ some- what in their texture, though generally possessed of sufficient roughness to adapt them to the powdering of substances by tritura- tion. The best varieties are glazed enough to prevent their absorb- ing or becoming permanently stained by chemicals triturated in them, and yet are not so smooth as to allow substances to slip about instead of being retained under the pestle. At least one good wedgewood mortar is necessary. It should be of the shape indi- cated in Fig. 33, perfectly flat on its base, so that it will stand firm during the process, and furnished with a good lip. The pestle should be, in shape, precisely adapted to the interior surface of the mortar; neither flattened nor pointed at its lower extremity, as is frequently the case. As the larger sized pestles always consist of two pieces, a wooden handle, and the rounded portion, which is of wedgewood ware, care should be taken to have the connection between them, which is made with cement, perfectly tight. When they become loosened, they may be secured by a cement made of resin, two parts; yellow wax, one part; and Spanish brown, three parts; melted together by heat. For the purpose of solution, a porcelain mortar is convenient; 30 THE DISPENSING OFFICE. such are frequently more shallow than the wedgewood variety. They are perfectly smooth, and highly glazed, and are not liable to be stained by chemical substances dissolved in them. They will Fig. 33. Fig. 34. Wedgewood mortar and pestle. also be found convenient in preparing such ointments and cerates as require to be introduced into a mortar, being more readily cleansed than wedgewood ware. The one shown in Fig. 35 has a pestle of the same material. Fig. 35. Porcelain mortar. Glass mortars are frequently found in the office of the physician, and the shop of the apothecary. They are too soft as well as too smooth for use in reducing hard substances to powder. The prin- cipal use to which they are appropriate, is in forming solutions of readily soluble materials, and in making ointments. The small MORTARS. 31 sizes are much employed in fitting up medicine-chests and medical saddle-bags. For large operations, as, for instance, in making syrup of bitter almonds, confection of roses, or mercurial ointment, a marble mortar is most convenient; a perfect block of hard and close grained marble of requisite size, is cut out into a shape corresponding with that of the perfect wedgewood mortar, represented in Fig. 33. The pestle is made of the same material, fastened upon a long wooden handle, which may be projected into an iron ring above, secured properly over the centre of the mortar, so that while the operator gives the requisite grinding motion to the lower extremity of the pestle, the upper is held securely in its place. Mortars of the kinds described are not adapted to contusing sub- stances, either with a view to obtaining powders, or to employing them in a bruised condition. If used for this purpose, they are very apt to be broken on the first trial. For contusion, an iron, brass, or bell-metal mortar of the shape here shown is best suited. Unlike mortars for trituration, these Fig. 36. Mortar and pestle for contusion. are flat at bottom, and the pestles terminate in a flattened ball; they are tall in proportion to their diameter, as seen in the drawing. The laborious process of powdering drugs is greatly facilitated by the employment of mills; some of the varieties of coffee and spice-mills met with in iron or hardware stores are exceedingly useful in the comminution of vegetable substances, for the prepara- 32 THE DISPENSING OFFICE. tion of tinctures, infusions, &c, and even, assisted with suitable sieves, in their reduction to powder. A very excellent mill, called Swift's drug-mill, is figured and de- scribed in the chapter on powdering. Fig. 37 represents a spice-mill, which will be found convenient Fig. 37. SfcS:..-^ ~—= uiii!"i;ii^;.. \ "^1 Spice-mill. where the drug is not too large to be introduced into it, in which case I use a stout pair of shears, a tobacco knife, or a large iron mortar, for its previous reduction. This has the advantage of being secured to a table by a clamp, so as to be removable at pleasure. To the physician who prepares his own powders, one or more sieves will be found very useful. The most permanent and desir- able kind is that made of wire gauze, though hair and bolting-cloth sieves are somewhat less costly. The latter answer very well if kept clear of moths; a sieve with a covering at top and bottom is preferable. These coverings should be made of leather, stretched over hoops rather than of wood, which is liable to warp and crack. I shall have occasion to speak of the employment of coarse sieves in the preparation of powders for displacement, and need only mention them in this place, to refer to the article on displacement. Spatulas.—Of these there are several kinds. The plain steel spatula, or palette knife, shown in Fig. 40, is, perhaps, best adapted to the general purposes of dispensing. In selecting them, care should be taken to have one very flexible, and another quite stiff, while, of course, they should be of two or more sizes. The balance handle spatula (Fig. 39) is also useful in dispensing opera- tions, being generally reserved for folding powders, and for other neat manipulations. It has the merit of lying on the table or SPATULAS —PILL TILE AND PILL MACHINE. 33 counter without the blade coming in contact with it, a convenience when employed with pill masses or ointments. Three inch spa- tulas may be made with a tapering blade, as shown in Fig. 38, so Fig. 40. as to allow of their being introduced into rather narrow-mouthed bottles, such as are usually put into saddle-bags. Spatulas of glass, ivory, and bone are sometimes, though rarely, employed. They are useful in manipulating with corrosive sub- stances which would act upon steel. A pill tile (Fig. 41), made of porcelain or queensware, is a useful utensil in preparing certain ointments and pills. Tiles are made of various sizes, and are sometimes graduated, as seen in the drawing, to facilitate the division of masses into twelve or twenty-four pills. The division of pill masses, however, is better accomplished by the aid of the machine, shown in the accompanying drawing. The Fig. 41. Fig. 42. Graduated pill tile. Pill machine. mode of using this most useful instrument, is described in the chapter on dispensing medicines. 3 34 THE DISPENSING OFFICE. Fig. 43. The funnel, sometimes called tunnel, is an article of every-day use in the dispensing shop or office. A porce- lain or wedgewood funnel is represented in the plate. The sides should be straight, and at an angle of 60° to each other. The tube should be smallest at its lowest extremity, and should have one or more grooves upon its outer surface, to allow of the egress of air from a bottle, into the mouth of which it is fitted. Funnels which are grooved on their inner surface, are generally preferred for filtration, as allowing a more ready downward passage of the liquids, especially when the plain filter is employed. They may be made of glass, porcelain, Berlin or queens- ware, and tin; those of glass are generally fur- nished physicians in their outfits; but the por- celain variety is far less liable to breakage, and is equally cleanly. The displacement apparatus is now almost indispensable to the physician who prepares his tinctures, infusions, &c. The kind best adapted to a physician's outfit is a tin tube, of about 8 inches long, and 3| inches in diameter, terminated by a funnel, and containing one or two perforated diaphragms, fitting loosely into the tube, so as to be readily removed for cleaning (Figs. 44 and 45). There is also The porcelain funnel. Fig. 44. Fig. 45. Fig. 46. Fig. 47. Tin displacers, with upper and lower diaphragm. Porcelain displacer, with two diaphragms. a kind made of porcelain or earthenware resembling the preceding in shape, and containing diaphragms of the same material (Figs. 46 and 47). Under the head of the displacement process, the mode of preparing and using apparatus of this kind is more fully described. Yials.—The physician's outfit usually contains from a half gross to a gross of prescription vials, varying in size from flviij to f 3ss. VIALS. 35 As more of the smaller sizes are used than of the others, it is desir- able to have about the following proportions in a gross: One doz. fSviij, one doz. f|vj, two doz. f^iv, three doz. f£ij, three doz. fgjj two doz. f Iss. Several of the larger sizes should have wide mouths,' for convenience in bottling solid substances, and also to adapt to the displacement apparatus. Vials in commerce are classified as flint, German flint, and green glass; as fluted and plain; and as long and short. Flint vials are considerably more expensive than the green, though they are far more elegant for prescription purposes. They are generally made in a mould. Of the fluted vials, the long (Fig. 48) are the most convenient for ordinary purposes; they admit of a larger label being pasted on them, which is sometimes desirable in case of prescriptions, and they are more convenient for medicines that are to be administered by drops. Fig. 49 represents a short fluted vial of the same size, and having a wide mouth, adapting it to solid substances. Fig. 50 is a flint Fig. 48. Fig. 49. Fig. 50. Fluted long prescription vial, of flint glass. Wide-mouth flint fluted vial. Plain prescription vial, of flint glass. vial, now very much in vogue, intermediate between the two pre- ceding in height, and without the fluted surface; these are apt to show a crease down their whole length, at the point where the two halves of the mould, in which they are made, come together in shutting it, a common feature in all bottles made in moulds, which Fig. 51. A Fig. 52. Fig. 53. A Plain German flint vial. Old fashioned long green vial. Short prescription vial, green glass. open and shut by what may be called a lateral suture. Figs. 51, 52, and 53 represent vials blown without a mould, or in an open clay 36 THE DISPENSING OFFICE. mould, and finished by hand. These have a handsomer and smoother surface, though less regular and uniform in shape, as here the shape depends on the skill of the finisher, not the construction of his tools. German glass vials are intermediate in price, between those of flint and common green glass. They are very well adapted to ordinary dispensing purposes, and, as made by our best manufacturers, leave little to desire. The shape of the lip is one of the most important considerations in the selection of vials; if the lip is too narrow and rounded, a constant source of annoyance will occur, from the liquid trickling down the neck and sides of the vial after pouring from it, and it will be impossible to drop from it at all. Figs. 52 and 53 represent the old fashioned cheap green glass blown vials; that shown in Fig. 52 has the disadvantage of not standing up, and is usually suspended by a string. Corks.—These are exceedingly variable in quality; the softest and most perfectly shaped varieties are expensive, and sometimes difficult to procure. This remark is especially true of the larger sizes, called bottle corks; of these we have pint corks, quart corks, demijohn corks, and flat or pot corks; the last being used chiefly for wide-mouth packing bottles and earthen jars. It is well for the physician to be supplied with a few of these, though vial corks constitute by far the largest proportion of the whole number required. Paper of different kinds should not be overlooked in making up an outfit. The most useful are druggist's white wrapping-paper, which should be fine without being heavy, or spongy in its texture; it should not crack at the edges when turned over sharply. The sizes met with in commerce are medium, about 19 x 24 inches, and double medium, 24 x 38 inches. For directions in regard to divid- ing the sheets, for dispensing medicines in packages, see chapter on dispensing. _ The kind of paper called flat cap will be found very convenient in addition to the above, for putting up powders, espe- cially in very small doses. Filtering paper should be without color, and of a porous texture, and yet sufficiently firm to sustain the weight of the liquid placed upon it. Fancy paper, employed for capping corks, or as a very nice outer wrapping to packages, is recommended to those who expect to observe neatness and elegance in dispensing. Tin-foil will also be required by such for covering jars of ointment, &c. Pill 5oa^.—These are of three kinds: 1st. Paper pill boxes, which are adapted to dispensing pil s. 2d. Wooden pill boxes, or chip boxes made of shavings, and best suited for ointments, confections, &c; of this article, a very beautiful style is imported from England METROLOGY. 37 which commands nearly double the price of the American kind. 3. Turned boxes. These have been recently introduced for dis- pensing pills, and are certainly more substantial than either paper or chip boxes. They do not, however, serve so good a purpose for ointments, the bottom, being cut across the grain of the wood, soon becomes saturated with the grease, and soils everything it is set upon. Pill boxes are usually sold by the dozen nests, wrapped in paper. Sometimes a nest contains three, and sometimes four boxes, ranging from about an ounce capacity to one-fourth that size. The physician should provide himself with a tin case, in the shape of a closed cylinder, in which to carry his gum catheters and bougies, and another for adhesive plaster cloth, which otherwise will soon become useless in our climate. The other items to be mentioned are a few pieces of fine Turkey sponge for surgical use, and one for the inhalation of ether, if a friend to anaesthesia in surgery and obstetrics. A corkscrew, a ball of fine linen twine, a pair of scissors, a few coarse towels for wiping mortars, a tin cup for heating liquids, a sheepskin for spreading plasters, &c. The apparatus and furniture here described, are such as may be regarded as necessary to the outfit of a country practitioner. I shall find occasion to refer to many implements in the subsequent parts of this work which it would be superfluous to describe in this place, though frequently included in the outfit. CHAPTER II. ON WEIGHTS AND MEASURES, AND SPECIFIC GRAVITY. Metrology embraces the science of determining the bulk, or extension of substances, called measurement, and their gravitating force, called weight, and the relation of these to each other, called specific gravity. In the present essay, it is not designed to enter into the subject further than is necessary to the student of medicine and pharmacy; and hence I shall avoid all investigations into the origin of the standards of measurement and weight in use in this country and in England, a subject which is full of difficulty and complexity, and refer the reader to an able essay on its historical bearings, compiled by the late Dr. Benjamin Ellis (see American Journal of Pharmacy, vol. ii. pp. Ill and 188), from the Report on Weights and Measures, made by Hon. J. Quincy Adams, when Secretary of State, to the U. S. Senate in 1821. 38 WEIGHTS AND MEASURES, AND SPECIFIC GRAVITY. Weights and Measures.—So difficult has it been found to modify or materially alter the systems of measurement and weight handed down from the earliest antiquity, and tenaciously adhered to by the mass of the people, and so inadequate have been the efforts of the British Crown and Parliament to supply proper and invariable standards, that the present Troy and Avoirdupois weights are believed to be even less perfect and consistent with each other than the very ancient standards from which they were derived. # The inconveniences attendant on the use of separate sets of weights and measures for different kinds of commodities, has probably always been felt, and is only partially remedied by adapting these to one common unit to which all can be reduced. This adaptation, in the case of our different standards, is through the grain or unit of weight. The systems of Troy, Apothecaries', and Avoirdupois weights, and of wine measure, which are in most common use in this country, are all readily compared through this common standard —the grain. Troy Weight is used by jewellers, and at the mints, in the exchange of the precious metals. Its denominations are the pound, ounce, pennyweight (= 24 grs.), and grain. Apothecaries' Weight is used by apothecaries and physicians in mixing and prescribing medicines, and is officinal in the United States, London, and Edinburgh Pharmacopoeias (not in that of Dublin). In buying and selling medicines, not ordered by pre- scription, the avoirdupois weight is used. The denominations of the apothecaries' weight are pounds, ounces, drachms or drams, scruples, and grains. Its pound, ounce, and grain, correspond with the Troy weight. Avoirdupois Weight is used in general commerce, and by apothe- caries in their strictly commercial transactions, as in buying and selling medicines without the prescription of a physician, and also in compounding recipes for domestic purposes, and for use in the arts. Its higher denominations need not be named. As at present used, it has pounds, ounces, and fractions of the ounce. Synonyms.—The names given above may be substituted, with advantage, by officinal for the apothecaries', and commercial for the avoirdupois, as more definite, and less likely to be confounded in the mind of the student. A knowledge of these, and of their relations to each other, is of the highest degreeof importance to the physician and apothecary, and, for want of giving due attention to them at the outset, many students are continually confused in the practice of pharmacy. In the following 4able, I have endeavored to display, in the sim- plest and most comprehensive manner, the value of each denomina- tion in the respective weights, and the relation of these to each other:— SCALES AND WEIGHTS. 39 Table of the Officinal Weights (Apothecaries'). 20 grains = 9i (one scruple) = gr. xx. 60 grains = 3i (one drachm) = 9iij (3 scruples). 480 grains = Ij (one ounce) = 5viii (8 drachms). 5,760 grains = fibi (one pound, U.S.P.) = 3xii (12 ounces). Tabh of Commercial Weights (Avoirdupois). 437.5 grains = 1 oz. (one ounce). 7,000 grains = lib (one pound, Com.) = 16 oz. Table of the Value of Officinal in Commercial Weights. Ij (officinal) = 1 oz. (commercial) + 42.5 grs., or about Bij. Sij " =2 oz. " + 85 grs. " Jiss. Bbi " = 13 oz. " + 72.5 grs. " 3i. The use of signs is here seen to be of importance, as designating, when correctly used, to which system of weights the particular de- nomination refers; thus, Ij means 480 grains—the officinal ounce; while 1 oz. means 437.5 grains—the commercial ounce. The sign for designating the pound is not so distinctive; Bbi is applied equally to the officinal pound, 5,760 grains, and to the commercial, 7,000 grains; so that, when a doubt may arise as to which is intended, the prefix U.S.P. would be well adapted to designate the officinal, and Com. or Av., the commercial. The comparative value of the different parallel denominations may be thus expressed:— The officinal ounce contains 42J grains more than the commer- cial. The officinal pound contains 1,240 grains less than the commer- cial. Or, thus:— The officinal has the largest ounce, and the commercial has the largest pound, the former containing §xij (each 480 grains) in a pound, and the latter 16 ounces (each 437.5 grains) in a pound. Or thus:— 480 x 12 = 5,760 (officinal). 437.5 x 16 = 7,000 (commercial). Scales and Weights.—The balance, or scales, is of course indis- pensable to the idea of metrology, and the possession of masses of previously ascertained gravitating force, called weights, is equally necessary. Scales are of various styles, although, for use in phar- macy, the simple kinds figured among the necessary implements for furnishing the physician's office, answer every purpose. In this place, it will be proper to call attention especially to the usual forms of vjeights of the different systems. The apothecaries' weights are invariably, for all denominations, made of brass or copper. The larger weights come in the cup form, as shown in Fig. 54. Each cup is equal to the sum of all those which fit in it, or is twice the sum of 40 WEIGHTS AND MEASURES, AND SPECIFIC GRAVITY. the next smaller. These weights are expensive, and, unfortunately, too little used by physicians, and even by some apothecaries. The Fig. 54. Fig. 55. Series of apothecaries' or cup weights. small weights which accompany the box scales, and which are figured, in the last chapter, are used for all denominations up to 2 drachms, and then the common commercial or avoirdupois weights, which are cheaper than the brass cup weights, are frequently brought into play. These are usually in piles of iron, brass, or zinc, of the form shown in the annexed figure, each weight being half that of the one below it. The table of the value of the officinal in the commercial weights given on the last page, is designed to indicate a ready means of executing the officinal formulae with the common commercial, and small officinal weights. In a large number of processes, one ounce, or two ounces, are ordered, and in these cases, if the avoirdupois weight is used, a 9ij or 3j, and 3ss weight must be added from the small set. In the case of a pound being ordered, as there shown, 13 ounces from the pile, and a 3j from the small set, will nearly approximate the required weight. Measures of capacity are used for liquids, and, in the higher de- nominations, for corn and the cereal grains, but the only table of these we need present is that employed in medicine, called Wine Measure. The unit of this system has no convenient relation to the unit of the systems of weight; it is called a minim, and is equal to about .95 of a grain of pure water at 60° F. Table of the Officinal, or Wine Measure. (one fluidrachm) = rn^ lx = grains of water 56.9 455.6 " 7,291.1 Commercial or avoir dupois weights. 60 minims = f^j 480 " =fjj (one fluidounce) = fzviij = 7,680 " =Oj (one pint) = fgxvj = 61,440 " = Cong, j (one gallon) = Oviij = 58,328.8 Or, thus:— 60 minims are one fluidrachm. 8 fluidrachms are one fluidounce. 16 fluidounces are one pint. 2 pints are one quart. 4 quarts are one gallon. Besides the discrepancy occasioned by the minim not being GRADUATED MEASURES. 41 60 minims = f 3j 480 " = f sj 9,600 " = Oj 76,800 " = Cong, j Fig. 56. equal to one grain of the natural liquid standard, it will be per- ceived at once that a wide variance exists in the denominations above an ounce. The fluidounce contains 480 minims, as the offi- cinal ounce contains that number of grains; but, in the pint, are 16 fluidounces, while the corresponding pound contains only 12 ounces. From these causes, the adjustment of proportions of solids to liquids, when accuracy is required, is a matter of no little calculation. In England, this system of measures has been revised of latter years, so as to bring about a close relation between the solid commercial ounce and the fluidounce. In the imperial measure, the minim is equal to .91 of a grain, and it is multiplied as follows:— Imperial Measure. (one fluidrachm) = n^ lx = grains of water 54.6 (one fluidounce) = f Jviij = " " 437.5 (one pint) = fgxx = " " 8,750' (one gallon) = Oviij = " " 70,000 Graduated measures of Oj, fsviij, flvj, f giv, f 3ij, Oj, f5j capa- city are manufactured and sold by druggists; these are sometimes quite inaccurate, but may be readily verified by balancing them on the scales, and gradually adding pure water until the required weight in grains, as shown in the table, is attained. In the same way we may graduate our own measures, marking the denomina- tions by the following ready process. Having coated one side of the glass with a thin coating of wax, balance it on the scales, adjust the weights, and add the required num- ber of grains of pure water, observing to add it drop by drop toward the last; as soon as the weight is accurately counterpoised, remove it to a level table or counter, so high that it will be on a line with the eye, and carefully, with the point of a pin, mark the line formed by the surface of the liquid, and opposite this the appropriate sign; this may be rendered more clear and distinct afterwards. In the same way mark the various other denominations, having an eye to the temperature, which should not vary far from 60°. Now form a paste, by mixing a sufficient quantity of finely powered fluor-spar with sulphuric acid, and spread this over the marked surfaces, and set the measure aside for a day or two, after which, wash it off and remove the wax; the graduated measure is now indelibly and distinctly marked, and, if we have used the proper care, more accurately than is usual with those sold. I have compared two, in which the one fluidrachm mark of one corresponded nearly with the two fluidrachm of the other, and in other respects they were almost as much at variance. fSiv grad. measure. 1 Equal to 1 lb. 4 oz. avoirdupois weight. 42 WEIGHTS AND MEASURES, AND SPECIFIC GRAVITY. A precaution to be observed, whether in graduating or using a measure, particularly of small capacity, may be appropriately men- tioned here. , , . ... „ . Owing to the adhesion of the liquid to the sides of the measure, its surface is concave, and shows, from a side view, two lines: one where the edge of the liquid adheres to the glass, and the other, the line of the lower surface of the concavity. Now, in order to fix the true line in this case, it must be intermediate between the upper and lower edge of the liquid, and not at either surface. This is more obvious the smaller the diameter of the measure, and, in the accom- panying drawing, the dotted line has been made at the proper point for measurement. Approximate Measurement.—The approximate stand- ards of measurement are very inaccurate, but they have no wider range than the doses of medicines, so that they are for the most part satisfactory. The following table exhibits those in common use :— Minim measure. A gill mug, or teacupful A wineglassful A tablespoonful A dessertspoonful A teaspoonful A drop . fgiv. . fSij. . f^ss. . f5ij. . f5j. from | to 1J minims. Of the above, it may be remarked that the wineglassful is fre- quently less than 2 fluidounces, although the champagne glass is nearer 4 fluidounces. I have observed that the modern teaspoons are larger than formerly, and that the more expensive silver spoons are larger than those of common metal of the same nominal size. The size of drops varies from various causes, of which the nature of the liquid, the size and shape of the lip of the vessel from which dropped, and the extent to which the lip is moistened, are the most important. The following lists of liquids, with the number of drops in a fluidrachm, may be considered as furnishing good ap- proximations to the relative size of their drops:— Three lists are appended: 1st. That by Elias Durand, originally published in the Journal of the Philadelphia College of Pharmacy, vol. i. p. 169, and copied into most of our standard works; from this I have omitted several items, on account of their standard strength having been very much altered since the period of his experiments. 2d. That of Prof. Procter, published in the tenth edition of the United States Dispensatory, and confined to different essential oils. 3d and 4th. Lists I have prepared as the result of my own observations, chiefly confined to medicines not included in the foregoing. APPROXIMATE MEASUREMENT. 43 1st. Durand's Table of the number of Drops of different Liquids equivalent to a fluidrachm. DROPS. DROPS. Acid, acetic, crystallizable . 120 Tinctures of assafoetida, foxglove " hydrocyanic, medicinal . 45 guaiacum, and opium . 120 " muriatic . . . . 54 Tincture of chloride of iron . 132 " nitric . 84 Vinegar, distilled . 78 " sulphuric . 90 " of colchicum . 78 " " aromatic . . 120 " of squill . 78 Alcohol .... . 138 Water, distilled 45 " diluted . 120 " of ammonia, strong 54 Arsenite of potassa, solution c f . 57 " " weak 45 Ether, sulphuric . 150 Wine, Teneriffe 78 Oils of aniseed, cinnamon, cloves, " antimonial . 72 peppermint, sweet almonds , and " of colchicum 75 olives .... . 120 " of opium 78 2d. Procter's Table of the number of Drops to a fluidrachm of Essential Oil, as dropped A, from the bottles from which they are commonly dispensed, and B, from a minim measure. Oleum anisi . " cari . " caryophylli " chenopodii " cinnamomi " cubebae " fceniculi " gaultheriae " hedeomse . A. B. 85 86 106 108 103 103 97 100 100 102 86 96 103 103 102 101 91 91 A. B. Oleum menthse pip. 103 109 " " viridis . 89 94 " rosmarini . 104 105 " sabinaa 102 108 " sassafras . 102 100 " tanaceti 92 111 " Valerianae . 116 110 Creasotum 95 91 Zd. Table of the number of Drops of different Liquids equivalent to f 3j, as dropped from pint and half pint tincture bottles, and from a minim measure. Thermometer 80° F.—E. Parrish. Those marked av. are averages of several droppings. FROM W MEASURE. FROM Oj OR OSS TR. Acetum opii .... Acidum aceticum (commercial) " " dilutum, av. " nitricum dilutum " sulphuricum dilutum " " aromaticum " hydrocyanicum dUutum, av Alcohol .... " dilutum, av. Aqua, av. ... Chloroformum, av. . Extractum Valerianae, Fid. Glycerina (first dropping) " av. Infusion digitalis, av. Liquor ammonias . _ . " iodinii compositus 69 90 102 73 52.5 55 44 62 49 54 148 116 52 i 143 118 124.5 98 46 64.5 276.5 180 126 115 135 53 84.7 55 60 62.5 62 49 75 75 1 From fgi Tr. hot. 53. 44 weights and measures, and specific gravity. FROM tT\ MEASURE. FROM Oj OR OSS TR. Liquor hydrarg. et arsen. iodid. " potassse arsenitis Oleum menthae viridis, old " 0llV33 . " tiglii . Spiritus aetheris nitrici _ " " compositus Syrupus acacias " scillae Tinctura aconiti radicis " ferri chloridi " iodinii " opii . " " camphorata " tolutani . Vinum antimonii, av. " opii Uh. Number of Drops of Water equivalent to f3j dropped from Oj vials. 52 52 63 60 103 110 99 76 92 80 148 90 140 90 56 58 88 85 130 118 151 106 144 113 147 106 110 95 138 120 84 62 92 78 1st trial 34. 5th trial 60. 2d trial 48. 6th trial 50. 3d trial 32. 7th trial 65. 4th trial 48. Average 48.1. The drop machines here figured, are contrived to obviate, to a certain extent, the inequalities given in the above table; they are Fig. 58. Fig. 59. Bottle with drop machine. • not generally known, though quite useful to the physician and apothecary who has occasion to drop a large number of drops in succession. Their construction will be obvious from the draw- ing. A perforated cork with a tube, either of glass or metal, drawn out to a small orifice, and a capillary tube of metal passing above the surface of the liquid in the inverted bottle, so as to supply air to the vacuum created by the liquid as it drops out, con- stitutes all that is essential to the apparatus. specific gravity. 45 Specific Gravity.—In accordance with the general plan of this work, I shall endeavor to simplify this subject, and to divest it of unnecessary details, so as to leave no excuse to the student for ne- glecting to acquaint himself with it, so far as it is necessarily con- nected with his pursuits. In all chemical works, the subject of specific gravity is treated of as related to solids, liquids, and gases, but inasmuch as we seldom are under the necessity of trying the specific gravity of solids or gases except in experimental research, and as this text-book is designed merely to direct the practitioner of medicine and pharmacy in the everyday pursuits of his office or shop, I shall confine this essay to the specific gravity of liquids, which is the easiest and most useful branch of the general subject. It has been said at the commencement of this chapter that while extension and gravitation or weight, are each capable of a separate standard of measurement, it is impossible to bring them to a com- mon standard—they are only capable of being compared with each other. To this comparison of the quantity of matter with its exten- sion, we direct our attention under the head of specific gravity. If we take a vial which will hold an ounce of water by weight, we find it will hold about an ounce and a-half of nitric acid, and about three-quarters of an ounce of ether; hence we may say, ap- proximately, that nitric acid is twice as heavy as ether, or that it is half as heavy again as water, while ether is only three-quarters as heavy. We thus compare these two liquids with a common standard, and one which, being universally diffused in a state of tolerable purity, furnishes the most ready means of comparing solid or liquid substances together. The relation which the weight of a substance bears to that of water is, therefore, called its specific gravity. Water being assumed as 1 in the illustration just given, nitric acid would be 1J or 1.5, and ether f or .75. Upon this principle we may ascertain the specific gravity of all liquids by having a bottle, the capacity of which is well and accurately determined, filling it with these various liquids at a certain normal temperature, ascertaining their weight, and by a simple calculation bringing them to this common standard. The specific gravity of substances, when accu- rately ascertained, constitutes one of the most important items in their history. In pharmacy, it is much employed to indicate the strength and purity of medicines, particularly acids, alcohol, the ethers, and essential oils; and a physician is deficient in one of the most important aids to diagnosis who has not at hand the means of taking the specific gravity of urine. The apparatus for ascertaining the specific gravity of liquids are of two kinds: first, specific gravity bottles; and second, hydrome- ters, or loaded tubes which mark the density of liquids by the depth to which they sink in them, according to known and purely artificial standards. The most convenient specific gravity bottles are gradu- ated to hold 1,000 grains, or 100 grains of pure water at 60° F. Those made by Dr. W. H. Pile, of Philadelphia, are accurate and 46 WEIGHTS AND MEASURES, AND SPECIFIC GRAVITY. reliable; they are of two kinds, stoppered and unstoppered ; the former are most approved: they are accompanied by a little counter- Fig. 60. Fig. 62. Fig. 61. Fig. 63. Stoppered specific gravity bottle, tin box, and counterpoise. poise to be placed on the opposite scale plate, which exactly balances the empty bottle, so that the weights which balance it when filled and placed on the scale indicate the weight of its contents. In filling the stoppered thousand grain bottle, it requires to be filled a little above the point in the neck to which the stopper will reach when replaced, so that this shall force out the air and a small portion of the liquid into the capillary tube drilled through it. The whole bottle is then wiped clean and dry, and weighed. The un- stoppered thousand grain bottle is marked by the scratch of a file opposite the point in the neck to which the liquid must reach: this line should be intermediate be- tween the upper and lower edge of the concave surface of the liquid in the neck when filled (see Fig. 57). The hundred grain bottles are of the same description, and used in the same way; they are convenient when only very small quantities can be obtained for testing, but are, of course, not quite so accurate. The particular merit of these bottles is, that the weight of a liquid, as obtained by filling them, expresses its specific gravity. The equation used is this: as the weight of a certain bulk of water is to the weight of the same bulk of the liquid being tested, so is the specific gravity of water, which is unity, to the specific gravity of the liquid; or, as 1,000 is to the weight of the liquid, so is 1 to the specific gravity of the liquid. Having obtained Specific gra- vity bottle, un- stoppered. EXTEMPORANEOUS SPECIFIC GRAVITY BOTTLE. 47 the weight of this quantity of a liquid, we have its specific gravity; attention being required to the decimal mark merely. If^ for in- stance, we fill the 1,000 grain bottle with alcohol, and find it weighs 835 grains, we write its specific gravity .835, placing the decimal mark before the figures, because the weight is less than the unit adopted. If we fill it with chloroform, and find the weight to be 1,490 grains, we state the specific gravity at 1.490, placing the decimal after the first figure; or, if we find it to hold 13,500 grains of mercury, we state the specific gravity 13.5, the decimal being varied for obvious reasons, but no calculation being necessary to ascertain their relation to water. The specific gravity bottle I next proceed to describe does not exhibit the specific gravity of the liquid without a previous calcu- lation, but possesses the advantage of being cheap and extempora- neous, and, if carefully made, is nearly as accurate. Select a smooth and clean bottle, not too thick or clumsy, with a ground glass stopper; after first filing down the side of the stopper a small groove to subserve the purpose of the capillary orifice in the stopper of the 1,000 grain bottle, adjust it to one or more weights which counterpoise it, and put these aside for that use. Now find, by several trials, the exact weight of water it will hold at the proper temperature, and mark this on the bottle, or on a paper in which it is constantly wrapped; this is used in the same way as the 1,000 or 100 grain bottle, except that it is necessary to make a calculation after each weighing, to ascertain the specific gravity of the liquid. Suppose it to be a flss bottle, and to contain, say 242.5 grains of pure water, and the liquids tested to have weighed 256 grains; now, to ascertain its specific gravity, a sum must be made as above stated: as the weight of a certain bulk of water is to the weight of the same bulk of this liquid so is the specific gravity of water to the specific gravity of this liquid:— 242.5 : 256 : : 1 : 1.055, or thus ^^=1.055. I have, though rarely, been able to select f3ss bottles, which, by modifying their size by filing the stopper, would hold exactly 250 grains, or----, so that it was only necessary to divide the ascer- tained weight by 4 to get the specific gravity. This plan of taking the specific gravity is so much more accurate than that by hydrometers, that these extemporaneous or home-made bottles, when well made, and used with good scales, are more to be relied on than the best hydrometers. These rarely mark with precision more than the second decimal, which is reached without difficulty with a bottle, even when the scales do not indicate the fractions of a grain: unstoppered specific gravity bottles are still more readily made. The greatest practical difficulty in accurately adjusting a specific gravity bottle, and in taking the specific gravity of liquids, has rela- tion to the temperature. The proper temperature for liquids to be 48 WEIGHTS AND MEASURES, AND SPECIFIC GRAVITY. measured by the specific gravity bottle is 60° Fahrenheit's scale, which at certain seasons of the year, in our climate, is readily attain- able, but in hot weather the temperature of water will reach 90° or more; the dew-point then rises above 60°, so that if the water be brought to that temperature artificially and put into the bottle, the moisture deposited upon the outside of the bottle while weighing it will sensibly increase its weight. In order to obviate this difficulty, it is more convenient to have tables giving the variations of specific gravity by elevation or depression of temperature. The tables of this description now in use are very unsatisfactory and conflicting, and have led Dr. Pile to attempt an original table, founded upon many hundred trials at all temperatures from 50° to 93°. This he has kindly furnished me for publication. The utility of this table in verifying the accuracy of the specific gravity bottle at any tem- perature will be apparent. It may be remarked that as the glass bottle itself expands and contracts, experiment has shown it will contain about .013 grains more for every degree above 60°, and as much less below it. In weighing liquids above or below that temperature, we do not obtain directly the true specific gravity, but the conjoined result of the expansion or contraction of the water and the glass bottle. If the actual specific gravity is sought, it will be necessary to make the proper corrections both for the liquid on trial and for the glass bottle. This has been done in the following table.1 Table of Apparent Specific Gravity of Water as observed in a Glass Bottle at different temperatures; also its true Specific Gravity. By W. H. Pile, M.D. Sp. Gr. in Sp. Gr. in Temp. Fahr. Glass Bottles. True Sp. Gr. Temp. Fahr. Glass Bottles. True Sp. Gr. 50° 1000.54 1000.67 72 998.94 998.78 51 1000.50 1000.62 73 998.83 998.66 52 1000.46 1000.56 74 998.72 998.53 53 1000.41 1000.50 75 998.60 998.40 54 1000.36 1000.44 76 998.48 998.27 55 1000.30 1000.37 77 998.35 998.13 56 1000.25 1000.30 78 998.22 997.99 57 1000.20 1000.23 79 998.08 997.84 58 1000.14 1000.16 80 997.94 997.68 59 1000.07 1000.08 81 997.79 997.52 60 1000.00 1000.00 82 997.64 997.36 61 999.92 999.91 83 997.49 997.20 62 999.84 999.82 84 997.35 997.04 63 999.72 999.72 85 997.20 996.87 64 999.68 999.63 86 996.94 996.60 65 999.60 999.53 87 996.78 996.43 66 999.51 999.43 88 996.62 996.26 67 999.42 999.33 89 996.46 996.08 68 999.33 999.23 90 996.29 995.90 69 999.24 999.12 91 996.12 995.72 70 999.14 999.01 92 995.96 995.54 71 999.04 998.90 93 995.79 995.36 ' Jor tables showing the variation in specific gravity of alcohol by changes of tem- perature, see Booth's Encyclopedia of Chemistry, Art. Alcoholometry, Tab. III. and IV. HYDROMETERS. 49 Hydrometers.—These are instruments designed to be plunged into liquids to ascertain their comparative density or specific gravity: although not capable of the same accuracy as the specific gravity bottles above described, they have the advantage of great conve- nience, and answer well for approximate results. The application of this instrument depends upon the well ascer- tained law that a body immersed in any liquid sustains a pressure from below upwards equal to the weight of the volume of the liquid displaced by such body, and the use of the hydrometer dates back to the discovery of that principle, a period about three hundred years before the Christian era. Hydrometers are now named with reference to the class of liquids for which they are designed, and to the scale upon which graduated. The kinds most sold in this country are imported; they are called Baum^'s hydrometers or areometers, sometimes saccharometers, when adapted to the measurement of syrups; acidometers, to acids; also elseometers for oils, and urinometers for urine. Cartier's hydrometer, which is somewhat used in France, is only applicable for light liquids; it is a modification of Baurne's Pe'se Esprit, and, having some points in the scale which correspond, is generally confounded with it. Without intending to confuse the student with unnecessary details, I shall give in a few words the method of obtaining the standards on the respective scales, and the mode of converting them into specific gravity and the reverse rule, omitting the tables, which will be found in the Dispensatory and the chemical works. Baum^ had two instruments, one for liquids heavier than water, and one for liquids lighter than water; the former called Pese Acide, or Pese Sirop, and the latter Pese Esprit. The zero for heavy liquids was water, and the point to which the instrument would sink in a solution containing fifteen per cent, of salt was marked 15°. The interval doubled gave 30°, the next 45°, and so on. The zero for lighter liquids, or pese esprit, was obtained by immersing the tube in water containing 10 per cent, of salt in solution, and the point to which it would sink in pure water he made 10°; dividing the stem into like intervals, he obtained 20°, 30°, &c, the intermediate degrees by subdivision. Now it will be at once perceived that the slightest error made in obtaining the first interval by this process becomes increased in every extension, so that with all care and precaution to insure accuracy, scarcely any two instruments could be made to correspond precisely. This mode of graduating hydrometers has long since been super- seded by the equally practicable and more accurate method of obtaining the specific gravity of two known liquids at a certain fixed temperature. These are placed at the extremes of the scale, and the intermediate space is accurately subdivided into the requisite number of degrees. 4 50 ON WEIGHTS AND MEASURES, AND SPECIFIC GRAVITY. The liquids ordinarily used for this purpose are, for liquids heavier than water, sulphuric acid and water; for those lighter than water, ether (highly rectified) and water. The specific gravity of these being of course ascertained before each trial by a standard hydrometer, or by the use of the 1000 grain bottle, but authorities are not agreed precisely in fixing their specific gravities, so that even the most accurate manipulators are liable to error from this fact, unless by having a common definite rule accuracy is ascer- tained. Another difficulty in regard to Baume's hydrometers as usually imported, is, that they are marked by arbitrary numbers, which have no necessary connection with the specific gravity, and they can only be used with facility when access can be had to the tables published in chemical works, in which the degrees of Baume, with their corresponding specific gravity numbers are represented. The following simple formula has been contrived for the purpose of finding the specific gravity of any liquid, the degree of Baume being known, or the reverse. For Liquids heavier than Water. 1. To reduce Baumd to sp. gr. Subtract the degree of Baume' from 145, and divide into 145; the quotient is the specific gravity. 2. To reduce specific gravity into Baume*. Divide the specific gravity into 145, and subtract from 145; the remainder is the degree of Baume*. For Liquids lighter than Water. 1. To reduce Baume to sp. gr. Add the number of the degree to 130, and divide into 140; the quotient is the sp. gr. 2. To reduce sp. gr. to Baume*. Divide the sp. gr. into 140, and subtract 130 from the quotient; the remainder will be the de- gree of Baume. In this manner, the tables at the end of this article were calculated. « The rationale of this formula is more difficult to understand than its application. The modulus or constant number here used, is the proportion which the space of one degree (or the bulk which one degree occupies) bears to the space or bulk of the whole hydrome- ter below the water line. Or, it may be stated to be the proportion, which the weight of water displaced by the hydrometer when floating in water, bears to the weight of water equal in bulk to one degree. For example, suppose the weight of a hydrometer to be 200 grs., it is floated in water and marks the water line (10° B. in pe*se es- prit, or 0° B. in pese acide); now to sink it one degree in the first case, Tio of its weight must be added, or 1.428 grs.; 140 is there- fore the modulus of the scale for light liquids; in the other case, we must withdraw T^? of its weight, or 1.38 grs., to enable the HYDROMETERS. 51 64. hydrometer to rise one degree; 145 is therefore the modulus of the pese acide: from this it will appear that the modulus determines the size of the degrees. That here presented was selected (as most consistent with the practice of manufacturing chemists, and accord- ing with the tables published in the United States Dispensatory) by Henry Pemberton, Practical Chemist, of this city, to whose able article showing the inconsistency of the standards in use, published in the American Journal of Pharmacy, vol. xxiv. p. 1, the reader is referred. The inconvenience of an arbitrary scale, as that of Baume*, has long been felt, and has led to the manufacture of the new style oi hydrometer which is here figured; these have the scale of Baume, with the actual specific gravity cor- responding to it written opposite each other on the tube. This article, as manufactured by Dr. W. H. Pile, before referred to, is unexceptionable. He makes a large size containing two in a series, one for liquids heavier, and the other for liquids lighter than water, each having an extensive range, and also a small size consisting of two for light, and three for heavy liquids. The advantage of the series of five small instruments is, that the scales having a much less range, are capa- ble of exhibiting more accurately slight differences in sp. gr. than in the other case. In the drawing, one of the large instruments is exhibited, considera- bly reduced in size; and as the scales with the two sets of figures could not be represented in a single view of the tube, the printer has appended on either side the figures representing the degree of Baume, and a part of those representing the sp. gr. Besides these hydrometers, Dr. Pile makes others for special applications, and graduated to suit particu- lar objects; one of the most curious of these is the Lactometer, for the measurement of milk, which, as we get it in large cities, is liable to adulteration, and especially to dilution with water. Pure milk has the average sp. gr. 1.032, skim milk 1.037. Of all the practical applications of the art of deter- mining specific gravity, none is more important and 15 ^d™Ttterthfor interesting than its use in ascertaining the qualities water.8 lg of urine. The urinometer is the most delicate of this class of instruments; it is a hydrometer tube with a very small range only, going from 1.000 to 1,060 specific gravity; within these limits, all the variations of urine from its normal standard may be ascertained. So delicate are these determinations, that the varia- tions of temperature, important in all cases, here require special attention; and accordingly many of the urinometers are accom- 52 ON WEIGHTS AND MEASURES, AND SPECIFIC GRAVITY. panied by a little thermometer to be plunged into the urine simul- taneously with the tube; sometimes the thermometer is inclosed in the tube, and at others, as in the apparatus, Fig. 65, accompanies it in a neat box containing also a graduated glass for containing the urine. , , The thousand grain bottle, with proper observance of the ther- mometer, is, however, in this as in all other cases, the surest test of specific gravity. Fig. 65. Fig. 66. Urinometer box containing thermometer, graduated glass vessel, &o. Urinometer in use. Fig. 66 represents the urinometer removed from the box and floated in the vessel accompanying it (in which the graduation marks are not seen). The graduation of the urinometer is such, that each degree represents 1-1000, thus giving the actual specific gravity by simply adding the number of degrees on the scale cor- responding with the surface of the liquid, to 1000. Thus, suppos- ing the number cut by the surface of the fluid to be 30, as shown in the figure, the specific gravity would then be 1.030. The ave- rage density of healthy urine is about from 10° to 25° of this scale, at 60° F., or sp. gr. 1.010 to 1.025. That of diabetic urine ranges from 30° to 60°, or sp. gr. 1.030 to 1.060. Figs. 67 and 68 represent a hydrometer with the glass jar adapted to containing the liquid to be tested; unless this vessel has considerable depth, the hydrometer is liable to touch the bottom, which would prevent its measuring. These vessels are sold by the principal dealers in chemical apparatus. Sometimes hydrometers for liquids heavier than water are manu- factured of small size, for the special purpose of measuring the strength of syrups. Fig. 69 represents one of these, which is gra- HYDROMETERS. duated to Baum^'s scale. It floats at 30° in a solution of the gr. 1.26, the density of saturated simple syrup when boiling. Fig. 67. Fig. 68. Hydrometer, with vessel for floating it. Saccharometer. baume's degrees, WITH THEIR CORRESPONDING SPECIFIC GRATITT. Table for Liquids lighter than Water. Temp. 60° Fahr. Degrees of Specific Degrees of Specific Degrees of Specific Hydrom. Gravity. Hydrom. Gravity. Hydrom. Gravity. 10 1.000 31 0.870 51 0.773 11 0.993 32 0.864 52 0.769 12 0.986 33 0.859 53 0.765 13 0.979 34 0.854 54 0.761 14 0.972 35 0.848 55 0.757 15 0.966 36 0.843 56 0.753 16 0.959 37 0.838 57 0.749 17 0.952 38 0.833 58 0.745 18 0.946 39 0.828 59 0.741 19 0.940 40 0.824 60 0.737 20 0.933 41 0.819 61 0.733 21 0.927 42 0.813 62 0.729 22 0.921 43 0.809 63 0.725 23 0.915 44 0.805 64 0.722 24 0.909 45 0.800 65 0.718 25 0.903 46 0.795 66 0.714 26 0.898 47 0.791 67 0.711 27 0.892 48 0.787 68 0.707 28 0.886 49 0.782 69 0.704 29 0.881 50 0.778 70 0.700 30 0.875 54 ON THE PHARMACOPC3IA. Table for Liquids heavier than Water. Temp. 60° Fahr.1 Degrees of Specific Degrees of Specific Degrees of Specific Hydrom. Gravity. Hydrom. Gravity. Hydrom. Gravity. 1 1.007 26 1.218 51 1.543 2 1.014 27 1.229 52 1.559 3 1.021 28 1.239 53 1.576 4 1.028 29 1.250 54 1.593 5 1.036 30 1.261 55 1.611 6 1.043 31 1.272 56 1.629 7 1.051 32 1.283 57 1.648 8 1.058 33 1.295 58 1.667 9 1.066 34 1.306 59 1.686 10 1.074 35 1.318 60 1.706 11 1.082 36 1.330 61 1.726 12 1.090 37 1.343 62 1.747 13 1.098 38 1.355 63 1.768 14 1.107 39 1.368 64 1.790 15 1.115 40 1.381 65 1.813 16 1.124 41 1.394 66 1.835 17 1.133 42 1.408 67 1.859 18 1.142 43 1.422 68 1.883 19 1.151 44 1.436 69 1.908 20 1.160 45 1.450 70 1.933 21 1.169 46 1.465 71 1.959 22 1.179 47 1.480 72 1.986 23 1.188 48 1.495 73 2.014 24 1.198 49 1.510 74 2.042 25 1.208 50 1.526 CHAPTEE III. ON THE PHARMACOPCEIA. The want of a national standard for the preparation of medicine had been felt for some time by practitioners of medicine and phar- macy, when, in 1818, a practicable plan for originating such a work was proposed at the suggestion of Dr. Lyman Spalding, by the New York State Medical Society. This was so generally acceptable to physicians, that in accordance with it, on the first day of the year 1820, a convention of medical delegates met in the city of Wash- ington, over which Dr. Samuel L. Mitchell, of New York, presided, and Dr. Thomas T. Hewson, of Philadelphia, acted as secretary, in which the essays prepared by the district conventions previously held in the Eastern and Middle States were duly considered, and the first edition of the Pharmacopoeia of the United States was adopted, its publication being intrusted to a committee, who issued ' These tables accompany Dr. Pile's hydrometers on the label. ON THE PHARMACOPCEIA. 55 it before the close of the same year. This work, from the respect- able authority which issued it, and from its general adaptation to the wants of physicians and apothecaries, was calculated to super- sede the various and conflicting standards previously in use, al- though its general adoption was not rapidly brought about. With a wise forethought to correct the imperfections of their work, and to adapt it to the future progress of pharmaceutical knowledge, the convention of 1820 provided for the choice of dele- gates to meet in convention after the lapse of ten years for revising the Pharmacopoeia. The convention of 1830 elected Dr. Lewis Condict, of New Jersey, its president, and, after discussing the pro- posals submitted to them, referred the work of revision to a com- mittee, of which the late Dr. Thomas T. Hewson was chairman, which met in Philadelphia, and by general correspondence and comparison of views with those residing in other localities, were enabled to add much to the value of the work. No small share of the labor of this committee was borne by Drs. Wood and Bache, who, by the publication, in 1831, of the U. S. Dispensatory, a work of great utility, in which the pharmacopoeia was fully explained, commented on, and compared with similar foreign works, aided greatly in giving it the character it has ever since enjoyed, of a national standard for the preparation of medicine. The decennial revisions, in 1840 and 1850, were accomplished under similar auspices. The conventions which assembled at the capital in those years were presided over by Drs. Lewis Condict and George B. Wood, respectively, and the committees charged with carrying out the views of the body met in Philadelphia. In the three decennial revisions, the Colleges of Pharmacy of Philadelphia and New York have borne an active, though not a conspicuous part; only in the last convention were they officially represented. There can be little doubt that the excellence of most of the formulas of the Pharmacopoeia is due in great measure to the valuable practical suggestions of the committee of apothecaries appointed by those useful organizations. Previous to the conven- tions of 1840 and 1850, large and efficient committees of practical pharmaceutists subjected all the proposed changes to the most rigid experimental scrutiny before submitting them to the convention, and through Professor Procter, their representative in the commit- tee of revision and publication, their influence was made available in the final arrangement and completion of the work. Upon the object and scope of the Pharmacopoeia little need be said; its influence in producing uniformity in nomenclature, and in the strength and efficiency of medicinal preparations, has been widely and increasingly felt, although it is to be regretted that, owing to the comparatively high price of the work and the smallness of the edition issued, it is far less in the hands of physicians and apothe- caries than its importance demands. In this connection it may be proper to speak of the comparative utility of the Pharmacopoeia and 56 ON THE PHARMACOPCEIA. Dispensatory, especially as so many students of medicine and phar- macy confound the two works with each other. Every physician who practices pharmacy, as most country practitioners do, and every apothecary, should possess a copy of each of these works. Ine Pharmacopoeia for use as a guide book in making preparations and the Dispensatory for reference as an encyclopedia of materia medica, therapeutics, and pharmacy. While the Dispensatory is justly regarded as indispensable, and has certainly contributed more than any other work to the general diffusion of pharmaceutical knowledge, those very qualities which give it its true value unfit it to substitute the Pharmacopoeia as a recipe-book. The conciseness and brevity of the latter work, the clear and conspicuous type, and the absence of unnecessary detail, adapt it especially to the purpose named, that of indicating the in- gredients, the proportions and the mode of preparation of the officinal preparations. The liability to mistakes is greatly lessened by the clearness and accuracy of a recipe, which should always be open before the operator, and should be continually consulted in the course of his manipulations. It will be in place to explain, in this connection, the use of the term officinal in this work. While by some, this word is meant to apply to all permanent preparations; by others, it has an application to those only which are generally known and recognized by physicians and pharmaceutists in the particular locality referred to and spoken of in the Dispensatory, or in foreign Pharmacopoeias. I have preferred to follow those who restrict the use of the term to those drugs and preparations men- tioned in the U. S. Pharmacopoeia ; and I have carefully distinguished these throughout the work, from such as are either new remedies, since the Pharmacopoeia was last revised, or were omitted from the work from any other cause. It appears to me that this is the only limit of the term officinal which renders it definite and precise, and with this meaning it certainly is most useful in a work like the present. To lay before the student the whole plan of the Pharmacopoeia, and especially the principles which have regulated its nomencla- ture, the following extract from the preface to the last edition is inserted here:— " The contents of the work are arranged in the two divisions of Materia Medica and Preparations; the former enumerating and de- fining medicines as they are derived from nature, or furnished by the manufacturer, the latter containing formulas, or rules, by which they are prepared for use. The propriety of such a division is too obvious to require comment. It is the basis of arrangement in most Pharmacopoeias. " The subdivision of the Materia Medica into a primary and se- condary list, is a peculiarity of our national standard. It has the advantage of permitting a discrimination between medicines of acknowledged value, and others of less estimation, which, however, ARRANGEMENT AND NOMENCLATURE. 57 may still have claims to notice. Many substances, at one time much employed, are passing out of use, without having been wholly discarded; while others are brought to the notice of the profession, and are undergoing trial, without having been generally adopted. It is very convenient to have a section into which such doubtful medicines may be thrown, to await the decision of experience for or against them. Without being entirely lost sight of, they are thus kept in a subordinate position, which may prevent misappre- hension as to their real or estimated value. It is necessary to be understood, that the primary list contains not only all substances of recognized efficacy, but others of little or no apparent import- ance as medicines, which, however, are employed in some one or more of the ' preparations,' and are therefore essential. Without this explanation, the propriety of introducing such bodies as Ani- mal Charcoal, Bone, Cochineal, Marble, and Bed Saunders, into the primary list might be disputed. " Both in the Materia Medica and the Preparations, the alphabeti- cal arrangement has been adopted. In a work intended not for regular perusal but for occasional reference, it has the great merit of convenience. It has, moreover, the advantage that, making no claim to scientific classification, it is not liable to the charge of failure, so often and so justly urged against more ambitious systems. In relation to the preparations, it will be noticed that they are ar- ranged in groups, the titles of which are placed in the alphabetical order. The pharmaceutical processes naturally throw themselves into such groups, which could not be divided and otherwise distri- buted without great inconvenience. Their affinity consists either in closely analogous modes of treatment, as in the decoctions, ex- tracts, infusions, &c.; in having some common base, as in .the pre- parations of the different metals; or in a certain resemblance of character, as in the acids and ethers. It happens, fortunately, that the several individuals in these groups are so named, that they fall into the general alphabetical order, with but very few and insigni- ficant exceptions. It is proper to observe that the order of succes- sion is based on the Latin names throughout the work. " The Pharmacopoeia was originally published both in the Latin and English languages. This was, at the time, an innovation upon general usage ; as codes of this kind had been almost always issued by the dignified bodies from which they emanated, exclusively in the Latin, which was considered as the language of science. In the revision of 1840, the Latin was dropped; as it did not offer advantages equivalent to the trouble of adapting a dead language to facts and processes for which it had no terms, and to the double cost of the work which it occasioned. As stated in the Historical Introduction, the recent National Convention, was unanimous in their decision in favor of the English exclusively. The Latin names, however, of the medicines and preparations, have been re- tained, as they are still generally, and often very conveniently, used 58 ON THE PHARMACOPCEIA. in prescription; and it is desirable that medicines should have de- signations by which they may be recognized in all civilized coun- tries. " The system of nomenclature of the Pharmacopoeia of the United States is one of its chief merits. Adopted at a period when it was without example in other works of the kind, and improved with each successive revision, it now prevails to a considerable extent in all the Pharmaceutical codes recognized where our vernacular tongue is spoken. Its aim is to be simple, expressive, distinctive, and con- venient. In relation to medicines of vegetable origin, it adopts for those which have been long and well known, the names by which they have at all times been recognized, and which have withstood, and will no doubt continue to withstand all the mutations of science. In this category are such titles as Ammoniacum, Camphora, Galla, Opium, Senna, &c. For medicines of more recent origin, which had received no distinctive officinal designation, it takes either the generic or specific title of the plant or animal from which the medi- cine is derived. Thus, we have the generic names Anthemis from Anthemis nobilis, Chimaphila from Chimaphila umbellata, Eupato- rium from Eupatorium perfoliatum, Gillenia from Gillenia trifoliata, Lobelia from Lobelia inflata, &c.; and the specific names, Senega from Polygala Senega, Serpentaria from Aristolochia Serpentaria, Taraxa- cum from Leontodon Taraxacum, &c. A very large proportion of the names have been formed in this way; and, as the generic or specific title of the plant had its origin, in many instances, in the vernacular name, the original designation is thus fixed and per- petuated. When it happens that two different medicines are ob- tained from different species of the same genus, it becomes neces- sary to adopt either for both, the whole botanical title of the plants, or for one of them the generic or specific name, and for the other the whole name. Thus, we have Cassia Fistula and Cassia Marxian- dica, Quercus alba and Quercus tinctoria, as titles both for the plants and their medicinal products; and, in the case of the different species of Gentiana, the generic name Gentiana for the product of G. lutea, and the whole name, Gentiana Catesbcei, for that of the species so designated in scientific arrangements. When different parts of the same plant are recognized as distinct medicines, they are designated by attaching to the generic or specific title, the name of the part employed. Thus are formed the names Colchici Badix and Cohhici Semen from Colchicum autumnale, and Stramonii Folia, Stramonii Badix, and Stramonii Semen from Datura Stramonium. When these names become established in pharmacy, it does not follow that they are to be changed with the changing scientific titles. On the con- trary, it is generally best to retain them, unless, by doing so, injurious confusion may be occasioned. Thus we have Prunus Virginiana as the name of wild-cherry bark, though the plant from which it is derived is now usually designated by botanists as Cerasus serotina. It will be noticed that the Latin names are generally used in the NOMENCLATURE. 59 singular number, even though the idea of plurality may be essen- tially connected with the medicine. Thus, Cantharis, Caryophyllus, Ficus, Galla, Limon, &c, are used instead of the plural of these terms respectively; and, in reference to the names derived from the part of the plant employed, the same plan is mostly followed, as in the case of Stramonii Semen, Colchici Semen, &c. In this the example of the Koman medical writers, particularly of Celsus, has been followed. The leaves, however, are expressed in the plural, as Stramonii Folia, &c, which is also in accordance with the practice of the same classical author. "In the use of English names, it is not deemed necessary that they should be literal translations of the Latin terms; but that title is preferred which custom and the genius of the language seem to sanction. Thus, the English name corresponding to Linum is not flax, but Flaxseed; and, on the same principle, Foeniculum is called Fennel-seed; Ulmus, Slippery Elm Bark; Glycyrrhiza, Liquorice Boot, &c. Nor are the English names always in the same number as the Latin. We may correctly say, Caryophyllus, Galla, Prunum, and Bosa; but the genius of our language requires that we should trans- late these terms Cloves, Galls, Prunes, and Boses. " The plan of nomenclature in relation to medicines of mineral origin is to give the proper scientific name, when convenience, or some higher principle does not call for a deviation from that rule. Hence, the names of most mineral medicines are in strict accordance with existing scientific usage. But, in some instances, short and old established names are preferred to the scientific, especially when these happen to be somewhat unwieldy. Thus, Alumen, Calamina, and Creta have been preferred to the chemical names Aluminx et Potassae Sulphas, Zinci Carbonas Impurus, and Calcis CarbonasMollis. In other instances, the chemical designation is more or less unset- tled, or the composition of the substance has not been decisively determined. In such cases, either an old name is retained, as Acidum Muriaticum instead of either Acidum Hydrochloricum or Acidum Chhrohydricum; or some name is preferred generally expressive of the composition without aiming at chemical accuracy, as Calx Chlo- rinata, taken from the London Pharmacopoeia, and Ferrum Ammo- niatum. In other cases, it is considered safest to designate very active medicines, which, if their strict chemical titles were used, might be dangerously confounded, by names which, though upon the chemical basis, have some epithet attached expressive of their distinctive character, as mild chloride of mercury and corrosive chloride of mercury, instead of protochloride of mercury and bichloride of mer- cury. Sometimes, for convenience sake, when no risk of confusion can possibly arise, names are adopted sufficiently expressive of the nature of the substance, though not precisely so; as sulphate of iron instead of sulphate of protoxide of iron, hydrated oxide of iron instead of hydrated sesquioxide of iron, &c. If any part of the nomenclature of mineral bodies should seem at first sight somewhat incongruous, 60 ON THE PHARMACOPCEIA. it will be found to have been adopted in accordance with some one of the principles here stated, or in some other way to have the ad- vantage of convenience or utility. Not a single name has been given or retained without careful consideration. "When the officinal names of particular medicines may be sup- posed not to have yet become universally known, and the old names are still extensively used, the latter are given as synonymes in a subordinate type and position; and those officinal titles which have been superseded by others adopted at the present revision, are in- serted beneath, with a reference to the Pharmacopoeia of 1840. "In the Materia Medica, the Latin and English officinal names are first given, and immediately afterwards, in a distinct paragraph, a definition fixing the precise character of the substance referred to; designating, for example, the plant or animal from which it is de- rived, and the part employed, if it be of vegetable or animal origin; and defining it by the precise chemical name, if mineral. When the officinal name sufficiently explains itself, as in the case of Mag- nesise Sulphas, Potassx Nitras, and Sodse Carbonas, no definition is given. To most of the mineral substances brief notes are appended, containing, in short and precise terms, an enumeration of those pro- perties by which their identity can be determined, and of the tests by which their freedom from adulterations or accidental impurities may be aseertained. The same plan has been extended to many of the chemicals among the preparations. In relation to most of the medicines of organic origin, it has not been thought advisable to offer similar tests of genuineness and purity; as the means of judg- ing are much less precise, and could not be readily expressed in a few brief rules. " Among the Preparations will be noticed several substances which are now seldom made by the apothecary, being obtained almost exclusively from the manufacturing chemist. They have been retained in their present position, because, in our widely- extended country, circumstances may not unfrequently render it desirable that the apothecary should be able to prepare them in the absence of a due supply; and, though the processes might not have been introduced if now claiming admission for the first time, yet, having a place already in the Pharmacopoeia, it has not been deemed advisable to omit them, and transfer their products to the Materia Medica. The circumstance that these substances are placed among the preparations does not preclude their purchase from the manufacturer when they can be procured of the proper quality. " Another feature of the second part of the Pharmacopoeia which requires a brief notice, is the introduction of double processes for many of the preparations, the apothecary having the choice between them. This might seem objectionable, as leading possibly to differ- ence in the preparations; but care has been taken to guard against this disadvantage, the processes being such as, if properly executed, must yield preparations either identical in character, or sufficiently THE preparations. 61 alike for all practical purposes. It is only in cases to which the mode of filtration denominated displacement is adapted, that this duplication has been introduced; as in the preparation of some of the Yinegars, Extracts, Infusions, and Tinctures. Displacement affords so many advantages, both in an economical point of view, and in the character of the resulting preparations, and has, besides, been practically adopted to such an extent, that it could not, with propriety, be excluded from a Pharmacopoeia which claims to be on a level with the improvements of the times. Yet the process requires considerable skill and experience for its proper manage- ment, and, if conducted without due regard to the requisite cau- tions, will necessarily lead to imperfect and unequal results. Thus, if the substance to be acted upon be not in a suitable state of com- minution, or be not sufficiently compacted in the instrument, the liquid will be apt to pass through it unequally and in distinct channels, so as not to come into proper contact with all parts of it, and therefore not completely to exhaust its soluble principles; while, on the other hand, if it be too fine and too close, the perco- lation may be prevented, or so much retarded as to deprive the process of its advantages. Now, to many of those who will adopt the Pharmacopoeia as their guide in the preparation of medicines, the method of displacement is probably not yet familiar. If, there- fore, it were exclusively adopted in the officinal processes to which it is applicable, there would be danger that the resulting prepara- tion would, in some instances, be very different from the one con- templated. By leaving to the operator the choice between the former simple methods and the new, this danger is in a great mea- sure avoided; and it is strongly recommended to those who have not made themselves practically familiar with the various sources of error in the method of displacement, to postpone its application, whenever an alternative is given in this work, until they shall have acquired the requisite skill. " Finally, to one familiar with the British Pharmacopoeias, it will be obvious that, in the preparation of our own, many of the pro- cesses have been taken from them with little alteration. This has been done advisedly. It is of the highest importance that medi- cines having the same names should have the same composition; and, as British works on medicine are much read in this country, it would lead to never-ending confusion if the substances they refer to by name should differ materially from those known by similar names with us. It has, therefore, been a general aim to bring our pharmacy into as near a correspondence as possible with that of Great Britain; but in all cases in which greater purity or efficiency in the medicine, or greater convenience and economy in the pro- cess, or any peculiarity in the relation of the preparation to our own circumstances and wants, called for deviation from the British standards, modified or wholly original processes have been adopted." PART II. GALENICAL PHARMACY. CHAPTER I. ON THE COLLECTION AND DESICCATION OF PLANTS. But little space need be occupied by this subject, although the proper time for collecting, and the right mode of drying and pre- serving the vegetable products used in medicine, are occasionally of importance to the pharmaceutist and physician. Roots should be gathered when richest in the peculiar juices of the plant: in annuals, this generally occurs immediately before the time of flowering; in biennials, or perennials, late in the fall, or very early in the spring, before the plant has commenced to grow. Fleshy, or succulent roots, require to be cut previous to drying, so as to expose a large surface to the air; the mode in which they are sliced, whether longitudinally or transversely, is of some inte- rest in judging of certain foreign drugs, but is little regarded by herbalists in preparing the indigenous roots for market. In all cases, it is important that the root, or other part of the plant, should be thoroughly dried. In the case of taraxacum, pars- ley, &c, it is necessary to apply artificial heat, in order to destroy the eggs deposited by insects, which, through neglect of this pre- caution, may occasion the speedy deterioration of the root by worms. The smaller and more fibrous roots, and especially those contain- ing essential oils, should be less thoroughly dried, and, as soon as their condition will admit of it, should be carefully put away into tight drawers, bottles, or tin cans. Barks are best gathered in the spring or autumn; they should be generally deprived of their epidermis, and dried by a moderate heat, their porous texture and comparative tenuity facilitating, very much, the process. Wild-cherry bark is often deficient in quality, from being gathered at the wrong season, and from the wrong part of the plant. The bark should be taken from the root in the 64 ON THE COLLECTION AND DESICCATION OF PLANTS. eighth month—August. When of fine quality, it has a strong and characteristic odor. . leaves, Aerfo, and powers, require considerable care in their collec- tion and drying, to obtain them in perfection. Leaves should be gathered when fully developed, and before they have commenced to wither and fall; those of biennial plants during the second season. Herbs, in which term are included whole plants, and such parts of the same plant as are collected and sold together, should be gathered when in flower. Plants which have thick and branching stems, should be deprived of these before being put up for sale. Flowers may be gathered as soon as perfectly developed. A clear, dry morning, after the dew is dissipated, is to be preferred in either of these cases. They are dried in the shade, without arti- ficial heat; the floor of a garret, through which is a draft of dry air, is well adapted to this purpose. Seeds, which are the least perishable of vegetable productions, should be perfectly ripe when collected; they require very little drying. The " United Brethren," called Shakers, at their settlement in New Lebanon, New York, have very extensive and convenient arrange- ments for drying these vegetable materials. A series of shelves of wire network is disposed in layers at suitable distances from each other, in large and well ventilated apartments; upon these the herb is carefully placed, and allowed to remain subject to the desiccating action of the air, circulating below as well as above it, until com- pletely dried. It is then removed to a capacious bin, of which many are arranged along the sides of the room, and preserved until nearly ready for pressing—an operation which, in common with some other cultivators, the Shakers practice upon every article of the vegetable Materia Medica which they cultivate or vend. This, while it has its advantages, is liable to some objections. It has been said that, owing to the moist condition to which the plants require to be brought before pressing, the packages are liable to become mouldy in the middle. I have never met with an instance of this kind, however, and have no doubt but that the ex- cellent reputation the Shaker herbs have attained is well founded. Another objection to these herbs, of a very different character, is, that they are not adapted to the examination of the physical cha- racteristics of the plants; a pharmaceutical student, placed in an establishment where they are sold to the exclusion of the dried plants in bulk, enjoys no opportunity of familiarizing himself with this extensive class of medicines, at least so far as their physical and botanical characters go: to this may be added the difficulty in noticing any deficiency in quality, any intentional or accidental adulteration, or error in labelling the articles. The business of col- lecting and drying medicinal plants is still pursued in the vicinity of our large cities by herbalists, who realize a living from it. These have it in their power, by taking students of Medicine and Phar- macy with them on their excursions into the woods and fields, to POWDERING DRUGS AND POWDERS. 65 extend a knowledge of medical plants among a class to whom it cannot fail to be in the highest degree useful and interesting. There are few pursuits better calculated to relieve the monotony of a student's life, or to impart healthfulness and variety to the sedentary occupations of the apothecary, than a systematic out-door pursuit of the useful and ennobling science of botany; and the apothecary or physician, by giving it a practical application to his business, may, in many instances, combine pecuniary with mental and physical advantage. For the benefit of students residing or ^sojourning in Philadelphia, a catalogue is inserted in the appendix, v containing the name, time of flowering, and precise habitat of all the wild plants growing within a few miles of the city. The cultivation of medicinal plants in this country is mainly con- fined to the beautiful valley in Columbia County, N. Y., already referred to, where it is pursued by the Shakers, and by Tilden. This district seems especially adapted to the purpose, and, like the celebrated "Physic Gardens" of Mitcham, in England, furnishes a great variety of medicinal plants, and in large quantity. For an interesting account of the "Physic Gardens of Mitcham," see American Journal of Pharmacy, vol. xxiii. p. 25; and for some details in regard to the N. Lebanon Gardens, see the same Journal, vol. xxiii. p. 386. The question of how far the cultivation of plants diminishes or modifies their medicinal activity, is at present an undecided point; it is, however, universally admitted, that climate and soil exercise an important influence on their virtues. The opinion seems to be also generally adopted that most plants are more fully developed in the country in which they are indige- nous, than in any to which they may be transplanted; but that there are very many exceptions to this rule, if it be a general rule, must be quite apparent. In the present state of our knowledge upon this subject, we can- not go further than to say that of plants indigenous to the temperate zones, some flourish equally on either continent, while others, owing to some want of congeniality in climate and soil, will only develop their peculiar properties fully in the localities to which they are indigenous. At the gardens in New Lebanon, the narcotic herbs indigenous to Europe are cultivated with apparent success, and the extracts prepared from them are among the best manufactured in the world. On the Powdering of Drugs and on Powders. According to the plan adopted in this work, the first class of preparations to be treated of is that of powders. The preparation of the material for powdering, consists of gar- 66 ON THE COLLECTION AND DESICCATION OF PLANTS. bling or sorting, and drying it. The former process pertains to the druggist, and the latter to the drug grinder. The object of garbling is to separate any impurities or adultera- tions, and any decayed or deteriorated portions of the drug. In nearly all foreign drugs imported into this country, especially those of vegetable origin, there are great variations in quality, and even in the°same lot there are frequently very good and quite worthless specimens. As an illustration of this, Chinese rhubarb may be in- stanced: the roots, when broken, are found to vary exceedingly m quality, even in the same case; some are heavy and compact in their structure, breaking with a very uneven fracture, presenting a red and yellow marbled appearance, giving a gritty impression between the teeth, and the peculiar bitter, astringent taste, charac- teristic of the drug, while other roots are light, fibrous, and spongy in their internal structure, and almost destitute of the peculiar color and taste; some are worm eaten, others, which have the requisite specific gravity and the external appearances indicating a good article, are dark colored within and quite inferior. The cus- tom of some, when about to send a lot of rhubarb to the drug-mill to be ground, is, either to send it in the mixed condition above de- scribed, in which it is imported, or to select from it the choicest pieces for separate sale, and for a sample, and send all the inferior roots, and perhaps only a small portion of the best to be powdered. A druggist who exhibits the best roots, selected in this way, as a sample of the kind powdered, cannot be acquitted of a gross and unpardonable fraud upon his customers. If he sends the whole case, containing good, bad, and indifferent, as originally imported, he may at least claim that, though he has not improved the quality of the medicine in reducing it to powder, he has not rendered it worse. But, with a view to furnishing a good and reliable medi- cinal agent, without regard to price, he would garble his rhubarb, by cracking each root, rejecting the decayed and otherwise defective pieces, and preserving in the form of powder only that which is of value. This is done by some druggists and pharmaceutists, who are more careful of their reputation for the quality of their drugs than for cheapness. In a subsequent part of this work, I shall have occasion to refer to the variable quality of powdered gum Arabic; this is mainly owing to the neglect of garbling, or to the use of the rejected por- tion after garbling, for reduction to powder. It is desirable to have whole gum Arabic free from dusty and gritty particles for sale. When in this condition, it is more elegant and convenient for chew- ing, and for solution in making the nutritive mucilaginous drinks, so much used by invalids, and it commands a better price. It is therefore customary to sift gum, as at first taken from the case, and the inferior kinds of powder are made from these siftings. The best powdered gum Arabic is fully worth a handsome advance THE DRYING AND POWDERING OF DRUGS. 67 on the price of the whole gum, as any one may see, who will esti- mate the cost of powdering, waste, delays, &c. The chief reason for the deficiency in the quality of medicinal powders, is found in the reluctance manifested by the public, and retail apothecaries and physicians, to pay a liberal price for them. It will be found, on examination, that powders are not unfrequently sold at a less price than the whole drug, especially when the article is costly, and of variable quality in commerce. This is true, espe- cially of rhubarb, jalap, gum Arabic, and the spices, which, as a general thing, cannot be recommended in powder with the same confidence as in the unpowdered condition, or in the form of one of the Galenical preparations, prepared from the whole or contused drug. In garbling digitalis, hyoscyamus, and some other leaves, whether for powdering, or for use in making tinctures, as before stated, care should be taken to remove the midribs and petioles, which are comparatively inactive. _ Drying.—When a drug is sent to be ground in its ordinary con- dition, it generally requires drying, previously to being submitted to the action of the mill. Moist and tenacious substances, such as the gum resins, opium, aloes, squill, and jalap, rhubarb, colocynth, and all fresh roots and herbs, require this treatment to a certain extent, and the drug-mills are supplied with apartments, or steam baths, adapted to it. These are heated, by steam-pipes, to a temperature of about 120° F., and the drug is allowed to remain in them as long as is deemed neces- sary to deprive it entirely of water. Some drugs are injured by this process; the volatile ingredient, so often the active principle, suffers great loss, and the resulting powder is comparatively inefficient. Myrrh and assafcetida furn^h good illustrations of this. On the other hand, substances possessed of no active volatile in- gredient, but containing a large amount of water, as, for instance, opium, are enhanced in value by drying and powdering. Some spe- cimens of opium diminish in drying and powdering, to the extent of 20 per cent., which, if the process is properly conducted, increases the efficiency and value of the drug in that proportion. Experiments under my own supervision show about an average loss of 9 per cent., in reducing tolerably hard opium to the pulverulent condition. It is on this account, and from the fact that the powder, when unadul- terated, is more nearly uniform in its composition than the drug in mass, that the U. S. Pharmacopoeia directs the use of powdered opium in making all the Galenical preparations of that drug. Elecampane root is said to lose seven-eighths of its weight in dry- ing; stramonium leaves, nine-tenths; hyoscyamus and belladonna leaves, nearly as much. If these plants lose nothing but moisture in the process, and retain all their active medicinal properties un- 68 ON THE COLLECTION AND DESICCATION OF PL impaired, it is obvious that they are seven or eight times stronger when in powder, or in a dry condition than when recent. A difficulty, liable to occur in powdering drugs at the mills, is due to the accidental admixture of foreign substances with them. The extensive grinding surface employed becomes so completely covered with the fine powder, that it is cleaned with great difficulty; so that the next substance introduced becomes contaminated with it, sometimes to its great disadvantage. I have repeatedly observed this in the cases of certain articles of delicate flavor, as orris root and vanilla. , . . . , ~ The plan of dusting powders, which insures their extreme fine- ness, and the separation of any earthy impurity, has greatly gained in favor of recent time. The apparatus now used is not figured m anv of the books, as far as I have observed; it is constructed so that the powdered drug, when it has passed between the grinding sur- faces, is thrown by a draught, artificially created below, to a height of about five feet, and is then allowed to settle upon the adjacent parts, from which, after it has collected in sufficient quantity, it is removed. It will be appropriate, in this place, to give some observations upon powdering, as practised, on a small scale, in the shop and laboratory. This is accomplished by means of mortars, suited to the different processes of contusion and trituration, and by mills. Mortars for contusion are usually made of iron, brass, or bell- metal, of the shape shown in Fig. 70. Contusion is employed for Fig. 70. Mortar and pestle for contusion. powdering and bruising ligneous substances generally, being adapted to breaking apart their fibres, and, by the violent attrition of the THE PROCESS OF POWDERING DRUGS. 69 coarser particles with each other, reducing the whole to a more or less fine powder. Care must be taken to avoid treating any corrosive substance in the iron mortar, thus allowing it to become rusty; or, if this should occur, it should be carefully washed out with diluted muriatic acid, and scoured with clean sand, to fit it for use. Any adhering mate- rial should be cleaned away immediately after the mortar is out of use, as it is then more easily removed than if allowed to remain and harden. The mortar is then always ready for use. In powdering substances by contusion, a small quantity should be introduced into the mortar at one time; if the mortar is small, sufficient to cover the bottom for about the depth of an inch; the flattened extremity of the pestle is then to be brought into direct and violent contact with it, each successive stroke being aimed at the same spot in the centre of the circle formed by the sides and bottom of the mortar. When a part of the contents under treat- ment assumes the condition of a fine powder, which is exhibited by the air becoming charged with the dust, it is well to sift it, and thus separate the fine from the coarser particles, these last being returned to the mortar, and further contused until a second sifting becomes necessary, and so on till it is finished. A small portion of the drug is usually left in powdering, which it seems impossible to reduce sufficiently; this is part of the ligneous portion, which is frequently inert; the drug-grinder who obtains a considerable quantity of this gruff, as it is called, usually retains it for admix- ture with the next lot of the same drug he is called upon to grind, in this way reducing somewhat the loss upon it: he is usually allowed a small percentage for this necessary deficiency in the powdered product. The operation of sifting may be varied according to the degree of fineness required in the powder. To procure the finest impal- pable powder, the sieve should be gently agitated, the powder being laid lightly upon it, and the operation being suspended as soon as it has ceased to pass through readily; the plan of rubbing the powder over the sieve with the hand, thus using more or less pres- sure to force it through the meshes, may be pursued when the fine- ness of the powder is not so much desired as the rapidity of the process. The mortar and pestle adapted for trituration are shown in Figs. 71 and 72. Such a mortar requires to be more carefully handled than one for contusion. It is adapted to the reduction of saline substances and chemicals generally to powder, by the friction of their particles with each other, between the hard and rough sur- faces of the mortar and pestle. The ware being brittle, should not be subjected to blows with the pestle; it should be carefully wiped out and laid away, after using, so as to be dry and clean whenever needed. The mode of manipulating with the wedgewood mortar and pes- 70 ON THE COLLECTION AND DESICCATION OF PLANTS. tie, after placing in it the material to be ground to powder, is to grasp the pestle firmly with the right hand, holding the mortar Fig. 71. FiS- 72- Wedgewood mortar and pestle. with the left if necessary, and gradually to traverse the mortar with the pestle from the centre outwards, reaching the circumference gradually, by a series of rotary motions; and then, by reversing the direction of these motions, to bring the pestle again to the centre; in this way all parts are brought fully and equally under the action of the pestle. When any portion of the contents of the mortar becomes caked, and ceases to fall towards the centre, when agitated, which often happens when the powder becomes very fine, a spatula should be occasionally run around the sides and bottom, to loosen and mix together the different portions. A loose and careless way of triturating substances, is productive of no saving of labor; the conditions most favorable to pulveriza- tion by trituration are a constant, uniform, and hard grinding mo- tion communicated to the pestle, the layer of powder intervening between it and the mortar being thin, and the mortar so shaped as to present all parts of it equally to the action of the pestle. Many substances can neither be reduced to powder by the pro- cess of contusion nor by that of trituration; of these, nutmeg may be instanced as one which is most conveniently grated, or scraped off with the blade of a knife; orange-peel, slippery elm, mezereon bark, liquorice root, are best comminuted by cutting them with a pair of shears, or a knife fastened on a lever, such as tobacconists use for cutting tobacco into plugs. The mode of cutting a piece of THE PROCESS OF POWDERING DRUGS. 71 liquorice root into convenient pieces for chewing, is shown in the drawing. Fig. 73. Tobacco knife. Quassia, guaiacum, logwood, and red saunders, are chipped by machinery, the two latter especially, for use in the arts. Camphor is easily reduced to powder, by adding to it a small portion of some liquid in which it is soluble, as, for instance, alco- hol, and triturating to dryness; the proportion of alcohol proper to be added to camphor for this purpose, is about one minim to three grains. Figs. 74 and 75 represent very convenient forms of labor-saving Fig. 74. Swift's drug-mill. apparatus for the physician and apothecary. Swift's drug-mill is in very common use, both for fine and coarse powders; and the \ 72 ON THE COLLECTION AND DESICCATION OF PLANTS. spice-mill here represented will often do to substitute it, being more portable, and readily removed and replaced again upon the Fig. 75. fltSf lllliii!1" '—^ 1 Siii % k — % Spice-mill. edge of the counter or office table. The grinding surfaces in both are of cast iron, in the one case toothed, and in the other grooved, so as to tear apart the substances with facility. In each case, the coarseness of the product may be varied by the use of a screw, which is so arranged as, by tightening it, to approximate the grind- ing surfaces, and effect a finer division, or, by loosening, to furnish a coarser powder, by removing the comminuting surfaces further apart. The article to be powdered should be well dried, and, for grinding in the small mill, should not be in pieces larger than a hickory-nut. Muriate of ammonia, and carbonate and nitrate of potassa, and . other saline substances, are conveniently reduced by the process of granulation, which consists in dissolving the salt in water, and evaporating to dryness, constantly stirring. The process is only applicable to a few articles which are freely soluble, and are not readily decomposed by heat; the granulated powders thus pro- duced, are generally quite different from those made by mechanical means; they are neither so fine nor so free from water. Many of the insoluble powders are obtained by precipitation; as, for example, precipitated sulphur, prepared by dropping muriatic acid into a solution of bisulphuret of calcium and hyposulphite of lime; the calcium and chlorine present, uniting with the acid, form chloride of calcium and water; the former being extremely soluble, the sulphur, which is insoluble, is thus precipitated as a fine powder. (See Sulphur.) On the same principle the precipitated carbonate of lime is pre- pared, by adding a solution of carbonate of soda to a solution of POWDERS. 73 chloride of calcium. As a result of the reaction, the insoluble car- bonate of lime is produced, and is thrown down in the form of a powder. (See Alkaline Earths) It is worthy of remark, in regard to these powders generally, that they are composed of very small crystals. Their fineness is dependent upon the temperature and degree of concentration of the liquids when mixed. When the solutions are hot and concen- trated, the reaction takes place suddenly, and the powder is very fine; when they are cold and more dilute, the precipitate is gradu- ally deposited, and more perfectly assumes the crystalline form. Tartar emetic is obtained in a very fine powder, suitable for pre- paring the ointment, by dissolving it in water, so as to form a strong solution, and then adding alcohol to this. The strong affi- nity of water for alcohol causes it to unite with it, and the tartar emetic being less soluble in the alcoholic liquid is thrown down in an impalpable powder. Powders, as a class of medicinal remedies, possess the advantage, when skilfully prepared, of uniting all the proximate principles of the plant, in their natural condition, and may be administered without the intervention of any menstruum. They may be used in bulk, taken into the mouth with water or some viscid liquid; or may be made into pills; or suspended in liquids in the form of mixturGS The disadvantages attendant upon their use, are these: they are frequently too bulky for convenience, the dose being so large as to be repulsive and disgusting to the patient; they generally con- tain a considerable proportion of inert ligneous matter; many of them are liable to undergo an unfavorable change by exposure to the influence of the atmosphere, especially when it is charged with moisture; and, as is generally believed, they are injured by light. Vegetable powders are subject to adulteration without the possi- bility of detection. , . , ■, , i Except in the few cases, such as opium and cinchona bark, where we may isolate the active principle, and ascertain the proportion contained in a given sample, it is impossible to judge with cer- tainty of the quality of a powdered drug; the only safeguard of the physician against fraud or the effects of carelessness, where the vegetable powders are concerned, is to buy them of careful and conscientious druggists, who either powder them, or exercise a strict supervision over the process as conducted by the drug- Extreme fineness is very much sought after in powders, espe- cially of latter times; and we are certainly not without evidence of its conferring great superiority in some cases. Ferri pulvis of the U S. Pharmacopoeia is an instance of this. The fineness of a powder affects its color, as is manifest m the case of white saline substances, which become whiter as they are reduced to very fine powders. 74 ON SOLUTION, FILTRATION, AND MEDICATED WATERS. There is no separate class of simple powders in our Pharma- copoeia; it is understood to be included in the Materia Medica list. The compound powders which are officinal, are included in this work under the general head of extemporaneous powders and pills, and designated by U. S. P. The necessary practical hints in regard to the mode of preparing and dispensing them, are given under their appropriate head in the chapter on Dispensing. CHAPTEK II. ON SOLUTION, FILTRATION, AND THE MEDICATED WATERS. There are two objects in view in this process, and the principal feature in the classification of solutions is founded on this fact. The simplest kind is that in which, by the use of an appropriate liquid, we overcome the attraction of aggregation in a solid body, rendering its particles more susceptible to chemical action, and more readily assimilated when taken into the stomach. The liquid used for this purpose is called a solvent; and water, the great neutral solvent, is most used in preparing this class, which may be designated simple solutions. When we speak of the solubility of any substance, we have reference to its relation to water, the term being an approximate one. Yery few substances exist in nature wholly insoluble; and as there is no line between the least soluble, and those which are freely dissolved under ordinary circumstances, the term is not adapted to use where accuracy or precision of language is required. Solution is accomplished by bringing the material under treat- ment, into contact with the solvent under favorable circumstances; these relate, 1st, to temperature; 2d, to the state of aggregation of the solid; 3d, to its position in relation to the solvent. Hot liquids dissolve substances with greater facility than do cold; with the well-known exceptions, lime, magnesia, and chloride of sodium. In addition to the greater solvent power of hot liquids, the currents produced by the process of heating them, favor the more rapid solution of the contained solids, as shaking up the ves- sel favors the same result. To facilitate solution in a small way, mortars are much employed; they serve the double purpose of reducing the solid to powder, and of promoting its intimate mixture throughout the liquid. THE PROCESS OF SOLUTION. 75 Mortars of porcelain ware (Fig. 76) are most suitable for this pur- pose; they are used as follows: The substance to be dissolved, is first placed in the mortar and rubbed into a powder more or less fine; a small portion of the solvent is now added and triturated with the FiS- 76- powder ; as soon as this first portion seems to be nearly saturated, it is poured into another vessel, and an additional portion of the solvent add- ed, triturated, and poured off in the same way; a fresh portion again being added, the process is repeated, and so continued till the powder has disappeared. The liquids thus ob- tained, being mixed, furnish a far Porcelain mortar. stronger solution than could be pre- pared in the same length of time under the ordinary circumstances of contact. When a weak solution is to be made, especially of delicate che- mical substances, like nitrate of silver, a good way is to drop the crystals or powder into the liquid previously placed in a clean vial of suitable size, to which a cork has been fitted, and to shake it up until dissolved. This should only be done in the case of very soluble substances, and the shaking should be continued as. long as any portion remains undissolved. A good arrangement for effecting solution is to place, the solid on a perforated diaphragm resting beneath the surface of the liquid, or to inclose it in a bag of some porous material, and suspend it by a thread in the vessel near its top. By this contrivance, that portion of the liquid having the greatest solvent power, because the least saturated, is always in contact with the solid; the solu- tion, as it becomes saturated, sinks to the bottom, and displaces the portion less charged with the solid ingredient, which, in conse- quence of its less specific gravity, seeks the top, thus keeping up a continual circulation in the fluid favorable to the object in view. In large operations in the arts where it is impossible to shake or to stir the liquid conveniently, an arrangement based upon this principle is adopted. The term saturated, besides its application as above, is employed to signify that an acid is neutralized by an alkali, or vice versa; or, in other words, that an equivalent proportion of one substance has combined with an equivalent proportion of another, for which it has an affinity; they are then said to have saturated each other. The term, when used for this purpose, may be said to be a strictly chemical one, but when employed as above, to designate the point at which a liquid ceases to dissolve a solid body, it is used in a pharmaceutical sense. Eapid solution, even when not accompanied by chemical reac- 76 ON SOLUTION, FILTRATION, AND MEDICATED WATERS. tion, generally causes a reduction of temperature, and thus retards the process to a certain extent, so that, in arrangements for solution on a large scale, it is important to counteract this effect by con- trivances for keeping up the temperature of the liquid. A large number of the solutions used in medicine, are effected by inducing chemical changes among the ingredients introduced into them, Sometimes yielding soluble compounds, where one or more of the original ingredients were insoluble. The solutions officinal in the U. S. Pharmacopoeia, are not arranged as a separate class of preparations, but being generally composed of the metallic salts dissolved in water, they are dis- persed throughout the work under the heads of the salts them- selves, and will be noticed either in the consideration of the extem- poraneous combinations, or under separate and appropriate heads, being designated by the initials U. S. P. The Medicated Waters. Closely resembling the solutions proper, are the medicated waters. —Aquae Medicatoz, U. S. P. These are generally solutions in water of the essential oils, made by triturating the latter with a third substance (carbonate of mag- nesia, usually), which, either by dividing them mechanically, and thus presenting them to the water under favorable circumstances, or by a chemical union with them, renders them soluble to a limited extent, and imparts their sensible properties to the medicated waters thus formed. The same result is obtained by mixing the fresh herb with a quantity of water in an apparatus for distillation, and allowing them to remain in contact until the water has, to a certain extent, dissolved out the essential oil, extractive matter, coloring principle, &c.; and then, by the application of heat, volatilizing the water and the essen- tial oil, and collecting them in a refrigerated receiver. If the oil is in excess, it will be found on standing to collect on the surface of the liquid in the receiver, but a certain amount is retained in solution by the water, imparting to it the fragrance peculiar to the herb employed. (See Chapter on Distillation) A third method of preparing medicated waters is to impregnate pure water with gases, either by the aid of pressure or by simple absorption. Most of those prepared in this way are appropriately classified as chemical preparations. In the tabular view appended, the officinal medicated waters are classified according to the methods of preparing them:— THE MEDICATED WATERS. 77 Aqu.e Medicate, U. S. First CLASS.—By trituration with an insoluble substance which is afterwards separated by filtration. Officinal name. Proportions. Comp. Dose. Aqua Camphorse, Camphor 3j, Carb. Magnes. sjij to Oj=3 grains to f|j fgss. " Amygdalae Amaras, Oil itbxvj, do. gj to 0ij=l drop to f.?j ffj. " Cinnamomi, Oil nixvj, do. gj to °j=2 drops to fgj fgij. " Foemculi, do. do. do. do. do. " Menthae Pip., do. do. do. do. do. " Virid., do. do. do. do. do. Second Class.—By distillation. Aqua Rosaa, Rose petals Ibj to Oj. Third Class.—By charging water with gas. Aqua1 Acidi Carbonici, 5 parts of C02 to 1 of water. _ The manipulation in preparing those of the first class is quite simple, and, except in the case of camphor water, is precisely uni- form. The carbonate of magnesia is removed by filtration, and only serves the purpose of dividing the oil and rendering it more soluble in the water. It may be substituted by prepared chalk, powdered silica, or some other insoluble substance in very fine powder. In making camphor water, the chief point to be observed is to secure the complete division of the camphor; this is accomplished by triturating it with alcohol, which brings it into a pasty mass; this mass must now be brought completely between the triturating surfaces of the pestle and mortar, for if any portion escapes it will be lumpy and granular, and not in a favorable condition for solu- tion. The carbonate of magnesia may be triturated with the moist camphor before it has passed into the condition of a powder, and after thorough incorporation the whole may be passed through a fine sieve; the water is then gradually added. The undissolved carbonate and camphor should be thrown on the filter with the first portion of the liquid, so that it may be percolated by the liquid during its filtration. In the preparation of extemporaneous solutions or mixtures, the medicated waters of the first class are very convenient; but where the one required is not at hand, it may be substituted by dropping the essential oil on a small piece of sugar, or, if in a mixture con- taining gum, upon the powdered gum, and triturating with a suffi- cient quantity of water. ■■' The proportion of the oil used, as shown in the table, is in all cases, excepting that of the bitter almond water, one minim (which is frequently substituted by two drops) of the oil to one fluidounce of the liquid. 1 For Liquor Ammonia, and other medicated waters not classified under this head, see Part IV. 78 ON SOLUTION, FILTRATION, AND MEDICATED WATERS. Filtration.—In this place, it is not inappropriate to introduce some account of the process of filtration. The object of this is to separate any undissolved or precipitated substance suspended in a liquid from the liquid itself; as in preparing the medicated waters, a filter is employed to separate the carbonate of magnesia from the solution of the essential oil in water, and thus to obtain a clear fluid. When the liquid is viscid, and contains only motes of an appreciable size, as, for instance, when a syrup has been prepared from sugar contaminated with insoluble impurities, a sufficient filter may be constructed of flannel or Canton flannel, by folding over a square piece in the manner indicated in the figure; the line c d being laid over the line c a, and united by a seam; the bag thus formed is pointed at c, and open from a to b, the line a c being lapped over to form the seam. In using this strainer, the long end projecting toward the point b, beyond the dotted line e /, may be turned over the side of the vessel, by which the strainer will be kept in its place while the liquid is poured into the opening at the top. This process is called straining, though a kind of filtration. In- fusions, decoctions, syrups, fixed oils, and melted ointments, are sub- jected to it in order to separate foreign ingredients. They pass through the strainer with much greater facility when quite hot, though in the case of the fixed oils a clearer product is obtained by conducting the operation in the cold, and by using several thick- nesses of the flannel, or by employing Canton flannel with the nap on the inside. Coarse linen is sometimes better than flannel, espe- cially when considerable pressure is to be employed, as in extract- ing the juice from the pulp in making fruit syrups. Figs. 79 and 80 represent an apparatus I have been using for some time past for straining syrups. Fig. 79 is a tin bucket, into which a funnel-shaped wire support, Fig. 80, is suspended, resting on the bucket by a projecting rim at the top ; a jelly bag is here unnecessary, as a sufficiently large square or round piece of flannel laid upon the wires will assume a convenient position for use. filtration. 79 Fig. 81 represents in section a contrivance for straining jellies, attributed to the late Dr. Physick, and made by Isaac S. Williams, of Philadelphia; a wire support fits into a funnel, which is soldered into a vessel designed to be kept full of hot water so as to prevent the cooling and thickening of the jelly during straining. For ordinary aqueous, alcoholic, and ethereal liquids, the process of filtration, employing the term in its more limited sense, is used, Fig. 79. Fig. 80. Fig. 81. Apparatus for straining syrups, Ac. Physick's jelly strainer. the filtering medium being paper. The best filtering paper is porous and free from any kind of glazing; that made from cotton or linen rags is the best for ordinary purposes; the kind made from woollen materials seems better adapted to viscid liquids, being thicker and more porous, but seldom free from coloring matter. It is, also, more soluble in alkaline solutions, and unfit for filtering such. It is often difficult to meet with paper combining the requisite strength, permeability, and freedom from coloring principles to answer a good purpose for filtering. The best that I have seen is imported, and is almost too expensive for common use. The construction of paper filters is an extremely simple thing when once learned, and is easily taught the student by a practical demonstration; it is, nevertheless, a difficult thing to describe clearly without giving to it more space than may appear at first sight due to so small a matter. There are two kinds of paper filters, the plain and the plaited; the use of the plain filter is in cases where we desire to collect the solid ingredient present in the liquid, and to remove it afterwards from the paper. It allows the passage of the liquid through it with less rapidity, and yet, owing to its being so readily folded, it is in very common use. The method of folding the plain filter is similar to the first steps to be taken in folding the plaited filter. In the following description I have endeavored to convey an idea of this process. 80 ON SOLUTION, FILTRATION, AND MEDICATED WATERS. A square piece of filtering paper, abed, Fig. 82, is folded over in the middle so as to form a crease at the line e /; the edge c d being laid directly over a b. The parallelogram, a b e f, represents the paper thus folded; the line b f being now laid upon the line a e, a crease is formed as represented by the line g Fig. 82. Fig. 83. Fig. 84. h, Fig. 83; the folded paper, if opened, makes a cone, having the point h at its base, and by cutting off the projecting angle a, by a curved line from e to g, a plain filter will be the result, as shown in Fig. 84. The plaited filter is made as follows: Take the paper before being cut, as above, and having opened it again so as to expose the parallelogram, the line e h, Fig. 85, is laid upon the line c h, forming a crease at a k This being opened again, the line e h is laid upon the line a h, producing an additional crease at g h, Fig. 86. The crease j h, Fig. 87, is next to be formed by folding a h, upon the middle dotted line, Fig. 87, as shown in Fig. 88. Fig. 86. Fig .85. If......... THE MEDICATED WATERS. 81 One-half of the parallelogram having thus been creased, we pro- ceed to form on the other the corresponding creases m h, b h, and Fig. 88. Fig. 87. k h, Fig. 89, all of which are in one direction, forming receding angles. The next thing to be done is, to divide the eight sections thus formed, by a crease through each in the opposite direction. To do this, the edge/ h is laid in the crease b h, and then turned Fig. 91. back, as shown in Fig. 90, producing the crease n h. In the same way an intermediate crease is formed in each of the spaces. This 82 ON SOLUTION, FILTRATION, AND MEDICATED WATERS. is better accomplished by turning the paper over, so that each of the receding angles shall project upward, and in this way be more readily brought together, as shown in Fig. 91, producing a reced- ing angle in forming the intermediate creases. The paper will now have the appearance of a fan, represented by Fig. 92, folding it up in each of its creases like a shut fan, Fig. 93. Fig. 92. The projecting points, a and b, may be clipped off with a pair of scissors at the dotted line, and upon opening the originally doubled halves made by the first fold at Fig- 94. efi Fig. 82, it will be found to present the appearance indicated in Fig. 94. In the filter, as thus con- structed, the creases occur alter- nately, except near the line e /J where the two creases occurring next each other are in the same direction. Sometimes, to obviate this, the space intervening be- tween these is folded backwards, as shown in the figure, so as to make a narrow crease in the op- posite direction. The plaited filter, as thus formed, is exceedingly useful for general purposes, exposing the THE MEDICATED WATERS. 83 entire surface of the paper to the action of the liquid, and allowing the process to proceed far more rapidly than in the case of the plain filter, first described, where one-half of the paper being doubled, the other half only is permeated by the liquid. A funnel, such as described and figured on page 34, is employed for supporting a filter of either kind, and is, as there stated, better adapted to ordinary use when grooved on its inner surface, so as to allow the free downward passage of the liquid, after it has per- meated the paper, and a groove on the outside of the tube, so that when inserted tightly into the neck of a bottle, the air within may find ready egress. If the tube of the funnel is smooth and ungrooved, a small plugget of folded paper, a piece of thick twine, or a small wedge- shaped splinter of wood, should be inserted in the neck of the bottle, along with the tube of the funnel; this will obviate one of the most common annoyances connected with filtration. In filtering into an open vessel, it is a good plan to place the lower extremity of the funnel in contact with the side of the vessel, thus preventing any inconvenience from the liquid splashing on the sides or over the top, and by creating a downward stream, pro- moting the free and rapid passage of the filtrate. The paper, of which the filter is formed, especially if very po- rous, is liable to be weakened by being plaited as above described; it is therefore advised not to make the creases firmly down to the very point, but rather to leave the terminus of an undefined shape; and when there is danger of breakage, either from the great weight of the liquid, or from the weakness of the paper at its point, a very small plain filter may be advantageously placed under the point at the lowest extremity of the funnel; this acts as a support to the weakest and most exposed part of the filter. Fig. 95. Fig. 96. Section of a well-formed funnel. Filter support. The proper shape of a funnel for filtration is shown in section at Fig. 95. The lines a b and c b are straight, and ab c and acb 84 ON SOLUTION, FILTRATION, AND MEDICATED WATE are angles of 60°, making an equilateral triangle into which the filter iust described will fit perfectly. Fis 96 is a filter support adapted to the rapid passage of liquids in filtration; it, however, requires to be used in connection with an open or wide mouth receiving vessel or a funnel, otherwise the liquid might not be perfectly collected as it passes downwards. In filtering very volatile liquids, particularly in hot weather, some contrivance must be resorted to, to prevent evaporation from the wide surface exposed, while, at the same time, the escape of air from the receiving vessel must be provided for. The drawing here eiven Fig 97 from Mohr & Eedwood, represents an arrangement of the' kind. The glass funnel is fitted by a cork into the receiving vessel; its top is ground to a smooth surface, on which is laid a plate of glass, c; a little simple cerate will furnish a good luting; b is a very small glass tube laid down the inside of the funnel be- tween it and the filter, and so twisted at its lower end as to be sup- ported in its place; this forms a connection between the air below and that above the liquid, without allowing any evaporation. Fig. 97. Fig. 98. Class I.—Made with Diluted Alcohol. Group 1.—These are all made in the proportion of two ounces of the active ingredient to one pint of diluted alcohol. They may be nearly all classed as narcotics, though with properties modified in each case. Doses vary from 10 drops to fgj. Officinal Name. Med. Properties. Dose. Remarks. Tinctura aconiti foliorum Nervous sedat. 20 to 30 drops See tinct. aconiti " belladonnas Narcotic do. radicis. " stramonii do. do. Made from the " conii Alterat.,narcot. 30 to 60 drops seeds. Misnamed tinct. •" hyoscyami " digitalis Narcotic Diuret., narcot. do. 10 drops cicutse. English leaves preferred. Emetic dose, f^ss. " lobelias Emetic, stim., narcotic fgsstof^j " sanguinarias " scillee do. Emetic, diuret., do. 10 to 30 drops do. See Acet. scillae. " colchici seminis expect. Diuretic, &c. 10 drops to f5j See Vin. & Acet. Group 2.—These are made in varying proportions. They are generally quite incompatible with salts of iron, forming inky solutions. They are all astringents or tonics, or both. Doses, from f£j to f^ss. Officinal Name. Proportions. Dose. Med. Properties. Tinctura gallse IU to Oj f3ij Astringent. c< catechu §iss to Oj with ^j cinn. do. do. ii kino §iss to Oj m do. ii kramerias giij to Oj do. do. ii cinchonas do. yellow bark 'red bark f^ss Tonic. ii " comp. B. orange peel - serpentaria 1 saffron [ saunders do. do. aromatic. (Huxham's.) u colombas gij to Qj f gentian do. Tonic. u gentianas comp. < B. orange peel (cardamom do. do. aromatic. ii quassias .?j to Oj f#.i do. do. u humuli §ijss to Oj do. do. sedative. 1 See Galenical preparations of opium. 8 114 OF TINCTUEES. Group 3.__Of varying proportions, chiefly stimulants and aromatics. Dosea, generally from f 3J to f^ij. Officinal Name. Proportions. Dose. Med. Properties, etc. Tinctura valerianas 3ij to °J f^ij Tonic, antispasm. (See ext. fld.) " serpentarias " cubebas ^iss do. do. Stimulant tonic. |ij do. do. Stimulant (added to copaiba mixt.). " cantharidis 5ss do. gtt. XX Stimulant, to be diluted largely. " capsici " cinnamomi do. do. m do. do. §iss do. f;4ss Carmin., adjuvant. " cardamomi gij do. ( cinnamon t'3j do. do. " cinnamomi comp. •< cardamom I ginger fgss do. do. f cardamom 1 cinnamon " cardamomi comp. -[ caraway 1 raisins [cochineal f^ss do. do. Group 4.—Of varying proportions. Cathartics with modified properties. Chiefly compound. Doses generally, f§ss. Officinal Name. Proportions. Dose. Med. Properties, etc. Tinct. hellebori iij to Oj fsj Emmenagogue, cath. " jalapas 3»j t0 °j do. Cath., always used in combination. " rhei f^iss do. 1 with cardam. gij f^ss Tonic, cathartic. " " et aloes f rhubarb •! aloes cardam. do. Mild cathartic. (Elixir sacrum.) " " et gentianas rhubarb gentian rhubarb senna coriander do. Laxative, tonic. " " et sennas fennel do. Carminative, laxative. saunders (Warner's Cordial.) saffron liquorice [raisins senna jalap " senna3 etjalapas coriander cardamom caraway do. Carminative, laxative. (Elixir salutis.) [ sugar 1 SYLLABUS OF TINCTURES. 115 Bemarks.—The tinctures made with diluted alcohol, are here found to be susceptible of division into four groups, arranged chiefly with a view to their medical properties, but generally hav- ing other features in common. Thus the majority of the narcotic tinctures (Group 1) are given in the dose of from 20 to 60 drops, and they are all made in the proportion of two ounces of the drug- to one pint of the menstruum. The six first named in the table form a very natural group; the remaining four have fewer points of resemblance, and several cannot be classed with narcotics with- out doing some violence to their true position. The tincture of digitalis is not only peculiar in its therapeutical action, but forms an exception in the dose. The tonic and astringent preparations are appropriately asso- ciated in one group, though differing among themselves. Tincture of quassia is sui generis in containing no astringent principle. The dose of these will be observed to be much larger, ranging from two fiuidrachms to half a fluidounce. The third group has less points of resemblance among its mem- bers than either of the others. The last four of this group are, however, all used for the same purposes, as adjuvants to other me- dicines, in extemporaneous solutions and mixtures. The compound tincture of cardamom is a very rich and elegant one for this purpose. With the exception of tinctures of hellebore and jalap, the fourth group is a very natural one; these are what are called stomachics, and are much used in debilitated states of the stomach and bowels, following protracted illness. They should be used with caution, for fear of inducing intemperate habits. The doses named in the tables may be considered as average adult doses; it is impossible to state their variations in a table.1 Class II.—Made with Officinal Alcohol, sp. gr. .835. Group 1.—Saturated tinctures, or nearly so. Officinal Name. Proportions. Dose. Med. Properties. Tinctura aconiti radicis " nucis vomicas " zingiberis 3yj to Oj ^iv do. do. do. gtt. v to X do. v to xv Nervous, sedative. do. stimulant. Carminative. 1 See unofiBcinal tinctures. 116 TINCTURES. Group 2.—Resinous tinctures. Tinctura myrrhas " aloes et myrrhas " guaiaci " assafcetidas " castorei " lupulinas " tolutani " benzoini comp. §ij to Oiss ( aloes §iss < saffron ^ss ( tr. myrrhas Oj §iij to Oj 3'j do. aj do. .?U do. ^iss do. fbenzoin j storax ] bals. tolu [aloes f3J fa fa"j fa f^ss fa f^ss do. Astringent, em-menagogue. Laxative, do. (Elixir proprieta-tis.) Alterative, dia-phoretic. Antispasmodic. m do. Tonic, narcotic. Stimulant, expec-torant. do. do. (See Turlington's balsam.) Group 3.—Simple solutions in alcohol. Tinct. camphoras " ol. menth. pip. do. sativas " iodinii " " comp. " saponis camphorata Sii to Oj f§ij to do. do. do. gj to do. J iodine ^ss \ iodide potass. §j f soap < camphor (oil rosemary gtt. XX do. gtt. XXX gtt. XV do. Stimulant. Carminative. do. Alterative. do. Used externally. (Liquid opodel-doc.) Bemarks.—It will be observed that tinctures of this class are generally given in smaller doses than, those of the first class. They are as a class more active preparations. The first group in this series, except tincture of ginger, are diffi- cult tinctures to prepare properly. It is best to macerate the sub- stance in the alcohol, previously to the employment of the displace- ment process, and the frequent repassing of the liquid through the powder to insure its saturation. I have found advantage in these cases, from employing the heat of a sand-bath during the macera- tion, and then displacing with great care to extract the whole of the active virtues. This class, especially the 2d group, and tinctures of camphor and iodine of 3d group, are all incompatible with aqueous liquids, which, by rendering the basis insoluble, precipitate it. Notwith- standing this apparent disadvantage, these tinctures are sometimes added to mixtures containing a large proportion of water, and answer a very good purpose, especially where sugar or gum are added as ingredients. Some of the resinous tinctures are much given on sugar, which being allowed to dissolve slowly in the mouth is well calculated to develop their taste and odor. TINCTURES. 117 The tinctures of essential oils, of which those of peppermint and spearmint are officinal, are commonly known as essences; but most of the essences sold are much below the officinal standard, as might be inferred from their price. (For a further account of this class of tinctures, see chapter on Distillation) Tinctures of tolu and ginger are used in the preparation of the officinal tolu and ginger syrups. The latter is extensively known as essence of ginger, and is one of the most popular of carminatives.1 Class III.—Made with Aromatic Spirit of Ammonia. AMMONIATED TINCTURES. Tinct. guaiaci ammoniata ^iv to Oiss Stimulating diaphoretic, Dose, fgj. " valerianas " ;§ij to Oj Antispasmodic, do. Aromatic spirits of ammonia, itself an admirable stimulant and antacid, and extensively used as a remedy for sick-headache, is used as a menstruum in this class of tinctures; it has the advantage, from the quantity of volatile alkali it contains, of increasing the solubility of resinous bodies, and also adding to their stimulating effects and comparative medicinal efficiency in certain cases. Tinctures not Officinal in U. S. P. Under this head only a few of the more important will be intro- duced. The reader is referred to Medical Formularies for such as are not selected for insertion here. Tinctura Cinchonce et Quassice Composita.—Tonic Tincture. Take of Cinchona, in coarse powder, Quassia, " Colombo, " Gentian, " Serpentaria, " Chamomile, of each .... 3ss. French brandy.....Oij. Macerate 14 days, and extract by displacement. A very valuable combination of bitters, which, by the absence of the disagreeable 1 I do not see the propriety of the use of strong alcohol in all the tinctures of this class; in several of those of the 2d group, diluted alcohol would seem to be the pro- per menstruum. In myrrh, there are 44 parts of gum to 40 of resin, and 2 of essen- tial oil, so that one would suppose the proportion of diluted alcohol would be exactly suited to its solution. Experiment proves that in assafcetida there are about 65 parts of resin and 31 of gum, which would seem to indicate the use of about 2 parts of alcohol to 1 of water. 118 TINCTURES. resinous coloring matter of saunders, and by the employment of an acceptable form of alcohol as the menstruum, is adapted to super- sede Huxham's tincture of bark. Dose, f 3j to f Iss. Bitter Tincture of Iron. (Dr. Physick.) Take of Iron filings......^nj- Bruised ginger, " gentian, of each. . . . Ij- " orange-peel . ■ - • • 3ss. Infuse in one pint of old cider for two weeks, in a bottle without a stopper, and filter. Dose, 30 drops, three times a day. Although not an elegant preparation, this is an efficient and popular chalybeate tonic. Tinctura Cinchonoz Ferrata. On account of the large number of cases in which the tonic effects of cinchona and aromatics are indicated with ferruginous preparations, it is desirable to contrive a method of combining these without producing the inky and grumous appearance result- ing from the diffusion of tannate of iron in the preparation. A tincture, with the above title, was announced some time since by Samuel Simes, of this city, as combining the advantages of cinchona and iron. A specimen of this being examined by Alfred B. Taylor, was pronounced to contain less than half a grain of the iron salt to an ounce; this occasioned the publication of a recipe by S. Simes, directing the precipitation of the cincho-tannin, from the tinc- ture made with brandy, by an excess of hydrated sesquioxide of iron; after filtration, and washing the precipitate with alcohol to recover any alkaloid which might otherwise be lost, 16 grains of ammonio-citrate of iron were directed to be dissolved in each fluid- ounce, and, according to the statement, would produce no precipita- tion of the inky tannate. Experiments carefully performed by myself and others, show that this result is not attainable, except by the presence of a considerable excess of citric acid, which will very much diminish the tendency of the tincture to blacken on the addition of the iron salt, even with- out the previous treatment prescribed in the recipe of Simes. This preparation, then, is conveniently prepared extemporaneously by the proper admixture of compound tincture of cinchona, or pre- ferably tinctura cinchonas et quassias composita, with citrate of iron, and an excess of citric acid (gr. iv to f 3j). (See Extemporane- ous Prescriptions) Tinctura Matico. (Dublin Ph.) Take of Matico leaves, in coarse powder, 8 ounces (avoirdupois). Proof spirit ... 2 pints (imp'l measure). Macerate 14 days, strain, express, and filter. UNOFFICINAL TINCTURES. 119 Dose, from f5j to f3iij. Used as an alterative stimulant and haemostatic. The solution of the alkaloids in alcohol constitutes a class of tinctures which are convenient and very readily prepared, though none of them are officinal in the U. S. Pharmacopoeia. Tinctura Quinice Composita. (Dublin Ph.) Take of Sulphate of quinia . . 3v, 9j. Tincture of orange-peel . Oij (imperial measure). Digest for 7 days, or till dissolved. Dose, f3j, containing a grain of the quinia salt. The tincture of orange-peel, which is not officinal here, may be substituted by tinct. gentianas comp., U. S. Tinctura Strychnice. Take of Strychnia......gr. iij. Alcohol......fgj. Make a tincture. Dose, "iv to xyj. This is perhaps about the strength of tincture of nux vomica (as shown below), for which it is sometimes substituted. Name. Proportions. Dose. Tinctura nucis vomicas, U. S., §iv to Oj ale, 5 to 15 drops. " strychnias, gr. iij to f ^j,. 16 drops = ^ grain. Tinctura Cannabis Indicoe. (Dublin Ph.) *Take of Purified extract of Indian hemp . . sss. Alcohol (Oss, imperial measure) . . f^ixss. Dissolve the extract in the alcohol. Dose, as a narcotic about 40 drops. F lemming1 s Tincture of Aconite. Take of Aconite root (dried and finely powdered) Ixvi (Troy). Kectified spirits .... Sufficient. Macerate for four days with sixteen ounces of the spirits, then pack into a percolator, add more until twenty-four ounces of tinc- ture are obtained. This is the strongest of the tinctures of aconite, and is compared with the others in the following syllabus. Name. Proportions. Dose. Tinctura aconiti foliorum, U. S., ^ij leaves to Oj dil. ale, 20 to 30 drops. " radicis, U. S., Jvj root to Oj alcohol, 5 drops. " " (Flemming's), ^viij root to f^xij do., 3 to 5 drops. 1 See Extracta. 120 MEDICATED WINES AND VINEGARS. There is not so great a difference between the last two as their relative proportions would indicate, both being nearly saturated. Great care should be taken to distinguish these by their full name in prescribing. Dewees's Tincture of Guaiac. Take of Guaiacum resin.....3iv. Carbonate of potassa .... 3)ss. Pulv. pimento ..... 3J- Diluted alcohol . . _ • _• • Oij. Digest for two weeks. Dose, from f 5j to f5ij. Tinctura Bhei Aromaticus. Take of Ehubarb, Caraway, Orange-peel, of each .... 3VJ. Brandy.....• Oij. Macerate for two weeks or displace. Dose, f5j to f3ss. CH APT ER VI, MEDICATED WINES AND VINEGARS. These two classes of Galenical solutions are less numerous, and generally less important, than the tinctures, to which they are closely allied. Yina Medicata, U. S. P. There are two kinds of wine officinal in the U. S. Pharmacopoeia: vinum album (vinum of the older Pharmacopoeias), which is sherry wine (Teneriffe and Madeira are sometimes used in its stead), and vinum rubrum, which is port wine. The former contains near 20 per cent, of alcohol, sp. gr. .825, and the latter near 26 per cent. In all the medicated wines which are officinal, white wine is directed as the menstruum. This is a clear, amber colored liquid, having an agreeable pungent taste, and destitute of acidity. It possesses the advantage over either alcohol or diluted alcohol, of being less stimulating, and more agreeable in its taste and in its effects on the system. It is chiefly objectionable as a substitute AROMATIC WINE. 121 for diluted alcohol, from its liability to decompose when impreg- nated with the soluble principles of plants. To meet this objec- tion, it is customary with some to add from one to two fluidounces of alcohol to a pint of the wine, and this course is directed in the Pharmacopoeia in the case of vinum rhei. SYLLABUS OF OFFICINAL MEDICATED WINES. Tf hite or Sherry Wine, used in making them. Officinal Name. Vinum aloes " rhei colchici rad. " seminis ergotaa ipecacuanhas tabaci veratri albi antimonii Proportions. gj + cardamom, 1 Q, ginger, aa 5j j J gij + canella 33 { , dil. ale. fgij j d0' ifvj do. I'J do. .fij do. 5\ Dose. f^ij to f|ij %j to fg ss gtt. x to f3j fcj to f^ij <5j do. f&j to fgss do. gtt. xx. do. 2 grs. tart. emet. to f gj ifjj to fgss Med. Properties. Carminative, aperient. do. Diuretic, nerv. sedat. do. Excito-motor stim. Expectorant. Diuretic. Expect.,emet. Wine of ipecac is an elegant and very popular preparation, being much used by itself, and along with other expectorant and diapho- retic remedies; it is not as depressing in its effects as wine of anti- mony, and yet about equally efficacious as an emetic and nauseant. It has just double the strength of the syrup of ipecac. Wine of ergot is perhaps more used than any other preparation of that drug; it has no other fault than its proneness to decompose in hot weather, which makes it necessary to add a little strong alcohol, or to keep it in a cool place, and in well-stopped bottles. Wines not Officinal in U. S. P. Aromatic Wine. Take of Wormwood,- Peppermint,* Eosemary,v Thyme, v Hyssopr% Sage, •» Lavender, -. Sweet marjoram, of each N Port wine ..... Macerate 7 days and displace. Oij. i 1' 122 medicated wines and vinegars. The principal use of aromatic wine is as an astringent and stimu- lating wash, applied particularly to buboes. Wine of Tar—Tar Beer—Jews'1 Beer. A formula for this preparation was published in the 14th volume of the American Journal of Pharmacy (p. 281), by the late Augus- tine Duhamel, in which a quart of bran, a pint of tar, half a pint of honey, and three quarts of water, are mixed together in an earthen pipkin, allowed to simmer over a slow fire for three hours, then suffered to cool, half a pint of yeast added, and after it has stood thirty-six hours, strained for use. If these directions are followed to the letter, the product is exceedingly unsatisfactory, will not keep well, and is impregnated with but a small amount of the medical virtues of the tar. The addition of the tar at the first part of the process is the chief ob- jection to this formula, as by its antiseptic properties it checks the fermentation, and thus diminishes the production of alcohol, and consequently the amount of tar dissolved. The office of the bran is to disintegrate the tar so that the water may act on a largely exposed surface. Ground malt answers this mechanical purpose equally well, and as it is acted on by ferment when placed in water, this is an additional reason why it should be preferred to the bran. When, therefore, malt is substituted for bran, and the mixture of malt, honey, water, and yeast, is suffered to react for thirty-six hours before adding the tar, so much alcohol is generated, that it enables the fluid to dissolve a much larger pro- portion of that substance, and to keep perfectly well. The follow- ing is the formula proposed by Professor Procter:— Take of Ground malt, honey, and tar, of each one pound; Yeast, half a pint; Water, a sufficient quantity. Mix the malt, honey, and three quarts of the water in an earthen vessel, keep them at the temperature of 150° F. (about), with occa- sional stirring for three hours, then suffer the whole to cool to about 80° F. and add the yeast. Fermentation soon sets in, and should be promoted by maintain- ing the temperature between 70° and 80° F. during thirty-six hours. The supernatant fluid should then be decanted from the dregs of the malt, and the tar added gradually to these in a small stream, stirring constantly so as to distribute it uniformly among them, and prevent its conglomerating in masses. The decanted fluid is then returned to the vessel, and the whole well stirred up from time to time for several days or a week, observing to add water occasionally to keep the original measure. The whole is then thrown "on a piece of Canton flannel or other close strainer, the fluid allowed to pass, and the dregs expressed strongly to re- move as much as possible of the fluid inclosed. The expressed ACETA. 123 liquid is then filtered for use: there is an advantage in allowing it to stand, until it gets nearly clear by subsidence, before filtering it. When first made, before filtering, wine of tar has but little color, but soon acquires a reddish-brown hue by exposure. It smells and tastes strongly of tar, is slightly acid, is not unpleasant to most persons, and, when prepared as above, is undoubtedly a valuable auxiliary to the physician in pulmonary diseases. The dose of wine of tar is a tablespoonful. Brandy (distilled wine) is occasionally used as a menstruum instead of diluted alcohol, which it resembles in strength. It is a pleasanter spirit in its effect, though too expensive and too much adulterated to be generally substituted. A tincture is much pre- scribed as a fine tonic under the name Tinct. cinchonas et quassise comp., introduced in the last chapter; it is made with brandy. Aceta, U. S. P. In the list of the Pharmacopoeia, Acetum, vinegar, is described as impure diluted acetic acid, prepared by fermentation. One fluidounce of it is said to be saturated by about 35 grains of crys- tallized bicarbonate of potassa. From this is prepared— Acetum destillatum, officinal among the preparations, prepared by distilling vinegar, rejecting from each gallon the last pint, which contains the impurities. This liquid, which is nearly pure weak acetic acid, is about the same strength as the crude vinegar from which it is obtained, and possesses the same saturating power. Distilled vinegar was directed in the Pharmacopoeia of 1840, as the menstruum for the preparation of the officinal aceta, but in the last edition, it has been substituted by acidum aceticum dilutum. The chief reason for this change has been that the latter liquid is cheaper and much more easily obtained. The immense produc- tion of acetic acid for use in the arts as well as in medicine, has reduced its price to a much lower point than formerly. The small bulk of the strong acid recommends it for transportation, and it may be readily and immediately diluted to the point desired. It is free from organic impurities, while the ordinary product of the distillation of vinegar is not, as shown by the fact that, while the latter is apt to turn brown on the addition of an alkali, the former remains clear and colorless. The chief impurities likely to be present in acetic acid of com- merce, are sulphuric, nitric, and muriatic acids, and traces of ace- tates of lead and copper. Sulphuric acid is detected by the addition to a quite dilute solu- tion of a small portion of a solution of chloride of barium, or nitrate of baryta, which will form a white precipitate of sulphate of baryta, if sulphuric acid be present. Muriatic acid, by the addition to another portion of a very dilute solution of nitrate of silver, will throw down white chloride of silver. Nitric acid is known to be pre- 124 OF MEDICATED wines and vinegars. sent when, upon the addition of a small piece of metallic silver, a portion of the latter is dissolved, and maybe precipitated as a white chloride upon adding a drop of muriatic acid. Acetate of lead, if present, may be detected by adding to a small quantity of the diluted acid, saturated with ammonia, a solution of iodide of potas- sium which will give the bright yellow iodide of lead; it being insoluble, will separate as a precipitate. Acetate of copper, if sus- pected, may be proved to be present when a precipitate falls after the addition of a solution of ferrocyanide of potassium to a portion of the dilute acid, saturated with ammonia. Acetic acid of commerce, sometimes designated as JNo. 8, has, or should have, the sp. gr. of 1.041. The best method, however, of ascertaining its strength, is to saturate a given portion of it with bicarbonate of potassa in crystals: if of standard strength, 100 grains by weight of the acid will be accurately saturated by 60 grains of the crystals. The point of saturation is ascertained by the use of litmus paper, which should not change to a decided red color on immersing it in the liquid, after the addition of the bi- carbonate. This experiment requires care, in order to secure a satisfactory result; if it should be found that the solution is de- cidedly acid, when tried by the test-paper, a further addition of bicarbonate should be made, noting the quantity. If considerably more than 60 grains are required to make it neutral, it is too strong, and generally the presence of some foreign acid may be suspected. If the proportion of bicarbonate is more than sufficient to make the solution neutral, the acid is then deficient in strength. Owing to the delicacy of the test by litmus paper, a specimen of acetic acid will seldom be found which will be accurately saturated hj the required quantity of this or any other salt, and in estimating the value of the sample, the experimenter must be satisfied if the result is approximately correct, especially as carbonic acid, being liberated by the bicarbonate, is present in the solution, and is liable to in- fluence slightly the behavior of the test-paper. Practically,_ no- material disadvantage results, in the preparation of medicated vine- gars, if the acetic acid happens to vary somewhat from the standard strength, provided it be free from foreign substances. Acidum Aceticum Dilutum.—This liquid is made by adding to one part of acetic acid seven parts of water (making eight parts), so that the proportions may be stated as one part of strong acid in every eight parts of diluted. As 60 grains of bicarbonate of po- tassa saturate 100 grains of the strong acid, 7J grains (one-eighth of sixty) will saturate the same quantity of the diluted acid; or, observing very nearly the same proportion, 35 grains will saturate one fluidounce. The use of diluted acetic acid as a menstruum is confined by the U. S. Pharmacopoeia to colchicum, squills, and opium. In the pre- paration of emplastruin ammoniaci, it is employed to dissolve the ETHEREAL TINCTURES. 125 gum, and afterwards evaporated so as to leave it in a pure and softened condition suitable for spreading on kid. (See Emplastra) In the case of colchicum, it is used with a view to furnish the active principle colchicia in the form of acetate; it is milder in its action than the wine, and is suitable for combining with magnesia and sulphate of magnesia. It forms an admirable menstruum for squill, its acid taste recom- mending it over both water and alcohol, and its medical action promoting that of squill in most cases to which that medicine is adapted. In the case of opium, the object in employing this acid is to assist in dissolving and extracting the morphia, with which it combines, furnishing a soluble salt, and one which is considered more agree- able in its action than the meconate as it exists in the drug. The antiseptic properties of diluted acetic acid are inferior to those of diluted alcohol, and on that account these preparations are more liable to change than the tinctures. A small addition of alcohol is sometimes made, to obviate this. I have never known either of the officinal " aceta" to ferment by keeping. A syllabus of this class is appended. Aceta, U. S. P. Officinal Name. Proportions. Dose. Med. Properties, &c. Acetum colchici " scillae " opii §i to Oj : Ale. f^ss 3U to Oj _ ^viii to Oiij f Jiv gtt. xxx to fgij do. gtt. v to X. Diuretic, sedative. do. do. See preparations of opium. Unofficinal Ethereal Tinctures. The use of ether as a menstruum in tinctures is objectionable, owing to the great variations in strength to which these are liable from the rapid evaporation of the ether, even at ordinary tempera- tures, and in the transfer of the liquid from the bottles. Several preparations, used by Dr. Mettauer, of Virginia, contain- ing less volatile ethereal liquids, as spt. aetheris nitrici, and spt. setheris compositus, have been made public, from which the follow- are selected:— Mettauer1 s Ethereal Tincture of Cantharides. B. Cantharid. ....... liij. Spt. sether. nit.......Oiiss. Macerate for eight days, and filter. The ethereous menstruum seems to promote the tendency of the flies to the genito-urinary organs without producing strangury. 126 GALENICAL PREPARATIONS OF OPIUM. 31V. Oij. It is also used as a blister for the scalp of infants. Dr. M. also uses spirit of nitric ether as a menstruum for colchicum, guaiac, squill, ergot, ipecac, &c. Mettauer1 s Ethereal Tincture of Cubebs. R. Cubebse pulv. . Spt. astheris nit. Macerate for eight days, and filter. Used for subacute inflammation of the bladder, urethra, &c, and of the mucous lining of the stomach and bowels. (See Virginia Med. and Surgical Journal, Nov. 1853.) Asiatic Tincture for Cholera. This is a most valuable application of the Ethereal Liquor of Hoffman, the diffusible character of which is admirably adapted to heighten the effect of the powerful stimulants prescribed. It has attained considerable celebrity within several years past. Take of Opium Camphor Oil of cloves Capsicum ....••• ^J. Hoffman's anodyne.....Oj. Macerate 10 to 20 days, or prepare by displacement. Adult dose, 20 to 60 drops every second, third, or fourth hour, according to circumstances, in a little sweetened water. 3J- 3j. CHAPTER VII. GALENICAL PREPARATIONS OF OPIUM. These preparations assume an importance to the student not belonging to others, from the extensive use made of opium in almost every form of disease, and from the unusual number and variety of Galenical solutions made from it. No student should neglect to study these especially and care- fully, so as to be familiar with their relative degrees of activity, and their effects as modified by the menstrua employed. On this account I have devoted a separate chapter to their consideration. The following syllabus embraces the officinal Galenical solutions of opium, and also the solution of sulphate of morphia. TINCTURES OF OPIUM. 127 Composition and Relative Strength. Dose. Tinct. opii camphorata, Opium ^ss "] 1 gr. in 256 r\, f&j to fjss. (Paregoric), Camphor £)j Benzoic acid £ss j- to Oj dil. ale. Oil of aniseed fgss Honey f,] Tinct. opii (Laudanum), Opium %), £ij to Oj = 1 gr. in 13 n\, gtt. xxv. Tinct. opii acetata, Opium |j | 1 gr. in 10 n\, gtt. xx. Alcohol f £iv >■ Vinegar f^vij Vinum opii, Opium gij ) 1 gr. in 8 nt gtt. xx. (Sydenham's Laud.), Cinnamon, V to sherry, Oj. Cloves, aa 3j J Acetum opii, Opium ijviij ] 1 gr. in 6J nj, gtt. v to x. (Black Drop), Nutmeg liss , 0..,rz. , n ,, Saffronf?? [ t0 °"j fglV When fin dl Sugar ^xij J Liquor morphiaa sulphatis, i gr. morphia = 1 gr. opium to fgj f3j. The mode of preparation and uses of each of these will require separate mention. All the preparations of opium are directed to be made from the powdered drug; this is designed to prevent variations in strength, resulting from the different degrees of dryness of different speci- mens, as found in commerce. In most instances, however, the apothecary or physician prefers to select the drug in its crude' con- dition, and in the absence of conveniences for drying and powder- ing it in large quantities, uses it in lump. I shall, therefore, describe the processes with reference to both the powdered and the crude opium, premising that the manipulator should always make the preparation with the Pharmacopoeia before him, in this as in all other cases. Camphorated tincture of opium is made by dropping the opium as finely divided as its condition will admit of, the benzoic acid, camphor, and oil of aniseed, into a suitable bottle, and pouring the diluted alcohol upon them ; after standing for two weeks, with occasional agitation, the tincture is filtered and the honey is added to complete it. The chief use of paregoric is for children, to whom it is given in doses varying according to the age of the child from ten drops to a teaspoonful. The adult dose is as stated in the table. It is used in mistura glycyrrhizae comp., and in other ex- pectorant medicines. This tincture, in the Pharmacopoeia of 1830, was directed to be made with a portion of extract of liquorice, which, as it gave it a dark color, resembling that of laudanum, was substituted in the two last editions by honey. It has a rich brown color, and a rather agreeable aromatic taste. Tincture of opium is directed to be. made by macerating pow- dered opium in diluted alcohol for fourteen days, expressing and 128 GALENICAL PREPARATIONS OF OPIUM. filtering through paper. If the drug in powder is not at hand, the following formula may be used: Take of opium, sliced, one ounce and two drachms, add to it two fluidounces of water, and by the aid of a pestle and mortar, work it into a uniform pasty mass; to this add six fluidounces of water, and eight fluidounces of alco- hol making in all one pint of diluted alcohol; allow it to macerate for'two weeks, occasionally shaking it, and throw the whole upon a filter—to the pulp, remaining after the liquid has drained off, add about two fluidounces of water, which will displace the last por- tion so as to make the whole of the tincture measure exactly the P1 Laudanum is more used than any other preparation of opium. It is emploved internally in small doses, combined with stimulants, and frequently repeated to excite the nervous and arterial systems, as in the typhoid forms of disease. (See Prescriptions) It is also used by itself or in combination to allay nervous irritation, and to promote sleep and relieve pain; for these purposes, it generally requires to be given in full doses, especially when the case is ur- gent. It is sometimes employed in cancerous and other_ very pain- ful diseases, and in mania-a-potu, in doses of half a fluidrachm to one fluidrachm (60 to 120 drops), and repeated. Camphor water and compound spirit of ether are much used with it in its more strictly anodyne and sedative applications. In nervous and spas- modic affections, it is given with other antispasmodic medicines, or by itself. To expectorant mixtures it is a very frequent addition, though the camphorated tincture is generally preferable in this instance. Combined with astringents and chalk, it is much used in the treatment of diarrhoea, dysentery, and cholera morbus, and is a frequent addition to mistura cretas. For its diaphoretic effects, the best combinations contain an emetic, as wine of ipecac or of antimony, or frequently spirit of nitric ether. It is often added to castor oil, to correct griping or excessive purging froin its use. Laudanum is much used in enemeta, collyria, and in lotions of various kinds. In an enema it may be used in three times the quantity employed by the mouth, with a view to the same effect. In an eye wash, wine of opium, or a solution of the aqueous ex- tract, is preferred, as obviating the stimulant effects of the alcohol. It is frequently added to cataplasms or poultices. Laudanum is made of deficient strength by some druggists, in order to sell it cheap ; the usual wholesale price for a good article is from sixty-two to seventy-five cents per pint, or by retail, twelve to eighteen cents an ounce. If it has become turbid from the evaporation of a portion of alcohol, it is above standard strength, and should be filtered to free it from the precipitate. Acetated tincture of opium is not commonly designated by any synonym, and must be carefully distinguished from black drop, to be noticed presently. It may be prepared by macerating the opium VINEGAR OF OPIUM. 129 in powder with the vinegar and alcohol for two weeks. If the opium is in mass, it may be worked into a paste with a small por- tion of the vinegar, after which the remainder of that_ liquid and the alcohol may be added, macerating for two weeks as in the other case. This tincture is sometimes recommended in preference to lauda- num, as less liable to produce those nervous symptoms, which often follow the use of opium. As shown in the table, it is stronger than laudanum, but much weaker than black drop. Wine of Opium.—-This officinal substitute for Sydenham's lauda- num, may be made by a precisely similar process to the foregoing. It is made with a much larger proportion of opium to the quantity of menstruum employed, than laudanum, and yet the dose directed in the books is the same; this must be owing to the supposed inferior solubility of the active principles in wine, than in diluted alcohol. A great many extemporaneous prescriptions for collyria contain this ingredient. Vinegar of Opium, or Black Drop.—The strongest of the pre- parations of opium is made by a series of processes, not quite so simple as those last detailed. The opium, either in coarse powder or worked into a paste as before described, is mixed with saffron and grated nutmeg, and digested with a given quantity of diluted acetic acid, for 48 hours. This may be conveniently accomplished in an ordinary beaker glass, or, if the heat is carefully regulated, in a wide-mouth packing bottle or bowl, placed on top of a stove in a bed of sand, care being taken to avoid a heat which would boil the preparation; after straining off this first portion of the liquid, the residue is again digested, with a fresh portion of the menstruum, for 24 hours, and this drained off. In order to displace the portion of menstruum which would otherwise remain in the mass, to insure the more thorough extraction of its soluble principles, and to obtain the liquid clear, the mass is now transferred to a displacement fun- nel, and the whole of the liquid passed through it, returning the first portion till it passes clear, and continuing the process by the addition toward the last of fresh portions of the same menstruum, till exactly the required measure is obtained. The clear solution is now transferred to the vessel first employed, the sugar added to it and dissolved, and finally, should it not make exactly the required quantity of the preparation, it is further evaporated to the right point. Black drop is deservedly esteemed as a most valuable prepara- tion. The morphia it contains is in the condition of acetate; which is considered by many to be more agreeable in its mode of action, than the native meconate existing in the drug. One grain of opium being represented by 6 J minims, the dose will be only from 5 to 10 drops, because, although in the case of laudanum, two drops are ' 9 130 GALENICAL PREPARATIONS OF OPIUM. frequently required to make a minim, in this case, sugar being used instead of alcohol, the drops are larger, and frequently reach a minim in bulk. The popularity of black drop with persons who use opium ha- bitually, is one of the strongest evidences of its superiority over laudanum. I was informed by one lady, who is a victim to this vice, and who procures her black drop by the gallon, that in com- paring her own condition with that of others within the range of her acquaintance, who have used laudanum to no greater excess than she uses black drop, that while they soon exhibited in their persons the evidences of its poisonous effects, she was enabled to preserve to a great extent the natural freshness and fulness of her features; this she attributed to the form in which she took the drug. Her statement cannot of course be received as evidence of the dif- ference referred to, though it accords with the testimony of others, and also corresponds with the observation of some physicians of large experience. Solution of sulphate of morphia (U. S.), though its strength is usually estimated as stated in the syllabus, is weaker in proportion to the other preparations than is there stated. The dose is fre- quently f5ij. Magendie's solution, much used in New York and Boston, is made in the proportion of 16 grains to the fluidounce. Care should be taken in prescribing and vending this, to distinguish between it and the officinal solution. Unofficinal Solutions. Elixirs of Opium.—There are several preparations vended under this name, of which the most popular is McMunn's Elixir. This is a weaker preparation than laudanum, the common dose being varied from 20 to 40 or even 60 drops; being an aqueous solution, with probably the smallest proportion of a spirituous ingredient that is sufficient to preserve it, the drops are large and the quantity named approaches f3j. McMunn's Elixir borders on the confines of quackery, though much used by regular practitioners. Its compo- sition is concealed, although the fact of its being a nearly pure aqueous solution of opium seems generally understood. Several pharmaceutists have from time to time called attention to the supe- riority of water as a menstruum for opium. The late Augustine Duhamel was in the habit of making laudanum by digesting the opium with water alone, and adding the alcohol after filtering, believing that in this way he avoided the extraction of the resinous ingredient supposed to occasion the unpleasant after-effects. The separation of the narcotine from opium by digestion with ether previous to making laudanum from it, was at one time recom- mended, but has long since been abandoned. Eugene Dupuy, pharmaceutist of New York, published in 1851 ELIXIRS of opium. 131 the following recipe for a substitute for McMunn's Elixir, which he stated had been used for some six years with satisfaction, being found to possess the sedative property peculiar to it without any of the unpleasant effects attributed to laudanum. The proportion of opium is the same as in the officinal tinctura opii. Take of Opium.......3x. Water.......q. s. Alcohol (95 per ct.) .... fjiv. The opium is to be made into a thin pulp with water; the mix- ture allowed to stand in a cool place 48 hours, then transferred into an elongated glass funnel, containing filtering paper. A superstra- tum of water, equivalent to the bulk of the whole mass, is added. When the filtered liquid reached f.?xij, the alcohol is added to the filtered liquid, making Oj—about two thirds of the substance of the opium is contained in the solution; the resin, narcotina, &c, being chiefly contained in the residue. The dose by minims would be the same as that of laudanum. Professor Procter's recipe for a similar preparation is as follows. It is more difficult of execution and more expensive, but makes a fine preparation, and one which has been found to answer a very good purpose:— Take of Opium, in powder.....3*. Ether, Alcohol, of each.....f|iv. Aqua.......q. s. Macerate the opium in half a pint of water for two days, and express; subject the dregs to two successive macerations, using six fluidounces of water each time, with expression; mix and strain the liquors, evaporate them to two fluidounces, and agitate the liquid with the ether several times during half an hour. Then separate the ether by means of a funnel, evaporate the solution of opium to dryness, dissolve the extract in half a pint of cold water, pour the solution on a filter, and after it has passed, wash the filter with suffi- cient water to make the filtrate measure 12 fluidounces, to which add the alcohol and mix, making a pint. This has the same strength as laudanum. By the ether in this process, the odorous principle and resin dis- solved to a certain extent by the water are extracted and dissipated; any portions of thebaina, meconin, codeia and meconate of narcotine, contained in the aqueous solution, are also removed; the evaporation to dryness and re-solution in water, remove the ethereal odor, and separate a portion of acid resin and extractive. Incompatibles.—All the preparations of opium are pharmaceuti- cally incompatible with the alkalies, and their mono-carbonates generally, on account of their precipitating the morphia in an inso- 132 GALENICAL PREPARATIONS OF OPIUM. luble condition from its meconate. With acetate of lead, they give a precipitate, chiefly of meconate of lead, the morphia remaining in solution as acetate. Astringent infusions and tinctures generally throw down tannates or gallates of morphia, which are quite mso- luble Some of the metallic salts may be considered as incompa- tible'but in practice there is no difficulty in mixing small quanti- ties of laudanum with diluted solutions of these. In fact, the chief point to be observed, in the mixing of these preparations in pre- scription, is to add them after the full degree of dilution is ob- tained- in this manner they may be mixed without disturbance, in the great majority of instances, especially where, as is mostly the case, the quantity added is small. Treatment of Poisoning by Opium.—When opium is taken in quantities sufficient to produce death, the first and invariable remedy is to evacuate the stomach, by administering an active emetic dose, as, for instance, five grains of tartar emetic or sulphate of zinc, or, as is frequently more convenient and equally efficacious, large doses of mustard suspended in warm water. The patient should also be kept in motion, if possible, the face and head being splashed with cold water, when a disposition to sleep seems to be training the mastery; in this way, patients may very frequently be restored, even after taking large doses of laudanum. Instances of the kind have been of frequent occurrence within the last few years in this city. # m . Two cases have come under my own notice, in which tne gal- vanic battery has been employed as a last resort, with the effect of restoring one patient permanently, and the other temporarily, the reaction°not being sufficient in the latter instance to establish con- valescence, though life was prolonged for several weeks. Artificial respiration has occasionally been resorted to, when the prostrating influence of the poison had arrested the natural process, life being prolonged by this means, until the impression of the narcotic had passed off: recovery has been effected in this way. The Abuse of Opium.—The habitual use of the preparations of opium as a means of intoxication, is an evil, the extent of which is scarcely appreciated by the profession, or by the community at large. There are shops in the outskirts of our large cities in which the sale of laudanum forms one of the principal items of business. These peddle it out to every poor victim, who can produce a few pennies to purchase a temporary relief from imaginary pains. So common is this article of trade, that even little children are fur- nished with it, on application, as if it were the most harmless drug. It is sold in these shops at half the price maintained by respectable establishments, and there can be no doubt that its intoxicating effects are sought by many, who use it as a substitute for alcoholic drinks. Individuals who would shrink from the habitual useot spirituous liquors, employ this medicine, under a false persuasion THE ABUSE OF OPIUM. 133 that it is useful or necessary to allay some symptom of a chronic disease, until they become victims to one of the worst of habits. There is scarcely an apothecary in our large cities who cannot relate instances of opium intoxication that have come under his own notice, and been served at his own counter. Females afflicted^ with chronic disease; widows bereft of their earthly support; ine- " briates who have abandoned the bottle; lovers disappointed in their hopes; flee to this powerful drug, either in its crude form, in the form of tincture, or some of its salts, to relieve their pain of body or mind, or to take the place of another repudiated stimulant. Such, too, is the morbid taste of these, that they think they require the soporific influence of opium to fill up the measure of their life enjoyment, just as the drunkard is wedded to his cups, or the tobacco-user to the weed. The prevalence of this kind of indulgence is liable to increase in proportion as legal restrictions are placed upon the sale of alcoholic stimulants. By the so called liquor laws, the sale of spirituous liquors is also thrown into the hands of the druggist and apothe- cary ; with him rests in great measure the necessary discrimination as to the sale of these powerful agents; he must endeavor to draw the line between the purchaser who seeks them for an undue in- dulgence in their intoxicating effects, and one who will apply them to legitimate uses in disease. That this is a difficult duty cannot be denied, and its observance implies the exercise of great care and tact, as well as of moral courage. Who would sell an ounce of laudanum to an applicant whose intention to commit suicide was apparent? And yet how often is it sold to individuals, who are only protracting their suicide by the demoralizing and dissipating habit of taking it in smaller and gradually increasing quantities ? The responsibility for many cases of habitual intoxication, both with alcohol and opium, rests with the physician. Almost every apothecary of large experience has met with instances in which the parties attribute their habit to the use of these agents, for the first time, under the advice of a physician, by whose direction it has been persisted in, in some chronic case, till it has become almost impossible to desist from the indulgence. A habit among laudanum-takers, which evinces the care with which the practice is concealed from the apothecary, has fallen under my notice. A small well-washed vial is presented at the counter, and laudanum demanded; it is furnished, and labelled by the seller. The buyer consumes it all in a few hours, or days at most; he removes the label, cleanses the vial again, and presents it at another store, with the same request; and after it is used, he goes to a third, and so on perhaps to a dozen stores, till he comes to the first, again, in a few weeks after his original presentation; he may not be recognized at either place till months, or even years have rolled away, and his shrivelling skin, lemon-colored complex- ion, contracted pupil, and tremulous limbs mark him as a con- 134 GALENICAL PREPARATIONS OF OPIUM. firmed victim of this dangerous habit. The apothecary having found out his customer, remonstrates, but conscious of the act that he will buy somewhere, and that acute pain and misery will be the consequence of abstinence, feels perhaps that it is justifiable, under the circumstances, to sell; and thus the days and weeks go on, till the habit and its victim alike disappear. _ The quantity of laudanum that may be taken varies with differ- ent individuals. Those habituated to it consume from a few tea- spoonfuls to an ounce or more per day. A medical friend informed me that a child less than two years old came under his observa- tion, to whom was administered a dessertspoonful of laudanum per diem to keep it quiet, while the mother was engaged at her daily toil; 'this, of course, was the result of previous habit, originating in a small beginning. Persons who have been addicted to the use of ardent spirits, are, perhaps, more apt to use laudanum in preference to the crude drug, or any of the salts of morphia. The cheapness of the tincture over the salts is a strong reason with others. We know of a lady whose bill for sulphate of morphia during a single year, was ninety dol- lars, which, if we estimate it at the usual price, and take the daily average of the quantity consumed, would exhibit the enormous consumption of over 20 grains a day. And yet the victim of this slavery is able to attend, in some measure, to her daily pursuits, and has already attained middle age, without any evidence of organic disease. Another lady, suffering from a uterine complaint, who had been for years in the habit of using opium, at first by the advice of a physician, and subsequently from an impression of its value to her, continued it in gradually increasing doses, till the daily con- sumption of the gum and the tincture, taken alternately, amounted to many grains of the former, and half an ounce of the latter. In this case°the patient was bedridden, and suffered a great deal of pain when the system was not directly influenced by the medicine. A degree of restlessness and nervous irritability, amounting almost to spasm, when not under the effects of the drug, are charac- teristic in almost every aggravated case. One colored woman, advanced in life, who had been advised, many years before, by her physician, to employ laudanum for the relief of the painful symptoms of a chronic disease, was known for several years to take invariably f^iss of laudanum, which was pur- chased daily as required. A lady of my acquaintance, who 1 believe since recovered entirely from the habit, took for years a half grain powder of sulphate of morphia daily, sometimes perhaps twice a day. On one occasion, a man proposed to purchase at the counter a fluidounce vial of laudanum, and when the price of it was demanded, immediately swallowed the whole, as was supposed for the purpose of suicide. He was afterwards seen in the streets apparently in his usual health. * Dr. Garrod' relates a case of a young man who took one drachm HEAT FOR PHARMACEUTICAL PURPOSES. 135 Smyrna opium night and morning, and frequently from an ounce to an ounce and a half of laudanum in addition. We are informed of an instance of a lady advanced to her three- score years and ten, who, from fear of the pains of death, from day to day kept herself under the influence of this narcotic. Such was the morbid mental influence which kept her unhappy in the anti- cipation of a result which has not yet occurred. The moral responsibility connected with the question of prescrib- ing and dispensing opium, may be greater than has been hitherto acknowledged; and the few remarks here presented are designed to awaken an interest among those who by position and pursuits are best qualified to exercise a wholesome influence upon its abuse. CHAPTER VIII. THE GENERATION OF HEAT FOR PHARMACEUTICAL PURPOSES. Many of the processes directed in the Pharmacopoeia may be conducted in an ordinary cannon stove—as making infusions and decoctions, syrups, some of the extracts, all of the ointments and cerates, and some of the plasters. The various kinds of cooking stoves are still better adapted to these purposes, each having its particular advantages, and nearly all offering facilities not only for performing the processes requiring the naked fire, but also being conveniently fitted with sand and water baths, and having ovens attached which answer the purposes of the drying chambers in regular pharmaceutical furnaces or stoves. Permanent furnaces, fitted to the proper performance of every pharmaceutical process, are fully described in the work of Mohr, Eedwood, and Procter, and in that of Prof. Morfit; a detailed account of these does not fall within the scope of the present work. A few notices of cheap and convenient forms of apparatus for generating heat, especially of a portable character, may be given. The common clay furnace is much used in open chimney-places, or in the open air, charcoal being the fuel; a common bellows is employed when necessary to increase the intensity of the fire. Similar furnaces are made of cast iron, but they possess no advantages for use with charcoal. The small French hand furnace, Fig. 120, is light and portable, and preferable to the ordinary clay furnaces for table operations. Many of the operations of the pharmaceutical laboratory are conveniently performed with lamps, alcohol being the fuel. A neat and elegant alcohol lamp is that shown in Fig. 118; it has a 136 HEAT FOR PHARMACEUTICAL PURPOSES. ground o-lass cap to prevent the waste of alcohol by evaporation. In the absence of such a lamp, a common glass bottle, with rather Fig. 118. Fig. 119. Fig. 120. Glass spirit lamp. Extemporaneous glass lamp. French hand furnace. wide mouth, may be used; a perforated cork with a small glass tube about an inch long is inserted in the neck of the bottle, as shown in Fig. 119, and the wick is made to pass through this into the alcohol contained in the bottle. A small tin alcohol lamp answers about as well as any for com- mon purposes, with the exception of having no cap to prevent evaporation from the wick; such a one is here figured, Figs. 121 and 122, with a convenient stand in which to place it under a cap- sule or other vessel to be heated. Fig. 121. Fig. 122. Fig. 123. a b Tin alcohol lamp and stand. Mitchell's lamp. Another kind of alcohol lamp, familiar to all chemical students, is Mitchell's argand lamp, shown in section in Fig. 123. In this, which is usually made of tin, an argand burner is placed in the centre of a cylindrical reservoir, r, with which it communicates at bottom by small lateral tubes; the reservoir is furnished with a tube near the top at a, for the introduction of the fluid; this is stopped with a cork having a slight perforation, so as to admit the air as the alcohol is consumed. The cylindrical wick, b, which is inserted in the burner, is kept saturated with alcohol, owing to its communicating with the reservoir. When lighted at its upper edge, it burns freely, having a draft of air within as well as without the cylindrical column of flame, and generates a large amount of heat. HEAT FOR PHARMACEUTICAL PURPOSES. 137 When no longer wanted for use. the lamp should be covered by a cap over the burner, or emptied of alcohol, otherwise a great waste will occur by continued evaporation from the wick. Fig. 124 represents the argand burner on Mitchell's retort stand, in use; a great advantage is attained by the use of a chimney to surround and concentrate the flame; this may be set into the outer opening for draught between the reservoir r and the burner b (Fig. 123), so as to rest upon the little lateral tubes at the bottom; it should be long enough to project three inches above the top of the lamp. Fig. 124. Fig. 125. Mitchell's retort stand and lamp. Berzolius's lamp. Fig. 126. Fig. 125 represents Berzelius's lamp ; this is adapted to alcohol or oil; it is attached to a permanent stand, upon the upright rod of which it moves, being secured by a screw, which presses against the rod; the reservoir is here separated from the burner with which it communicates by a single tube. Another pattern has the burner in the middle of the reservoir, as in the case of Mitchell's lamp. A little screw is arranged alongside the burner to raise or depress the wick. Fig. 126 is a chimney, which is adapted to con- fine the flame within narrow limits, and to increase the draught, thus diminishing the tendency to smoke, and increasing the intensity of the heat. It may be applied either to Berzelius's or Mitchell's lamp. One of the best contrivances for generating an intense heat for those few processes in pharmacy to which it is essential, and for fusing insoluble silicates in analytical processes, and for glass blowing, and Lamp chimney. 138 HEAT FOR PHARMACEUTICAL PURPOSES. bending operations, and numerous other uses in chemical laborato- ries is the lamp here figured, which is called the Eussian lamp, or the alcohol blast lamp. _ This is shown in Fig. 127. It consists of a double copper cylin- der a inclosed at top and bottom, and surrounding an interior chamber, which extends somewhat below the bottom of the Fig. 127. Russian or alcohol hlast lamp and stove. cylinder to a permanent copper bottom, as shown in the section. Near the top of the cylinder, an open tube of the same material is soldered on at a, for the purpose of filling it; and nearly opposite, on the other side, a tube b, also of copper, is inserted; this is bent as seen in the drawing, and gradually tapering down to a small diameter, enters the internal chamber between the lower terminus of the cylinder and the bottom; it is now curved upward, and. ter- minates with a small orifice at c; a movable top d, is fitted with a handle, and so constructed as to fit tightly over the open top of the chamber. E represents a sheet iron stove or furnace in which the lamp may be placed when used, and which serves as a support for crucibles, dishes, &c. The mode of using this lamp is to fill the cylinder with alcohol by means of the tube a, till it commences to run out of the jet c, then cork up the open end of the tube a, ob- serving not to secure the cork too tightly, for fear of explosions. About two fluidounces of alcohol are now poured into the central chamber, or sufficient to cover the bottom and rise to within an inch or two of the orifice at c. This spirit being now ignited by a match, quickly heats that contained in the surrounding cylinder, and as this boils the vapor formed is forced through the tube b in a powerful jet, which, as it escapes at c, is ignited by the flame playing upon the surface of that in the chamber, and thus forms a jet of flame possessing an intense heating power; should any obstruction occur in the tube b, or at the orifice c, the apparatus might explode, but that the cork at a would be likely to be thrown HEAT FOR PHARMACEUTICAL PURPOSES. 139 out. When it is desired to stop the flame, and whenever the apparatus is to be put out of use, the cover d is placed on the top. For accomplishing fluxions with carbonated alkali, where a very intense heat is required, I have found this lamp an admirable arrangement, doing away with the necessity of a counter blowpipe. In order to apply this jet to the greatest advantage for the purpose named, a crucible jacket, F, Fig. 128, may be placed upon the projections on the top of the stove E, Fig. 127, immediately over the flame of the lamp. This is a sort of chimney made of sheet iron, and serving the double purpose of keeping the crucible from all currents of air but those highly heated by the flame, and of returning the flame back, somewhat as in a reverberatory furnace. The best fuel for pharmaceutical purposes is the coal gas now so freely and cheaply supplied Crucible jacket. in almost every considerable town. Fig. 129. The gas may be conducted by pipes into the counter or table, and terminated at any convenient point just above its surface by a 140 HEAT FOR PHARMACEUTICAL PURPOSES. suitable burner; or, preferably, it may have soldered on to the iron pipe at its terminus, a leaden one, which, being flexible, may be moved at pleasure to any desired part of the table. A very good portable apparatus, capable of being used m any part of the room, or in any room in the house, is shown in Fig. 129 ; it consists of a flexible tube of gum elastic material, which is terminated at one end by a cap to fit on to the burner of a common chandelier, pen- dant or side light, such as are suspended from the ceilings or walls of apartments for the purposes of illumination To the other end of this tube is a little stand of metal surmounted by a burner to be adapted to some of the various kinds of gas furnaces to be described in the sequel. . , ,.„ Fi 30 j6 5 3 PS 03 c 5 o c £-1 T3 a: < 03 G G 4) o c3 fl C a> CO 03 c c 03 «*-o O O g >> C C fe showing the Fluid Extracts as compared with the other Prepara- tions of the same Drugs. o 3 a" 03 CUBEBS RHUBARB. SARSAPARILLA. SENNA. VALERIAN. to 03 a d C d o d O d < C5 d >-5 "5 03 U 3 G o d 3 CO d S 03 3 a d -a c d 5 o d a. CO o 03 O 03 03 Q d 03 d a .2 d 'a s d C 03 CO © CO 03 i-3 03 G d o a 3 b a G 3» to a a i—t CO - a H ii C H 3 .5 H 3» 3ss 6 1 o 3 c >-> CO C H §ii t4-i 3 §ii 3 G < f|viii Oss Siss J4 gii 8 §i gss gss OZ oz. oz. oz. gr. Unofficinal Fluid Extracts. So numerous and important are the medicines of this class re- cently brought into notice that it seems necessary to devote con- siderable space to describing, classifying and arranging those not recognized in the Pharmacopoeia, in order to supply a want often felt and expressed by physicians and apothecaries who have not access to a full copy of the American Journal of Pharmacy, the 1 See paper on "Fluid Extracts," by Jos. Laidley, in the Stethoscope, pub- lished in Richmond, Va. 170 fluid extracts. work in which nearly all the formulas have been published from time to time. The following table embraces these Unofficinal Fluid Extracts. 1st Class.— Concentrated Si/rups. Dose. f3j Ext Cinchona, fluid Buchu " comp'd. Hydrangea " Rhubarb and senna, fluid Ergot Serpentaria " Jones Taylor Procter Parrish Butler Parrish Procter Baker Savery f I] = 3ss Oj = 3X1J f3j=^s fz- _ f senna^vj 13J — { rhub. 3ij f ^ss = 3*ss f*SJ 5= BSS f 3ss fa f^ss Transparent. Turbid. See 2d class. Cont's stim. oils. With honey. Bicarb, potassa. By eth., ale, water. See 2d class. Ext. buchu, fluid Serpentaria Taraxacum Gentian Galls Lobelia Cimicifuga 2d Class.— Alcoholic Fluid Extracts. Dos f3.i f3J "b xx 1st. 2d. 3d. 4th. Procter Weaver Taylor Procter Procter Parrish Procter m ■■ f Sj = f gj = fgss f3vj fs.i f3ij f3J f.?j f.SJ fsj = gss = §ss = §j fresh ed gj extract ss = 3J See 1st Class. Made with ether. Strongest. Suc.tarax.parat. From fresh root. " dried " Extemporaneous Contains brandy In dentistry. nb v to xxIWith acet. acid. Inx xxx IWith ether. 3d Class.— Oleo-Resins—prepared with Ether. Used in confectionery. Piperoid of ginger. Oleo-resin capsicum. Oil of male fern. " of Canada snakeroot. " of Cardamom. " of ergot. Dose Hi. xx. " of parsley. for tape-worm. in perfumery. in parturition. as a diuretic. 1st Group.— Concentrated Syrups. Fluid Extract of Cinchona. Three formulas have been contrived for making this prepara- tion, the results of which vary in their physical and medical properties. The first is that of M. Donovan, given in vol. xvii. p. 49, Amcr. Journ. Pharm., and is chiefly objectionable as being complicated, and difficult of preparation; besides, the liquid is made from the bark by repeated maceration in diluted alcohol, and by decoction with water, subsequently concentrated by evaporation. A rare salt, the dinoxalate of quinia, is added, in large proportion, to in- FLUID EXTRACT OF CINCHONA. 171 crease the strength of the preparation, and the whole is then form- ed into a very thick fluid extract, called, by Donovan, " Syrup of Bark." As far as I am aware, this has not been prepared in this country; but the prevailing idea, that quinia and cinchona are not the only proximate principles of the cinchona barks that give them their antiperiodic properties, and that the natural state of combination, in which the various principles exist, is to be preferred in certain cases, has led some of our own pharmaceutists to propose ^ormula3 for fluid extracts of bark. Isaac C. Jones, a graduate of the Philadelphia College of Phar- macy, in his inaugural thesis, proposed a preparation to be made as follows:— Take 8 ounces of calisaya bark; exhaust it completely, by dis- placement with water, acidulated with muriatic acid, in quantity not exceeding half a fluidounce. The infusion is now to be evaporated to 9 fluidounces; and, while yet hot, 14 ounces of sugar dissolved in it, which will bring it to measure a pint. Each fluidrachm of this fluid extract represents half a drachm of the bark, or about 1 grain of quinia. It becomes turbid on cooling, by the deposition of cinchonic red, which may be separated by straining or decanting it. The preparation will then be clear; but it will be observed, it contains the quinia in the form of muriate, thus disturbing the natural state of combination existing in bark. Some pharmaceutists prepare this, and furnish it when fluid extract of bark is prescribed. Alfred B. Taylor has since communicated a formula, which was published in the American Journal of Pharmacy, vol. xxiii. p. 218, which presents the constituents of bark in an unaltered condition, although turbid, and less elegant in appearance than the foregoing. It is as follows:— Take 8 ounces (Troy) of calisaya bark, exhaust it completely by displacement with diluted alcohol; evaporate to 9 fluidounces, then add 14 ounces (Troy), of sugar; continue the heat until it is dissolved, and strain while hot, if necessary. This makes a pint, each fluidrachm of which represents half a drachm of bark, or 1 grain of quinia. . In the process of evaporating the tincture, as first prepared, m the last formula, a very copious precipitate, consisting of the cin- chono-tannates, and cinchonic red, is thrown down, coating the bottom and sides of the dish or water bath. It is designed to sus- pend this, by the aid of the sugar, subsequently added. I have found an advantage in varying the process, by pouring off the con- centrated liquid into another vessel, and dissolving this precipitate in 4 fluidounces of alcohol. The sugar is now added, and be- comes saturated with this alcoholic solution; the 9 ounces of con- centrated liquid, previously poured off, being now returned, and 172 FLUID EXTRACTS. heat applied. The alcohol is nearly dissipated, while the sugar is dissolved. The result is a very complete suspension of the insolu- ble portion. . , . , , Fluid extract of cinchona is applicable to the cases in which the bark itself would be indicated; its dose, as a tonic, is usually about a fluidrachm. It is well adapted to admixture with other tonics, in the liquid form. Fluid Extracts of Buchu. Preparations of buchu have been used to some extent for many years. More than twenty years ago, Geo. W. Carpenter, of this city, advertised in his " essays" " addressed to physicians," a compound fluid extract of buchu, prepared by a secret formula, and recom- mended for diseases of the urinary organs, especially " gonorrhoea or clap, and gleets of long standing." Of latter time, since this valuable drug has come to be more generally known and appreciated, our Pharmacopceiah&s recognized an officinal infusion, and that of Dublin, a tincture. The fluid extract may be made so as to class it with those now under consideration; or may contain alcohol and thus he classed with those which follow. I shall proceed to give processes for both kinds, as also that for a compound fluid extract, which I have prepared for several years, and which has found favor with some. For the two next following recipes we are indebted to Prof. Procter. The Syrupy Fluid Extract. Take of Buchu leaves . . .8 ounces. Alcohol . . . .16 fluidounces. Water .... a sufficient quantity. Reduce the leaves to coarse powder, moisten them in a covered vessel with twelve fluidounces of the alcohol, macerate for six hours and introduce the whole into a suitable displacer. When the clear liquid has ceased to drop, add the remaining alcohol mixed with four fluidounces of water, gradually, until the displaced alcoholic liquid amounts to twelve fluidounces, which is evaporated with mod- erate heat to four fluidounces. The residue in the displacer is then treated with a pint of cold water by maceration for twelve hours, and subjected to pressure, until a pint of aqueous liquid is obtained. (Displacement is ineligible, on account of the mucilaginous charac- ter of the marc.) This is evaporated to eight fluidounces and mixed with the four fluidounces of evaporated tincture previously obtained, and eight ounces of sugar are dissolved in it by agitation. A pint of fluid extract is thus obtained from eight ounces of buchu, and a fluid drachm, the usual dose, represents half a drachm of the powdered leaves. FLUID EXTRACT OF BUCHU. 173 The Hydro-Alcoholic Fluid Extract of Buchu. Take of Buchu leaves . . .8 ounces. Alcohol . . . .16 fluidounces. Water .... a sufficient quantity. Reduce the leaves to coarse powder; moisten them with twelve fluidounces of the alcohol; macerate them for six hours, and intro- duce the whole into a suitable displacer; when the clear fluid has ceased to pass, add the remaining alcohol, mixed with four fluid- ounces of water, gradually, until the displaced alcoholic liquid amounts to twelve fluidounces, which is set aside until reduced to six fluidounces by spontaneous evaporation. The residue in the displacer is treated with water by maceration for twelve hours, and subjected to pressure until a pint of aqueous liquid is obtained. This is evaporated to ten fluidounces, mixed with the six fluidounces of evaporated tincture, and after occasional agitation for several days, may be filtered or strained, to remove the undissolved resinous and gummy matter. This is of the same strength as the preceding, and given in the same dose. It contains a little more alcohol, and no sugar. The following recipe, by Thomas Weaver, is an improvement on the foregoing, producing an elegant and very strong though less mucilaginous preparation. It is here published for the first time:— Take of Buchu (finely powdered) . 8 ounces. Ether . . 4 fluidounces. Alcohol . . . .12 fluidounces. Diluted alcohol . . sufficient. Mix the ether and alcohol, and having packed the powdered buchu in a tall displacer, pass the mixture through it, then add sufficient diluted alcohol to obtain a pint of the tincture. Put the ethereal liquid, thus obtained, in a porcelain capsule, and allow it to evaporate to five fluidounces. Upon the mass in the percolator, pour, gradually, diluted alcohol until ten fluidounces of tincture have passed; mix this with the five fluidounces before obtained, and dissolve in a fluidounce of alcohol the oleo-resinous matter left in the dish and add it to the rest, after standing in a closed bottle for several hours, and occasionally shaking up: filter. This is a dark-colored hydro-alcoholic liquid, with a tendency to the formation of globules of essential oil on the surface, and possessed in a very high degree of the characteristic odor and taste of the drug. The Compound Fluid Extract of Buchu. Take of Buchu in coarse powder . 12 ounces. Alcohol .... 3 pints. AVater .... 6 pints, or sufficient. 174 FLUID EXTRACTS. Treat the leaves by maceration and displacement, first with a portion of the alcohol, and then with the remainder mixed with the water; evaporate the resulting liquid by a gentle heat to 3 pints, and to this add Sugar .... 2| pounds. Continue the heat till it is dissolved, and, after removing from the fire, add— Oil of cubebs, Oil of juniper, of each . one fluidrachm. Spirit of nitric ether . . twelve fluidounces. Previously mixed; stir the whole together. It will be perceived that this preparation, although it contains a portion of sugar sufficient to impart sweetness to the taste, does not owe its permanence to that ingredient. The oils of cubebs and juniper, and the spirit of nitric ether, are not only useful as therapeutic agents in the majority of cases in which cubebs would be used, but act as antiseptics, and would render the preparation permanent without the presence of alcohol or sugar. It has been found a useful preparation, and is well adapted by- its composition, to chronic maladies of the urino-gemtal organs, appearing to act topically in its passage through them. Fluid Extract of Hydrangea. The root of hydrangea arborescens, an indigenous plant found in many parts of the United States, was introduced to the notice of the medical profession by Dr. S. W. Butler, of Burlington, N.J, through the New Jersey Medical Beporter. Dr. Butler states that bis father, who is connected with the mission to the Cherokees, learned of them the merits of this plant in the treatment of gravel and stone, and has himself, for many years, employed it in the course of an extensive practice among a people peculiarly subject to these complaints; he considers it as a most valuable medicine, and possessed, perhaps, of specific properties claiming for it a trial at the hands of practitioners. Dr. Butler's formula is as follows:— Take of the Root of hydrangea . . . 2 pounds. Water.....12 pints. Boil to four pints, strain, and add Honey.....2 pints. Boil further to two pints. We have modified it thus:— Take of Hydrangea . . . 16 ounces Water .... 6 pints, or sufficient. FLUID EXTRACT OF RHUBARB AND SENNA. 175 Boil the root in successive portions of water, mix them, and evaporate to half a pint; mix this with Honey.....2 pints and evaporate to 2 pints. In the summer season push the eva- poration somewhat farther, and add brandy, half a pint. The dose is a teaspoonful twice or three times a day. I have prepared fluid extract of hydrangea for several years, during which time I have dispensed it, under the direction of several practitioners, to numerous patients, and with general satis- factory results, in irritable conditions of the urethra, though its value as a specific remedy requires confirmation. The plant is abundant on the west banks of Schuylkill, about six to eight miles above Philadelphia. Fluid Extract of Bhubarb and Senna. The peculiar fitness of rhubarb and senna to be associated together in one cathartic preparation, so as to modify and assist each other, has led Prof. Procter to propose a fluid extract pre- pared as follows: (See Am. Journ. Pharm., vol. xxv. p. 23.) Take of Senna, in coarse powder . . twelve ounces. Rhubarb .... four ounces. Bicarbonate of potassa . . half ounce. Sugar.....eight ounces.- Tincture of ginger . . a fluidounce. Oil of cloves .... eight minims. " aniseed . . . sixteen minims. Water and alcohol, of each . a sufficient quantity. Mix the senna and rhubarb (by grinding them together in a convenient way), pour upon them two pints of diluted alcohol, allow them to macerate 24 hours, and introduce the mixture into a percolator, furnished below with a stopcock or cork, to regulate the flow. A mixture of one part of alcohol and three of water, should now be poured on above, so as to keep a constant, but slow displacement of the absorbed menstruum, until one gallon of tinc- ture has passed. Evaporate this in a water bath to eleven fluid- ounces ; dissolve in it the sugar and bicarbonate of potassa, and after straining, add the tincture of ginger, holding the oils in solu- tion, and mix; when done, the whole should measure a pint. The object in adding the alkaline carbonate in this fluid extract, is to prevent the griping which is apt to result from the use of the senna. The aromatics contribute to the same end. In making this and other fluid extracts, observe precautions under head of evaporation. 176 FLUID EXTRACTS. Fluid Extract of Ergot. This preparation was originally described by Jos. Laidley, of Richmond, Va., in a paper published in the Stethoscope, Jan. 1852, in which however, the recipe for its preparation was not given in the usual way. Since that time, the following was published by T. Roberts Baker, of the same place. (See Am. Journ. Pharm., vol. xxvii. p. 302.) Take of Ergot, freshly powdered . 2 lbs. com. Ether, Alcohol (80 per cent.), Water, Simple syrup, of each . sufficient. 1st. Displace the ergot with ether until it comes through nearly colorless, and evaporate spontaneously to procure the oil. 2d. Displace with alcohol to exhaustion, and evaporate by water bath (or regulated heat) to a thin syrupy consistence. 3d. Displace with water to exhaustion, and evaporate the result- ing liquid as fast as obtained, to guard against chemical changes. Then strain to separate albumen, and mix with the alcoholic ex- tract, continuing the evaporation to a syrupy consistence. Incor- porate the evaporated mixture first with the oil as obtained by the ether, and then with sufficient simple syrup to make up the mea- sure of two pints. To each fluidrachm of this add one minim of oil of peppermint. The dose is f 3j = 9ij of the powder. Fluid Extract of Serpentaria. The first published formula which appeared for a concentrated preparation of this valuable indigenous root was by John B. Savery, in his inaugural thesis in the American Journal of Pharmacy, vol. xxiii. p. 119. It is as follows:— Take of Virginia snakeroot, Sugar, in powder, of each . eight ounces. Water, Alcohol, of each ... a sufficient quantity. The root is to be finely ground, and after having macerated for a day or two in a pint of alcohol, is to be introduced into a dis- placer, and diluted alcohol poured on it until four pints shall have passed. The tincture thus obtained, should be evaporated with a gentle heat and constant agitation, until it measures 12 fluidounces; the sugar is then to be dissolved, and the whole to be strained through flannel. This forms a clear, syrupy liquid (any resinous matter separated on mixing the more aqueous with the strong alcoholic tincture is dissolved on the addition of the sugar); it is free from the objection of containing an inconvenient quantity of FLUID EXTRACT OF TARAXACUM. 177 alcohol, which pertains to the tincture, while the intense bitterness and powerful camphoraceous taste of the drug, are relieved by the presence of the sugar. The dose is half a fluidrachm, representing 15 grains of the root. Alfred B. Taylor's process, vol. xx. p. 207, Am. Journ. Pharmacy, yields a preparation double the strength of the above, and belong- ing to the second class of fluid extracts. It is as follows:— Take of Serpentaria, bruised . . twelve ounces. Alcohol, Water, of each ... a sufficient quantity. Mix the serpentaria with 12 ounces of alcohol, and allow it to stand for twenty-four hours; then transfer it to a percolator, and pour alcohol gradually upon it, until a pint and a half of filtered liquor is obtained. Place this in an evaporating dish, and allow it to evaporate spontaneously, until reduced to six fluidounces. To the root, exhausted by alcohol, add water and displace till it is ex- hausted, or until about three pints have passed; evaporate this portion in a water bath to six fluidounces, mix the two parts together and filter. Each fluidounce of this represents one ounce of the root. Dose, from 15 to 45 drops. Unofficinal Fluid Extracts of the Second Class. Those containing alcohol as their antiseptic ingredient. Several fluid extracts are made indiscriminately, so as to contain sugar or alcohol, or sometimes both, as the antiseptic ingredient. The fluid extracts of buchu and serpentaria, already spoken of, and several to be now introduced, are instances of this kind. Fluid Extract of Taraxacum. {Liquor Taraxaci) 1st Process. (By Prof. Procter, 1848.) Take of fresh dandelion root, collected in September or October, 32 ounces; slice it transversely, and reduce it to a pulp by bruis- ing; mix this with one-sixth of its bulk of alcohol; macerate for 24 hours; then express strongly; add a pint of water containing a little alcohol, and again express; evaporate the liquid to 12 fluidounces; add 4 fluidounces of alcohol, and filter. A teaspoon- ful of this fluid extract represents half a drachm of extract of dan- delion obtained from'the fresh juice, which is several times the strength of that obtained by boiling the roots in water. If alcohol should be objected to, 8 ounces of sugar may replace it in the above, it being dissolved by agitation. 12 178 FLUID EXTRACTS. In this country, every one may obtain fresh roots of dandelion at the proper season, and may make the preparation but once a year; but where this is neglected, the carefully preserved dried root may be substituted, 16 ounces being equal to 32 of the fresh. The dried root is to be powdered coarsely, and treated with alcohol and water by maceration, expressed, evaporated, and finished as directed. 2d Process. (By Prof. Procter, 1853.) Take of Fresh dandelion root . 20 pounds (com.). Alcohol (835°) . . . 4 pints. Slice the roots transversely, in short sections, and by means of a mill or mortar and pestle, reduce them to a pulpy mass; then add the alcohol, and mix them thoroughly. The mixture thus far pre- pared at the season when the root is proper for collection, may be set aside in suitable vessels (stoneware jars are appropriate), and extracted as the preparation is needed through the other seasons. After having stood a week, or until a convenient time, the pulpy mass is subjected to powerful pressure, until as much as possible of the fluid is removed. This is then filtered and bottled for use. It is necessary that sufficient time should elapse after the pulp is set aside for the alcohol to penetrate the fibrous particles and com- mingle with the natural juices, as well as for the woody structure of the root to lose its elasticity, that it may yield the juice more completely on pressure. When the pulp has stood six months in this, it yields the juice with great readiness, and possessed of the sensible properties of the dandelion in a marked degree. When eight pounds, avoirdupois, of the root are thus treated, after standing several months, the practical result is about six pints of fluid with an ordinary screw press. This yield will vary in amount with the condition of the root when collected, and the length of time it is exposed afterwards, as well as the power of press used. Should the alcohol in this preparation be contraindicated, it might be par- tially removed by exposure in a water bath until the juice was reduced to five-sixths of its bulk; then for every pint of the resi- due, eight officinal ounces of sugar may be dissolved in it. The name Succus Taraxaci Paratus has been applied to this preparation, which resembles the English preserved juice. 3 c? Process. Macerate four pounds of the recently dried root, in sufficient cold water, for 24 hours, expressing and evaporating to 36 fluid- ounces, to which liquid 12 fluidounces of alcohol is added; hence each fluidounce of the preparation represents an ounce of the drkd root. The evaporation of an aqueous solution of taraxacum is almost sure to have an unfavorable effect on its medical properties; it is UNOFFICINAL FLUID EXTRACTS. 179 well known that the solid extract, when prepared by the old pro- cess of decoction and evaporation in an exposed water bath, is greatly inferior to the best inspissated juice prepared in vacuo. 4:th Process. The only remaining process to be noticed, is that for preparing the fluid from the solid extract, which is only employed where ex- pedition is the desideratum. The following is the formula:— Take of Extract of dandelion, U. S. P. four ounces. Alcohol . . . ... one fluidounce. Water.....a sufficient quantity. Triturate the extract with the water and the alcohol, and apply a gentle heat, till it is dissolved, taking care that the product mea- sures just half a pint. These processes yield a liquid which is substantially the same in physical and medical properties. The usual dose is a teaspoonful. It is a more convenient preparation for ordinary use than the solid extract, which is not well adapted to the pilular form, on account of the largeness of its dose. Fluid Extract of Gentian. The following formula of Prof. Procter produces one of the most elegant of fluid extracts, well adapted to supersede the tincture of gentian, and by combination with aromatics or laxatives, to furnish a substitute for the different tonic tinctures given on p. 113. Take of Gentian, in coarse powder, sixteen ounces. Water .... a sufficient quantity. French brandy . . six fluidounces. Macerate the gentian in two and a half pints of water for twelve hours, and having introduced it into a suitable percolator, allow the infusion to pass slowly, adding water at intervals, until five pints of liquid have passed. Evaporate this to ten fluidounces by means of a water bath, add the brandy, and strain through cotton flannel; this fluid extract may be given in doses of half a tea- spoonful to a teaspoonful, which represent half a drachm to a drachm of the root. " When it is desirable to associate aromatics, they may be added in the form of tincture, in place of a part of the brandy, or the aro- matics in substance may be extracted by the brandy, and the tinc- ture thus formed added to the evaporated solution of gentian." Fluid Extract of Lobelia. The chemical and pharmaceutical history of lobelia inflata, one of our most interesting and valuable indigenous plants, is connected with the labors of Wm. Procter, Jr., now Professor of Pharmacy in 180 FLUID EXTRACTS. the Philadelphia College of Pharmacy, and editor of the American Journal of Pharmacy. In 1837, he wrote his inaugural thesis for o-raduation in the institution, with which he is now so honorably connected, on lobelia. In this paper, which was published in the Journal (vol. ix. p. 98), he gave a full chemical history of the plant, and proved the existence in it of a peculiar alkaline acrid principle, for which he proposed the name of lobelina. Subsequently, in 1841, he called attention in a paper published in vol. xiii. p. 1, to lobelina and some other principles of the plant, and snowed the advantage of fixing this alkaloid by the use of an acid, in making those preparations of lobelia requiring the applica- tion of heat. In 1842, he again appears in the Journal in an article on some preparations of this drug, in which the principles already ascertained are applied in practice. The acetous extract, vinegar and syrup, there introduced, have not been made officinal, but the former is introduced under its appropriate heading in this work. In 1852, the fluid extract of lobelia was proposed by Prof. Proc- ter, and the following formula published in vol. xxiv. p. 207 of the Journal:— Take of Lobelia (the plant), finely bruised . eight ounces. Acetic acid.....one fluidounce. Diluted alcohol .... three pints. Alcohol......six fluidounces. Macerate the lobelia in a pint and a half of the diluted alcohol, previously mixed with the acetic acid, for twenty-four hours; intro- duce the "mixture into an earthen displacer; pour on slowly the remainder of the diluted alcohol, and afterwards water, until three pints of tincture are obtained; evaporate this in a water bath to ten fluidounces; strain ; add the alcohol, and, when mixed, filter through paper. Each teaspoonful of this preparation is equal to half a fluid- ounce of the tincture. The dose would vary from five drops, as a narcotic and expectorant, to twenty or thirty as an emetic. Fluid Extract of Galls. The following is for a preparation which has been occasionally used by dentists in Philadelphia; as it may be called for in the course of practice, it is introduced here:— Take of Galls, in coarse powder . Iviij. Alcohol .... sufficient to make a pint. Extract by displacement. Used as a powerful astringent application. Fluid Extract of Cimicifuga. In an article on the pharmacy of cimicifuga, Prof. Procter pro- poses the following formula, which has been found very satisfactory UNOFFICINAL OLEO RESINS. 181 both pharmaceutically and medically. (See Am. Journ. of Pharm., vol. xxvi. p. 106.) Take of Black snakeroot (recently dried) . sixteen ounces. Ether......half a pint. Alcohol......one pint. Diluted alcohol .... a sufficient quantity. -Powder the black snakeroot and introduce it into a displacer, suited to volatile liquids; pour upon it the ether mixed with the strong alcohol, closing the lower orifice, so that the liquid shall pass by drops. When the menstruum disappears above, imme- diately add diluted alcohol until the filtered tincture measures a pint and a half; set this aside in a capsule in a warm place until it ' is reduced to half a pint, and has lost its ethereal odor; meanwhile continue the percolation with diluted alcohol until two pints more tincture are obtained. Evaporate this in a water bath to eight fluid- ounces, and mix it gradually with the first product so as to avoid as much as possible the precipitation of the resin from the latter. After standing a few hours, the fluid extract should be filtered, and, if it does not measure a pint, add sufficient alcohol to make that measure. If the amount of resin precipitated is considerable, it may be separated by a cloth strainer, redissolved in a little alcohol, and added to the solution, which should then be filtered. As thus prepared, the fluid extract has a dark, reddish-brown color, like laudanum; is transparent, and possesses the bitter dis- agreeable taste of the root, in a marked degree. A fluidrachm re- presents about a drachm of the root. The dose usually given is from thirty to sixty drops. Unofficinal Fluid Extracts of the Third Class. Oleo Besins. Ginger, capsicum, filix mas, asarum Canadense, cardamom, pars- ley, ergot and mustard, yield more or less fluid oily extracts, on the evaporation of their ethereal tinctures. As these have been but little called for, there has been very little written about them, and I shall proceed to state what I have ascertained by experiment and learned from the limited sources at command. Oleo Besin, or Piperoid of Ginger. Treat powdered ginger by displacement, with a mixture of one part of alcohol and four of ether, until nearly exhausted of its taste and odor; expose this ethereal tincture to spontaneous evaporation, until deprived of the odor of ether. The resulting oleo-resin, is a dark brown, transparent, oily liquid, extremely pungent, insoluble in water, but soluble in ether and strong alcohol. Ginger is said 132 FLUID EXTRACTS. to contain about U p. ct. vol. oil, and 3/, p. ct. soft, resin The proportion yielded by the root, treated as above, varies with the commercial variety of ginger. A commercial pound of African mno-er yielded, by this process, one and a half ounces, or 9 3 per cent while the same quantity of the Jamaica variety yielded only one ounce-6.2 per cent. That from the African was darker in color thicker, and somewhat less pleasant than the other. One ounce of the piperoid added to twenty pounds of melted sugar, made " ginger drops" of about the usual pungency. Oleo Besin of Capsicum.—Capsicum is said to owe its intense fiery taste, and its powerful stimulating properties, to a peculiar soft resin, called capsicin, about four per cent, of which is said to exist in the fruit deprived of seeds. The preparation named above, is an impure form of this. It is too powerful for convenient use. Oil of Male Fern.—Oil of filix mas, usually extracted from the powdered rhizome, is used as a remedy for tape-worm. It is ex- tracted by ether, which is afterwards allowed to evaporate spontane- ously, and leaves a dark green colored oily liquid, having the odor of the plant. It is a favorite with the "eclectics." Oil of asarum Canadense is used chiefly as a perfume ; it is also gratefully stimulant in small doses, being not unlike ginger in some of its properties. Oil of cardamom, prepared with ether, is an impure oily fluid, containing both the fixed and volatile oil of the seeds, and esteemed a powerful carminative stimulant; it is little known to practitioners. Oil of parsley is a diuretic remedy in esteem among the "eclectics." I have prepared it by the spontaneous evaporation of an ethereal tincture. It is highly charged with the odor of the plant, of which it is probably the chief active constituent. Oil of Ergot—Under this name a brown colored, acrid, oily liquid is sold in the shops, which is obtained by treating powdered ergot with ether, or a mixture of ether and alcohol, and evaporating off the menstruum. Its most bulky ingredient is the peculiar bland fixed oil, which, according to the experiments of T. Roberts Baker, is nearly isomeric with castor oil. My friend, Ambrose Smith, informs me that he has found oil of ergot, when made with pure ether, to become inconveniently thick—almost solid; which difficulty is obviated by adding a portion of alcohol to the ether employed. Although the pure fixed oil is destitute of any of the effects of ergot, this preparation, owing to its other ingredients, is more or less active. Its dose, in cases of labor, to promote uterine contractions, is from 20 to 50 drops. SIMPLE SYRUP. 183 CHAPTER XII. OF SYRUPS. This class of pharmaceutical solutions is distinguished by con- taining sugar as the antiseptic ingredient. The kind of sugar used in the officinal preparations, is that named in the list of the Pharmacopoeia, saccharum, and called, commonly white, sometimes loaf sugar, or, as more commonly met with now, broken down or crushed sugar. This, as supplied to our markets by several large refineries, is nearly chemically pure cane sugar, and requires no further preparation for pharmaceutical use. It is soluble in less than half its weight of water; to a less extent in alcohol, and in- soluble in ether. It crystallizes from its solution in the form of oblique rhombic crystals, containing water, and called, as found in the shops, rock candy. The advantages of the use of sugar in pharmaceutical prepara- tions are, 1st. Its agreeable taste. 2d. The viscidity and bland- ness of its solution. 3d. Its conservative properties, when in sufficient proportion. It is chiefly objectionable in cases where, from want of tone in the digestive organs, it is liable to produce acidity of stomach, with its attendant symptoms. Syrups are most used as expectorants, and in the treatment of the diseases of children, with whom a sweet taste goes far to reconcile otherwise disagreeable properties of a medicine. They are, also, much used with other and more active medicines, as adjuvants and vehicles. The first of this class to be noticed, is Syrupus. {Simple Syrup) Take of Sugar . . 2 pounds and a half. Water . . 1 pint. Dissolve the sugar in the water by the aid of heat. Syrup is a viscid liquid, constituted of two-thirds sugar, and one- third water, and having a specific gravity, when boiling hot, of 1.261 (30° Baume'); or when cold, 1.319 (35° Baume'). It is of a pure sweet taste, without odor, when freshly prepared. The boil- ing point is fixed at 221° F. The proportion of sugar in syrup is a matter of primary import- ance, as, owing to the presence of minute quantities of nitrogenized principles which are apt to be accidentally present, even in simple 184 OF SYRUPS. syrup, fermentation will be set up, unless the syrup has the full officinal proportion, which is about two parts, by weight, of sugar, to one of water (14,400 grs. to 7290). In weighing so large a quantity, precise accuracy is not necessary, and in practice it is found expedient to substitute two pounds com- mercial, for two and a half of the officinal weight, thus reducing the proportion slightly, but simplifying the formula, which is then, for simple syrup— Take of Sugar . . 2 lbs. (commercial). Water . . 1 pint. Dissolve by the aid of heat. The 2 pounds of sugar, when dissolved, are about equivalent to 1 pint of the liquid, by measure, so that the syrup resulting from the above quantities, would just about measure 2 pints. It is, then, important to bear in mind the rule, which may be thus abbre- viated : Two parts of sugar are required by one part of water, and make two parts of syrup. In the absence of extraneous, and particularly of nitrogenized principles, a syrup will keep well enough in cold weather, without reference to its proportions ; but in a majority of instances of medi- cated syrups, it is absolutely necessary to observe the above well- established rule, which insures a nearly saturated saccharine so- lution. If impure or brown sugar is employed, it is necessary to boil the syrup until the proper specific gravity is attained ; skimming or straining off the scum which contains the impurities; but when the sugar is pure, this is unnecessary. If impurities are diffused in the liquid, which will not readily rise as scum, it is well to add a little white of egg, which, by its coagulating at the boiling temperature, forms a clot, inclosing the impurities, and facilitating their removal. A richer and more elegant syrup is produced by the use of Havana sugar, clarified in this way, than from the best refined sugar, and some of our best pharmaceutists use this process for their mineral water syrups, on account of its superior product, though so much more troublesome. In some of the medicated syrups, a boiling temperature is directed, in order that the vegetable albumen contained in the medicinal ingredient may be coagulated, and thus separated. In others, the presence in the drug, or in the menstruum employed, of antiseptic properties, insures the permanence of the preparation. Syrup of squill is an instance, in which, owing to the presence of the antiseptic element, acetic acid, in the menstruum, we are enabled to reduce the proportion of sugar somewhat below that necessary in other instances. Among the articles not unfrequently added to syrups, to prevent fermentation, the following may be mentioned:— OFFICINAL SYRUPS. 185 Essential oils, which, of course, greatly modify the taste and other properties of the preparation, as in compound syrup of sarsaparilla. Brandy, which, though not officinally directed, is much used, with aromatics. Glycerin, which does not alter the taste or other pro- perties of the preparation. Hoffman's anodyne, which is one of the very best antiseptics, though liable to the objection of imparting an ethereal odor and taste. It should, however, be added in small quantity only; 1 part, by measure, to 75 of syrup, which is stated to be proper, seems to me unnecessarily large. One fluidrachm to a pint, has generally answered the purpose. After these preliminary observations, the medicated syrups, classi- fied with reference to their mode of preparation, may be intro- duced. Syrupi, U.S. P. 1st CLASS.—Infusions or Decoctions rendered permanent by Sugar. Officinal name. Preparation. Use. Dose. Syrupus aurantii corticis " sennaa (with fennel) " kramerise " pruni Virgini-an ae " senegge " scillae comp. By maceration with b. water By digestion with hot water By displacement with cold water By decoction a As an adjuvant Laxative Astringent Sedative and tonic expectorant Stim. expectorant a f§j to fgij. fgss. ii f 3j to^'j-ni20tof3j. We have, in the above class, instances of three processes. In the treatment of orange-peel and senna, heat is applied below the boiling point, so as to form hot infusions. In the case of rhatany and wild cherry, cold infusions, by displacement, are directed, while seneka, and the mixed seneka and squill, are to be boiled in water, and the decoctions, after being strained and evaporated, are, like the others, made into syrup by the requisite addition of sugar. In syrup of orange-peel, the fresh rind of the sweet, or Havana orange, is preferred to the bitter orange-peel, prescribed in the various tonic preparations, this syrup being used for its flavor rather than for any medicinal effect. (See Orange Syrup.) Syrup of senna is generally superseded by fluid extract of senna, which is preferred, owing to the comparative smallness of its dose. Syrups of rhatany and of wild cherry leave nothing to be desired for their respective uses. The latter is one of the most popular and really valuable of remedies, being much used in pulmonary affections, connected with an atonic condition of the system. Syrup of seneka, and compound syrup of squill, are made either by the process of decoction, as above, when haste is an object, or 186 of syrups. otherwise, by the use of alcohol, as in the 2d Class, now to be introduced. Class II.—Extracted with Alcohol and Water, by displacement, concen- trated by evaporation, and completed by the addition of Sugar. Officinal name. Proportion. Use. Dose. Syrupus ipecacuanhae " senegae (2d process) " scillge comp. " rhei " sarsaparillae comp. 1 fss in Oi of the syrup Squill and seneka, -j-tart. emetic, gr. j to fgj gj in Oj of the syrup Sarsaparilla, guaiacum, roses, senna, liquor-ice root, and oils oi sassafras, anise, anc partridge berry Expectorant Laxative Alterative f3J to f 188. f3i *o f3'j-gtt.xxtof^j. f 3 sstofjiv. fSss. The simplest statement of this process for making syrups, is the following: Of the drug, properly powdered, make a tincture by displacement. Evaporate this in a capsule, to the point named in the Pharmacopoeia; thus getting rid of the alcohol contained in it. Now add sugar, in the proportion of two parts to one of the liquid, and dissolve it by the aid of heat. Of this very important class each individual should be carefully studied, and in making them the officinal directions must be accu- rately observed. The valuable comments of the Dispensatory will be found to aid in estimating the comparative value of these, as of most other preparations adverted to in this work, but no study will equal the knowledge gained by actual experience, both in their preparation and use. Syrup of ipecac, as it is now generally called, although not a strong preparation, is one of the most useful expectorants we have, and in domestic practice is perhaps the most popular in Philadel- phia. It is particularly adapted to the treatment of the catarrhs of children. The dose may be so regulated as to produce a gentle relaxing, or, in the case of children, a powerful emetic effect, with the advantage of causing neither stimulating nor depressing after-effects.1 Syrup of Seneka is the most stimulating of its class; its use is indicated in chronic catarrh not accompanied by inflammatory 1 The process for making it may be varied, according to the suggestion of Joseph Laidley, of Richmond, Va., as follows : Make a concentrated tincture of ipecacuanha with strong alcohol, and evaporate it so that two fluidounces shall represent an ounce of the root; add a fluidounce of this to half a pint of simple syrup ; evaporate to six fluidounces, and add eight fluidounces of syrup and two of water, which, when mixed, will constitute one pint of syrup of ipecac of the officinal strength, and less liable to fer- ment from containing no gum nor starch, nor ferment of any kind. I do not recollect to have met with any difficulty in keeping this syrup in midsummer, when prepared by the officinal formula. OFFICINAL SYRUPS. 187 action ; it is seldom urged so as to produce its emetic effect, except in combination with other remedies. CoxJs hive syrup (syrupus scillse compositus) has been for many years a very popular remedy in croup. As originally prepared, it contained honey, which, being by many objected to from its alleged liability to ferment, was changed in the Pharmacopoeia of 1840 to sugar, and the preparation was thus removed from mellita to syrupi. As now prepared, it is not popular either among physi- cians or pharmaceutists, the former regarding it as therapeutically, and the latter as pharmaceutically, objectionable. The officinal process for preparing it would be improved by the substitution of diluted alcohol for the weak alcoholic menstruum directed in pre- paring the tincture in the first part of the process. The precaution should not be neglected in this instance, as also in syrup of senega, of boiling this diluted alcoholic preparation during the evaporation and filtering, before adding the sugar. A copious coagulation of the vegetable albumen takes place at the boiling temperature, the removal of which on the filter obviates, to a great extent, the tend- ency to fermentation in the resulting syrup. The solution of the tartar emetic in the syrup should be accomplished while it is hot, by trituration in a mortar, as prescribed under the head of Solution. In cases of croup, it is customary to increase the dose very much above that mentioned in the books, or to repeat it every fifteen or twenty minutes till the patient vomits. The dose for a child one year old may be ten drops, for one of two years fifteen, of three years twenty-five drops, and so on, repeated as above. Simple syrup of rhubarb is very extensively used as a mild cathartic for children. Its mode of preparation is precisely that indicated for the class; its dose is from fsj to f3ss for children; that given in the Syllabus is adapted to adults. Compound syrup of sarsaparilla is manufactured in very large quantities by regular pharmaceutists, and, after many fluctuations, has an extended reputation among practitioners of medicine, as well as the public at large. Its chief use is in skin diseases, and in syphilitic and scrofulous cases, in which it is used both alone and combined with mercurials, iodides, &c. Its composition is similar, though not identical with the fluid extract; it contains, besides the soluble principles of sarsaparilla, those of guaiacum-wood, red roses, senna, and liquorice-root, extracted by diluted alcohol, evaporated, and made into a syrup, as before indicated for the syrups of this class. For the improvement of its flavor, and as antiseptics, the oils of anise, sassafras, and partridge-berry are directed to be added. The extensive range'of diseases to which sarsaparilla is applicable, and the harmless character of the remedy, have made it a great favorite with empirics, so that there are an immense number of quack medicines sailing under its name, and not a few called alter- atives and panaceas, which contain it as one of their ingredients. So numerous and so generally popular were these several years 188 OF SYRUPS. ago, that the period of their greatest popularity, from 1845 to 1850, has been called among druggists the " sarsaparilla era." Many of these, as the notorious Townsend's, the chief merit of which was its great dilution and the large size of the bottles in which it was put up, have gone into disuse, while a few are yet in demand. It is greatly to be regretted that educated physicians should so frequently lend their influence to the empiric by countenancing, and even recommending these medicines, some of which may no doubt be found useful in their hands, but, besides the disadvantage of our being ignorant of their composition, are generally inferior to the officinal and other published preparations in medicinal virtues. Class III.—Syrups containing Acetic Acid. Syrupus Allii. By maceration of garlic in dil. acet. acid, sugar being after- wards added. Antispasmodic. Dose, fgj. " Scillae. Vinegar of squill Oj -f- sugar Ifeij. Expectorant. Dose, f^j. Of these, the first is but rarely used ; but the second is an ex- tremely common expectorant, used both by itself and in combina- tion with camphorated tincture of opium, tincture of digitalis, syrup of ipecac, and with other medicines. The presence of the acetic element takes from this preparation the cloying character which belongs to the syrups generally. Class IV.—Having Simple Syrup as a base. Officinal Name. Preparation. Use. Dose. Syrupus acidi citrici " kramerioe " tolutanus " zingiberis " rhei aromaticus 3j to Oj + oil of lemon mj (Second process) ext. ^j to Oj ( U. S. P. 1840) tinct. f £vj to 6} (U.S. P. 1840) " fgsstoOJ (See page 189). Adjuvant & vehicle Astringent Adjuvant it Carminat'e &lax'tive fgss. f3ijtoffr Citric acid syrup is used as a substitute for lemon syrup, and, when the ingredients are of good quality and well prepared, is a far pleasanter article; it is much used largely diluted with water, in which form it is called lemonade. It is also well adapted to use as an excipient in extemporaneous prescription.1 Syrup of rhatany, which has been introduced among the first class, may also be made extemporaneously, as above, from the offi- cinal extract by dissolving it in syrup with the aid of heat. Ginger and Tolu syrups are made, according to the last edition of the Pharmacopoeia, by impregnating sugar with the proper propor- tion of the tincture, stated in the syllabus, and driving off the alcohol by heat, after which the sugar is dissolved in the requisite quantity of water. This process is troublesome, and its only 1 See Mineral Water Syrups. UNCLASSIFIED SYRUPS. 189 advantage is that the syrup thus prepared is somewhat clearer than that by the old process, of adding the tincture directly to hot sim- ple syrup, which plan I find most convenient and satisfactory for common purposes. These two syrups have been made the subject of comment by several pharmaceutists: first, by the late John D. Finley, in an inaugural thesis ; afterwards by Joseph Laidley ; and more recently by Professor Procter. They agree in preferring the trituration of a concentrated tincture with carbonate of magnesia and a small portion of sugar, thus making an aromatized water, which is ren- dered clear by filtration and converted into a syrup by the addition of sugar in the usual way. The same plan is recommended for making syrup of orange-peel. Spiced syrup of rhubarb (syr. rhei aromat.) is the most familiar remedy for the so-called summer complaint of children, the form of diarrhoea, usually connected with teething, so extremely prevalent and fatal in our large cities during the intense heat of summer. It has the advantage of being a warming tonic or stomachic, as well as a very mild laxative, and is given in doses from a teaspoonful for an infant of a year old to a tablespoonful or more for older children and adults. The formula for its preparation, reduced so as to make one and a half pints of the syrup, and somewhat modi- fied in phraseology, is as follows:— Take of Khubarb.....five drachms. Cloves and cinnamon, each . one drachm Nutmeg ..... half a drachm. Eeduce to a uniform coarse powder, pack them into a small perco- lator, and pour upon them gradually diluted alcohol, frequently repassing the first portion until half a pint of clear tincture is obtained; then evaporate to four fluidounces, and add syrup (while hot) one and a half pints. An old recipe for this preparation, credited to the late Dr. James, and preferred in practice by my father, the late Dr. Joseph Parrish, and some contemporaneous practitioners, prescribes a considerable portion of French brandy, not to be evaporated, but retained in the syrup when finished. To meet this preference, the rhubarb and aromatics may be displaced with brandy, which may be mixed with a somewhat smaller proportion of syrup, the evaporation being dispensed with altogether.1 Unclassified Syrups.2 Syrupus Amygdalis 1 p. bitter almonds, 3 p. sweet almonds Demulcent. " Limonis Lemon-juice Oj, sugar Bij Adjuvant and vebicle. " Acacias Gum gj, sugar gvij, water fgiv Excipient for pills. 1 See Syrup of Blackberry Root. 2 See Fruit Syrups. 190 OF SYRUPS. Almond or orgeat syrup is a most delightful preparation for use as a drink with water, or with carbonic acid water; it is frequently modified by the addition of orange-flower water, vanilla, or other flavoring materials, which, however, do not improve it. It is occa- sionally prescribed in large doses frequently repeated in gonorrhoea. Its process involves, 1st, the blanching of almonds (depriving them of their skins by maceration in warm water, and then pressing out the kernel from the skin between the fingers); 2d, the beating of these into a paste with a portion of sugar ; 3d, the formation of a milky mixture or emulsion by trituration with successive portions of water ; and 4th, the solution in this of the required quantity of sugar, which should be done without the aid of heat. Lemon syrup is more acid than syrup of citric acid; its quality is mainly dependent on the freshness of the lemon-juice. Syrup of gum Arabic, of the Pharmacopoeia, must be distin- guished from the French Strop de Gomme, which, diluted with water, is a favorite demulcent drink. Our syrup is a saturated solution of gum and sugar designed to be permanent; it is very viscid, so much so as to be only fitted for suspending insoluble substances, and for combining unadhesive materials in pill. The use of well-selected gum Arabic not powdered, insures a clearer and more elegant syrup than can be made from the ordinary pow- dered gum. Unofficinal Syrups. In this division, I shall include an account of the following syrups, grouped according to their resemblance to the foregoing officinal classes:— Class I.—Syrups of Chamomile, Pipsissewa, Uva Ursi, the Compound Syrups of Blackberry Root and of Carrageen. Class II.—Syrups of Poppies, Frostwort, Bittersweet, and Gillenia. Class IV.—Syrup of Sulphate of Morphia. Unclassified.—Jackson's Pectoral Syrup, Syrups of Manna, Galls, Assafce- tida, Williams's Sarsaparilla Syrup, and the Mineral Water and Fruit Syrups. Syrup of Chamomile. {Syrupus Anthemidis) The following formula by the author was published in the Ame- rican Journal of Pharmacy, vol. xvi. p. 18, and although not an active medicinal agent, has been acceptable to some of the many admirers of chamomile. Take of Chamomile flowers, in coarse powder one ounce. Cold water .... twelve fluidounces. Refined sugar, in coarse powder twenty ounces. Make an infusion by displacement of the chamomile flowers and water, remove the residue from the apparatus, and place the unofficinal syrups. 191 coarsely powdered sugar in its stead; on this, pour the infusion until it is entirely dissolved. The dose might be stated at a tablespoonful. Syrup of Pipsissewa. {Syrupus Chimaphila^) Formula by Prof. Procter, published in Am. Journ. Pharm., vol. xv. p. 70. Take of Pipsissewa (chimaphila, U. S) four ounces. Sugar ..... twelve ounces. Water.....a sufficient quantity. Macerate the pipsissewa, finely bruised, in eight fluidounces of water for thirty-six hours, and then subject it to displacement, until one pint of fluid is obtained; reduce this by evaporation to eight fluidounces, add the sugar, and form a syrup in the usual manner. The long preliminary maceration is rendered necessary by the coriaceous character of the leaves, which impedes their easy satura- tion by the menstruum. On account of this property, some have preferred boiling them in successive portions of water, mixing the decoctions, evaporating, and after the sugar has been dissolved, adding a small portion of alcohol to obviate the proneness to decomposition, common to most syrups made in this way. One fluidounce of this syrup represents two drachms of the leaves. Syrup of pipsissewa is an elegant preparation of one of our most valuable and abundant indigenous tonic and alterative medicines. Dose, a tablespoonful. Pipsissewa is also much used in combination with sarsaparilla, and other alteratives, and enters into numerous private recipes of that description. Syrup of Uva Ursi. {Syrupus Uvce Ursi) Formula by Duhamel and Procter, published in American Journal of Pharmacy, vol. xi. p. 196. Take of Bearberry leaves (Uva Ursi, U. S) four ounces. Water.....a sufficient quantity. Sugar.....one pound. To the finely bruised uva ursi, add water till it is thoroughly moistened, then place it in a displacement apparatus, and operate by percolation till it is exhausted of all its soluble active principles; then evaporate to ten fluidounces; add the sugar, and form a syrup, marking 31° Baume. The dose of this might be stated at a tablespoonful. Like the foregoing, this syrup is a good preparation of a valuable medicine, 192 OF SYRUPS. and one much in vogue. The two may often be advantageously associated in diseases of the urinary organs. Compound Syrup of Carrageen. The following recipe has been in use for some 15 years in our establishment, and the syrup has been pretty extensively used as a popular cough medicine. It does not keep well in summer, unless in a cool place. Take of Horehound (Marrubium, U S) . 1 ounce. Liverwort (Hepatica, U. S) . 6 drachms. Water......4 pints. Boil for 15 minutes, express, and strain, then add Carrageen (Chondrus, U. S) . . 6 drachms, j Previously well washed with cold water. Boil again forlo or 20 minutes, strain through flannel, and add Sugar, 1 lb. commercial to each pint by measure. The dose of this agreeable medicine is a tablespoonful occasion- ally ; it is a good demulcent, without sedative effects. Compound Syrup of Blackberry Boot. {Syrupus Bubi Villosi) This is another hitherto unpublished formula. Its object is to furnish a substitute for the spiced syrup of rhubarb, where that remedy is deficient in astringency. It has been used chiefly as a popular medicine in domestic practice. The astringent virtues of blackberry root are almost universally known, and it is much used in the form of decoction and syrup throughout the country, both as a domestic remedy and in regular medical practice. The ex- perience of some ten years past has proved the eligibility of this old-fashioned formula. Take of Blackberry root, well bruised1 . 8 ounces. Cinnamon, Cloves, and > Nutmegs, of each ... 3 drachms. Sugar......4 pounds. Water......4 pints. Boil the root and the aromatics in the water for one hour; ex- press and strain; then add the sugar, boil to form a syrup, and again strain; then add French brandy ... 6 fluidounces. Oil of cloves, and Oil of cinnamon, of each . 4 drops. 1 Dewberry root (rubus trivialis), will answer equally well. UNOFFICINAL SYRUPS. 193 Dose, from a teaspoonful for a child of two years old, to a table- spoonful for an adult, repeated till the symptoms abate. Unofficinal Syrups of the Second Class. Syrup of Frostwort. Rock rose, frostwort, and frost weed, are common synonyms of the herb which is officinal in the secondary list of the Pharma- copoeia, as helianthemum, the herb of helianthemum Canadense; but more familiarly known as cistus Canadensis, the name given to it by some botanists. Having for some years prepared a syrup of this plant, which was used with much success by my brother, the late Dr. Isaac Parrish, in scrofulous'affections of the eyes, and also by several other prac- titioners in diseases of the scrofulous type, I insert the formula for the'information of such as are disposed to make a trial of this valuable indigenous alterative:— Take of Frostwort (the herb) . . 4 ounces. Water, and Alcohol, of each ... a sufficient quantity. Sugar.....16 ounces. Macerate the bruised herb in eight fluidounces of diluted alcohol, for twenty-four hours; displace with a mixture of one part of alco- hol to three of "water, till the liquid comes over nearly free from the taste and color of the plant; then evaporate to one pint, add the sugar—boil for a minute or two,'and strain.. The dose of this syrup is a fluidrachm three times a day. Syrup of Poppies. {Syrupus Papaver) This syrup, which as usually prepared is extremely liable to fer- ment, and on that account is a very troublesome preparation to apothecaries, who often have calls for it, may be conveniently made by the following process of Professor Procter, so as to be per- manent :— Take of Poppy-heads .... 16 ounces. Diluted alcohol .... 4 pints.. Sugar......3CJ ounces. Deprive the poppy-heads of their seeds ; bruise them thoroughly, macerate them in twice their weight of diluted alcohol for two days/express powerfully, add the remainder of the diluted alco- hol, and after twenty-four hours again express; evaporate the liquid to one pint, strain, and add the sugar, and dissolve by the aid of a gentle heat. 13 194 OF SYRUPS. Syrup of Bittersweet. {Syrupus Dulcamara.) The following recipe, from the same source as the_ foregoing, fur- nishes a syrup which is adapted to use by itself, or in combination with those of sarsaparilla and other alteratives in cutaneous and rheumatic diseases:— Take of Bittersweet, coarsely powdered . 4 ounces. Water.....12 ounces. Alcohol 4 fluidounces. Mix the liquids, pour on the powder in a displacer until one pint of tincture is obtained, adding water to displace the mixed alcohol and water; evaporate to half a pint, add fifteen ounces of sugar, and make a syrup. Dose, a tablespoonful. Syrup of Gillenia. The enormous price of ipecacuanha, which has been so long sus- tained, has led to some inquiries, lately, for a good substitute grow- ing on our own soil, and always attainable. " Gillenia trifoliate," Indian physic, is a common indigeneous herb, the root of which has long been known to possess very decided nauseant and emetic pro- perties. It cannot be claimed for it that it very closely resembles ipecacuanha in therapeutical action, although sufficiently allied to it to be used in many cases, particularly of catarrhal affections as a substitute. The following syrup I have contrived with a view to remove one of the chief objections on the part of the physician to the trial of indigenous drugs, namely, the absence of suitable pre- parations. As far as it has yet been used, it gives promise of an- swering a good purpose:— Syrup of Gillenia. Take of Gillenia......sij. Diluted alcohol . . . . Oj. Sugar......ftiiss. Water......sufficient. Reduce the gillenia to coarse powder, treat it by displacement with diluted alcohol till Oj is obtained. Evaporate to fjvj, filter, and add sufficient water to make the liquid measure Oj, then add the sugar and dissolve by the aid of heat. This syrup has twice the proportion of the medicinal ingredients contained in syrup of ipecacuanha; it is less agreeable to the taste. The dose is f3j. UNOFFICINAL syrups. 195 Unofficinal Syrups of the Fourth Class. Under this head mention may be made of Syrup of Sulphate of Morphia. I believe there is no published recipe for this except one that is given in Griffith's Formulary, credited to Cadet, which prescribes one grain of the salt to four fluidounces of syrup. Under the head of syrup of poppies, in the U. S. Dispensatory, Dr. Wood suggests the use of a syrup made by dissolving four grains of sulphate of morphia in a pint of syrup (a quarter of a grain to the ounce, the same as Cadet's), as a substitute for syrup of poppies, which, made by the old recipe, is so prone to ferment. Notwithstanding that we have no officinal or other recognized recipe (that of Cadet being almost unknown in this country), phy- sicians frequently prescribe syrupus morphia? sulphatis, and gene- rally, as far as I have inquired, under the impression that there is a syrup corresponding in strength with the officinal liquor morphias sulphatis, one grain to the ounce, and hence the habit has grown up with apothecaries of making this preparation extemporaneously of that strength. This is more remarkable, from the fact that the syrups of acetate and muriate of morphia of the Dublin Pharmacopoeia are in the pro- portion of one grain to four fluidounces. This discrepancy in practice cannot, I think, be remedied by the further publication of unauthorized recipes, and physicians should not fail to indicate the preportions designed in prescribing the salt in solution in syrup. Should there not be an officinal preparation with such a distinctive name, and authorized proportions as would remedy so serious a departure from uniformity ? Unclassified Unofficinal Syrups. Under this head, I shall treat of such of the very numerous syrups not already mentioned, as enjoy sufficient reputation in this city to be kept by our best apothecaries. Jackson's Pectoral Syrup. Alfred B. Taylor, in the American Journal of Pharmacy, vol. xxiv. p. 34, holds the following language:— " A prescription of Prof. Samuel Jackson, of Philadelphia, fami- liarly known as his 'pectoral syrup,' has obtained considerable reputation from its beneficial action in cases of coughs, colds, &c. We believe the prescription was originally given to Mr. E. Durand, but as the syrup has for some time been a standing preparation with many of our druggists, we have thought that a published formula 196 OF SYRUPS. would be acceptable both for the purpose of giving its benefit to those who may not be familiar with its composition, and of promot- ing uniformity among those who may already be accustomed to prepare it. Dis Jackson has furnished us with the following re- cipe :— B.—Sassaf. medullas . . • • 3j- Acacias . Sacchari . Morphias muriat. Aquas 3J- ft>jf. gr, Oj vnj. or q. "The sassafras pith and gum Arabic are to be put into the water and allowed to stand ten or twelve hours with occasional stirring. The su^ar is to be dissolved, cold, in the mucilage, which, after being strained, should be made to measure two pints by the addi- tion of water; lastly, the muriate of morphia is to be dissolved in the syrup." In the recipe which I have used for a number of years, half a grain of sulphate of morphia is prescribed in place of a quarter of a of each 11 drachms. " ext. of liquorice J Tincture of Tolu .... 4 drachms. Oil of sassafras .... 4 drops. To be made into a stiff mass, with simple syrup, and divided into 200 lozenges, or into lozenges of ten grains each. Each lozenge contains ^ gr. of ipecac, ^ gr. of the antimonial, ^ gr. of morphia. They are usually rolled into flat cakes, and cut out with a round punch, as described under the head of the officinal lozenges. Dr. Jackson's Ammonia Lozenges. Take of Muriate of ammonia . . 1| drachms. morphia . . 3 grains. Powdered elm bark . . 6 drachms. " gum Arabic ") sugar V of each 7 drachms. " ext. of liquorice J Tincture of Tolu . . 3 drachms. Oil of partridgeberry . 4 drops. To be made with syrup into 180 lozenges, or into lozenges of ten grains each, containing J grain muriate of ammonia, and sYj of a grain of the morphia salt. These are used for somewhat similar affections with the foregoing, and are made into the same shape. CANDY AND DROPS. 215 Parrish's Cough Lozenges. We have been in the habit, for the last seven or eight years, of preparing a pectoral lozenge not unlike that of Dr. Jackson. The recipe, which is as follows, was contrived with the aid of a medical friend^ and has proved a useful one, producing a comparatively active preparation:— Take of Powdered ipecacuanha 50 grains. of each 3 ounces. 40 drops. sufficient. Kermes mineral . . . 100 grains. Sulphate of morphia . .16 grains. Pow'd sugar " gum Arabic " extract of liquorice Oil of anise . Syrup of Tolu To be made into a mass and divided into 320 lozenges, each containing about \ grain of ipecacuanha, £ grain of Kermes, fa grain of morphia salt. The dose of these, is one three times a day. Candy and Drops. Various kinds of candy are used in medicine for the well-known expectorant or demulcent properties of the sugar alone, or for the effects of such medicines as may be conveniently combined with it. The manufacture of these pertains almost exclusively to the confec- tioner, who prepares a thick semifluid mass by using with the sugar a small portion of water, and boiling till it is brought to such con- dition as that a small portion removed from the fire upon a glass rod will solidify into a transparent candy on cooling; it is then poured out upon a marble slab. If the coloring or flavoring ingre- dient is in powder, as, for instance, tartaric acid used in making lemon drops, it is worked in with the melted candy on the slab; otherwise it must be added before testing its hardness and removing from the fire. The sheet of melted candy being smoothed upon the surface, if designed for secrets, a very common form, is cut partially through into squares, and then, when brittle, broken off; if designed for drops, the candy requires to be run into moulds upon a machine constructed for the purpose; if for sticks, it is rolled and drawn out to the required thickness. By kneading and working this material while soft, its whiteness is increased. The principal art in making candies is in removing them from the fire at just the right moment before caramel begins to be formed, and not until the whole of the uncombined water is driven off; besides the proximate mode, with a glass rod, given above, the elevation of the boiling point to exactly a certain point is an indication that the candy is finished. The fruit essences, so called, prepared by artificial processes from 216 ON DISTILLATION AND SPIRITS. fusel oil, have been much used of late to flavor drops Lemon and o-inger drops are also much in vogue; the latter are best prepared from the piperoid, or oleo-resin of ginger (see p. 121), of which one ounce suffices for twenty of candy. The following recipe is appended, as of utility to the pharma- ceutist who may procure the admixture of the medicinal ingre- dients,'with candy at the confectioner's for a few cents per pound advance on the cost of the sugar. Medicated Secrets, or Cough Candy. To ten pounds of melted candy add the following mixture, and divide into secrets :— Take of Tincture of squill . • ■ • f&v. Camphorated tincture of opium \ of eac^ ^ f jgs_ Tincture of Tolu J Wine of ipecacuanha.....^'... Oil of gaultheria.....^v.nj- " sassafras......^X|' " aniseed......^nJ- Used ad libitum in ordinary coughs. CHAPTER XIV. ON DISTILLATION AND SPIRITS. This process, the reverse of evaporation in its applications, is, like it, designed to separate the volatile from the fixed_ ingredients in a solution. While in evaporation the object is to dissipate and reject what is volatile, preserving and retaining what is compara- tively fixed, in distillation the volatile ingredient is to be secured, and the fixed is generally discarded. To distil a solution, it is first converted into vapor by the application of heat, and the vapor is then condensed in a separate part of the apparatus. In a work of the design and scope of the present, any elaborate description of the apparatus used in distillation, and the mode of conducting the process on a large scale, would be quite out of place. The uses of the still in the manufacture of spirituous liquors and the spirit of turpentine of commerce, and in the recti- fication of these into alcohol and camphene, and in various other branches of manufacture, are among the most important subjects connected with chemical technology, and occupy a prominent place APPARATUS FOR DISTILLATION. 217 in works on that subject. In the present chapter, I shall have reference chiefly to the use of distillation in Galenical pharmacy, referring to another part of the work an account of its application to some of the small chemical processes falling within the range of the country practitioner and pharmaceutist. The dry distillation of solid substances, which are unaltered by the heat employed, is called sublimation. In Galenical pharmacy, this is applied to the separation of benzoic acid; in chemistry, to the manufacture of calomel, corrosive sublimate, &c. When this is accomplished in close vessels by a degree of heat which decomposes the substances acted on, it is called destructive distillation, as in the manufacture of acetic acid. Apparatus for Distillation. Betorts are usually made of glass; they are adapted to make distillations sometimes without, and sometimes with, condensing arrangements attached. The plain retort, though much used Fig. 163. abroad, is almost superseded O with us by the tubulated, which J^y,----^ is represented in the accom- ^ ^"""--^ panying figure, Fig. 163. For- / P-~-^ ^^\ merly, the retort was nearly ' \ ^^^/"\. always connected with a re- \ I ^^^^--^>i ceiver, which is a glass globe ** / with a wide mouth and neck, x^ ^/ into which the beak of the Tubulated retort. retort is inserted, either loosely or by the aid of a cork, or as in Fig. 164, with the use of an adapter. The retort here represented is of the kind called plain; Fig. 164. Plain retort, tubulated receiver, and adapter. the receiver b is tubulated; a is the adapter. The use of a vial of appropriate size and shape, with the bottom and rim, or lip of the neck, cracked off, furnishes a tolerable substitute for the adapter. The substance to be distilled being introduced into the retort and heat applied, the vapor given off passes at once into its beak or neck, and, if this is not refrigerated, into the receiver. In some 218 ON distillation and spirits. Fig. 165. Retort with quilled receiver. cases, particularly in treating very volatile liquids, it is found more convenient to apply cold directly to the beak, as in Fig. 165, in which pieces of linen or cotton cloth, folded several thicknesses and laid lengthwise on the beak, are kept constantly wet by the drop- ping of water from a filter sus- pended above it. At the point a, below the lower edge of the wet cotton, a piece of lampwick or other suitable string is tied tightly round the beak, to con- duct off the descending warmed water. The receiver here shown, though not tubulated as in the other plate, is quilled or drawn out into a fine tube, which enters the receiving vessel below; this being fully refrigerated, insures the complete condensation of the liquid. When the liquid to be dis- tilled is condensed at a moderate elevation of temperature, the mode of refrigeration last mentioned is conducted without the use of a receiver, the distillate being collected directly from the beak of the retort, from which it drops as fast as it accumulates. Some- times the receiver is refrigerated, and not the beak of the retort, and this is perhaps the most common arrangement for retort distillation. It is rather roughly shown in Fig. 166, which repre- sents a plain retort, a plain receiv- er, and a funnel from which the cold water is supplied. Where this arrangement is adopted, care should be taken not to secure the beak of the retort tightly into the neck of the re- ceiver, in which case the expan- sion of the heated air and va- pors, on commencing the opera- tion, would lead to a rupture of some part of the apparatus. Yig. 167 represents a vessel of tinned iron, which I have con- trived as a convenient substitute for a glass retort in all operations in which no corrosive or acid substance enters into the liquid to be distilled. Near the top of a deep tin vessel is soldered on a small gutter, so arranged on its inside as not to reach quite up to the Fig. 166. Distillation with plain retort and receiver. APPARATUS FOR DISTILLATION. 219 level of the sides of the vessel. The top, b, has a rim projecting downwards, which sets into this gutter, as shown in the section. When about to use this, after charging it with the substance to be distilled, the little gutter is filled with water and the top fitted on. The water joint thus formed prevents the escape of any portion of Fig. 167. Tin retort with water joint. the vapor, while it is prevented from becoming empty by the moisture condensed on the inside of the conical top dropping into it as it descends. Fig. 168. Liebig's condenser. Fig. 168 represents a well-known form of condensing apparatus which has almost superseded the arrangements before figured. 220 ON DISTILLATION AND SPIRITS. yr*' This is constructed on a variety of patterns, and of different mate- rials. That represented, Fig. 168, is one I have had in use for seve- ral years, and prefer on several accounts to the more expensive and complicated kinds. It consists of a tin tube 18 inches long and 2$ inches in diameter, and having the ends reduced to 1J inches to suit the largest size of good corks that are readily attainable. Fig. 169. The funnel, a, is the upper termination of a very small tin tube, which, passing down the whole length of the apparatus, enters it near the lower extremity, where it is extended by a bent leaden tube, as shown by the dotted lines, to the very bottom, at b. A short piece of thin lead pipe, c, leads from near the apex of the condenser, and, passing out through a perforation into which it is soldered, terminates about two inches below, d d is a glass tube 1 inch in diameter, drawn out and bent at its lower end, which passes through the whole length of the apparatus, being secured by the perforated corks e e, at either end. These corks must be perfect, and as soft as can be obtained. A smooth and even perforation may be made by a brass cork borer, Fig. 169, or rat-tail file, Fig. 170, or both, so as to constitute a water-tight joint. Fig-17°- / is a stout piece of sheet cop- tm.............. ^^^^ per soldered on to the main tube, and made to work by a screw upon the wooden Corkborer. Upright #. The use of cement or luting to surround the corks is necessary if they are not very perfect and very completely fitted, and as no alcoholic liquids will come in contact with them, dissolved sealing-wax is found to answer an excellent purpose. With an apparatus of this kind, the use of which will be described a few pages further on, most of the processes requiring distillation can be satisfactorily accomplished. The expense of a condenser, such as here described, is from $3 50 to $5. The bottom of the wooden stand should be grooved on the under side and filled in with melted lead, to prevent the ill effects of warping, and to give solidity to the whole. Fig. 171 represents a condenser supported on a retort stand, having freedom of motion in every direction; x is a cast-iron foot, in which is fixed a solid rod of iron z. The condenser, as here represented, is designed to be made of brass, with a glass tube fitted into it with corks, as in the other case; the comparative size of the outer tube, as here shown, is much smaller, which requires a much more rapid passage of the cold water through it, especially in distilling very volatile liquids. The Gay Lussac holder a, and the rings, are usually made of brass in this arrangement. Fig. 172 represents a Liebig's condenser and flask attachment, made entirely of glass, and such a one as a pharmaceutical student APPARATUS FOR DISTILLATION. 221 might readily fit up for himself; the tube for the ingress of cold water and the egress of the warm, here enters through the same Fig. 171. Brass Liebig's condenser in retort stand. corks as are perforated for the tube containing the condensing vapor; this tube is continuous from the neck of the flask to the Fig. 172. Small glass condenser and flask. 222 ON DISTILLATION AND SPIRITS. other end of the apparatus. In the absence of a large glass tube suitable for this apparatus, which is not always to be had, a tin tube, as, for instance, an adhesive plaster can, with the ends taken off, may be substituted. A mechanical support for the retort and for the refrigerating apparatus, is, of course, absolutely necessary in the arrangement of a distillatory apparatus; at least one retort stand is quite necessary, even in connection with the Liebig's condenser, as shown in Fig. 171; in which case one of the rings might have a sufficiently long handle, connecting it with the screw that clasps the upright rod, to hold a retort or a flask at a sufficient distance from the condenser, to be adjusted to it for use; but this is not the case with any that I have seen, and would render the whole apparatus unsteady when loaded with the liquid. Fig. 173. <$ f Fig. 173 will give an idea of the arrangement of the retort and vessel for supplying the condenser with water, and that for catch- ing the waste water upon one retort stand, which, however, must be in due proportion to the size of the condenser. In Fig. 165, it will be seen that as many as three retort stands are used in a small operation. APPARATUS FOR DISTILLATION. 223 When put together, the apparatus for distillation will be com- plete as arranged in Fig. 174. The tin bucket h has a small brass cock, which is so regulated in using the apparatus as to drop the water either slowly or rapidly as the warming of the water in the condenser may require. Fig. 174. The only use of the funnel m, is to prevent the splashing of the water as it falls from the condenser. By placing the heavy receiv- ing vessel n on the wooden base of the retort stand, it is rendered solid, and the weight of the retort I is counterbalanced. 224 ON DISTILLATION AND SPIRITS. Fig. 175. A flask with perforated cork and glass tube, as shown in Fig. 175, may be substituted for the retorts before described, an arrangement well adapted to distilling very volatile liquids, and those which boil with great violence. This figure also shows a tube for introduc- ing fresh portions of the liquid without removing the cork; the tube, being bent, retains a portion of liquid in the bulb and adjacent curve, which prevents the escape of vapor from the interior. It is designed to extend only a little below the cork. In case of any stoppage in the apparatus by which an accumulation of vapor might take place in the flask or retort, these tubes would serve as a safety valve and the liquid being forced out would allow of the escape of the accumulated steam. The pharmaceutical still is the name given to an old-fashioned and cheap form of apparatus, in which the condenser is im- mediately over the heated liquid, and the distillate is collected by means of a ledge or gutter on its lower surface. Fig. 176 represents a section of this still, which may be made of Flask and safety tube. Fig. 176. SB vj» A Section of pharmaceutical still. tinned iron, and of any required size. J. is a deep tin boiler, with a rim soldered round its top at a a, forming a gutter for the water PROCESS OF DISTILLATION. 225 joint, by which it is connected with the dome or head B. This is the refrigerator, on the inner surface of which the condensation occurs; C is the neck or tube for carrying off the distillate; c c is a circular rim soldered on to the base of the head B in such a posi- tion as that the upper projection forms a gutter for conducting the condensed fluid as it runs down on the under surface of the cone d d into the neck C, while the lower part projects downward into the gutter a a to form the water joint. The course of the circular rim c c is of necessity inclined down- wards toward the under edge of the neck C, as indistinctly shown in the section, in order to determine its liquid contents in that direction. b is an opening in the top of the condenser, stopped by a cork, for inspecting the progress of the distillation, and adding to the contents of the boiler; e is a funnel tube into which a current of cold water is directed during distillation, while as it becomes warm it ascends and escapes by the tube on the other side. The water joint is to be nearly filled at the commencement of the operation, and effectually prevents the escape of the vapor. The Process of Distillation. From the description and illustration of apparatus now given, the reader will have a pretty good idea of the process as conducted on a small scale. A volatile liquid or mixture containing a volatile ingredient being introduced into a retort or flask connected as before described, and heat applied, the volatile ingredient will rise in vapor, and, being cooled by contact with the neck of the retort, the receiver, or the glass tube of the Liebig's condenser, will be con- densed, and may be collected in a liquid and generally a pure con- dition. One of the chief practical difficulties in distilling arises from the irregularity of the boiling of liquids in glass vessels, occasioning violent bumping, and sometimes the fracture of the vessel. In treating resinous substances in this way, and in numerous chemical processes, especially as in the preparation of hydrocyanic acid, where a large amount of heavy precipitate is present in the liquid, this renders the operation one of great difficulty and annoyance. The best remedy for this is found in the diffusion of the heat over the sides of the retort, and indeed over the whole surface in con- tact with the liquid, and in the interposition of small angular frag- ments of insoluble material, such as rock crystal, flint, or broken glass, among the particles of the liquid; advantage is gained by cover- ing the bottom of the glass vessel with wire gauze, which diffuses the heat of the flame, or preferably by coating the retort with metallic silver on its inner surface, which may be done by reducing a solu- tion of ammonio-nitrate of silver, by boiling it in the vessel to be plated with oils of cinnamon and cloves, in solution in alcohol. 15 226 on distillation and spirits. Silver forms the most eligible metallic coating, next to platinum. Flasks may be coated on the outside with metallic copper so as to answer an excellent purpose. This is done by the aid of a battery. {See Mohr, Eedwood, and Procter, p. 457.) The application of heat must of course be regulated by the vola- tility and inflammability of the liquid treated. Strong alcoholic or ethereal liquids, being volatilized at low temperatures, may be heated by a water bath or a sand bath, not too hot, which, besides preventing the excessive boiling of the liquid, will diminish the danger from a fracture of the glass vessel used. In distilling from flowers or herbs for obtaining essential oils or medicated waters, there is great liability to scorching, from the con- tact of masses of the solid material with the heated surface of the still, thus producing empyreumatic principles which quite destroy the agreeable fragrance of the product. A false bottom or perfo- rated diaphragm, a few inches above the point of contact with the flame, is a preventive of this, adopted in large operations. The application of carefully regulated steam heat is, of course, in this as in most other heat operations on a large scale, a great improvement. The pharmaceutical still, Fig. 176, is well adapted to recovering the alcohol from tinctures to be made into syrups, fluid extracts, or extracts; the alcohol obtained, even though impure and below stand- ard strength, is suited to preparing the same tincture again; and the saving of alcohol by this means, in a large establishment, will be very considerable. The long-continued application of a pretty high heat, which is necessary in this case, involves an expense which, if gas, or even charcoal fuel is employed, may approach the value of the alcohol recovered, so that in the winter time it is well to avail ourselves of the stove used for heating the apartment by fitting the still to it, and distilling slowly at the moderate heat thus obtained. The advantage gained by the exclusion of the atmo- sphere in distillation is not to be overlooked when vegetable prepa- rations are being concentrated. The head of the still becoming full of steam excludes the air, for the most part, and the condensation of the steam brings about a partial vacuum which favors evapora- tion at low temperatures. The proper refrigeration of the condensing surface, whether of the retort beak, receiver, Liebig's condenser, or pharmaceutical still, requires pretty free use of cold water; and the application of this has direct relation to the degree of heat required to vaporize the liquid being distilled. An indication by which the operator may always judge when the refrigeration is insufficient, is the escape of uncondensed vapor. When this is observed, he should diminish the heat applied, and increase the application of cold to the condensing surface; this precaution is very important when the vapor is inflammable. The methods indicated in the drawings for the continuous application of cold water by a funnel, and by a distillation. 227 small cock, near the bottom of a tin bucket, are well adapted to the several kinds of apparatus figured. The processes in Galenical pharmacy requiring the use of the still, are chiefly limited to those articles prepared on a large scale, and the apparatus is not commonly in use in retail pharmaceutical establishments, or in those of country practitioners; yet, I have fitted a number from time to time for medical students leaving the school of practical pharmacy, who have found in using them, both for experiment and manufacture, an agreeable and profitable em- ployment during the tedious process of " getting into practice." Officinal Preparations made by Distillation. Aqua Destillata. {Distilled Water) This is directed to be used in a great many preparations in the Pharmacopoeia. In some, its employment seems called for, while in others the moderately pure river or spring water, so freely sup- plied in nearly all towns and cities, answers every purpose. The inorganic impurities imparted to spring waters by the rocks through which they permeate, are in the highest degree important in connection with solutions of delicate chemical substances, and the same may be said of the organic substances which contaminate some of the natural sources of water, and form precipitates with nitrate of silver, tartrate of antimony and potassa, and a few other very delicate chemical agents. It is, however, generally sufficient, that water should be pure enough for safe and wholesome drinking, to be fit for use also in preparing the Galenical and even many of the chemical preparations. One of the most important uses to the apothecary and physician, of the apparatus for distillation here figured and described, is to enable him to prepare and keep at hand for special occasions, aqua destillata. Olea Destillata, U. S. The distilled oils are prepared by mixing the bruised herb or other part containing the oil with a small portion of water in a still, when, after macerating for a suitable length of time, and ad- justing the apparatus, heat is applied. The oil, though its boiling point is always much above that of water, is readily diffused in the steam; and when this is condensed in the refrigerated part of the apparatus, the oil, if in excess, separates, and if specifically lighter, collects on the surface of the distilled water; or, if heavier, it settles to the bottom, and may be separated; the mode of preparing the officinal aqua rosce, and other common distilled waters, corresponds with this, the proportion of water being so adjusted as that no 228 ON distillation and spirits. excess of the oil beyond what is soluble in the water shall be present.1 Spiritus, U. S. Alcoholic solution of essential oils are usually called spirits or essences; they are sometimes prepared by distilling alcohol from the fresh herb, which thus gives up its essential oil, and on its conden- sation retains it in solution; they are also prepared by dissolving the oil directly in alcohol, as in the tinctura olei menthse piperita^ tinctura olei menthas viridis, called essence of peppermint and spear- mint, and tinctura camphorae, called spirits of camphor. The offi- cinal class spiritus consists of some which are made by distillation, and some which are simple solutions or mixtures of essential oils and alcohol. The following syllabus represents the composition and mode of preparation of each of the officinal class:— Group 1.—Made with diluted alcohol. Spiritus Myristicae Nutmeg ^ij to dil. ale. 1 gallon By distillation. " Juniperi Comp. Oils of juniper, caraway, and fennel By solution. " Pimentse Oil of pimenta in diluted alcohol do. Group 2.—Made with strong alcohol. Spiritus Rosmarini Oil f £iv tol gallon alcohol Solution. " Lavandulae Flowers Rij to do. Distillation. " " Comp. Cinnamon, ^ Lavender Compound Cloves, I to spt. Lavender f Maceration or Nutmeg, | and spt. Rosemary { displacement. Saunders, J The only preparation of this series which is much prescribed, is the last named. This is very often directed by practitioners as a flavoring and coloring ingredient in prescription. The choice of saunders as the coloring agent is, however, unfortunate from the resinous deposit which is apt to separate by dilution with water and | long standing. Cochineal is a much brighter and handsomer color- ing ingredient, and the compound tincture of cardamom is, on that account, to be preferred to the lavender compound. The simple spirit of lavender prepared by distillation is one of the pleasantest of perfumes. That made by solution from the recipe given on page 230 is dependent on the freshness and fine quality of the oil for its value as a perfume. The cultivated or garden laven- der yields a much better oil than the common wild plant; the finest quality oil of garden lavender comes from England, and commands a comparatively high price. Essences for Perfumery. Besides the use of fragrant essences for the mere gratification of the sense of smell, they serve a good purpose in headache, and as 1 See Chapter on Essential Oils, Camphors, and Resins. COLOGNE WATER. 229 grateful refrigerant applications in dry and hot conditions of the skin. I append a few recipes for agreeable and ready spirituous perfumes. The art of perfumery has attained a perfection in France towards which our manufacturers make but a faint approximation. The French recipes call for so many ingredients not readily obtained in this country, and altogether derived from their own gardens and manufactories, that they require considerable modification to make them practicable to us. I shall, therefore, confine myself to insert- ing a few recipes which constitute a moderate assortment of essences, and which, for the most part, our own experience enables us to recommend. Cologne Water. Eau de Cologne, as imported from Cologne, and from Paris, is a highly rectified spirituous perfume obtained by distillation from a variety of fragrant plants. Of the numerous Farina colognes im- ported, all are highly rectified and apparently distilled from the plants, while, as prepared in this country, Cologne water is almost always made from essential oils dissolved in alcohol. This may be very good, if the oils are fresh and combined with reference to their relative strength and accord. No. 1. Cologne Water. Take of Oil of bergamot . • Oij- " neroli • f3ij. " jessamine . . fgss. " garden lavender • f3ij. " cinnamon . . fgj. Benzoated tincture . fSiij. Tincture of musk . foSS. Deodorized alcohol • Cong.j. Hose-water . . Oij. Mix, and allow the preparation to stand a long time before filter- ing for use. Cologne Water. No. 2. Take of Oil of lavender . " rosemary . " lemon " cinnamon Alcohol Much cheaper than the foregoing. 3iss. §ss. gtt. XX. Cong.j. Mix. 230 on distillation and spirits. Benzoated Tincture for Colognes, &c. Take of Tonqua beans .... Sj. Vanilla......3ij- Nutmegs, grated .... No. j. Mace......3\j- Benzoic acid.....gr- x- Alcohol.....Oj. Macerate the solid ingredients, in coarse powder, in the alcohol ad libitum. Essence of Millefleurs. Take of Peruvian balsam Oil of bergamot " cloves . " neroli . Tincture of musk Orange-flower water Alcohol (deod.) Mix and filter. Essence of Patchouly. Take of Oil of copaiva " orange " valerian " rosemary . Tincture of Tolu " ginger, alcohol, aa Mix. 3ij. f3ss. f3ij. Oss. f5ij. Oij. Oij- gtt. XX. gtt. iij. gtt.j. gtt. j- gtt. XX. q. s. Verbena Water. Take of Oil of balm melisse . Deodorized alcohol . Make a solution. f3nj. Oij. This may be made somewhat stronger, though of a less pure ver- bena flavor, by the addition of a little oil of lemon. Oil of balm melisse is imported; its smell seems identical with our garden lemon trifolia. Lavender Water. Take of English oil of garden lavender . . f3ij- Deodorized alcohol .... Oj. Make a solution. A little fresh calamus root macerated in the above improves it. PERFUMERY. 231 Aromatic Vinegar. A pungent and reviving perfume, formerly esteemed a preventive of contagion. Take of Acetic acid, very strong, Camphor, in powder, Oil of cloves, of each a sufficient quantity. Mix them, and secure in a strong and well stoppered bottle. Tincture of Musk. Take of Musk...... Water...... 3vj-Oss. Macerate twenty-four hours and add— Solution of potassa, U.S. . Macerate twenty-four hours and add— Alcohol...... f5ij-Oss. Let it stand, decanting as required. Perfume for adding to Mouth Washes. Take of Asarum Canadense .... Orris root..... Strong alcohol (Atwood's) 3ss. 3"ss. fgviij. Make a tincture and add— Tincture of musk .... Essence of millefleurs " patchouly f3j-f3ss. gtt. XX. Superior Mouth Wash. Take of Old white Castile soap Alcohol..... Perfume, as above Dissolve the soap in the alcohol, and add the honey • 3\j. . fSiij. . Sj. . fSiv. and perfume PART III. ON THE PHARMACY OF PLANTS, THEIR PRODUCTS, &c. CHAPTER I. LIGNIN AND ITS DERIVATIVES. This work is designed mainly for a class of students little versed in organic chemistry, and whose object is to acquaint themselves with the practical bearings of pharmacy rather than with its theory. Some will study it in connection with a course of manipulations, while others, perhaps, will use it as a guide in the daily routine of a dispensing office or shop. To all such it is adapted by an arrange- ment, which, without any claim to a scientific basis, is recommended by simplicity, and a gradual advancement from the easy to the more difficult manipulations. In abandoning for the present this arrangement of subjects, it is designed, in Part III., to present to view some matters which could not be conveniently introduced in the previous portions of the work, and yet are important to the student before approaching the suc- ceeding Chapters on Extemporaneous Pharmacy. Although a more scientific classification of subjects, than that heretofore observed, is called for in this connection, and some theo- retical matters will necessarily be introduced, the effort will be made by simplicity and plainness, to adapt it as far as possible to the class for which it was designed. The pharmaceutical classification of materia medica is primarily into organic and inorganic medicines. Of these, the organic will be brought into view in Part III. The study of these in their chemical relations, has, of latter years, become an object of great interest, and has developed the germs of a system of classification of plants founded on their che- mical composition. All plants are composed of a collection of organic proximate principles, which, when further resolved, are found to consist of carbon, oxygen, and hydrogen—the two latter elements frequently 234 LIGNIN AND ITS DERIVATIVES. combined in the proportion in which they exist in water; some of these principles consist of carbon and hydrogen only, others con- tain also nitrogen, and some of these phosphorus and sulphur, the protein compounds. The predominance of one or other of these proximate principles in any group of animal or of vegetable products, usually adapts its individual members to certain modes of preparation and use in medicine, and constitutes the strongest feature of resemblance among them. This characteristic is still more marked, when asso- ciated, as it sometimes is, with similar botanical relations, but even in the absence of these, it is very apparent: thus substances which owe their utility to containing starch, are naturally associated as farinaceous, while the gums are well and familiarly classed together. So with the aromatics containing essential oils and resins; the nar- cotics containing alkaloids, &c. It may be mentioned that the proximate principles of plants seem capable of ready division into two main classes, which, however, are only approximate; these are: First. Those which are nutritious, and are generally diffused throughout the vegetable kingdom, including a few obtained from animals also; this class consists of lignin, starch, gums, sugar, fixed oils and fats, and the nitro- genized or protein compounds. Second. Those which are generally not nutritious, but medicinal in their properties, and are less dif- fused, being in some instances confined to a very few families of plants; these are, the crystallizable and uncrystallizable neutral principles, the vegetable acids and alkalies, the essential oils and resins, &c. In treating of these vegetable principles, and some of the im- portant drugs in which they are found, the vegetable materia medica will be brought into view, in a somewhat different aspect from that under which it is usually studied. As it is presumed that every student will avail himself at the same time of more extended and thorough treatises, I shall limit the facts presented mainly to those which are of importance in connection with the subject of practical pharmacy. Lignin. Lignin, or cellulose = C24H20O20 = CJ2LT10O10. It is inert, inso- luble, tasteless, and inodorous; the basis of woody fibre, and pre- sent in nearly all plants. By long boiling with diluted sulphuric acid, it is changed into dextrin, a soluble form, and then into grape sugar. Pharmaceutical manipulations are chiefly directed to get rid of lignin by freeing from it, by the aid of various menstrua, those active principles which it incloses among its fibres, excluded from external influences, and safely locked up in their natural reposito- COLLODION. 235 ries, till needed for the relief of suffering, or the restoration of health. Lignin is officinal under the name of gossypium, cotton, which, in its condition of raw cotton, or carded cotton, is much used in surgery, and forms the basis of the singular and interesting com- pounds known as gun cotton, pyroxylon, and the other modifica- tions of prepared cotton entering into collodion and blistering collodion. Another form of lignin, which is of interest to the surgeon, is that of patent lint, prepared from the fibres of the flax plant (linum usitatissimum). See an article on the preparation of lint, by Jacob Bell, in the London Pharmaceutical Journal, and copied in the American Journal of Pharmacy, vol. xxiii. pp. 70 and 162. Collodium, U. S. P. Ethereal Solution of Prepared Cotton. This preparation, originally prepared by Prof. Schonbein, was recommended as an adhesive substance adapted to the wants of the surgeon, in an article in the Boston Medical and Surgical Journal, under date of March 22, 1848, by S. L. Bigelow. He then stated that he had accidentally discovered its remarkable adaptation to the rapid union of wounds by the first intention, and had tested its efficacy by a number of experiments, which induced him to make it public. The next number of the same journal, issued one week later, contained an article on the same subject, by Jno. P. Maynard, of Dedham, Mass., in which he claims to have been the first to use the preparation as an adhesive plaster, and proceeds to detail its advantages, as proved by a number of experiments made by him- self, and by numerous physicians and surgeons in Boston. In the same number of the Journal, appears an editorial notice, which recommends the collodion, as it is there named, in terms of ap- proval, and in relation to its adhesiveness, says: "Nothing known to us will compare with it in this respect." Of its mode of prepa- ration, both these writers left us in the dark, although, as soon as a demand was thus created for the article, perhaps before, Dr. May- nard's formula for preparing it was placed in the hands of Maynard & Noyes, druggists, Boston, who commenced the manufacture of it on a large scale, and measures were taken to introduce it through- out the United States. On the first introduction of Maynard and Noyes' article in Philadelphia, my lamented friend, W. W. D. Livermore, then an assistant in my store, and myself, jointly pursued a series of expe- riments in its preparation, the result of which we announced in a paper published in the American Journal of Pharmacy, vol. xx. p. 181, stating the best formula that we had tried for the preparation of this solution. It prescribed the mixing of equal portions of nitric and sulphuric acids, and the maceration in it of clean bleached 236 lignin and its derivatives. cotton for twelve hours. The proper strength of the nitric acid was then known to be a matter of importance, the acid of 1.5 sp. gr. furnishing the most satisfactory results. This cotton, after washing and thorough drying, was to be dis- solved, in a certain proportion of ether, free, or nearly free, from water. The recipe was accompanied by such practical suggestions as our experiments led to, which were offered rather to draw attention to this then new and interesting preparation, than to furnish an un- exceptionable formula. Although some of the views advanced in that paper were after- wards abandoned, this recipe, with some modifications, has con- tinued to give us satisfaction to this time. In the following year, an article appeared in the same journal, extracted from the London Medical Gazette, in which the following formula of M. Mialhe was offered as more uniformly satisfactory. Take of Finely powdered nitrate of potash 40 parts (by weight). Sulphuric acid . . ' . 60 Carded cotton ... 2 " " Mix the nitre with the sulphuric acid, in a porcelain vessel, then add the cotton, and agitate the mass for three minutes, by the aid of two glass rods; wash the cotton, without first pressing it, in a large quantity of water, and, when all the acidity is removed (in- dicated by litmus-paper), press it firmly in a cloth; pull it out into a loose mass, and dry it in a stove at a moderate heat. The compound thus obtained, says M. Malgaigne, is not pure fulminating cotton; it always retains a small quantity of sulphuric acid, is less inflammable than gun-cotton, and it leaves a carbona- ceous residue after explosion. It has, however, in a remarkable degree, the property of solubility in ether, especially when mixed with a little alcohol, and it forms therewith a very adhesive solu- tion, to which the name of collodion has.been applied. The proportions of ether and prepared cotton directed for the preparation of collodion in this recipe, were, I think inadvertently wrong. In the same periodical, shortly after, appeared a notice from the London Pharmaceutical Journal, by J. B. Edwards, upon the modes of preparing collodion, in which he quotes M. Salmon, surgeon to Hotel Dieu, of Chartres, who asserts that collodion may be easily prepared by dissolving gun-cotton, made with the mixed acids, in sulphuric ether, which mode he had always preferred, as less liable to variation from the inconstancy of the product than that of M. Mialhe; in the same paper, M. Soubeiran is quoted as follows:— " I, like many others, have attempted to operate with a mixture of the monohydrated, nitric, and sulphuric acids. I have employed them sometimes with equal weights, at other times with equal volumes, and immersed the cotton for different periods from three PREPARATION OF COLLODION. 237 minutes to an hour, and I have never found it to dissolve in ether. I do not, however, contend that it is impossible to do so, but I must think the other a more certain method, though the employ- ment of the mixed acids has the advantage of convenience over the other." There can be little doubt that one or both of the acids used in these experiments were deficient in strength, as the experience of some other pharmaceutists is directly the reverse of that of this distinguished French authority. I quote from J. B. Edwards, the author of the paper referred to:— "My own experience coincides with that of Mr. Salmon. I take equal volumes of strong sulphuric, and strong fuming nitric acids, mix them in a mortar or other convenient vessel, then im- merse finely carded cotton in small portions, allowing each to remain about one minute; then plunging it into a large quantity of water, and teasing it out with a glass rod, so as to become as loose as possible, yellow fumes arise from the cotton, and are washed away, and it is then perfectly white. This is then well washed from acid and dried, and it then instantly and perfectly dissolves in commercial sulphuric ether, forming either a semi-solid jelly, or thick liquid, according to the quantity of ether added. This is the constant and uniform result of several experiments I have made. This cotton is also highly explosive, and leaves no carbonaceous residue when fired. "The sources of fallacy I imagine are either from employing weak acids, too long immersion, or ether of high rectification. The latter should not contain water, but sufficient alcohol to reduce its specific gravity to about 760° or 770°. Its solvent action is then instantaneous." Although this result is sometimes attained, it perhaps as often happens that the solution of the cotton is not so rapid as is here represented; and it has often happened that, when it seemed at first quite deficient, it has, upon standing, become sufficiently thick. In continuation of his comments, the same writer.observes:— " I consider this process to be superior on many accounts to that of Mialhe. It is more readily prepared, and requires less washing than when entangled with sulphate of potash. It is explosive, and therefore answers both purposes. I have dissolved some with equal readiness, that has been thus prepared more than a month, so that it may be convenient to keep the cotton prepared, and dis- solve small quantities as frequently as required, and thus obviate the loss by vaporization, which ensues on keeping a stock of the solution prepared." In the fourth number of the Journal, for 1849, I published the result of further experiments, upon the new adhesive solution, from which I copy the following modified formula, which is recom- mended over that of Mialhe, as allowing the preparation of a much 238 LIGNIN AND ITS DERIVATIVES. larger quantity at one time, and with far less trouble; as avoiding the exposure of the operator to corrosive acid fumes, while stirring the cotton with the semi-fluid mass, which, in the other case, makes it necessary to work either in a well-ventilated apartment, or in the open air; and as facilitating the washing of the product, which comes out from the mixed acids with no solid crystalline ingre- dient contaminating it, and may be purified with the utmost facility; for distinction, this may be marked— Becipe No. 1. Take of Fuming nitric acid, sp. gr. 1.48, Sulphuric acid, of each . . four fluidounces. Cleansed and bleached cotton . half an ounce. Ether.....four pints. Thoroughly saturate the cotton with the acids, previously mixed and allowed to become cool; macerate for twelve hours; wash the nitrated cotton in a large quantity of water, dry it thoroughly by artificial heat, and dissolve it in ether. The present officinal process, which is a modification of that of Mialhe, is here introduced— Becipe No. 2. {Officinal) Take of Cotton, freed from impurities, and finely carded .... half an ounce. Nitrate of potassa, thoroughly dried, and reduced to fine powder . . ten ounces. Sulphuric acid.....eight fluidounces and a half. Ether......two pints and a half. Alcohol......a fluidounce. Add the sulphuric acid to the nitrate of potassa in a wedgewood mortar, and triturate them until uniformly mixed; then add the cotton, and by means of the pestle and glass rod, imbue it tho- roughly with the mixture for four minutes; transfer the cotton to a vessel containing water, and wash it in successive portions by agitation and pressure until the washings cease to have an acid taste, or to be precipitated on the addition of chloride of barium. Having separated the fibres by picking, dry the cotton with a gentle heat, dissolve it by agitation in the ether previously mixed with the alcohol, and strain. Both these processes will yield collodion of excellent quality by observing the following precautions :— 1. The sulphuric acid employed in both formula? must have been well preserved, or, if it has been long exposed to the air, should be boiled to free it from absorbed water. I have found a neglect of this precaution a fruitful source of failure. The officinal acid 1.84, is fully as strong as necessary. PREPARATION OF COLLODION. 239 2. The nitric acid employed in No. 1, must be free from muri- atic, a common impurity; it must be of the specific gravity named, or not less than 1.45. The fuming variety is to be preferred. So also the nitrate of potassa, in No. 2, must be nearly free from chloride, which is commonly present in large proportion. Dupont's best granulated will answer well. 3. The materials and vessels employed in either case must be dry; the ether must not be hydrated. The presence of a small, portion of alcohol in it facilitates the solution. The ether of the shops has about the requisite proportion. 4. In drying the prepared cotton, a diffused heat should be' applied, and to thin layers only; otherwise, the part in contact with the heating surface will become dry before the rest; and if it reaches the requisite elevation of temperature, will endanger the whole. A complete mode of avoiding the common accidenwbf ex- plosion from drying is mentioned below. 5. Although the action of the mixed concentrated acids upon the lignin is immediate, as asserted in the quotation made on page 237, yet an advantage is gained by a long maceration in case of any de- ficiency in their strength, which is the reason for twelve hours being named in the recipe. If this delay is inconvenient, however, it would be well from time to time to remove a little of the macerating cotton into a test tube, arid make trial of its solubility. I am not aware that any injury accrues to the prepared cotton from continued maceration in the acids, especially after they have spent themselves by the previous maceration. It now remains to notice, in connection with the process of pre- paring soluble gun cotton, the best mode of washing and drying it. The cotton should be removed, when the reaction is complete, into a funnel or other suitable support, and the stream from a hydrant turned upon it; or, if this is not convenient, let it be thrown into a vessel of water, and teased out with two sticks or glass rods, so as to be thoroughly permeated by the water, then collected into a compact form, and the acidulated water decanted, to be renewed once or twice, or as often as necessary to purify the prepared cot- ton. This is now found to be white, tasteless, inodorous, and, if dried, harsh and almost crystalline in its texture. The object of drying is to free it from the water absorbed by it in washing; and here I have the satisfaction of noticing an elegant expedient sug- gested to me by the late W. W. D. Livermore, which is simply to drain off the water by pressure, and then to macerate the cotton a few minutes in alcohol, which, by its affinity for the water, rapidly extracts it, and then may be sufficiently separated by expression, as it is not incompatible with the ethereal solution, which, in fact, it improves. Charles S. Rand published, in the Journal of Pharmacy, vol. xxi. p. 209, a paper in which the property noticed in collodion of con- tracting powerfully during evaporation, is referred to as unfitting it for certain important uses. On this he remarks:— 240 LIGNIN AND ITS DERIVATIVES. " At the request of those who had experienced these difficulties, I undertook a series of experiments with the view of producing a collodion possessing all the adhesiveness and transparency of the ordinary preparation, but deprived of the contractility. It would be needless to mention in detail all the experiments. The terebin- thinates gave the most satisfactory results; a few trials sufficed to show that but a small quantity of resin or turpentine, dissolved in recently prepared collodion, would totally prevent contraction, and increase the adhesiveness of the preparation." Rand's recipe is as follows :— Take of Prepared cotton.....3\j. Venice turpentine .... 3lj. Sulphuric ether.....I v. Dissolve, first, the cotton in the ether; add the turpentine, and, by slight agitation, complete the solution. I have preferred Venice turpentine as the form least frequently contaminated by mechanical impurities. The resulting collodion is thus described by C. S. Rand:— " When applied to the skin, this preparation forms a perfectly smooth transparent pellicle, more difficult to remove than that of ordinary collodion. Being more pliable, it yields to the motion of the skin, and will not crack even after several days' application. It might be supposed that the turpentine would render it more irri- tating, but this is not the case, owing to the absence of that me- chanical stimulus so powerfully displayed in the former solutions. The addition of two drachms of mastic to the above may be at times advisable, if the pellicle be required of great toughness and strength; but it dries more slowly, and remains opalescent longer than that containing Venice turpentine alone. This preparation is much more suitable for the purpose of a varnish than as an application to the skin. The label of a small vial was coated with it, and exposed thirty-six hours to the action of cold water, which was afterwards raised to the boiling point without any effect except a temporary destruction of transparency. Cold and boiling alcohol were alike powerless." Properties.—Collodion is a clear, colorless liquid, of a syrupy consistence, and strong odor of ether, which, when applied to a dry surface, evaporates spontaneously, yielding a transparent pellicle without whiteness, possessed of remarkable adhesiveness and con- tractility, and quite impervious to moisture or to the action of any solvents, ether excepted.1 M. Malgaigne states, in his article already quoted, that "a piece of linen or cotton cloth covered with it, and made to adhere by evaporation to the palm of the hand, will support, after a few minutes, without giving way, a weight of from 20 to 30 lbs. Its adhesive power is so great that the cloth will commonly be torn 1 Evaporated collodion, according to Lowig, is " extremely electric." COLLODION. 241 before it gives way." Collodion can rarely be regarded as a perfect solution of cotton; it often contains, suspended and floating in it, a quantity of vegetable fibre which has escaped the solvent action of the ether. The liquid portion may be separated from these fibres by decantation or straining, but it is doubtful whether this is an advan- tage. In the evaporation of the liquid, these undissolved fibres, by felting with each other, appear to give a greater degree of tenacity and resistance to the dried mass, without destroying its transparency. Straining and expressing collodion are often necessary when it contains a large amount of undissolved fibre, which is generally the case with the last portions, in a bottle from which the clear liquid has been from time to time decanted; a slight precaution may save the operator a great deal of trouble and mortification from his hands becoming coated with it beyond remedy. When about to squeeze the strainer, or to thrust the hands into the liquid for any purpose, be careful to have a towel at hand, and instantly, on removing them, wipe them thoroughly dry before time is allowed for evaporation and the consequent deposit of the pellicle. This plan will be found effectual. Mode of Preservation.—Collodion is one of those liquids which, owing to extreme volatility, it is objectionable to use from a large bottle, not only from the waste by evaporation every time the stop- per is drawn, and the consequent inspissation of the liquid; but, also, from the explosive nature of the vapor of ether when it comes in contact with flame; it should, therefore, be put up in small vials, from which it may be used with economy and safety. Formerly the apothecaries usually put it in ground stoppered vials, of one or two ounce capacity; but a great improvement has been made in the substitution for these of common cork-stoppered, one ounce vials. Cork, by its elasticity, can be made to fit the neck of a vial more tightly than the best glass stopper, and is, therefore, less liable to be thrown out on an elevation of temperature of the contained vola- tile liquid. Collodion is generally applied by the aid of a camel's- Fis- 17?. hair brush, but if one of these is allowed to dry, after being immersed in the liquid, it is apt to be too stiff to use again. To obviate this disadvantage, a contrivance, such as is shown in the accompanying figure, is resorted to; it consists of a long f3*j vial, with a cork stopper, which is perforated with the smallest cylinder of the cork borer, or with the rat-tail file (see Figs. 169 and 170, p. 220), and into this perforation a thin piece of wood with a turned cap about the diameter of the cork is tightly in- serted; this plug of wood has the diameter of the quill of a camel's-hair brush of medium size, and it is long enough to project below the cork so that the quill will fit on to it 16 242 LIGNIN AND ITS DERIVATIVES. and be secure. The bottle being now nearly filled and the cork inserted, the brush will dip into the collodion, and, by constant im- mersion, will keep moist and always ready for use. For further particulars in regard to the application of this principle to the ad- ministration of medicines, the reader is referred to the chapter on Dispensing. I have observed that where, from exposure, a part of the ether has evaporated, the addition of more ether will serve to redissolve the gelatinous residue, unless it has dried beyond a certain point at which it becomes quite insoluble. Uses of Collodion.—The principal application of this adhesive liquid is to ordinary superficial sores, as cuts and abrasions of the skin, and also to some skin diseases, where the indication is to pro- tect the part from external irritating influences, and where violent itching is one of the most troublesome symptoms. Prof. Simpson, of Edinburgh, recommends it for sore nipples, which it completely protects without interfering with the sucking of the infant; for this purpose, it would seem that Rand's preparation would be best suited. It was first principally recommended for the application of bandages, and is used very much in France as a substitute for dextrin in permanent splints, which, by its use, may be applied over a less extended surface without diminishing the strength and permanence of the dressing. In cases of burns, where the cuticle has been removed and the symptoms of acute pain allayed by suitable applications, collodion is capable of one of its most useful applications, though its con- tractility, besides the pain and sense of constriction which it induces, is also objectionable from occasioning a cracking of the pellicle and the irritation of the surface thus exposed. By combining collodion with the ethereal tincture of chloride of iron, a compound is produced which is said to furnish a much more resisting and pliable, though a thinner pellicle, and one adapted to the treatment of erysipelas. One of the uses of collodion in the arts should not be overlooked in this connection. In photography, it is used to form the delicate pellicle upon which images are reflected in the camera, for trans- ference to the engraver's block. By this process many of the drawings throughout this work have been produced, accurately representing the originals. The composition of collodion has excited much discussion, and some ingenious hypotheses. It is still very much in the dark. The discovery by Prof. Leidy, of this city, of a beautiful crystal- line deposit in inspissated collodion, and a similar and independent observation in London, are among the most remarkable facts bear- ing upon the composition and chemical relations of the group of principles to which lignin belongs. The announcement has been recently made that M. Reschamp, Pro- CARBO LIGNI AND CARBO ANIMALIS. 243 fessor of the School of Pharmacy at Strasburg, has succeeded in re- producing cotton from pyroxyline, by heating it at the tempera- ture of 212° with a concentrated solution of proto-chloride of iron. The chloride deepens in color, and very soon there is a disengage- ment of pure nitric oxide. When this has ceased, and the cotton has been washed with hydrochloric acid, to remove the peroxide of iron impregnating it, the cotton is found to have lost the proper- ties of pyroxyline. In the same way, amidon has been produced from xyloidin. By the distillation of the purer kinds of wood in close vessels, a variety of interesting compounds are produced, which are useful in the arts and in medicine. Of these, charcoal (carbo ligni, U. S), acetic acid (acidum aceticum, U. S), and pyroacetic, and pyroxilic spirit, and creasote (creasotum, U. S), may be mentioned as of special interest to the physician, and a short notice of each is appended. Carbo Ligni and Carbo Animalis, U. S. The former of these two kinds of charcoal is used in medicine, while the latter is most employed in chemical processes as a deco- lorizing agent. Willow charcoal, the variety most used in medicine, is chiefly obtained from the manufacturers of gunpowder, who devote much attention to the production of a pure and fine powdered article. I recently met with a beautiful specimen of wood charcoal, in the un- powdered form, at the Philadelphia Gas Works, where it was col- lected as a residuary product from the manufacture of illuminating gas from wood. Charcoal is wholly insoluble, tasteless, and inodorous; it con- tains a small portion of the incombustible saline materials of the wood, from which it may be freed by digestion in diluted muriatic acid, although this precaution is never necessary as a preparation for medicinal use. The dose of powdered charcoal as an absorbent antiseptic, is about a teaspoonful or less; as an aperient, a tablespoonful, or somewhat less, mixed with magnesia. Animal charcoal, or bone-black, is made from bones by calcina- tion, and, besides carbon, contains phosphate and carbonate of lime in abundance; these important constituents have much to do with the peculiar porosity which gives to this substance the power of absorbing coloring matter and gases, and adapts it for the various uses in the arts and in pharmaceutical chemistry to which it is applied. It is not very convenient to use in fine powder, and is hence generally prepared in a granular condition. Carbo animalis purificatus, U. S., is among the preparations de- signed to be made by the apothecary. It is prepared by digesting a pound of animal charcoal with a pound each of muriatic acid and 244 LIGNIN AND ITS DERIVATIVES. water, for two days at a moderate heat, pouring off the liquid and washing the charcoal thoroughly with water. This is adapted to many uses to which the unpurified powder would be unsuited, owing to its saline ingredients. In the preparation of the alkaloids, gallic acid and numerous other chemical substances, animal charcoal is used to absorb the associated coloring matters; but it should not be forgotten that the same property which adapts it to take up the coloring matter also occasions, to some extent, the absorption of the alkaloid or other principle, so that the loss by the decolorizing process is consider- able, unless means are resorted to for the subsequent extraction of the absorbed portions. To this absorbent property animal charcoal owes its utility as an antidote to the powerful vegetable poisons, which, as proved by Dr. B. H. Rand, may be rendered innoxious in their effects by a large admixture of this inert but porous powder. Acidum Aceticum, U. S. The acid liquid distilled over when charcoal is prepared from wood, in close cylinders without access of air, contains this valuable acid in a very impure state. By subjecting this to further distilla- tion, the liquid is collected which is known as wood vinegar, or pyroligneous acid. By saturating this acid with lime, acetate of lime is produced, which, by decomposition with sulphate of soda, furnishes sulphate of lime and acetate of soda; the latter salt being crystallized in a state of purity, yields, by distillation with sul- phuric acid, pure hydrated acetic acid in solution in water. This is directed in the Pharmacopoeia to have a specific gravity of 1.041, which, however, is a less satisfactory assurance of its strength than its saturating power, which, as before stated under Aceta, is such that 100 grains saturate 60 of crystallized bicarbo- nate of potassa, and contain 36 grains of monohydrated acid. Acetic acid is also produced by the oxidation of alcoholic liquids, especially cider and wine, and in this impure and diluted form is called vinegar; in chemical works it is generally classed among the derivatives of alcohol. Much of the vinegar of commerce is largely adulterated or sophis- ticated, although, according to the experiments of W. W. D. Liver- more, the use of sulphuric acid is less common than has been supposed. Of sixteen specimens of commercial vinegar obtained from different sources, none were adulterated with sulphuric acid. Tested for malic acid, gum, and extractive matter, believed to be always present in cider vinegar, all but two gave evidence of con- taining one or more of these products by throwing down a precipi- tate with subacetate of lead, soluble in nitric acid. The strength of the different specimens was ascertained by him CREASOTUM. 245 9 grains 4 n 8 i< 4A K 6 k 8 ti 8 i °T- \. 6.34 per cent, volatile oil. j sPasm°dl°- 32 per cent. gum. j Stimulant like assa- 54 per cent, resin. >- fw;,},, 3.73 per cent, volatile oil. J 19.5 per cent. gum. • 80 per cent, gambogic acid. C60H35O)2. (?) Sol. in ether. 5 to 80 per cent, resin. Cathartic. 30 per cent. gum. ~\ 56 per cent, resin. I For fumigation. 8 per cent, volatile oil. J 40.81 per cent. gum. (Arabin ) |Em 44. /6 percent, resin. (Neutral.) >- , , . & ' 2.18 per cent, volatile oil. J •= ' IY. Balsams. C Benzoic acid, average 15 per cent. Benzoinum, U.S. Sp.gr. 1.063 j a. Resin, C70H42O14, soluble in ether, not in KO,C02. From Styrax Benzoin. j b. Resin, C30H20O5, soluble in KO,C02, not in ether. [c. Resin, C^H^Og, soluble in alcohol, not in ether. Balsamum Peruvian™, U. S. J ^U or dSiTamein^g percent. 1 Stimulating ex- Sp. gr. 1.14 to 1.16. | 231 per cent resi'Q> CP jj^ J pectorant. { Resin, 88 per cent. \ Cinnamic acid, 12 per cent. >- Do. Volatile oil, 0.2 per cent. oj. tt a n i. ■ • (Benzoic acid. Sti?l> Hl°nCFete ^"M Styracine. Cinnameine. (?) [ 12 resins. of S. officinale. V. Other Articles of Materia Medica containing Besins or Besinoid Active Principles. Calamus, U. S. ; rhizome of Acorus C. Minute quantity of essential oil, and 2.3 per cent, of soft resin. Cimicifuga, U. S.; root of C. racemosa. See p. 163. Colocynthis, U. S.; fruit of Citrullus C. Colocynthin. Extractum cannabis, U. S. ; extract Indian hemp. Cannabin. Guaiaci lignum, U. S. ; wood of G. officinale. 26 per cent, resin, ext., &c. Helleborus, U. S.; root of helleborus niger. Helleborin. Soft, acrid resin. Jalapa, U.S.; root of Ipomcea J. 7.8 per cent, jalapin; C42H,5020. See p. 163. Mezereum, U. S.; bark of Daphne M.> and Daphne gnidium. Acrid resin. Podophyllum, U. S.; root of P. peltatum. See Podophyllin, p. 163. Pyrethrum, U. S. ; root of Anacyclus P. Pyrethrin; acrid resin. Zingiberis, U. S.; rhizoma of Z. officinale. Small quantity of essential oil. See p. 284. Also, drugs, generally, which contain essential oils. ARTICLES OF MATERIA MEDICA CONTAINING RESINS. 291 Of the resins proper, mastich, copal, and sandarac are used almost exclusively in varnishes; elemi enters into some stimulating ex- ternal applications; amber is used exclusively for the products of its distillation^ Burgundy pitch and the so-called hemlock gum (pix Canadensis) are applied in the form of plasters for their stimu- lating and counter-irritant effects. Guaiacum, which was formerly classed with the gum-resins, is adapted to the treatment of rheu- matic complaints, for which it is much used. Of the oleo-resins three are turpentines. White or common tur- pentine (terebinthina) yields the valuable oil which has such exten- sive use in the arts and in medicine, and resin, a scarcely less use- ful product, which in turn, by distillation, yields several empyreu- matic oils employed in the arts. Balsam of fir, T. Canadensis, and Venice turpentine, T. veneta, are chiefly used in the arts, the latter being a useful ingredient in sealing-wax; it is much sophisticated. Copaiva is highly esteemed for its stimulating effect upon the mu- cous surfaces, particularly those of the urinary organs. The gum resins and balsams are distinguished from each other by the latter containing benzoic or cinnamic acid. Ammoniac, assafoetida, and the balsams are much used as stimu- lating expectorants. Assafoetida, galbanum, and sagapenum are most esteemed for antispasmodic effects both internally and ex- ternally applied; the latter is rarely met with in this country. Olibanum is almost exclusively used for fumigation. Gamboge and scammony are powerful drastic cathartics, the latter being almost always largely adulterated. Myrrh is peculiarly fitted for weak and relaxed conditions of the system connected with diseases of the lungs and uterus. It is much combined with salts of iron, as in Griffith's myrrh mixture elsewhere introduced. Of the balsams, benzoin is solid, hard, and brittle; that of Peru, called also myroxylon, is fluid; Tolu is intermediate, being a very soft and readily fusible solid; while storax is met with both in the liquid and a very impure solid granular form. . The group of drugs containing resinous active principles com- prises a considerable variety. Calamus, mezereon, and pellitory, with some of the essential oil group, are powerful local stimulants. Colocynth, jalap, podophyllum, and hellebore, are cathartics, the latter possessing emmenagogue properties. Cimicifuga is a sedative tonic in diseased conditions of the nervous system. Extract of cannabis is exhilarant. Ginger is a carminative greatly esteemed. See the chapters on Tinctures, Extracts, and Fluid Extracts. 292 ON NEUTRAL ORGANIC PRINCIPLES, ETC. CHAPTER VII. ON NEUTRAL ORGANIC PRINCIPLES MOSTLY PECULIAR TO A LIMITED NUMBER OF PLANTS, AND POSSESSED OF MEDICINAL PROPERTIES. Formerly, the virtues of a great many medical plants were attributed to extractive matter, though this, as obtained from various sources and by different analytical processes, was known to vary somewhat in physical and in chemical properties. Recently, many of these plants have been found to possess cer- tain well-defined proximate principles, sometimes crystalline and sometimes amorphous, to which appropriate names have been given. If alkaline, these names terminate in ia; if neutral or subacid, in in or ine; and, with a view to accuracy, this distinction should be in- variably retained. The chemical properties of many of the uncrystallizable princi- ples have not been sufficiently investigated to admit of their being classified, except by the rather inaccurate designation of extractive. Some of them probably contain crystalline principles, which have as yet escaped observation; others are perhaps the result of the oxidation or alteration in some way, by the processes employed, of the peculiar and obscure principle really at the base of the active properties of the drug. Extractive, then, as at present recognized, is a product of the evaporation of the infusions or tinctures of plants after the separa- tion of their known and indifferent principles. The neutral crystalline principles are conveniently considered under the same head, and will be separately presented with refer- ence to their leading characteristics. Some so designated, though not distinctly crystalline, are pulverulent and white, or of a dis- tinctive color. Neutral crystalline principles are in some instances active, and in others appear to possess little power of affecting the system. Some of them contain nitrogen, while others consist of merely car- bon, hydrogen, and oxygen. To the former class several of the most active belong, and the possession of nitrogen was formerly con- sidered an indication of the power of affecting the nervous system, though digitalin, the most powerful, is not nitrogenized. These principles occasionally unite with acids, forming crystalline com- pounds, which are, however, acid in their properties; others com- bine with alkalies, forming crystallizable salts. They are generally precipitated by tannic acid, and many of them by subacetate of lead. ON NEUTRAL ORGANIC PRINCIPLES, ETC. 293 The modes of obtaining the neutral principles are various, and sometimes very complex. The solubility and the chemical pecu- liarities of each, when known, indicate the process to be pursued in extracting it. Recently, the use of animal charcoal has been found to facilitate their extraction from the solutions containing them. M. Labourdais, a European chemist, has, within a few years, exa- mined many of these principles and published processes for their extraction, in all of which he avails himself of the absorbent power of charcoal, which is greatly increased by its purification. (See Carbo-animalis.) The two following recipes are inserted as exam- ples of his modes of preparation, which are certainly more simple than those previously published. Digitalin.—Precipitate by the acetate of lead an aqueous solu- tion of alcoholic extract of digitalis, filter and agitate the liquid with purified animal charcoal. Let it rest; pour off gently and wash the charcoaled deposit, charged with all the bitter principle, in distilled water. Dry it in a stove, and treat it afterwards with boiling alcohol. This alcohol, evaporated in a water bath, gives a liquid which precipitates, on cooling, the digitalin in a pulverulent form. This can be purified and obtained in crystals by a new alcoholic treatment. Ilicin.—Make a decoction of holly-lea ves; boil with washed animal charcoal; agitate it constantly; take it off the fire; let it rest; pour off gently ; treat the dry charcoal with boiling alcohol; filter; evaporate by the stove. The dry and bitter material obtained is ilicine. Similar modes of preparation may be applied to the isolation of the alkaloids. It will not be expected that a subject so purely scientific, and having so little direct practical application to the wants of the physician, should claim an extended notice in a work like the pre- sent. The appropriation of a chapter to it here results from the effort to generalize, as far as possible, the leading facts in the chemical history of plants, and thus to hold out to the student a study which underlies the whole science of pharmacy. There is no known scientific mode of classifying these organic principles, and the tables which follow lay no claim to such classifi- cation. They are, moreover, liable to the objection of presenting to view some results which require further confirmation, while, from the conflicting character of many of the published analyses, it has been impossible to glean the truth sufficiently to embody it in the compact form selected. It is believed, notwithstanding, that the more important general facts in regard to the neutral peculiar principles are displayed in these tables. 294 ON neutral organic principles, etc. Syllabus of Neutral Organic Peculiar Principles, with the Drugs which yield them. 1st Group.—Extractive Matters, soluble in Water. Aurantiin. Bitter extractive of cortex aurantii and limonis, U. S. Associated with volatile oil. Bitter extractive of anthemis, U. S. Associated with volatile^ oil. " " canella, U. S. Associated with volatile oil. << " chimaphila, U. S. Associated with tannic acid. u << coptis, U. S. Unassociated with volatile oil or tannic acid. " " cornus Florida, U. S. Associated with tannic acid. " " eupatorium, U. S. Associated with tannin, &c. " " gentiana, U. S. Containing unimportant crystalline principles. " " marrubium, U.S. Associated with volatile oil. " " serpentaria, U. S. Associated with volatile oil. •' and acrid extractive of scilla, U. S. Said to contain two distinct principles. r , . . f senn.a> Y' .,' ,. tt a I Probably not the active principle as here- C.thartin, in-^ cassia Manlandica, U.S. V tofore obtained. L rnamni baccae. ) Ergotin, extractive of ergota, U. S. Associated with fixed oil, &c. See p. 161. Extractive of juglans, U. S. Cathartic principle little understood. Ilicin, in ilex (the holly). Used as a substitute for quinia. 2d Group.—Neutral Crystalline Principles, with their Composition, Sources, &c. Absinthin, C16H,0O4, from absinthium, U. S. Bitter principle precipitated by 2Pb Ae. Aloin, C34H]80)4HO, from aloe, U S. The active principle very soluble in hot water and alcohol. Yields by oxidation crysamic acid. Amygdalin, C^H^NO^, from amygdala amara, U. S. Forms hydrocyanic acid with emulsin. , . a. . ,. 1 Represented in some [ Asparagus officinalis. r ,, Asparagin, 2HO, C8H8N205 from I Altha>» radix U S. , J0^ J, maHc ^ Althem> ' 1 Glycyrrhiza, US f ^ amid mak. L Symphytum officinale, U. S. j mid6) ^^0,. Apocynin (?), from apocynum cannabinum, U. S. Emetic and cathartic. Asclepione, C40H34O6, from asclepias syriaca, U. S. Soluble in ether; narcotic. Caffein, C16H10N4O4, from caffea arabica. Coffee. Isomeric with thein. Cantharidin, C10H6O4, from cantharis and C. vittata, U. S. Soluble in alcohol and water as naturally combined, and very freely in oil of turpentine, fixed oils, ether and chloroform. Cascarillin, C H 0 (?), from cascarilla, U. S. Bitter principle soluble in alcohol; pre- cipitated by subacetate of lead from solution. Cetrarin, C34H16016, from cetraria, U. S. Bitter principle. Columbin, C42H22014, from columba, U. S. Associated with alkaloid berberine. Cubebin, C34H34O10, from cubeba, U. S. Soluble in ether, volatile oils, and hot alcohol. Cusparin (?), from angustura, U. S. Soluble in water, especially hot; precip. by T. Daphnin (?), from mezereum, U. S. Bitter principle analogous to asparagin, asso- ciated with acrid resin. Digitalin, C H 0 (?), from digitalis, U. S. Soluble in water in its natural combination; a violent poison—dose l-30th grain. Elaterin, C20H14O5 (?), from elaterium, U. S. Very powerful cathartic; dose l-10th gr. Esculin, C16H9O10, from sesculus hippocastanum. Horsechestnut. Antiperiodic. (?) Helleborin (?), from helleborus, U. S. Associated with acrid resin and oil. Hesperidin (?), from cortex limonis, &c, U. S. Inert; associated with bitter extractive. Hydrastin (?), from hydrastis Canadensis. See p. 163 and 297. Limonin, C42H250,3, from seeds of lemon and orange. Liriodendrin (?), from liriodendron, U.S., and magnolia, U. S. Soluble in ether and alcohol; bitter and pungent. NEUTRAL ORGANIC PRINCIPLES. 295 Maticin (?), from matico, U. S. Bitter principle, associated with an active essential oil. Meconin, C10H5O4, |fr0m opium, £7. & Narcotin, tonic and antiperiodic.(?) The- Narcem, C23H20NOI2, V rapeutics little understood. (See Alkaloids.) Narcotin, C48H24N015, J * „. , , ■ Phloridzin, C24H,6014. from apple, cherry, and plum trees. Bitter and astringent. Picrotoxin, Cl0H6O4(?), from cocculus indicus. Poisonous. Piperin, C70H37N2O10, from piper nigrum and longum, U. S. Soluble in ether, volatile oils, &c. (See Extractum Piperis Fluidum.) Quassin, C20H,2OG, from quassia. U. S., and simaruba, U. S. Said to be = Esculin. Salicin, C42H"29022, from salix, U. S., and other bitter willow and poplar barks. Solu- ble in water. Santonin, C80Hl8O6, from semen santonica. Acid and bitter; soluble in alcohol and ether; anthelmintic; dose 1 to 4 grains. Saponin, C9RH,,Ol6 (?), from saponaria officinalis, U. S. Frothing in solution. Sarsaparillin, 04H803 (?), from sarsaparilla, U. S. Soluble in hot water and volatile oils. (?) Scillitin (?), from scilla, U. S. Requires further examination. Scoparin, C21HU0IO, from scoparius, U. S., said to be associated with a liquid alkaloid, Spartein, C,,HnN. . Senegin or polygalic acid, C22Hls0n, from Senega, TJ. S. Very acrid; soluble in water; resembling saponin. Taraxacin (?), from taraxacum, U. S. Bitter, acrid; soluble in hot water. Thein, C.GH10N4O4, from the different varieties of thea (tea). Identical with caffein. Theob'romin, C14H%N404, from theobroma cacao. Contains C2H2 less than thein. Xanthoxylin (?), from xanthoxylum, U. S. Properties not investigated. Of the drugs enumerated in this syllabus, several are distin- guished by containing the extractive principle named:— Cathartin.—This is a yellow uncrystallizable substance, with a bitter, nauseous taste, very soluble both in water and alcohol. It attracts moisture from the air, and is precipitated by infusion of galls and subacetate of lead. It contains no nitrogen. Cathartin, in an impure form, is occasionally prescribed in small doses, although it is by some said not to possess the active properties of the plant. The cathartic principle of juglans (white walnut bark) has not been sufficiently studied to allot it a place in any classi- fication. Under the name of ergotin, a preparation, which has been men- tioned among the pseudo extracts, is sold in the shops. It is not entitled to rank among pure active principles; but, in the_latitude given to the construction of these tables, it is perhaps not inappro- priately introduced among the extractive matters. Saponin is the name given to a pulverulent principle present in the saponaria officinalis. The active principle of senega, which has been called senegin, or polygalic acid, resembles saponin in some of its properties. It has been obtained as a white powder, soluble in water and alcohol, insoluble in ether, and precipitated by sub- acetate of lead. It forms no crystallizable salts. It does not con- tain nitrogen. Sarsaparilla yields a crystalline principle _ called smilacin, or sarsaparillin, which resembles senegin and saponin. It is only slightly soluble in cold water, and distinguished by the frothy character it gives to its solution on agitation. Monesia bark and the imported extract of that name are believed to contain saponin. _ Angustura bark yields, on the spontaneous evaporation of its 296 ON NEUTRAL ORGANIC PRINCIPLES ETC. tincture, a crystalline principle slightly soluble in water, more so in alcohol, to which the name cusparin has been applied. ^ Gentian contains a crystallizable principle named gentwin, but the most prominent character of the root, that of intense bitterness, seems to remain after the separation of this principle, and from this extractive mass no other principle has been isolated; so that we may regard its activity as belonging to bitter extractive. Aloin,.—The recent discovery by T. and H. Smith, of Edinburgh, of a neutral crystalline principle existing in aloes, has excited much interest, and their experiments have been repeated by several with- out success. They obtained it from an aqueous solution, though in sulphur-yellow crystals, which were sparingly soluble, though very readily dissolved by alkali. Aloin is thrown down by subacetate of lead as an intensely yellow precipitate. Among the most interesting of the nitrogenized neutral princi- ples are thein and caffein, which have the composition C16H10N4O4, and theobromin C14H8N404. These possess similar properties, both chemically and therapeutically, and are remarkable for the very large proportion of nitrogen they contain. The almost universal employment as beverages of infusions of tea, coffee, or chocolate, which contain one or other of these principles, taken in connec- tion with their composition, has given rise to important theoretical views concerning their utility, which will be found fully developed in Liebifs Animal Chemistry. Asparagin, or althein, C8H8N205-}-2HO, is another highly nitro- genized neutral crystalline principle, which exists in asparagus, liquorice, and althea roots. It seems destitute of any striking therapeutical effects, although like the powerful alkaloids in con- taining nitrogen. Amygdalin, C40H27NO22, is a remarkable crystalline principle, reacting in the presence of water, with emulsin, a sort of vegetable albumen, to develop the powerfully odorous volatile oil, called oil of bitter almonds, and hydrocyanic acid. These principles are much used in Europe for the artificial preparation of bitter almond water. In piperin, C70H37N2O10, and cubebin, C34H34O]0, we have an illustra- tion of two crystalline products which resemble each other in pro- perties, though differing in regard to a most important peculiarity —the presence of nitrogen. They neither of them play an im- portant part in the activity of the medicines containing them. The former is recently stated to be a compound of an alkaloid, picolin, Ci2H7N. In digitalin, which is destitute of nitrogen, we have the most potent of vegetable poisons, powerfully affecting the nervous sys- tem in doses of one-thirtieth grain. In elaterin, we have a rare instance of an organic crystalline principle, possessed of powerfully acrid cathartic qualities. Salicin and phloridzin are crystalline principles occasionally met with in commerce, but they are rarely prescribed. Salicin has COLORING MATTERS. 297 been used as an adulteration of sulphate of quinia, from which it is conveniently distinguished by its property of turning red on the application of sulphuric acid. Hydrastin, which was at first considered an alkaloid, is now stated to be a neutral principle. It is believed to be nitrogenized. Edward S. Wayne, of Cincinnati, Ohio, informs me that he is in the habit of extracting large quantities of it to meet an extensive demand in the West. Its brilliant yellow color adapts it to use as a pigment, besides its reputed utility as a medicine. Santonin possesses more practical interest than most of its class, from its extensive use in medicine as a vermifuge. It is extracted from the European wormseed, and is an article of commerce not only in Europe, where it has been used for some years, but in this country, where its value is just beginning to be appreciated by practitioners. It is in colorless crystals, with little taste, owing to their insolubility, though leaving a slight sense of acrimony in the mouth; its solution is bitter. It is soluble in ether and alcohol, and but slightly in water. Though without acid or alkaline action on test paper, it combines with alkalies, forming soluble compounds. It is best given in powder, diluted with sugar, and is recommended by the absence of an unpleasant taste. The dose is from one to four grains twice a day. It is one of the numerous principles which have been tried, with occasional success, as a substitute for quinia in intermittents. Eor mode of extraction, see Am. Journ. Pharm., vol. xv. p. 278. Coloring Matters. To the class of neutral crystalline principles belong several im- portant coloring matters. Indigotin, C16H5N02, is the coloring principle of indigo. It is in- soluble in water; but, by the action of deoxidizing agents, is con- verted into white indigo, which contains one more atom of hydrogen; this is soluble in water, and, by exposure to the air, becomes con- verted again into indigotin. By treating indigo with very strong sulphuric acid, a compound is formed called sulph.-indylic acid C16H5N02+2S03. This is used as a test for chlorine, which de- prives it of color. Litmus.—The article which comes in small cakes, made up of a granular powder, known in commerce as litmus, is a factitious sub- stance, prepared chiefly in Holland from certain lichens, species of Rocella, which contain a peculiar acid—lecanoric acid. The mass is made by macerating the lichen for some time in a solution of lime and potash, which gives a red-colored liquid containing a peculiar crystallizable compound called orcine. This infusion is mixed with urine, which, after a species of fermentation, in which ammonia is evolved, brings out the peculiar blue coloring principle named 298 ON VEGETABLE ACIDS. orcine. The solution is now made into a mass with earthy im- purities, and dried into its characteristic form. The use of this peculiar substance is familiar to all chemical students. By treating it with successive portions of hot water, an infusion is procured which, by evaporation and painting upon un- sized paper, constitutes test paper; reddened by a weak acid, it serves as a test for alkalies which restore the blue color, while acids redden the blue litmus immediately. Chlorophylle (leaf green), C18HgN08, exists in grasses and the leaves of trees, from which it may be obtained by treating a strong alcohol and ether extract with hydrochloric acid; precipitating the chlorophylle from this with water, and drying, we have it as a dark green powder. Leaves contain only a very small quantity of this principle, which, however, possesses powerful coloring properties. Additional Coloring Substances. Carthamus, U. S. Flowers of C. Tinctoria. C14H807, Red. C24H]3015, Yellow. Coccus, U. S. Coccus cacti, the insect. Carmine, C28H,4016. Red. Crocus, U. S. Stigmas crocus sativa. Polycroite. 1'ellow. Curcuma, U. S. Rhizoma, C. Longa. Curcumin. Yellow ; brown with alkali. Haematoxylon, U S. Wood, H. Campechianum. Haematin, C40H,7O]3. Quercus tinctoria, U. S. The bark (quercitron). Quercitrin, HO, C161I809. Yellow. Santalum, U.S. Wood of pterocarpus, S. Santalin, HO, C30H,3O9. Resinous. Rubia tinctoria, U.S. Root. Rubian, alizarin, C20H6O6; purpurin, C]8H606. Anchusa, U. S. Root of A. Tinctoria. Anchusin, C35H20O8. Red. Green, C31H2.204, Rheum, U. S. Root of R. Palmatum. Rhabarbaric acid. Yellow ; red with alkali. Sanguinaria, U. S. Root of S. Canadensis. Sanguinarina. Red, with acids. Hydrastis. Root of H. Canadensis. Hydrastin. Yellow. CHAPTER VIII. ON VEGETABLE ACIDS. Vegetable acids are distinguished as a class by characteristic properties. They combine with inorganic or organic alkalies, some of them in several different proportions, according to the number of equivalents of water combined with them. Thus, citric is a tribasic acid; containing three equivalents of water; tartaric bibasic, containing only two; and benzoic only one, monobasic. These acids are found in nature both free and combined with organic bases. Some are very commonly diffused throughout the vegeta- ble kingdom, as tannic ; others exist exclusively in one family of plants, as meconic acid in the papaveracese. Some, although exist- ing naturally, are capable of artificial production from other organic material, as oxalic and valerianic. This whole class, like that of organic alkalies, have a much closer relation to inorganic princi- VEGETABLE ACIDS. 299 pies than the neutral crystalline and uncrystallizable principles before spoken of. They all contain oxygen, and, with the excep- tion of hydrocyanic, which is most conveniently classed with them, are destitute of nitrogen in their composition. The vegetable acids are capable of numerous changes during the vegetative process of the plant, and, in some cases, of conversion into each other, as in the ripening of fruits tannic is converted into malic, and both of these into sugar. In their relations to food and medicine, some of this class are exceedingly important. The agreeable acids of the lemon and orange, the grape, the apple, and similar fruits, are refrigerants in the highest degree useful, and even indispensable to man. The astringent acids distributed widely in nature, and much associated with bitter principles in plants, are scarcely less important in the functions they subserve in the general processes of digestion, and especially in enfeebled conditions of the organs. Table of the Principal Vegetable Acids, their Sources, Composition, &c. 1st Group.—Important and widely diffused {Fruit) Acids. Citric, 3H0, C12H5On. In lemons, currants, gooseberries, tomatoes, &c. Tartaric, 2HO, CgH4O10. In grapes. Obtained from wine deposits. Malic, 2HO, C8H403. In apples, &c. Not found in commerce. Acetic, HO, C4H303. Occasionally in plants. Product of fermentation, &c. Oxalic, HO, C2H203. Rhubarb plant, sorrel, &c. Artificially produced. Pectic, HO, C12H176n. Various vegetable juices. Not found in commerce. 2d Group.—Astringent and Allied Acids. Tannic, 8H0, ClgH5Og.' Most powerful, precipitating gelatin, freely soluble. Gallic, 2HO, C7H305. Does not precip. gelatin. Sparingly soluble in cold water. Ellagic, 2H0, C7H365. Very insoluble. Catechu tannic, 3HO, C,8H505. (?) In kino, catechu, &c. Milder than tannic. Cincho-tannic, 2HO, C14H607. In cinchona barks. " Cephalic, Cl4H806. In ipecacuanha. Allied to the foregoing. 3d Group.—Having Belation to Essential Oils. Benzoic, HO, C14H503. By oxidation of oil of bitter almonds. Cinnamic, HO, C18H703. In balsams, old oil of cinnamon, &c. Valerianic, HO, Cl0H9O3. Generated in valerian spontaneously. Produced artifi- cially from fusel oil. Hydrocyanic, HC2N. Generated in bitter almond water, spontaneously. Produced artificially from animal matters. Uh Group.— Combined with Alkaloids in Plants. Meconic, Cl4H4014. With morphia, &c, in opium and the poppy. Kinic, C14H|20]2. With quinia, &c, in cinchonas. Aconitic, Hu, C4H03. With aconitia, &c, in aconite ; also by heating citric. Strychnic or igasuric. With strychnia and brucia, in nux vomica, &c. Veratric, HO, C]8H907. With veratria, in cevadilla seed, &c. Calumbic, C42H210]4. With bebeerina, in columbo-root. Cevadic. With colchicia, in colchicum-root and seed. Coccalinic. With menispermina, in cocculus indicus. 1 The old formula. According to Mulder, it is isomeric with gallic acid and = H0,C28H9O17. 300 ON VEGETABLE ACIDS. First Group.—Fruit Acids. Acidum Citricum, IT. S. This is procured from lime or lemon-juice by neutralizing the acid with chalk, and from the citrate of lime thus formed liberating the citric acid by means of sulphuric acid. It is in large transparent crystals without color, with a strong, but agreeable acid taste, decomposed by heat, very soluble in water and in weak, alcohol, deliquescing in moist weather. Specific gravity 1.6. As usually obtained in crystals, it consists of one equivalent of the tribasic acid-f-one (sometimes two) equivalent of water of crystallization. It is not sold in the form of powder. I have never met with an adulterated article. According to the U S. Pharmacopoeia, 100 grains of crystallized citric acidwill satu- rate 150 grains of bicarb-potassa, which is on the supposition of one equivalent of water of crystallization being present. Its principal consumption is in the preparation of so-called lemon syrup and solution of citrate of magnesia. This latter preparation has in- creased the quantity of the acid used immensely, so that the price has, within two years, advanced to more than double its former average. The recent reduction to near its former rate has probably arisen from an increased supply. To make artificial lemon-juice, add citric acid 5ixss to water Oj ; fresh oil of lemon ™j; and sugar 3j. This solution is much employed in making effervescing draughts. {See Potassae Citras.) A good lemonade may be made by either of the following processes:— 1st. Infuse two lemons, sliced, in a pint or a pint and a half of boiling water; when cool, strain and sweeten to taste. 2d. Dissolve twenty grains of citric acid in a pint of water, and sweeten with sugar to which has been added a drop of fresh oil of lemon. 3d From syrup of citric acid, by recipe given under the head of Fruit Syrups. Fresh lemon-peel is always to be preferred to the oil of the shops. Acidum Tartaricum, TJ. S. This valuable acid is prepared from bitartrate of potassa or cream of tartar, by the addition of carbonate of lime, whereby insoluble tartrate of lime is formed with the excess of acid of the bitartrate and neutral tartrate of potassa left in solution. This is decomposed with chloride of calcium, which forms an additional quantity of tartrate of lime. Lastly, the insoluble tartrate of lime is purified by washing, and decomposed by sulphuric acid, which liberates the tartaric acid. This, on evaporation, crystallizes in colorless crystals, with a tendency to the form of oblique rhombic prisms (citric acid is more in right rhombic prisms). 'It has a sour taste, resembling, though not identical with, that of citric acid. It ASTRINGENT ACIDS. 301 is freely soluble in water, entirely decomposed by heat. Tartaric acid may be recognized by the copious white crystalline precipitate it furnishes on adding to it an excess of any neutral salt of potash. The precipitate formed by both this and citric acid with acetate of lead should be soluble in nitric acid. This is rather a stronger acid than citric, 100 grains saturating 133.5 grains of bicarbonate of potassa. It is most usually sold in powder. Its principal use is in preparing effervescing and refrigerant drinks, and as a substitute for citric acid. Its salts will be treated under their appropriate heads. Oxalic acid is an instance of an important vegetable acid existing ready formed in plants, and also capable of artificial production. All the oxalic acid of commerce is obtained by the action of nitric acid on sugar or starch, the organic principle being oxidized at the expense of the acid. Nitrous fumes and carbonic acid gas are evolved, and oxalic and saccharic acids are formed; the latter, which is the principal product, is collected and crystallized, and most extensively used as a bleaching agent. It is not officinal. Acetic acid has been already referred to as produced in the de- structive distillation of wood, and also as ar product of the ^sponta- neous change which takes place in articles of the saccharine and amylaceous group by the catalytic action of ferments. (See p. 244.) Malic and pectic acids are of little pharmaceutic importance, though of interest as constituents of some of the most useful vegetable pro- ductions. Second Group.—Astringent Acids. The mode of extracting or preparing tannic and gallic acids being very simple and practicable, may next claim attention. Acidum tannicum, TJ. S., is conveniently prepared by treating powdered galls in a narrow covered displacer, with hydrated or washed ether. The ethereal tincture which passes separates, upon standing, into two layers; the lower one is aqueous, thick, and of a light buff or straw color; it contains the tannic acid, which, by the action of the small portion of water in the washed ether, has been dissolved out from the galls. The upper layer or stratum of liquid is limpid and specifically much lighter than the other; it has a greenish cofor, and contains very little dissolved in the ether, but a small amount of coloring matter from the galls. To obtain the dry product, the light layer is poured off and purified by distilla- tion, and combining with water for another operation, while the % thick heavier layer is evaporated in a capsule by a carefully regu- lated heat till dry. If a white and very porous product is desired, the capsule should be inverted towards the end of the evaporation, so as to expose the thick syrupy liquid to the radiated heat. It is swelled up and whitened as the liquid is disengaged. The whole of the liquid which comes over may be evaporated without the precaution of pouring off the top layer, but the tannin is then apt 302 ON vegetable acids. to have a greenish tinge. In large manufacturing establishments apparatus is, of course, constructed for saving all the ether for future use. Figure 179 represents a suitable apparatus for small operations. A is an adapter, such as is used for coupling retorts and receivers; B is a wide-mouth receiving bottle; C is a glass tube passed through the cork, and drawn out to a capillary ori- fice for the escape of air as the liquid drops in. The adapter is designed to be stopped at bottom with a cork notched, as shown in Fig. E; and, as the lower orifice would be too small to allow a free passage of the liquid if the powder were tightly compacted into it, a portion of sand, either alone or mixed with powdered galls, is filled in to the lower part. Fig. F represents the broken beak of a retort cut round- at its broken end, and adapted to a similar use. I have usually employed for this purpose, in teaching the student the process on a small scale, a Farina Cologne bottle cracked off evenly near the bottom, thus forming a still better shaped tube for the purpose. To prevent undue evaporation of ether, a stout, though loosely-fitting cork, maybe introduced into the upper end, or it may be covered with a piece of bladder perforated with a few pin- holes. The yield of tannic acid by this pro- cess is from 30 to 60 per cent, of the galls employed. Acidum gallicum, TJ. S., is made by subject- ing a portion of powdered galls to long-con- tinued action of air and moisture. This may be accomplished in an evaporating capsule loosely covered with paper. The powdered galls is first made into a paste with water, and water repeatedly added to this as it dries, until after the lapse of thirty days (U. S.), when the whole of the tannic has passed spon- taneously into gallic acid. In extracting this from the moist mass, advantage is taken of the known solubility of gallic acid in hot water, and its ready precipitation on cooling; all that is necessary is to press out from the pasty mass its water, and, rejecting this, to digest the remaining paste in hot water, and filter the solution while hot through animal charcoal to decolorize it, and a nearly white crystalline powder of gallic acid is obtained. Fig. 180 re- presents the use of the evaporating dish for the hot solution, and Fig. 181 the arrangement usually adopted for filtering the solution while hot. Care must be taken in these processes not to employ vessels of tinned iron, which, by the exposure of a small surface of iron, may blacken the whole product. Displacers for making tannic acid. ASTRINGENT ACIDS. 303 The composition of tannic and gallic acids, according to Liebig, is given in the syllabus of vegetable acids. According to Strecker, whose recent researches upon their chemical history have excited much attention, tannin has the composition C54H22034, and is con- Fig. 180. Fig. 181. verted into gallic acid and grape sugar by sulphuric acid, or by a sort of fermentation under the circumstances brought about in the process for preparing gallic acid. The following formula will ex- plain the reaction according to this view (C54H20O32+8HO, = 3C]4 H6O10+C12HloO10), or one equivalent of tannic acid and eight of water are resolved into three equivalents of gallic acid and one of grape sugar. The rational formula for gallic acid, according to Strecker, is 3HO, C14H307, thus making it a tribasic acid. Gallic acid is soluble in cold water in about the proportion of four grains to the ounce. In common with tannic, it is usually given in pill, though used externally in ointment and solution. 3 Ellagic acid is the name given to another principle present in gall-nuts. It is insoluble in water, alcohol, and ether, and appears to be isomeric with gallic acid. Both tannic and gallic acids are decomposable by heat into pyro- gallic, C6H303, and metagallic, C6H202, acid. The former, on account of its great sensitiveness to light, in combination with silver, is considerably employed in photographic processes. Uses and Varieties.—The relative utility of tannic and gallic acids, which are too apt to be confounded by physicians, depends upon the fact that the former acts directly upon the mucous membranes with which it comes in contact, arresting hemorrhage or other ex- cessive discharge by its direct effect on the gelatin frequent in them. It is hence a direct and powerful styptic, while gallic acid, by entering the circulation, produces an astringent and tonic im- pression upon the more remote organs which cannot be directly impressed. The dose of tannic acid is from two to ten grains, that of gallic acid from five to twenty, several times a day. The former is much used in ointment as a substitute for powdered galls, in 304 ON VEGETABLE ACIDS. about one-fourth the quantity, and is also well adapted to astrin- gent injections instead of the less soluble vegetable astringents. Its action is considered somewhat different (harsher) than that of the modified forms of tannic contained in kino, krameria, cinchona, &c. There are a variety of modifications of tannin, some of which are mentioned under different names in the Syllabus. These are distinguished by their behavior with salts of iron, gelatin, &c. The list which follows contains the names of different vegetable astrin- gents owing their activity wholly or in part to tannic or gallic acid, in some of their various modified forms. List of Vegetable or Tannic Acid Astringents. Catechu, U. S.; extract of wood of acacia catechu. Gum catechu. Chimaphila, U. S.; leaves of C. umbellata. Pipsissewa. Cinchona, U. S. ; bark of different species cinchona. Peruvian bark. Diospyros, U. S. ; unripe fruit of D. Virginiana. Persimmon. Galla, U. S. ; morbid excrescence in quercus infectoria. Galls. Geranium, U. S.; rhizoma of G. maculatum. Cranesbill. Geum, U. S.; root of G. rivale. Water avens. Granatum fructus cortex, U. S. ; from punica granatum. Pomegranate. " radicis cortex, U. S. Hsematoxylon, U. S.; wood of H. Campechianum. Logwood. Heuchera, U. S. ; root of H. Americana. Alum root. Kino, U. S. ; inspissated juice of various plants. Kino. Krameria, U. S. ; root of K. triandra. Rhatany. Quercus alba, U. S. ; the bark. White oak bark. Quercus tinctoria, U. S. ; the bark. Black oak bark. Rosa gallica, U. S.; the petals. Red roses. Rubus villosus, U. S. ; the root. Blackberry-root. " trivialis, U. S.; " Dewberry-root. Spireea, U. S. ; root of spiraea tomentosa. Hardback. Statice, U. S. ; the root of S. Caroliniana. Marsh rosemary. Tormentilla, U. S.; the root of potentilla, T. Tormentil. Uva ursi, U. S. ; leaves of arctostaphylos, U. U. Bearberry leaves. Third or Balsamic Group. Acidum Benzoicum, TJ. S. This was formerly stated to be characteristic of the class of medi- cines called balsams, although cinnamic acid is more recently asserted to be present in balsams of Tolu and Peru to its exclusion. It is readily obtained from benzoin by sublimation. For this experi- ment, which is an interesting one to the pharmaceutical student, the following simple directions are to be observed. Select an iron or tinned iron pan or cup—a common pint cup, without a handle, will answer—and, having covered the bottom with some powdered benzoin mixed with sand, stretch over the top of it a piece of por- ous paper, which may be secured at the edge by a string, but pre- ferably by glue or some firm paste. Now fold a tall conical or straight-sided cap of the diameter of the pan, and tie it, "or cement it securely round the upper edge, and set the whole in a sand bath, HYDROCYANIC ACID. 305 or over a slow and well-regulated source of heat, leaving it for several hours. On removing the cap, it will be found to contain brilliant white feathery crystals of benzoic acid. The residue in the cup, by being again powdered, mixed with sand, and heated, will yield another, though a less abundant and less beautiful crop of crystals. As thus obtained, benzoic aeid has a faint and agree- able balsamic odor, with very little taste, being nearly insoluble. The process of Scheele consists in boiling the balsam with hy- drate of lime, and treating the benzoate of lime thus formed with muriatic acid. Thus procured, benzoic acid has but little odor, and is ill adapted to the uses to which it is usually applied in medicine and pharmacy. An article is now met with in our markets imported from Germany, and manufactured from urine; its odor betrays its origin, besides that its appearance is different from the sublimed article. Valerianic Acid. Valerianicis an important medicinal acid developed spontaneously by the oxidation of volatile oil of valerian, as benzoic acid is by a similar change in the volatile oil of bitter almond. These, together with several other organic acids and odorous principles, are capable of being manufactured practically on an economical scale by arti- ficial means. The substance met with in commerce as fusel oil, which is a residuary product of the rectification of alcohol from whiskey, has the composition Cl0H12O2, or may be represented by CI0HnO + HO, that is a hydrate of an oxide of a radical C10ITU, called amyle. Hence, fusel oil is regarded as amylic alcohol; and as acetic acid is formed from common alcohol by adding two equiva- lents of oxygen and subtracting two of hydrogen, so valerianic acid is formed from amylic alcohol by a similar change of elements. The production of other comparatively rare vegetable principles from those which are abundant is so greatly to be desired that chemists are earnestly directing their attention to this new and promising field of discovery. Yalerianic acid, though not itself used in medi- cine, enters into several salts used in nervous affections, which are introduced in their appropriate places. Acidum Hydrocyanicum Dilutum, TJ. S. Hydrocyanic or prussic acid, in its interesting connection with amygdalin and emulsin as existing in a certain family of plants, has already been referred to, but its mode of preparation and uses seem appropriate to this place. The processes of the U. S. Pharmacopoeia are two in number:— 1st. For the preparation of a considerable quantity, especially with a view to its fixation in the form of cyanuret of silver. 2d. For its extemporaneous preparation by a ready process, and one which shall invariably yield a definite and uniform result. 1st Process. Take of ferrocyanuret of potassium (yellow prussiate 20 306 ON VEGETABLE ACIDS. of potash) gij, sulphuric acid giss, distilled water q. s. Mix the acid with distilled water f liv, and pour the mixture when cool into a glass retort. To this add the ferrocyanuret of potassium previously dissolved in distilled water fix. Pour off the distilled water fsviij into a cooled receiver; and, having attached this to the retort, distil by means of a sand bath, with a moderate heat, f|vj. Lastly, add to the product distilled water fov, or q.s., to render the diluted hydrocyanic acid of such strength that 12.7 grains of nitrate of silver dissolved in distilled water may be accurately saturated by 100 grains of the acid, and give 10 grains of the cyanuret of silver. The difficulties in this process are twofold: 1st. It is difficult to conduct the distillation in an ordinary uncovered retort by reason of the excessive bumping occasioned by the escape of the acid vapor through the mixed liquid and precipitate; and 2d. It is exceedingly troublesome to adjust the strength of the distillate to the officinal standard. The first of these difficulties may be over- come, but the precision necessary to be observed in regard to the strength of so powerful a medicine as this, and the impossibility of regulating by the proportions employed the amount of the acid generated and absorbed by the water in the receiver, make it neces- sary to determine its strength by experiment at each operation. This may be accomplished by testing, say 100 grains of the acid distillate with nitrate of silver before diluting it, carefully washing the resulting cyanide of silver, drying and weighing it, then calcu- lating the degree of dilution required by the weight of this precipi- tate. If of proper strength this would be 10 grains, as above, but in this experiment of course a larger yield would be obtained. The equation would then be as follows: As the known weight of the precipitate from acid of standard strength, is to the weight of cyanide obtained from the distillate, so is the quantity of the acid weighed to the quantity to be obtained by dilution. Suppose the precipitate to have weighed 11.5 grains—then 10 : 11.5 :: 100 : 111.5; or to every 100 grains of the distillate 11.5 grains of water must be added to make the officinal diluted hydrocyanic acid. The plan that I would recommend to the inexperienced is to saturate the acid which comes over by the officinal process without special reference to the quantity of water in the receiver, with nitrate of silver (the nitrate may be introduced into the receiver before the distillation commences); the result is the formation of cyanuret or cyanide of silver in the form of a very permanent insoluble powder. This, by washing with water and drying, will produce by its decomposition for any given weight, a constant quantity of hydrocyanic acid. It is officinal. Argenti Cyanureium, TJ. S. The Pharmacopoeia directs for its preparation nitrate of silver and ferro-cyanuret of potassium, of each, Iij, sulphuric acid §iss, and directs the distillation of the hydrocyanic acid produced from the HYDROCYANIC ACID. 307 ferrocyanuret and sulphuric acid directly into a solution of the nitrate of silver. Cyanuret or cyanide of silver is a white powder, tasteless, without odor, insoluble in cold nitric acid, but decomposed by that acid at boiling temperature. It is soluble in ammonia and cyanuret of potassium; it consists of 1 eq. of cyanogen 26 + , 1 of silver 108=134. Acidum Hydrocyanicum Dilutum, TJ. S. {2d Process.) Take of Cyanuret of Silver . . . fifty grains and a half. Muriatic Acid .... forty-one grains. Distilled Water .... one fluidounce. Mix the muriatic acid with the distilled water, add the cyanuret of silver, and shake the whole in a well-stoppered vial; when the insoluble matter has subsided, pour off the clear liquid and keep it for use. Diluted hydrocyanic acid should be kept in closely-stop- pered vials excluded from the light. In preparing this medicine, a slight excess of muriatic acid is not objectionable, giving it greater stability, and as the commercial acid is nearly always weaker than that of the Pharmacopoeia, it should be added as long as any pre- cipitate is produced. It is usually put up in f Ij ground-stoppered vials, the imported kind called Saxony is the best; each vial being inclosed in a tin can. The only apparent objection to this process is its expensiveness; this is, however, less than would at first appear. The reaction between muriatic acid and the cyanide results in the pro- duction of hydrocyanic acid and chloride of .silver, thus—AgCy + HCl, = H,Cy + AgCl. Now, the chloride of silver is convertible into pure metallic silver by the introduction into it while in the condition of a moist powder, of a strip of zinc which abstracts the chlorine, the chloride of zinc becoming dissolved, and the pure silver remaining as a gray colored spongy mass or powder, which, on being washed and treated with nitric acid, yields the soluble nitrate ready for any further use. The country practitioner who wishes to be prepared for every emergency in his practice, may with advantage supply himself with a suitable f Ij vial, containing 50£ grs. cyanide of silver, to which the mixed muriatic acid and water may be added when the occa- sion arises. The diluted acid prepared as above is a colorless liquid, fre- quently having, from the presence of iron, a slight blue tint, of a peculiar odor and taste; it is entirely volatilized by heat. It con- tains two per cent, of anhydrous acid (HCy). Its use in medicine has been very much avoided by practitioners, on account of the violent poisonous character of the anhydrous or concentrated acid ; but in the diluted form, in which it is officinal, it is no more dan- gerous than many other remedies constantly prescribed, and, not- withstanding the alleged variable strength of the commercial article, I believe it will be found as nearly uniform as most otherNpharma- ceutical preparations. The books prescribe for use in medicine no 308 ON VEGETABLE ACIDS. acid stronger than that of Scheele, which is about two and a half times as strong as the officinal, and may be given in doses of a drop or two. The dose of the officinal acid is "Lij to "Lv. _ As a sedative and antispasmodic, it is a favorite with some practitioners, who era- ploy it simply mixed with mucilage, or with the galenical prepara- tions of digitalis, valerian, &c. It should not be prescribed with strong alkaline or ferruginous salts. Potassii Ferrocyanuretum, TJ. S. Yellow prussiate of potash may be, perhaps, appropriately men- tioned under this head, being the salt used in the first of the fore- going processes. This is formed on a large scale by heating to redness in iron pots adapted to suitable stirring arrangements, hoofs, horns, and the rejected parts of dead animals, with potash and iron; after long- continued heating and stirring these together, they are found to have combined into an impure mass in which ferrocyanide is formed by contact with water and crystallized into large yellow crystals, soluble in water, and having a sweetish saline taste. They consist of three equivalents of cyanuret of potassium, one of cyanuret of iron, and three of water, or, if the water be omitted, of ferrocyanogen (Fe3Cy), with two equivalents of potassium. It is not used in medicine, and is less poisonous than would be supposed from its chemicalcom- position. One of its most important uses is in the preparation of ferrocyanuret of iron or Prussian blue. Potassii Cyanuretum, TJ. S. Cyanide of potassium, prepared by fusing the above in contact with carbonate of potassa, is in white fused masses (the iron being precipitated as sesquioxide), of a powerful caustic taste, and is one of the most intense poisons we possess. Its composition is expressed by the formula KCy, though it is usually contaminated by carbonate and cyanate of potassa. It is given as a substitute for hydrocyanic acid, the dose being TH grain dissolved in alcohol. It is a useful chemical agent for removing the stains of nitrate of silver, durable ink, and its utility as a solvent for the metallic oxides is well known in electro-metallurgy and photography. Fourth Group.—Acids naturally combined with Alkaloids, To the group of acids mentioned in the syllabus as occurring in certain plants combined with alkaloids, it will be unnecessary to refer in detail. They may be passed with the remark that rneconic acid is interesting from its importance in toxicological investi- gations. It furnishes a blood-red color with the salts of sesqui- oxide of iron, and a green precipitate with a weak solution of ammoniated sulphate of copper. These reactions aid in discovering the presence of opium in solution. ON THE ALKALOIDS. 309 CHAPTER IX. ON THE ALKALOIDS. The vegetable alkalies or alkaloids, like the neutral principles, are among the triumphs of the nineteenth century, the announce- ment of the first, morphia, by Sertiirner, only dating as far back as 1817. Since that time a great number of them have been disco- vered, and, although but few have as yet been brought within reach of the practitioner, they have already made a marked change in the pharmacy of thfe vegetable kingdom. The alkaloids are the most powerful class of organic principles, displaying their effects especially on the nervous system, which they so forcibly impress as to constitute many of them virulent poisons; a few, however, seem nearly destitute of active properties. They all contain nitrogen, and, by destructive distillation, or by heating with alkali, evolve ammonia; they evince their alkalinity by restoring the color to reddened litmus, and by combining with acids to form neutral salts which are crystalline; they also, like the alkalies proper, form double salts with bichloride of platinum. Those with which we are best acquainted have an intensely bitter taste. Most of the alkaloids and neutral crystalline principles are spar- ingly soluble in water, but dissolve freely in alcohol, especially with heat; some dissolve in ether, fixed and essential oils, and almost all in chloroform, which may hence be used for their extraction. They are all precipitated from solution, whether alone or combined as salts, by tannic acid, which is hence, when taken immediately, the best chemical antidote for them; they are precipitated by alkali. _ Conia and nicotia are liquid and volatile; the rest exist either in white powders, crystals, or are disposed to amorphous forms, which, however, crystallize when combined with acids. Unlike the neutral principles, the alkaloids do not exist free in plants, but are generally combined with peculiar vegetable acids. Certain natural families of plants are distinguished by containing the same or similar alkaloids in their several species, while in other instances the same plant contains two or more different alkaloids. Opium contains five, St. Ignatius bean two, sabadilla and veratrum two, while the different species of cinchona are known to contain three. It is believed that all really poisonous plants contain an alkaloid or neutral crystalline principle, except, perhaps, those few acrid 310 ON THE ALKALOIDS. poisons which owe their activity to resinous principles. It is re- markable that the development of the active principle is frequently only in one organ of the plant, and only at a certain period of its growth. There is no convenient and scientific classification of alkaloids, and their composition which is known, at _ least empirically, affords no clue to their properties and relations; indeed, their separation from some of the class of peculiar neutral principles, though sanctioned by a single well-known chemical distinction, seems forced and unnatural when we compare their physical and therapeutic properties, and is constantly lost sight of by writers. Considering the recent discovery of most of this class, it might be expected that a uniform system of nomenclature would obtain in regard to them. This, however, is only measurably the case; they are most usually named from the generic title of the plants from which first derived, or from some distinguishing property; but by many they are indiscriminately terminated by in or ia. As elsewhere stated, this practice is contrary to the rule adopted by common consent in this country, appropriating to the neutral prin- ciples the former, and to the alkaloids the latter, termination. Even the officinal alkaloids are constantly misnamed from a disregard to this rule. In converting the foreign names into our own Latinized form, some discrepancies arise, as aconitina and aconitia, quinidina and quinidia, applied to the same substances. The mode of preparation of the alkaloids varies with their habi- tudes, and particularly according to their solubility and that of their native combinations. When the native salt is soluble, as meconate of morphia, and the alkaloid is itself insoluble, there is no difficulty in its extraction. The simple addition of a strong alkali to the infusion of the vegetable substance neutralizes the organic acid with which the alkaloid was associated, and it is thrown down in a more or less pure form. It more frequently happens that the native alkaloid salt is not so freely soluble in water, and then a diluted acid is employed for its extraction; so that its salt with an inorganic acid is obtained, and, this being decomposed by an alkali, yields the pure precipitated alkaloid. In a large number of cases, however, these simple methods of extraction are quite useless, and complex processes are resorted to. Some of these are founded upon the alkaloid being separated from its associated prin- ciples by subacetate of lead. Some processes direct ether or chlo- roform as the solvent, which separates the alkaloids from the other proximate principles present, and deposits them upon evaporation. The volatile alkaloids are, of course, prepared by appropriate modi- fications of the process of distillation. The charcoal processes spoken of in the last chapter as applica- ble to neutral crystalline principles, are also adapted, by slight variations, to the alkaloids. It is not intended to go into detail on these processes except in a few cases, as those in use are prepared almost exclusively on a large scale by chemical manufacturers. ON THE ALKALOIDS. 311 List of the Principal Medicines known to contain Alkaloids {classified botanically), with the Alkaloids and their Composition. Ranunculacese. Aconiti folia, TJ. S. ; leaves of A. Napellus. j Aconiti c H Nqm. " radix, " root of " J ' 60 47 u Staphisagria; seed of Delphinium S. Delphinia, C27H19N02. (?) Menispermaceas. Colomba, U S.; root of Cocculus palmatus. j Berberi C42H18N09. Berberis vulgaris,1 bark and root. J u 1S> a Pareira, U. S.; root of Cissampelos. Cissampelina, C36H2,N06. Cocculus indicus ; fruit of Anamirta cocculus. Menispermina, C]8H12N02. Pctpaveracesc. f Morphia, C35H20NO6. TT „ . , „ „ .t m Narcotina, C46H2-NO.,. Papaver, U. S. ; ripe capsules of P. somniferum. ! Codeia c ji ^0 Opium, " ; concrete juice of unripe « | Thebai'a, C25H14N03. (?) [Papaverina, C40H2,N03. Sanguinaria, U. S. ; rhizoma of S. Canadensis. Sanguinarina, C37H16N08. (?) Umbelliferse. Conii folia, U. S.; leaves of Conium maculatum. "* " semen " seed of " VConia, NC16H,5. Cicuta virosa, and maculata, seed. J Cinchonacese. Cinchona pallida, U. S.;^ f Quinia, CjJT^O^ " ilava, " I barks of different species J Cinchonia, C38H22N202. " rubra, " of cinchona. j Quinidia, C36H22N202. " (unofficinal) J L Ipecacuanha, U. S.; root of Cephealis I. Emetia, C35H23N09. Compositese. Arnica, U. S. ; flowers of A. montana. Arnieina. (?) Lobeliacese. Lobelia, U. S. ; herb of L. inflata. Lobelina. (?) Loganiacese. Nux vomica, U. S. ; seeds of strychnos, N. vom. ~) Strychnia, C42TT22N204. Ignatia amara; the bean " I Brucia, C46H2tiN208. Sotanacese. Dulcamara, U. S. ; stalks of Solanum D. Solania, C84H6sN023. (?) Belladonna, U. S.; leaves of Atropa B. Atropia, C^H^NOe. Stramonii folia, ^f / jleaves, root, and seed ofK^ c H NQ raoix, > Datura stramonium. f > 34 23 b " semen, "J J Hyoscyami folia, U. S.; leaves of H. niger. 1 Hy08cyamia> C34H23N06. " semen, " seed " i Tabacum, U. S. ; leaves of nicotiana T. Nicotia, NC10Hr Lauracese. Bebeeru (bibiri); bark of Nectandra rodiei. Bebeerina, C^H^NOg. Melanthacese. Veratrum album, U. S.; the rhizoma. ] viride, U. S.; " VVeratria, C34H22N06. Sabadilla, U. S. ; the seed of V. sabadilla. J Colchici radix, U. S. ; the corm of C. autumnale. \ Colcliicia- (?) " sf>m<»ri. IT. S.: the seed J semen, U. S.; the seed > Nat. ord. Berberidese, closely allied to Menispermaceas. 312 ON THE ALKALOIDS. Aconitia, TJ. S., and Delphinia. This alkaloid is directed to be prepared from the root by ex- tracting with boiling alcohol, evaporating, treating the alcoholic extract with water, and afterwards treating the concentrated aqueous solution with dilute sulphuric acid. The sulphate being decom- posed by ammonia, yields a precipitate of aconitia which requires to be purified, and is then in the condition of a white or yellowish powder containing water. It is; when anhydrous, in the form of a brittle mass, usually of a yellowish brown color. It imparts a sensation of numbness to the tongue, which is extremely powerful and characteristic. It is sparingly soluble in water, though forming soluble salts on the addition of acicte; it dissolves freely in ether, alcohol, and chloroform. The formula given for it is C60H47NOI4. Being a very small product of the root, it is extremely expensive and liable to adulteration ; probably very little that is sold as such is reasonably pure. Aconitia is one of the most virulent of poisons, and is not adapted to internal use. Externally applied, it produces on the skin a prickling sensation, followed by numbness and a feeling of constric- tion. Its principal use is in cases of neuralgia, in ointment made by triturating the alkaloid first with a little alcohol or oil, and then with an unctuous vehicle. From a half to two grains are added to one drachm of the ointment. The galenical preparations of aconite will answer every useful purpose to which aconitia can be applied. Delphinia is little known ; the drug from which it is prepared is rarely found in our commerce. Berberina, Cissampelina, Menispermina. These three alkaloids are derived from members of the natural family of plants, Menispermacese. They have no practical value as pharmaceutical preparations. Berberina, from colombo-root, of which it is the chief active constituent, would seem to deserve a trial at the hands of practitioners. It must not be confounded with bebeerina, another alkaloid, from bebeeru or bibiri bark, which, in the form of sulphate, is now much in vogue. The Opium Alkaloids. These are five in number: Morphia, narcotin or narcotina, codeia, paramorphia, or thebaina, and papaverina, besides meconic acid and several neutral crystalline principles. Morphia, TJ. S. Morphia, which is the only one commonly used in medicine, was the first discovered, and is the most abundant. It is the best and most familiar type of the alkaloids. MORPHIA. 313 There are various processes for its preparation, of which that of the Pharmacopoeia, already adverted to, is the simplest and best for the student who may be disposed to attempt this, by no means diffi- cult experiment. Eeduced in quantity to suit the purpose, it is nearly as follows :— * Take of Opium, sliced . Solution of ammonia AYater, Alcohol, Animal charcoal, of each f Iss. sufficient. Macerate the opium with fljvj of water, working it with the hands or a pestle, as described*under the head of Tincture of Opium, into a paste (if powdered opium is used, this is unnecessary); then digest it for twenty-four hours, and strain. Macerate or digest the residue in the same way, successively with similar portions of water, and strain ; then mix the infusions, evaporate to f oviij, and filter. To the concentrated aqueous solution thus obtained add Fig. 182. Fig. 183. Digestion in a flask. Arrangement for filtration. first fIvj of alcohol, and then f5ij of solution of ammonia, pre- viously mixed with about f gss of alcohol; cover the vessel and set it aside. After twenty-four hours pour in the remaining f 5ij of solution of ammonia, mixed, as before, with alcohol, and again set aside that the morphia may crystallize out. The only remaining process is to purify the crystals which are formed in the bottom of the vessel. This is done by dissolving them in boiling alcohol, and filtering, while hot, through animal charcoal. A common flask, Fig. 182, will serve for the solution, and, for small opera- 314 ON THE ALKALOIDS. tions, the application of heat to the funnel will be unnecessary. It mav be conveniently arranged over an evaporating dish, as shown in Fig. 183. The filtered liquid, as it falls, will be immediately cooled by contact with the dish, and the extended surface will favor the spontaneous evaporation^ the alcohol, so that a small crop of crystals (40 to 60 grains) of morphia may be expected. This is an excellent method of testing the value of specimens of opium, except that, for approximate results, it is not necessary to carry out the last part of the directions, but is as well to take the weight of the crystallized morphia as at first thrown down. The animal charcoal deprives the product of color, but is apt to absorb a portion of the alkaloid also; so that, to get the entire yield, the charcoal should be digested in a further portion of alcohol, which should be added to the filtrate. The motive for using alcohol with the ammonia added to the concentrated liquid in the first instance, is to take up the resinous coloring matters, which would otherwise contaminate the precipitate. Morphia, as thus obtained, is in small but brilliant prismatic crystals, which are transparent and colorless, intensely bitter when dissolved, but nearly insoluble in water, also insoluble in ether. _ It dissolves in about thirty parts of boiling alcohol, in fixed alkaline solutions, and with great facility in dilute acids, which it neutralizes, forming salts. Of course, it is entirely dissipated by heat. In powder, it strikes a deep blue color with neutral salts of _ sesqui- oxide, or with sesquichloride of iron, decomposes iodic acid with liberation of iodine, and forms, with nitric acid added to it in powder, a red compound passing into yellow. Crystallized, it has the composition 2HO,C3s,H20NO6. In the condition of crystals, owing to the water, it has nearly 6 per cent, more weight than in that of effloresced or dried powder. Officinal Salts.—These are three in number, as follows: sulphate, muriate, and acetate. They are made by forming solutions of the alkaloids in the appropriate acids and evaporating. Morphice Sulphas, TJ. S— This is in white feathery crystals, very soluble in water, of an intensely bitter taste; it liberates morphia as a white precipitate in contact with alkali or alkaline carbonates, with which it is incompatible in solution. It is by far the most common of the morphia salts. Dose one-eighth to one-fourth grain. Morphice Murias, TJ. S.—This is most used in England, where it is officinal as morphise hydrochloras. It is somewhat less soluble in water, though sufficiently so for use in medicine. Dose the same as of the sulphate. Morphice Acetas, TJ. S. This is a white powder, seldom crystalline in appearance. It is apt to be deficient in the proportion of the acid ingredient, and to be comparatively insoluble, in which case a few drops of acetic acid to the liquid will make a clear solution. This is much used for external application, though adapted also to the form of powder and pill. Dose the same as of the foregoing. ■+ ON THE ALKALOIDS. 315 Valerianate of Morphia is an unofficinal salt, made by neutralizing the alkaloids with valerianic acid. Its dose is from one-eighth to one-half grain. (See page 305.) _ Narcotina is a brilliant crystalline principle, possessing some pro- perties in common with the neutral principles, but now generally ranked with the alkaloids, from its power of forming salts with acids, which salts, however, are not neutral, but acid. One of its most important chemical differences from morphia is its property of dissolving in ether, which furnishes the means of separating it from the other constituents of opium. Narcotina is not narcotic. It has been given as a tonic and antiperiodic, in doses as high as half a drachm, without the production of narcotic symptoms. Codeia crystallizes sometimes in octohedrai crystals, with two equivalents of water, soluble in alcohol, ether, and in boiling water, but not in alkaline solutions. It does not exhibit the reactions given for morphia. It forms crystalline salts with acids. Paramorphia or thebaia is not soluble in alkalies. Does not react like morphia. Papaverina is an alkaloid in small acicular crystals, which turn blue with sulphuric acid; with muriatic acid in excess it forms a very insoluble compound. Sanguinarina. This alkaloid is derived from the root of one of our most familiar indigenous plants. It is a white, pearly substance, of an acrid taste, very soluble in alcohol, also soluble in ether. With acids it forms soluble salts, which are remarkable for their beautiful red, crimson, and scarlet colors. From this it is inferred that a native salt of this alkaloid is the occasion of the brilliant color of the fresh juice of the plant. (See page 164.) Conia. Conia is a volatile yellow, oily fluid, with a very characteristic odor resembling that of the urine of the mouse. It is decidedly alkaline in its reactions. It is soluble in 100 parts of water, float- ing on its surface when distilled with it. Alcohol dissolves it readilv, as also ether, the fixed and volatile oils. It forms salts with acids, which are soluble, and some of them crystallizable. One of its most characteristic tests is that, when liberated in the form of vapor, it occasions a white cloud, like that of ammonia, when approached by a rod moistened with muriatic acid._ This test, when applied to the extract of conium, by adding to it on a tile a few drops of solution of potassa, is much resorted to in con- nection with the odor, in judging of the quality of that extract. When exposed to the air, conia undergoes oxidation, being con- verted into a brown resinous matter, and evolving ammonia. Its composition is stated as NC16H1S, 316 ON THE ALKALOIDS. The Cinchona Alkaloids. Quinai Sulphas, TJ. S. This salt is prepared from various species of cinchona bark, which contains it in combination with kinic acid and a peculiar astringent principle called cincho-tannin. These combinations being only partially soluble in water, resort is had to an acid which libe- rates the alkaloid in a soluble form. The one used in our officinal process is muriatic, which is mixed with water in which the pow- dered bark is boiled. The very soluble muriate of quinia con- tained in the decoction is decomposed, giving up its acid to the lime, while the quinia is liberated, and, being insoluble, is precipi- tated with the excess of lime added, the water retaining the chloride of calcium resulting from the reaction, and most of the impurities, in solution. The precipitated quinia and excess of lime being now digested in alcohol, the former is dissolved, and the impure quinia is obtained by evaporating this alcoholic solution. The remaining part of the process consists in converting this into the officinal sulphate, at the same time rendering it pure. To accomplish this, the amorphous mass is dissolved in diluted sulphuric acid, and filtered through bone black, which contains sufficient carbonate of lime to neutralize the excess of sulphuric acid, and thus facilitate the crystallization of the sulphate as the solution cools. This process requires to be repeated, with the addition of acid, if the charcoal is too alkaline, till a white and pure product is the result. Quinidice Sulphas. This, as yet unofficinal salt, contains quinidia, an alkaloid asso- ciated in many cinchona barks, particularly those imported from New Grenada, with variable proportions of quinia and cinchonia. Being somewhat more soluble than sulphate of quinia, sulphate of quinidia is found in the water from which the former salt has been crystallized, and by the appropriate treatment is extracted. When the cheaper barks above referred to are manipulated with, this is an important product, and, as will be again stated, is largely produced and used by some as a substitute for quinia. Cinchonice Sulphas is another unofficinal alkaloid salt obtained by a similar process, especially from the pale cinchona barks, and now much used. It is more soluble than either of the sulphates of quinia or quinidia, and, if the proper kind of barks have been used, may be crystallized out of the solution which remains, after the separation of one or both of the others. Quinoidine, chinoidine, precipitated extract of bark, amorphous quinia, axe names given to an amorphous mass obtained by evaporating the CINCHONA ALKALOIDS. 317 liquid which remains after the separation of the crystallizable alka- loids as above described. Its abundance seems to be in proportion to the degree of heat employed in the process, and as it increases the proportion of alkaloid diminishes. The extractum calisayicum referred to on page 161, differs from this in containing the crystal- lizable alkaloids besides the quinoidine. The cinchona bark alkaloids are of such importance to the prac- titioner of medicine, that some details in regard to their properties and relative value, and those of their salts, seem called for in this connection. Quinia is an insoluble white powder fusible into an amorphous brittle mass. It is freely soluble in alcohol and ether, and may be readily obtained by adding ammonia to the sulphate and washing on a filter. Its sulphate, as found in commerce, is in feathery white crystals much interlaced, which effloresce on exposure to the air, and are apt to fall down into a powder very much diminished in bulk. It is soluble in 740 parts cold water and 60 parts of alco- hol, but nearly insoluble in ether. It is very readily dissolved on the addition of a little sulphuric acid, which brings it to the condi- tion of an acid and uncrystallizable sulphate. It imparts to its solution a peculiar blue tinge called fluorescence, which may also be observed in the infusum cinchonae comp. It is now considered to consist of one equivalent of quinia, one of sulphuric acid, and eight of water, four of which may be lost by efflorescence. Quinidia.—Quinidina may be obtained in shining colorless crys- tals, which are readily reduced to a white powder; they melt with- out decomposition, and, on cooling, concrete into a grayish white crystalline mass. When ignited, they burn with the odor of kinole and the volatile oil of bitter almonds; they have a less intensely bitter taste than quinia. This alkaloid is nearly insoluble in water, soluble in 12 parts of alcohol and 143 of ether. It forms crystal- lizable and generally soluble salts. Its sulphate is in long, shining white crystals, as generally found in commerce interlaced and re- sembling those of sulphate of quinia. It is soluble in 130 parts of cold water, freely soluble in alcohol, and almost insoluble in ether. It contains six equivalents of water of crystallization. Cinchonia may be obtained in white crystals almost insoluble in water, alcohol, and ether. It is less bitter, because less soluble, than its associated alkaloids. It melts, and is with difficulty sub- limed. It forms soluble salts with the strong acids. Its sulphate, which, like the foregoing, was formerly considered a disulphate, is in short, oblique, shining prisms, which contain two equivalents of water of crystallization. It is soluble in 54 parts of cold water, and readily in alcohol, but not in ether. On the addition of sul- phuric acid, it passes into the very soluble acid sulphate. Of the three remarkable principles above described as existing in cinchona barks, cinchonia was the first discovered, having been 318 ON THE ALKALOIDS. isolated in an impure state as early as 1803, and fully described as an alkaloid by Pelletier and Caventou in 1820. Quinia was discovered soon after by the same chemists. Not until 1833 was the existence of quinidia announced. In that year, Henry and De- londre announced its discovery, but afterwards abandoned the idea of its being a distinct principle; so that no further attention was bestowed upon it until, about the year 1844, the celebrated German chemist, Winkler, investigated its properties, and conferred upon it the name quinidine, which, to correspond with our nomenclature, is changed to quinidia. The increasing scarcity and high price of sulphate of quinia, occasioned in part by the restrictions placed upon the trade in genuine Calisaya bark by the Bolivian government, have had the effect to direct the attention of physicians to other and similar remedial agents ; but, notwithstanding the frequent announcement of favorable results from the trial of such, there seems a general disposition to withhold confidence from any but the products of that remarkable family of South American trees whose history has been so long connected with the cure of periodical diseases. The introduction into commerce of large quantities of cheap cinchona barks from new sources, has been another result of the long-continued scarcity of the older and officinal kinds. Notwithstanding these have been regarded by many with jealousy, and doubts have been entertained of their therapeutic value, the study of their chemical history has shown that some of them are not less rich in alkaloids than the finest monopoly barks, and experiments in regard to the therapeutic value of their characteristic alkaloids have shown a close resemblance in physiological effects to quinia itself. Some Bogota barks, beside containing the other alkaloids, abound in quinia, which can already be produced at fifty cents an ounce less than quinia, and will probably become much cheaper as the de- mand increases. Dr. Pepper and other practitioners connected with the Pennsyl- vania Hospital have used sulphate of quinidia in the same or less doses than the quinia salt, and with equal success; and the same view is confirmed by the experience of others in private practice. Sulphate of cinchonia, which had been generally overlooked, has also been much used of latter time as a substitute for the quinia salt; and, although some physicians assert that larger doses of it are required, I am told by Dr. Conrad, the Apothecary of Pennsyl- vania Hospital, that in that Institution the three cinchona alkaloids are used indiscriminately and in the same doses. Through Dr. R. P. Thomas I am informed that the cinchonia salt has been used with satisfaction as a substitute for that of quinia in the Philadel- phia and Northern Dispensaries, and in the Western Clinical In- firmary, and Philadelphia Hospital, Blockley, where many inter- mittents are daily under treatment. The average prices of the salts are as follows: Sulphate of quinia $3 an ounce, sulphate of quinidia $2 50, sulphate of cinchonia $1 00. CINCHONA ALKALOIDS. 319 Quinoidyne is sold at a still lower price than either of the crys- tallized products. I am told that the demand for it has not justi- fied manufacturers in preparing all that is produced, for sale. Its usual dose is double that of the crystallized salt. It is freely solu- ble in diluted sulphuric acid. Mode of distinguishing the Cinchona Alkaloids from each other, and from Adulterations. 1. With chlorine water.—When sulphate of quinia is dissolved in chlorine water, and ammonia added, a green color is produced. If a solution of ferrocyanide of potassium be added to the same solution before the ammonia, it usually strikes a red color. When sulphate of cinchonia is dissolved in chlorine water, and ammonia added, a white precipitate falls. When sulphate of quinidia is treated in the same way, its appearance is not changed or its be- havior is similar to the last. 2. With ether.—Quinia is soluble in ether, cinchonia insoluble, and quinidia partially soluble. Trommels test.—Sixty drops of ether, twenty of aqua ammonia, and ten grains of the sulphate, are mixed in a test tube; the quinia being soluble in the ether, will not appear, but any considerable admixture of cinchonia or quinidia will separate as a layer of white powder between the aqueous liquid and the supernatant ether. If quinidia be present, it will be dissolved by a large addition of ether, while cinchonia will not. 3. HerapathJs test.—Dissolve five grains of sulphate in a fluidrachm of acetic acid, add a few drops of tincture of iodine, and heat to the boiling point, or until a clear solution is formed; as the liquid cools, if the quinia salt were used, a beautiful crystalline iodo-sulphate of quinia will be deposited in thin transparent plates, which reflect the rich iridescent green color of the elytra of Spanish flies. With sulphate of quinidia, tufts of chocolate-colored crystals, and of cin- chonia, a brick red deposit, are produced. These crystals by polar- ized light exhibit most curious and characteristic properties. 4. The presence in the sulphates of cinchona alkaloids of com- mon adulterations may be detected as follows:— The sulphates are entirely soluble in dilute sulphuric acid, and entirely dissipated by heat. Sulphate of lime may be detected by its insolubility, and by remaining after ignition on a piece of pla- tina foil. Starch would remain insoluble in dilute acid, and would be recognized by the well-known iodine test. Stearic and mar- garic acids would float in the solution, and are soluble in ether. Salicine, if more than ten per cent, were present, would show with concentrated sulphuric acid a red color. Phloridzin would be de- tected as yielding a yellow color with the same reagent. Sugar or mannite would be blackened by concentrated sulphuric acid. Ox- alate of ammonia would be detected by giving off aramoniacal vapors with caustic potash. 320 ON THE ALKALOIDS. Emetia, Amicina, Lobelina. Emetia, or, as it is sometimes called, emetina, is the active prin- ciple of ipecacuanha, from which it may be obtained as a white powder, not crystalline, of a bitter taste, soluble in alcohol, spar- ingly so in water, and precipitated, like the other alkaloids, by tannin; its native salt existing in the root is taken up by water, wine, and diluted alcohol. The commercial emetia is very impure, and not preferable for ordinary use to the various Galenical prepa- rations of ipecac, in which the peculiar astringent and acid princi- ples are associated with the alkaloid. Amicina.—This alkaloid is not much known. It is stated to be volatile and to resemble lobelina; it is associated in the flowers with a volatile oil, and bitter principle called cytisin. Its compo- sition is unknown. Lobelina was discovered by the late Professor S. Calhoun, of Philadelphia, in 1834, and first isolated in a state of purity by Professor Procter, in 1842. It is a liquid lighter than water, and when dropped into that fluid rises to its surface and. spreads out like a drop of oil, then gradually dissolves without agitation, form- ing a transparent solution. It is very soluble in alcohol and ether, the latter readily removing it from an aqueous solution; it also dis- solves in fixed and volatile oils. It forms crystallizable salts, with numerous acids. This is most conveniently obtained by extracting the seed with alcohol acidulated with acetic acid, which forms a fixed salt with the alkaloid, evaporating and treating with mag- nesia, and then with ether, from which it may be obtained by eva- poration. It is not obtained on an economical scale for use in medicine. Lobelina, as it exists in the plant combined with lobelic acid, is decomposable by a moderate heat, as also by the action of strong acids. Strychnia, TJ. S., and Brucia. These principles are associated together and combined with igasuric acid in nux vomica and bean of St. Ignatius. The former only is officinal, though the latter is important from being almost invariably present in the commercial article. Strychnia, TJ. S.—The seeds of nux vomica are directed in the U. S. P. for the preparation of this alkaloid. After their comminu- tion, which is a work of no little difficulty, they are treated with water acidulated with muriatic acid; after concentration, the muri- ate thus formed is decomposed by lime, which precipitates the strychnia along with the excess of lime employed, and some im- purities. The alkaloid is now dissolved out from the precipitate by boiling alcohol, and deposited, on evaporating and cooling. To purify it still further, it is next converted into a sulphate, boiled with animal charcoal, and precipitated by ammonia. St. Ignatius's STRYCHNIA, BRUCIA, AND ATROPIA. 321 bean contains a large proportion of strychnia and less brucia than nux vomica, but is not so abundant and cheap. Strychnia, as thus prepared, is a white or grayish white powder, which may be crystallized by the slow evaporation of an alcoholic solution. It is distinguished by extraordinary bitterness. It is soluble in boiling alcohol, but to a limited extent only in water, cold alcohol, and ether. It is soluble in volatile oils. Being gene- rally contaminated with brucia, it strikes a red color with nitric acid; but the following tests are more reliable : Rub a very little of the powder with a few drops of sulphuric acid on a slab, and add a minute quantity of solution of chromate of potassa. A splendid violet color will be produced if it contain strychnia. Or thus: add a little of the powder to a few drops of sulphuric acid containing Tig of nitric; it will form a colorless solution ; but, on the addition of a little peroxide of lead, a bright blue color will be developed, which will pass rapidly into violet, then gradually into red, and ultimately to yellow. Sulphate of strychnia is a crystallized salt, which is only preferred from being soluble. The medical uses of strychnia are those of a tonic, with a special action upon the nerves of motion. It is much employed in a variety of diseases. Dose one-twelfth to one-sixth of a grain. In doses of two or three grains, strychnia is one of the most powerful and fatal of poisons. Immense quantities are sold for the purpose of killing animals, particularly dogs, on whom the most certain and rapid fatal effect is produced by its use. In cases of poisoning by strychnia, the most prompt and vigorous efforts are necessary to arrest its effects. The jaws must be prevented from becoming permanently closed, as in tetanus. Emetics should be tried, and will seldom act. Tannic acid or other astringents will precipitate the alkaloid in an insoluble form. Chloroform has been found to arrest the effects of the poison. In one memorable case, I saw the life of an individual saved by the application of the poles of a magnetic battery over the stomach, which aroused that organ, and, by excessive vomiting, produced the relaxation of the spasm. Brucia is more soluble than strychnia, and is obtained by evapo- rating the alcoholic solution after the latter salt is crystallized out. It is a less powerful therapeutic agent, being safely employed in doses of from two to four grains. It resembles morphia in turning . red with nitric acid, becoming yellow by heat, and violet on the addition, when cool, of proto-chloride of tin. It is, like morphia, insoluble in ether. Atropia, Daturia or Hyoscyamia, and Solania. Atropia, as procured both from the root and the herb of belladon- na, is in white silky crystals, of a bitter taste, slightly soluble in wa- ter, freely in absolute alcohol, also in chloroform and ether. Composi- 21 322 ON THE ALKALOIDS. tion C H23N06. The simplest method of obtaining it is by the use of chloroform, which extracts it from the juice of the plant along with a green resinous matter, from which it may be separated by the use of sulphuric acid, forming a sulphate which readily yields atropia on the addition of an acid. One-tenth of a grain is con- sidered its appropriate dose, though, like aconitia, it is best adapted to external use, and is almost exclusively applied in dilute solution to the eye to dilate the pupil. Daturia, which, according to the received opinion, is identical with atropia, is derived in exceedingly small quantities from stra- monium seeds. Hyosciamia, by similar processes, is obtained from the seeds con- taining it. Solania, which resembles the foregoing in some of its properties, is stated to have a different composition. Though undoubtedly the active principles of the plants yielding these alkaloids are found in commerce only as rare and curious products, their expensiveness and inconvenient concentration inter- fere with their use in medicine. Nicotia, or Nicotina. Nicotia is a volatile alkaloid, which, like conia, is obtained by distillation from the plant containing it, an acid being placed in the receiver to fix the alkaloid. From this it is afterwards liberated by a strong alkali in the form of an oily, transparent, colorless liquid. Specific gravity 1.048, becoming yellow by keeping, ab- sorbing oxygen from the air, which turns it thick and brown. It volatilizes at 482° F., leaving a carbonaceous residue. The vapor which rises is so powerful in its smell and irritating properties that one drop of it diffused in a room renders the atmosphere insup- portable. It is very soluble in water, in alcohol, in ether, and in fat oils. It is separable from an aqueous solution by ether. It thus has a wider range of solubility than any of the alkaloids. Its salts with acids crystallize with difficulty. It is a compound of hydrogen, carbon, and nitrogen, NH7C10. The volatility of this principle insures its diffusion, along with empyreumatic products, in tobacco smoke, so that it is inhaled to a certain extent by smokers. It exists in the different commercial varieties of tobacco in about the following proportions: Havana 2 per cent., Maryland 2.3, Vir- ginia 6.87, Kentucky 6.09. Orfila has lately investigated the properties of nicotia, and ascer- tained with precision its chemical habitudes. These are detailed in a paper copied in the American Journal of Pharmacy, vol. xxiv. p. 142, from the London Pharmaceutical Journal. TESTS FOR DISTINGUISHING THE ALKALOIDS. 323 Bebeerina. Bebeerin (bebeerina), obtained from the bark of a tree growing in Guiana, is an uncrystallizable alkaloid, in the form of a yellow resinous-looking mass, soluble in alcohol, and slightly in ether and in water. The commercial sulphate of bebeerin is impure, but hio-hly esteemed as a tonic and antiperiodic. It is in dark brown glittering slabs, readily soluble by the aid of acids. Dose, three to ten grains; from a scruple to a drachm between the paroxysms in intermittents. Veratria, T5. S., and Colchicia. Veratria is procured from cevadilla seeds by treating them with alcohol, evaporating the tincture to an extract, and treating this with water acidulated with sulphuric acid; this solution containing sulphate of veratria is next decomposed by magnesia, which is added in excess; the precipitated veratria thrown dowrn is now washed and separated from the excess of magnesia by alcohol, from which it is obtained by evaporation, but requires still further puri- fying with animal charcoal, &c. A pound of the seeds yields about a drachm of veratria. This product is a white uncrystallizable powder, extremely acrid when diffused in the air, producing excessive irritation of the nos- trils. It is freely soluble in alcohol, less so in ether, and almost insoluble in water. Its sulphate and muriate are crystallizable, but • are not met with in commerce. It is soluble in diluted acetic acid, from which ammonia and solution of tannin throw down white precipitates. Among its most striking peculiarities are the intense red color it assumes on the addition of sulphuric acid, and the yel- low solution it forms with nitric. According to some, veratria, as procured by the officinal process, is a complex body ; it is said to contain another alkaloid, sabadillia, and a resinoid, veratrin. The medical uses of veratria are confined chiefly to gouty and neuralgic affections, in the treatment of which, it is used internally in doses of fs to I grain, repeated, or externally in ointment, of about 9j to the ounce. Colchicia is little known; by some it is supposed to be identical with veratria, although it is stated to be more soluble in water; it has been isolated but rarely, and its composition is not made out. Tests for Distinguishing the Alkaloids. The following, taken from Dr. A. T. Thompson, conveys in a compact form the leading facts applicable to distinguishing the alkaloids. Some general characteristics are noticed 'at the begin- ning of this chapter, and some particular ones under the several heads. 324 ON THE ALKALOIDS. Method of Distinguishing the following Vegetable Alkaloids—Atropia, Brucia, Delphia, Emetia, Morphia, Solania, Strychnia, Veratria— when they are in powder. Treat the powder, first with nitric acid, which is colored red by brucia, delphia, morphia, and the strychnia of commerce, but not by pure strychnia. If the reddened acid become of a violet hue on the addition of protochloride of tin, after the nitric solution has cooled, the alkaline powder is brucia: if the reddened acid gradu- ally become black and carbonaceous, it is delphia. If the powder be soluble without decomposition, and decompose iodic acid, evolv- ing free iodine, it is morphia: if it is* not fusible, and does not de- compose iodic acid, it is strychnia. If the powder greens, instead of reddening nitric acid, it is solania: if it is insoluble in ether, and does not redden nitric acid, it is emetia: if it be soluble in ether, and does not redden nitric acid, but melts when heated and volatilizes, it is atropia: if it is thus affected by ether and nitric acid, but is not volatilized, it is veratria. PART IV. INORGANIC PHARMACEUTICAL PREPARATIONS. CHAPTER I. ON MINERAL ACIDS. In Part IV., I design to present an outline of the subject of pharmaceutical chemistry as pertaining to substances of inorganic origin, presenting in tabular form with short descriptive paragraphs the leading medicines of this class, furnished by the manufacturing chemist; while those which fall within the range of the dispensing- office and shop, will be treated of more fully, and in such detail as to render their preparation easy and uniformly successful. The difference between that part of the Pharmacopoeia called the List, in which the materia medica is presented, clothed in its appro- priate nomenclature, and accompanied by well-ascertained stand- ards whereby the genuineness and purity of many of the individual articles may be known; and that part occupied with formulae or recipes designed to direct the apothecary and physician in the pre- paration of the crude articles of the list into eligible forms for use, has been fully presented on page 56 in an extract from the preface to the Pharmacopoeia there inserted. This arrangement, however, includes among the preparations many articles which in this country are prepared exclusively in large manufacturing establish- ments; in fact, so generally has the manufacture of chemical pre- parations been concentrated in the hands of a few leading manu- facturers, that even the largest dispensing establishments are in the habit of resorting to these for their supplies of all,_ except a few of the more readily prepared and extemporaneous articles. Owing to this fact, much of the space heretofore devoted in pharmaceutical works to descriptions and illustrations of apparatus and processes is now destitute of practical value to by far the largest class of stu- dents and readers. In treating of these subjects, therefore, I shall for convenience disregard the division in the Pharmacopoeia, and present in detail only those preparations which apothecaries are accustomed to make, and which physicians might, if they would, prepare for themselves, with simple and cheap forms of apparatus. In adopting this course, which is in harmony with the preceding 326 ON MINERAL ACIDS. parts of the work, I would not be understood as underrating the value of practical chemical knowledge to the student or practitioner, whether of medicine or pharmacy. In no pursuit is a knowledge of chemistry unimportant. As the key which unlocks the phy- sical sciences, and opens the most hidden secrets of nature, chemis- try is invaluable to every industrial pursuit, and in every relation of life, and to no class is it more so than to the physician, the ob- ject of whose study is the highest and most intricate piece of nature's handiwork. The young man who would turn his atten- tion in this direction may avail himself of numerous elementary works, adapted to impart accurate knowledge by means of experi- ments to be performed with cheap apparatus, and so arranged as to lead by gradual steps to the comprehension of facts which would otherwise be abstruse and difficult. Of works of this description, it will be sufficient to name Bow- man's Introduction to Practical Chemistry, Stockhart's Chemistry, and Francis's Chemical Experiments, while the more advanced student may consult with advantage the works of Fownes, Graham, Gmelin, and the numerous other leading modern chemists. The object of the present work is not to impart chemical prin- ciples, but to improve in its humble sphere the industrial applica- tions of the science to the healing art. Acida. All the inorganic acids employed in pharmacy are compounds, rich in oxygen, with the exceptions of muriatic and hydriodic, in which that element is wanting. Acids are electro-negative compounds; they usually have a sour taste, change the blue color of litmus to red, and affect other vege- table colors similarly; with alkalies, whether vegetable or mineral, they form neutral salts in which the properties of both the ingre- dients are lost, while new properties are acquired. They also unite with the oxides of the metals proper, forming a great variety of valuable compounds which frequently exhibit slightly acid reac- tions, and retain the peculiarities of the metal from which they are prepared, modified by the nature of the acid ingredient. The names of the mineral acids formed from the same element vary in their terminations according to the number of equivalents of oxygen they contain: thus, sulphuric acid, S03, sulphurows acid, S02, Nitn'c, N05, Nitrows, N04, &c, the degree of acidification being marked by the terminations ic, and ous. The strong acids act upon cork, and should be kept in ground stoppered bottles; these are made of extra strength, of green glass, called acid bottles. Unless the stopper and neck are very well ground and fitted to each other, they require to be cemented or luted together to prevent the escape of the .acid ; this may be done by warming the stopper in the flame of a spirit lamp, and inserting it in the neck of the bottle till the two surfaces are dried and ACIDA. 327 warmed, then coating it with a thin stratum of melted wax, and inserting it securely in its place, and tying it over with kid or bladder? The more common mineral acids are found in commerce of three qualities. The commonest and cheapest used for manu- facturing purposes, the medicinally pure, M. P., and the chemically pure, C. P. The use of the latter is chiefly in analysis. The sp. gr. furnishes a ready means of testing the strength of the liquid acids, tables being given in chemical works showing the relation of the sp. gr. to the strength. The mineral acids generally belong to the class of tonics with refrigerant and astringent properties. Externally, they are caustic, and require to be applied with care, as many know from experience who have used them, nitric acid especially, for warts. Nitric acid is also used as an alterative in syphilitic and other forms of disease. They are apt to injure the teeth, upon which they also produce a very unpleasant and characteristic sensation. To obviate this in taking them they should be largely diluted, and should be sucked through a small glass tube, which may be made by scratching a piece of the tube sold in the shops with a file; this enables the operator to break it at the point required, and then, by -heating-the sharp broken edges over an alcohol or gas flame till the glass melts, a rounded edge is left. One of the most interesting points in connection with the strong mineral acids, is their occasional accidental use in poisonous_ doses. They are among the most powerful of poisons, owing to their cor- rosive properties, producing the most painful and dangerous results. The best antidotes are large draughts of alkaline and oily liquids ; the alkali to neutralize the acid, and the oil to obtund its action upon the delicate mucous surfaces. The most ready resort in such emergencies is frequently soap, preferably Castile, which should be made into a very strong solution and given ad libitum. The following vegetable acids have already been treated of under that head: Acidum aceticum, acidum aceticum dilutum, acidum benzoicum, acidum citricum, acidum tartaricum, acidum hydrocy- anicum dilutum, acidum gallicum, acidum tannicum, and acidum valerianicum. . . Of the mineral acids, the following are used in medicine, and, except nitrous or nitroso-nitric and phosphoric, which are in Italics, are officinal in the U. S. Pharmacopoeia ;— Sp. gr. Dose. Acidum Carbonicum, C02. (See Aquas Medicate.) " Muriaticum, gaseous, H,Cl,+water . . . 1.16. n\nj to v. " Muriaticum dilutum, 1 part to 3 of water . 1.046. rr\,xv to xl. " Nitricum, liquid, HO, N05+3HO . . • 1-42. Try to iv. " Nitroso-nitricum, " " +N04 . • "\J t0 1V- " Nitricum dilutum, 1 part to 6 of water . _ . 1.0/. rr\,xv to xl. " Nitro muriaticum, 1 part nit. to 2 muriatic acid Ttyij tov. « Sulphuricum, HO, S03,.....}■%&• "U to/> » - dilutum, 1 part to 13 water . . 1.09. TT\,xv to xl. « « aromaticum, alcoholic with aromatics _ Kl^v toxxx- " Phosphoricum, glacial, HO, P05, . . • solid « dilutum, 1 part to 10 of water . 1-004 t^xy to xl. 328 ON MINERAL ACIDS. Acidum Muriaticum, TJ. S. {Hydrochloric or Chlorohydric Acid, HC1.) Prepared by the action of sulphuric acid and water on chloride of sodium (common salt), sulphate of soda and hydrochloric acid are formed. The latter gas is distilled over, the process being con- ducted in a retort or flask, connected with a receiver containing water, which absorbs it rapidly in proportion as it is refrigerated. A colorless or slightly yellow transparent liquid, giving off white acrid fumes on exposure to the air. It should not dissolve gold- leaf, as shown by the acid after digesting with it, giving no precipi- tate with protochloride of tin. The absence of saline impurities is shown by its being entirely volatile, and yielding no precipitate with chloride of barium or ammonia in excess. Acidum muriaticum dilutum is readily made by diluting the foregoing with water. The officinal recipe for making Oj is as follows :— Take of Muriatic acid .... f 3iv. Distilled water . . . f 3xij. Mix them in a glass vessel. The specific gravity of this is 1.046. If the strong acid used is below the standard strength, it should be added in rather larger proportion, observing to reach exactly the specific gravity here named, as shown by a good hydrometer for liquids heavier than water, or by a 1,000 gr. bottle. Acidum Nitricum, TJ. S. {Aquafortis, Nitric Acid, HO,N05, + 3H0.) Prepared by the action of sulphuric acid in excess upon nitrate of potassa (saltpetre) in a glass retort, when nitric acid and bisul- phate of potassa are formed. The acid, being volatile, is distilled over by the application of heat. It is a colorless transparent liquid, with powerfully acrid odor, and is exceedingly corrosive, staining the skin yellow. The strongest acid, containing one equivalent of water, has the specific gravity 1.521; but, owing to the presence of water in the ingredients used in its preparation, and its mixing readily in all proportions with water, it is usually weaker, and has its specific gravity reduced in proportion to its dilution. In the Pharmacopoeia of 1840, the officinal strength was 1.5, but it has been changed in the last edition to 1.42, as stated in the Syllabus, the object being to adapt it more nearly to the usual strength of the commercial article, and to establish a standard easily attained. The proportion added to water in making the diluted article has been changed to correspond. It fumes in the air like muriatic. The principal impurities are nitrous acid, which is shown by a red color; sulphuric acid, which may be detected by adding to the diluted acid a solution of chloride of barium and chlorine, or muri- ACIDUM NITRICUM. 329 atic acid, which would occasion a white precipitate with nitrate of silver. Nitric acid itself is remarkable for furnishing salts which are invariably soluble. Nitrous acid (though, correctly speaking, the name is applied to a red-colored gas, having the composition N04, formed whenever binoxide of nitrogen, N02, escapes into the air) is commonly under- stood in trade to apply to fuming red-colored nitric acid, such as passes over chiefly at the commencement and close of the process of distilling nitrate of potassa with sulphuric acid as above. This kind of nitric acid contains nitrous acid fumes, which the manufac- turers usually separate from the acid of commerce by boiling, thus rendering it colorless. The best and most distinctive name for the article under consideration is nitroso-nitric acid. Its chief use is in making Hope's camphor mixture, which is elsewhere spoken of as having peculiar value when made with this form of acid. As the preparation of nitric and nitroso-nitric acid may often be desirable to the physician or apothecary, I insert a view of the necessary apparatus. If the receiver is well refrigerated, there will be FiS-184. no difficulty in collecting the acid. No luting of any kind is used. At the commencement of the process red fumes come over, and, after the nitrate of potassa is nearly exhausted, they com- mence to come over again, which is the signal to desist. The red fuming acid is now put away for use, or, if the colorless is preferred, is heated or exposed to the air to allow of the escape of the nitrous fumes. The extemporaneous process for the production of nitrous fumes in nitric acid, is to drop into a vial containing it a few chips of some pure kind of wood; on this, part of the NO. will act, producing oxidation of the lig- neous matter, and liberating N04. This process is only suggested where the last is impracticable. Acidum Nitricum Dilutum. Take of Nitric acid . . . . flj. Distilled water .... flvj. Mix them in a glass vessel. The specific gravity of this is 1.07, and 100 grains saturate 20 grains of crystallized bicarbonate of potassa. 330 ON MINERAL ACIDS. Acidum Nitromuriaticum, TJ. S. {Aqua Begia) Take of Nitric acid......f 3iv. Muriatic acid.....f^viij. Mix them in a glass vessel, and, when effervescence has ceased, keep the product in a well-ground glass-stoppered bottle in a cool and dark place. This forms a deep yellow corrosive fuming liquid containing chlorine and nitric oxide in an unknown state of com- bination. The acid dissolves gold, from the free chlorine present. It should be made in small quantities, as required, care being taken " to allow the effervescence to cease before securing the stopper in the bottle. Acidum Sulphuricum, TJ. S. {Oil of Vitriol, Sulphuric Acid, HO,S03.) Made by burning sulphur and nitrate of potassa together in leaden chambers*. Sulphur, when burned, forms sulphurous acid (SOj), which, in contact in the form of vapor with nitrous acid from the burning nitre and water, becomes more highly oxidized into sul- phuric acid, S03. It is an oily-looking, very heavy liquid, without color when pure, having no odor, but an intensely acid caustic taste. It becomes darkened in color by contact with vegetable substances, which it chars by abstracting from them the elements of water. When mixed with water, it readily combines with it, disengaging heat. Its strong affinity for water is one of its useful properties. When largely diluted with water, it is apt to deposit a white precipitate of sulphate of lead derived from the leaden vessels used in concentrat- ing it. Arsenic is an occasional impurity, which may be detected by sulphuretted hydrogen, giving a yellow precipitate when passed through it. It is only prescribed internally, though sometimes prescribed in ointment in one of the officinal diluted forms which follow. Acidum Sulphuricum Dilutum, TJ. S. Take of Sulphuric acid.....f 3j. Distilled water.....f gxiij. Add the acid gradually to the water in a glass vessel and mix them. The specific gravity of this is 1.09, and 100 grains of it saturate 25 grains of crystallized bicarbonate of potassa. Upon standing, the white precipitate as first formed (sulphate of lead) will be deposited, and the pure diluted acid may be decanted for use. ACIDUM PHOSPHORICUM DILUTUM.- 331 Acidum Sulphuricum Aromaticum, TJ. S. {Elixir of Vitriol.) Take of Sulphuric acid . . . f Siiiss. Ginger, in coarse powder . . 3j. Cinnamon, do. . . §iss. Alcohol.....q. s. (to make two pints.) Add the acid gradually to Oj alcohol, and allow the liquor to cool. Mix the ginger and cinnamon, and having put them into a percolator, pour alcohol gradually upon them until a pint of filtered liquor is obtained. Lastly, mix the diluted acid and the tincture. Formerly the tincture was made by treating the powdered aroma- tics directly with the mixed alcohol and acid. The present process is an improvement, giving a clearer and more elegant tincture. Elixir of vitriol is stronger than diluted sulphuric acid, though its dose in drops is usually about the same, the alcoholic liquid giving smaller drops than the aqueous. This preparation is very extensively used as a refrigerant, tonic, and astringent. It is a popular remedy for night-sweats in phthisis, and for debility generally. In making solutions and pills of qui- nine, also in the compound infusion of cinchona, it has important pharmaceutical uses. Acidum Phosphoricum. {Glacial or Monohydrated Phosphoric Acid) This is prepared from calcined bones, bone phosphate of lime, by decomposing them with sulphuric acid, by which process a super- phosphate of lime is produced (the article used as a basis for _ the manure known by that name). The superphosphate is neutralized by carbonate of ammonia, which generates phosphate of ammonia in solution with precipitation of phosphate of lime. By calcining phosphate of ammonia at a red heat, the volatile ingredient is ex- pelled, and the solid HO,P05 remains. It is in transparent glassy looking solid masses, of a very sour taste, and without odor, and freely soluble in water, with which it forms the next preparation. Acidum Phosphoricum Dilutum. This may be prepared by dissolving forty-five and a half grains of glacial phosphoric acid in one fluidounce of distilled water, about one part to ten by weight, or by the process of the London Phar- macopoeia, by the action of nitric acid diluted with water upon phos- phorus, by which the phosphorus is oxidized at the expense of the acid, and phosphoric acid results. It is a colorless liquid with- out odor, of an agreeable acid taste, sp. gr. 1.064. It should not precipitate chloride of barium or nitrate of silver, nor be_ colored by sulphuretted hydrogen, either before or after a silver coin has been 332 THE ALKALIES AND THEIR SALTS. digested in it, thus showing the absence of sulphuric nitric acids, chlorides, and metallic impurities. It is employed in the prepara- tion of the phosphatic lozenges and of the syrups of phosphate of lime. CHAPTER II. THE ALKALIES AXD THEIR SALTS. Alkalies are electro-positive bodies ; they may be divided into organic alkalies or alkaloids, which have already been considered, and inorganic alkalies which are oxides of peculiar, light, and very combustible metals. Ammonia forms a connecting link between these, and may be classed with either, though most conveniently with the latter. The three alkalies used in medicine, and to be presented in the present chapter, are, potassa, soda, and ammonia. They possess in common the property of turning vegetable reds to green,'and the yellow color of turmeric, and some other vegetable yellows, to brown. They neutralize acids, deprive them more or less of acidity, and form with them salts which are sometimes acid, sometimes alkaline, and sometimes neutral, according to the pro- portions and relative strengths of the acids employed. The beautiful laws which govern the formation of salts have been very thoroughly studied, and are fully laid down in works on che- mistry ; a knowledge of these, in connection with the system of nomenclature founded on them, is in the highest degree important, whether to the practical or theoretical chemist. The plan of this work embraces only such reference to the laws of combination as the pharmaceutical history of some of the leading chemicals will necessarily bring into view. The officinal names are partly chemical and partly empirical, being, as more fully ex- plained in the chapter on the Pharmacopoeia and its Nomenclature, framed with a view to distinctness and adaptation to the purpose, rather than to chemical accuracy or elegance. In chemical works, the classification of these is in accordance with their chemical relations and affinities. While in treatises on materia medica, they are arranged according to their therapeutical proper- ties. In a pharmaceutical work like the present, it will be well, perhaps, to present yet a different arrangement, and bring them into view with reference to their commercial source and mode of pre- paration. Potassa, soda, and ammonia, in their caustic condition (or com- POTASSA SALTS. 333 bined with carbonic acid, which rather modifies than changes their medical properties), are used in medicine chiefly for neutralizing excess of acids existing in the secretions. In the case of ammonia, this use is combined with a powerful arterial stimulant property, adapting it to low forms of disease. The salts formed by these alkalies with the acids vary in their therapeutical properties. Some have a special tendency to the skin, some to the kidneys, some to the bowels, &c. Their physical properties are no less various; athough they are mostly crystalline, some assume a pulverulent or amorphous form. The salts of potassa are generally disposed to deliquesce or become damp, while those of soda effloresce, or lose their water of crystallization, falling into powder. Those of ammo- nia, by decomposition, liberate their volatile and alkaline base, the pungency of which becomes apparent. The class of salts formed by muriatic acid, with the alkalies and earths, have been found to be compounds of chlorine with the metallic radicals of these, and might be considered with the so-called hydriodates among the halogen compounds, but are usually classed with the oxysalts. The oxysalts of the alkalies are all soluble with the two exceptions of the bitartrate of potassa and the antimoniate of soda, the forma- tion of which constitutes tests for potassa and soda respectively. The great solubility of the alkalies and their compounds constitutes a prominent distinction between them and the earths, to be presented in another chapter. The alkalies, both organic and inorganic, may be detected by all, forming with bichloride of platinum a yellow crystalline double salt, which is precipitated from a concentrated solution by alcohol. Potassa Salts.1 Group 1.—Starting with wood-ashes. Potash. Lixivium from ashes of forest trees evaporated to a dark moist mass. Potassse Carbonas Impurus. Ignited potash. Pearlash. Salseratus. Dry pearlash subjected to gaseous C02. 2(KO),3(C02) ? Potassse Carbonas, 2(K0,C02),3H0. Solution of pearlash, filtered and granulated. Liquor Potassse Carbonatis. gxij to fgxij water. Simple solution. Potassse Bicarbonas, K0,2C02,H0. Passing C02 into solution of carbonate, &c. Potassse Carbonas Purus, 2(K0,C02)3H0. Calcining bicarbonate and granulating. Liquor Potassse. Boiling carbonate with hydrate of lime, sp. gr. 1.056. Potassa, KO,HO. Evaporating liquor potassse to dryness, and fusing. Potassa cum Calc. Equal parts, potassa and lime, triturated together. Potassse Acetas, KO,Ac. Neutralizing acetic acid with carbonate, and crystallizing. Potassse Citras, KO,Cl. Neutralizing citric acid with carbonate, and granulating. Liquor Potassse Citratis. A variety of extemporaneous processes. Potassa: Chloras, K0,G,05. Passing excess of chlorine through solution of potassa. Potash and pearlash, though important in their relations to the arts and to domestic economy, are seldom employed in medicine, 1 Those not officinal in Italics. 334 THE ALKALIES AND THEIR SALTS. except in the preparation of the other forms of caustic and carbo- nated alkali, and the other salts of potassa enumerated in the table. Salceratus is a useful and tolerably pure carbonate of potash, which occupies a position intermediate between the carbonate and bicarbonate, besides being distinguished from these by its anhy- drous character; it is much used in baking to furnish the carbonic acid which raises the bread, rendering it light and porous. Light cakes made with it are generally considered less objectionable by dyspeptics than those made with yeast. Most of the salaeratus of the shops is an imperfectly carbonated bicarbonate of soda. Potassce Carbonas, U. S. Made by dissolving pearlash in a small quantity of water, filter- ing to separate insoluble matters, and evaporating to dryness, stir- ring actively so as to form a granular powder, which is very deli- quescent, and contains water in the proportion of two equivalents to every three of the salt. It is sometimes called salt of tartar, a name which is quite inapplicable. Dose, grs. x to 3ss. Liquor Potassce Carbonatis, U. S. Made by dissolving in a mortar, or by agitation in a bottle, one pound of the carbonate in twelve fluidounces of water. Its uses are as an antilithic and antacid; it should be given in milk, or other bland and viscid vehicle. Dose, "ix to Jj. Potassce Bica'rbonas, TJ. S. Made by passing carbonic acid gas (generated by the action of muriatic acid on chalk or marble) into a solution of carbonate of potassa unto saturation, then crystallizing. Fig. 185 shows the process of generating this gas in the bottle a, washing it by passing it through water in the bottle b, by means of the pipe d, which passes through a Fis- lg5- pipe e, of large bore to the bottom; and, finally, through /, conducting it into the solution of carbonate of potassa in c. The point of satura- tion maybe judged proximately by the bubbles of gas leaving the pipe /, ceasing to diminish in size as they escape through c. Bicarbonate of potassa is in large transparent crystals, with a mild alkaline taste, soluble in about four parts of water. The bicarbonates do not precipitate sulphate of magnesia, by which they may be known if fully bicarbonated. By being calcined, this salt loses 30.7 grains of water and carbonic acid, forming the pure carbonate of the Pharmacopoeia. POTASSJS CARBONAS PURUS. 335 This salt is remarkable among the alkaline carbonates for its con- stancy of composition, being, in a crystalline form, invariably repre- sented by the formula KO,2C02+HO, and is directed in the Phar- macopoeia as the test to ascertain the strength of acids, which it neutralizes in the ratio of their strength. The following table exhibits the proportion of bicarbonate of potassa, which neutralizes 100 grains of each of the acids named:— Acetic acid, 60 Citric acid, 150. Tartaric acid, 133.5. Nitric acid Sulphuric Diluted 7.5. Diluted, 20. Diluted, 25. As a medicine, bicarbonate of potassa acts as a direct and efficient antacid; pleasanter and more efficient than bicarbonate of soda. _ It readily neutralizes free acid in the stomach, and the excess being absorbed renders the blood and urine decidedly alkaline, and is hence considered alterative in its action. It is used to liberate car- bonic acid, and for making the saline preparations of potassa, is confined to carbonate, being pure. Dose 9j to 3j. Potassce Carbonas Purus, TJ. S. The ignition of the potash forming pearlash deprives it of organic matter, and brings it more completely into the condition of a car- bonate. The solution, filtration, and granulation of this deprives it of some inorganic impurities, but leaves it contaminatedwith silica. Charging it with a further dose of carbonic acid precipitates this impurity ; and, finally, calcination at a red heat will drive off Fig. 187. Fig. 188. the additional dose of carbonic acid and the water of crystallization, and leave the pure carbonate. Thisus'direetecHwl^ dissolved and granulated. The only use to whic^ ilTS^ppltt^f^^ a test, and when absolute purity is required. An iron crucible Is directed in 336 THE ALKALIES AND THEIR SALTS. the Pharmacopoeia for this purpose, but a porcelain, Fig. 186, or a platinum crucible, Fig. 187, will do in small operations. Fig. 188 shows the mode of suspending one of these of small size over a gas lamp chimney by a bent wire; a similar arrangement may be adopted in using the Eussian or other alcohol lamps. I have illustrated and described this more fully, because, on"a small scale, it is readily practicable, and it is frequently difficult to obtain the chemically pure carbonate. Formerly this was directed to be prepared by igniting bitartrate of potassa, hence the name salt of tartar now frequently applied to both the carbonates. Liquor Potassce, TJ. S. (Reduced Quantity.) Take of Carbonate of potassa . . Tbj, or 3iij, or 5yj. Lime.....Ibss, or giss, or 3iij. Boiling distilled water . . Cong, j, or Oij, or f Jviij. Dissolve the carbonate in one-half the distilled water. Pour a little of the water on the lime, and when it is slaked add the re- mainder. Mix the hot liquors and boil for ten minutes, stirring constantly; then set the liquor aside in a covered vessel till it be- comes clear; lastly, pour off the supernatant liquor and keep it in well-stoppered bottles of green glass. This process may be conveniently conducted with an ordinary evaporating dish over a spirit or gas lamp, care being taken that the carbonate of lime does not cake in the bottom of the dish while the heat is being applied; a glass rod should be used for stirring. When the boiling is finished, the whole may be conve- niently poured into a precipitating glass, which should be covered by placing the dish over it, or into a salt mouth bottle into which the stopper should be introduced. On standing, the carbonate of lime will subside, and the liquor potassce may be poured off clear. It will act upon filtering paper, so that filtration is not eligible. The use of the siphon, an instru- ment not before mentioned, will be convenient in drawing off the liquid from the carbonate, if any difficulty should occur in pouring it off clear. Figs._ 190 and 191 represent siphons, the latter the most conve- nient kind ; they are bent tubes, having one leg longer than the other. If the tube be filled and the short limb plunged into a vessel filled with some liquid which it is designed to draw off, the liquid will discharge itself from the end of the longer limb, and will con- tinue to flow as long as this end of the tube is below the level of LIQUOR POTASSA. 337 the liquid in which the end of the short limb is immersed. This current is caused by the unequal weight of the columns of liquid Fig. 190. Fig. 191. Plain siphon. Siphon with suction tube. in the two limbs of the siphon. The plain siphon, Fig. 190, is constructed by simply bending an ordinary piece of glass tube of the requisite size over a spirit or gas lamp. The inconvenience in its use arises from the difficulty of filling it with the liquid before- hand. It might be filled with water, but that would dilute ^he preparation. If a small quantity has been already drawn off, the. siphon may be filled by inverting it, and pouring into its long end from a graduated measure, then applying the end of the finger to prevent its running out, and inserting the short limb in the liquid to be drawn off. In using the siphon, Fig. 191, the finger is placed at the end of the long limb, and the short limb being in- serted in the liquid, the air is drawn out by applying the mouth at the end of the thin sucking tube attached for the purpose, till the apparatus is filled as far as the little bulbs. The current will then be fairly determined toward the receiving vessel, and the last drop of the clear liquid may be drawn off. Liquor potassse is a colorless liquid, with an intensely caustic taste, sp. gr. 1.056. It should not effervesce, except very slightly, with acids. It has a very strong affinity for carbonic acid and moisture, which it continually abstracts from the air. It attacks flint-glass, hence the direction to keep it in green glass bottles. Its effect upon the skin is to produce an oily or soapy sensation, due to the destruction of the cuticle; it also destroys or greatly in- jures vegetable fibre. Its use is chiefly confined to neutralizing free acid in the stomach and in the secretions. It is applied to the treatment of scrofulous and cutaneous affections, and to the arrest of the uric acid deposits in the urine. The dose is from niy to f 5ss. When given internally, it should be largely diluted with milk. Dr. E. Wilson, of this city, has used it with success in a case of 22 338 THE ALKALIES AND THEIR SALTS. extreme obesity for reducing the accumulation of fat; by pushing the dose, diluted as above, to nixl three times a day, his patient, a female, lost 48 lbs. weight in a few months, so that from weighing 198 lbs. at the commencement of the treatment, she weighed only 150 lbs. at its close. Potassa, TJ. S. {Vegetable Caustic, Caustic Potassa, Hydrate of Potassa, fused Potash.) This preparation is made from the foregoing by evaporating it to dryness, fusing it, and running it into moulds. It is usually found in the shops of two qualities—one in sticks somewhat thicker than a quill, of a bluish gray color and peculiar earthy odor; the other quite white, frequently thinner than the other, more free from organic impurities, though perhaps containing more lime. It is so deliquescent as to become moist on exposure for a few minutes to the air, and should be kept well and tightly closed; sometimes a few coriander seeds are placed with it in the bottle; they keep it dryer, and prevent its contact with the glass, upon which it acts. It is a very powerful caustic, destroying the part to which it is applied, and producing a deep eschar. Its chief use is in opening abscesses, forming issues, &c. One of its chief disadvantages^ for these applications arises from its deliquescence, which occasions the spread of its corrosive influence to adjacent parts. Potassa cum Calc, TJ. S. Take of Potassa, Lime, of each, 3j. Rub them together, and keep the mixture in a well-stopped bottle. This powder is designed to be applied in the form of paste, made with a little alcohol, but by a modification of the process, a similar article is produced, which is run into sticks, and is found in the shops in that form, closely resembling common caustic in appearance. It is milder from the dilution with lime, and less de- liquescent. Potassce Acetas, TJ. S. {Sal Diureticus) Made by neutralizing acetic acid with carbonate of potassa, and evaporating by a carefully regulated heat till it fuses and crystal- lizes. The carbonic acid escapes with effervescence, being sub- stituted by the acetic. This salt is usually found in the shops in foliated satiny masses, unctuous to the touch, and of a pungent saline taste; it is neutral in its reactions, and extremely soluble and deliquescent, so much so, as to be very difficult to manipulate with; its composition is KO,Ac + 2HO. Its use is almost confined to dropsical affections. The acid it contains being consumed in pass- SALTS OF SODA. 339 ing through the system, the alkali is found as carbonate in the urine, which is much increased in quantity. The dose of acetate of potassa is from gr. x to 3vj- A recipe is given among the Extemporaneous Preparations for a ready mode of preparing it in a liquid form. Potassce Citras, U.S. (Reduced.) Take of Citric acid, Ix.....3X- Bicarbonate of potassa, 3xiv . . 3xiv. Water, q. s. (Oij) .... fgiv. Dissolve the citric acid in the water, add the bicarbonate gra- dually, and when effervescence has ceased, strain and evaporate to dryness, stirring constantly after the pellicle has begun to form till the salt granulates, then rub it in a mortar (wedgewood), pass it through a coarse sieve, put it in a bottle, which should be kept closely stopped. This is a granular powder, slightly acid, very soluble in water, deliquescent, and in its effects refrigerant and diaphoretic. Its dose is from 9j to 3ss. Among the diaphoretic solutions, under the head of Extempo- raneous Preparations, this salt in various liquid forms will be again introduced. Potassce Chloras. Chlorate of potassa is prepared by several modifications of the simple process of passing chlorine gas into a solution of potassa or its carbonate; at first, chloride of potassium and hypochlorite of potassa are formed; with these, a further proportion of chlorine produces changes resulting in the conversion of the hypochloric into chloric acid, which exists in combination with the potassa as chlorate of potassa (KO,C105); this is separated by crystallization from the more soluble chloride of potassium. It is a sparingly soluble salt, unless by the aid of heat, and has a cooling taste and diuretic refrigerant effect, being given in a variety of diseases in doses of gr. x to 3ss. In chemistry it is used to obtain pure oxy- gen, which it gives off, on the simple application of heat, leaving fused chloride of potassium in the flask or retort. Group 2.—Alkaline Salts, starting with Common Salt. Sodii Chloridum, NaCl. Obtained by evaporation of certain natural spring waters. Sodse Sulphas, NaO,SO3+10HO. By the action of sulphuric acid on common salt. Sodse Carbonas, NaO,CO2-f-10HO. By calcining sulphate with carbon, &c. Sods Carbonas Exsiccatus, NaO,C02. By simple calcination of carbonate and pow- dering. . . Sodse Bicarhonas, NaO,2C02+HO. By passing gaseous C02 into a box containing crystals of the carbonate. . Sodse Phosphas, 2NaO,HO,P05+24HO. By neutralizing superphosphate of lime witn the carbonate, filtering and evaporating. , Liquor Sodse Chlorinatse. By treating carbonate, in solution, with chlorinated, lime. Sodse Acetas, NaO, Ac,+6HO. An intermediate salt in the preparation of acetic acid. Sods Valerianas, NaO,Ya, an intermediate salt in the preparation of other valerianates. 340 THE ALKALIES AND THEIR SALTS. Sodii Chloridum, TJ. S. {Common Salt) In crystals called rock salt, or usually in a granulated or fine dry powder. It is very soluble in water, and contains no water of crys- tallization ; its chief use, that of a condiment and antiseptic, is well known. It is an emetic in large doses. Externally, it is stimulant. Salt baths, with or without friction, are useful appliances of the phy- sician. Sodce Sulphas, TJ. S. {Glauber's Salts.) It is produced as a residuum in making muriatic acid and chlori- nated lime, and is one of the most abundant and cheap articles of chemical manufacture. It exists in sea-water and in many spring waters. It is usually in very large white efflorescent crystals. Neutral, very soluble, with a bitter and saline taste; its composition is one equivalent of soda, one of sulphuric acid, and ten of water; the water forming 55 per cent, of its weight. Its dose, as a cathartic, is Iss to Ij, or somewhat less when effloresced, though chiefly used as a purge for horses in much larger quantities. It is the principal ingredient in the so-called Cheltenham salts. Sodce Carbonas, TJ. S. {Sal Soda. Washing Soda.) This is chiefly produced on a very large scale by calcining sul- phate of soda with small coal and chalk, which reduces it first into sulphuret, and then from the presence of the chalk into carbonate. This is separated by digestion with hot water, evaporated, further carbonated, redissolved, and crystallized. The chief use of carbonate of soda is in the arts and in domestic economy as a detergent, and in the preparation of various officinal carbonates and salts of soda. It is extremely soluble in water, and efflorescent, and contains 62 per cent, of water of crystallization, which may be dissipated by heat. Sodce Carbonas Exsiccatus, TJ. S. {Dried or Calcined Carbonate of Soda.) Take of Carbonate of Soda, a convenient quantity. Expose it to heat in a clean iron (or porcelain) vessel until it is thoroughly dried, stirring constantly with an iron (or porcelain) spatula, then rub it into powder. This is the form in which carbonate of soda is most conveniently given in powder or pill. It is a milder antacid than the correspond- ing salt of potassa. The dose of crystallized carbonate of soda is gr. x to oss, though varying with the degree of efflorescence; that of the anhydrous, gr. v to xv. SODJS PHOSPHAS. 341 Sodo3 Bicarbonas, TJ. S. {Supercarbonate of Soda.) The best process for preparing this salt is a modification of that of Dr. Franklin R. Smith, of Bellefonte, Pa. The crystallized carbonate partly effloresced, or a mixture of the crystallized and dried in pro- per portion, is placed in a wooden perforated box, and carbonic acid gas (generated by the action of dilute sulphuric acid on mar- ble) is passed into it. Owing to the strong affinity of the mono- carbonate for a further dose, of carbonic acid, the bicarbonate is generated in this simple way. As met with in the shops, it is a dry white powder, slightly alkaline, permanent in the air, soluble in thirteen parts of cold water, decomposed by a boiling temperature. The commercial article I have generally found to contain some sesqui or mono-carbonate. The taste betrays this, as also the fact of its readily precipitating carbonate of magnesia from a cold solu- tion of Epsom salts, which well made bicarbonate wall not. This impurity, the result of defective preparation, although not very important, renders this remedy less agreeable, and in view of its employment in effervescing powders, &c, less effective. The pro- portion of carbonic acid given off from bicarbonate of soda by treat- ing it with acids exceeds 50 per cent., so that it is one of the most productive articles for this purpose. It enters into Soda, Seidlitz, Yeast, and some other powders, in which tartaric acid is employed to decompose it; the proportion being thirty-five parts of the acid to forty of the bicarbonate. Soda-salceratus is now employed in immense quantities as an adulteration of the proper salasratus, and as a substitute for bicar- bonate of soda; it is, generally, an imperfect preparation and poor substitute for the officinal bicarbonate of soda. Bicarbonate of soda is used in medicine as a mild antacid; it is very cheap, though, I think, inferior to bicarbonate of potassa. Dose, 9j to 3j in carbonic acid water, if at hand. For effervescing powders, see Extemporaneous Prescriptions. Sodce Phosphas, TJ. S. Phosphate of soda is formed by digesting bone ash (phosphate of lime) in sulphuric acid, thus liberating phosphoric acid. The sul- phate of lime being separated by adding carbonate of soda to the phosphoric acid till neutralized, and crystallizing, the pure salt is produced in large, transparent, efflorescent, very soluble crystals, resembling common salt in taste. It is a tribasic salt, consisting of one equivalent of phosphoric acid, two of soda, and one of water, and twenty-four of water of crystallization. (2NaO,HO,P05+24HO). The enormous proportion of water, 62.3 per cent, of its weight, is a remarkable property of this salt. It is a mild saline cathartic and diuretic. Dose, from 3ij to 3j, and is chiefly recommended by its taste. 342 THE ALKALIES AND THEIR SALTS. Liquor Sodce Chlorinata, TJ. S. {Labairaque's Disinfecting Solution.) This may be conveniently prepared by the apothecary or physi- cian by observing carefully the directions of the Pharmacopoeia, as follows:— (Reduced.) Take of Chlorinated lime Carbonate of soda Water . Dissolve the carbonate of soda in three pints of the water by the aid of heat. To the remainder of the water add, by small portions at a time, the chlorinated lime previously well triturated, stirring the mixture after each addition; set the mixture by for several Ibj. 3j. Ibij. Sii- Cong. iss. Oj. Fig. 192. Fig. 193. Wedgewood mortar and pestle. hours that the dregs may subside, then de- cant the clear liquid and mix it with the solution of carbonate of soda. Lastly, decant the clear liquor from the precipi- tated carbonate of lime, pass it through a linen cloth, and keep it in bot- tles secluded from the light. The necessity for the aid of heat in dissolving the carbonate of soda, may be overcome by the use of the mortar and pestle, Figs. 192, 193, as directed in the chapter on Solutions. In the absence of a precipitat- ing jar, the wide-mouth packing bottles, Figs. 194 and 195, may be substituted, being well adapted to allow the undissolved portion of the first liquid, and the precipitated carbonate of lime of the last to subside. Labarraque's solution is a colorless alkaline solution, having a faint odor of chlorine, though somewhat modified, and an alkaline taste; it contains an excess of carbonate of soda. It owes its therapeutic and antiseptic value to containing chlorine in a loose state of com- bination so as to be readily liberated on the addition of even a weak acid, and on exposure to the air, by the absorption of carbonic acid. It is used in malignant fevers as an antiseptic and stimulant, and to correct fetid eructations and evacuations; it is a favorite addi- tion to gargles in ulcerated sore throat. One of its principal uses ALKALINE TARTRATES. 343 is to purify the air in sick-rooms, in which case it acts by decom- posing sulphuretted hydrogen, against which gas, when inhaled, it Fig. 194. Fig. 195. Wide-mouth packers suited to precipitation. is also an antidote. The dose is f 3ss, diluted with water or muci- lage. In gargles, f 3ss or Oj may be used in Oss. Sodce Acetas, TJ. S. This is officinal in the list with a view to the preparation of acetic acid by its decomposition, but it is rarely met with in the shops, and is seldom prescribed in this city. Sodce Valerianas. Valerianate of soda is made by saturating caustic soda with vale- rianic acid, as produced by the distillation of fusel oil from a mix- ture of sulphuric acid and bichromate of potassa; the fusel oil loses two equivalents of hydrogen and gains two of oxygen, being converted into valerianic acid, which combines with soda. This salt is white, soluble, deliquescent, with the odor of valerian. Its only use is to prepare the other valerianates by double decomposition. Group 3.—Alkaline Salts, starting with Crude Tartar. Crude Argols, or Tartar. Deposited in the casks during the ripening of wines. Potassse Bitartras, K0,H0,2T. Purified by repeated recrystallizations, &c. Sodse et Potassse Tartras, KO,NaO,2T+8HO. Boiling carb. soda with bitartrate. Potassse Tartras, 2KO,2T=KO,Y. Boiling carbonate of potassa with bitartrate. Crude argols are imported from the wine-producing countries of two kinds, the red and the white tartar of commerce. Recently 344 THE ALKALIES AND THEIR SALTS. tartar has been produced, though not in large quantities, in the vicinity of Cincinnati, Ohio. It consists of potassa combined with an excess of tartaric acid, some tartrate of lime, coloring mat- ters, &c, the lees and settlings of the wine which have separated during the conversion of the sugar of the grape juice into alcohol, and collected as a mass on the bottom and sides of the casks. Potassce Bitartras, TJ. S. Cream of tartar is purified tartar made by treating argols with hot water, mixing with clay, which absorbs the coloring matters, purifying by crystallization, and reducing to powder. It is a white somewhat gritty powder, of an agreeable acid taste, sparingly soluble in the mouth, soluble in 184 parts of cold water, and in 18 parts of boiling water, which deposits it on cooling. It consists of one equivalent of potassa, one of water, and two of tartaric acid; the water contained in it is capable of being replaced by other bases, as in the two salts which follow it, and in the tartrate of iron and potassa, and the tartrate of antimony and potassa, described in subsequent chapters. Cream of tartar in doses of Iss to Ij, and in smaller quantities, is a very common and wrell-known hydragogue cathartic, refrigeraut, and diuretic. It is usually given diffused in water, being sparingly soluble. Sodce et Potassce Tartras, TJ. S. Bochelle salt is prepared by combining one equivalent of carbo- nate of soda with one of bitartrate of potassa. The soda of the carbonate uniting with the excess of tartaric acid of the bitartrate to form a neutral salt; carbonic acid is evolved. The crystals of this salt are usually large, transparent, slightly efflorescent, of a saline not very unpleasant taste, and very soluble in water. It is commonly sold in powder, and, combined with one-third its weight of bicarbonate of soda constitutes the so-called Seidlitz mixture. It is a mild and pleasant purgative. Dose, from 3ij to |j. Potassce Tartras, TJ. S. Soluble tartar is a salt in which the excess of tartaric acid in bitartrate of potassa is combined with potassa; by boiling one equivalent of the carbonate of that alkali with one equivalent of bi- tartrate, the carbonic acid escapes; the reaction closely resembles that last described, substituting potassa for soda. Tartrate of potassa is either in white crystals, or a granulated powder slightly deliques- cent and freely soluble; it is less agreeable to the palate than the foregoing, which it resembles in medical properties and uses. The dose is from 3j to 3j. It is rarely prescribed. POTASSJE NITRAS—POTASSiE SULPHAS. 345 GROUP 4.—Alkaline Salts—Prepared from Natural Deposits. Potassse Nitras, KO,N05. From incrustations on the soil, in India and elsewhere. Sal-prunelle, KONO-, fused with a little sulphur, and containing a trace of sulphate. Potassse Sulphas, KOS03. From the residuum of the process for nitric acid. Sodse Boras, NaO,2BO3-f-10HO. Found native in Thibet and purified. Potassce Nitras, TJ. S. Nitre, or saltpetre, is imported from the East Indies, where it is extracted from the soils by mixing them with a little wood-ashes, lixiviating with water, and crystallizing. It is refined in this country by recrystallization, and then exists in large six-sided, nearly colorless prisms, freely soluble, and with a cooling rather sharp taste. Much of the saltpetre of commerce is adulterated with nitrate of soda and chloride of sodium (common salt). In the ab- sence of these, 100 grains of the dry-salt, treated with 60 grains of sulphuric acid, and the whole ignited in a crucible till it ceases to lose weight, yield 86 grains of sulphate of potassa. The presence of chlorides may be shown by treating a weak solution with a few drops of solution of nitrate of silver, which would throw down a white insoluble precipitate of chloride of silver. Among the uses of nitrate of potassa in pharmacy, are the preparation of nitric • acid, of spirit of nitric ether, and of collodion. Owing to the im- mense consumption of it in a pure form by the manufacturers of gun- powder, they are resorted to for procuring the best qualities for medi- cinal use. Dupont, near Wilmington, Delaware, furnishes a fine article both in crystals and in the form of a granular powder. It is one of the most popular of the refrigerant, diuretic, and sedative medicines. Dose, gr. v to 3j. Sal Prunelle. This is fused saltpetre run into round moulds about the size of a filbert, of a white color, and possessing the properties of the nitrate. From the use of sulphur in its fusion, it often contains sulphate of potassa. It is used to dissolve in the mouth in affec- tions of the throat. Potassce Sulphas, U.S. {Vitriolated Tartar.) Sulphate of potassa is prepared from the residuum left after treating nitrate of potassa with sulphuric acid, for the distillation of nitric acid; it is also a residuary product in the manufacture of sulphuric and of tartaric acid. A supersulphate is the residuum in the first named case, which requires treatment to reduce it to the proper composition; the salt is then dissolved and crystallized. The crystals are hard, heavy, and usually regular in their shape, being six-sided prisms, terminated by corresponding pyramids. It is used in the preparation of Dover's powder, but is rarely given alone or in any other combination. It is esteemed a cathartic in doses of 3j to 3ij. 346 THE ALKALIES AND THEIR SALTS. Sodce Boras, TJ. S. Borax is found native in Thibet, and imported in a crude con- dition from India, also manufactured in Tuscany. In its refined condition it is in large and handsome crystals, semi-transparent, with slight alkaline reaction, and slightly alkaline not disagreeable taste, soluble in water, especially when hot; though a super-salt, it has an alkaline reaction. The proportion of water of crystalliza- tions appears to vary with the process of crystallization. It is a diuretic and antacid, and by some is said to promote contraction of the uterus, to which end it is associated with ergot. It is a very favorite addition to gargles and mouth-washes—being much pre- scribed for the sore mouth of infants, triturated with sugar, 1 part to 7, and touched to the tongue, or blown in through a quill. It is remarkable for its whitening effect upon ointments, upon which it seems to act by its sub-alkaline properties, partially sapo- nifying them without materially diminishing their bland and emol- lient effects. Group 5.—Alkaline Salts—Preparations of Ammonia. Ammonise Murias, NH3,H2C1=NH4,C1. A neutral, odorless, much used in the arts. Liquor Ammonise. Aqueous solution of caustic ammonia, sp. gr. .960. " Ammonise Fortior. " " " sp. gr. .882. Spiritus Ammonise. Alcoholic solution of " " sp. gr. .831. " Ammonise Aromaticus. Ale. solut. of carb. of ammonia with aromatics. Ammonise Carbonas. Hard, translucent, and pungent, 2NH3.3C02-f-2H0. Ammonias Bicarhonas. White, pulverulent, odorless, NH3,2C02. Liquor Ammonise Acetatis. Neutral and mild solution of, NH3Ac. Ammonice Murias, U. S. Muriate of Ammonia, sal ammoniac, or chloride of ammonium, is in the list of the Pharmacopoeia; it is prepared on a very large scale in England from the residuary products of the destructive distilla- tion of coal, and from other empyreumatic products containing am- monia. It is in white, translucent, fibrous masses, which are convex on one surface and concave on the other; it has a pungent saline taste, but no odor. It cannot be conveniently powdered by contu- sion or trituration, and is best reduced by dissolving, evaporating, and granulating. It is a very soluble salt; it is incompatible with strong acids, which liberate muriatic acid, and with alkalies, which disengage ammonia, as in some of the processes which follow. It is frequently prescribed, especially by German practitioners, as a stimulating alterative in catarrhs, combined with other expecto- rants. Dose, from grs. v to xx. Liquor Ammonice, TJ. S., and Liquor Ammonice Fortior, TJ. S. Solution of ammonia (spirits of hartshorn), and stronger solution of ammonia, are obtained from muriate or any other common am- monia salt, by the action of quicklime, which, combining with the acid, liberates the caustic alkali in the form of gas; this is passed PREPARATIONS OF AMMONIA. 347 by suitable contrivances into water, which absorbs it with inten- sity, especially if refrigerated. The usual commercial strength is somewhat below that of the officinal liquor ammonia, which has the sp. gr. 960. The strongest marks 882, and requires diluting with two parts of water to bring it to the strength of the former; it is not, however, an economical mode of preparing the weaker to dilute the stronger. Spiritus Ammonice, TJ. S. The composition of spirit of ammonia is similar to the foregoing, except that alcohol is used as the solvent for the gas; it has nearly the strength of the officinal solution of ammonia, and has the sp. gr. .831. The three officinal solutions of gaseous ammonia are used almost exclusively for external applications. They are too caustic to be given by the stomach unless largely diluted and modified by emol- lient or mucilaginous excipients. The dose of the officinal liquor ammoniae (not fortior), or of spiritus ammonia, is "ix to xxx. Several liniments introduced under the appropriate head contain one or other of these preparations; the only merit of spiritus over liquor ammonias, is, that it is miscible with certain tinctures, &c, which are decomposed by the aqueous ingredient in the former preparation. Liquor ammoniae fortior is adapted to raise a blister suddenly. Spiritus Ammonice Aromaticus, TJ. S. {Aromatic Spirit of Ammonia) Spt. sal volat. is a very useful and popular stimulant and antacid. Unlike the foregoing caustic preparations, this contains carbonate of the alkali, and is well adapted to internal use. Some processes for preparing it require the solution of the solid carbonate in alco- hol by the aid of a mortar and pestle, with the addition of aromatic essential oils, but our Pharmacopoeia directs a different and some- what more troublesome manipulation, as follows:— Take of Muriate of ammonia . . five ounces. Carbonate of potassa . . eight ounces. Cinnamon, bruised, Cloves, bruised, each . . two drachms. Lemon-peel .... four ounces. Alcohol, Water, each .... five pints. Mix them, and distil seven pints and a half. The two first ingredients decompose each other, forming chloride of potassium, which remains in solution in the retort or still used, while carbonate of ammonia in the form of vapor distils over with / the alcohol and aromatics, and is collected in the receiver. This preparation is given, alone or combined with other reme- dies, to treat a variety of indications in disease. Dose, "Ixx to f3j. 348 THE ALKALIES AND THEIR SALTS. Ammonice Carbonas, TJ. S. Carbonate of ammonia (sesquicarbonate) is prepared by treating a mixture of muriate of ammonia and chalk (soft carbonate of lime). By double decomposition, chloride of calcium and carbonate of ammonia are formed ; the latter, being volatile, sublimes, and is col- lected in a colorless almost transparent sublimate, with powerful pungent odor and acrid taste. It is usually in irregular lumps from the breaking of the large dome-shaped mass at first obtained; it is very hard, and on that account liable to fracture a glass bottle in which it is placed. The stimulant and antacid properties of this salt are very well known; it is given in various modes of combination, some of which will be noticed under the head of Extemporaneous Preparations. Its close is gr. v. Carbonate of ammonia in smelling bottles is much sought for to relieve headaches, and for this purpose may be most conveniently prepared by mixing Muriate of ammonia, granulated ... 5 parts. Carbonate of potassa " ... 8 parts. Moistening and flavoring appropriately. Ammonice Bicarbonas. Bicarbonate of Ammonia.—By long exposure to the air, particu- larly in small fragments, the sesquicarbonate loses a portion of its pungency, falls into powder, and by absorbing carbonic acid becomes converted chiefly into bicarbonate. The use of this is as a milder i and less stimulating diaphoretic and antacid. Dose, gr. x to 9j. In using carbonate of ammonia for its direct stimulating effect, care should be taken that it is free from the pulverulent, white bicarbonate; and where it has deteriorated by the formation of this on the surface of the lumps, they should be scraped away, and cracked, till the vitreous looking hard portion is reached. For saturating acids in the formation of neutral salts, the bicarbonate will answer a good purpose. Liquor Ammonice Acetatis, TJ. S. {Solution of Acetate of Ammonia. Spirit of Mindererus) This excellent preparation is made very readily and conveniently by the officinal recipe, as follows:— Take of Diluted acetic acid, . . half a pint. Carbonate of ammonia, in powder, a sufficient quantity. Add the carbonate of ammonia gradually to the acid until it is saturated. Diluted acetic acid, as elsewhere stated, is made by adding one fluidounce of acetic acid to seven fluidounces of water, making eight. It will be found convenient and desirable to consume the bicarbonate or the partially bicarbonated sesquicarbonate, which PREPARATIONS OF LIME. 349 falls readily into powder, and is almost useless for other purposes, in making this preparation. By making it in a tincture-bottle in which toward the last the stopper is kept, the solution will be made to absorb a large amount of gas, and to sparkle when de- canted. The point of saturation may be determined proximately by the taste, and it is generally not desirable to continue adding the alkali till it is perfectly saturated, as it is far more agreeable to be a little too acid than too alkaline. This solution should be always made in small quantities, and is generally better to be pre- pared when required. It is very much prescribed as a mild stimu- lant and diaphoretic. Dose, f 3j to flss. As an antidote to alcoholic liquids given while the patient is intoxicated, from f3ss to flj. CHAPTER III. ON THE EARTHS AND THEIR PREPARATIONS. 1st Group.—Preparations of Lime. Marmor (Marble). Native hard carbonate of lime. Creta (Chalk). Native soft carbonate of lime. Creta Prseparata, CaO,C02. Levigated and elutriated, nodules. Dose, gr. x to £j. Testa (Oyster Shells). The shell of ostrea edulis. Testa Prseparata. Levigated and elutriated, small nodules. Calx, CaO. Lime recently prepared by calcination. Liquor Calcis. Lime-water, contains 9.7 grs. to Oj. Dose, fgij to fgiv. Calcii-Chloridum, CaCl. Dissolving carbonate in HC1, and evaporating. Liquor Calcii Chloridi. One part of CaCl in 2.5 of the solution. Dose, n\,xxx to f£j. Calcis Carbonas Prsecipitatus. From CaCl by adding NaO,C02. Very white, fine powder. . , Calx Chlorinata, CaO.ClO+CaCl+CaO+Cl. Bleaching salt. Disinfectant Calcis Phosphas, 3CaO,PO,. Calcined bones precipitated from solution m H,C1. Syrupus Calcis Phosphatis (Durand), CaCl. By adding NaO,P05,HO.+Excess of P06. Syrupus Calcis Phosphatis (Wiegand). Contains 3CaO,P06 in solution in H,C1. Syrupus Ferri Phosphatis-Composilus. Phosphates of iron and lime. Suspended by sugar. Lime is the oxide of a light metal called calcium, its officinal name is Calx, symbol CaO. It exists to a very great extent in the mineral kingdom, being the most familiar type of the so-called alka- line earths. It is obtained from the soil by plants, and becomes in- corporated into the structure of animals, entering specially into their bones, shells, and teeth. Marmor and Creta are the names given in the list to two native unorganized forms of carbonate of lime, while Testa is applied to the shell of the common oyster. Besides these, there is another form of hard carbonate of lime, called limestone, which, though not officinal, is employed for the preparation of lime. Carbonate of lime for use in medicine requires to be prepared by the mechanical processes adapted to furnishing a pure and fine 350 ON THE earths and their preparations. article. Chalk and oyster-shell are subjected to the process of elu- triation • being powdered and diffused in water to allow of the sub- sidence of crystalline particles, the turbid liquid is drawn off into other vessels, allowed to settle, and dried by being dropped from a suitable orifice on to a drying slab, thus presenting the carbonate in nodules or small pyramidal amorphous masses, readily falling into a very fine, impalpable, white powder. In this way prepared chalk and prepared oyster-shell are produced. The precipitated carbonate of lime is very differently prepared by means of a chemical process, described, along with the medical properties of the carbonate, on the next page. Mr, U.S. Lime, itself, is prepared from the carbonate, mostly from limestone, by calcining along with carbonaceous matters. Sometimes with wood, furnishing wood-burnt lime; and at other times with coal, furnishing a more common article. The action of an intense heat drives off the carbonic acid which escapes, leaving the lime in its caustic state. [On the addition of water, lime becomes slaked, a high heat is produced, and it is found to have absorbed water. Aqua Calcis, U. S. Take of Lime.....four ounces. Water.....one gallon. Upon the lime, first slaked with a little water, pour the remainder of the water and stir them together, then immediately cover the vessel and set it aside for three hours. The solution should be kept standing upon the undissolved lime in stopped glass bottles, and poured off clear when required for use. Lime is soluble to a very limited extent, and more so in cold than in hot water. The proportion contained in lime-water is from nine to ten grains to the pint; its close is from f^ss to f §ij. It is par- ticularly useful in small doses to allay irritation of stomach and nausea, and as an astringent antacid is adapted to dyspepsia accom: panied with acidity of stomach and diarrhoea. Its taste and caustic properties are best disguised by admixture with milk. Calcii Chloridum, U. S. {Chloride of Calcium) Is prepared by dissolving chalk or marble in muriatic acid and evaporating to dryness, after which it may be fused. It is a white amorphous mass or powder, with an acrid, bitter, saline taste, very soluble in water and alcohol, and so deliquescent as to be used for drying gases, and for depriving various liquid substances of water. It is also capable of crystallizing, when it absorbs six equivalents of water. Liquor Calcii Chloridii, U. S. Solution of chloride of calcium is directed in the Pharmacopoeia CALX CHLORINATA. 351 to be made by obtaining the chloride as above, and dissolving it in water in about such proportion that 2.5 parts of the solution shall be equal to one part of the salt. It is rarely prepared or prescribed, although considered a deobstruent and alterative remedy adapted to scrofulous diseases and goitre. Dose, n^xxx to f 5j. Calcis Carbonas Prcecipitatus, U. S. Is prepared by adding to the solution of chloride of calcium as above, an equivalent proportion of carbonate of soda in solution. By double decomposition, carbonate of lime is formed and precipi- tated as a white powder, while chloride of sodium remains in solu- tion and is separated by washing. The fineness of this precipitate is dependent upon the degree of concentration and the temperature of the solutions. If dilute and cold, the result would be the forma- tion of a crystalline powder destitute of that softness and miscibility with liquids which adapts it to convenient use. The Pharmacopoeia, therefore, directs strong solutions and a boiling temperature at the time of mixing them. When properly made, this is a fine white powder, free from grit- tiness insoluble in water, but soluble without residue in diluted muriatic acid, with abundant disengagement of carbonic acid. It is used as an antacid, with astringent properties, adapting it espe- cially to diarrhoea. Dose, from gr. x to 5j. As compared with prepared chalk, with which it is identical in composition, this is a far handsomer preparation, and, though less distinctly amorphous, is preferred for almost all prescription pur- poses. It is well substituted for chalk in dentifrice. Calx Chlorinata, U. S. Under the name of chloride of lime, or bleaching powder, this substance is extensively manufactured and used as a bleaching agent. It is made from slaked lime by subjecting it to an atmosphere of chlorine gas till completely saturated. It is a whitish powder, having the odor of chlorine, which it gives off on exposure to the air. It is highly deliquescent, absorbing both moisture and carbonic acid from the air. A very moist consistence argues the presence of a considerable proportion of chloride of calcium, and is an indication of inferiority. Its composition varies, but it is, when of good quality, a mixture of hypochlorite of lime, CaO,C10 ; chloride of calcium, CaCl; lime, CaO,HO ; and free chlorine, CI. It is only partially soluble in water. . For the full advantage of the liberation of chlorine th<| addition of an acid is necessary, though the spontaneous evolution of that gas is usually relied on for common disinfecting purposes. Ine chief popular use of chlorinated lime is as a disinfectant about cess- pools, sewers, and places rendered offensive and unwholesome by the products of decomposition. It is also used in the manufacture of chloroform and for the pre- 352 ON THE EARTHS AND THEIR PREPARATIONS. paration of Liquor sodas chlorinata (see page 342), which is used as a substitute for it for internal and external use in medicine. Calcis Phosphas, U. S. This salt, called bone phosphate of lime, is made by calcining bones and dissolving in muriatic acid, precipitating the phosphate by a solution of ammonia, washing, and drying. It is a white insoluble powder, free from odor and taste; soluble in muriatic, acetic, and phosphoric acids. This phosphate is used as a remedy for scrofulous diseases, defec- tive nutrition, &c. Dose, from gr. x to 3ss, repeated three times a day. In a paper in the American Journal of Pharmacy, vol. xxv. p. 411, by A. B. Durand, the following recipe for a preparation extensively sold by him was published:— Syrup of Phosphate of Lime. (Durand.) Take of Precipitated phosphate of lime 128 grains. Glacial phosphoric acid . . 240 Sugar, in coarse powder . . 7 J oz. (offic.) Distilled water .... 4 fluidounces. Essence of lemon . . .12 drops. Mix the phosphate of lime with the water in a porcelain capsule, over a spirit or gas lamp, or in a sand bath; add gradually the phos- phoric acid until the whole of the phosphate of lime is dissolved. To this solution add sufficient water to compensate for the evapo- ration, then dissolve the sugar by a very gentle heat, and, when perfectly cold, add the essence of lemon. The syrup of phosphate of lime, thus prepared, is colorless, transparent, of an acid taste, and contains two grains of the phosphate of lime and nearly four grains of phosphoric acid to each teaspoonful, and has been found to be more acceptable to the stomach than the solution of phosphate of lime usually prescribed. When diluted by the patient previously to its being taken, it forms a phosphoric lemonade not unpleasant to the taste. Dose, a teaspoonful. In a paper in the American Journal of Pharmacy, noticing the above, T. S. Wiegand remarks upon the acidity of the preparation as an objection to its use in some cases; and, as the use of the phos- phates of iron, lime, soda, and potash had proved so satisfactory in the hands of several eminent physicians, proposed the following modified formulae:— Syrup of Phosphate of Lime. (Wiegand.) B.—Calcis phosphatis praacip. . . . 5j. Acidi chlorohydrici .... f 3iv. Aquas, q. s. ft......fgvij. Sacchari, q. s. ft......f gxiiss. Dissolve the phosphate of lime, previously mixed with an ounce SYRUPS OF THE PHOSPHATES. 353 of water by means of the acid; filter, then add the remaining water to this; add the sugar until the bulk is increased to twelve fluid- ounces, and strain. Syrupus Ferri Phosphatis Compositus. (T. S. Wiegand.) Take of Protosulphate of iron four drachms and two scruples. Phosphate of soda (crys- tallized) .... seven drachms and a half. Phosphate of lime (re- cently precipitated) four drachms. Glacial phosphoric acid one ounce. Sugar, in coarse powder eight ounces (offic). Water......a sufficient quantity. Dissolve the sulphate of iron, and five and a half drachms of the phosphate of soda, severally, in three fluidounces of the water, and mix the solutions; wash the precipitated phosphate of iron with (cold) boiled water, mix it with the phosphate of lime and half a pint of water in a porcelain capsule, apply heat, gradually add the phosphoric acid, continuing the heat until a clear solution is ob- tained, and dissolve in it seven ounces of the sugar; then dis- solve the phosphate of potash, two drachms of the phosphate of soda, and an ounce of sugar in a fluidounce of water, acidulate the solution with phosphoric acid, and add it to the syrupy solution first obtained. A slight cloudiness is occasioned by mixing the solutions, which may be entirely removed, and the syrup rendered permanently transparent, by adding forty drops of hydrochloric acid. Each teaspoonful of this syrup contains about one and two-fifths grain of protophosphate of iron, two and a half grains of phosphate of lime, one and one-fifth grain each of the alkaline phosphates, and four and a half grains of free phosphoric acid, which may be con- sidered the dose. As some of the preparations in use are colored with cochineal and flavored with orange-peel, which render them less disagreeable, this syrup may be so treated by rubbing up six grains of cochineal with a little sugar, and adding ten drops of the oil of orange-peel, and adding the mixture to the syrup, and filtering. To the foregoing preparations, for which there is as yet a rather limited demand, the following, proposed by Professor Procter, may be added, with the remark that although the space given to the subject is perhaps in undue proportion to its therapeutic impor. tance, yet the phosphates seem to require an extended notice from their recent popularity and the difficulty felt by some in prescribing them. 23 354 ON THE EARTHS AND THEIR PREPARATIONS. Protochloride of iron (in crystals) ■ 3j. Chloride of calcium (fused) . 3iss. Phosphate of soda (crystallized) . 3vij. Phosphate of potassa . 3j. Glacial phosphoric acid 3"j. Syrup of lemons, Distilled water, of each fSiv. Triturate the chlorides of iron and calcium, six drachms of the phosphate of soda, and the phosphoric acid, together with a little water, until a homogeneous liquid is obtained, and then add the rest of the water gradually; dissolve the phosphate of potassa and the remainder of the phosphate of soda in the syrup, and add it to the first solution, and mix. The result is a syrupy, acid, saline liquid, holding a portion of gelatinous phosphate of lime in suspension. This may be entirely dissolved by using more phosphoric acid, or by adding a little hydrochloric acid. The reactions that occur in the above formula are, first, the pro- duction of phosphate of lime, phosphate of iron, and chloride of sodium ; next, the immediate solution of the first two through the agency of the free phosphoric acid. When the syrup containing the phosphates of soda and potassa is added, a portion of the free acid is attracted by them, and a small part of the phosphate of lime is precipitated in a hydrated form. Sulphate of iron may be sub- stituted for the chloride in the above formula, by first triturating the soda, salt, and chloride of calcium alone with a little water till double decomposition ensues, then adding the sulphate of iron, and again triturating, and lastly the phosphoric acid. By observing this order, no sulphate of lime is formed, and the mixed hydrated phosphates of lime and iron at first formed are readily dissolved by the free acid. When sulphate of iron is used, of course both sul- phate of soda and chloride of sodium exist in the preparation. The phosphates of iron and lime of commerce are often so granu- lar and dense that their solution and absorption in passing along the alimentary canal must be much interfered with. This difficulty may be avoided, when the free phosphoric acid is objectionable, by presenting the insoluble phosphates in a hydrated form, thus:— Take of Protosulphate of iron (cryst.) . . 3vj- Chloride of calcium (fused) . . . 3iss. Phosphate of soda (cryst.) . . . 3vij. Syrup of ginger, Distilled water, of each . . . f^iv. Triturate the chloride of calcium with the phosphate of soda and three fluidounces of the water till the decomposition is complete and a smooth mixture is obtained, then add the syrup, and finally the sulphate of iron, previously dissolved in a fluidounce of the water. The resulting mixture consists of the hydrated phosphates of iron and lime, with about two drachms of sulphate of soda and PREPARATIONS OF MAGNESIA. 355 a little common salt, the whole rendered palatable by the syrup, which also tends to suspend the insoluble salts, and to prevent the peroxidation of the iron salt. These formulas were offered by their author, as conveying some hints as to a manner of preparing the phosphates extemporaneously, for administration in solution or mixture very favorable to their therapeutic action. (See Phosphatic Lozenges) 2d Group.— Of the Earths, &c. Preparations of Magnesia. Magnesise Sulphas, Mg0,S03-f-7TI0, from native carbonate. Dose, |j. Carbonas, 4MgO,C02HO, MgO,2HO, from sulphate, by NaO,C02. Magnesise Carbonas Ponderosum, 4MgO,C02HO, MgO,2HO? do. do. " Bkarbonas (solution). Fluid magnesia. Magnesia, MgO. By calcining the carbonate. Dose, gj. Liquor Magnesise Citratis, §j of the salt in f^xij bottle. Magnesise Citras, MgO, CT, 3HO? By fusing the citrate and adding MgO. Prepared Citrate of Magnesia. Eifervescing powder, mixed citrate, bicarb, potassa, &c. Moxoris Efurescent Magnesia, contains MgO,S03-f-7HO. The salts of magnesia, like those of lime, have for their base a metal. It has a brilliant gray color, and a sp. gr. of 2.2. It is rarely met with, except in the cabinet of the chemist. Magnesice Sulphas, U. S. Epsom salts is made from a magnesian limestone, called by mi- neralogists, dolomite. By the action of sulphuric acid, the mag- nesia is converted into the soluble sulphate, which, on filtration and evaporation, yields that salt in crystals. By stirring, as it passes into a solid consistence, it is obtained in acicular crystals, which effloresce by exposure to the air, becoming white and pulverulent. Its sensible properties are familiar to most. In doses of from 3ss to Sj, Epsom salts is a brisk saline cathartic; in small doses, a diu- retic. It is much combined with senna, senna and manna, &c, in well-known and very disagreable infusions. Magnesice Carbonas, U. S. The carbonate, called also magnesia alba, is usually made from sulphate by adding carbonate of soda, and boiling the mixed solu- tions. Sulphate of soda and carbonate of magnesia result from the play of affinities; the former is soluble and is washed out, while the latter is collected, pressed into oblong squares, called bricks, dried at a moderate heat, and wrapped in paper for sale. It is very light, pulverulent, insoluble, tasteless, soft, though somewhat gra- nular. It is a compound of about 1 part of hydrated magnesia and i of hydrated carbonate of magnesia. 356 ON THE EARTHS AND THEIR PREPARATIONS. Heavy Carbonate of Magnesia. This is the result of a similar process to the foregoing, except that the solutions are much more concentrated and the process somewhat varied in its details. It is heavier than the common car- bonate, and is found in a white rather dense powder, preferred from its small bulk. Carbonate of magnesia is used chiefly as an antacid, in doses of 9j to 3j, though liable to the objection of liberating carbonic acid gas in the stomach, producing eructations and distension. Bicarbonate of Magnesia Is a crystalline salt, quite soluble in water, but which is not perma- nent, and is employed only in solution. The so-called fluid-mag- nesias, of which Murray's, Dinneford's, and Husband's, are the best known, are solutions of this salt. They are conveniently prepared by passing a stream of carbonic acid gas into freshly precipitated hydrated carbonate of magnesia. The quantity contained in these solutions is necessarily small, and they have a tendency to deposit the salt as they lose the free carbonic acid; their usefulness is limited to the case of children, and to the treatment of acidity of stomach in adults. The taste is more alkaline and disagreeable than that of the insoluble carbonate, or of magnesia itself. Magnesia, U. S. Usually prepared by calcining the carbonate at a high heat. This preparation is very various in its physical properties, owing to the various modifications of the process for its preparation; it will not be necessary in this work to describe these. The reader is referred, for an account of some interesting experiments made in my laboratory by Thos. H. Barr, of Terre Haute, la., to the Ameri- can Journal of Pharmacy, vol. xx. p. 193. Common calcined magnesia is a very light white powder, almost insoluble and tasteless, but imparting a sensation of grittiness to the tongue, which renders it a disagreeable medicine to most per- sons. It should be entirely soluble in diluted muriatic acid, with- out effervescence. The presence of lime would be shown by a white precipitate with bicarbonate of potassa, as the bicarbonate of magnesia is soluble, while that of lime is not. The four best varieties in commerce are the English ponderous magnesia, sold in bulk, and Henry's, Husband's, and Ellis's, sold in bottles. The ponderous is not much known with us; it has the advantage of smallness of bulk, but lacks the extreme softness of the bottled article. Henrys leaves nothing to desire; it is very heavy, soft and smooth, and is highly esteemed among the more wealthy classes; its price, which is enhanced by the payment of duty, LIQUOR MAGNESIA CITRAS. 357 almost puts it out of the reach of the middle and poorer classes. Husbands is somewhat cheaper and equally good, though, as would be inferred from the ascertained composition, it requires a little larger dose. Ellis's is the most recent make; it maintains the same price in bottles as the last named, and approaches it closely in quality. This is also obtainable by the pound at a somewhat re- duced rate. The following abridgment of Barr's table of the composition of these three kinds will show the relative purity of the specimens examined:— Henry's. Husband's. Ellis's. Sp. gr. 3.404. Sp. gr. 3.326. Sp. gr. 3.386. Magnesia......94.40 84.306 94.04 Water.......50 11.400 .80 Sulphates of magnesia and soda, iron, &c. 5.81 3.008 4.41 The dose of magnesia as a cathartic is about 3j, or, of the com- mon kind, near a tablespoonful, of the heavy kinds, about a tea- spoonful: as an antacid, smaller doses are used. Magnesian salts are tested by a solution of phosphate of soda and ammonia, which throws down from a neutral solution the ammonio-magnesian phosphate, an insoluble white salt. Liquor Magnesice Citratis, U. S. In presenting a formula for this new and very popular cathartic beverage, I shall depart from the usual custom of following the Pharmacopoeia. It is to be regretted that, from taking the officinal directions, many pharmaceutists are compelled to give up the pre- paration of the solution, and purchase it of other apothecaries or druggists, so that its manufacture is thrown too much into a few hands. One druggist in Philadelphia has frequently sold a gross of bottles of the citrate per day, on an average, for thirty days in succession. The recipe below is that I have used for some years; it is original with myself, and I believe never fails to furnish a satisfactory article. To make one doz. To make one bottle. Take of Citric acid ... 9 ounces (offic.) 3yj. Magnesia .... 2 ounces and 5 drachms 3j + gr.xlv. Syrup of citric acid 12 fluidounces f Ij. "Water.....1 gallon, or sufficient f3xss. Make an acid solution of citrate of magnesia with the citric acid, magnesia, and 3 pints of the water (f^ivin making a single bottle); to this add the lemon syrup, and divide the whole among 12 f Ixii bottles (or put into one bottle if the smaller quantity), fill these with the remainder of the water, adjust the corks, and add to each bottle about 3j of crystallized bicarbonate of potassa. If the magnesia is rather poorly calcined, and contains some carbonate, it may be best to increase the proportion from 105 to 110, or even 120 grains, though this must be done with great cau- 358 ON THE EARTHS AND THEIR PREPARATIONS. tion, as the slightest excess may occasion the precipitation of a large amount of the hydrated citrate. If the preparation is not decidedly acid, it will be disagreeable to take, and will possess no advantage over the common saline cathartics, but if too strongly acid, it will be almost equally objectionable. The bicarbonate of potassa has the great advantage of neutralizing* a portion of the acid, while it forms a very soluble and agreeable salt. If car- bonate of magnesia were used, in the proportion of the Pharmaco- poeia formula, the tendency to deposit would be increased, which is the greatest practical difficulty with this solution. The size of the bottle is another point to be observed; it must not fall short of fSxij. The so-called pint-inks are very suitable; porter bottles will do to substitute for them. Bottles are made for the purpose both with and without the label blown in the glass, which are very convenient. Each bottle holds about 3j of the salt, and is a full cathartic dose; divided portions may be taken for its refrigerant and aperient effects, the cork being always carefully secured, and the bottle inverted in the intervals of taking the doses. Soluble Citrate of Magnesia. Citrate of magnesia is insoluble in water in a hydrated condition as that precipitated from a solution, but is more soluble if made by the direct union of its constituents in a dry condition at an elevated temperature. The proportion employed must be varied according to the purity of the magnesia and the condition of the acid. Citric acid is what is called a tribasic acid, having three equivalents of water of combination (see page 298); as found in commerce,^ is liable to contain, in addition, either one or two equivalents of water of crystallization, so that its saturating power is not uniform. The basic citrate (3MgO,Ci) is the neutral and soluble salt aimed at, and the proportion contained in the following recipe will furnish it in a tolerably eligible form with the use of the commercial acid and magnesia. Take of Citric acid (crystallized) . . 100 grains. Calcined magnesia ... 35 grains. Water.....15 drops. Dissolve the acid in the water, and its water of crystallization by the aid of heat, then stir in the magnesia; a pasty mass will result, which soon hardens, and may be powdered for use. The chief practical difficulty in the process results from the great comparative bulk of the magnesia, and the very small quantity of the fused mass with which it is to be incorporated. A portion of the magnesia is almost unavoidably left uncombined, and the salt is, consequently, not neutral. This uncombined magnesia should be dusted off the mass before powdering it. Care must be taken to avoid too high a temperature which would decompose the citric acid. PREPARATION OF BARYTA. 359 The citrate thus prepared is quite soluble when at first made, though not rapidly so; it also becomes less readily soluble by keep- ing, and is liable to run into masses which are hard and unmanage- able. Some mix powdered citric acid with magnesia, and, perhaps, a little carbonate, and sell it as solid citrate; but this dissolves very slowly, and seems a very poor substitute for the effervescing solu- tion. The prepared citrate of magnesia, of Charles Ellis & Co., is made from the salt as prepared by fusion, so combined as to furnish an effervescing draught, which though not clear contains the undis- solved portion so nicely suspended as to be taken without incon- venience. The recipe is as follows:— Take of Powdered citrate of magnesia Powdered sugar Powdered citric acid Powdered bicarbonate of soda Oil of limonis . 3iv. Syiij. liiss. «lx. Combine the acid and sugar and rub into a fine powder ; dry all the water of crystallization from the acid over a wrater bath. Add the citrate of magnesia and oil of limonis, and mix intimately; then add the bicarbonate of soda and triturate the whole into a fine pow- der, which must be preserved in bottles properly excluded from the air. The dose for an adult is from one to three tablespoonfuls mixed in a tumbler of water and drank in a state of effervescence. Moxon's Effervescent Magnesia. The following recipe for a good effervescing aperient is from Gray's Supplement; though less agreeable than the above, it an- swers a good purpose, and is popular with some:— Take of Carbonate of magnesia . . . 3*j. Sulphate of magnesia Bicarbonate of soda . Tartrate of potash and soda Tartaric acid Sij. 3ij. To be perfectly freed from water of crystallization, and mixed and kept in a well-corked bottle. Dose, from a teaspoonful to a tablespoonful dissolved in water and drank immediately. 3d Group.—Preparations of Baryta. Barytas Carbonas, BaO,C02. Native, witherite. Soluble in strong acids. Barii Chloridium, BaCl,2H0. Poisonous ; used only in solution. Liquor Barii Chloridi, gj to f §iij water. Dose, five drops. Barytce Carbonas, U. S. Carbonate of baryta, which, like the other earths, has a metallic base, is a rather rare mineral, being chiefly imported from Sweden, 360 ON THE EARTHS AND THEIR PREPARATIONS. Scotland, and the North of England. It is usually in masses of a light grayish color and fibrous texture. It is soluble in the strong acids with effervescence, forming salts, which, if soluble, furnish in solution the best tests for sulphuric acid, throwing down a white precipitate insoluble in boiling nitric acid. Barii Chloridum, U. S. {Muriate of Baryta) When muriatic acid is added to carbonate of baryta, by simple elective affinity, the muriatic acid displaces the carbonic with effer- vescence, and with the baryta forms chloride of barium and water. By evaporation, the chloride may be obtained in crystals. It is a white, freely soluble, permanent salt, with a bitter acrid taste, and imparts a yellow color to flame. It is poisonous, as are all the other baryta salts; it is only used in medicine in the form of a; Liquor Barii Chloridi, U.S. Take of Chloride of barium .... 3j-_ Distilled water.....f^iij. Dissolve the chloride in the water, and filter if necessary. This solution is almost too strong for convenient use ; it is stated to be deobstruent and anthelmintic. The dose is about five drops, but it is very rarely prescribed. 4th Group.—Preparations containing Alumina. Alumen, KO,S034-Al203,3S03+24HO. Manufactured from alum earths. Alum en Exsiccatum. Deprived of its water of crystallization by heat. Aluminum'^ the name of the metallic radical of the earth alumina; is has recently attracted much attention from the announcement in Prance, of the discovery of an economical process for its extraction. Its extraordinary lightness, beauty of color, and indifference to oxidizing influences, fitting it to displace silver, and even platinum, for many purposes in the arts. Alumen, U. S. {Alum) This complex salt is found in commerce in large crystalline masses, very cheap and abundant, being largely produced for use in the arts. Its manufacture, from the peculiar clay formations which yield it, need not be described here. Alum is slightly efflorescent in dry air from the loss of a portion of its large amount, nearly one-half its weight, of water of crystal- lization ; it is very soluble; mixed with alkalies, it is decomposed, precipitating alumina, which is redissolved by an excess of the alkali. It is, also, incompatible with vegetable astringents. • IODINIUM. 361 Alumen Exsiccatum, U. S. Take of alum, in coarse powder, a convenient quantity. Melt it in a shallow iron or earthen vessel, and maintain it at a moderate heat until ebullition ceases and it becomes dry, then rub it into powder. Dried or burnt alum differs from the crystallized salt in contain- ing no water; 474.5 grains of the crystals should yield 258 grains of the anhydrous salt, which is consequently nearly double its strength. Care should be taken not to push the heat so far as to drive off a portion of the sulphuric acid. Dried alum is nearly insoluble in water. Alum is an astringent, and in the dried condition a mild eseha- rotic. In large doses it is a cathartic. It is much used as a gargle for sore throat, as an injection for leucorrhcea, &c. Internally, it is used in hemorrhages, in hooping-cough, &c. Burnt alum is used exclusively as an external application. Iron alums, ammonia alums, iron and ammonia alums, &c, are compounds in which the alumina and potassa of this double salt are substituted by other bases. (See works on Chemistry) CHAPTER IV. ON THE NON-METALLIC ELEMENTS AND THEIR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS. Op the non-metallic elements, chlorine has been referred to under the head of medicated waters. Carbon has been considered as a derivative of lignin, and of the remainder it will only be necessary to consider iodine, bromine, sulphur and phosphorus. The dis- tinction as here made between the closely allied groups and non- metallic elements, and of metals, is one of convenience merely. Arsenic, which, is one of the so-called intermediate elements, will be more conveniently considered among the metals. 1st Group.—Preparations of Iodine. Iodinium, I. Solid crystalline scales, sp. gr. 4.95. Potassii Iodidum, KI. In cubical crystals, dose, gr. ij to gr. v. Tinctura Iodinii. ^ss to fgj alcohol, externally used. Iodinii Composita, I, gr. xv., KI, ^ss to fjj. Tt\, xv to xxx. Liquor Iodinii Compositus, I, gr. xxijss. KI, gr. xiv to fgj. TT\, x to xx. 362 NON-METALLIC ELEMENTS, THEIR PREPARATIONS. Iodinium, U. S. {Iodine) This non-metallic element is procured for use in medicine from the fused and vitrified ashes of sea-weed called kelp, which is pre- pared in the Western Islands, North of Scotland and Ireland. The kelp being broken and lixiviated, yields about half its weight of soluble soda, potassa, and magnesia salts. The common salt and carbonate, and sulphate of soda, are crystallized out on evapora- tion. The mother liquors contain iodides of sodium, potassium, and magnesium, to which sulphuric acid is added, liberating car- bonic acid, sulphuretted hydrogen and sulphurous acid, by effer- vescence, and sulphur, which is deposited. The acid lye is next distilled from peroxide of manganese, which liberates the iodine, and it is condensed in cooled glass receivers. Iodine is in bluish black crystalline scales with a metallic lustre, sp. gr. 4.95. Odor like chlorine, melts when heated, then sub- limes in very heavy violet vapors, soluble in ether and alcohol, biit very sparingly in water, although by the addition of iodide of potassium or chloride of sodium, it is rendered very soluble. Free iodine precipitates starch in the cold, of a dark blue color, which reaction is its most familiar and delicate test. It dissolves in alkaline solutions, forming iodides and iodates. With the metals and most of the non-metallic elements, it combines with avidity, and several of its combinations are officinal; of these, the iodides of mercury, of lead, zinc, iron, arsenic, and sulphur, are considered under the head of their metallic elements, while several preparations which seem to owe their value exclusively to iodine, are introduced here. Locally applied, iodine is an irritant and vesicant, staining the skin brown or orange color, causing itching, redness, and desquamation. Applied by inunction, it is absorbed; inhaled as vapor, it exercises its alterative effect on the mucous membrane of the respiratory passages. Its influence is chiefly exerted on the glandular and absorbent systems. It is used both internally and topically for an immense number of diseases requiring alterative treatment. The salts of iodine are much used for their several alterative effects; when given internally, it is always in solution or combination. Potassii lodidum, U. S. {Iodide of Potassium.) This salt was formerly directed to be made by combining iodine with iron, and decomposing the iodide of iron with carbonate of potassa, precipitating the carbonate of iron, filtering and crystal- lizing ; this process which is in some respects the most convenient to the pharmaceutist, has been superseded in the Pharmacopoeia by the plan of adding iodine directly to a solution of potash, thus forming the mixed iodide of potassium, and iodate of potash (6KO+I6=5KI+KO,I05). This being heated to redness in con- TINCTURE OF IODINE. 363 tact with charcoal, the iodic acid I05 parts with its oxygen, and the iodate is reduced to iodide of potassium. This salt is in white, shining, semi-opaque cubes, without odor, an acrid saline taste, resembling common salt. Soluble in two- thirds weight of cold water, and freely in rectified spirit. Nitric acid decomposes its solution, and if starch be subsequently added, it yields the characteristic blue iodide of amyl. Tartaric and other acids do not liberate iodine, but a peculiar acid compound hydriodic acid (HI); hence the old name of the salt hydriodate of potassa* With acetate or nitrate of lead, it affords a yellow precipitate of iodide of lead. Iodide of potassium is liable to adulteration with bicarbonate, or carbonate of potassa; the latter renders it very damp, and they both occasion effervescence with acids; sometimes iodate of potassa is present, which may be detected by tartaric acid liberating iodine, perceptible by the starch test. This salt contains no water of crystallization. Every 4 grains contains about 3 grains of iodine. The aqueous solution is capable of taking up a large quantity of iodine, forming a liquid containing the ioduretted iodine, of a deep brown color. Iodide of potassium is considered to possess the same medicinal virtues as iodine, though preferred by some physicians to obtain the constitutional effects of the alterative. It is used very exten- sively, both alone and combined with iodine, iodides of mercury, &c. Dose, gr. ij to gr. v. Tinctura Iodinii, U. S. {Simple Tincture of Iodine) To make Oj. To make f^j. Take of Iodine Ij 3ss. Alcohol Oj flj. Dissolve the iodine in the alcohol. This is best done by tritu- rating it with successive portions of alcohol in a glass or porcelain mortar. This tincture is not adapted to internal use, as on the addition of water the iodine is precipitated, and exercises its pecu- liar irritating topical effect on the coats of the stomach. It is ap- plied to the skin as a caustic; a camel-hair brush is convenient in erysipelas, and when the surface to be treated is circumscribed. \ xvj contain one grain of iodine. Tinctura Iodinii Composita, U.S. {Compound Tincture of Iodine.) To make Oj. To make fgj. Take of Iodine . . . Iss. gr. xv. Iodide of potassium Ij. 3ss. Alcohol. . . Oj. flj. Dissolve the iodine and iodide of potassium in the alcohol. 364 NON-METALLIC ELEMENTS, THEIR PREPARATIONS. ♦ This is adapted to the same use as the foregoing, and by the pre- sence of the iodide of potassium, the precipitation of iodine on contact with aqueous liquids is prevented. It may also be used internally in doses of "i xv to xxx. These tinctures are included under the general head, Tincture?, U. S.* while the following is placed under the head Iodinium :— Liquor Iodinii Compositus, U. S. {LugoVs Solution.) To make Oj. To make f|j. Take of Iodine . . 3yj. gr. xxijss. Iodide of potassium liss. gr. xiv. Water . . Oj. flj. Lugol's solution, as originally proposed, contained twenty grains iodine, and forty iodide of potassium, to flj water; the present officinal preparation is adjusted to the proportions convenient for a pint, and as is seen above is somewhat stronger. In iodine and compound iodine ointments, we have nearly the same proportions as in the foregoing, substituting lard for alcohol and water. (See Extemporaneous Preparations) 2d Group.—Bromine Preparations. Bittern. The mother liquor after the crystallization of salt. Brominum. Heavy, very volatile liquid, sp. gr. 2.96. Potassii bromidum, BrI. White cubical crystals. Dose, gr. v to x. Liquor ferri bromidi. Solution of bromide with excess. " br. tr^v to x. Brominum, U. S. {Bromine) Bromine is a liquid, non-metallic element of a red color, stifling odor, and acrid taste; very volatile and fuming, soluble in ether and alcohol, though not in water; it precipitates starch of an orange color. Associated with iodine in sea-water and numerous mineral springs, it is largely extracted from bittern, the liquor left after the crystallization of common salt whether from sea-water or from certain salt springs. At the salt-works, in Western Pennsylvania, this bittern is preserved for the extraction of the bromine, and the American bromine prepared there is fully equal to the imported article. The principal consumption of bromine is in the daguerreo- type process, in which large quantities are consumed annually. The mode of its extraction, which is rather complex, is detailed in the books. The vast quantities of bittern thrown away at a single salt manufactory, render-it a cause of regret that there is not some use to which it can be profitably applied. Bromine is never used in medicine, except in combination. Bittern, as obtained from the salt-works, is a heavy liquid, with- out color, and having a caustic taste and highly stimulating proper- ties. Its chief medical use is to produce redness, and, by continued FLOWERS OF SULPHUR. 365 rubbing of the part, a pustular eruption. It is a good application in rheumatism and in glandular swellings, being absorbed, and pro- ducing the alterative effects of the iodine and bromine salts. Potassii Bromidum, U. S. Bromide of potassium is obtained by similar processes to iodide, substituting an equivalent quantity of bromine for the iodine. It . closely resembles the iodide in most of its properties, and, like it, is an anhydrous salt. It is believed to possess very similar medical properties to iodide, acting as a powerful alterative, adapted to scrofulous and syphilitic complaints, chronic skin diseases, &c. It is directed in rather larger doses—gr. v to gr. x. Liquor Ferri Bromidi. This preparation was introduced to notice by Dr. Gillespie, of Freeport, Armstrong Co., Pa., who, besides being a practitioner of medicine, is engaged in the bromine manufacture, in connection with the 'salt springs near that place. Dr. G. recommends this solu- tion very highly as a tonic alterative, and it has been successfully used by numerous other practitioners. It is made by macerating iron filings with bromine under water, till they have combined; an excess of bromine being used. The solution, as made by Dr. Gil- lespie, is given in the dose of m, v to x, three times a day, increased to m, xxv. 3d Group.—Sulphur Preparations. Sulphur. Sublimed Sulphur, S. Yellow crystalline powder. Dose, gr. x to ^ij; " lotum. Thoroughly washed with water, " " prjecipitatum. A light and very fine powder, _" Sulplmris iodidum, IS2. Blackish crystalline masses, used in ointment. Sulphur, U. S. {Flowers of Sulphur) Sulphur is a very abundant substance in the mineral kingdom, existing in direct combinations with the metals, as sulphurets ; and with their oxides, as sulphates. Virgin sulphur is a native, toler- ably pure form, abundant in Naples, Sicily, and the Eoman States, from whence it is imported. By fusion, and running into moulds, roll sulphur or rolled brimstone is prepared, while flowers of sul- phur is the result of subliming and condensing it in suitable cham- bers. . ., Sulphur has a characteristic yellow color, sp.gr. 1.98, is volatil- ized by heat, and combustible, burning with a characteristic blue color, yielding sulphurous acid gas, which is a powerful disinfect- ant and bleaching agent. Flowers of sulphur, or sublimed sulphur, is a crystalline powder, of a harsh and gritty character; wholly insoluble in water, alcohol, and ether; tasteless, and nearly odorless; it is the form of sulphur much administered as an alterative and laxative remedy in small 366 NON-METALLIC ELEMENTS, THEIR PREPARATIONS. ' doses; being absorbed, it enters the circulation and is given off from the skin as sulphuretted hydrogen. Externally, it is used as a slight stimulant to the skin, and has the power of destroyino- the acarus scabiei, or itch insect, for which it is popularly known as the remedy. Dose, as an alterative, gr. x to 3ss; as a laxative, 3ss to 3ij, alone or combined with bitartrate of potassa. Sulphur Prcecipitatum, U. S. {Milk of Sulphur.) Made by boiling sulphur and lime together till they combine, forming sulphuret of calcium, then adding muriatic acid, which abstracts the calcium, forming chloride, while the sulphur is pre- cipitated as a bulky, light powder. This has a soft and very fine consistence, and is adapted to suspending in liquids, though little used internally. Dose, the same as the foregoing. Yery consider- able quantities have been consumed recently, in the preparation of the following excellent application to the hair, which is also a re- medy for skin diseases, blemishes of the complexion, &c. Twiggs's Hair Dye. Take of Precipitated sulphur, Acetate of lead, of each . . . 3j- Eose water.....fgiy. Triturate together in a mortar. This is not an instantaneous dye, but should be applied twice a day till it gradually restores the color to its natural shade. Sulphur is Iodidum, U.S. Take of Iodine......liv. Sulphur ...... Ij. Rub the iodine and sulphur together in a glass, porcelain, or mar- Fig. 196. Fig. 197. Fig. 198. u Apparatus for making iodide of sulphur. ble mortar till they are thoroughly mixed. Put the mixture into a matrass, close the orifice loosely, and apply a gentle heat so as A PHOSPHORUS. 367 to darken the mass without melting it. When the color has become uniformly dark throughout, increase the heat so as to melt the iodide then incline the matrass in different directions, in order to return into the mass the portions of iodine which may have con- densed on the inner surface; lastly, allow the vessel to cool, break it and put the iodide into bottles, which are to be well stopped. ' A suitable vessel for this operation is a test tube or a common, very cheap bottle, such as are shown in the figure. One should be selected with very thin glass at the bottom. The iodide is in bluish- black crystalline masses, in odor reminding of iodine, staining the skin yellow. Two equivalents of sulphur are combined with one of iodine, so that it is a bisulphuret (ISS). Internally, this is rarely or never prescribed, but it is much used in the form of ointment to chronic and obstinate skin diseases. Phosphorus. This element is obtainable from bones, by calcining, treating with oil of vitriol, and then subliming the mass with charcoal. The phosphorus is thus collected, and being cast into moulds, is found in commerce colorless, in transparent, or white pipes, having a waxy consistence. It is luminous in the dark, from forming phosphorous acid (P03), and is kept under water to prevent gradual oxidation, and to guard against accident from its ready inflammability. It should be handled with care, and not intrusted to children, who frequently procure it for experiment, without due precaution. Its sp. gr. is 1.84. Melting point, 108° F. Soluble in ether, oils, and naphtha, but not in water or alcohol. By combustion it yields phos- phoric acid, the acid which is combined with lime in bones, &o. Phosphorus is not often prescribed, although considered to be a stimulant of value in certain low forms of disease; it is a danger- ous medicine, except in very small doses, from ^ to ^ gram. It is to be powdered by fusion in a vial or flask of moderately warm water, and shaking up as it cools. It is given in solution in olive oil, or ether, afterwards suitably suspended. Amorphous or red phosphorus is a form of the element differing in some of its pro- perties from the ordinary kind. It is much less inflammable, fusi- ble, and luminous, and is in reddish-brown powder. If exposed to the air at common temperatures, it remains unchanged, and, accord- ing to recent observations, may be administered in considerable doses without .injurious effects. It is prepared in England by ex- posing common phosphorus to an elevation of temperature (from 419° to 482° F. ?) under certain circumstances. 368 IRON AND MANGANESE. CHAPTER V. IRON AND MANGANESE. Ferrum. (Iron.) Ferri Ramenta {Iron Filings). Ferri Filum {Iron Wire). This metal is too well known to require description. Its purest form is that of wire, or preferably card teeth. The filings (Ramenta), when obtained as a residuum from the manufactories, are apt to be contaminated with other metals. They are also liable to rust, which is objectionable in some cases. The salts of iron used in medicine are very numerous, including salts of the protoxide, of the sesquioxide, and of the black or mag- netic oxide, and also halogen salts. Those only wrhich are readily prepared by the apothecary need be mentioned in detail. In the following table, the officinal and unofficinal preparations are presented in the order in which they are treated of in this chap- ter. The unofficinal in Italics. Name. Comp. Dose. Remarks. Ferri Pulvis Ferri Sulphas Fcrri Sulphas Exsiccat. Ferri Subcarbonas Ferri Phosphas Tinct. Ferri Chloridi Ferrum Ammoniatum Liq. Ferri Per Sulphatis Ferri Oxidum Hydratum Liq. Ferri Citratis Ferri Citras Ferri et Quinise Citras Syr. Ferri Citratis Syr. Ferri Protocitratis Ferri Lactas Ferri et Potassse Tartras Ferri Ferrocyanuretum Liq. Fevri Nitratis Syr. Ferri Protonitratis Ferri lodidum Liq. Ferri lodidi Ferri Bromidum Syr. Ferri Bromidi Liq. Ferri Bromidi Ferri Valerianas Fe FeO,S03+7HO • Fe0,S03+H0 Fe203,2HO+FeO,C02? gr. xxxij (Fe2Cl3) to fgj Fe203,3S03+Aq. Fe203,H0 Fe203,Ci FeO,"L~3HO Fe203,KO,2T~ 3Cfy,4Fe Fe203,3NO,+Aq. FeO,N054-Syr. Fel' gr. vij (Fel) to gj Fe,Br ? (Gillespie's) Fe203,3Va, gr- j—gr. iij. gr. v. gr- iij-gr- v—9J-gr. v—x. tl"Lx—xxx. gr. iv—x. f3J—fIss-tn.iij—v. gr. iij—v. gr. ij—v. r^xx— fgj. rtLxxx—f3J. gr. j—gr. v. gr- x—BJ-gr. v—xv. TT^X—XX. lr^xv—xx. grs. ij—v. tT\,xx—xl. gr. ij—v. n\xx—xl. n\,v—x. gr.j- Steel gray powder. Green crystals. Whitish powder. D'k brown powder. Bluish powder. Clear yel'w liquid. Orange col. grains. Light b'wn liquid. Moist b'wn magma. fcjj contains £j. Garnet col. scales. fjj contains gj. White plates or powder. (5arnet col. scales. I'rus'n blue, cakes. f Astring'tiubow-\ el complaints. Decomposes spon-taneously. Light green syrup Brick red powder Greenish syrup. See Bromine. Red, amorphous. SULPHATE O^P IRON. 369 Fern Pulvis, TJ. S. {Iron by Hydrogen. Quevenneh Iron) Prepared by passing a stream of hydrogen over the calcined sub- carbonate (dry sesquioxide), contained in a gun-barrel heated to low redness, by which the oxygen of the oxide combines with hydrogen, forming water, and leaves the metal in a very fine condition. It is an impalpable powder, of a steel gray color, soluble in dilute hydrochloric and sulphuric acids, with rapid evolution of hydrogen. It oxidizes when exposed to damp air, and should be kept in bottles. It is usually contaminated with a little carbon, black oxide, and oc- casionally sulphuret of iron. The latter impurities give it a, dull black color. When well prepared, it will burn on the application of a lighted taper; and a small portion of it, struck on an anvil with a hammer, forms a scale having a brilliant metallic lustre. Metallic iron possesses in a high degree the property of restoring to the blood this essential ingredient, when, from disease, it is defi- cient. From its extreme fineness, it is readily soluble in the stomach, and the only objection to its use is that occasionally it produces eructations of hydrogen; and, if it contains sulphuret of iron, sul- phuretted hydrogen is evolved. Iron preparations are apt to produce astringent effects, some more than others, the persalts, it is stated, more than the protosalts; hence the frequent use of mild purgatives during their administration. They all blacken the stools. Iron, in powder, is usually given in the dose of two grains. It is conveniently given in lozenges, made with or without chocolate, though it has more taste than the subcarbonate. In pills it is much combined with the tonic extracts. Ferri Sulphas, TJ. S. {Sulphate of Iron. Green Vitriol) Prepared by dissolving iron wire in diluted sulphuric acid. One eq. of iron decomposing one of water, combines with its oxygen, and forms a protoxide, which last unites with one eq. of sulphuric acid to form sulphate of protoxide of iron. The hydrogen is libe- rated in a gaseous form, and may be collected for experiment. Green vitriol of commerce, which is used in the arts, is an impure sulphate, containing peroxide. It is prepared from the native sulphuret, and may be purified by crystallization. When pure, sulphate of iron is in light bluish green rhomboidal prisms, having an astringent, styptic taste. Composition, FeO,S03 +7H0. It dissolves in about one and a half times its weight of cold water; is insoluble in alcohol; when exposed to air and moist- ure, it oxidizes, and becomes covered with a brownish yellow per- oxide. It also effloresces, becoming white on the surface. _ Owing to the large amount of water in its crystals, it is incon- venient to dispense, in combination, with vegetable substances in the form of powder or pill; and hence, in the Edinburgh and Dublin 24 370 IRON AND MANGANESE. Pharmacopoeias, is directed to be exposed to a moderate heat till it is converted into a dry whitish mass, which is to be reduced to powder, and is called Ferri Sulphas Exsiccatum. By this it loses six equivalents of water, and is consequently much stronger than the crystallized salt. In addition to the "hsematic" virtues common to the iron salts, this preparation is decidedly astringent. It is much prescribed internally in cases attended with immoderate discharges, and is also used externally, in injections, &c, though less frequently than sulphates of zinc and copper. Dose, in crystals, 5 grains; dried, 3 grains. Ferri Subcarbonas, TJ. S. {Precipitated Carbonate of Iron.) Made by decomposing the sulphate of iron by means of an alka- line carbonate, as the carbonate of soda. When first formed, it is a bulky greenish, almost white, precipitate, which may he con- verted, by admixture with sugar, into Valletta's mass, which see; but when dried in air, it becomes much darker, and finally brown, from more or less conversion into the sesquioxide and loss of car- bonic acid. If the drying is carried on at a low temperature, this change is only partial, and the preparation effervesces rapidly when thrown into acids, and has a dark brown color. This is a much more soluble form, and to be preferred to the bright red colored powder produced by heating it. The subcarbonate of iron is one of the most popular of the chaly- beate salts. It has the properties attributed to the powder of iron, with a more agreeable effect from swallowing it. The carbonate is not astringent, and produces little or no action upon the mucous membranes of the alimentary canal. Dose, gr. v to 9j. Ferri Phosphas, TJ. S. {Phosphate of Iron) Formed by a double decomposition between solutions of sulphate of iron and phosphate of soda. Phosphate of iron is precipitated as a white powder, which, quickly absorbing oxygen, becomes bluish white. Its composition is variable and uncertain. Sulphate of soda, which remains in solution, is washed out. It has been given with advantage in amenorrhoea and some forms of dyspepsia, and is associated with the phosphates of lime, soda, and potassa in several new preparations elsewhere noticed. Dose, gr. v to x. Tinctura Ferri Chloridi, TJ. S. {Tincture of Muriate of Iron) This is one of the preparations usually made by the apothecary. It is placed among the preparations of iron in the Pharmacopoeia, though also adapted to be inserted among the tinctures:— Take of Subcarbonate of iron . . three ounces. Muriatic acid . . . half a pint. Alcohol . . .a pint and a half. TINCTURE OF MURIATE OF IRON. 371 Fig. 199. %W^ Pour the acid on the subcarbonate of iron in a glass or porcelain vessel. Mix them, and when effervescence has ceased apply a gentle heat and continue it, stirring occasionally until the powder is dis- solved; then filter the solution and mix it with the alcohol. It is an equally good plan to mix the dissolved chloride before filtering. The quantity of liquid to be filtered is thus larger, but the filter is less likely to break. As a small portion of the powder will be apt to remain undissolved, the wash bottle, Fig. 201, should be used, as shown in Fig. 200, to spirt a strong jet of alcohol into the dish and thus carry all the contents on to the filter. The tincture of chloride of iron is a solution of the sesquichloride (Fe2Cl3) in alcohol; it should contain about thirty-two grains of that salt to fgj. If a considerable pro- portion of subcarbonate remains undissolved, it will be too weak from deficiency of strength in the muriatic acid, and a little more acid should be added before withdrawing the heat. In prescribing Fig. 200. Fig. 201. this preparation, it should be remembered that the drops are very small, so that, although its dose is from ten to thirty minims, twice that number of drops may be given. It should not be pre- scribed with strong mucilage, which it has the property of gelatin- izing. It is most frequently presented alone, dropped into water. It is one of the most popular of the iron preparations. Besides the properties which are common to these, it is astringent, used in passive hemorrhages, and a diuretic which adapts it to a variety of 872 IRON AND MANGANESE. cases. It is also one of the best solvents and vehicles for sulphate of quinia. Ferrum Ammoniatum, TJ. S. {Ammoniated Iron. Flores Martiales) Subcarbonate of iron is mixed with muriatic acid in a glass vessel; water and sesquichloride of iron are formed ; a solution of the latter is then evaporated along with a solution of muriate of ammonia; a mixture of the two salts is the result in about the proportions of fifteen per cent, of the former to eighty-five of the latter. It is met with in the shops in the form of small orange-colored pulverulent grains, sometimes quite crystalline, having a feeble odor and a styptic saline taste. It is deliquescent and soluble in diluted alcohol and water. It also sublimes almost without residue. In consequence of the small proportion of iron present, it is a compound of little value. The large amount of muriate of ammonia contained in it renders it alterative, and in large doses aperient. It has been used with advantage in amenorrhcea, scrofula, &c. Also as a deobstruent in glandular swellings. Dose, gr. iv to x. Liquor Ferri Per sulphatis. Under this head I prefer to introduce to notice the first step in the preparation of the officinal hydrated oxide of iron, because it is in the condition of a solution of the undecomposed sulphate of ses- quioxide, that the sesquioxide is best kept for extemporaneous precipitation, and because this solution is also useful for other pur- poses in pharmacy. The following formula for its preparation is compiled from that of the Pharmacopoeia:— Take of Sulphate of iron . one ounce. Sulphuric acid . fifty-three minims. Nitric acid . . a fluidrachm and a half, or sufficient. Water . . . half a pint. Dissolve the sulphate of iron in the water, adding also the sul- phuric acid (this may be done in a flask or evaporating-dish); boil the solution; then add the nitric acid, a few drops at a time, con- tinuing the boiling after each addition till it ceases to produce a dark color; then filter the liquid, if necessary, or pour it off into an appropriate bottle for preservation and future use. The following process yields the same results with greater facility, and in a very short time:— Take of Sulphate of iron . . one ounce. Sulphuric acid . . fifty-three minims. Nitric acid . . .a fluidrachm and a half. Triturate the sulphate of iron with the sulphuric acid into a pasty mass. Add the nitric acid little by little, and continue the tritura- CITRATE OF SESQUIOXIDE OF IRON. 373 tion till red fumes cease to be given off. Then dissolve in water half a pint, and filter if necessary. In this process the nitric acid, by its facility of yielding oxygen to metallic oxides, converts the protoxide of the proto-sulphate into sesquioxide, but the sesquioxide requires a larger dose of acid to form a salt, hence the addition of sulphuric acid. The solution has a reddish-brown color, and rather styptic ferruginous taste; its composition is shown in the syllabus. Ferri Oxidum Hydratum, TJ. S. {Hydrated Oxide of Iron) Ferri Sesquioxidum Hydratum. This is made by adding ammonia in excess to the solution of the persulphate as above. The alkali neutralizes the sulphuric acid and throws down the oxide of iron as a reddish-brown precipitate. This, if designed for use as an antidote for arsenic, is to be collected on a strainer, water being passed through it to dissolve out the sul- phate of ammonia, and then squeezed out, and the moist brown magma transferred to a wide-mouth bottle and kept under a super- stratum of water. It has been ascertained, however, that by long standing, under these circumstances, the hydrated oxide loses wholly or in part its power of neutralizing arsenious acid, hence the neces- sity of keeping the solution of persulphate and reserving the addi- tion of ammonia till the emergency requiring its use shall occur. As will appear in several of the recipes which follow, the hydrated sesquioxide comes in play in making some of the persalts of iron; it is also an eligible medicine for producing the usual tonic effects of the iron preparations, and may be dried at a temperature not exceeding 180° F., without losing its constitutional water; at a, red heat it becomes anhydrous. Its dose in the form of magma is f 3j ; as an antidote Oss every five or ten minutes till a large excess has been given. Ferri Citras, TJ. S. {Citrate of Sesquioxide of Iron) Of the several citrates of iron, the citrate of the sesquioxide is most commonly used. It is made by saturating a solution of citric acid in an equal weight of water (at 150°), with freshly precipitated moist hydrated sesquioxide of iron ; this is evaporated to the con- sistence of a syrup, spread on glass or porcelain plates, where it speedily dries in thin layers, which are separated and broken into fragments. It is in beautiful garnet red-colored plates, slightly soluble in cold water, readily in boiling, and has an acid ferruginous taste. Dose, grs. iij to v. Liquor ferri citratis is the name appropriate to the solution of the above salt, which it is convenient to keep on hand for dispens- ing. This salt is more soluble when freshly prepared than when old, and although it is slowly and imperfectly soluble in cold water, 37-1 IRON AND MANGANESE. under ordinary circumstances, it is readily obtained and kept in a very concentrated solution, which, being of known strength, may be readily diluted to the point desired. In the process of making the citrate, as above, the evaporation of the liquid obtained by adding the sesquioxide to solution of citric acid, may be dispensed with, and the liquid further diluted, if necessary, so that each fluidrachm shall contain a drachm of the citrate, and each minim a grain; this requires that for a drachm of citric acid used, there should be about a fluidrachm and a half of the resulting solution. Ferri et Quinice Citras. {Citrate of Quinine and Iron) This very popular salt, as met with in commerce, is of uncertain strength, partly in consequence of there being no authoritative formula for its preparation ; the usual composition, founded on the relative doses of its two principal ingredients, is five grains of citrate of iron to one of citrate of quinia. The salts are to be mixed while the former is in solution, and afterwards concentrated and dried in scales, like the simple citrate of iron, which it resem- bles, except in taste; it has the bitter taste of the quinia. The dose of citrate of quinia and iron is grs. ij to grs. v.— Citrate of iron and magnesia, ammonio-citrate of iron, and other solu- ble citrates, have been occasionally prepared and recommended, but none of them are at present much in use. The ammonio-citrate is recommended by greater solubility in cold water than the simple salt. Syrupus Ferri Citratis. {Syrup of Citrate of Magnetic Oxide of Iron.) Take of Citric acid.....3y. Sulphate of iron . . . . Ij. Water, Solution of ammonia, of each . sufficient. Sugar......Iviij. By either of the processes given for liquor ferri persulphatis, con- vert |ss of the sulphate of iron into sulphate of the sesquioxide; mix this in solution with the remaining *ss of the sulphate, and add the solution of ammonia until it ceases to throw down a pre- cipitate of the black or magnetic oxide. Having collected and washed this, add it to the citric acid, dissolved in f Ij of water, heat to about 150° F. and filter; dilute the filtered liquid with water to make f Iv, in this dissolve the sugar, and a clear dark-colored syrup will be the result. This contains 3j of the salt to f Ij, and is a very eligible prepa- ration in the dose of in,xx to f3j. It is apt to deposit the citrate if kept very long. TARTRATE OF IRON AND POTASSA. 375 Syrupus Ferri Protocitratis. {Syrup of Proto-Citrate of Iron) Take of Sulphate of iron .... 3iiiss. Carbonate of soda . . . . 3'iv. Sugar, Water, of each .... sufficient. Citric acid . . . . . Iss. Simple syrup.....fliv. Dissolve the sulphate of iron and carbonate of soda in equal portions of water, and add the one to the other in a beaker or pre- cipitating glass. Wash the precipitated protocarbonate of iron with water, in which a small portion of sugar has been dissolved, and add it to a concentrated solution of the citric acid; evaporate to a greenish deliquescent mass, and dissolve in the syrup. This is a greenish brown liquid, containing nearly 3j of the salt to f Ij. Dose, Jtlxxx to f 3j- It is liable to deposit the salt by long keeping. The syrup of citrate of iron of Beral is a saccharine solution of the citrate of ammonia and sesquioxide of iron. Ferri Lactas. {Lactate of Iron.) Obtained by digesting metallic iron with dilute lactic acid, or preferably, by decomposing the lactate of lime with sulphate of protoxide of iron. It is, when pure, in the form of very white crystalline plates, sparingly soluble in water, with acid reaction, and ferruginous taste, though, as generally met with in this country, it is a greenish white or gray powder; it has the advantage of less solubility than some of the other salts, and hence a less powerful taste. This is regarded as a superior preparation, on the supposition that all the combinations of iron are converted into lactates upon their entrance into the stomach. It has been incorporated with flour in the preparation of bread, and is well adapted to the form of lozenge, of chocolate, &c. The lactate has been found beneficial in chlorosis, and the kindred fqrms of disease, in which iron is indicated, and is said to possess a marked influence upon the appetite; it is, however, rarely prescribed in this country. Dose, gr. j to grs. v, repeated at suitable intervals. Ferri et Potassce Tartras, TJ. S. {Tartrate of Iron and Potassa.) This double salt is directed to be prepared by heating together, to 140° F., hydrated sesquioxide of iron with bitartrate of potassa. The excess of tartaric acid in the latter salt is saturated by the iron oxide forming a neutral, uncrystallizable salt. This is obtained by evaporation in a thick syrupy liquid, which is poured on plates of glass to dry. As thus prepared, it forms garnet scales, having the 376 IRON AND MANGANESE. physical characters of the citrate; soluble in seven times its weight of water, and becoming damp on exposure. Most of that found in commerce appears to be made from proto-carbonate or protoxide of iron; it is in a granular condition, and has a greenish slate-color. Its astringency is'much less than the ferruginous preparations gene- rally, and its stimulating influence less obvious. From its slight taste, and ready solubility, it is one of the best preparations for children. Dose, gr. x to xx. Ferri Ferrocyanuretum, TJ. S. {Ferrocyanuret of Iron. Prussian Blue) Obtained by a double reaction ensuing upon mixture of solu- tions of ferrocyanuret of potassium and sulphate of iron, the latter being first converted into a tersulphate by addition of N05 and S03. It is an insipid, inodorous substance, in oblong rectangular cakes, of a rich deep blue color. Insoluble in water, alcohol, and mineral acids, excepting sulphuric. Tonic and sedative. Has been recommended in intermittent and remittent fever; also in epilepsy and facial neuralgia. Dose, gr. v—xv. Liquor Ferri Nitratis, TJ. S. {Solution of Pernitrate of Iron.) Take of Iron wire, cut in pieces . . Ij. Nitric acid . . . . fliij. Distilled water . . . sufficient. Mix the acid with a pint of distilled water, add the iron and agi- tate occasionally until gas ceases to be disengaged, then filter the solution and add to it sufficient distilled water to make it measure thirty fluidounces. This solution, which is at first of a clear, red color and powerful styptic taste, is apt to throw clown, upon standing, a bulky precipi- tate of subnitrate of sesquioxide. This may be prevented by the addition of a little muriatic acid, or by observing the following directions of Prof. Procter:— Mix the acid with ten fluidounces of the distilled water in a thin, wide-mouth bottle, which should be surrounded by water. Add the iron gradually, about a drachm at a time, waiting until active effervescence has ceased after each addition before making the next. When all the iron has thus been thrown in, filter the solution through paper, heat it gently in a capsule or flask, and carefully drop in nitric acid, followed by stirring or agitation until a drop of the solution, tested with ammonia, yields a red precipitate without any tinge of black. Then add distilled water until the liquid measures thirty fluidounces. The solution should have a bright, Madeira wine color. It is used as an astringent in diarrhoea, and in hemorrhages from the bowels, uterus, &c. in individuals of pale and feeble constitutions. Dose, "Ivto xv. IODIDE OF IRON. 377 Syrupus Ferri Protonitratis. It requires a particular course of manipulation to dissolve iron in nitric acid without, as in the above preparation, a large portion passing to the higher stage of oxidation. If, however, instead of adding the iron in divided portions to the nitric acid, we add the nitric acid more diluted to the iron in great excess, the acid gradu- ally becomes saturated, the solution has a light-greenish color when filtered, and is precipitated of a greenish color by ammonia. It is necessary for the solution to stand on the iron for several hours after the last addition of acid. Take of Iron wire (card teeth), in pieces . two ounces. Nitric acid (sp. gr. 1.42) . . . three fluidounces. Water......thirteen fluidounces. Sugar, in powder .... two pounds. Put the iron in a wide-mouthed bottle kept cool by standing in cold water, and pour upon it three fluidounces of water. Then mix the acid with ten fluidounces of water, and add the mixture in portions of half a fluidounce to the iron, agitating frequently until the acid is saturated, using litmus paper. When all the acid has been combined, filter the solution into a bottle containing the sugar and marked to contain thirty fluidounces. If the whole does not measure that bulk, pour water on the filter until it does. When all the sugar is dissolved, strain, if necessary, and introduce the syrup into suitable vials, and seal them. This preparation is, I believe, used for nearly the same purposes as the foregoing. Dose, ^ v to xv. Ferri lodidum, TJ. S. {Iodide 'of Iron) Take of Iodine......Iij- Iron filings.....Ij- Distilled water.....Oiss. Mix the iodine with Oj water, in a glass or porcelain vessel, and gradually add the iron filings, stirring constantly. Heat the mixture gently, until of a light-green color. Filter, and pour upon it the remaining Oss of water, boiling hot. Evaporate the filtered liquor at a temperature not exceeding 212°, in an iron vessel, to dryness. Keep in a closely stopped bottle. One eq. of iron is here made to unite directly with one eq. of iodine, forming a protiodide, Fel. It is in the form of green, or grayish-black, tabular crystals, some- times amorphous masses, exceedingly deliquescent, and possessed of a styptic, chalybeate taste. It should be perfectly soluble in water when freshly prepared, imparting to a solution the odor and taste of iodine. By exposure to the atmosphere, it decomposes into free iodine and sesquioxide of iron. Iodide of iron produces the valuable effects of the ferruginous salts, in addition to those of iodine; it is peculiarly applicable to the 378 IRON AND MANGANESE. treatment of scrofulous diseases in anaemic patients, and is very much prescribed. It should be remembered that the proportion of iron, in the iodide, is small, and that it is a comparatively powerful preparation. Dose, gr. j to ij. Owing to its liability to decompose and its extraordinary deliquescence, it is rarely prescribed, except in the form of the syrup next described, or in that of pilules ferri iodidi, introduced among extemporaneous preparations. Liquor Ferri Iodidi, TJ. S. Syrupus Ferri Iodidi. {Syrup or Solution of Iodide of Iron) This important alterative chalybeate is readily made by the apothecary and country physician, by the following process of the Pharmacopoeia:—■ Reduced quantity Take of Iodine . Iij. Iss. Iron filings Ij- 3ij. Sugar, in powder Ixij. 3 in- Distilled water sufficient. sufficient. ei=fg* Mix the iodine with flv of distilled water (fliss, reduced quan- tity), in a porcelain or glass vessel, and gradually add the iron filings, stirring constantly. Heat the mixture gently, till all the iodine is dissolved, or until the liquid acquires a light greenish color. Then having adjusted a bottle to the measure of twenty fluidounces, or made ready the bottle shown in Fig. 202 (mark flv on a vial for the reduced quantity); then introduce the sugar into the bottle, filter the solution on to it, adding fresh water upon the filter above, occasionally shaking the bottle, until the resulting syrup measures fIxx (flv, for the reduced quantity). It is well to transfer this to small vials, f Iss and flj, as by frequent opening and restopping a large bottle, it will undergo a change—becoming brown. This may be partially obviated by leaving a few strips of iron in the bottom of the bottle. The use of heat in this preparation is unnecessary, the reaction, which is the same as that in the pro- cess for making the solid iodide, will take place satisfactorily in the cold. The use of sugar as a preservative of this deli- cate salt, is an important improvement, introduced about the year 1840, and has brought the iodide of iron into the reach of the practitioner in a very permanent and eligible form. This solution contains about 7% grains of salt to f3j. Dose, ^l xx to xl. It is incompatible with most chemical agents, but may be mixed with the syrups and fluid extracts of the vegetable alteratives, or, what is o$ip» Graduated receiving bottle. MANGANESE. 379 perhaps better, prescribed in a separate vial, to be dropped into the syrup at the time of taking it. A preparation is sometimes prescribed in this city under the name of Dr. Hays's Syrup of Iodide of Iron ; the formula is pub- lished in the Amer. Journ. of Med. Sciences, for 1840, p. 449. It is made from 400 grains of iodine, and 160 of iron, and 2 ounces of sugar to fliv. Dose, til v. Bromide of Iron. This salt is obtained by adding bromine to iron filings in excess under water, and submitting them to a moderate heat. When the liquid assumes a greenish-yellow appearance, it is filtered and evapo- rated rapidly to dryness in an iron vessel. Bromide of iron is a brick red, very deliquescent salt, of an acrid styptic taste, and requires to be kept closely stopped in glass vials. This bromide has been used quite extensively in Pittsburg, Pa., as a tonic and alterative, and is considered by some physicians a highly efficacious prepara- tion. This salt may be known by the liberation of bromine on the addition of sulphuric acid. An eligible form for its administration is the following:— Syrup of Bromide of Iron. Take of Bromine.....200 grains. Iron filings .... 85 grains. Water.....flivss. Sugar.....liij. Make a solution in the manner directed for preparing the officinal solution of iodide of iron. Dose, tit, xx, three times a day, gradually increased. (See Medical Examiner, vol. vii. p. 162.) For the preparation of a solution of bromide of iron with excess of bromine, see Bromine. Valerianate of Iron. This preparation is made by the decomposition of valerianate of soda by tersulphate of sesquioxide of iron; it is a dark red amor- phous powder, having a faint odor and taste of valerianic acid. Its composition is thus shown, Fe20?,3Va. It is insoluble in cold water, decomposed by hot water, and is soluble in alcohol. In hysterical affections complicated with chlorosis, it is prescribed in doses of about a grain repeated several times a day. Manganese. This is a metal resembling iron in its therapeutical as well as in some of its chemical properties. It forms several oxides, of which the protoxide, MnO, is present in its most important oxysalts. These have a rose color, and on addition of carbonated alkali precipitate 380 IRON AND MANGANESE. the white carbonate of protoxide, which, however, has a tendency to pass into the brown sesquioxide. The salts of manganese are not incompatible with vegetable astringents, which is their chief pharma- ceutical merit. None of them are officinal. Preparations of Manganese. Manganesii Oxidum Nigrum, Mn02. Native impure mineral. Manganesise i Sulphuretum Rubrum HgS2 Alterative fumi-gations. ii " Nigrum Mild alterative. gr. v to 3J. ii Oxidum Rubrum Hg02 Externally stim-ulant. ii " Nigrum HgO Alterative, siala-gogue, &c. \ to 3 grs. ii Cyanuretum HgCy2 Alterative in sy-philis, &c. TVt0 * sr- Hydrargyrum Ammoniatum HgCl,NH2 Externally in ointment. ii cum Creta 3,Hg-f5,Ca0,C02 Antacid and al-terative. £ to 3 grs. The composition stated in the syllabus is that generally adopted by pharmacologists in this country; it is founded on the view that the combining equivalent of mercury is 202. Supposing the equi- valent to be 101, as European chemists generally do, we should call corrosive chloride, protochloride (HgCl); calomel, subchloride (2Hg,Cl), and so on. Hydrargyri Chloridum Corrosivum, U. S. {Corrosive Sublimate.) By the action of boiling sulphuric acid on mercury, the bipersul- phate (Hg02,2S03), is first formed. When this is heated with com- mon salt, mutual exchange takes place, and bichloride of mercury CALOMEL. 403 and sulphate of soda, the former of which sublimes, are produced. The changes are represented in the formula Hg02,2S03+2NaCl= HgCl2+2(NaO,S03). Corrosive sublimate is in heavy white crys- talline masses, of a styptic and metallic taste; soluble in about twenty parts of cold water; much more so in alcohol; soluble also in ether; it melts and entirely sublimes when heated. Its watery solution, precipitated by alkalies or lime-water, throws down the red or yellowish binoxide. (See Extemporaneous Prescriptions) When this precipitate is heated, it gives off oxygen, and runs into globules of metallic mercury; a solution of corrosive sublimate precipitates albumen, and forms with it a definite insoluble com- pound, to which property its use as an antiseptic is due. It is a very powerful irritant; when taken in large doses, it causes burning at the epigastrium, vomiting and purging; applied to the skin, it is corrosive. It is less apt to produce salivation than the other preparations of mercury, and in very small doses it is useful as an alterative in chronic affections, syphilitic or not; exter- nally, it may be used as a lotion, gargle, injection, or ointment, in chronic skin diseases, ulcerated sore throats, and chronic discharge, from mucous membranes. Dose, Jg gr. to \ gr. in solution, or pill, with crumb of bread. The solution for external use is usually made in the proportion of i or I gr. to fsj of water. It is much used in solution with muri- ate of ammonia, which increases its solubility, as a poison for bed- bugs; the proportions to be used are one ounce of corrosive sub- limate, half ounce of muriate of ammonia to two pints water. When taken in poisonous doses, recourse should be had immedi- ately to albuminous liquids; eggs, if at hand, should be administered freely or a thin paste of wheat flour or milk, care being taken to evacuate the bowels and to carry off completely the precipitated material, which, though comparatively insoluble, is by no means inert. Hydrargyri Chloridum Mite, U. S. {Calomel) To prepare this, the bipersulphate of mercury first formed, as ex- plained under the bichloride, is afterwards, by being rubbed with a second equivalent of the metal, reduced to a condition capable of forming when heated, the neutral sulphate (HgO,S03); and this, by the action of the common salt, is converted into the protochloride of mercurv, sulphate of soda being produced at the same time. Calomel when sublimed, occurs in cakes, with a crystalline structure;'but as a drug, it is met with in the form of a white, or yellowish white, heavy powder, without odor or taste; sublimes with heat- treated with potash, it is blackened, from the precipita- tion of the protoxide, which, when heated, runs into metallic globules When boiled or washed in water, this fluid should after- wards give no precipitate with nitrate of silver, lime-water, or sal- phuretted hydrogen. By the action of nitric and hydrochloric 404 HYDRARGYRUM, MERCURY. acids, it is converted slowly into the bichloride. Calomel should not be prescribed at the same time with muriate of ammonia, or with nitro-muriatic acid, a remedy which like it seems specially indicated in torpor of the liver, as symptoms of violent gastric irritation have been unexpectedly produced from this cause. The peculiarities of calomel as a mercurial agent, are, that it pro- duces little local irritant action; it acts as a purgative by increas- ing the secretion of bile and other intestinal fluids; hence, is much refied on in affections of the liver, and obstructions to the portal circulation. It is much combined with other remedies, being greatly modified in its effects by judicious combination with seda- tives, cathartics, astringents, &c. Dose, as a purgative, 5 grs. to 9j; to produce ptyalism, \ grain to 1 grain, frequently repeated. It has become customary to administer exceedingly minute quantities of this preparation, so low as the ^ of a grain repeated every hour or two, the constitu- tional effects being perceptible after a grain has been given in this way. I am informed that its power to salivate is greatly increased by long trituration with sugar of milk. Hydrargyri Sulphas Flavus, U. S. {Turpeth Mineral.) The bipersulphate of mercury, formed by the action of boiling sulphuric acid on the metal, and mentioned in the two preceding formulae, is readily decomposed by reducing it to powder and sub- mitting it to the action of warm water, which changes its composi- tion and properties, producing a yellow-colored insoluble subsalt, 3Hg02+2S03. This is used almost exclusively as an errhine, variously diluted with snuff,powdered liquorice root, lycopodium, &c. Hydrargyri lodidum Bubrum, U. S. {Biniodide or Bed Iodide of Mercury) The two iodides of mercury resemble the two chlorides in their relative medicinal activity. This is, like corrosive sublimate, a powerful poison, as it is one of the preparations easily made from ingredients always at hand. The following is the officinal process in detail:— Take of Corrosive chloride of mercury . . . half an ounce. Iodide of potassium.....five drachms. Distilled water.....a pint. Dissolve the chloride of mercury in twelve fluidounces of water by trituration in a mortar, adding small quantities of this solvent at a time, and pouring it into a precipitating jar, Fig. 207, till the salt is completely taken up; then dissolve the iodide of potassium in four fluidounces of water by shaking them together in a vial. Now pour the solution of iodide into the solution of chloride contained in the precipitating jar; this will produce immediately a brilliant scarlet-colored precipitate of biniodide of mercury, leaving in solu- IODIDE OF MERCURY. 405 tion the very soluble chloride of potassium. Now fold a plain filter, Fig. 209 ; having poured off the supernatant liquid from the Fig. 207. Fig. 208. Fig. 209. Precipitating jar. 4 oz. fluted vial. Plain filter. precipitated biniodide, throw the latter on the filter in a funnel and wash it by adding repeatedly fresh portions of pure water. Wrap the filter up in soft paper, and lay it away with a weight on it in a warm place till dry. Biniodide of mercury is a beautiful scarlet-colored powder. In- soluble in water, but soluble in alcohol, and in solutions of iodide of potassium and chloride of sodium. It is wholly sublimed by heat, condensing in scales which are at first yellow but afterwards red. It is conveniently given in pill, but, perhaps, more frequently in solution of iodide of potassium with or without the addition of vegetable alterative preparations. Dose, y'g to J gr. (See Extem- poraneous Formulae) Hydrargyri lodidum, U. S. {Protiodide, or Green Iodide of Mercury) Conveniently made by the apothecary or physician as follows:— Take of Mercury . . . .an ounce. Iodine.....five drachms. Alcohol .... sufficient. Rub the mercury and iodine together, adding sufficient alcohol to form a soft paste, and continue the trituration till the globules disappear. Then dry the iodide in the dark with a gentle heat, and keep it in a well-stopped bottle, covered with dark paper to pro- tect it from the light. The mercury is conveniently weighed by balancing a small paper pill-box on the scales, and giving to one side of it a little crimp, as 6hown in Fig. 210; so that a small stream of the metal may be poured out conveniently. The accurate Fis- 21°- adjustment of the quantity is troublesome. The iodine _____ also requires care in weighing, owing to its corrosive fcCL___> action on the metals. The most convenient method \ is to balance a pair of watch-glasses by filing away V,______; the heavier of the two, or by pasting on to the lighter a small piece of tin foil, and then to lay them away for weighing corrosive substances'. In the absence of this, a piece of 406 HYDRARGYRUM, MERCURY. thick and well glazed writing paper may be put on to each plate and balanced. If the scales are kept in a case, as shown in the first chapter, they should be taken out whenever iodine is to be weighed on them, as the vapor becoming diffused through the air inside the case will corrode the metal. Iodide of mercury is a greenish-yellow powder, insoluble in water, alcohol, or solution of chloride of sodium, but soluble in ether. Heated quickly, it sublimes in red crystals, which afterwards be- come yellow by age; it is converted into sesquiodide, which has a yellow color, and is believed to be more active. It is used as an alterative, usually in pill. Dose, £ gr. to 1 gr.; it is. incompatible with iodide of potassium, which converts it into biniodide with sepa- ration of mercury. Hydrargyri Sulphuretum Bubrum, U. S. {Bed Sulphuret of Mercury. Artificial Cinnabar.) When melted sulphur is brought in contact with mercury, direct union ensues; and if the compound is afterwards sublimed, it con- sists of dark scarlet, shining, crystalline masses, forming, when pow- dered, a beautiful scarlet color known by the name of vermilion; insoluble in water or alcohol. Volatilizes entirely when heated alone, but with potash it is reduced to metallic globules. When the fumes are brought into contact with the surface of the body, the drug acts as a topical alteration, and becomes absorbed, affecting the system the same as other mercurials. It is used as a fumigation in some syphilitic skin diseases; 3ss, thrown on a hot iron and placed beneath the patient, wrapped in a blanket, will affect the object. The vapor should not be allowed to enter the lungs. Hydrargyri Sulphuretum Nigrum, U. S. {Ethiops Mineral.) Made by rubbing mercury and sulphur together till the globules disappear and a powder is formed. Ethiops is an insoluble black powder which is rarely used for any purpose. It may be safely given in doses of from gr. v to 3jj though marked by no very active properties. Hydrargyri Oxidum Bubrum, U. S. {Peroxide of Mercury. Bed Precipitate) Prepared by dissolving, with heat, mercury, Bbiij, in a mixture of nitric acid, f Ixviij, and water, Oij ; evaporating the liquor, and triturating what remains to a powder. This is put into a very shallow vessel, and heated till red fumes cease to rise. Bed oxide is in orange-red, shining, crystalline scales ; when strongly heated, it yields oxygen and metallic mercury, without the production of red fumes. It is insoluble in water, but soluble in nitric and hydro- chloric acids. It is used only externally, as a stimulant and escha- rotic ; it is much applied as an ointment to the eye ; as an escha- PRECIPITATE OF MERCURY. 407 rotic, in powder, alone, or mixed with sugar, to specks in the cornea, over chancres, and fungous ulcers. It requires long trituration to deprive it of its crystalline struc- ture, the presence of which, of course, interferes with its successful application to delicate surfaces. Hydrargyri Oxidum Nigrum, U. S. {Black Oxide of Mercury) Made by triturating calomel with a solution of caustic potassa. The protoxide of mercury precipitates, while chloride of potassium remains in solution, and is separated by washing. Black oxide of mercury is in powder, which becomes olive- colored by the action of light. It is wholly dissipated by heat, metallic globules being sublimed. It is insoluble in water, but is wholly dissolved by acetic acid. As a medicine, it is like calomel in its action, and is occasionally substituted for it, but is said to be liable, from occasionally contain- ing deutoxide, to operate harshly. 3ij, placed on a hot iron, answers the purposes of a mercurial vapor bath. Triturated with lard, it substitutes mercurial ointment. Its dose, as an alterative, is £ to | grain daily ; as a sialagogue, gr. j to iij, three times a day, in pill. Hydrargyri Cyanuretum, U. S. {Bicyanide of Mercury) By boiling ferrocyanuret of iron with red oxide of mercury, till the mixture becomes of a yellowish color, filtering, and crystalliz- ing, this may be made with great facility by following, literally, the officinal directions. It is in freely soluble, permanent, transpa- rent crystals, which evolve hydrocyanic acid, on the addition of hydrochloric acid. By heat it is decomposed, giving off cyanogen, and leaving a black residuum containing metallic mercury. Bicyanide of mercury is, like the bichloride, a powerful poison, differing from that remedy in producing no epigastric pain in its operation. Some practitioners prefer it to bichloride in the same doses, and for the same purposes. Hydrargyrum Ammoniatum, U. S. ( White Precipitate of Mercury) When ammonia is added to a solution of corrosive sublimate, a peculiar compound, and not the oxide of mercury, is precipitated. This is a white, amorphous powder, in irregular masses, frequently bearing the impression of the fabric on which it is drained and dried. It sublimes when heated ; is insoluble in water ; dissolves in hydrochloric acid without effervescence; and, when heated with potash, gives off ammonia, and becomes yellow from the formation of the binoxide of mercury. Generally considered as a compound of amidogen or amide (NH2) with chloride of mercury. This salt is never used internally; it is applied externally, to chronic skin affections in the form of ointment. 408 HYDRARGYRUM, MERCURY. Hydrargyrum cum Creta, U. S. {Mercury with Chalk) Made by triturating three parts of mercury with five parts of prepared chalk, till it loses its fluidity and metallic lustre, and assumes the form of a dark-gray powder. This process is one of great labor; and other modes of prepara- tion have been employed. Those which proceed upon the principle of oxidizing the mercury are objectionable, as rendering this very mild powder drastic and violent in its action. It is much less used than blue mass (which it resembles in its action). The proportion of mercury is, partly from its defective preparation, larger than in blue mass, but it is said to be equally mild when well made. A good substitute is formed by mixing powdered blue mass with prepared chalk, extemporaneously. Its chief use is in treating the complaints of children, the chalk neutralizing acid in the stomach, while the mercury increases the biliary secretion. Dose for a child, from \ to gr. iij. For other mercurial preparations, see Pills and Ointments. The following convenient test for the mercurials is very delicate, and well adapted to pill masses, &c.:— On to a copper coin, brightened with a little NOi? a small portion of the suspected substance is placed and moistened with a drop or two of water into a pasty consistence; a small fragment of KI is added to it, and on washing it a mercurial stain will remain. Nu- merous so-called " vegetable" and other " quack" pills will be found to show the presence of calomel in this way. The reaction in the case of blue mass is less rapid, though equally certain. PART V. EXTEMPORANEOUS PHARMACY. CHAPTER I. ON PRESCRIPTIONS. In assigning a place in this work to prescriptions, and to the art of prescribing medicines, it is with a full appreciation of its inti- mate connection with therapeutics, a branch of knowledge with which the pharmaceutist can lay claim to but little practical ac- quaintance; and yet it must be apparent, that this subject has bearings which are peculiarly adapted to arrest the attention and claim the investigation of one whose daily avocations place him directly between the physician and the patient, and give him most favorable opportunities for judging of the pharmaceutical eligibility of combinations, and not unfrequently of their effects. The art of prescribing medicines has so intimate a connection with that of preparing and dispensing them, that a treatise on the latter subject, not embracing the former, would be wanting in its most interesting feature to the student of medicine and the phy- sician, and in a work like the present, designed in part for these classes, it seems appropriate to approach the art of dispensing through a brief general treatise on that of prescribing. If any evidence were needed of the necessity of this kind of instruction, it would be furnished in the acknowledged inaccuracy of extemporaneous prescriptions as generally issued, especially by inexperienced practitioners. It is a common remark of recent graduates of medicine, that one of their greatest difficulties is in writing prescriptions; lacking the means of systematic instruction in this most important practical duty, they are exceedingly apt to fall into confused and unscientific methods of prescribing, from which no amount of experience entirely rids them. To those who have opportunities of judging, it wiU be scarcely necessary to add illustrations of this, but for my own information, and that of my readers, I have made the following table, founded upon an examination of a large number of prescriptions com- pounded by myself and several other apothecaries, in different 410 ON PRESCRIPTIONS. parts of Philadelphia. They were taken indiscriminately from the files of different years, and different seasons of the year. Although the number and extent of the prescriptions examined, and of the points noted, are not sufficient to justify any very important con- clusions, the tables may serve as a nucleus for future investigations and may illustrate some points connected with the subject of the present chapter. Analytical Table of Prescriptions. Showing the percentage of Errors in Nomenclature, the Proportion of each of the Prevailing Forms of Pre- paration, the Extent to which some of the leading Drugs are pre- scribed, S?c. First Second Third Fourth Fifth Sixth Prescriptions. 100. 100. 100. 100. 100. 100. Average. Correct in nomenclature 42 59 39 75 70 67 Incorrect in nomenclature 58 41 61 25 30 43 With directions for use 43 65 59 65 55 57 Without directions for use 57 35 41 35 45 43 Single permanent preparations 26 36 19 22 25 26 Compound and strictly extempo- raneous preparations 74 64 81 78 75 74 In the form of pills 22 17 28 16 21 21 21 " powders 21 18 17 10 20 19 17 Various liquid forms 41 46 42 50 50 47 46 Directed for infusion 4 5 1 4 4 1 3 For external use 9 21 14 20 6 15 14 Suppositories 1 1 Containing pil. hydr. or hydr. c. creta 13 9 5 5 15 13 10 " calomel 11 11 15 8 16 14 13 " op. morph. or hyosc. 26 27 16 3 30 39 24 " iodine or iod. potas. 6 2 12 1 4 10 6 " cinchona or its alka- loids 7 11 11 7 12 7 9 63 60 59 24 77 73 . 62 Note.—The first, second, and third hundred were all compounded at one shop, the remainder at different establishments. Very slight errors in nomenclature were not counted among those marked incorrect in nomenclature, and as the observation was made by different parties, an entirely uniform standard was not adopted. Among the various liquid forms, in some of the columns, are a few which are also included under the head, for external use. From an analysis of 140 prescriptions in a western city, the following items are extracted: Correct in nomenclature, 81; incorrect do. 59. In pills 15, powders 29, liquid forms 72. For external use 18. The art of prescribing properly is the practical application of the knowledge of therapeutics, chemistry, and pharmacy, to the cure of disease. No department of his duties puts the skill of the phy- sician to a closer test; none calls for the exercise, to a greater ex- tent, of that invaluable quality, whether intuitive or acquired, ON PRESCRIPTIONS. 411 called tact; and yet few departments of medical knowledge are to be acquired with less facility, or are less insisted upon as necessary branches of a medical education. Although the art of prescribing can only be acquired practically, the general principles pertaining to it are capable of classification, and have been fully discussed. The celebrated Pharmacologia of Dr. Paris, of London, published originally in 1812, and republished in this country in 1844, con- tains the fullest dissertation in our language upon "the science and art of prescribing." The reader is referred to that elaborate work for a full discussion of the subject. Many of the views taught at that time are, however, abandoned, and the subject is capable of being much simplified in accordance with the more modern improve- ments in pharmacy. The large number of efficient and permanent Galenical preparations make prescribing comparatively simple to the practitioner who has kept pace with the advance of the times, while the publication of Formularies in which all the preparations of each drug, whether permanent or extemporaneous, are detailed, has to a certain extent substituted an original and extemporaneous system of selection and combination of remedies. Medicinal preparations which are kept on hand by the apothe- cary, to be dispensed alone or used in compounding prescriptions, are called permanent, while those compounded by direction of the practitioner to meet the indications as they arise, in the course of disease, are called extemporaneous. This distinction, however, is far from being absolute or even well marked. Some of those called permanent are known to dete- riorate in a greater or less degree by age, while many classed as extemporaneous will keep an indefinite length of time. For most of the permanent class we have formulae or prescriptions, either published in Pharmacopoeias, Dispensatories, or Medical Formularies, while the extemporaneous are the product of the skill and inge- nuity of the prescriber at the bedside of his patient. The publica- tion of well contrived formulae, by which the crude drugs are brought into suitable conditions for use, as the infusions, tinctures, syrups, extracts, &c, and by which these and the drugs themselves are combined into still more available preparations, greatly facili- tates the practice of medicine, particularly in those districts where, from the absence of apothecaries, it is impossible to reach perfection in extemporaneous pharmacy. Objections lie against the general use of this last class of preparations to the exclusion of those which are dictated by the emergencies of the case, from the impractica- bility of adapting any set of formulae to every shade of disease and of idiosyncrasy, and from the impossibility of the practitioner storing securely in his memory their ingredients, proportions, &o.; so that the thorough student has no resource but to acquire a knowledge of the principles, to regulate the selection and combina- tion of remedies, and learn the art of prescribing experimentally. A limited number of formulae, framed with a view of illustrating these 412 ON PRESCRIPTIONS. principles and modes of combination, will, with this object in view, be found highly useful, if not indispensable to the student; but these must be regarded as stepping-stones to a knowledge of the art of prescribing rather than as embodying that knowledge. The vast extent and variety of adaptation of the materia medica pre- clude the possibility of compressing into any series of formulas, a complete view of all the shades of combination and modification which are attainable on enlightened therapeutical and pharmaceu- tical principles. In the preparations introduced to view thus far, a prominent dis- tinction has been drawn between those which are officinal in the U. S. Pharmacopoeia, and those which are not, introducing the former alone into the syllabi intended for the use of the student in committing to memory their names, proportions, properties, and doses. In the part of the work which follows, this distinction is regarded as less important, and most of the formulae are introduced less with a view to impress them upon the memory, than to illus- trate the pharmaceutical principles on which they are based. The very obvious division of preparations into simple and com- pound needs no other mention than to explain that the addition of a vehicle or menstruum, not added with a view to its medical effect, does not render a preparation compound, in the sense in which that term is ordinarily applied. Simple rhubarb pills contain rhubarb and soap; while compound rhubarb pills contain rhubarb, aloes, myrrh, and oil of peppermint; and with a view to furnish distinc- tions between preparations which have very similar composition, the term compound is sometimes useful. Opium pills contain 1 grain of opium and \ grain of. soap; while compound soap pills contain the same ingredients in different proportions. The Language used in Prescriptions. In Great Britain and the North of Europe, prescriptions are writ- ten in Latin; in France, in the vernacular language. We mostly follow the British custom, although some of our practitioners occa- sionally depart from the usual style, and follow the Pharmacopoeia by inditing their prescriptions in plain English. The relative adaptation of Latin and English for the purpose has long been discussed, and is still a mooted point among physicians and phar- maceutists. It is scarcely worth while to dwell upon the arguments advanced on either side, and which seem naturally to suggest them- selves. The chief desideratum is to secure accuracy without an unnecessary and cumbersome phraseology, and for this purpose the officinal names of all medicines are to be preferred to either of their common and changing synonyms. An extended view of the sub- ject cannot fail to convince one of this. Many medicines are called by very different names in different parts of the country, and the same name is liable to be applied to either of several different drugs. If snakeroot were ordered, the pharmaceutist might be at a loss THE LANGUAGE USED IN PRESCRIPTIONS. 413 whether serpentaria, cimicifuga, asarum, senega, eryngium, or some of the numerous other roots occasionally, or perhaps locally, de- nominated snakeroots, were desired; while, if the specific English name, as Virginia, Canada, black, or button snakeroots, was applied, the merit of conciseness would be sacrificed. If chamomile were ordered, it would be necessary to specify whether Roman, German, or American; while in Latin, anthemis, matricaria, or anthemis cotula would be both short and distinctive. In the foregoing illustrations, however, we have the least forcible instances. There can be no comparison between the names sugar of lead and plumbi acetas, white vitriol and zinci sulphas, liver of sulphur and potassii sulphuretum, salt of tartar and potassii car- bonas. The name which expresses the chemical composition of a substance is generally, of all that can be devised, the best; and hence, even in common language, most familiar chemical substances are beginning to be called by their chemical names. Although there is little difference between the English and the Latin chemical names, the latter has the advantage for use in prescription: it is easier of abbreviation, or its abbreviations are more familiar; while the omission of the connecting preposition of, between the two parts of the name, reduces it to a single compound word, rendering it shorter and more quickly written. It is often said, and not without truth, that the Latin used in prescription is, for the most part, quite incorrect, and especially when the terminations are written out, or attempted; but gram- matical errors are certainly far less important than either chemical, pharmaceutical, or therapeutical; and when we consider how few physicians, even among those classically educated, have advantages of keeping up, throughout the busy scenes of their professional career, the knowledge of Latin acquired in their schoolboy days, we can scarcely wonder that many errors of this description occur. Moreover, the language used in prescription, viewed with reference to its abbreviations, signs, and Latinized names of various origin, must be regarded as distinct from the Latin taught in schools, and requires to be studied in connection with scientific nomenclature generally, and, in fact, constitutes a part of the study of materia medica and pharmacy. Every officinal drug and preparation has its particular name given to it authoritatively in the Pharmacopoeia, and those not there mentioned may be distinguished by their appro- priate botanical or chemical designations. The groundwork of a correct writing of prescriptions is a knowledge of these names; and it matter? little whether the physician write his prescriptions in Latin or English, if he designates each individual article by its officinal name. The propriety of using the officinal Latinized names in a plain English formula may admit of a doubt, but, if sanctioned by cus- tom and authority, might be adopted, and thus the principal ob- jection to the plain English prescription would be removed. 414 ON PRESCRIPTIONS. The officinal name, though framed upon a Latin model, might be separated from the idea of its origin, and used in the prescription as a distinctive pharmaceutical term, following the genius of the language in which it is used: in a Latin prescription, its termina- tions might be varied as the construction of that language requires; and in an English prescription, might follow the rules for the con- struction of a correct English sentence. We have very many offi- cinal names that are as commonly incorporated into our language as the English synonyms attached to them, and the objections to considering all the names in the American Pharmacopoeia as Ame- rican names are, it appears to me, not such as to overrule a custom which, on so many accounts, is to be desired. The officinal names are spoken of in detail in the chapter on the Pharmacopoeia, and the importance of a study of them has been elsewhere referred to; and I repeat, if these were properly mas- tered by the student, and invariably used to designate the drugs and preparations to which they belong, the garb in which the pre- scription is clothed would be comparatively of little importance. There are some cases in which the use of an explanatory synonym in parentheses seems quite necessary, whether the name be Latinized or not; and in such cases it should never be omitted for the sake of elegance or attempted correctness of diction. In prescribing the finer kinds of magnesia, there is no other resource than to say in parentheses, (Henry's), (Husband's), or (Ellis's), as the case may be. Liquor aloet. comp. would be quite indefinite without (Mettauer) appended, and tinct. guaiaci comp. would be misunderstood unless accompanied by the added (Dewees) to explain it. The remarks before made apply to the names of substances de- signated in prescriptions; the other parts of the prescription, which will be referred to more particularly in the sequel, consist chiefly of abbreviations and signs which custom has long sanctioned, and which are considered to pertain particularly to the Latin prescrip- tion, though, as before stated, occasionally, and without any breach of propriety, used in connection with the English. In the prescriptions appended to the several chapters which fol- low, numerous examples are given of both Latin and English pre- scriptions, and they will be appropriately preceded by the following, taken from Dr. Pereira's Selecta e Prescriptis.1 Grammatical Explanation of Prescriptions. (I) R.—Ferri Carbonatis, drachmam cum semisse (ojss). (2.) Rhei pulveris, grana quindecim (gr. xv). (3.) Olei Anthemidis, guttas quinque (gtt. v). (4.) Conserve Rosae, quantum sufficiat ut fiat massula in pilulas viginti dividenda, quarum sumat 3eger tres octavis horis. (1.) Recipe, verb active, imp. mood, 2d pers. sing, agreeing with Ta, under- stood; from Eecipio, ere, cepi, ceptum, 3d conj. act. Governs an accusa- tive. 1 Republished in this country as the Physician's Prescription Book. SYMBOLS OR SIGNS USED IN PRESCRIPTIONS. 415 Drachmam, noun subst. ace. sing, from Drachma, ce, f. 1st decl. Governed by Recipe. Cum, preposition. Governing an ablative case. Semisse, subst. abl. case, from Semissis, is, f. 3d decl. Governed by cum. Carbonatis, subst. gen. sing, from Carbonas, atis, f. 3d decl. Governed by Drachmam. Ferri, subst. gen. sing, from Ferrum, i, n. 2d decl. Governed by Carbonatis. (2.) Recipe, understood. Grana, subst. ace. pi. from Granum, i, n. 2d decl. Governed by Recipe, understood. Quindecim, adj. indeclin. Pulveris, subst. gen. sing, from Pulvis, eris, m. 3d decl. Governed by Grana. Rhei, subst. gen. sing, from Rheum, i, n. 2d decl. Governed by Pulveris. (3.) Recipe, understood. Guttas, subst. ace. pi. from Gutta, ce, f. 1st decl. Governed by Recipe, un- derstood. Quinque, adj. indeclin. Olei, subst. gen. sing, from Oleum, ei, n. 2d decl. Governed by Guttas. Anthemidis, subst. gen. sing, from Anthemis, idis, f. 3d decl. Governed by Olei. (4.) Recipe, understood. Quantum, adverb. Governing the genitive case. Sufficiat, verb impers. potent, mood, pres. tense, from Sufficio, ere, feci, fectum, neut. and act. 3d conj. Conserve, subst. gen. sing, from Conserva, ce, f. 1st decl. Governed by Quantum. RoSjE, subst. gen. sing, from Rosa, ce, f. 1st decl. Governed by Conserva;. Ut, conjunct. Governing a subjunct. mood. Massula, subst. nom. case, a, ce, f. 1st decl. Fiat, verb, subj. mood, pres. tense, 3d person singular, from Fio, fis, /actus sum vel fui, fieri, neut. Governed by Ut, and agreeing with, its nomi- native case Massula. ■,..-, Dividenda, particip. nom. case, fem. gend. from Dividendus, a, urn (a dividor, i, sus, pass. 3d conj-). Agreeing with Massula. In, preposition. Governing an accusative case. Pilulas, subst. ace. pi. from Filula, ce, f. 1st decl. Governed by In. Viginti, adj. indecl. Quarum, relative pronoun, gen. pi. fem. from Qui, qua;, quod. Agreeing with its antecedent Pilulas in gender and number. Governed in the gen. case by.Tres. . . .L, , Mgvr, adj. mas. gend. nom. JEger, agra, oegrum. Agreeing with homo, un- derstood. . , Sumat, verb, 3d pers. sing. imp. mood, from Sumo, ere, psi, ptum, act. 6d coni Agreeing with homo, understood ; governing an ace. case. Tres, ad. ace. pi. fem. from Tres, tres, tria. Agreeing with Pilulas, under- stood, and which is governed by Sumat. . .„ . e L. Horis, subst. abl. plural, from Eora, ce, f. 1st decl.; signifying part of time, and therefore put in the abl. case. > . , 7 . Octavis, adj. abl. plur. fem. from Octavus, a, urn. Agreeing with horis. Symbols or Signs used in Prescriptions. \. Minim, ^ part of a fluidrachm. gtt. Gutta, a drop; guttse, drops. 9j. Scrupulus vel scrupulum, a scruple=20 grains. 3j. drachma, a drachm=60 grains. foj. fluidrachma, a fluid or measured drachm. 416 ON PRESCRIPTIONS. Ij. Uncia, an officinal ounce=480 grains. f Ij. Fluiduncia, a fluid or measured ounce. Ebj. Libra, a pound, understood in prescriptions to apply to an officinal pound of 5,760 grains. Oj. Octarius, a pint. gr. Granum, a grain; plural, grana, grains. ss. Semis, half, affixed to signs as above. The Latin numerals are employed in prescription—i, ij, iij, iv, v, vi, vij, viij, ix, x, xi, xij, xv, xx, XL, L, C, &c.; and in the directions, when written in Latin, a variety of antiquated terms, explained in Dr. Pereira's little work before mentioned, but requiring too much space for insertion here. Before leaving the subject of the signs employed in prescription, it seems proper to advert to the errors which frequently occur from their careless use, and which have led some practitioners to advocate their entire abandonment. They are, however, too well established in the actual practice of this country and England, and too convenient to be readily supplanted. The angle and curve 3 may be made so carelessly as to resemble the 9 with a flourish at top, and Ij may look like a 3j, or may be so completely perverted from its recognized shape as to leave the reader in doubt whether a d or 3 is intended. Notwithstanding the apparent absurdity of this, there are not a few prescriptions on our files in which the sign intended has been reached only by guessing, or by reasoning upon the known dose of the drug, rather than upon the shape of the sign. A flourishing style of chirography is nowhere less in place than on a physician's prescription. The numerals are equally liable to error if carelessly made, the difference between j and v, and be- tween iv and iij, and between x and v, is often quite obscured by a neglect of the plain and necessary precautions of accuracy and care. It is not easy to illustrate in print what an examination of the chirography of many prescriptions would make apparent, that the reading of a prescription frequently requires more skill and judgment than compounding it. Abbreviations. Mistakes not unfrequently arise from unskilful abbreviations, for, while there can be no objection to shortening many of the long names given to medicines, there is certainly great danger from the inordinate and unskilful exercise of this privilege; the word cal. is an occasional and very poor abbreviation of hydrargyri chloridi mite. Through a careless termination of familiar words, serious accidents are liable to occur. Several years have elapsed since I received a prescription for hydrate potassa 3j, to be dissolved in water fliij (dose, a teaspoonful), and it was only through a care which has become habitual that I saved a delicate lady in that case from taking large doses of hydrate of (caustic) potassa instead of hydriodate of potassa. There were no directions for use appended, ON THE WRITING OF PRESCRIPTIONS. 417 so that I had not the advantage they give in cases of doubt. The abbreviations allowable in prescriptions might fill some pages if tabulated, but it appears to me useless to go into detail on the sub- ject, as no practical advantage would result except to the student who should make them his especial study, while the habit once acquired of writing every word so fully as that it could be mistaken for no other, would quite obviate the evils complained of. CHAPTER II. ON THE WRITING OF PRESCRIPTIONS. The first care to observe in writing a prescription, is to have suitable paper and pencil, or preferably, pen and ink. The habit of some of using the margin of a newspaper, the fly-leaf of a school- book, or any piece of flimsy material at hand, for inditing a pre- scription, upon which may depend the life of the patient, cannot be too strongly condemned. It indicates a want of care in the phy- sician, which, if carried into other duties, would quite unfit him for the responsibilities of his profession. Many physicians adopt the plan of cutting, from time to time, suitable fragments of good paper, which are carried in a pocket-book or wallet, and are always at hand on emergencies. "With a view to economy, the fly-leaves of letters, and notices, which would be otherwise wasted, may be pressed out, and appropriated to this object. In Philadelphia, and probably elsewhere, pharmaceutists are in the habit of printing their cards at the head of suitable prescription sheets, and distri- buting them among physicians with a view to attracting business to their shops; a practice more honored in the breach than in the ob- servance. Some physicians print prescription papers, with their name and address attached, which, however unprofessional some may consider it, is not without one advantage—it enables the apothecary always to trace the prescription readily to its source in case of difficulty. Having the proper prescription paper, the next step is to write at the top the name of the patient; this precaution, which is very often neglected, is important for several reasons: 1st. It enables the nurse or attendant to distinguish, by a certain and ready means, between prescriptions designed for different patients; and the name being transferred to the label, there is no excuse for a similar mistake in " administering." 2d. It enables the apothecary, in every case, to avoid the mistake so often made in the hurry of 27 ' 418 ON THE WRITING OF PRESCRIPTIONS. business, of dispensing a package of medicine to one of several cus- tomers in waiting which should have been given to another. 3d. It facilitates the recognition of the prescription upon the apothecary's file when its renewal is called for; and, finally, it evinces a care which is commendable on so important an occasion as prescribing for the sick. The practice of heading a prescription with the generic name of the class of medicines to which it belongs, should be observed when there are two or more in use; as the Gargle, the Liniment, or the Fever Mixture. Frequently, however, this is superseded by giving its designation in the subscription, or by proper directions for its use. As a general rule, I would say that all topical remedies should be distinctly marked For external use. Some mistakes have originated from neglect of this precaution which would be most ludicrous if the subject was not often too serious for merriment. The administration of an ammoniated liniment, in tablespoonful doses, while a cinchona bark mixture is applied over the seat of rheumatic pain, is a blunder which has occurred, and may again. It is well, in many cases, to copy on the label the entire pre- scription. A physician in large practice, unless favored with a very retentive memory, may forget the details of his prescription of the previous day. An aged practitioner of our acquaintance, while in practice for the last few years of his life, made this an invariable rule, with the view of assisting him in the accurate and judicious dispensation of advice from day to day to his patients. The same precaution is important also in travelling. It is often prudent for the physician to direct the apothecary to mark the medicine prescribed Poison, or, as is sometimes done, " Use with care? giving, at the same time, the particular instructions for its use. . The prescription may be divided, for the purpose of study, into the following parts, each of which will be separately considered:— 1. The superscription. 2. The inscription. 3. The subscription. 4. The signature. The Superscription is of very little importance; divested oi its superstitious origin, it consists of a very short abbreviation of the Latin verb Becipe, imperative mood of Becipio, I take, viz: the letter R, which is often printed near the top of the prescription sheets above mentioned. In French, the letter P is used for Prenez. In English formulas, the R may be substituted by Take of. The Inscription is the indication, seriatim, of the names and quantities of the remedies prescribed. The order in which tliese are written is not a matter of much real importance, as a compe- tent pharmaceutist will, in mixing them, depart from the sequence observed in the prescription, if thought best; while the physician, \ APPORTIONING QUANTITIES. 419 particularly if not experienced in writing prescriptions, will find it more convenient to follow the order of their therapeutical im- portance rather than the rotation in which they should be added. In the sequel I shall refer to the therapeutical classification of ingredients, which, in a well contrived prescription, would be writ- ten in the following order:— 1. The basis. 2. The adjuvant. 3. The corrective. 4. The excipient. 5. The diluent. This is not only the most elegant, but the most natural rotation to be observed. One of the greatest difficulties to the beginner, in connection with this subject, is in determining, as the prescription proceeds, the appropriate quantity of each ingredient, so as to have each in due proportion, and with its right dose; this becomes easy by the employment of the following Bule for Apportioning Quantities.—"Write down the names of the several ingredients first, without regard to quantity; then having determined upon the quantity of the whole preparation, and the dose to be prescribed, the whole number of doses it will contain will be readily cal- culated. As doses are, at best, only approximate, we may depart from the precise figures obtained by dividing the whole number of drachms, grains, &c, in the preparation, by the number of doses it will con- tain, so as to get even numbers or fractions of a drachm and ounce. In directing pills, or powders, we have the means of attaining considerable accuracy, and may readily direct a mixture, divided into ten, twenty, or thirty parts, from the very convenient relations of these numbers to the drachm and scruple weights; but it will be found more convenient in dispensing and administering the pre- parations, to have six, or twelve, or twenty-four parts ordered, as these numbers have relation to the number of grooves in the pill machine, and to the number of hours in a day. The Table below will assist the beginner in prescribing liquids, and will serve for reference until he becomes accustomed, practi- cally, to this rather difficult part of his duties. Having fixed upon the bulk of his mixture or solution, he will remember that there are about 8 wineglassfuls (each containing fjij) 30 tablespoonfuls ( " " f.sfss) 15 tablespoonfuls ( " " f.?ss) 12 tablespoonfuls ( " " f3ss) 20 dessertspoonfuls ( " " *3»JJ 15 dessertspoonfuls ( " f3'J) 30 teaspoonful s ( " " f 3J) 15 teaspoonfuls ( " " f3J) 8 teaspoonfuls ( " " *3J) n a pint (Oj, f^xvj). n a pint (Oj, fgxvj). n half a pint (f'^viij). n 6 fluidounces (f.^vj) u 6 fluidounces (f 5 vj J n 4 fluidounces (f.^iv) n 4 fluidounces (f^iv) n 2 fluidounces (f Jij) a 1 fluidounce (f^j) 420 ON THE WRITING OF PRESCRIPTIONS. We have an illustration of this method of division in the offi- cinal liquor morphise sulphatis, in which one grain of the salt is dissolved in one fluidounce of water; as there are 8 teaspoonfuls in an ounce, one teaspoonful represents ^ grain, which is about the usual dose. In the case of liquids to be given by drops, care must be taken to distinguish between aqueous, alcoholic, and oily liquids. By reference to the table, given in the chapter on Metrology; the relative size of drops pertaining to different liquids will appear; in this connection it will be only necessary to refer to that table, and to apply the same general mode of calculation to the apportion- ment of doses of these. One cause of fallacy, with the student, in prescribing by drops, arises from confounding the size of drops of one ingredient of a preparation with the size of drops of the whole preparation after it is made. Thus, if a fluidrachm of tiucture of belladonna were added to seven fluidrachms of an aqueous solution of morphia, or tartar emetic, we should calculate about 60 drops to each fluidrachm, not 120, which would be proper, were the alcoholic liquid in much the larger proportion. It will aid the student to acquire facility in the apportionment of qualities, to inquire of himself, or his companion in study, how much of each ingredient is contained in each dose of the various compounds for which prescriptions are given. The Subscription has reference to the manner of mixing and divid- ing the medicine. In Latin prescriptions, it usually consists of short abbreviations, or signs, which are familiar to pharmaceutists, though in some cases it is written out in full in Latin, and, in others, in plain English. The verb misce (imperative mood of misceo, I mix), or the letter M., designed to represent it, constitutes the most com- mon subscription. Sometimes, where especial skill or care is required in the preparation, secundum artem, or S. A. is affixed to it; when omitted, however, this is understood. The verb solve (imperative of solvo, I dissolve), is more appropriate where a simple solution is prescribed; or macera (imperative of macero), where the process of maceration is directed. "Where filtration is necessary, write there- after et cola. When a medicine is directed in very fine powder, the practitioner may make choice of lere bene (triturate well), or fiat pulvis subtilissimus (make a very fine powder). It is, perhaps, an improvement on the above to direct more specifically the sort of preparation designed; it gives the pharmaceutist a clue, which is sometimes useful to him in compounding, as well as in correcting gross error. The following terms, with their proper abbreviations and translations, may serve to guide the student in writing his subscription. They include the appropriate directions for dividing medicines into powders, pills, lozenges, &c, and will close the notice of this part of the prescription. APPORTIONING QUANTITIES. 421 Fiat pulvis, Ft. pulv. Make a powder. Fiant pulveres xij ; Ft. pulv. xij. "] Fiat pulvis et divide in chartulas xij ; Ft. pulv. et divid. in chart xij. I Make twelve Fiat pulvis in chartulas xij, dividenda: Ft. pulv. in ch. xij, div. powders. Fiant chartulse xij ; Ft. chart, xij, divid. Fiat solutio, Ft. solut. Make a solution. Fiat injectio, Ft. inject. Make an injection (for urethra). Fiat collyrium. Ft. collyr. Make an eye-wash. Fiat enema, Ft. enema. Make an injection (for rectum). Fiat suppositorium, Ft. supposit. Make a suppository. Fiant suppositoria iv ; Ft. suppos. iv. Make 4 suppositories. Fiat massa, Ft. massa. Make a mass. Fiant pilulae xij ; Ft. pil. xij. 1 Fiat massa in pilulas xij, dividenda; Ft. mas. in pil. xij, div. I Make twelve Fiat massa et divide in pilulas xij ; Ft. mas. div. in pil. xij. j P1"8- Fiat infusum, Ft. infus. Make an infusion. Fiat haustus, Ft. haust. Make a draught. Fiat gargarysma, Ft. garg. Make a gargle. Fiat mistura, Ft. mist. Make a mixture. Fiat emulsio, Ft. emuls. Make an emulsion. Fiat electuarium, Ft. elect. Make an electuary. Fiat confectio, Ft. confect. Make a confectiou. Fiat emplastrum 6x4; Ft. emp. 6x4. Make a plaster 6x4. Fiat emp. epispasticum, Ft. emp. epispast. ] ,. , ... Fiat emp. vesicatorium, Ft. emp. vesic. / e a bllster- Fiat unguentum, Ft. ung. Make an ointment. Fiat ceratum, Ft. cerat. Make a cerate. Fiat cataplasma, Ft. cataplas. Make a poultice. Fiat linimentum, Ft. linim. Make a liniment. Fiant trochisci xxiv; Ft. troch. xxiv. Make 24 lozenges. Fiat mas6a in trochiscos xl, dividenda ; Ft. mas. in troch. xl, div. The Signatura is rarely written in Latin, at least in this country. It comprises the directions as to the dose and mode of administer- ing the medicine, _and is especially addressed to the patient, or those in attendance upon him. This should be distinctly written in the vernacular. None of the reasons for the employment of a learned, or technical language, in the other portions of the pre- scription, apply to this; on the contrary, a due regard to the avoid- ance of mistakes by the apothecary, and by the patient or his attendant, forbids it. It is very common to omit this part of the prescription entirely, and to depend upon a verbal direction as to the use to be made of the medicine. Sometimes two boxes of pills are ordered for the same patient simultaneously, or at short inter- vals, without any reliable means of distinguishing them, and when they are to be renewed, the apothecary may confound them, in consequence of the patient sending the wrong box, or through a slight error in his own labelling. Of 500 prescriptions taken in- discriminately from the files of three different shops, I find 43 per cent, have no definite directions, as shown in the table on p. 410, and a considerable proportion have no signatura. The practice of writing—"To be used as directed"—is equivalent to omitting this part of the prescription, and in labelling, this is adopted by the apothecary in all cases, where the physician has omitted giving any directions. As an example of the results which may follow from this kind 422 ON THE WRITING OF PRESCRIPTIONS. of direction, the following incident has been related by a profes- sional friend. Two vials were in the chamber of a patient, each containing a fluidounce of liquid, and each about the same size • one contained sweet spirit of nitre, and the other blistering collo- dion. The nitre was to be given in teaspoonful doses occasionally, and the blistering liquid was of course to be applied externally. At twilight, the nurse, not noticing the difference in the color, and consistency of the liquids, and finding them both labelled alike, put in the patient's mouth what she should have applied to her chest, thus producing a most distressing inflammation, which de- prived the poor patient of her proper food, and doubtless contri- buted to exhaust her struggling vitality. The danger of this kind of mistake is lessened by using for any two prescriptions of very different properties, different kinds of vials; thus for a preparation to be taken internally, a fluted flint vial, and for a liniment, one of the plain German flints, or better still, in the one case a round, and in the other an oval vial. The only remaining part of the prescription to be mentioned, is the addition to the foregoing of the name or initials of the writer, and the date; of these, it may be remarked, that the name in full is on every account preferable. In a large city, where there are hundreds of physicians, it is impossible for pharmaceutists, and much less their clerks and assistants, to become familiar with the handwriting and initials of all of them, to say nothing of those in- stances in which two or more have the same initials. Now if this practice of signing prescriptions has any utility at all, it must be, that it should be understood by the apothecary, so that if he sus- pects an error, or requires any explanations, he may make the necessary inquiries to correct it, without interrogating his cus- tomer and exciting alarm. Besides, there are some dangerous sub- stances, especially such as are used for criminal purposes, that the druggist is only justified in vending by the sanction of a respon- sible name, and this name should therefore, be clearly and intelli- gibly written. The date of the prescription is almost universally written in numerals, at least in Philadelphia; this fashion is probably owing, mainly, to a large number of the most eminent practitioners of the last generation being members of the Society of Friends, and to the wide diffusion of the peculiarities of this sect in the " Quaker City," and from it, as the centre of medical instruction to other localities. When the patient is in moderate circumstances, the physician indicates that fact to the apothecary by the letter P, in one of the lower corners of the paper. If very poor, P P is written; from a conscientious apothecary, either of these marks secures a reason- able reduction in the price charged, and its omission by the phy- sician leads to suspicions that the patient is not deserving of charity. ART OF SELECTING AND COMBINING MEDICINES. 423 CHAPTER III. ON THE ART OF SELECTING AND COMBINING MEDICINES. The study of Materia Medica and Therapeutics is designed to acquaint the student with the uses and powers of remedies, and to prepare him to make a proper selection from these to meet the ever varying phases of disease. The importance of this kind of knowledge cannot be appreciated until the actual emergencies of practice arise, and the necessity be- comes apparent of an extended and a thorough knowledge of the weapons for combating disease. A full and recent treatise on Materia Medica should always be within reach of the physician, and one or more of the best medical journals should replenish his library with the most recent disco- veries and improvements; nowhere can a professional man less afford to economize than in his books. In this age of active inquiry and unceasing investigation, a very few years suffice to produce important changes, both in the theory and practice of medicine; and the physician who stands still while progress is all around him, can expect no better fate than that of the mechanic, the farmer, or the man of business, who is content with the appliances of the past age in endeavoring to compete with those possessed of the facilities of the present. While a sound conservatism, a becoming deference to those who have gone before us, and to the great medical authorities in our own time, should prevent a hasty departure from established prin- ciples or mode of treatment, there is a wide and profitable range for experiment in the vast extent and variety of the materia medica, and the combinations of which individual remedies are sus- ceptible. It cannot be denied, that many skilful physicians employ a very restricted materia medica; there are hundreds in the United States who carry about with them all the weapons they use for combat- ing the usual forms of disease, in some twenty or thirty vials, inclosed in a pair of saddle-bags; while, for unusual cases, they keep perhaps as many more on their office shelves. Though the frequent success of such cannot be questioned, we can draw no in- ferences from this fact to disparage the employment of an extended and varied assortment of remedies. To what purpose has the bounty of nature spread everywhere 424 ART OF SELECTING AND COMBINING MEDICINES. plants of such varied and unsuspected properties; and why is art from the exhaustless mine of nature ever turning up some new product, endowed with varied and perhaps health-restoring powers if the physician into whose special keeping the business of testing their virtues is given, neglects the injunction "prove all things- hold fast that which is good." In the foregoing remarks, I would not be understood as counte- nancing a departure from the usual materia medica, except where called for by the requirements of practice, and justified by sound discretion; and much less would I encourage any of those innova- tions upon well established principles, which have taken shape in the various Pathies, now so prevalent and so lamentably deficient in the indispensable elements of common sense and common honesty. In the selection of medicines, then, let the physician have before him the whole known materia medica, with a complete knowledge of which he should be equipped from the start. Let him first select an individual from its class, with a view to all its properties, as likely to effect the immediate symptoms he is combating, and the general result of the case; and second, let him select the best preparation of it with reference to efficiency, to safety, to physical properties, and to all other circumstances. When there is a single medicine, which will fully meet the indication, there is no use of mixing it with others, except so far as its preparation in eligible form requires, a subject treated of in the sequel; when there is an officinal preparation, whether simple or compound, which is adapted to the case, it is generally better to prescribe it by its officinal name, than to attempt a similar original combination; thus pilulm catharticce compositce are found to answer a common indication in dis- ease so very frequently, that they have almost superseded extempo- raneous preparations of the same, or nearly the same ingredients: this is the case, though to a less extent, of other officinal formulae. A common exception is furnished in pilulce quinice sulphatis, which are frequently prescribed extemporaneously, in proportions slightly varying from the officinal, in order to secure their being freshly prepared. Officinal preparations are best selected in emergencies, since they are ready without the delay of compounding them, while most forms of extemporaneous prescription require considerable time for their preparation. Physicians should be somewhat influenced by economical motives, in prescribing for persons of moderate means. Preparations which are kept on hand by the apothecary, are cheaper than those which are mixed extemporaneously. In almost every class of medicines, there are those which are very costly; and it is well when they can be substituted by others in prescribing for the poor. Many practitioners are in the habit of directing for such, the sulphates of cinchonia and quinidia, instead THE ART OF COMBINING MEDICINES. 425 of that of quinia; a plan much resorted to by those residing in remote situations, who have to act as their own apothecaries. On the Art of Combining Medicines. Simplicity is an object not to be overlooked in prescribing, not- withstanding the advantage obtained by combining, in a single prepa- ration, the virtues of several medicines; there is, I think, more danger of the inexperienced attempting complications, not sanctioned by sound science, than of his erring on the side of simplicity. In the remarks which follow, I shall endeavor to treat methodi- cally, and as briefly as possible, the several advantages to be attained by medicinal combinations, and the means by which they may be most readily and safely fulfilled; and in the series of Prescriptions appended, shall seek further to illustrate the subject. • In compound prescriptions, we usually recognize one ingredient selected from the materia medica as the most important in a thera- peutical point of view. This is designated as the basis. Sometimes two or three remedies may be combined to form the basis, but if they have different therapeutical effects, they are considered as ad- juvants, correctives, &c. Although this classification of ingredients is not absolute, it seems to facilitate the study of the subject, and we proceed to notice 1st. The objects to be attained by adding to the basis. a. Dilution. A great many of the remedies are too strong to be eligible for use without the addition of some menstruum, so as to increase the dose and to allow of a more ready division. In giving calomel, in very small alterative doses, it is impossible to apportion it properly without dilution with some suitable substance, such as sugar, as in Prescription No. 54. In using small doses of tartar emetic, sulphate of morphia, or other soluble salts, in the liquid form, it is usual to dilute them with water. In the case of concentrated liquid prepa- rations, as tinctures of aconite root, nux vomica, &c, a less active liquid should generally be added, so as to bring the strength of the preparation to a less dangerous point, especially when prescribed for ignorant or careless persons. The simple act of dilution may then be regarded as _ the first, though one of the least important objects in view, in adding to the basis or starting point of the prescription, and the substance so em- ployed, if simply for this end, may be called the diluent. Many prescriptions consist merely of the basis and diluent. b. To Heighten, or give Direction to the Effects of the Basis. It was formerly considered that substances of similar thera- peutical powers were mutually increased in energy by admixture. 426 art of selecting and combining medicines. This idea is now generally abandoned, except in so far as the powers of medicines may be heightened by combining them with others capable of rendering the system more susceptible to their action, or of giving them specific direction; thus, aromatic stimulants greatly heighten the effects of tonics, and will be found generally combined with them in tonic preparations. (See Tonic Tinctures and Prescriptions Nos. 6,11,16, and 20.) So rhubarb, by its astringency, modifies the effects of other cathartics, as in Warner's Cordial. We have a further illustration of this in the use of tartar emetic, to give a sedative and diaphoretic direction to saline remedies, as in Prescription No. 35 ; and of Dover's Powder, to render ext. of col- chicum more sedative, as in Prescription No. 28. Not to multiply illustrations, many of which will naturally occur to the student, it requires to be mentioned that, in some cases, this adjuvant may be best given at a different time from the basis, or rather, that the two may be most profitably separated. Thus, it is customary to purge a patient affected with intermittent before giving quinia; but few practitioners would, unless in unusual cases, com- bine the cathartic with the tonic dose. There are sometimes ingredients in a prescription which may be considered either in the light of adjuvants or of vehicles. Thus sulphuric acid in quinia solutions both adds to the effect, as is com- monly considered, and affords a means of solution. So extracts, combined with other remedies, may heighten their action, while affording a convenient vehicle for making them into a pilular mass. The adjuvant is, however, rarely introduced, practitioners generally relying upon the independent action of one agent, modified, if re- quired, by another, which is used for the next object. c. To Correct some objectionable Property in one or both of the other Active Ingredients. The instances in which this motive for adding to the basis is called into play, are so numerous that it will scarcely be necessary to illustrate, further than to refer to the numerous prescriptions which follow. The combination of opium with calomel, in dysen- tery, is one of the strongest cases in point. The mercurial is, by this means, made to act as a corrective, in conditions of the system in which, if employed singly in the same dose, might aggravate the symptoms. Certain effects of opium, as a basis, are obviated by raan^ additions. Thus compound spirit of ether is said to di- minish its nauseating effect on the stomach, &c. In administering oil of turpentine, or wormseed oil, as a vermi- fuge, some corrective is needed which will insure a purgative effect, and prevent its undue absorption. In the same way oil of turpentine and laudanum are used as correctives to castor oil, diminishing its purgative effects, and pre- venting griping. THE ART OF COMBINING MEDICINES. 427 In prescribing senna, the custom is almost universal of adding some aromatic seed to the infusion, to prevent griping. In Pre- scriptions No. 35, No. 40, No. 65, we have especial instances of the value of correctives. We may frequently make one substance answer the double pur- pose of a corrective, and diluent or vehicle. In this connection we find the medicated waters useful for liquid preparations; soap for pills; aromatics for powders; certain stimulating oils in ointments, liniments, &c. It will be observed that the corrective may be either therapeuti- cal or chemical in its operation, or both. While the effect of adding essential oils or opiates to cathartics, is purely therapeutical, that of combining soap with resins, to correct insolubility, is chemical or pharmaceutical. So, in combining mastic, or other very insoluble resin with aloes, its insolubility is increased or lengthened—an object sometimes of importance, as in Chapman's Dinner Pill. d. The Proper Incorporation of the Ingredients together. This object is one of paramount importance in the preparation of medicines. The excipient added for this purpose may be either chemical or mechanical, or both; it may be connected with the thera- peutic plan of the prescription, or may be added solely to make it more agreeable to the taste, and more uniform in consistence. This ingredient is more important to the physician, from the fact that, owing to its therapeutic application, the excipient cannot always be left to the choice'of the pharmaceutist, whose practical acquaint- ance with the subject would otherwise qualify him to select the best excipient. The numerous rules that suggest themselves in regard to the proper incorporation of ingredients together can be best brought into view in connection with the next subject to be treated of. e. On the Different Forms of Medicines. These are of two kinds: those which are adapted to internal, and those to external use. Or they may be divided into solid, liquid and semifluid forms ; as they are not very numerous, however and neither classification of them is very important, I shall treat of them in the order which experience has shown to be most convenient to the student. 428 ON POWDERS AND PILLS. CHAPTER IV. ON POWDERS AND PILLS. Pulveres. (Powders.) In the chapter on Drying and Powdering Drugs, &C, some general views are given on the utility of this form of preparation, but it yet remains to point out in a particular manner the uses of pow- ders in extemporaneous prescribing. 1. The kind of Substances best adapted to this Form of Prescription. a. Those medicines which are insoluble; as calomel, phosphate of lime, subnitrate of bismuth, subcarbonate of iron, magnesia, &c. b. Drugs possessing, in the natural condition, peculiar properties, differing from those which are artificially prepared from them; as cinchona, colomba, digitalis, &c. c. Those which, in solution, would possess more nauseous or bitter properties than in their undissolved, finely-divided condition; as sulphate of quinia, kino, catechu, &c. They are, for the most part, best suited for making into pills. d. Those which, combined in a liquid form, would be chemically incompatible. e. The extracts and blue mass, when dry enough to be reduced to powder. 2. The kind of Substances unsuited to this Form. a. Deliquescent substances; as carb. potassa, unless with special precautions. b. Substances containing a large amount of water of crystalliza- tion (unless dried); as carbonate of soda. c. Substances, the active principles of which are very volatile; as valerian and assafetida. d. Substances physically unsuited to mechanical division; as cam- phor and guaiacum, unless with certain precautions. e. Blue mass, and the extracts in their usual condition, although the former and some of the latter are very convenient in the form of powder. ON POWDERS AND PILLS. 429 Powders may be prescribed in the form of mixture or draught, always directing the bottle to be shaken before pouring out the dose; or in pill, if their dose is small. They may be prescribed in papers (chartulas), each containing a dose, or in a single large pack- age, the dose being indicated in the directions by some familiar standard of measurement. These last are the only forms of prescription coming under the present head. Mixtures, pills, &c, will be considered in their appro- priate places. Soluble substances, prescribed in powder, may be directed to be dissolved in water, and the solution taken by small doses, so as to save expense to the patient, or to have the medicine in a more portable form, as in travelling. This, however, is a rather inaccurate way. Seidlitz, soda, and citric fever powders are elegant forms for giving single doses of soluble salts. When the dose of an insoluble powder is large, as in the case of magnesia or of phosphate of lime, and it is to be mixed by the pattent or attendant, it is well to direct the particular mode of sus- pending it in water. The directions for magnesia are as follows:— Put the requisite quantity of clear and cold water (not too much) in a clean glass, and drop into it from the blade of a knife or spoon, the required dose; allow it gradually to mix with the water and subside, after which stir it up and drink immediately. This will be found a more satisfactory way than to pour the water upon the dry powder in the bottom of the glass. Powders which are viscid and slightly solublev&re, I think, gene- rally more disagreeable than those which are not. Rhubarb is much less pleasant to take in fine powder than when chipped into very small shavings or grated, and swallowed suspended through a glass of water. Some viscid vehicle seems quite necessary to heavy powders like calomel, or mercury with chalk; by sinking to the bottom of the spoon from which administered, these are liable to miss of being swallowed. With medicines prescribed in the form of powders there is no occasion for the use of excipients, as they are not, strictly speaking, incorporated together; where the dose is small, however, an additional substance may be directed for the purposes of dilution, such as sugar, or a mixture of sugar and gum, or liquorice, or arrowroot fecula. An illustration of this kind of admixture is seen in Prescription No. 54, in which the only utility of the sugar is to give body to the otherwise very small bulk of the powders; also in Castillon's Powders, in which an antacid and astringent calculated to act as a remedy for the diseased condition, are combined with appropriate nutritious ingredients. In Dover's Powder we have an instance of the diluent being made to subserve an important mechanical end; and I am informed by an intelligent pharmaceutist that, in his vicinity, physicians combine sugar of milk with powders in prescriptions for a like purpose, directing lono- trituration. Calomel is said by this means to acquire in- creased efficiency where a rapid constitutional effect is desired; 430 ON POWDERS AND PILLS. although the assertions of homceopathists, in regard to the virtues of trituration, are both extravagant and absurd, yet there is little doubt that, in a case like that of calomel, long attrition with a hard substance, in contact with the atmosphere, is calculated to produce chemical, as well as physical changes of importance. The use of adjuvants and correctives is appropriate in the case of powders, equally with other classes of remedies; and, by re- ference to the prescriptions appended, it will be observed that they are very commonly added. Prescriptions in the form of powders will be associated with those in pilular form in the list which fol- lows that class. PlLULiE. Pills are the most popular and convenient of all forms of medi- cine. In common with powders, they have the advantage of being accurately divided, so that the patient is not dependent upon any of the uncertain means of approximate measurement necessary in administering liquids. They are also more portable. The contact is so slight with the organs of taste, in swallowing, that the most offensive substances can be swallowed in this form with compara- tively little inconvenience. There are, however, a few people who cannot swallow them; this is the case, too, with young children, for whom some other form is preferable. The size of pills is necessarily limited to from 4 to 5 grains of vegetable powders, or 5 to 6 grains of heavy mineral substances, including the excipient, though these quantities are larger than usual. The kind of Substances best adapted to the Pilular Form. a. All those suitable to the form of powders, which are given in small doses. b. The gum resins, balsams, and turpentine. c. Substances, the operation of which it is desirable to retard; as in certain aperient and alterative pills. d. Insoluble substances, which are too heavy to give conveniently suspended in water. e. Very disagreeable and fetid substances. /. The vegetable extracts. The kind of Substances unsuited to the Pilular Form. a. Those which operate only in doses too large for 3 or 4 pills. b. Deliquescent, or efflorescent salts. c. Bodies of such consistence as to require an undue proportion of dry or viscid material to make a mass, except such as have a very small dose; as croton oil. d. Very volatile substances; as carbonate of ammonia, except with certain precautions. ON POWDERS AND PILLS. 431 e. Deliquescent salts, and those containing a large proportion of water, unless this be suitably absorbed by associated dry powder. f. Those which are prescribed for immediate effect; as emetics, diffusible stimulants. g. Essential oils, in quantity exceeding half a drop to each pill. The formation of a pill mass is sometimes a matter of consider- able difficulty; sometimes, from a want of adhesiveness of the in- gredients; sometimes from the difficulty of incorporating them equally together. Under the head of The Art of Dispensing, I shall introduce some hints upon the mode of overcoming difficulties of this kind, and for the present shall confine myself to the mode of prescribing pills. Should the physician indicate the excipient, or leave it optional with the apothecary? In answering this, we necessarily bring into view the therapeutical relations of this ingredient, and shall find that it may be active or inert, according to the choice of the prescriber. If the basis be a vegetable powder, like rhubarb or aloes, a mass can be readily formed by moisture, without the aid of any adhe- sive material; if, on the contrary, it be a metallic salt, or an unad- hesive vegetable powder, it requires an addition to give it the form of a mass; that addition will add somewhat to the bulk of the ingredients prescribed, and perhaps, if the dose be large, will make the pills too bulky; in this case, it is important that the physician should not overlook the excipient, which he may include among the medicinal ingredients, or make due allowance for, in appor- tioning the quantity to each pill. The following rule for prescribing pills will obviate the disad- vantage of adding to the size by the use of inert excipients: when the basis is an unadhesive material, one of the other medicinal ingre- dients should be an extract or a vegetable powder, which will form, a mass by moisture alone. To illustrate this, I would refer to prescriptions No. 12 and No. 55, in both of which the adjuvant possesses this quality, while in a large number of cases, the constituent or vehicle is of little or no therapeutic value. It will be proper in this connection to run over the several sub- stances, added with a view to giving body to pill masses, so as to point out the special adaptations of each. Soap, which is employed in the officinal pills more than any other excipient, is well adapted to combine with resinous sub- stances, the solubility of which it increases, while it acts as an antacid, and perhaps aperient. It has been suggested, that it is incompatible with opium, with which it is prescribed in the offi- cinal pil. opii, as the alkali, especially when present in excess, tends to separate the morphia from its native combination. Some ex- 432 ON POWDERS AND PILLS. periments made by my assistant, Thomas Weaver, confirm this idea. Syrup is often used as an excipient, which adds but little to the bulk of a pill mass, and is effectual in some cases, where water alone would not give the requisite tenacity; it does not answer a good purpose, however, with certain metallic salts, which dispose the mass to crumble. Honey and molasses, forms of uncrystallizable sugar, are better adapted to the general purposes of pill making. Masses made with these are not so liable to crumble, and possess the great ad- vantage of remaining moist and soluble for a longer period. On account of the last-named property, honey has been substituted for syrup in the officinal recipe for sulphate of quinia pills, in the last edition of the Pharmacopoeia. Gum Arabic is directed to be added, where the requisite adhe- siveness will not result from the use of syrup or honey alone; it is not a very good excipient, either added in the form of powder, or of a thick mucilage. Pills made with gum are apt to be very hard. Tragacanth forms a less hard and insoluble mass than acacia. The officinal syrup of gum Arabic is made with a special view to this use. Alcohol and essential oils, by softening down resinous substances, facilitate their incorporation together in mass, and, being held by these with considerable tenacity, prevent their rapidly becoming too hard. Oil of turpentine is well adapted to softening white turpentine, so as to incorporate it with other ingredients, as in Otto's emmenagogue pills. These excipients must be added with care, or they will render the mass quite too soft. An important use of essential oils in pills, is to prevent moodi- ness, and the disagreeable odor which vegetable powders acquire when moistened; they should be added in very small proportion for this purpose, as they rather interfere with than promote the adhesiveness of the mass. Crumb of bread furnishes a convenient, and when not too dry, a very tenacious vehicle for substances given in small dose, and which require diluting, rather than combining in a small bulk. Confection of rose is adapted to similar uses, though more moist and less tough in consistence. When made from the rosa gallica, it is astringent, and adapted to combining certain vegetable pow- ders belonging to that class; as usually met with, it contains no tannin, being made from our common varieties of rose. Confection of orange-peel, and aromatic confection, are adapted to similar uses. The Officinal Pill Masses.—These may be described in this place as preparations well adapted to use as excipients, though very frequently prescribed singly. ON POWDERED BLUE MASS. 433 Pilulce Hydrargyri, U. S. This is the officinal designation of the preparation commonly called blue pill, and directed in the Pharmacopoeia to be divided into pills of three grains each; as usually kept by physicians and druggists in an undivided state, it is more appropriately called massa hydrargyri, mercurial mass. It is usually prepared by drug millers and chemical manufacturers, by triturating together in appropriate mechanical contrivances, mercury, conserve of rose, liquorice root in powder, and some rather moist viscid material, as powdered althea root, in such proportion that three parts by weight of the mass shall contain one of mercury, thoroughly divided, and partially oxidized. To my young friend and assistant, Thomas Weaver, the reader is indebted for the suggestion of the following good extempora- neous process for the preparation of this heretofore troublesome mass. It is adapted equally to producing a soft or a pulverulent article, and is so rapid and easy as to supersede the necessity for the use of machinery for small quantities. Its importance as a practical improvement will be appreciated by those who have attempted to prepare blue mass with a pestle and mortar by the officinal process, and by such as have been disappointed in the quality of the manufactured article as met with in commerce. To make three ounces of Blue Mass Extemporaneously by a few minutes' Trituration. Take of Mercury.......3j. Powdered liquorice root .... 3ss. " rose leaves .... 5yj. Honey.......3yj. Triturate the honey, liquorice root, and mercury, rapidly toge- ther for three minutes, or until all the globules of mercury disap- pear, then add the rose leaves, and work the whole into a uniform mass; if it is too stiff, moisten with a little water. According to James Beatson, late apothecary to the U. S. Naval Hospital, at New York, the same object may be accomplished by triturating the mercury with the honey, until the former is completely extin- guished; then adding rose-water, powdered rose leaves, powdered liquorice root, and sugar, to make up the requisite proportion. To make Powdered Blue Mass. Take of Mercury .......Ij. Powdered liquorice root . . . . Iss. " rose leaves .... 5vj. Simple syrup (by weight) . . . 3ij. Triturate the mercury, half of the powdered liquorice root, and 28 434 ON POWDERS AND PILLS. the simple syrup rapidly together- for three minutes, or until the globules disappear, and then incorporate the powdered rose leaves, and the remainder of the powdered liquorice root, and spread the whole out to dry in a warm place. Reduce this to powder. Blue mass is, perhaps, the most popular, as it is the mildest form of mercurial preparation; it is well adapted to use in pill or powder, either combined, as in several prescriptions which follow, or singly, in doses of from one to ten grains. Blue mass, when designed to act on the liver without producing a cathartic effect, may be combined with opium or a pure astringent. It is more frequently, however, combined with cathartics, to increase its tendency to operate on the bowels. Perhaps a majority of the mild cathartic pills, prescribed by practitioners and those sold as universal remedies, contain this useful ingredient; and, in fact, blue pills are very commonly known and taken by those who prescribe for themselves, for what is popularly known as " biliousness," and various forms of liver complaint. I have recently prepared, by the modified process above, and from specimens which have been dried at a moderate heat, a very convenient powder of blue mass, which is well suited for conver- sion into the pilular form, and into that of compound powder. Blue mass was formerly much adulterated, but is now supplied to the trade of reliable quality by several first-rate manufacturers. Pilulce Ferri Carbonatis, U. S. Vallette's Mass is a very mild and soluble preparation of iron, made by incorporating freshly precipitated protocarbonate of iron with honey, or a mixture of honey and gum tragacanth, or some similar saccharine vehicle which experience has taught the manu- facturer to prefer, and by evaporation concentrating into a solid pilular mass. This may be taken by itself, in a dose of from ten to thirty grains, or may be used as an adjuvant or vehicle to other medicinal substances, particularly dry powders, as in those numer- ous cases where iron, in small doses, is indicated along with bitter tonics. Pilulce Copaibce, U. S. Copaiba mass, although seldom employed as a vehicle, is not un- suited to this use; it is directed to be made by incorporating one drachm of calcined magnesia with two ounces of copaiva, a recipe which it is very difficult to follow, so as to get a solid mass. The copaiva must be thick and resinoid, and the magnesia recently cal- cined, or the required thickening will not occur. The introduction of wax, in considerable quantity, to give it consistence, should not be allowed. Its dose is from 5 to 10 grains. MEDICINES ADAPTED TO THE FORM OF POWDER. 435 The Extracts. This class, which is much the best adapted to the pilular form, should not be overlooked, in prescribing several ingredients! Some one extract can usually be selected which will meet a thera- peutical indication, while it serves the purpose of an excipient. _ Thus, in sedative or narcotic pills, we have the choice of five or six extracts to incorporate with any unaclhesive or other material so as to gain efficiency without too large a bulk. In directing a tonic remedy in this form, extract of gentian, quassia, cinchona, or nux vomica will come in play. While as a vehicle, for the mercurials in cutaneous or syphilitic diseases, ex- tract of conium, or of sarsaparilla, may be used. The use of the cathartic extracts, and of extract of taraxacum for similar purposes, is too common to need comment. We also have an illustration of an elegant and efficient compound, made on this principle in the so-called Dr. Vance's Gout Pills (Prescription No. 28). The following Tables show, in a general way, the classes of drugs adapted to the form of powder and pill. Medicines adapted to the Form of Powder. INSOLUBLE MINERAL SUBSTANCES, VEGETABLE PRODUCTS AND SOME SOLUBLE SUBSTANCES. INSOLUBLE : TOO LARGE DOSES FOR PILLS. Carbo. ligni. Magnesia. Calcis phosph. Pot. bitart. Sulphur sub. Creta ppt. Ferri subcarb. Calomel, and others. Vegelahle Powders:— Powd. cinchona. " colomba. " gentian. " rhubarb (coarse). " Jalap. " cubebs, and others. IN CERTAIN COMBINATIONS, AND WHEN PILLS ARE OBJECTED TO. Powd. pil. hydrarg. " ext. coloc. " opium. " digitalis. " nux vom. " kino. " acid, tannic. " " gallic. " potas. nit. Opium alkaloids. Cinchona " Subnit. bismuth, and many others. Diluents for Substances prescribed in Form, of Powders. Sugar. Lactin. Powd. acacia. " cinnam. and others. Aromat. powd. P. Ext. liquorice. P. Tragacanth. P. Elm Bark. 436 ON POWDERS AND PILLS. Medicines adapted to Pilular Form. POWDERS GIVEN IN LESS THAN GR. XV DOSES, GUM RESINS, EXTRACTS ; ALSO OLEO- RESINS AND OILS IN SMALL PROPORTION. r 1 UNADHESIVE MATERIALS. GOOD MEDICINAL EXCIPIENTS. Calomel. Extracta. Dover's powd. Pil. hydrarg. Subnit. bismuth. " copaibse. Morphise, acetas, &c. " ferri carb. Strychnia. Terebinthina. Pulv. digitalis. With Moisture:— " ipecac. Powd. aloes. Plumbi acetas. " rheum. Ant. et pot. tart. " kino. " sulphuret. " tannin. Argenti nitras. " opium. Argenti oxidum. " scilla. Ferri pulvis. S. bebeerina. " subcarb. Ferri citras. " (other salts). Assafcetida, and others. Potass, iodid. With Alcohol:— Camphor, and others. Guaiacum, and others. Difficult to combine, except by Peculiar With Dil, S03 :— Treatment:— Quiniae sulph. 01. tiglii. Cinchonise sulph. " terebinth. Quinidiae sulph. Ferri iodidum. Quinoidine. Copaiba, and others. Inert Excipients. MUCILAGES. Powd. acacia. Syrup of gum. " tragacanth. Honey. Soap. Treacle. Crumb of bread. Syrups. Confections. In the following officinal and extemporaneous prescriptions, some of which are extracted from standard works, others from the ex- tensive files of the dispensing establishment over which I preside, and a few which I venture to offer for trial, I have endeavored to point out the most approved methods of compounding medicines in the form of powders and pills. Examples of Extemporaneous Prescriptions in the form of Powders and Pills, including those in the Pharmacopoeia under the heads Pul- veres and Pilulce. Astringents. No. 1.— Used in Obstinate Diarrhoea. Take of Alum Kino 1 powder. 3\j 20 grs. 3ss 5 grs. ASTRINGENTS. 437 Mix and reduce to a very fine powder, and distribute this into 6 papers. Dose, one every 2 or 3 hours. The alum and kino are incompatible in liquid form, and hence, when associated together, should always be prescribed in powder. The dose is too large for the pilular form. No. 2.—Adapted to substitute many Simple Vegetable Astringents. Each. Take of Tannic acid . . gr. xij 1 grain. Confection Of rose . gr. vj J grain. Make a mass and divide into 12 pills. Dose, one every two hours. The above may be made into powders by substituting an aromatic, astringent, or inert powder for the confection. No. 8.— Used in Diarrhoea. Each. Take of Tannic acid • 9j 2 grs. Acetate of morphia . gr- j To gr- Sugar gr. x 1 gr. Oil of caraway . "Ij trace. Triturate together, and distribute into ten papers. Dose, one every 3 hours. Five grains of opium may be substituted for the morphia salt, or by the substitution of sufficient syrup for the sugar, the whole may be made into the pilular form. No. 4.— Chalk Powders. Each. Take of Prepared chalk . . 5fj 15 grs. Gum Arabic, in powder . 7J grs. Sugar, each - . . . 3j 72 grs- Powdered cinnamon . gr. x IJ grs. Triturate together into a uniform powder, and divide into 8 doses. Chalk mixture, No. 61, spoils by keeping in hot weather, and is, moreover, much more bulky than an equal quantity of the ingre- dients in the above form, which is especially convenient for travel- lers. Opium, kino, or other remedies adapted to increase or modify its action, may be added in powder, as their Galenical solu- tions are to the mixture. One of the very best additions for a common form of diarrhoea is that of powdered blue mass, of which gr. xvj to 5ss may be added to the above. 438 ON POWDERS AND PILLS. No. 5.—For the Diarrhoea of Young Children. Each. Take of Acetate of lead gr. ij \ Opium . . . . gr. ss 2J? Camphor . . . . gr. j T'2 Sugar gr. iij J- Triturate, and divide into 12 papers. Dose, one every 2 or 3 hours. The child should be kept quiet, and fed upon arrowroot, flour boiled in milk, or a mixture of barley-water and cream. For adults, the whole quantity prescribed may be taken at one dose. Tonics and Aromatics. No. 6.—Anti-Intermittent Poivders. Each. Take of Powdered cinchona . . Ij 3j. serpentaria . 3vj gr. xv. Sulphate of quinia . . gr. viij gr. j. Mix, and distribute into eight papers. Dose, one every hour, commencing eight hours before the expected paroxysm. The sulphate of quinia is often omitted, but increases the effi- ciency of the powder, especially when the bark is not of the finest quality. The serpentaria is often substituted by more powerful stimulants, as cloves, or capsicum, or oil of black pepper; and sometimes to obviate costiveness, a saline cathartic is added. No. 7.—Pilulce Quinice Sulphatis, IT. S. Reduced. Each. Take of Sulphate of quinia . . 3j 9ij 1 gr. Powdered gum Arabic . 3\j gr. x \ gr. Honey . . . q. s. q. s. Make a mass, and divide into 480 pills (reduced quantity, 40), of which the dose in intermittents is one every hour, between the paroxysms. These officinal pills are less used than formerly, as it is now customary to give larger doses, and less frequently, and they are found less convenient than pills or powders, of three, four, or five grains each. Sulphate of quinine may be made into pills by the following process, which has been called Parrish's. (See paper by the author, in the American Journal of Pharmacy, vol. xxv. p. 291.) tonics and aromatics. 439 No. 8.—Pills of the Soluble Sulphate of Quinia. Each. Take of Sulphate of quinia . . 9j gr. v. Aromatic sulphuric acid . fifteen drops m, iv. Drop tlfe acid upon the sulphate on a tile or slab, and triturate with a spatula, until it thickens and assumes a pilular consistence, then divide into four pills. The five grain quinine pill made in this way, is not larger than many pills in common use, so that by this process they may be made of two, three, four, or five grains. The large number of combinations in which sulphate of quinia is associated with other remedies cannot be here noticed; to some of these the elixir of vitriol process is well adapted as in combining the other alkaloids with it; in other cases it is inadmissible. If an extract in small quantity, or a vegetable powder is to be added to the mass, it should be incorporated with the quinia salt, when by trituration on the slab it begins to thicken into a paste. Persons not accustomed to making quinine pills by this process, sometimes allow the sulphate to become too dry and unadhesive to mould into pills. This is from not seizing the proper moment just as the mass has ceased to be too soft, and before it becomes dry; it is then quite plastic, and becomes particularly so by con- tact with the warmth and moisture of the thumb and fingers. A drop of syrup or honey, which should always be at hand on the counter, by being added at the proper moment will prevent this hardening. , No. 9.—Pills of Sulphate of Cinchonia. Each. Take of Sulphate of cinchonia . . 9j gr. j. Powdered tragacanth . . gr. ij gr. TV Triturate together, and add sufficient water to make a mass, which divide into twenty pills; these pills are esteemed about equal to those of sulphate of quinia. No. 10.—Pills of Sulphcute of Quinidia. (Quinidina.) Each. Take of Sulphate of quinidia . . 9j gr.j. Powdered tragacanth . . gr. ij gr. TV Triturate together, and acid water sufficient to make a mass, which divide into twenty pills. These are esteemed about equal to sulphate of quinia pills of the same proportion. The use of tragacanth instead of gum Arabic would be an lm- 440 ON POWDERS AND PILLS. provement in the officinal sulphate of quinia pills; it diminishes the size, and keeps them longer moist and soluble. I have experimented with sulphate of cinchonia and sulphate of quinidia with reference to the formation of pill masses with elixir of vitriol, and find that sulphate of cinchonia requires one drop to three grains, and sulphate of quinidia three drops to two grains. They thicken into a firm mass with less facilityNhan the quinine salt, and in fact require sometimes an hour or two to be- come firm enough to roll out; this is remedied by adding a little of some vegetable powder, as gum Arabic or starch, which, however, increases the bulk. Practitioners are increasingly disposed to examine the relative merits of the cinchona alkaloids as antiperiodics. In the Pennsyl- vania Hospital, and other of our large charities, the experience of the medical staff has been thus far favorable to substituting for the more expensive sulphate of quinia, sulphate of cinchonia, and sul- phate of quinidia in the same dose. See Cinchona Alkaloids. Combinations of salts of quinia and iron are much resorted to in anaemia accompanied by want of appetite; of these, two instances are given below. No. 11.—Powders of Iron and Quinia. Each. Take of Subcarbonate of iron • . 3j 5 grs. Sulphate of quinia . . gr. vj £ gr. Aromatic powder gr. xij 1 gr. Triturate together, and distribute into 12 powders. Dose, take a powder three times a day before meals. The proportion of sulphate of quinia should be increased when it is to be employed in convalescence from intermittents. No. 12.—Pills of Proto-Carbonate of Iron and Quinia. Each. Take of Sulphate of quinia . . . . 9j 1 gr. Mass of carbonate of iron (Vallette's) 3j 3 grs. Mix, and make into 20 pills. Dose, one twice or three times a day. In this class of prescription, the sulphates of cinchonia and qui- nidia, and of bebeerina, may generally be substituted for that of quinia without disadvantage. No. 13.—Pills of Quevenneh Iron. Each. Take of Iron in powder . . gr. CC 2 grs. Manna . . . . gr. C 1 gr. Triturate into a mass and divide into 100 pills. TONICS AND AROMATICS. 441 Manna is an excellent excipient for Ferri pulvis, and will answer in less proportion, if very small pills are desired; when not at hand, it may be substituted by honey and a little gum Arabic, or tragacanth. In a number of cases it will be desirable to introduce adjuvants; which may be in the form of extract. Extracts of conium, of aco- nite, cinchona, and quassia, are favorite adjuvants with Quevenne's iron. No. 14.—Pulvis Aromaticus, TJ. S. Take of Cinnamon, Ginger, of each.....Iij. Cardamom, deprived of the capsules, Nutmeg, grated, of each . . . . gj. Eub them together into a very fine powder. In this preparation, the dry powders of cinnamon and ginger enable us to reduce the oily nutmeg and cardamoms to a fine con- dition ; the whole should be passed through a sieve. By trituration with honey, syrup of orange-peel and saffron, this furnishes confectio aromatica. In compound powders, as in Prescription No. 11, this is a fre- quent ingredient, and is recommended by an agreeable flavor. No. 15.—Dr. Mitchell's Tonic Pills. Each. Take of Extract of quassia . . gr. xxxvj 3 grs. Extract of conium . \ gr. Subcarbonate of iron, of each gr. iij I gr. Make into a mass with a few drops of solution of arsenite of potassa (if required); then divide into 12 pills. Dose, a pill twice or three times daily. No. 16.—Tonic and Aromatic Pills. (Dr. Parrish, Senior.) Each Take of Sulphate of quinia Powdered capsicum Mace . Powdered cloves Carbonate of ammonia Oil of caraway . Confection of rose Form a uniform tenacious mass gr. iij i gr. Jgr- Igr- tgr- each gr. vj £ gr. . gtt. iij i "l. . sufficient q. s. and divide into 12 pills. 442 ON POWDERS AND PILLS. f$0m 17.— Used in Obstinate Intermittens. (Dr. Chapman.) Each. Take of Sulphate of copper . . gr. iij \ gr. Powdered opium . . gr. iv \ gr. " gum Arabic . gr. viij \ gr. Syrup .... sufficient. Make a mass, and divide into 12 pills. Dose, one every three hours. No. 18.—Pilulce Ferri Compositce, U. S. Each. Take of Myrrh, in powder . . 5ij IJ gr. Carbonate of soda . . j FeO, C02. Sulphate of iron, of each . 3j j \% gr- Syrup.....q. s. q.s. Hub the myrrh with the carbonate of soda, then add the sulphate of iron, and again rub them; lastly, beat them with the syrup so as to form a mass to be divided into eighty pills. This pill is similar in composition to Griffith's Iron Mixture. Supposing a reaction to take place between the salts present, nroto- carbonate of iron would be produced, which, with the myrrh, forms an admirable remedy in chlorosis, &c. I should greatly prefer the use of a lump of fresh myrrh to the powdered article of commerce. No. 19.—Pilulce Ferri Iodidi, IT. S. Each. Take of Sulphate of iron . 3j \ Fel. Iodide of potassium . . 9iv ) If grs. Tragacanth, in powder . gr. x \ gr. Sugar, in powder . 3ss f gr. Beat them with syrup, so as to form a mass, to be divided into forty pills. The formation of iodide of iron depends upon the presence ot moisture and fluids to produce deliquescence. The mass should be as dry as possible to be plastic, and may then be advantageously kept in a tightly stopped bottle. No. 20.—For Chronic Indigestion and Irritability of Stomach. Each. Take of Bismuthi subnitratis . 3j 1° grs- Pulveris rhei . . . 3ss 5 grs. " aromatici . . 9ij 6§ grs. Make into 6 powders. Take one before each meal. STIMULANTS. 443 Nervous Stimulants ; Antispasmodics. No. 21.—Pilulce Assafcetidce, IT. S. Reduced. Each. Take of Assafoetida . oiss gr. xxxvj gr. iij. Soap . . sss gr. xij gr. i. Beat them with water, so as to form a mass, and divide into 240 pills. (The reduced quantity into 12 pills.) Dose, one to 4 pills. No. 22.—Pilulce Aloes et Assafoetida, U.S. Reduced. Each. Take of Aloes, in powder . *} gr. IJ. Assafoetida . >gr. xvj gr. IJ. Soap, each . . . §ss J gr. 1J, Beat them with water, so as to form a mass, to be divided into 180 pills. (Reduced, 12 pills.) Dose, one to four pills. No. 23.—Pilulce Galbani Compositce, IT. S. Reduced. Each. Take of Galbanum . gr. IJ. Myrrh, each . 3yj each gr. xviij gr. IJ. Assafoetida . . 3ij gr. vj gr. J. Syrup . . sufficient sufficient gr. 3J. Beat them together, so as to form a mass, to be divided into 240 pills. (Reduced, 12 pills.) Dose, one to three pills. No. 24.—Dr. Otto's Antispasmodic Powders. Take of Black mustard seed, Powdered sage, Powdered ginger, equal parts by measure. Mix thoroughly. Dose, three teaspoonfuls, for three mornings in succession ; dis- continue three; then give as before. To be moistened with water or molasses. This powder is highly recommended, in epilepsy, by several practitioners, and recently by Dr. Charles D. Hendry, of Haddon- field, N. J. Arterial Stimulants. No. 25.—Powders or Pills of Carbonate of Ammonia, &c. Take of Muriate of ammonia (granulated), Dried carbonate of soda, of each .... 9jj. Powdered capsicum......9j. Triturate into a uniform fine powder, and divide into 10 papers, which should be wrapped in tinfoil. 444 ON POWDERS AND PILLS. By the aid of moisture, these powders are made to react with each other and develop carbonate of ammonia. To make into pills, add a portion of firm and rather dry conserve of rose. Divide into 20 pills, and keep them in a vial. Cerebral Stimulants, or Narcotics. No. 26.—Pilulce Opii, IT. S. Reduced. Each. Take of Opium, in powder . 3j gr. xij gr. j. Soap . . . gr. xij gr. iiss gr. \. Beat into a mass with water, and divide into 60 pills. (Reduced, 12.) The officinal pills of opium have long appeared to me to be de- fective, and when it is left optional what excipient to employ, I use syrup, or syrup of gum in preference to soap, which is apt to be incompatible with the opium. Old opium pills are sometimes in request, from their being better retained by an irritable stomach, and from the fact that by their more gradual solution, they affect more favorably the diseases of the lower intestine. The best way to make pills to be kept for this purpose is to select a portion of the solid mass in its natural and plastic con- dition, and to divide it, without admixture, into the required num- ber of pills; these, as they contract and harden, will become com- pact and of slow solubility. No. 27.—Anodyne Pills. Each. Take of Acetate of morphia . . gr. j gr. J. Extract of hyoscyamus . gr. iv gr. J. Triturate into a pill mass, and divide into 8 pills. Dose, one pill, repeated if necessary. These are very small, and are not astringent in their effects on the bowels. No. 28.—uDr. Vance's Bheumatism and Gout Pills." Each. R.—Extracti colchici acetici . . 3ss gr. 1J Pulveris ipecacuanhas et opii . 3iss, gr. vj gr. iv. Misce et divide in pilulas xxiv. Signa.—Take two at night and one before breakfast and dinner. This is a most valuable combination, having been found effica- cious in a great many cases. EMETICS. 445 No. 29.—Lartique's Gout Pills. Each. B.—Extracti colocynthidis compositi . 3iss, gr. vj gr. 4. colchici acetici . . gr. x gr. f. " digitalis . . . gr. v gr. J. Misce, fiat massa in pilulas xxiv, dividenda. Signa.—Take 2 for a dose. No. 30.—Pills of Camphor and Opium. Each. B.—Camphoraa . . . . gr. xxiv gr. 2. Pulveris opii . . . . gr. vj gr. J. Alcoholis .... gtt. vj trace. Confectionis rosse . . . q. s. q. s. Misce, et fiant, secundum artem, pilulae xij. Signa.—Dose from one to two pills. " Excito-Motor Stimulants." No. 31.—Powders given in Uterine Hemorrhages. Each. Take of Ergot, freshly powdered . 3j gr. 10. Alum, in powder . . 9j gr. 3 J. Mix and divide into 6 equal parts. Sometimes borax is substituted for alum in similar combinations. Arterial Sedatives. No. 32.—Powders of Nitre and Tartrate of Antimony. Each. Take of Tartrate of antimony and potassa gr. j gr. J2. Nitrate of potassa ... gr. 2 J. Sugar, each .... 3ss gr. 2J. Triturate into powder, and distribute equally into 12 papers. Some powders of this class are introduced among the liquid pre- parations. Emetics. No. 33.—A Prompt and Efficient Emetic. Each. B.—Pulveris ipecacuanhas . . . 3ss _ gr. xv. Antimonii et potassse tartratis . gr. ij gr. j. Misce et divide in pulveres ij. Signa.—Take one in a little mo- lasses, or sugar and water, and follow it by a draught of warm water. If one powder does not produce the effect, the second may be taken soon after. 446 ON POWDERS AND PILLS. Reduced. Each. sj gr. xxiv gr.2. 3ij gr. xviij gr-Ii Sss gr. xij gr. 1. f3ss "Lij "U- Sometimes calomel is added to emetic powders, and both a purga- tive and emetic effect are produced. Emetics, as such, are never given in pill. Cathartics and Laxatives. To this class belong six of the pills, and two of the compound powders of the Pharmacopoeia. No. 34.—Pilulce Bhei, IT. S. Reduced. Each. Take of Rhubarb, in powder . 3yj gr. xxxyj gr. 3. Soap 3ij gr. xij gr. 1. Beat them with water, so as to form a mass, to be divided into 120 pills. (Reduced, into 12 pills.) No. 35.—Pilulce Bhei Compositce, IT. S. Take of Rhubarb, in powder Aloes " Myrrh " Oil of peppermint Beat them with water, so as to form a mass, to be divided into 240 pills. (Reduced, into 12 pills.) No. 36.—Pilulce Aloes, U.S. Reduced. Each. Take of Aloes, in powder . gr. 2. Soap, each . . Ij 9ij gr. 2. Beat them with water, so as to form a mass, to be divided into 240 pills. (Reduced, 20 pills.) No. 37.—Pilulce Hydrargyri Chloridi Milis, U. S. Each. Take of Mild Chloride of mercury Iss gr. xij gr. j. Gum Arabic, in powder . 3j gr. iij gr. \. Syrup, sufficient quantity. Mix together the chloride of mercury and the gum, then beat them with the syrup, so as to form a mass, to be divided into 240 pills. (Reduced, 12 pills.) These pills are very rarely prescribed, as they contain too large a dose for the slow alterative effects, and are inconveniently small for a cathartic dose. (Compare No. 42 and No. 54.) cathartics and laxatives. ^447 No. 38.—Pilulce Catharticce Composite^, IT. S. Reduced. Each. Take of Compound extract of colocynth, in powder . . . .Iss gr. xvj IJ. Extract of jalap1 ... 1 gr. Mild chloride of mercury, each . 3"j gr. xij 1 gr. Gamboge, in powder . . 9ij gr. iiss J. Mix them together; then with water form a mass, to be divided into 180 pills. (Reduced, 12 pills.) These well-known and popular pills are very easy to make, if the extracts, both of colocynth and jalap are powdered before being incorporated with the other ingredients; but if the extract of jalap is of a tough consistence, which it frequently reaches by partial drying, it is almost impossible to incorporate it with the other in- gredients. Powdered extract of jalap, as elsewhere stated, is now generally obtainable, and may be kept in a salt mouth bottle like any other powder, a few drops of moisture will form it into a plas- tic mass. The tough extract should be further dried and powdered, or, if required to be used on an emergency, may be softened by heating and triturating in a capsule with diluted alcohol. Under the name of anti-bilious pills, this preparation is vended in great quantities over the country, and by its admirable combina- tion of cathartic properties, is well adapted to supersede as a popu- lar remedy the numerous nostrums advertised and sold for similar purposes. No. 39.—Pilulce Aloes et Myrrhce, U. S. Reduced. Each. Take of Aloes, in powder . . Iij gr. xxiv 2 grs. Myrrh do. . . Ij gr. xij 1 gr. Saffron do. . .Iss gr. vj J gr. Syrup, sufficient quantity q. s. Beat the whole together so as to form a mass, to be divided into 480 pills. (Reduced, 12 pills.) A tonic and emmenagogue cathartic. Saffron may be reduced to powder by heating it in a capsule till it becomes crisp, then tri- turating it in a mortar. No. 40.—Pulvis Aloes et Canellce, U. S. (Hiera Picra.) Reduced. Take of Aloes......K)j Iiss. Canella......liij 3iij- Rub them separately into a very fine powder, and mix them. 1 Extract of podophyllum might be well substituted in half the quantity, or if in the full proportion would increase the activity of the pill. 448 ON POWDERS AND PILLS. Hiera picra is generally macerated in some kind of spirits, and taken in draughts as a stomachic laxative. No. 41.—Pulvis Jalapce Compositus, U. S. Take of Jalap, in powder.....Ij. Bitartrate of potassa.....Iij. Mix them. This is a mild laxative, given in doses of gr. xv to 3ss. Sulphur and bitartrate of potassa are much associated in about equal bulks. No. 42.— Calomel and Jalap Powder. R.—Hydrargyri chloridi mitis . . . . gr. xv. Pulveris jalapse......9j. Misce. To be given at a dose. In the same way rhubarb is very commonly associated with calomel. No. 43.—Bhubarb and Magnesia Powder. B.—Pulveris rhei.......9j. Magnesias........9ij. Olei menthae viridis......^l j. Misce. To be given at a dose. Charcoal and magnesia constitute another very popular laxative combination. The weighing and putting up of these powders is very improving practice for the student at the commencement of his novitiate. No. 44.—Mitchell's Aperient Pills, U. S. Each. B.—Pulveris aloe's . . . . gr. xij 1 gr. " . rhei . . . . gr. xxiv 2 grs. Hydrarg. chlor. mit. . . . gr. ij £ gr. Antim. et potas. tart. . . . gr. j ^ gr. Misce, fiant pilulas No. xij. One acts as an aperient, two or three as a cathartic; they, as well as most of the other aloetic pills, are contraindicated where there is a tendency to hemorrhoids. No. 45.—Laxative Tonic Pills. (Dr. Parrish, Sen.) Take of Powdered socotrine aloes . . . . 9jj. " rhubarb.....9iv. Oil of caraway......gtt. xij. Extract of gentian.....9ij. Make into 40 pills. Dose, two before dinner. CATHARTICS AND LAXATIVES. 449 No. 46.—Dr. Alberty's Small Aniibilious Pills. Each. B.—Calomelanos . • ■ . . . gr- X g gr- Pulv. gambogias . gr. V h gr. Misce et fiant pilulas xxx. Dose, 2 or 3 pills. No. 47.— Pills of Croton Oil. Each. Take of Croton oil . . rci iv Kh Crumb of bread . gr. xvj "lj- Make into 16 pills. 1| gr- gr. xviij l*gr. gr. xij 1 gr. "iij trace. Croton oil and castor oil are both capable of forming soaps with caustic soda, which, being purified by solution in alcohol, and soli- dified in moulds, are eligible cathartic preparations. No. 48.—Dr. Chapman's Dinner Pills. Reduced. Each. Take of Powdered aloes " mastich, of each 3ij " ipecac. . . 9iv Oil of caraway . . . ^l xij Mix and make into mass with water, and divide into 80 pills. (Reduced quantity, 12 pills.) These pills are much used in habitual costiveness; the presence of the mastich protracts the solvent action of the fluids upon the aloes, so that one pill, which is a dose, taken before dinner, will pro- duce a gentle operation the next morning. No. 49.—Lady Webster Pills. Take of Powdered aloes.....3yj. " mastich, " red roses, each . . . . 3ij. Syrup.......q-s. Make a mass, and divide into pills of 3 grains each. One or two of these taken before a meal, will usually produce an evacuation. Diuretics and Expectorants. These classes of medicines are very little given in the form of pill or powder. 29 450 ON POWDERS AND PILLS. Reduced. Each. 3j gr- XJ J gr. 1 gr. 3ij gr. xij 1 gr. 3nj gr. xviij ljgr. q. s. No. 50.—Pilulce Scillce Compositce, U. S. Take of Squill, in powder Ginger do. Ammoniac do., each Soap .... Syrup, a sufficient quantity Mix the powders together, then beat them with the soap, and add the syrup so as to form a mass, to be divided into 120 pills. (12 pills for the reduced quantity.) Soap and syrup seem to me as a poor kind of mixture, especially as either would be a sufficient excipient without the other. No. 51.—Aromatic Pills. (Mutter's.) Take of Oil of copaiva, " cubebs, " turpentine, each .... f3j. Magnesia.......3ij. Mix, and form 60 pills. These are very large, though quite popular in the treatment of gonorrhoea. Some recipes direct gr. iv of powdered opium to this number. They would be improved in a pharmaceutical aspect by substituting copaiva and Yenice turpentine for the oils of copaiva and turpentine. The dose is two pills three times a day. Diaphoretics. No. 52.—Pulvis Ipecacuanhce et Opii, U. S. (Dover's Powder.) Reduced. Take of Ipecacuanha, in powder, gr. j. Opium, in powder, of each . 3j gr. j. Sulphate of potassa . . • Ij gr. viij. Rub them together into a very fine powder. Dose, 10 grains, the reduced quantity in the above recipe. This valuable preparation is too well known to require much comment, it is used in a great variety of cases in which a sedative diaphoretic is indicated. It should be remembered, that the opium is to be dried before being weighed, otherwise the powder may be deficient in strength. It should also be well and thoroughly tritu- rated from containing hard crystals to an almost impalpable powder. It is said to be less liable to nauseate in the form of pills. emmenagogues. 451 Alteratives. No. 53.— Compound Pills of Iodide of Mercury. Each. Take of Iodide of mercury . . gr. x J gr. Resin of guaiacum . . gr. 9ij 2 gr. Extract of conium . . gr. 3ss 1J gr. Triturate the resin of guaiacum into a mass with a little alcohol, then incorporate with it the extract of conium and iodide of mer- cury, and divide into 20 pills. These pills are alterative, and may be used in scrofulous, and skin diseases. Extract of sarsaparilla may be added to, or sub- stituted for, some of the other ingredients. No. 54.—Alterative Powders of Calomel. Each. B.—Hydrargyri chloridi mitis . gr. j Sacchari.....gr. xj 1 2' 11 T2- Misce, fiat pulvis in chartulas xij, dividenda. Signa.—Take one every hour (or two hours), till the gums are touched. When there is a disposition to undue purging, from gr. ss to gr. ij of powdered opium may be added to the above quantities. Emmenagogues. No. 55.—Dr. Otto's Emmenagogue Pills. Take of Calcined sulphate of iron . . gr. xlviij. Aloes, in powder . . . gr. xij. Turpentine.....gr. xxxij. Oil of turpentine .... gtt. x or q. s. Make a mass, and divide into 30 pills. Dose, 2, three times a day. Prescribed originally by the late Dr. J. C. Otto, and very fre- quently by the late Dr. Isaac Parrish; a similar recipe is often directed by Dr. Pepper in the Pennsylvania Hospital Clmique. The cautious addition of oil of turpentine insures an adhesive and plastic mass. Numerous pills containing aloes, myrrh, and iron, given under the head of tonics and cathartics are much used as emmenagogues. (See also Hooper's Female Pills, among the patent medicines.) 452 ON POWDERS AND PILLS. SUPPOSITORIA. Suppositories, as a class of medicines, are so seldom prescribed, that I can lay claim to little practical familiarity with their prepa- ration. They are used to insert into the rectum to fulfil several indications; sometimes their action is mechanical, but they usually owe their utility either to a narcotic, astringent, or cathartic ingre- dient. The only officinal preparation commonly prescribed in this form, is:— No. 56.—Pilulce Saponis Compositce, U. S. Consisting of opium a half ounce, and soap two ounces, triturated into a mass; this is made into a round or oblong mass of suitable size, say 10 grains, and inserted, either by the finger, or by the tube here figured, which is made for the purpose of wood or ivory. Fig. 211. Tube and piston for introducing suppositories. The suppository is improved by being smeared with some bland fixed oil, which facilitates its introduction. From a paper by Alfred B. Taylor, in the American Journal of Pharmacy, vol. xxiv. p. 211, the following recipes are extracted:— " There is perhaps no substance so well adapted to serve as the vehicle of these applications, as the butter of cocoa (oleum cacao), as no combination of suet, spermaceti, or wax, &c, combines in so great a degree the proper hardness or firmness of substance, with the requisite fusibility. " The following formula is a prescription of Dr. S. W. Mitchell, and has been considerably used. No. 57.—Take of Cocoa butter .... Iiss. Powdered opium.....gr. xij. Mix, and make into twelve suppositories. " The butter of cocoa is to be melted by a gentle heat. The opium is then to be well rubbed up with a small quantity of the fluid, until thoroughly incorporated, and the remainder of the melted butter gradually added. When cool and slightly thickened, the mass, being well stirred, should then be poured into paper cones. " If the cocoa butter is too fluid when transferred to the moulds, the opium will settle to the apex of the cone, and not be thoroughly diffused through the substance. "When perfectly hard, these cones should be pared or scraped at the base until they weigh just one drachm, giving one grain of opium to each suppository. SUPPOSITORIES. 453 " Practically, therefore, it will be necessary to make one less than the required number, reserving the parings for another operation. The following formula has been prescribed by Dr. Pancoast:— No. 58.—Take of Cocoa butter . . . Ij. Extract of krameria . . . . 9ij. Powdered opium . . . . gr. v. Mix and make into ten suppositories as above. "It is stated that cocoa butter is much esteemed in France for its supposed healing qualities, and is a favorite application in cases of piles. With powdered galls or tannic acid this substance would therefore, probably, form a useful substitute for the ordinary pile ointment. " The proportions to be employed would, of course, be regulated entirely by the physician's order. "In Dorvault's French work on Practical Pharmacy, suppositories are described as varying from the size of the little finger to that of the thumb, and weighing from 3j i to 3ij J (five to ten grammes). The author gives as a formula for the vehicle, butter of cocoa melted with an eighth part, by weight, of white wax; or as an inferior substitute, and one less used, common tallow mixed with the same proportion of wax. Soap suppositories are formed by simply cutting soap into convenient shapes. Suppositories are also prepared from honey, by boiling down this substance till it becomes sufficiently hard to retain its shape. There are also formulas given for anthel- mintic, anti-hemorrhoidal, astringent, emmenagogue, laxative, and vaginal suppositories, as well as belladonna, calomel, cicuta, mer- curial, and quinine suppositories. "In Gray's Supplement to the Pharmacopoeia, there is given the fol- lowing formula for a suppository, taken from the Codex Medic. Ham- berg, 1845. No. 59.—Take of Aloes . . . . 3yj. Common salt.....Iiss. Spanish soap.....Iiss. Starch......Iviij. Mix and make into a mass with honey, and then form into cones of the required size." No. 60.—Anthelmintic Suppositories. Take of Aloes, in powder......Iss. Chloride of sodium......3iij. Flour........3ij. Honey.......sufficient. Form into a firm paste, and make into 12 suppositories. Used in the treatment of ascarides. 454 LIQUID PREPARATIONS, SOLUTIONS, MIXTURES, ETC. CHAPTER V. LIQUID PREPARATIONS, SOLUTIONS, MIXTURES, &c These forms include a great variety of preparations. The term mixture is applied strictly to those liquids in which insoluble sub- stances are suspended, but, in a more general sense, to all liquid medicines not included in one of the several classes of solutions, in- fusions, tinctures, &c. In treating of them here, I shall for conve- nience include all extemporaneous preparations prescribed in the liquid form, endeavoring to adopt such a classification as will aid the student in acquiring a knowledge of the principles which should guide the practitioner in their composition. The hints given toward the preparation of ingredients into the form of pills are generally quite reversed in the case of mixtures, which should mostly be composed of substances in part or entirely soluble, or by their lightness readily diffusible in water. In mix- tures, the use of excipients is not limited, as in the other case, by the necessity of not exceeding a certain bulk, but they may be freely added with a view to improving the composition physically, phar- maceutically, and therapeutically, and within certain pretty wide bounds, while the range of medical agents prescribed is enlarged by the addition of a great number of fluids as the fixed and essential oils, ethers, solutions of ammonia, &c. There are reasons, however, which make the art of combining in the liquid, much more difficult than in the solid form. In the presence of the great neutral solvent, the chemical affinities of various saline ingredients are fully brought into play, which, when in a dry or even a plastic condition, are without action upon each other; again, the physical difficulties to be overcome in this form of preparation are greater than in the fore- going, because the variety of materials to be combined is increased. The proper suspension of fixed and essential oils, for instance, is a matter of no little skill, and the division and diffusion of various powders require judgment and skill only attainable by a familiarity with their physical properties. There is also in the introduction of excipients and adjuvants, great scope for the exercise of ingenuity, to improve not only the flavor, but the appearance of mixtures. (See Prescriptions No. 72 and 73, and others.) Next to a considerable range of practice in the composition of mixtures, I know of no better way to become familiar with the sub- ject than by a study of a syllabus like that here presented, together LIQUID PREPARATIONS, SOLUTIONS, MIXTURES, ETC. 455 with a number of approved formulas, such as are grouped together in this chapter. Medieiries suited to Liquid Form. MOST SOLUBLE SALTS, LIGHT INSOLUBLE POWDERS, EXTRACTS, GUM RESINS, FIXED AND ESSENTIAL OILS, AND ALL THE GALENICAL SOLUTIONS. INSOLUBLE. FORMING ELIGIBLE SOLUTIONS WITH WATER. Alumen. Ammon. murias. Antim. et potass, tart. Barii chloridum. Calcii chloridum. Ferri sulphas. " et pot. tartras. Manganesii sulphas. Magnesise sulphas. Potassse acetas. " bicarhonas. " carbonas. " citras. " chloras. " tartras. Potassii bromidum. " iodidum. Morphias acetas. " sulphas murias. Sodse bicarhonas. " boras. " carbonas. " sulphas. " et pot. tartras. Sodii chlorid. Sodse phosphas. Acid, citric. " tartaric. " tannic. MIXING WITH WATER, BUT NOT FORMING CLEAR SOLUTIONS. Diffused by agitation :— Magnesia. Potassas bitart. Sulphur praecip. Pulv. cinchonae. " ipecac. Quiniae sulph. Miscible by trituration alone:— Extractum aconiti. " belladonnas. " conii. " hyoscyamii. " stramonii. " taraxaci. " krameriae. " glycyrrhizse. Confectiones. Assafoetida. Ammoniac. Guaiacum. Myrrha. Scammonium. Suspended by the aid of viscid excipients:— Copaiba. 01. amygdalae. " ricini. " olivae. " terebinthinse. Olea essentia. Ferri protocarb. REQUIRING CERTAIN ADDITIONS TO FORM ELIGIBLE SOLUTIONS. Quinise sulphas. Cinchonise sulphas. Quinidiae sulphas. Chinoidine. Iodinium. Hydrarg. iodid. rub. Requiring viscid sub- stances, as correctives or vehicles. Ammonise carbonas. Hydrarg. chlorid. corros. Potassii cyanure turn. Potassa. BEST FORMED INTO SOLUTION IN MAK- ING THE SALTS. Ammonise acetas. Magnesias citras. Acid, phosphoric. Potassae arsenitis. " bitartras. Arsenici et hyd. iod. Potassa. Ferri citras. " nitras. 456 LIQUID PREPARATIONS, SOLUTIONS, MIXTURES, ETC. Preparations adapted to Use as Vehicles or Correctives of the Unplea- sant Taste, and other Properties, especially of Saline Substances. Aquse medicatae (generally). Infusum rosse comp. Syrupi (generally). Saccharum. Tinctura cinnamomi. Pulv. acaciae, saccharum, " " comp. and with these— Tinctura cardamomi. Olea destillata. " " comp. Tinct. Tolutana. Mistura amygdalae. " zingiberis. Spt. lavandulse comp. Of the most numerous class in the syllabus, those which form eligible solutions, without the addition of any chemical or other excipient, it should be remarked that many are so well adapted to combinations with other medicinal or corrective substances as to be rarely prescribed alone. Thus, muriate of ammonia is nearly always prescribed with expectorant remedies in cough mixtures. The bicarbonate and carbonate of potassa, and of soda with pro- phylactics, as in hooping-cough mixtures; or with stimulants, as in ordinary carminative and antacid remedies, acetate of potassa is much used with other diuretics. Alum and borax are best adapted to gargles and astringent washes, in which other medicines, not in- compatible, may be combined. Bromide and iodide of potassium are instances of mineral substances, often combined with vegetable alteratives, which increase their effect and take off at the same time their very unpleasant sensible properties. In the formulas which follow, these modes of combination are illustrated as well as those of the less soluble substances displayed in the other groups of the syllabus. The part of this work de- voted to pharmaceutical chemistry, contains the mode of preparing those solutions, the medicinal ingredients of which are developed spontaneously in the process of preparation. Incompatibles. The subject of incompatibles is, it appears to me, too much of a stumbling-block to the student. A moderate amount of chemical knowledge will serve to guard the practitioner against the use of incompatibles entirely, while the observance of a few simple rules will be sufficient to protect from glaring errors in this respect In the list of substances incompatible with each other, as published in the books, perhaps a majority are not likely to be ordered, on ac- count of any fitness they have for each other in their therapeutical relations, while it is well known that some of the most popular of prescriptions are framed with the especial design of producing pre- cipitates, which, being diffused in the resulting liquid, aid its general effect. Authors have given too absolute a sense to the term incompati- ble, by giving sanction to the idea that all substances which form insoluble precipitates are incompatible with each other. An insolu- INCOMPATIBLES. 457 ble compound is not necessarily inert, but, as experience abundantly proves, is frequently the best and most eligible form for a medicine. The reactions which occur in the organism are not to be judged of by ordinary chemical laws, as manifested in the laboratory of the chemist. The difference of action between the animal solvents under the influence of the life force, and those employed by the chemist with the mechanical means at his command, are too well known and appreciated to require extended notice. Living beings can dissolve, appropriate, and circulate in their fluids, substances which, to ordinary agencies, are most intractable and insoluble. Corrosive sublimate, when precipitated by albumen, gluten, and casein, is presented in the most insoluble form possible, and yet this mode of combination is highly recommended by the French as being more easily endured by the stomach, while the alterative effect is both mild and certain. This mode of procedure is stated by Dorvalt to be adapted to a number of mineral salts, such as lead, tin, zinc, copper, silver, platina, gold, &c, all of which form, with albuminous substances, compounds insoluble in water and ordinary solvents, but soluble in the liquids of the alimentary canal, by the aid of which they are placed in condition very suitable for medici- nal action. These facts are applicable to toxicology. When in a case of poisoning from vegetable alkalies, tannin, or an astringent decoction is given; or, after the use of a poisonous dose of arsenious acid, we give hydrated peroxide of iron; or, after corrosive sublimate, albumen; an insoluble compound is formed in each case, and yet it does not follow that these compounds are inert, but only that their immediate effects are destroyed, and their absorption dimi- nished ; indeed, it has been proved that, in cases of poisoning, where antidotes had been used successfully, the urine, contained both the poison and antidote five or six days after they were taken. The practice of administering purgatives and emetics for the complete evacuation of poisons, even after neutralization, is founded on the fact that they are still capable of slow absorption. In connection with this subject, it may be well to mention the fact that when active metallic substances, as, for instance, the salts of mercury and of antimony, are taken for some time continuously, they seem to be deposited in the alimentary canal in an insoluble form, so that, by administering a chemical preparation which forms with them soluble salts, they sometimes display their activity to an alarming and even dangerous extent. The rationale of the use of iodide of potassium, after the long-continued use of mercurials, is, that it forms an iodide of mercury, which it dissolves and carries off through the secretions; salivation is sometimes induced, un- expectedly, in this way. It is stated that patients, who have used antimonials, are sometimes nauseated by lemonade made from tar- taric acid, owing to the formation of tartar emetic from the undis- solved oxide of antimony. These facts are not without interest, in connection with the subject of prescribing. 458 LIQUID PREPARATIONS, SOLUTIONS, MIXTURES, ETC. Considering it necessary, as a general rule, to avoid the asso- ciation of substances which, by contact, may produce unknown or ill-defined compounds, or compounds different from those intended to be administered, I proceed to state briefly the most important rules relative to incompatibles:— 1. Whenever two salts, in a state of solution can, by the ex- change of their bases and acids, form a soluble and an insoluble salt, or two insoluble salts, the decomposition takes place, and the insoluble salt is precipitated, or, by combining with the soluble salt, gives birth to a double salt, which is rarely the case. 2. If we mix the solutions of two salts which cannot create a soluble salt, and an insoluble salt, a precipitate will not be formed, and most frequently there will be no decomposition, although this is not invariably the case. 3. In mixing any salt and a strong acid, a decomposition is very apt to take place. 4. Salts with feeble acids, especially carbonic and acetic, are alwrays decomposed by strong acids. 5. Alkalies in contact with the salts of the metals proper, or of the alkaloids, decompose them, precipitating their bases. 6. Metallic oxides, in contact with acids, combine with them and form salts whose properties are sometimes unlike either the acid oxides. 7. Vegetable astringents precipitate albumen, gelatin, vegetable alkalies, and numerous metallic oxides, and with salts of iron pro- duce black inky solutions. 8. The condition most favorable to chemical action is a solution of the salts in concentrated form without the intervention of viscid substances, so that when the indications require the employment of two substances which are incompatible, it is well to form a dilute solution of one of them in a mucilaginous or syrupy liquid before adding the other. In this way the decomposition may often be averted. In the table appended, some preparations are mentioned which, as a general rule, the practitioner should avoid combining with chemical substances; they are best given in simple solution, or some of them, with the addition of the Galenical preparations, or simple saccharine or mucilaginous excipients :— Acidum hydrocyanicum. Antimonii et potassse tartras. " nitro-muriaticum. Potassii cyanuretum. Liquor hydrarg. et arsen. iodid. " bromidum. " potassse arsenitis. " iodidum. " calcis. Ferri et pot. tartras. " barii chloridi. Quiniae sulphas. " calcii chloridi. Cinchonise sulphas. " iodinii compositus. Quinidiae sulphas. " potassse. Morphia sulphas. " ferri citratis. " murias. " morphise sulphatis. " acetas. " " nitratis. « valerianas. Tinct. ferri chloridi. Zinci acetas. Tinct. iodinii. Potassae acetas. EXCIPIENTS USED IN MIXTURES. 459 In addition to what has been said, it seems proper to notice what will be more particularly brought into view in commenting on the formulas which follow; the intentional use of medicines, in one sense, incompatible for the purpose of producing new and more desirable compounds. The proto-carbonate of iron is in this way produced from the sulphate and a carbonated alkali. The acetate of ammonia by the addition to a solution of the carbonate of acetic acid. In the same way black and yellow wash are extemporaneously prepared by adding to lime-water, calomel and corrosive sublimate, respectively. The association of sulphate of zinc and acetate of lead furnishes a familiar illustration of the same fact; the resulting pre- cipitate of sulphate of lead, occurring as an impalpable powder or magma, is favorable to the therapeutic object in view. Laudanum is quite incompatible with subacetate of lead; but one of the most popular of lotions contains these ingredients associated, so that it is not correct to say that these substances are incompati- ble in a medical sense, however, in a purely chemical point of view, they may be considered so. Pharmaceutical incompatibles are those in which a disturbance of a solution takes place in a way not considered strictly chemical. My observation has satisfied me that these are very commonly asso- ciated, though little observed. In speaking of pills, I referred to some pharmaceutical incompatibles, and may now instance others. If we add tincture of Tolu to an aqueous solution, the resin of the Tolu separates almost entirely as a coagulum, and collects on the side of the bottle, thus being lost as a medicinal ingredient of the preparation, besides rendering it very unsightly. The same remark applies to other resinous tinctures. The admixture of tincture of guaiacum with the spirit of nitric ether is another instance; the resinous tincture gelatinizes into a mass, and is unfit for use. The addition of tincture of cinnamon to infusion of digitalis after filtration, as directed in the Pharmacopoeia, occasions a precipitate. List of Pharmaceutical Incompatibles. Comp. infusion of cinchona, with comp. infusion gentian. Essential oils with aqueous liquids in quantities exceeding 1 drop to f gj. Fixed oils and copaiva, with aqueous liquids, except with excipients. Spirit of nitric ether with strong mucilages. Infusions generally with metallic salts. Compound infusion of gentian with infusion of wild cherry. Tinctures made with strong alcohol, with those made with weak alcohol. Tinctures made with strong alcohol, with infusions and aqueous liquids. Excipients used in Mixtures, &c. The consideration of excipients will bring into view the best modes of overcoming some of these pharmaceutical incompatibilities. 460 LIQUID PREPARATIONS, SOLUTIONS, MIXTURES, ETC. In the form of mixture we use, in the first place, as diluents— Water. Compound infusion of rose. The medicated waters. Emulsion of almonds. Syrups. Honey of rose. As excipients or constituents in a stricter sense— Pow'd acacia, "I • -, ■ , Extracts. c ' >mixed or singly. v ,, P Sugar, J & J Yelk of egg. Powd. tragacanth. White of egg. Confections. As flavoring agents with viscid ingredients— f Cinnamon. f Ginger. Essential oils of j ^j^. Tinctures of j ™^ p mint< [ Caraway, &c. [_ " of mint. As flavoring and coloring agents with or without viscid ingre- dients— Tincture of cinnamon. Comp. tincture of gentian. Compound tincture of cinnamon. Fluid extract of vanilla. Tincture of cardamom. Ginger syrup. Compound tincture of cardamom. Tolu syrup. Compound spirit of lavender. Fruit syrups, &c. The diluents are useful as enabling us to divide the doses of an active medicine to almost any extent; they correspond to the sugar, gum, aromatic powder, &c, prescribed for a similar purpose with powders, and with conserve of rose and some other bulky additions used in pill masses. The immense utility of excipients, and flavoring agents generally, will be best illustrated by the examples which follow. The skilful employment of these adds greatly to the success of the prescriber. The necessity of limiting the number of prescriptions given, and the importance of including in them a considerable variety of medi- cinal agents, will forbid the illustration of all the numerous points in this connection, and much will necessarily be left to be filled up by the ingenuity of the learner. EXTEMPORANEOUS SOLUTIONS, MIXTURES, &c. Astringents. No. 61.—Mistura Cretce, U. S. (Chalk Mixture, or Chalk Julep.) Take of Prepared chalk . . . . §ss. Sugar, Powdered gum Arabic, each . . 3ij. Cinnamon water, Water, each.....fgiv. Eub them together till they are thoroughly mixed. ASTRINGENTS. 461 To this, which is a very popular antacid astringent, the addition is often made of tincture of kino, or some similar vegetable astrin- gent, either with or without tincture of opium. In the absence of cinnamon water, two drops of the oil of cinnamon for each ounce of that water ordered, may be added to the dry* ingredients. As the mixture does not keep very well, it is a convenient plan to keep the powders ready mixed, and add the water when required. Chalk mixture is giving in an adult dose of 3ss. No. 62.—Parrish's Camphor Mixture. (Dr. Parrish, Sen.) R.—Aquas camphoras.....f |iij. Spiritus lavandulas compositi . . . f Jj. Sacchari.......3j. Misce. Give a tablespoonful every two hours in diarrhoea and cholera- morbus, adding ten drops of laudanum when there is much pain. This preparation, which was originally prescribed in 1832, has been found so generally useful and safe that it has become a stand- ard remedy, and is prepared and sold by all druggists in Philadel- phia and its vicinity. No. 63.—Hope's Camphor Mixture. R.—Aquas camphoras . . . f 3iv. Acidi nitrosi ... . "I xxx. Tincturas opii . . . . "i xx vel. xl. Misce. Dose, a tablespoonful every two hours in diarrhoea and dysentery.1 1 Extracted from the Edinburgh Medical and SurgicalJournal, January, 1824. Ob- servations on the Powerful Effects of a Mixture containing Nitrous Acid and Opium in curing Dysentery, Cholera, and Diarrhoea. By Thomas Hope, Esq., Surgeon, Chatham. —" More than twenty-six years ago, when attending a case of dysentery in which the usual remedies had been prescribed in vain, the patient determined, on his own accord, to take a medicine I had sent for his nurse, who was worn out with attention to her charge, and complained of excessive thirst. It occurred to me to give an acid to alle- viate her complaint, and in order to obviate any unpleasant effects, to join opium with it; I accordingly sent the following : R.—Acidi nitrosi ^ij; Ext. opii gr. ij ; Aquse gij.—M. Cap. cochl. minus ter quarterve in die; and the patient with dysentery having taken some of this medicine, the effect produced was so great that it no less surprised him, who, by a continuance of it, recovered, than it did myself. " The form of the medicine, as I have used it in all the cases referred to, is as under:— R.—Acid, nitrosi.....3J- Mist, camphor . . . . gviij. Misce et adde Tinct. opii.....gtt. xl. Sig.—One-fourth part to be taken every three or four hours. " In chronic dysentery, the dose of two ounces three times a day is quite sufficient; the remedy is grateful to the taste; abates thirst; soon removes the intensity of pain; and procures, in general, a speedy and permanent relief. No previous preparation is required for taking it, nor any other care whilst taking it, except the keeping of the hands and feet warm, preserving the body as much as possible from exposure to ex- 462 LIQUID PREPARATIONS, SOLUTIONS, MIXTURES, ETC. No. 64.—A New Bemedy in Hemorrhages. Take of Oil of erigeron.....f 3j. Sugar ^......3ij. Gum Arabic.....3j- Triturate the oil with the gum and sugar into a dry powder, then add— Water .... fgij, f 3yj. Sig.—Take a tablespoonful three times a day. Dr. E. Wilson and others have had considerable success in the treatment of uterine hemorrhages with the oil of erigeron; in the doses here prescribed, each f3 contains gtt. v of the oil. Alteratives, &c. No. 65.—Blue Mass and Chalk Mixture. Take of Mercurial mass, in powder . . 3ss. Prepared chalk, . . . . 3j- Gum Arabic, in powder, Sugar, do., of each . 3ss. Tincture of opium .... "ixxx. Aromatic syrup of rhubarb . f^j, f3yj. Triturate into a uniform mixture. Dose, f5j to stimulate the secretion of bile, and check diarrhoea. Tincture of kino or other astringents may be added. No. 66.— Creasote Mixture. Take of Creasote.......gtt. xvj. Powdered gum Arabic . . . . 3j- Sugar.......3ss. Water.......fgij. Triturate the creasote with the gum and sugar, then gradually add the water and triturate to a uniform mixture. Dose, a teaspoonful containing one drop of creasote, used in bronchitis, phthisis, &c, and to check vomiting. Creasote is solu- ble in water to the extent of i^-V to flj, and for external use is best made into a suitable solution by shaking up with water. treme cold or currents of air, and making use of warm barley-water or thin gruel, and a diet of sago or tapioca. " It is necessary to mention that the remedy, the good effects of which I now detail, is nitrous acid with opium, not nitric acid. I have not found nitric acid with opium to produce any good effect, for, having expended my nitrous acid, I sent to a chemist for a fresh supply, who, by mistake, sent me nitric acid, which I used merely by way of trial, but found it not in any way beneficial to my patients." tonics. 463 Tonics. No. 67.—Fever and Ague Mixture. R.—Powdered red bark.....3iij. Confection of opium, Lemon-juice......3iss. Port wine.......f*3 iij. Mix by trituration in a mortar. Dose, three tablespoonfuls morning, noon, and night, the day the fever is off. Some recipes direct powdered serpentaria in addition to the above. Though not an elegant, this is a most efficient and valuable com- bination. No. 68.—Mistura Ferri Composita, TJ. S. (Griffith's Myrrh Mixture) Take of Myrrh, Sugar, of each . . . . . 3j- Carbonate of potassa . . . . gr. xxv. Triturate together into a fine milky mixture with Rose water......f^viiss. Then add Spirit of lavender (simple) . . . f^ss. Sulphate of iron, in powder . . . 9j. Dose, a tablespoonful according to circumstances, given as a tonic in phthisis, and in anasmic cases generally. The strict phraseology of the Pharmacopoeia has been departed from above in the hope of rendering the pharmaceutical points in the preparation more clear. The sulphate of iron and carbonate of potassa here used, form by double decomposition the sulphate of potassa and protocarbo- nate of iron, which latter floats in the milky mixture of myrrh and sugar, giving it a green color. This is, however, in very small proportion, so that in each f 3ss dose, there is not more than gr. ss. This preparation is, however, a very useful and an elegant one. (See Pil. Ferri Carbonatis and Ferri Subcarbonatis.) No. 69.—A good Preparation of Iron and Cinchona. (Substitute for Tinctura Cinchona Ferrata.—See p. 118.) R.—Tinct. cinchon. comp.1.....f^iv. Ferri citratis......3j- Acidi citrici.......gr. xv. 1 Tinct. cinchonse et quassiae comp. makes a better preparation, and scarcely pre- cipitates at all. 464 LIQUID PREPARATIONS, SOLUTIONS, MIXTURES, ETC. Triturate the citric acid and citrate of iron together, and dissolve in the tincture of cinchona. Liq. ferri citratis f 3j may be used as a substitute for the rather insoluble salt. The dose is a teaspoon- ful, containing two grains of citrate of iron. The citric acid breaks up any tannate of iron as soon as formed, and it is reproduced on the addition of an alkali. There is a lia- bility to considerable precipitate of cinchonic red, but very little iron is thrown down. No. 70.—A Concentrated Solution of Quinia and Iron. R.—Quinias sulphatis......9j. Tr. ferri chloridi......f3iiss. Ft. solutio. One grain of sulph. quinia is contained in every 7| minims (about 15 drops) of the solution, which is an appropriate dose; it may be made three times the strength. To prescribe it in a more diluted form, add water fjij, and syrup of orange-peel (or other suitable syrup) f3 iij - The dose will then be a teaspoonful, equiva- lent to 1 gr. of the quinia salt. No. 71.—A Bitter Tonic for Dyspepsia. R.—Tr. cinchonas et quassias comp. . . . Oiv. Tincturas nucis vomicas . . . . f5j. Misce. A teaspoonful 3 times a day in a little sugar and water. This is one of the very best recipes of its kind. No. 72.—Aromatic and Antacid Corrective of Indigestion. R.—Sodas bicarbonatis.....9iv. Infus. gentianas comp. .... f§iiss. Aquas menthas pip. ..... fliij. Tinct. cardamomi comp.....f|ss. Dose, a tablespoonful as required. The above makes a handsome preparation; it was furnished me by my friend Dr. J. J. Levick. Arterial Stimulants. No. 73.— Carbonate of Ammonia Mixture. Dose contains Take of Carbonate of ammonia . gr. X. Powdered gum Arabic . gr. x. Sugar, each . 3iss gr. x. Comp. spirit of ether, *l XV. " tinct of cardam., each ' f5ij "1 XV. Water .... f^iiisa Make a mixture. Dose, a tablespoonful every two or three NERVOUS STIMULANTS. 465 hours. A stimulant in low conditions, as in the last stages of disease. No. 74.— Oil of Turpentine Mixture. R.—Olei terebinthinas......f3iij. Pulv. acacias, Sacchari, aa . . . . . . . 9ij. Tinct. opii......."I L. Aquas cinnamomi ..... flvss. Triturate the gum and sugar with flj of the cinnamon water, and add the other ingredients. The yelk of an egg may be substi- tuted advantageously for the gum and sugar, and a part of the water. Dose, f3j, containing about "l iv of the oil, and "I j of tinc- ture of opium. Nervous Stimulants. No. 75.—Mistura Assafcetidce, U. S. (Milk of Assafoetida) Take of Assafoetida......3ij- Water......Oss. Rub the assafoetida with the water gradually added until they are thoroughly mixed. A good extemporaneous way to prepare this very popular antispasmodic, is to form a wine of assafoetida, as directed by Henry N. Rittenhouse, of this city, by triturating Sss of the gum resin, with f3x wine. It should be carefully selected, so as not to require straining; this wine will keep, and is converted into the mixture by adding to water in the proportion of 3j (by weight) to each f^j. Milk of assafoetida is much prescribed and extensively used as a domestic remedy. Dose, from f3j to Oss. No. 76.—" Chloroform Paregoric" of Dr. Henry Hartshorne. Take of Chloroform, Tincture of opium, " of camphor, Arom. spt. of ammonia, of each . . f3iss. Oil of cinnamon.....gtt. iij. Brandy......f3ij. Dose, f3ss, or less in spasmodic affections of the stomach, cholera, &c. Several practitioners have used this preparation with favor- able results in severe cases. 30 466 LIQUID PREPARATIONS, SOLUTIONS, MIXTURES, ETC. Narcotics. No. 77.—Liquor Morphice Sulphatis, U. S. Reduced. Take of Sulphate of morphia . . gr. viij gr.j. Distilled water . . . Oss. f3j. Dissolve the morphia in the distilled water. This is an illustra- tion of the most convenient method of giving small doses of soluble substances; here the proportions are so adjusted, that each tea- spoonful shall represent \ gr. of morphia, which is a rather small dose. A favorite prescription for after-pains in obstetric practice, is a solution of sulphate of morphia in camphor water, in the same pro- portion as the above. Dose, the same. Arterial and Nervous Sedatives. No. 78.—A good Anti-Fever Combination. R.—Yini antimonii, Spt. astheris nit., aa . . flss Tinct. digitalis . . . f3j Syr. acidi citrici . . . fliij Misce. Sig.—Take a teaspoonful every 3 or 4 hours. No. 79.—Bemedy in Pulmonary and Catarrhal Diseases, &c, Unattended by Fever. R.—Acidi hydrocyanici.....gtt. xl. Vini antimonii ...... f^ss. Syrupi tolutana ...... fliss. Mucil. acacias......fjij. M., fiat mistura, capiat cochl. parvum ter quarterve die. This, with several similar combinations of hydrocyanic acid, is highly recommended by Dr. Horace Green, and published by him among his selections from favorite prescriptions collected from dis- tinguished American physicians, in a scrap-book kept for the pur- pose. Rendered much more dilute, this is recommended as the best of remedies for hooping-cough. Cathartics. No. 80.— Castor Oil Mixture. Take of Gum Arabic, in powder, Sugar, of each .... 3iij. Oil of mint.....gtt. iv. In each, fgj. »l viij. ni viij. Ttlij. CATHARTICS. 467 Triturate into a uniform powder, and add water f 3yj, or sufficient to bring the mucilage to the consistence of castor oil, then add, by degrees, castor oil f3j, continuing the trituration till it combines into a perfect emulsion. Dilute this by adding water sufficient to make fsiv. This will make a perfect castor oil emulsion. If oil of turpen- tine is to be incorporated with it, let it be added to the mixed gum and sugar, before introducing the water and oil, or let it be first perfectly mixed with the castor oil. If laudanum, or some car- minative and coloring adjuvant is desirable, it may be added at the time of bottling. In no case should the oil be introduced into the bottle until combined with the other ingredients, as a portion will then adhere to the sides, and be imperfectly incorporated with the gum. Each tablespoonful of this mixture contains f3j of oil, and may be given every hour till the desired effect is produced. Several demulcent mixtures—as those of olive oil, almond oil, &c.—may be made upon this model. Copaiva mixture, introduced among the diuretics, may have a similar composition. The propor- tion of gum and sugar to the oily ingredient (3iij each, to flj) should be remembered, as it applies equally to the other cases named. Taraxacum and other Mixtures. By the judicious admixture of the fluid extracts of taraxacum, senna, &c, with saline cathartics, some excellent purgative combi- nations may be formed. No. 81.—A good Antibilious Mixture. R.—Carbo ligni Sodas bicarb. Mass hydrargyri Syrupi rhei aromat. Aquas Triturate together into a uniform mixture 3j- 3ss. gr. viij. f.?ij. fSij. Dose, a tablespoonful. This was furnished by Dr. John D. Griscom, who finds it to meet a very common indication in general practice. No. 82.—A good Magnesia Mixture for Children Take of Magnesia (Husband's) . . . 3j 3ss. Powd. gum Arabic Triturate together, and add Aromat. syrup of rhubarb Fennel-seed water . A teaspoonful is an appropriate dose. To this mixture may be added say gr. xv of mercurial mass, which should be triturated fliss. 468 LIQUID PREPARATIONS, SOLUTIONS, MIXTURES, ETC. with the powder, and, if required, the addition of say "Iviij of laudanum, or f3j of paregoric. The precaution of shaking up before administering should not be overlooked. No. 83.—Extemporaneous- Cream of Tartar Draught. Take of Tartaric acid.....3ix. Water......f^vj. Make solution, and label No. 1. Bicarb, potassa.....3iv. Water......f3vj. Make solution, and label No. 2. Mix from one to two tablespoonfuls of No. 1 with the same quantity of No. 2, and drink immediately. In this way, the bitart- rate of potassa is obtained in solution, although, if the mixture be allowed to stand a few minutes, it will deposit the salt in a white crystalline powder. The following soluble powders may not inappropriately be in- troduced here. No. 84.—Aperient Seidlitz Powders. Take of Bicarbonate of soda . . . 9ij. Tartrate of potassa and soda . 3ij- Mix, and fold in blue paper. Tartaric acid . . . . gr. xxxv. Fold in white paper. Directions for use.—Take two glasses, with about a gill of cold water in each; dissolve in one the contents of the blue and in the other of the white paper. Mix, and drink immediately. Diuretics. No. 85.—Emulsion of Fluid Extract of Cubebs. Take of Fluid ext. of cubebs . . . gtt. cxx. Yelk of egg .... one. Sugar, powdered . . . 3vj- Mint water sufficient to make a . f^iij mixture. Triturate the fluid extract with the powdered sugar, and yelk of egg, and then dilute with the water. Direct a teaspoonful four times a day. This may be made by substituting 3ij powdered gum Arabic, and 3j sugar, for the yelk of egg. It is a fine stimulant to the diuretics. 469 mucous surfaces, adapted to catarrhs, &c, as well as to urinary dis- eases. The dose is f3j, containing hlv of the oleo-resin of cubebs. No. 86.—Alkaline Copaiva Mixture. R.—Copaibas, Liq. potassas, aa Pulv. acacias, " sacchari, aa Aq. menth. virid. f3i> 3ij. q. s. ut fiat f 3iv. Mix the copaiva and solution of potassa, add the water, and triturate with the gum and sugar. In this prescription, which is prescribed by my friend, Dr. Wil- liam Hunt, the-copaiva is combined into a soap with the alkali, and would be perfectly suspended without the aid of gum and sugar, which are added to obtund the acrid taste. Of course, oil of cubebs, tincture of opium, and other adjuvants, may be added if required. The usual method of suspending copaiva is similar to tliat given in prescription No. 80. The dose is a tablespoonful, containing nixv of copaiva. No. 87.—Extemporaneous Solution of Acetate of Potassa. Take of Acetic acid .... f3vj. Water.....f^iij. Potass, bicarb. . . . 3iijss, or sufficient to form a neutral solution. This is designed to obviate the necessity of weighing the very deliquescent acetate of potassa, and will contain, to each f3j, about ten grains of the salt, which is an appropriate dose. The admixture of fluid extract of taraxacum, or of buchu, or of spirit of nitric ether, will be appropriate in certain cases. No. 88.—Scudamore's Mixture for Gout. R.—Sulphate of magnesia . . . . Sj Mint water Vinegar of colchicum Syrup of saffron Magnesia . . Ox. f3j. fSj. 3y, 9y. Mix. Dose, one to three tablespoonfuls every two hours till four to six evacuations are procured in the twenty-four hours. Na 89.—Dewees' Colchicum Mixture. R.—Wine of colchicum seed . \ . . gtt. xxx. Denarcotized laudanum . . . gtt. xxv. Sugar......gr.xxx. Water......faj. Mix. To be taken at night in one draught. 470 liquid preparations, solutions, mixtures, etc. Diaphoretics. No. 90.—Liquid Substitute for Dover's Powder. R.—Yin. ipecac. ...... i^lxvj. Tinct. opii......tt\, xiij. Spirit, astheris nit. ■. . . f3j. Mix. Sig.—Take at one dose at going to bed. No. 91.—Liquor Potassce Citratis, TJ. S. (Neutral Mixture, or Saline Draught.) Reduced. Take of Fresh lemon-juice . . . Oss f giv. Bicarbonate of potassa . . q. s. q. s. Add the bicarbonate to the lemon-juice till it is perfectly saturated, then filter, or Reduced. Take of Citric acid.....3ss. 3ij. Oil of lemons . . . . "I ij. *l j. Water......Oss. Oiv. Bicarbonate of potassa . . . q. s. q. s. Rub the citric acid with the oil of lemon, and afterwards with the water till it is dissolved, then add the bicarbonate gradually till the acid is perfectly saturated; lastly, filter. The lemon-juice may be obtained by cutting and expressing the lemon either with the fingers or a lemon-squeezer, and the little strainer, Fig. 212, which will set into the top of the graduated mea- Fig. 212. sure or of a beaker glass, Fig. 213, will serve to separate the seed or any portion of the pulp of the lemon. Care must ]?e taken in adding the bicarbonate to use a glass rod, porcelain spatula, silver spoon, or similar utensil which will not corrode or impart a metallic taste to the preparation. It will also facilitate the operation of saturating the acid to triturate the crystals of bicarbonate in a dry mortar into a powder before adding it little by little to the liquid. The delay of filtering through paper may be very much obviated DIAPHORETICS. 471 by using a fine linen strainer, or by plugging the base of the glass funnel, Fig. 214, with some cotton, and pouring the liquid through it into the containing vial; it is an object to conduct this operation 213. Fig. 214. quickly, so as to retain and bottle up as much as possible the car- bonic acid gas liberated in the reaction. There is another point worth attention; in making the solution by the second process with citric acid, it is well to weigh the bicarbonate beforehand, and then the whole amount being added there will be no doubt as to the exact saturation of the acid; this is not practicable in the lemon- juice process, as there is no certainty as to its strength; the proper proportion of bicarbonate, to the Iss (240 grs.) of citric acid, is 336 grains; or to the 3ij of acid, 168 grains, or about 3»j, 9ij; a propor- tion which it is well to remember, as it comes in play in all the other processes. It has always been my custom to cease the addition of the alkaline carbonate before it becomes perfectly saturated, or rather to err on the side of acidity than that of alkalinity. A slight excess of alkali may render the solution quite disagreeable, while, on the other hand, the excess of acid should be extremely small. This prolific subject will be concluded by presenting the following additional formulas:— Reduced. No. 92.—Take of Citrate of potassa . . 3vj 3«j. Water . . . -Oss fhv. Sugar . . • • 3ss gr.xv. Oil of lemon . . . «lj gtt. j. Make a solution. Here there is no effervescence, and, consequently, no carbonic acid in the solution. In other respects it is the best recipe, because so perfectly neutral and so readily made. The sugar may be omitted or not, at pleasure, but seems to me to improve it. The following recipe is that of my friend, Ambrose Smith:— No. 93.—To Make Effervescing Neutral Mixture Extemporaneously. Reduced. Take of Bicarbonate of potassa . . Siij ?vj. Citric acid .... 3ij,3iy 3ss, 9ij, gr. v. Sugar.....31SS < 3"J. Oil of lemon .... gtt. xvj "I iv. 472 LIQUID PREPARATIONS, SOLUTIONS, MIXTURES, ETC. Mix thoroughly and reduce to a uniform powder, and keep in a well-stopped bottle. To make neutral mixture dissolve 3yj, 3j in Oss water (3iij, gr. x to fliv); this proportion, however, is some- what less than the strength of the lemon-juice saturated with bicar- bonate of potassa, and is graduated to suit the views of many prac- titioners. No. 94.—Effervescing Draught. Take of Bicarbonate of potassa . . 3ij to 9ij. Water.....f^iv. Make a solution. Directions.—Take a tablespoonful of lemon-juice diluted with a tablespoonful of water, and add to it in a tumbler a tablespoonful of this solution, then drink immediately; or thus— Take of Citric acid.....3iij. Oil of lemon....."ij. Water......f^iv. Make a solution and label No. 1; the acid solution. Take of Bicarbonate of potassa . . . 3ij, 9ij. Sugar......3j- Water......fSiv. Make a solution and label No. 2; the alkaline solution. Directions.—To a tablespoonful of No. 1, add a tablespoonful of water, and to the mixture, in a clean tumbler, add a tablespoonful of No. 2 ; drink immediately. No. 95.—Effervescing Fever Powders. Take of Citric acid, dried and powdered, 3v. Divide into twelve parts wrapped in white writing paper. Take of Bicarbonate of potassa, dried and powdered, 3viss. Divide into twelve parts, wrapped in blue paper. Inclose these white and blue powders alternately in a tin box. Directions.—Dissolve the contents of a white paper in a tumbler, one-third full of cold water, then stir in the contents of a blue paper and drink immediately. A dose is usually given every two or three hours, during the pre- valence of the fever. The various forms of citrate of potassa, which are now described, constitute favorite remedies in fever; sometimes spirit of nitric ether, tartar emetic, tincture of digitalis, or other remedies are added to them. The effervescing draught is said to be the best way to give alterative or sedative doses of tartar emetic when the stomach is irritable. Soda and yeast powders may be introduced here, although not strictly belonging to the class under consideration. EXPECTORANTS. 473 No. 96.— Carbonated Soda Powders. For making a draught of soda water extemporaneously. Take of Bicarbonate of soda gr. xxiij. Fold in a blue paper. Tartaric acid . . gr. xx. Fold in a white paper. Directions for use.—Dissolve one of the powders contained in the white and blue papers in separate tumblers, each nearly half full of water (spring water is preferable), stir them up for a few seconds, to render the solution complete, then mix their contents and drink immediately. A little syrup may be added to one or both of the glasses before mixing. These are usually put into boxes contain- ing twelve of each kind of powders. Yeast Powders. A substitute for yeast in making batter cakes, having the ad- vantage of making the batter perfectly light and ready for baking without delay, and greatly diminishing the liability to become sour. Many dyspeptics, who cannot tolerate fresh light cakes when made with yeast, can eat them with impunity when raised in this way. Fold in a blue paper Bicarbonate of soda . . 120 grs. " in a white paper Tartaric acid . . . 100 grs. Directions for use.—Put the contents of a white and blue paper into separate teacups filled with water, and stir until perfectly dis- solved. Mix a sufficient quantity of batter for six or eight persons a little thicker than usual, to allow for the liquid in which the pow- ders are dissolved; and when ready for baking stir in well the contents of one teacup, then add the other and stir it well, and commence baking immediately. A more economical way, and sufficiently accurate in view of the harmlessness of the ingredients, is to keep supplies of the bicarbon- ate of soda and tartaric acid in separate bottles, which will insure their perfect dryness, and then when wanted for use take a small teaspoonful of each, and dissolve as above. The equivalent weights of these ingredients, as given above, have very nearly the same bulk. If bitartrate of potassa is substituted for tartaric acid, it must be used in about twice the quantity, and being insoluble, must be suspended in water and thoroughly stirred in. Expectorants, &c. JS[0> 97.—Mistura Ammoniaci, U. S. (Lac Ammoniac.) Take of Ammonrac......3ij- Water.......Oss. Rub the ammoniac with the water, gradually added, until they are thoroughly mixed. 474 LIQUID PREPARATIONS, SOLUTIONS, MIXTURES, ETC. Reduced 3j. 3j. . Iss 3j- . Oij f5ss. . m f3ij. . flss f3j. . flxij fSiij. No. 98.—Mistura Glycyrrhizce Composita, TJ. S. (Brown Mixture) Take of Liquorice, in powder Gum Arabic " Sugar, each Camph. tincture of opium Antimonial wine Spirit of nitric ether Water .... Rub the liquorice, gum Arabic, and sugar with the water, gradu- ally poured upon them; then add the other ingredients, and mix. The dose of this very popular cough medicine is a tablespoonful, or for children f3j. No. 99.—Mistura Amygdalae, U. S. Take of Sweet almonds . . . . . . 3ss. Gum Arabic ...... 3ss. Sugar.......3ij. Distilled water ...... f J viij. Macerate the almonds in water, and, having removed their ex- ternal coat, beat them with the gum Arabic and sugar in a marble mortar till they are thoroughly mixed ; then rub the mixture with the distilled water, gradually added, and strain. This mixture is introduced here, though not belonging appro- priately to either of the therapeutical classes. Its chief use is as a vehicle for substances to be used in the liquid form; it may be well substituted by Syrupus Amygdalae, for most purposes. No. 100.—A good Cough Mixture. R.—Syrupus tolutanus, " ipecacuanhas, aa . . . Oj. Pulv. acacias.....3j. Tinct. opii camph., " lobelias, aa f 3iij. Aquas......3j. Triturate the gum and water together, and add the other ingredi- ents in the vial. Dose, a teaspoonful. This was furnished by Dr. S. W. Butler, of Burlington, N. J., who has used it with great satisfaction. No. 101.—A Cough Mixture of Acetone, Wine of Tar, &c. R.—Acetone.....f3j. Camph. tinct. of opium, Antimonial wine, of each . . flj. Wine of tar (Jew's beer) . . f Iij. Mix. Dose, a teaspoonful. Often prescribed by Dr. Washington L. Atlee. EXPECTORANTS, ETC. 475 No. 102.—Spermaceti Mixture. Take of Spermaceti......3ij. Olive oil ...... 3j. Powd. gum Arabic .... |ss. Water.......fliv. Triturate the spermaceti with the oil, until reduced to a paste, then add the gum, and lastly the water, gradually. Dose, f 3j. No. 103.—Hooping- Cough Mixture. R.—Carbonate of potassa . . . 9j. Powdered cochineal . . . 9ss. Sugar .... Water .... 3j. fliv. Make a mixture. Dose for children, f 5j, every two or three hours. An old and very popular remedy. No. 104.—For Hooping- Cough. (By Golding Bird.) R.—Aluminis . . . . . gr. xxiv. Ext. conii . . . . . gr. xij. Aq. anethi (vel foeniculi) . . f 5iij. Syrup, papav.....Oij.—M. Sig.—For an adult, a dessertspoonful every six hours. No. 105.—Tolu Cough Mixture. R.—Syr. scillas.....f|j. Pulv, acacias, Sacchari, aa 3iij- Aquas......Ovj. Tinct. tolutani .... f3ij. Misce secundem artem. Dose, f 3j. No. 106.— Cod-liver Oil and Biniodide of Mercury. Take of Red iodide of mercury . . . gr. viij. Cod-liver oil.....Oj. Triturate together. This forms a clear solution, and each tablespoonful dose contains I gr. biniodide of mercury. This is a combination occasionally indicated. Iodine itself is sometimes given in the oil, and from J to | grain to f Ij, makes a good addition in certain cases. The mode of administering the fixed oils may here claim atten- tion. None of the modes of compounding these materially improve 476 EXTERNAL APPLICATIONS. their taste, but by observing to prevent their contact with the mouth in swallowing, the chief objection to them is obviated. This may be variously accomplished by enveloping them in the froth of fermented liquors, or by pouring them into a glass partially filled with iced water, or an aromatized water, so that no portion of the oil shall touch or adhere to the sides of the glass. When mineral water is convenient, it furnishes, with sarsaparilla syrup, one of the best vehicles for castor or cod-liver oil; there should be but little water drawn, but it should be thrown up as much as possible into froth. Alterative preparations are much made by the addition to the various iodine, mercurial, and other alterative salts, of the Galenical preparations of sarsaparilla, conium, &c. As a general rule, these salts are incompatible with each other; those which are insoluble are generally conveniently prescribed with iodide of potassium, which is, in fact, one of their most natural associated solvents. (See Syrups) CHAPTER IY. EXTERNAL APPLICATIONS, &c. Lotions, Collyria, Injections, Gargles, Baths, Inhalations, Cerates, Ointments, Liniments, and Plasters. The preparation of these classes requires no different manipula- tions from the foregoing; indeed they are, for the most part, simple solutions prepared without any particular skill. Soluble salts, chiefly of the astringent class, dissolved in distilled water, or in distilled rose-water, designed for external application, constitute lotions, or washes; these are to be applied to the surface, usually upon a folded piece of muslin or lint, chiefly for cooling and astringent purposes. Lead-water (page 391) is the only officinal lotion. Yinegar and water, or water alone, is applied for the same purposes. In various chronic skin diseases, lotions containing sul- phuret of potassium, chloride of zinc, corrosive chloride of mercury, borax, solution of chlorinated soda, and other chemical agents are employed. Glycerin, by its solubility in water, and its emollient properties, is well adapted to this form of application. The recipes appended are selected as illustrations of this class; they are -all well-known preparations. EXTERNAL applications. 477 No. 107.— Creasote Lotion. R.—Creasoti.....gtt. x. Aceti......f3ij. Aquas.....fgij. Mix. Applied to phagedenic ulceration, chancres, and a variety of sores. No. 108.— Yellow Wash. (Aquce Phagcedenica) R.—Hydrargyri chloridi corrosivi . gr. xvj. Liquor is calcis .... f I viij. Mix. The binoxide of mercury is precipitated as a yellow powder, and diffused through the liquid ; sometimes the proportion is diminished to gr. j in each f I. It is a very popular application to certain skin affections and to venereal sores. No. 109.—Black Wash. R.—Hydrargyri chloridi mitis . . 3j. Liquor is calcis , . . . f oiv. Mix. Protoxide of mercury is here thrown down by the lime as a black precipitate, though there is quite an excess of calomel. It has similar applications to the foregoing. No. 110.— Granville's Counter-irritant, or Antidynous Lotions. The mild:— R.—Liquoris ammonias fortioris . . flj. Spiritus rosmarini .... f3yj. Tincturas camphoras .... f3vj- Misce. No. 111. The strong:— R.—Liquoris ammonias fortioris . . f3x. Spiritus rosmarini .... f3iv. § Tincturas camphoras . . . f3ij- Misce. # These preparations will blister in periods varied from two to ten minutes, by saturating with them a piece of linen folded five or six times over a coin, and pressing it upon the part. Over more extended surfaces, a similar method is adopted by protecting the lotion from evaporation. Collyria. Collyria are lotions for application to the eye, called eye-washes. They are generally composed of astringent salts, as sulphate or acetate of zinc, sulphate of copper, or of iron or nitrate of silver, 478 EXTERNAL APPLICATIONS. the proportion seldom exceeding gr. viij to f|j. A good prescrip- tion is appended. No. 112.—A good Eye- Water. Take of Sulphate of zinc, Chloride of sodium, each . . • 9j- Rose-water (distilled) . . . flj. Make a solution and apply, suitably diluted, to inflamed eyes. The infusion of sassafras pith is a good addition to this and simi- lar eye-washes. The aqueous extract, or the wine of opium, is much used in collyria. Injections. Injections are solutions intended to be thrown into the external ear, the urethra, bladder, vagina, &c. They resemble the foregoing class in composition and in strength. In gonorrhoea, the use of in- jections of the astringent metallic salts is very common, as also of vegetable astringents. It will not be important in this work to give formulas for any of the numerous injections used for these purposes. The custom of injecting tepid water and various bland liquids into the rectum, for the relief of costiveness, has become exceed- ingly common of latter years, and the forms of apparatus contrived are numerous and ingenious, constituting a considerable article of trade with druggists and apothecaries. Gargles. Gargles and mouth-washes are applications much used in the treatment of so-called sore throat, and in scorbutic affections of the gums, which are exceedingly common and are popularly treated by counter-irritation, and by the use of Astringent and stimulating gargles. Infusions of capsicum, of vegetable astringents, and of sage, with the addition of alum, borax, or sulphate of zinc, and almost invariably honey, are the prevailing remedies of this class. A single recipe may be given. No. 113.—For a good Gargle and Mouth- Wash. - R.—Sodas boratis . . >. . 3j- Aquas rosas.....fsij. Mellis......fgj. Misce et adde R.—Tincturas myrrhas .... Oss. capsici.....f 3ij. Use as a gargle every two or three hours, diluted with water. Baths. Baths are either hot, warm, tepid, or cold, or consist in the appli- cation of vapor merely. They are variously medicated for the prescription for inhalation. 479 Fig. 215. treatment of diseases of the skin, and for producing general or local revulsive effects. They possess little strictly pharmaceutical interest. Inhalations. Inhalation has lately become a good deal resorted to as a remedy in chronic catarrhs, bronchitis, incipient phthisis, &c. I have re- peatedly prepared the apparatus and furnished the ingredients for the following:— No. 114.—Prescription for Inhalation. Into an inhaler of glass put infusum humuli, U. S., f|iv, at a temperature of about 120° F., and add liq. iodinii compositus, nixx. Inhale from five to ten minutes, morning and evening. In acute cases, this is found to give great relief, and by continued application produces most happy restorative effects. In place of Lugol's solution, it has been suggested to use an ethereal or chloro- form tincture of iodine, adding a little iodide of potassium to prevent pre- cipitation on adding it to the hop- tea, or other aqueous liquid. Fig. 215 exhibits two forms of in- haling apparatus; the lower one is adapted to this use. An ordinary wide-mouth packing bottle is fitted with a cork which is perforated by the cork-borer or rat-tail file (see Figs. 169 and 170, page 220), so as to admit of two tubes, the smaller for the in- gress of air passing nearly to the bottom of the bottle, while the larger, which is bent to be applied to the mouth, may have its origin just be- low the bottom of the cork. A little cork may be put into the top of the small tube when not in use. In re- plenishing the inhaler, before each operation, the cork^is removed. The tube may be bent by softening it over the flame of an alcohol lamp or gas- . furnace, and holding it in such position that its own weight will cause it to bend gradually and uniformly to the required curve. Cerates and Ointments. These classes of preparations are widely separated in the Phar- macopoeia, where an alphabetical arrangement is adopted, but they so closely resemble each other in a pharmaceutical point of view as to be naturally associated in a work like the present. 480 external applications. The difference between a cerate and an ointment is in their rela- tive firmness and fusibility ; the former is designed to be adhesive at the temperature of the body, so as to be applied in the form of a dressing or sort of plaster; the latter is intended to be rubbed upon the surface or applied by inunction; this distinction is, however, not absolute, and the two classes nearly approach each other in pro- perties ; the name cerate is derived from cera, wax, and most of the cerates, as also some of the ointments, contain this ingredient. The medicinal ingredients which enter into these classes of pre- parations are very numerous; indeed, almost every kind of medicine capable of exercising a topical effect may be prescribed in this form. The unctuous ingredients used in ointments are chiefly bland and unirritating fats and fixed oils, with more or less wax; the reader is referred, for some account of these, to pages 271—276. Lard and suet resemble each other in most of their properties except that the latter is more solid and fuses at a higher tempera- ture, while spermaceti is still more firm, almost brittle in consistence, and fuses with still less facility ; it is recommended by a beautiful pearly whiteness which it imparts, to a certain extent, to its oily combinations. Wax is more tough in consistence and still less fusible, its chief use being to give body to cerates and the stiffer ointments. The uses of resin and turpentine are twofold, to give body to the cerates into which they enter, and to render them useful as stimu- lants and fit vehicles for other stimulating substances. The greatest practical difficulty with ointments arises from their Fi 216 tendency to become rancid by keeping, par- ticularly in warm climates; this is best over- come by observing to free them from unne- cessary moisture, and to keep them in well- covered jars. The ointment jar, Fig. 216, is made for the purpose, but as the lid is not air-tight, a piece of stout tin foil, or of bladder, or of waxed paper, should be stretched over the top before covering it with the lid. The introduction of benzoic acid or of small portions of balsams and essential oils, into the melted ointment, seems to have a favorable effect upon this tendency; and it is observed that the resinous ointments are not liable to it. _ For the purposes of study, the cerates and Ointment jar. ointments may be thus classified: ls£. Those prepared by the fusion of their ingredients together, and most of them adapted to serve as vehicles for medi- cinal substances. 2d. Those prepared from these first, or from lard alone, by mechanical incorporation of the ingredients with some active medicinal agent. 3d. Those in which the unctuous ino-redient CERATES AND OINTMENTS. 481 is decomposed in the process of preparation. So great a variety of ointments and cerates have been made officinal, that there seems less occasion for departing from the national standard than in the other classes of extemporaneous preparations. Those which are officinal will be presented ir syllabi, and a few new remedies with their mode of preparation adverted to separately. First Class.— Cerates and Ointments, much used as vehicles for Medicinal Substances. Ceratum Simplex. 1 part white wax, 2 lard. Firmest "healing" dressing. Ceratnm Cetacei. { l f^^'' 3 wMte WaX' } Firm « healing" dressing. Unguentum Simplex. 1 part white wax, 4 lard. Softer " healing" dressing. rr a x> (Almond oil, sp. ceti, white! „ ,, . ... ,. „, Ung. Aquse Rosse. j wax, rose-water. ) &/^ " healing" dressing. Ceratum Resinse (Ba- f 5 parts resin, 8 parts lard, 2l „,. , . , silicon). \ parts yellow wax. j Stimulant dressing. All these are simple in their mode of preparation; the ingredients are to be placed in a tin cup or a capsule and brought to the melt- ing point, care being taken not to burn them, which may be known by the odor and appearance of smoke given off. When there is a great difference in the fusing points, the least fusible may be placed over the fire first, and the others added afterwards, so as to involve no unnecessary application of heat. Then the whole is to be stirred or triturated together till they have thickened by cooling into a homogeneous soft mass; it may now be set away to harden by further cooling. When rose-water is added, as in the case of cold cream, it is well to warm it a little, otherwise it may chill the spermaceti to its solidifying point and deposit it in a granular condition before the mixed oil and wax are sufficiently stiffened to be homogeneous with it. The first four preparations on the above list are distin- guished by different degrees of firmness and fusibility; they are all perfectly bland and unirritating, and are used for their property of protecting the part to which applied from external irritating causes and from the drying action of the air. Simple cerate is almost exclusively applied to blistered or other raw surfaces as a "healing" dressing; it is not adapted to use as a vehicle for medicinal substances to be applied by inunction, nor can it be conveniently mixed with powders at ordinary temperatures. From overlooking this fact, the mistake is constantly made by phy- sicians of prescribing simple cerate as the vehicle for iodine, the mercurials, &c; and in view of this, some of the apothecaries make it softer, putting in one-fourth instead of one-third wax ; this par- tially unfits it for the use for which it is mainly designed, to furnish a firm dressing which will not fuse entirely at the temperature of the body. Simple ointment is designed for the purpose just mentioned as not 31 482 EXTERNAL APPLICATIONS. suited to the cerate, that of furnishing, in warm weather, a good vehicle for medicines in the form of ointment. In the winter, it is frequently substituted by lard when it can be obtained fresh and sweet. It is not unusual to add to simple cerate and simple oint- ment, when fused in the process of preparing them, a little rose- water, and sometimes a very small portion of borax, which renders them very white without interfering with their remedial qualities. Spermaceti cerate is intermediate between the foregoing, and has the advantage of being made without the use of lard, which is some- times difficult to procure of good quality. Ointment of rose-water, the softest of its class, may be best intro- duced by giving the following modified recipe, which produces an article superior to that of the Pharmacopoeia:— Unguentum Aquae Bosce. Take of White wax Oil of almonds Rose-water Borax Oil of roses (Cold Cream) fSij. gss. "IV. Let the wax be melted and dissolved in the oil of almonds by a gentle heat, then dissolve the borax in the rose-water and add the solution to the heated oil, stirring constantly till cool; then add the oil of roses, stirring. It is well to warm the rose-water a little, or to add it to the ointment before it is much cooled, thus preventing any granulation of the wax. When properly prepared by this, which is the recipe of Dr. L. Turnbull, cold cream is a beautiful, snow white, bland ointment, about the consistence of good lard, and an admirable substitute for that excipient where expense is no object, and especially for appli- cations about the face. It is commonly sold as a lip-salve, and as a healing application to abraded and chapped surfaces generally. The following recipes will produce good substitutes for this, the former of a firmer, and the latter of a more fluid consistence:— Bose Lip Salve. Take of Oil of almonds.....I iij. Alkanet......3\j- Digest with a gentle heat and strain; then add— White wax.....3iss. Spermaceti.....3ss. Melt with the colored oil and stir it until it begins to thicken, then add— Oil of rose geranium .... gtt. xxiv. This may be put into small metallic boxes for the waistcoat pocket. CERATES AND OINTMENTS. 483 Milk of Boies for Chapped Hands. Take of Almonds, blanched . . . Ij. Beat to a paste and mix with— Rose-water.....flvj. Heat to about 212° F., and incorporate with— White wax.....Ij. Almond oil.....Iij. White Castile soap . . • Ij. Melt together and thoroughly incorporate ; then add— Honey water.....f 3ij. Cologne water . . . • flj- Oil of bitter almond . . . gtt. iv. Oil of rose geranium . . . gtt. v. Glycerin.....flss. After washing the hands with warm water, and Castile or other mild soap, apply the milk of roses, and rub it thoroughly in, then wipe them with a dry towel. Milk of roses is adapted to being put up in rather wide-mouth vials, and is directed to be applied to chapped hands, or other ex- coriated parts. Besin cerate, or basilicon, differs from the foregoing in being com- posed of stimulating substances; it is much used as a dressing to blistered surfaces with a view to keeping up the discharge, and is also a good vehicle for other stimulating- substances, as savine, Spanish flies, &c. Second Class.—Those in which the Medicinal Substance is mechani- cally mixed with the Unctuous Ingredient. Group I.—Incorporated by Fusion, &c. „ f Resin; suet; yellow wax, tur-1 atimnla+lno- Cerat. Resinse Comp. { pentine; flaxseed oil. } Stimulating. Unguent. Picis Liq. Tar and suet equal parts, Stimulating; antiseptic. f Canth. 12 parts; lard 10 parts; \ Epispastic (Blistering Ce- Ceratum Canthandis. | wax> resill} eack 7 parts. / rate). Compound resin cerate, or Deshler's salve, is both firmer and more stimulating than basilicon; it is used for similar purposes in burns, scalds, &c; it is too firm for ready incorporation with dry powders, and is mostly used by itself. . . Tar ointment, which is made by melting suet, and, while it is fluid, stirring into it an equal weight of tar until it cools and thickens, is used in scald head and various scaly eruptions with excellent effects 484 EXTERNAL APPLICATIONS. Blistering Cerate. (Cerate of Spanish Flies) This well-known preparation is conveniently made by melting together in a tin cup, lard, wax, and resin, and sifting into the fused mass powdered Spanish flies ; continuing the heat for half an hour, and then removing from the fire and stirring till cool; the active principle of the flies, cantharidin, is extracted to a great extent by this digestion in the grease, and the powder itself is also retained and adds to the effect of the preparation. This is some- times kept in jars, and sometimes, by increasing the proportion of wax and resin, a very little is made firm enough to roll out into rolls like other plasters. Blistering cerate, when ordered in pre- scription as a cerate to be dispensed by weight and spread at the bedside of the patient, is ordered by its officinal name given in the syllabus; when designed to be spread as a plaster, it is called emplas- trum epispasticum, the size being generally conveyed thus, 3x6 (meaning three inches wide by Bix long), or any other size desired, or a pattern may accompany, giving the shape and size. Sometimes the purpose for which required is expressed, and the precise size and shape are left to the pharmaceutist; at others, it is left optional with the attendant whether to spread the blister himself, or to have it spread at the shop by a prescription like the following: R.—Cerati cantharidis q. s., ut fiat emplastrum epispasticum 3x6. The best material for spreading the blister is, I think, adhesive plaster cloth; if a wide margin is left, it is readily made to adhere by warming the margin over a lighted lamp and pressing it care- fully on to the part. It should also be so incised from the edges inward as to be readily adapted to the inequalities of the surface to which applied. Kid or split sheep skin also answers a good pur- pose, in which case the margin is made very narrow, and three or four strips, about half an inch wide, of adhesive plaster are warmed and drawn over the outside to hold it in its place. Fig. 217 is a pattern for a pair of blisters to be applied behind Fig. 217.- the ears; care must be taken to have these the reverse of each other, or, after they are spread, it may be found they both fit the same ear. It is well, in the case of these, to leave the margin much the widest BLISTERS. 485 at the part furthest from the ear and below, where the hair will not interfere with its adhesion. The mode of spreading blisters is too simple to require comment; in cold weather, or when the cerate is very stiff, I use the thumb, which makes a smooth and very neat surface; a spatula slightly warmed answers very well. After the blister is spread, it is well to paint over its surface with ethereal tincture of cantharides, which increases its activity, or to lay a piece of tissue paper over its whole surface, and coat this with the ethereal tincture. It is considered a good precaution to remove the blister as soon as it has thoroughly reddened the skin, and then to apply a cataplasm of bread and milk, elm bark, or ground flaxseed, to raise the skin. A blistering plaster usually requires from six to twelve hours to raise the skin. Ij- Iiv, f3j. q. s. Fig. 218. or Blistering Collodion. Take of Spanish flies, in powder Ether .... Alcohol .... Prepared cotton Treat the flies with the ether by displacement, and having ob- tained a saturated tincture, or nearly so, evaporate it to f 3ij, and dissolve the cotton in it. Fig. 218 repre- sents the syringe pattern displacer, which is very convenient for this purpose, for small operations; a cork may be fitted, not too tightly, in the top, or it may be covered by a little piece of tinfoil, and in- serted in a common vial. Fig. 219 shows the collodion vial, arranged with a camel- hair brush, and well-suited to contain this preparation. The great merit of blistering collodion is its applicability to circum- scribed surfaces, the fact that it requires no covering of any kind, and that it can- not be improperly removed by the pa- tient, as in cases of insanity, &c. Its ac- tion is greatly hastened by repeating the application till the coating is thick, and covering the pellicle before it is dry with a piece of oiled silk or bladder. (For an account of prepared cotton, see pages 235 to 243.) The different blistering tissues are, I believe, all made by extracting cantha- ridin from the flies with ether or oil of turpentine, and forming it into a plaster, which is then spread on paper, silk, or other suitable fabric. Brown's Vial for blister- ing collodion. Small syringe pattern displacer. 486 EXTERNAL APPLICATIONS. cantharidin tissue is an admirable article, and a most convenient substitute for the old-fashioned blister. Group II.—Incorporated by Trituration. Cerat. Sahinse. Ung. Gallse. Ung. Veratri Alb. Cerat. Calaminae. Cerat. Zinci Carb. Ung. Zinci Oxidi. Ung. Cupri Subacet. Ung. Antimonii. Ung. Hydrargyri. Ung. Hydrar. Ammon. Ung. Hydr. Oxid. Rub, Ung. Iodinii. Ung. Iodinii Comp. Ung. Potassii Iodid. Ung. Plumbi Carb. Ung. Sulphuris. Ung. Sulphuris Comp. Ung. Belladonnse. Ung. Stramonii. Ung. Creasoti. f 1 part powdered savin. X 6 parts resin cerate. f 1 part powdered galls. X 7 parts lard. j 1 part powdered root. 1 4 parts lard and oil lemon. f ^iij calamine. X Lard ^xij ; wax ^iij. f 1 part'ZnO,C02. \ 5 parts simple ointment. f 1 part ZnO. X 6 parts lard. f 1 part 2CuO,Ac,6HO. X 15 parts simple ointment. f 1 part KO,Sb03,2T. X 4 parts lard. < Equal parts Hg, and lard. f 1 part HgCl,N02. \ 12 parts simple ointment. j 1 part Hg02. X 8 parts simple ointment. j 1 part I; £ parts KI. X 24 parts lard. / 1 part I; 2 parts KI. X 32 parts lard. f 1 part KI-(-l part Aq. X 8 parts lard. f 1 part PbO,C02. X 6 parts simple ointment. /1 part S. X 2 parts lard. f Sulphur gj. Ammon. mere. 5jj. Benz. acid gj. Oil bergam. f jj. I Sulph. acid f 3J. | Nit. potass. 3ij. [Lard -fvj. J 1 part extract. X 8 parts lard. / 1 part extract. \ 8 parts lard. / Creasote f ^ss. X Lard gj. "(Stimulating dressing applied J to blisters. I Astringent, used in piles. I Specific in itch. I Mild astringent and desiccant. 1 Mild astringent and desiccant. \ Mild astringent and desiccant. I Mild escharotic. X Vesicant, producing pustular ) eruptions. 1 Alterative, used to produce / mercurial impression. r Alterative, desiccant. > Stimulating, alterative. f Discutient, alterative. y Discutient, alterative. [• Discutient, alterative. > Astringent and desiccant. > Specific in itch. Specific in itch. >■ Anodyne. > Anodyne. > Antiseptic, mild escharotic. It would extend this chapter beyond the limit laid down, to dwell in detail upon each of these numerous officinal triturated ointments. They may be made in a mortar with the use of the pestle, or on a tile or slab with a spatula. The medicinal ingredient should be invariably in a very fine powder before incorporating it with the ointment; in a few instances, it is found necessary to soften the latter beforehand by a moderate heat. Ointment of galls may be well substituted by an ointment of tan- nic acid in the proportion of about 9j to 5j. CERATES AND OINTMENTS. 487 The following is recommended as a compound adapted to treat- ing piles:— No. 115.—Pile Ointment. Take of Tannic acid.....3ss. Liniment of subacetate of lead . . f 3ss.* Simple ointment .... 3 vij. Triturate the tannic acid first with the liniment, and then incor- porate with the ointment. Cerate of calamine is a modification of Turner's cerate, an old and highly approved astringent and desiccant, used especially in treat- ing burns and scalds ; its preparation is easy, but its principal in- gredient being very inferior, as generally met with, it has been almost entirely superseded by the cerate of precipitated carbonate of zinc, and the ointment of oxide of zinc which follow it; the latter is much softer in consistence than either of the former, which are designed to be applied on a piece of lint or old linen. Bed precipitate ointment (ung. hydr. oxid. rub.) is a very important preparation, being most extensively used as an eye-salve and the basis of almost all the popular medicines of that description. By trituration, the oxide becomes changed to an orange-colored pow- der, which imparts a similar hue to the ointment; it is variously diluted to meet the case for which prescribed; when it becomes rancid it assumes a red color, and should be thrown away. Mercurial ointment requires special mention from its mode of pre- paration ; it is directed to be made by long trituration of mercury one part, with mixed lard and suet one part; it is, however, a very slow process unless facilitated by appropriate machinery, and even then the temptation is strong to sacrifice its bland and pure altera- tive effect to the convenience of using a portion of rancid grease to reduce the mercury, thus producing intentionally the very condi- tion which in ointments it is desirable to avoid. This ointment is usually made of one part of mercury to two or three of the unctuous ingredients. When ordering it, the physician should specify ''one- half mercury." Its uses are numerous, one of the chief of which is that of inducing the mercurial impression by its application to the thighs, armpits, &c. The numerous curious synonyms applied to this ointment it would be interesting to collect. The ointments containing iodine are much prescribed, and by the introduction of sufficient iodide of potassium and water form homo- geneous and perfect ointments. # The use of the narcotic extracts in the preparation of ointments of that class is a recent improvement. Belladonna and stramonium ointments, as shown in the syllabus, are made in that way, taking care to soften the extract by tnturat- ino- with water before adding the simple ointment or lard. ■ See page 494, Prescription No. 121. 488 EXTERNAL APPLICATIONS. Aconite ointment may be made in the same way and in the same proportion, 3j to Ij. The following unofficinal ointment is of use of latter time in neu- ralgia, a piece the size of a pea to be applied over the part three or four times a day. No. 116.—Aconitia Ointment. Take of Aconitia . . . . . gr. xvj. Olive oil.....3ss. Triturate together, and then incorporate with Lard......Ij. A good substitute for this, which is a very expensive preparation, will be found among the liniments. No. 117.—Tetter Ointment prescribed by the late Dr. S. G. Morton. Take of Calomel, Alum (dried), in powder, Carbonate of lead, Oil of turpentine, each . . . 3ij- Simple ointment .... Iiss. Triturate the powders together till they are impalpable and tho- roughly mixed, then incorporate them with the oil and cerate. This is one of the very best ointments of its class, as proved by trials during a series of years. The mode of using it is to apply it at night, wash off with pure Castile soap in the morning, wipe dry, and dust with pure starch. No. 118.—A Salve closely resembling "Becker's Eye Balsam." R.—Calamine, Tutty, of each.....3iss. Red oxide of mercury . . . . 3vj. Camphor, in powder .... 3j- Almond oil . . . . . . 3j. White wax......Iiss. Fresh butter......Iviij. Reduce the mineral substances to a very fine powder, and incor- porate with the oil in which the camphor has been dissolved with the wax and butter previously melted together. The butter must be deprived of salt, if it contains it, by washing with warm water. The reputation of Becker's Eye Balsam is widely extended. Third Class.— Ointments made by digesting the Medicinal Ingre- dient in Lard. Ung. Tabaci, U leaves to Bsj lard. Narcotic. Ung. Mezerei, |iv bark to lard I xiv, wax gij. Stimulating. Ung. Cantharidis (with boiling water), gij to Iviij resin cerate. Stimulating. CERATES AND OINTMENTS. 489 The members of this class are made by the action of lard at an elevated temperature upon medicinal substances. As long as mois- ture is extracted from the leaf or bark, it is shown by escaping as steam through the fused grease; when it becomes perfectly placid, it is decanted and strained. The vegetable structure is now found to have become crisp, dry, and inert, and the lard is impregnated with its properties. This plan was formerly more in vogue; the^use of extracts, as in the case of Ung. belladonnas and Ung. stramonii, is a much shorter and equally good way. Improved Tobacco Ointment.1 Take of Tobacco leaves.....I v. Vinegar......Oij. Digest the leaves in the vinegar till evaporated to Oss; strain and express the liquid, then evaporate by moderate heat to about f liij; triturate this with Extract of belladonna .... Ij. Then take Camphor, in powder .... 3viss. Resin cerate ...... Iviss. Mix these by fusion at a moderate heat, and incorporate them with the mixed extracts of tobacco and belladonna. This is a very superior stimulating and anodyne application prescribed by my brother, Dr. Joseph Parrish, and made public in this form by Wm. J. Allinson, of Burlington, N. J. Garlic Ointment. Take of Fresh garlic . . . . 2 or 3 cloves. Lard.....Ij. Digest at a moderate heat for half an hour and strain; a useful application to the chest in croup. ' ,„,.-, .-. t. Una cantharidis is not made as described for this class, though not classifiable elsewhere. Boiling water is here the solvent used and the aqueous extract is incorporated with the resin cerate, which here as in the case of savine ointment in the last group, is used as a vehicle These two ointments are, I believe, chiefly used for the same purpose. Care must be taken to distinguish, in prescriptions, between the cerate and ointment of cantharides; the former being blistering cerate, and the latter only a stimulating dressing for blisters. FOURTH Class.— In which the Unctuous Ingredient is decomposed, Ung Hydrarg Nit. A powerful stimulant and alterative; citrine ointment. Ceratum Saponis. A bland and soothing dressing. Cerat. Plumbi S. Acet. A cooling and mild application ; Goulard s cerate. i Those only which are strictly extemporaneous are numbered. 490 EXTERNAL APPLICATIONS. Citrine ointment is made by mixiug flix hot oil (the officinal recipe orders neat's foot, but lard oil does very well),1 and liij lard, with an acid nitrate of mercury; prepared by dissolving Ij mercury in f3xiv nitric acid, which should be of full officinal strength, a brisk effervescence occurs, nitric oxide is given off, and the olein of the fat is converted into elaidin; by stirring with a wooden spatula till it cools, a beautiful citrine colored soft ointment will generally be obtained. It is a very uncertain preparation, however. Soap cerate is made by boiling solution of subacetate of lead with soap; the oil acids of the soap being liberated, combine with the oxide of lead of the subacetate, and the acetic acid is saturated by the alkali of the soap; by the addition of olive oil and white wax, a beautiful and very stiff cerate is formed, which forms a connecting link between the cerates and the plasters. Goulard's Cerate. This preparation contains subacetate of lead combined with olive oil, white wax, and camphor; it should be made in small quantities so as to be used before it becomes rancid, which is shown by its odor and white color on the surface exposed to the air. An excel- lent combination of this, attributed to Dr. Parrish, Senior, is as fol- lows :— No. 119—Compound Cerate of Lead. R.—Cerat. plumbi subacet., Cerat. simp., aa.....Iss. Hydr. chlor. mit., Pulveris opii, aa . . . . 3j- Mix. Used in cutaneous eruptions of a local character. Emplastra, U.S. (Plasters.) These are external applications of a consistence thicker than cerates, and of such tenacity and adhesiveness at the temperature of the body that when warmed and applied they will adhere firmly. They are used for two principal objects : 1st, to furnish mechanical support and to protect the part from the air; and, 2d, to convey medicinal effects, especially of a stimulant and discutient character. In the chapter on Fixed Oils, page 271, the subject of the prepa- ration and properties of lead plaster, oleo-margarate of lead, is fully presented. This preparation is the basis of most plasters, though a considerable number are made from resinous substances which were treated of under that head on pages 288 to 291. Lead plaster associated with soap is rendered less adhesive and more bland in its characters, furnishing an emollient preparation often confounded with soap cerate. By mixing with resin, lead plaster is rendered more adhesive, and somewhat more irritating. 1 Dr. A. Hewson recommends cod-liver oil for this purpose. OFFICINAL PLASTERS. 491 This is its most common preparation, and, when spread on cotton cloth, constitutes adhesive plaster cloth. This should be kept in tin cans, and when it is disposed to crackle, should be held to the fire till fused on the surface, and then laid away to cool thoroughly before being again rolled up. In applying adhe- sive plaster, it should be warmed from the unspread side, to insure its being softened throughout. The skilful association of these ingredients, and of the other medicinal substances prescribed in the officinal plasters, is accom- plished mainly by fusion and stirring together ; in the case of opium plaster, water is _ added to lessen the liability to injury from the heat employed. Belladonna plaster is made by incorporating the extract with resin and lead plaster. In mercurial plaster, and plaster of ammoniac and mercury, a little sulphur and oil are used to extinguish the mercury before associat- ing it with the plaster. Emplastra.—Syllabus of Officinal Plasters. Emp. Plumbi. (See page 272). Diachylon plaster. { Emp. Resinae. Emp. Saponis. Emp. Belladonnas. Emp. Ferri. Emp. Hydrargyri. Emp. Opii. Emp. Ammoniaci. Emp. Ammoniaci cum Hydrarg. Emp. Assafoetida. Emp. PicisBurgundicae. •< Emp. Picis cum Canth. < 1 part p. resin. 6 parts lead plaster. 1 part soap. 9 parts lead plaster. 1 part extract. 2 parts emp. resinae. 1 part F203,-f-FeO,C02. 8 parts lead plaster. 2 parts B. pitch. 3 parts mercury. 1 part olive oil. 1 part resin. 6 parts lead plaster. 1 part opium. 1^ parts B. pitch. 6 parts lead plaster. v Adhesive plaster. | Very mild and less adhesive. > Anodyne in neuralgia, &c. }Red strengthening roborant plas- ter. l Discutient; alterative. J [. Anodyne. f G. resin, purified by dil. -, stimn]ant resolvent. [ acet. acid. j acet. acid Ammoniac Mercury giij. Olive oil f'3J. Sulphur gr. viij. Assafoetida ffij. Lead plaster ffij. Galbanum Ibss. Yellow wax loss. 12 parts B. pitch. 1 part y. wax. 7 parts B. pitch. 1 part cerat. canth [. Discutient; stimulant. 1 j- Antispasmodic. I" Strengthening plaster." I Warming plaster. Ammoniac plaster is peculiar in its mode of preparation consisting of the pure gum-resin as dissolved in vinegar, strained and evapo- rated. The spreading of plasters, which was formerly an important part of the business of the apothecary, has now, like many other opera- 492 EXTERNAL APPLICATIONS. tions of his art, been monopolized by manufacturers who bring machinery to their aid, so that it will scarcely require a detailed description in a work of the design and scope of the present. Figs. 220 and 221 show plaster irons of the kinds adapted to different sizes and kinds of plasters, the larger size being suitable to spread a large plaster of a slowly fusible material. The heat Fig. 220. necessary to melt the plaster is derived from the iron, which should be first warmed to such temperature as that, while it will occasion the plaster to flow, it will not scorch it. The iron should also retain sufficient heat till the opera- FlS-22L tion is complete, to impart a smooth /surface to the stiffened plaster. The small iron will do well to spread a warming plaster, belladonna plaster, or the similar easily fusible kinds. The material on which plasters ° 7> are spread, may be varied according to their use. Resinous plasters and warming plasters to be applied to the back or breast, as counter- irritants and mechanical supports, are spread on thick sheepskin, while opium and belladonna plasters, which are generally smaller and frequently applied about the face, may be spread on kid or split skin. I have found advantage in spreading the large lead plasters and others to be applied over the breast of the female on the kind of skin called " chamois," which is made more flexible and yielding, though equally durable with the differently dressed " sheepskin." Machine-spread Strengthening Plasters Are immensely popular outside the profession for a great variety of ailments, and they are undoubtedly better adapted to meet the public demand for cough remedies, "pain eradicators," &c, than the great majority of the " pectoral syrups" and "hot drops," &c, so extensively vended. Recently, the manufacturers have prepared specific kinds of plasters, and sold them under appropriate names, as Burgundy pitch, hemlock, and warming plasters, so as to put them within the range of physicians' prescriptions. Some of them should make the series of officinal plasters in appropriate sizes and compounded according to the Pharmacopoeia, and there would cer- OFFICINAL LINIMENTS. 493 tainly be a demand for them, as apothecaries seldom covet the labor of preparing them extemporaneously. Annular Corn-Plasters. Under this name I have prepared, in imitation of Ellis's corn- plasters, a very convenient form of corn-plaster. Adhesive plaster is spread on thick buckskin, and then jrith a punch cut into small round plasters, about f inch in diameter, then with another punch a small hole is cut in the middle. Applied over a sore corn, it pro- tects from the pressure of the shoe and gives great relief. Cataplasms. The following is introduced as a specimen of the unofficinal class of cataplasms, of which mustard plaster and the numerous varieties of poultices are examples. (See page 252.) No. 120.—Spice Plaster. (Dr. Parrish, Sen.) Take of Powd. capsicum, " cinnamon, " cloves, each . . .2 ounces. Rye meal, Spirits, Honey, of each .... sufficient. To be made into a cataplasm by trituration on a plate, and spreading upon a close fabric. It should be made up when re- quired. Linimenta, U. S. (Liniments.) These are fluid or semifluid preparations designed to be smeared upon the surface, and either covered by lint or rubbed on until partially absorbed. The officinal members of this class are dis- played in the following syllabus. The Officinal Liniments. Class 1.—In which the Oily Ingredient is saponified. Linimentum Ammoniae. j Liq. ammonia, 1 part. \ Stimulating. (Volatile Liniment.) X 01ive oil> 2 Parts- J Rubefacient. Linimentum Calcis. { FlaxVeed^il, }e(lual Parts- "Healing," or demulcent. CLASS 2.— Oils charged with Stimulating Ingredients. Linim. Cantharidis. { ^turp'enlne Oj. } DiSested and Strained" " Camphor*. { S dU pP* } Triturated in a mortar. 494 EXTERNAL APPLICATIONS. Class 3.—Semifluid Mixtures, made with Heat. Linim. Terebinthinse. ( Resin cerate ftj. (Kentish's Ointment.) \ Oil turpentine Oss. ' Common soap i|iij. Linim. Saponis Camphora- Camphor Ij. turn. -j Oil rosemary fgj. (Opodeldoc.) " origanum fgj. Alcohol Oj. The first class contains two very opposite therapeutical agents. Volatile liniment is a powerful stimulant, much used as a counter- irritant in sore throats, and also in rheumatism. Lime liniment is applied with the most happy effects to recent sores and burns; it is one of the most useful of preparations in the apothecaries' daily routine of minor surgery. Liniment of Spanish flies is capable of use as a vesicant, being applied on lint, and covered to confine its vapor. Camphor liniment is well adapted as a vehicle of many substances applied in the form of stimulating liniment; it is well combined with liq. ammonia, forming a good modification of the volatile liniment. Kentish's ointment, though so different from lime liniment, is used in the same cases; it is applied to recent burns, until the peculiar inflammation, called the fire, subsides. Opodeldoc is much used as an application to sprains, rheumatic pains, &c; it is always put up in small wide-mouth vials, into which the finger is inserted, to soften and extract it. Linimentum Plumbi Subacetatis. Take of Solution of subacetate of lead, Glycerin, of each.....Ij. This is designed to enable the physician to apply subacetate of lead in a concentrated form, and to facilitate its dilution with neu- tral liquids, without its becoming decomposed. Linimentum Aconiti Badicis. (Prof. Procter.) Take of Aconite root, in powder .... liv. Glycerin.......f3ij. Alcohol.......q. s. Macerate the aconite with half a pint of alcohol for 24 hours, then pack it in a small displacer, and add alcohol gradually, until a pint of tincture has passed. Distil off flxij, and evaporate to f3xij; to this add alcohol 3ij and the glycerin. This is intended to substitute ointment of aconitia as an external anaesthetic application. Cut a piece of lint of the required size, and saturate it with the liniment; when applied, it should be 1 A useful stimulant in burns / and scalds. IThe soap dissolved in alco- hol by heat, and the sti- mulants added. ON DISPENSING MEDICINES. 495 covered with oiled silk, should be used with great care, and never on an abraded surface. Linimentum Hyperici. (Bed Oil) Take of Flowers of hypericum (fresh), a convenient quantity. Olive oil, sufficient to cover it. Macerate in the sun for 14 days, express and strain. A well-known popular application to recent bruises and sprains. In this connection, it may be well to mention Tinctura Arnicce. Take of Arnica flowers......liv. Alcohol.......Oj. Digest together, express and filter, or displace. Some pharmaceutists use diluted alcohol, which, in view of its extensive and well-known external use, is not so good as alcohol of full strength. There is no authoritative direction as to its strength. The above recipe is that I have long used satisfactorily. CHAPTER V. ON THE ART OF DISPENSING MEDICINES. This very extensive subject constitutes the most difficult prac- tical branch of pharmacy, for, in addition to the variety and extent of knowledge required for the performance of the various duties involved in it, a salesman and dispenser of medicines must possess rare personal qualities to render him popular and successful in his calling. Neatness, agility, and readiness of manner, combined with uni- form watchfulness and care in all the important manipulations required of him, will always inspire confidence, and secure patron- age—while slothfulness, negligence, and indifference to what may seem petty details, will invariably inure to the disadvantage of their possessor. It is not designed, in this Introduction to Practical Pharmacy, to devote much space to this subject; it is too important a matter to be superficially treated, and yet it would require more space to systematize its various details, than would comport with 496 ON DISPENSING MEDICINES. the general plan of this work, which has been already extended much beyond its original design. In the hints which are here offered, I shall have chiefly in view the country practitioner, whose necessities compel him to under- take the business of dispensing, and the student of medicine and pharmacy, who would seek to obtain from books the leading topics on which to found his practical and experimental routine of studies. In the first preliminary chapter, most of the forms of apparatus required by the country practitioner in dispensing were described and fully illustrated, and in the succeeding parts of the work, many useful implements, chiefly employed in manufacturing processes, have been described in connection with their uses and modes of construction, a few will be illustrated along with the manipulations yet to be described. It will be observed that many of the forms of apparatus described are by no means indispensable, and that all the processes described throughout the work can be performed with but few and cheap implements. Furniture of the Office. The dispensing office or shop should have a counter of size propor- tioned to its anticipated use, with a closet in it, and a few drawers; it should be placed very near to the bottles containing the medi- cines. In large establishments, a few rows of fliv and flij ground stoppered bottles and extract jars are frequently placed in a case on the counter, within reach of the operator when using the scales; these are filled with all the medicines most prescribed in small quantities, and entering into usual extemporaneous prescriptions. The counter should contain the large scales (see Fig. 22, p. 26), and the prescription scales and case (Fig. 20, p. 24), which, however, should be so placed as not to be jarred by the contusion of sub- stances with the pestle and mortar, and may very appropriately be placed on an adjacent shelf or table appropriated exclusively to them, and quite within reach in manipulating at the counter. The closet or shelves under the counter may be appropriated to mortars and pestles, funnel, displacement apparatus, infusion mug, evapo- rating dishes, &c.; one shallow drawer with divisions should be appropriated to papers, cut for dispensing, as below described; another to labels, pill boxes, powder boxes, corks, scissors, &c, each in a separate apartment; another may contain the pill ma- chine and tile, the spatulas, and plaster iron; a place must be ap- propriated to a towel, and a tank, or preferably a hydrant with a sink, should be near at hand; a few deep drawers will be found useful for containing the drugs bought in packages, and for which no bottles are provided. On the top of the counter, which may be covered with oil-cloth, the cork presser, the twine reel, and the alcohol lamp and graduated measure, may be appropriate orna- FURNITURE OF THE OFFICE. 497 ments. If practicable to have another counter for small manufac- turing operations, it would be well to avoid cumbering the dispens- ing counter with a gas furnace, but otherwise the arrangement de- scribed on pp. 139 and 140, and here again figured, will be conve- Fig. 222. Counter lamps. nient; it may be led by a ground burner from the pendant or side- light nearest at hand, and will be very convenient for heating pur- poses. The remarks on p. 135, in regard to the office stove, should not be overlooked. Among the little conveniences, it is well not to overlook a cork- screw Fig. 224, which should be hung on a tack, in an accessible place.' With an eye to convenience and to furnishing a manipulat- ing counter, a spritz, Fig. 223, may be suitably disposed on it; much will depend on the size of the top, and care must be taken not to crowd the space to be used in manipulation. A retort stand, Fig. 225, or the improved Wiegand's pattern, Fig. 151, p. 153, should be on the counter or at hand, to be used for filtering, displacement, &c; although for such purposes, it seems quite im- portant that a table or shelf should be especially appropriated. * 32 498 ON DISPENSING MEDICINES. The little mill, Fig. 37, p. 32, can be screwed on to the end of the working counter, and removed at pleasure. It is well to have Fig. 223. Fig. 224. Fig. 225. Spritz. Cork-screw. Retort stand. immediately under the top of the dispensing counter, two slides, on which most of the manipulations are performed; one of these should be kept exclusively for powders, and the other used indiscrimi- nately, to save the top from being soiled. The stock of medicines should be arranged in a case, or on plain shelves, within a few feet of the counter. In the appendix will be found the dimensions necessary for the outfits there published. The shelves should be somewhat more extended than the actual dimen- sions required at first, to allow for additions from time to time, and care should be taken in making these additions to have the glass ware correspond with the original stock. In the first preliminary chapter, the whole subject of glass ware is fully displayed. The books of reference, which should be ample—and if the pro- prietor himself, and those under his instructions, would keep pace with the advance of the times, should contain the American Journal of Pharmacy, bound from year to year—should be in a neighboring case; this might be advantageously arranged to contain also a ske- leton, and the surgical, dental, and obstetric instruments, bandages, splints, &c. The bougies and catheters should be in a tin case, sq also the adhesive plaster, blistering tissue, gum-elastic bougies, nipple shields, &c. It is to be regretted that the proper arrangement and garnish- ing of the dispensing office should be generally considered of so little importance by practitioners at the commencement of their career; it is apt to have more effect upon the future success of the physician than he can appreciate in advance. Folding of Powders. The first manipulation taught my students in the school of prac- tical pharmacy is this very elementary pursuit. There are, however, FOLDING OF POWDERS. 499 thousands who have felt the want, of such instruction all their lives. The paper usually purchased for folding packages of medicine is called " white druggists' wrapping paper ;" its size is called double medium, each sheet being about 38 X 24J inches. This sheet cut into 2 sheets 24Jxl9=the medium size. The medium sheet is thus conveniently divided for dispensing purposes:— Into 4 sheets 12 x 9 J inches= J lb papers. 6 " 9Jx8 " =\ ft papers. 12 " 6Jx6J " =loz. papers. Fig. 226 shows a \ lb paper. To fold a package, this is laid upon the scale plate and filled with an appropriate quantity; of a moder- ately heavy article, like Epsom salts or 226 cream of tartar, this will be 4 oz. (com.) ; _________^ __'_______ *of a light article, like senna or chamomile, say 1 oz. (com.). The paper is placed before the operator in the direction here shown; a little crease is made on the nearest end so as to form a flap into which the furthest edge is fitted, and the whole turned over upon the containing substance so as to form a crease when laid evenly down upon it, at the middle or near the furthest side, according as a wide or narrow bundle is desired. The cylinder is now loosely closed up at one end by turning it over, and is held \ J up with the crease toward the operator, paper for package. the thumb pressing it firmly to prevent its bulging. Now, with the forefinger, the upper end of the cylinder is pressed in against the containing substance, and the two sides of the paper being rolled into the position they naturally take, the whole upper flap is laid down immediately above the containing substance and pressed into a firm and even crease. _ The package is now inverted, the other end is opened out, rolled in, and folded over in like manner. The next operation is to label the package; this requires very little paste, only sufficient to prevent its slipping about; the label is put immediately in line with the crease, unless this is too low down and then it connects the crease with the part below. The next operation is to tie the package, which is done by laying it on the flat or labelled side and passing the string first across it and then lengthwise, securing it by a bow-knot at the edge where it was first creased. When thepackage is large or quite oblong, the string is made to pass twice across it and once lengthwise. The string used should be thin and free from fuzz; linen is the best material. The ball of tying string may be put into a small apartment of the drawer and gradually unwound as required, or it may be used from 500 ON DISPENSING MEDICINES. a reel. Fig. 228 shows a new upright reel, made by Wiegand, pos- sessing several advantages over the horizontal form; the twine can Fig. 227. Fig. 228. Paper package. Upright reel. be drawn from it in every direction with equal facility, and by means of a rim of brass surrounding the lower head of the spool, all pos- sibility of the twine tangling upon the spindle is effectually pre- cluded ; a cutter is fixed upon the top, which proves very convenient for cutting the string; the reel is made of brass, handsomely finished, and set upon a polished Italian marble base. Small powders for containing but a single dose of medicines are, or ought to be, put up in glazed writing paper. The kind called flat-cap is economical and adapted to the purpose. A sheet of flat- cap will furnish sixteen of the most common size, or nine of the larger or Seidlitz powder size. Fig. 229 represents the shape of Fig. 229. Fig. 230. Fig. 231. Paper for powder. "Powder." Envelop for single powders. these. A little crease is made along the long side into which the opposite edge is laid, and the paper being folded over is laid down in the crease just beyond the middle, or at the middle, according to the width desired. The ends are now folded over a spatula so as to make flaps of equal length, and the package or powder, as it is called, PREPARATION AND DISPENSING OF PILLS. is complete. In dispensing simple powders, I use a small envelop, Fig. 231, which is just the right size, and leaves nothing to desire. Powders are often directed in considerable numbers, frequently, as in Prescription No. 54, twelve at once; in this case it is import- ant to have the powders all of one length, so as to fit in a little box called a powder-box or lozenge-box. _ Figs. 232 and 233 represent gauges for folding powders;_ their use is twofold—to regulate the length of the powder and to facilitate the folding with a folder; the two end creases are made by simply pressing the paper over the blades between the thumb and finger. Fig. 232. Fig. 233. Wiegand's powder folder. Powder folder. Fig. 232 is a recent improvement of S. Lloyd Wiegand, of this city; the blades A A are less liable to become unsteady, and are of better shape than those of the old kind. The screw regulates their distance apart. The expense of these is saved by cutting a piece of tin of the required width, and tacking it on to one corner of the slide appropriated to powders. With a penknife, the board may be cut out to the thickness of the tin, so that the paper will slip readily on to the tin and be turned over by the thumb and finger; a great many powders can be put up in a few minutes by this plan. Preparation and Dispensing of Pills. The preparation of pills can only be learned by practice, and I am not about to attempt to explain it in detail. The ingredients in the form of powder being weighed, are placed in a mortar and thoroughly mixed; two spatulas being at hand, a small addition of some excipient, as already pointed out, is to be made, care being taken not to add an excess, which the inexperienced are apt to do. The little bottle, Fig. 234, is made for the use of the analytical chemist in moistening substances with a single drop of a reagent- it will be useful to contain water for the purpose named. The drop guide, Fig. 235, or a similar extemporaneous contrivance, will answer the same purpose. Many pill masses are spoiled by gettino- a few drops too much water accidentally into them; they 502 ON DISPENSING MEDICINES. should always be very thoroughly triturated before the addition of fresh portions of liquid. Fig. 234. Fig. 235. Bottle for moistening pill masses. Bottle with drop machine. The use of extracts in making pills has already been treated of, as also the whole subject of the selection of ingredients and exci- pients, and we proceed to a few hints on the mode of dividing and preserving them. Pills may be divided with a spatula, by the eye or by the aid of a graduated tile; a great many pharmaceutists use this altogether, but it has always appeared to me it must be from ignorance of the Fig. 236. Fig. 237. Pill tile. Pill machine. proper use of the pill machine, Fig. 237. If the mass is plastic, it may be rolled between the two smooth surfaces into a perfect THE DISPENSING OF LIQUIDS. 503 cylinder equally thick at both ends, and by then adjusting the cut- ting surfaces, the whole mass will be immediately turned into the appropriate number of pills, which, if about the size appropriate to the machine, will be-so round as to require no further rolling. _ In large dispensing establishments, several machines are sometimes kept adapted to different sizes, one for pills of opium_ (No. 26), or Quevenne's iron (No. 13); another for compound cathartic (No. 38), or aloetic pill (No. 36); and another for compound rhubarb (No. 35), and other large pills. There is a practical hint in relation to the use of the pill machine which should be mentioned in this connection: it is, that the cutting surfaces will only work on each other perfectly in one way; every roller is, therefore, marked with a star, a little brass tack, a number, or some other designation, and a correspond- ing one is made on the machine, indicating in which direction the roller is to be worked on the machine in cutting. In the figure, this is shown by two stars. From not being aware of this precau- tion, many abandon the use of a machine, which is one of the greatest of conveniences in pharmacy. Pills, when kept on hand, should be kept in ground stoppered bottles, into which they should not be put until well dried on an open box lid or paper folded at the edges for the pur- 23g pose. There are three kinds of pill boxes described on pages 36 and 37. Pills containing very volatile ingredients should be dispensed in a small wide-mouth vial. Fig. 238 shows a bottle arranged to contain lyco- podium, powdered liquorice root, or sifted arrowroot, one or more of which may be kept at hand in dispensing pills, both for the dusting of the pill machine and for filling into the box in which they are dispensed._ One of these bottles may have powdered gum Arabic also, so as to add that ingredient conveniently to pill masses in process of their manufacture. The mode of con- Dusting bottle. struction will scarcely need a remark; a perforated cork, short piece of tube, and Ij or Iij vial, constitute the apparatus. The Dispensing of Liquids. Here the graduated measure will at once come in play. We draw from the tincture bottles both for dispensing directly and mixing in prescription, and the habit should be fixed, which is easily established, of holding the stopper by the little finger while holding the measure with the thumb and forefinger. The measure must be held opposite the eye to measure the quantity with accu- racy and, after it has been done, the stopper is immediately to be replaced and the bottle set back on the shelf. The whole process is well shown in Fig. 239. The liability to mistakes in compound- ino- is greatly increased by the accumulation of bottles on the 504 ON DISPENSING MEDICINES. counter; and it should be the habit to replace each bottle imme- diately, and to note the label as it is taken down and as it is put Fig. 239. back; if a drop of liquid remains on the lip after decanting, it should be collected on the point of the stopper before putting it in again, and thus prevented from running down the side. Under the head of Solution, in the second part of this work, and of the liquid forms of medicines in the fifth part, and, indeed, throughout all the practical parts, I have endeavored to impress such facts connected with the preparation and use of this class of medicines as would be most useful to the student, and I may con- clude the subject here by reference to the selection of vials, corking, labelling, &c, on which a few hints may be given. Of the several varieties of vials shown on page 35, the kind best adapted to the purposes of the country physician is the German flint, Fig. 240; it has the advantage over the flint vial of being cheaper, and, as is generally believed, stronger; while it is far better than the common quality of green glass. The manufacturers of green glass THE DISPENSING OF LIQUIDS. 505 have recently made many of their vials without lips, from the fact that dealers in handling and repacking the lipped vials suffer loss from these being much broken about the lip. A vial is, however, of little use for many of the purposes of the physician without a good, rather broad, and thin lip, which will allow of the pouring of the liquid from it without its running back and down the sides of the vial. This is especially true of small vials from which drops are to be administered. Fig. 240. There is no economy in procuring cheap corks, as prices are pretty exactly according to quality, and of the inferior qualities a large number are quite unfit for use. The cork presser, Fig. 241, is now so common and well known as scarcely to require a mention; in using it, care should be taken to press the whole length of the cork, otherwise, if it is rather dry, it may be cracked at the point where the pressure of the machine ceases, and hence will break off in attempt- ing to remove it from the bottle. The cork drawer should not be too near the fire, as they are de- teriorated by long-continued drying. The cork should always be adjusted to the bottle before putting the liquid into it, so that if it should not fit, it may not be injured by contact with the liquid, and may be thrown in with the corks again. The neat appearance depends chiefly on its being clean and hav- ing a clear fresh surface at top; this may generally be attained by the use of a sharp knife, care being taken not to cut it off so short as to be inconvenient to extract again. The practice of capping over the cork with a piece of fancy paper or damp kid gives a hand- some finish to the preparation, but in small sales scarcely repays for the time consumed. The fashion of stamping the cork at top with a dye upon sealing- wax has lately become quite general. Heavy and good quality tin foil is a beautiful capping for corks, and may be applied without a string to secure it; it will take the impression of a stamp with con- siderable distinctness. With a view to capping operations, a small pair of scissors, different from those adapted to the general purposes of the counter, will be almost indispensable. Labelling medicinal preparations is very much neglected by country practitioners, frequently for want of facilities; it is, how- ever, too important a matter to be overlooked in any well-ordered 506 ON DISPENSING MEDICINES. dispensary. A small sheet of blank labels may be procured for a trifling sum, adapted exactly to the wants of the particular individual, or the druggist should have them printed for his customers. I have for several years sold from a set somewhat like the following, which by filling up the blanks serve most the purposes of the physician:— Take spoonful every hour as directed by Dr. TO BE USED AS DIRECTED BY Dr. Fig. 242. Paste bottle and brush. The next facility for labelling is a good paste bottle, and a recipe for a permanent paste. Fig. 242 shows a convenient little wide mouth bottle, which may be of flj or flij capacity, with a perforated cork into which a plug is inserted, extending half an inch below the cork, on to which is fitted a camel-hair brush, always dipping into the paste; this little vial may be supplied with paste from another and larger bottle. It may be made by either of the following processes:— Glycerin Paste.—Eecommended by Dr. Goddard as suitable for fixing paper to glass and other surfaces, and as keeping very well:— Take of Gum Arabic Boiling water Glycerin Make a solution. one ounce. two fluidounces. two fluidrachms. ANOTHER GOOD PASTE. 507 Another good Paste. Take of Powdered gum Arabic, Powdered tragacanth, of each . . 3ss. Water......Iiss. Acetic acid....."I xx. Mix them. The application of paste to a series of labels may be accomplished by laying the labels successively upon a small piece of soft paper, which must be renewed as soon as it has become somewhat daubed, or by laying them on a piece of smooth and hard wood, which should be cleaned and dried once every day. When the label is applied to the glass, it should be covered by a piece of paper somewhat larger than itself, and tightly and uniformly pressed till quite smooth; it is a mistake to put a thick coating of paste on the paper, as it then spreads on to the surrounding parts of the vial, soiling them, and in drying shrinks and wrinkles the label. When filled and properly corked, the vial should be carefully wiped off and wrapped in a piece of white paper. The £fb size, page 499, is suit- able for a fliv vial. A good pen, with a fine point, suitable for filling up the blanks on the labels, and a desk, should be within convenient reach; also a blank book or file on which to preserve the prescription for future reference, and a note-book of facts and experiences, which, if dili- gently kept, will, by lapse of time, become a valuable heirloom of the office or shop. APPENDIX. PHYSICIANS' OUTFITS. Catalogue of One Hundred and Twenty five Medicines and Pharmaceutical Preparations which can be put up in the best ground glass stoppered bottles, and substantial white-ware jars, uniformly and correctly labelled, and furnished ready packed for transportation for SEVENTY-FIVE DOL- LARS (exclusive of implements and apparatus). 1 B Acacia. £ B " pulvis. 1 pint Alcohol. ^ pint Acidum aceticum. 1 oz. " benzoicum. 4 oz. " citricum. 1 oz. " hydrocyanicum dil. 4 oz. " muriaticum. 4 oz. " nitricum. \ pint " sulphuric, aromat. 1 oz. " tannicum. 4 oz. Aloes pulvis (Soc). 8 oz. Alumen. 4 oz. Ammonise carbonas. 1 pint " liquor. 4 oz. " murias. £ pint " spiritus arom. 4 oz. Antim. et potass, tartras. £ oz. Argenti nitras cryst. | oz. " " fusum. 4 oz. Assafoetida. 1 oz. Bismuthi subnitras. 8 oz. Camphora. 2 oz. Cardamomum. 6 oz. Creta praeparata. 4 oz. Calc. carb. praecip. 6 oz. Chloroformum. 8 oz. Cinchona rub. pulv. 1 oz. Cinchonise sulphas. 1 oz. Creasotum. 8 oz. Ceratum cantharides. 8 oz. " resina?. 8 oz. " simplex. J pint Copaiba. 1 Ds Cubebae pulv. 2 oz. Collodium. 1 oz. " cantharidal. 4 oz. Ergota (whole or in powder). 1 B iEther (letheon). ; 1 oz. vial Extractum aconiti (Tilden s). 1 oz. vial " belladonnas " oz. vial Extractum conii (Tilden's). oz. vial " hyoscyami " oz. Extractum coloc. comp. pulv. oz. oz. oz. 8 oz. 1 B 1 B I pint jalapa? pulv. nucis vomicae. quassia?. taraxaci (Tilden's). sennae fluidum. spigeliae et senna? flui- dum. Valerianae fluidum. 4 oz. Ferri carb. massa (Vallette). 8 oz. " subcarb. 1 oz. " citras. 1 oz. " pulvis. \ pint " sesqui sulph. solut. (with di- rections for preparing hydrated per- oxide when required). 8 oz. Foeniculum. 1 oz. Gambogiae pulv. 1 B Gentiana contus. 4 oz. Glycyrrhiza ext. pulv. 4 oz. " rad. pulv. 2 oz. Glycerin. \ B Hydrarg. massa. \ B " chlor. mit. cum creta. oxid. rub. prot. iodid. oz. oz. oz. 1 oz. Iodinum. 4 oz. Ipecacuanha? pulvis. 4 oz. Jalapae pulvis. 8 oz. Juniperus. 2 oz. Kino. 4 oz. Liquor iodinii comp. 4 oz. " ferri iodid. \ pint " hydrarg. et arsen. iodid. \ pint " potassa? arsenitis. 1 B bot. Magnesia. \ B Magnesia carb. 5 B " sulphas. 510 APPENDIX. 6 oz. Manna. 4 oz. Sodas boras pulv. J oz. Morphiae sulphas. 8 oz. " et potass, tart. j oz. " acetas. 4 oz. " phosphas. J oz. " murias. 8 oz. Spigelia. 4 oz. Myrrha. i oz. Strychnia. 1 oz. Oleum anisi. 4 oz. Sulphur praecip. 1 oz. " cinnamomi. 4 B " sublim. 1 oz. " limonis. * pint Spt. ammon. arom. 1 oz. " menthae pip. J pint Spt. aetheris comp. 1 bot. " olivse. 1 pint " " nitrici. 1 pint " ricini. i pint " lavand. comp. 1 pint " terebinthinse. J pint Syrupu3 ipecacuanhae. 1 oz. " tiglii. l pint <; pruni virg. 2 oz. Opii pulvis. l pint " rhei aromat. 8 oz. Plumbi acetas. l pint " scillae. 2 oz. " carbonas. h pint " senegae. 2 oz. Potassa (caustic). 4 oz. Tinctura aconiti rad. 4 oz. " bicarbonas. 1 pint " cinchonae C. f B " bitartras. \ pint " digitalis. 4 oz. " citras. \ pint " ferri chloridi. 4 oz. " nitras. 1 pint " opii. 8 oz. " sulphas. 1 pint " " camph. 2 oz. Potassii iodidum. 1 pint " zingiberis. 3 oz. Pulvis ipecac et opii.l i B Unguentum hydrargyri. 8 oz. Quassia. h B " " nitratis 1 oz. Quiniae sulphas. I B " simplex. 6 oz. Rheum (E. Ind.). I B Uva ursi. 4 oz. Rhei pulvis. h B Valeriana. 4 oz. Sapo (Castil.). l pint Vinum antimonii. 9 oz. Sarsaparilla. £ pint " ergotae. 2 oz. Scilla pulv. \ pint " colchici rad. 8 oz. Senna (Alex.). \ oz. Veratria. 8 oz. Senega. 4 oz. Zinci oxidum P. 8 oz. Serpentaria. 8 oz. " sulphas. Biss. Sodae bicarbonas. The necessary implements can be purchased for twenty-five dollars, making, with the foregoing, an aggregate expense of one hundred dollars. The following list embraces the number and character of the bottles used in this collection:— 12 Oij SM. Bottles. 11 Oj 13 Oj Tr. Bottles. 15 Oss SM. Bottles. 18 giv SM. Bottles. 24 f §j and f §ij SM. and Tr. Bottles. 12 Covered Jars. 6 Packing Bottles. A case made to contain the above collection should be 5 feet high, exclu- sive of cornice, and 4 feet wide. It should contain shelves arranged as follows:— For ointment, and extract jars and implements. " (narrow) two dozen 2oz. and loz. ground stoppered bottles. 12 quart salt-mouth bottles. 13 pint " " 13 pint tincture bottles. 15 half-pint salt-mouth bottles. 15 " tincture bottles. 8. " 18 4oz. tincture and salt-mouth bottles. An under case and several drawers might be appropriated to additional apparatus and implements. 1. 2. S. 4. 5. 6. 7. APPENDIX. 511 FIFTY DOLLAR OUTFIT. The following list of One Hundred Medicines and Preparations can be put up in substantial Ground Stoppered Bottles, neatly and uniformly labelled, so as to form a convenient and compact Cabinet of Materia Medica, for Forty-Three Dollarsf and with the Apparatus and Implements attached for Fifty Dollars. 6 oz. Acacia. dum aceticum. citricum. muriaticum. nitricum. sulph. arom. tannicum. £ pint Aci 3 oz. 2 oz. 3 oz. J pint 1 oz. 2 pints Alcohol. 4 oz. Alumen. 4 oz. Ammonias carbonas. 4 oz. " murias. 1 pint " liquor. £ pint " spiritus arom. 1 oz. Antim. et potass, tart. \ oz. Argenti nitras cryst. 1 | oz. " " fus. j* 4 oz. Assafoetida. 8 oz. Camphora. 2 oz. Cardamomum. 4 oz. Ceratum cantharidis. 3 oz. Chloroformum. 2 oz. Collodium. £ pint Copaiba. 1 oz. Creasotum. 6 oz. Creta praeparata, or ) 4 oz. Calcis carb. praecip. J 4 oz. Cupri sulphas. 2 oz. Ergota (whole or powdered). $ pint jEther (Letheon) 8 oz. 1 oz. oz. Extractum aconiti (Tilden's). " belladonnae " " colocynth. comp. pulv. " conii (Tilden's). " gentianae " " hyoscyami " " jalapae pulv. " Valerianae fl'd. Ferri subcarbonas. " pulvis (per hydrogen). £ pint " chloridi tinct. 4 oz. Foeniculum. 8 oz. Gentiana contus. 4 oz. Hydrarg. massa. 6 oz. " chlorid mit. 2 oz. " oxid. Rub. 2 oz. " cum. creta. 1 oz. Iodinium. £ pint Liquor hydrarg. et arsen. iod. £ pint " potassse arsenitis. 3 oz. Magnesia. 3 B " sulphas. J oz. Morphiae sulphas. 2 oz. Myrrha. £ oz. Oleum cinnamomi. £ oz. " limonis. | oz. " menthae pip. 1 pint " ricini. 1 pint " terebinthina?. £ oz. " tiglii. 6 oz. Plumbi acetas. 3 oz. Potassae bicarb. 12 oz. «' bitartras. 3 oz. " citras. 6 oz. " nitras. 2 oz. Potassii iodidum. 6 oz. Pulvis acaciae. 3 oz. " aloes, Soc. 1 oz. " digitalis. 4 oz. " ext. glycyrrhizae. 1 oz. " gambogiae. 1 oz. " ipecacuanha?. 3 oz. " " et opii. 4 oz. " jalapae. 1 oz. " opii. 4 oz. " rhei (E. Ind.) 2 oz. " scillae. 6 oz. " sodae boras. 8 oz. Quassia. 1 oz. Quiniae sulphas. 4 oz. Rheum. 6 oz. Sapo (castil. alb.) 6 oz. Sarsaparilla. 4 oz. Senega. 4 oz. Serpentaria. 1 B Sodae bicarb. 4 oz. Spigelia. 8 oz. Sulphur sublim. 1 pint Spiritus aetheris nit. \ pint " " comp. 1 pint " lavand. comp. \ pint Syrupus ipecacuanha?. | pint " scillae. | pint " rhei arom. 1 pint Tinctura cinchonae comp. 1 pint " opii. 1 pint " " camph. 4 oz. Unguentum hydrarg. (£ mercury). 4 oz. " " nitratis. 4 oz. Uva ursi. \ pint. Vin. colchici rad. 2 oz. Zinci oxidum. 6 oz. " sulphas. 4 oz. Zingiberis. 512 APPENDIX. IMPLEMENTS. Scales and weights. J doz. 5viij. ^iv. Grad. Meas. | doz. 5vj. 1 Mortar and pestle. £ gross vials. 1 doz. Siv. 1 Pill tile. German flint. IJ doz. gij. 2 Spatulas. l| doz. |j. 1 doz. fss. 1 Funnel. 1 qr. Wrap'g & filtering paper. 1 gr. Vial corks. 2 papers Pill boxes. 2 yds. Adhesive plaster in tin case. The Medicines contained in the Fifty Dollar Outfit are differently arranged as follows:— Oj Liquor ammoniae. Oj Spt. aether, nit. 8 oz. Sulphur sublim. Oj Spt. Lavand. comp. J pint Acidum aceticum. \ pint Acid, sulph. arom. |- pint Fowler's solution. | pint JEther. J pint Spt. ammon. arom. 12 pint Salts and Tinctures. Oj Tinct. opii. 6 oz. Acacia. Oj Tinct. opii camph. Oj " cinchonae comp. 14 eight oz. Tinct. Bottles. \ pint Syrup, ipecac. | pint Copaiba. \ pint Vin. colchici. \ pint Syrup, scillae. | pint Spt. aether, comp. Sviij Camphora. giij Magnesia. 12 oz. Pot. bitart. B Sodae bicarb. \ pint Tinct. ferri chlor. | pint Syrupus rhei arom. | pint Donovan's solution. | pint Ext. valerian, fluid, 14 eight oz. Salt-mouth Bottles. 6 oz. Pulv. acacia. 4 oz. Pul. ext. glycyrrhiza?. 6 oz. Plumbi acet. 4 oz. Jalapae pulv. 4 oz. Pulv. rhei. 6 oz. Potass, nit. 6 oz. Pulv. sodae boras. 6 oz. Zinci sulph. 4 oz. Alumen. 4 oz. Ammon. carb. 4 oz. Assafoetida. 4 oz. Ammon. murias. 6 oz. Creta prseparata. 8 oz. Ferri subcarb. 17 four oz. Salt-mouth and Tinct. Bottles. 3 oz. Acid citricum. 1 oz. " tannicum. 1 oz. Quinia? sulph. 3 oz. Chloroform. 4 oz. Cupri sulph. 2 oz. Ergot. 2 oz. Zinci oxidum. 2 oz. Acid, muriat. 6 oz. Hydr. chlor. mit. 2 oz. Myrrha. 3 oz. Acid, nitric. 3 oz. Potassae bicarb. 3 oz. Potass, citras. 2 oz. " iodid. 3 oz. Pulv. aloes, Soc. 3 oz. " ipecac, et opii. 3 oz. " scillae. 20 two oz. Salt-mouth and Tinct. Bottles. 1 oz. Antim. et pot. tart. \ et \ Argent, nit. (cr's f'd). 1 oz. Ext. colocynth. comp. \ oz. 01. tiglii. 1 oz. Ext. jalapa?. 1 oz. Ferri pulvis. 1 oz. Creasotum. 2 oz. Hydr. ox. rub. 2 oz. " cum creta. \ oz. 01. cinnamomi. 1 oz. Iodinum. \ oz. Morphia? sulph. 1 oz. Pulv. digitalis. \ oz. 01. limon. 1 oz. Pulv. gambogia. 1 oz. " ipecac. 2 oz. Collodium. \ oz. 01. menth. pip. 4 oz. Cerat. canth. 4 oz. Ung. hydrarg. 4 oz. " " nit. T EXTRACTS AND OINTMENTS, &C. 4 oz. Pil. hydrarg. 1 oz. Ext, aconit. 1 oz. " belladonna. 1 oz. Ext. conii. 2 oz. " gentiana?. 1 oz " hyoscyami. APPENDIX. 513 Oj Alcohol in pint packers. Oj 01. ricini. Oj 01. terebinth. 6 oz. Sarsaparilla. 4 oz. Senega. 4 oz. Spigelia. PACKAGES, ETC 4 oz. Ginger. 3 oz. Foeniculum. 3 B Mag. sulph. 4 oz. Rheum. 8 oz. Quassia. 6 oz. Sapo. 4 oz. Serpentaria. 4 oz. Uva ursi. 2 oz. Cardamom. 8 Gentiana contus. This collection will conveniently fill a case three feet six inches wide and four feet high, containing six shelves and two or more drawers, to contain packages, &c. 1st shelf for Ointment and Extract Jars and Implements. 2d shelf for 12 pint Salt-Mouth and Tinct. Bottles. 3d shelf for 14 half-pint Tincture Bottles. 4th shelf for 14 half-pint Salt-Mouth Bot- tles. 5th shelf for 17 four ounce Salt-Mouth and Tinct. Bottles. 6th shelf for 20 two ounce Salt-Mouth and Tinct. Bottles. TWENTY-FIVE DOLLAR OUTFIT. The following Sixty-One articles can be put up in handsome Ground-Stop- pered Bottles, and Queensware Jars, neatly labelled, and packed for trans- portation-, for Twenty Dollars, and the list of Implements attached for Five Dollars. Morphia sulph. Myrrha. Oleum limonis. cinnamomi. Pil. cathart. comp. Plumbi acetas, Potassse bicarb. '• citras. Pulvis acaciae. aloes, Soc. ext. glycyrrhizae. ipecacuanhae. " et opii. opii. rhei. Quiniae sulphas. Sapo, castil. Sodae bicarb. Spt. aether, nit. ammon. arom. aether, comp. lavand. comp. Syrup, ipecac. rhei ar. scillae. Tinct. opii. zingiberis. Ung. hydrarg. nit. Vin. antimon. Vin. colchici R. Zinci sulph. 2 oz. Acidum citricum. i oz. 4 oz. " sulph. arom. 2 oz. 8oz. Alcohol. h °z- \ oz. Argenti nitras. i oz. 2 oz. Camphora, § oz. 4 oz. Ceratum cantharidis. 3 oz. 3 oz. Chloroformum. 2 oz. 2 oz. Collodium. 3 oz. 4 oz. Copaiba. 3 oz. 3 oz. Creta praeparata, or 3 oz. 2 oz. Calcis carb. prsecip. 2 oz. 3 oz. Cupri sulph. 1 oz. 8 oz. iEther (Letheon). 2 oz. 1 oz. Extract, aconiti. 1 oz. 1 oz. " belladonnse. 2 oz.» 1 oz. " coloc. c. pulv. i oz. 1 oz. " gentianae. 2 oz. 1 oz. " hyoscyami. 4 oz. 1 oz. " jalapae pulv. 8 oz. 8oz. " sennae fl'd. 4 oz. 8 oz. " Valerianae fl'd. 4 oz. 3 oz. Ferri subcarb. 8 oz. 1 oz. " pulvis. 4 oz. 8oz. 8oz. " chlor. tinct. 4 oz. Hydrarg. massa. 8 oz. 3 oz. " chlorid. mit. 8 oz. 1 oz. << oxid. rub. 8 oz. 8 oz. Liquor ammoniae. 4 oz. 4 oz. " iodinii comp. 8 oz. 4 oz. " hydr. et arsen. iod. 4 oz. 8oz. " potassae arsenitis. 33 3 oz. 514 APPENDIX. IMPLEMENTS. Scales and weights. 4 oz. Grad. measure. 1 Mortar and pestle. 1 doz. 1 oz. Vials. 1 doz. J oz. " i doz. 2 oz. " $ doz. 4 oz. Vials. 2 Spatulas. 2 papers Pill boxes. i| gross Vial corks. 1 case Adhesive plaster. 1 Funnel. 1 Pill tile. This collection will conveniently fill a case twenty-one inches wide, and four feet high, having seven shelves, to be filled as follows:— 1st with Ointment Jars and Implements. I 5th for 9 4 oz. S.M. Bottles. 2d "78 oz. Tincture Bottles. 6th "94 oz. Tincture Bottles. 3d " " " " 7th " 11 2 oz. G.S. Bottles. 4th "94 oz. S.M. Bottles. List of Plants growing in Philadelphia City limits, and the adjacent parts of New Jersey, with their habitat and time of flowering, proper time for collection, &c. The nomenclature is chiefly that of Gray, late edition, the months expressed in numerals. Botanical name. Common name. Flowers. Collect. When. Habitat and Remarks. Achillea millefolium Yarrow, milfoil 6—9 Herb 6—9 All fields: Acorus calamus Sweet flag 5—6 Rhizome Late in Autumn or early Spring Swamps. Actea alba Baneberry 5 Root Rare. Rocky woods. Adiantum pedatum Maiden hair Leaves A beautiful fern. Moist woods. iEsculus hippocas- Horsechestnut Young Spring tanum bark Agrimonia Eupato- Agrimony 6,7 Herb and Borders of woods. ria root Aletus farinosa Stargrass Root Woods and hills. Alisma plantago Water plantain Leaves Swamps. Ambrina anthelmin- Wormseed 7,8 Fruit 10 Said to grow in South ticum Camden. Difficult to distinguish from A. ambrosioides ; odor stronger, which is re-tained when dried. Ambrina ambro- 7,8 Fruit 10 Odor same as preced- sioides ing. Ambrina botrys Jerusalem oak 7,8 Fruit 10 Odor dissipated in dry- Anagallis arvensis Scarlet pimpernel 6,7 ing. Fields. Andromeda mariana Stagger-bush 5 North of Camden; abundant. Anemone nemorosa Wind flower 4 Moist woodlands and clearings. Anthemis arvensis Wild chamomile 6 and after Heads 6,7 Cultivated grounds; sub. for A. nobilis. Apocynum androsa?- Dog's bane 6 Root Autumn Copses and fence rows; mifolium flowers delicate pink. Apocynum cannabi- Indian hemp 6 Root Autumn Copses and fence rows; num flowers white. Aquilegia Canaden- Wild columbine 5, 6 Rocky woods, near sis streams. Aralia nudicaulis False sarsaparilla 6 Root Autumn Rocky woods. Rich woods and fence Aralia racemosa Wild spikenard 7 rows. APPENDIX. List of Plants—Continued. 515 Botanical name. Common name. Flowers. Collect. When. { Habitat and Remarks. Archangelica atro- Purple angelica 5 [loot and Meadows; sub.for An- purpurea herb gelica archangelica of Europe. Arum triphyllum Indian turnip 5 Dried cormus 8,9 Damp woods and mea-dows. Arctostaphylos uva Bearberry Leaves Autumn New Jersey woods. ursi Aristolochia serpen- Virginia snakeroot 5 Root Autumn Moist woods. taria | Asarum Canadense Wild ginger 5,6 Root Autumn Moist, rich woodlands. Asclepias incarnata Flesh-colored as-clepias 6,7,8 Root Meadows; along streams. " syriaca Wild cotton 6,7,8 Root Autumn Meadows ; along (or A. cornuti) streams. Asclepias tuberosa Pleurisy root 7 Root Autumn Sandy old fields; juice not milky ; orange-colored flowers. Aspidium filix mas Male fern Rhizome Summer Berberis vulgaris Barberry 7,8 Berries Baptisia tinctoria Wild indigo 7 Root and all Leaves Woods. Cassia Marilandica Wild senna 7,8 8—9 Near streams^ com- mon N. of Camden. Catalpa cordifolia Ceanothus Ameri- Catawba tree 6 Seeds N. Jersey tea 6 Root and Summer Woods. canos leaves Celastrus scandens Climbing staff-tree 6 Bark Thickets and fence rows. Chamselirium ruteum 6 Clearings and woods. Chelidonium majus Celandine 5 All Autumn Near okt settlements. Chimaphila umbel- Pipsissewa 6 Leaves Autumn Common in woods of lata and stem N. exposure. Chimaphila maculata Spotted winter-green Water hemlock 6 Autumn Common in woods of N. exposure. Cicuta maculata 7 7,8 Alongswampy rivulets. Cichorium intybus Succory, chickory 9 Dried root Fields near Wissahick-on. Cimicifuga racemosa Black snakeroot 6,7 Root Autumn Common in rich moist woods. Clematis Virginica Virgin's bower 7,8 Leaves Moist thickets; sub. for C. erecta. Collinsonia Cana- Heal-all 7,8,9 Rich woods. densis Comptonia aspleni- Sweet fern 4 All Slaty woods and hill-sides. folium Conium maculatum Hemlock 6,7 Leaves and fruit 7,8 Old settlements and waste places; an ac-tive poison ; when partially dry the odor is remarkably like that of mice. Convallaria polygo- Solomon's seal 5 Root Autumn Rich woods, and fence rows. natum Convolvulus pandu- Wild potato 6,7,8 Root Autumn West of Schuylkill. ratus Cornus Florida Cornus sericea Dogwood Swamp dogwood 5 6,7 Bark Bark Spring Spring Woods, everywhere. Swamps; same pro-perties as preceding. Cunila mariana Cynoglossum offici- Dittany Hound's tongue 6,7 Herb Root 6,7 Slaty hills. Rich woods. nale 5 Swamps; common near Camden. Cypripedium acaule Cytisus scoparius Broom 6,7 Tops 6,7 Back of Fairmount. 516 APPENDIX. List of Plants—Continued. Botanical name. Common name. Flowers Collect. Ilaliiiat and Remarks. Datura stramonium Daucus carota Diospyros Virginiana Dirca palustris Erigeron Canadense Erigeron Philadel- phicum Erigeron Hetero- phyllum Eryngium Virginia- num Erythronium Ameri- canum Epiphegus Virgin- ianus Epigsa repens Euonymus Ameri- canus Eupatorium perfoli- atum Euphorbia corollata Euphorbia ipecacu- anha Fumaria officinalis Galium Aparine Gaultheria procum- bens Gentiana andreuzer Geranium macula- turn Geum rivale Gillenia trifoliata HamamelisVirginica Hedeoma pulegioi- des Helenium autum- nale Helianthemum Ca- nadense Hepatica triloba Heracleum lanatum Heuchera Ameri- cana Humulus lupulus Hydrangea arbores- cens Hydrastis Canaden- sis Hypericum perfora- tum Ilex opaca Inula helenium Impatiens fulva Jamestown weed Wild carrot Persimmon Leatherwood Canada fleabane Philadelphia flea- bane [scabious] Various-leaved fleabane Button snakeroot Dogtooth violet Cancer root Trailing arbutus Burning bush Bone-set Large flowering spurge Ipecac, spurge Fumitory Goosegrass Teaberry Gentian Crow-foot Purple avens Indian physic Witch hazel Pennyroyal Sneezeweed Frost-weed Liverwort Cow parsnips Alum root Hop Yellow root St. John's wort American holly Elecampane Touch-me-no t 6,7 6,7 5, 6 7,8 6,7 6,7 8 5 8, 9 4 9 8,9 7,8 5,8 5,8 5 7 8,9 5,7 5,6 6,7 10 7 4,5 5 6,7 7 7,8 7,8 Leaves, root, and seed Root and seed Fruit and bark Bark All All All Root Bulb Leaves Bark and seeds All Root Root Leaves Herb Leaves Root Root Root Bark and leaves All Leaves, flowers All Leaves Root Root Ripe strobiles Root Root and bark Summits Leaves and seed Root 7—8 8—9 7,8 10 7,8 6,7 6,7 Autumn Summer 8,9 Autumn Autumn Autumn Autumn Autumn Sept. A rank weed. A common nuisance among farmers. Abundant near Cam- den and elsewhere. Old fields. Fields everywhere. Fields everywhere. Swamps near Camden. Swampy woods near streams. Under beech trees. Near Camden woods; common. Near Wissahickon. Meadows. Dry soil near Camden. Sandy shores, near Camden, N. J. Fence rows and hedges. Moist grounds, near Redbank. Confounded with G. catesbsi. Moist fields and fence rows. Wet meadows; rare near Philadelphia. Rocky woods and hill- Summer Autumn 7,8 Spring Autumn 7 Autumn Woods, near streams. Sterile fields. Along the Delaware. Dry sandy soil, near Camden, N. J. Woods. Meadows, when dried very fragrant. Rocky hill-sides and shady places. Cultivated; indigenous along streams. West bank ofSch'kil), above Manayunk. Sch'kill, opposite Ma- nayunk; rich woods. A common weed in fields. Low meadows. Low grounds. APPENDIX. 517 List of Plants—Continued. Botanical name. Common name. Iris versicolor Blue flag Juglans cinerea Butternut Juniperus communis Juniper Juniperus Virginiana Red cedar Kalmia latefolia Laurel Lactuca elongata Wild lettuce Laurus benzoin Spice-wood Lappa major Burdock Liatris spicata Gay feather Ligustrum vulgare Linaria vulgaris Liquidambar styra- ciflua Liriodendron tulipi fera Lithospermum offi- cinale Lobelia inflata Lobelia cardinalis Lycopodium clava- tum Lycopus Virginicus Lycopus sinuatus Magnolia glauca Malva rotundifolia Marrubium vulgare Maruta cotula Privet Toad-flax Sweet gum Tulip tree Stone-weed Indian tobacco Cardinal flower Club moss Bugle weed, pile wort Water horehound Magnolia Running mallows Horehound Dog's fennel Melissa officinalis Melissa chnopodium Menispermum Cana- dense Mentha piperita Mentha viridis Monarda punctata Monarda fistulosa Medeola Virginica Nepeta Cataria Balm Wild basil Moonseed Peppermint Spearmint Horsemint Wild bergamot Indian cucumber Catmint Nepeta glechoma Ground ivy Nymphaja odorata Water lily (Enothera biennis Origanum vulgare Oxalis acetosella Panax quinquefo- lium Phytolacca decan- dra Plantago major Podophyllum pelta turn Primrose Marjoram Wood sorrel Ginseng Poke Plantain May apple 6—9 7,8,9 7,8 7 6,7 7, 8 6—9 7,8 7 6—9 7 6 6 5 7 7,8 6—10 6 7 Collect. Rhizome Inner brk of root Fruit and tops Leaves and tops Leaves Herb Bark Root Root Leaves, flowers Herb Bark 5,6 Summer 7 Spring in flower Habitat and Remarks. Meadows. Collect in the year after flowering. Hilly woods. Virtue resides in milky juice. Moist woods. Collect in Spring. Moist woods (Button snakeroot.) Meadows and swamps, near tide-water. Forests. Root and 8, 9 tops Pollen Herb Bark Herb All Leaves Root All All Herb Root All Herb Root Herb All Root Berries and root Rhizome Spring 7,8 6,7 Fields and roadsides ; common. Thickets. Swamps and meadows. Swamps. Swamps; abundant near Camden. Substitute for M. Syl- vestris of Europe. Roadsides and yards ; sub. for Anthemis nobilis. Gardens. Fence rows. Along Wissahickon. Escaped from gardens. Summer Near Camden. Along streams. Moist woods. Summer A common weed on farms. 5, 6 Old settlements. Rare ; in ditches south of Camden. Common everywhere. Summer Dry soil; near Colum- bia Railroad bridge. 6 Very common. Autumn Found, but very rare, near Philadelphia. 9 Common clearings and 10 fence rows. Common in fields and yards. 10 Moist woods. 518 APPENDIX. List of Plants—Continued. Botanical name. Common name. Flowers. Collect. When. Habitat and Remarks. Polygala senega Seneka snakeroot 5 Root 9, 10 Rare; rich, hilly wood-lands. Prinos verticillatus Black alder 6 Bark 10—4 Swamps. Populus tremuloides Aspen 4 Bark 9—4 Prunella vulgaris All-heal 6 Herb 6,7 Waysides; common. Prunus Virginiana Wild cherry 5 Bark Common in fields and [cerasus serotina] forests. PuImonariaVirginica Lungwort Near Wissahickon. Quercus alba White oak Bark Spring Woods. Quercus tinctoria Black oak Bark Spring Woods. Ranunculusbulbosus Buttercup 5,6 All 5, 6 Common everywhere. Rhus glabrum Sumach 7 Fruit 9, 10 Old fields, &c. Rhus radicans Poison vine 6, 7 Fences. Rhus toxicodendron Poison oak 6,7 Leaves Woods. Rhus vernix Swamp sumach Leaves Swamps; powerful poison. Rubus trivialis Dewberry 5 Root Autumn Rubus villosus Blackberry 5 Root Autumn Rumex obtusifolius Dock 6,7 Root Autumn Common in fields and yards. Rumex acetosella Sorrel 5,6 Leaves Summer Common pest in fields and yards. Rumex crispus Curled, or sour dock 5 Root Sabbatia angularis Wild centaury 7,8 All 8 A common, showy plant. Salix alba White willow 4,5 Bark Sambucus Canaden- Elder 5,6 Flowers 5,6 sis Sanguinaria Cana- Bloodroot 4 Rhizome Autumn Clearings. densis Sanicula Marilan- Sanicle 7 Woods. dica Saponaria officinalis Soapwort Old settlements. Sarracenia purpurea Fly-trap 7 Rare; swamps south of Camden. Sassafras officinale Sassafras 5 Bark of root 9—4 Fence rows. Scutellaria lateri- Skullcap 7 Moist places. flora Sisymbrium offici- Hedge mustard 5 Waste places. nale Solanum dulcamara Bittersweet 7,8 Autumn About houses. Solidago odora Sweet golden rod 8,9 8,9 Abundant north of Camden. Symplocarpus foeti-dus Tanacetum vulgare Skunk cabbage 3,4 9—3 Swamps. Tansy 7—9 Escaped from gardens. Taraxacum Dens-le- Dandelion 4—5 Root 8,9 A common weed. onis (Leontodon Taraxacum) Trillium cernuum Three-leaved nightshade 5 Moist woods. TephrosiaVirginiana Goat's rue Near Camden. Triosteum perfolia- Fever root 6 Moist fields, near lime- tum stone. Ulmus fulva Slippery elm 4 Bark Rare. Urtica dioica Nettle Too common. Veratrum viride Am'can hellebore 6 Root Autumn Shady swamps. Verbascum thapsus Mullein Very common. Veronica officinalis Speedwell 6 Fields. Veronica Virginica Neckweed Meadows. Viola pedata. Violet 5 North of Camden; very abundant. APPENDIX. 519 Preparations used as Articles of Diet for the Sick and Convalescent. Arrow Root Pap. Take of arrow root one large tablespoonful ; water, one pint. First mix the arrow root well into a paste with a little of the cold water; bring the balance of the water to a boiling heat; Fig. 243. then stir in the arrow root; let it boil a few minutes; sweeten it with loaf sugar. The preparation of arrow root pap, with milk, renders it richer and more nutritious, though sometimes not allow- able. The application of direct heat to preparations of this description, always involves the danger of scorching them, and the intervention of a water bath is found to prevent the accident. The apparatus here figured, is made for the purpose, and is a useful utensil in any family. The draw- ing explains itself. Arrow Root Pap, icith Milk. Put in a saucepan, to boil, one pint of milk; stir very smoothly, into a cup of cold milk, a dessertspoonful of arrow root; when the milk boils, stir in the arrow root; continue to stir until it is cooked, which will be in five or ten minutes; then remove it from the fire, and sweeten to the taste. Toast Water. Cut a slice of stale bread half an inch thick, a finger length long; cut off the crust, and toast it quite brown, but not scorched ; while hot, put it into a half pint pitcher; pour over half a pint of boiling water; cover it tightly, and when cool, remove the bread. Mulled Wine. Put cinnamon or allspice (to the taste) into a cup of hot water to steep; add three eggs, well beaten, with sugar; heat to a boil, a pint of wine; then put in the spice and eggs, while boiling, and stir them until done, which will be in three minutes. Jelly for Invalids. Cut a penny roll into thin slices; toast them a light brown; then boil gently in a quart of water until it jellies; strain it upon a few shavings of lemon-peel; sweeten, and add, if liked, a little wine and nutmeg. Eggnog. Take the yelks of eight eggs; beat them with six large spoonfuls of pul- verized loaf sugar; when this is a cream, add the third part of a nutmeg, grated ; into this stir one tumblerful of good brandy, and one wineglass of good Madeira wine; mix them well together; have ready the whites, beaten 520 APPENDIX. to a stiff froth, and beat them into the mixture; when all are well mixed, add three pints of rich milk. Panada. Cut two slices of stale bread half an inch in thickness; cut off the crust; toast them a nice brown; cut them into squares of two inches in size; lay them in a bowl, sprinkle a little salt over them, and pour on a pint of boiling water; grate a little nutmeg. Tapioca. Soak two tablespoonfuls of very clean tapioca in two teacups of cold water over night; in the morning, add a little salt, one pint of milk, or water, if milk cannot be taken; simmer it until quite soft; stir well while cooling; when done, pour into a bowl, and, if allowed, add sugar, a spoonful of wine, and a little nutmeg. Rice Jelly. Take of rice, one-quarter of a pound; white sugar, half a pound; water, one quart. Boil these well together, carefully stirring them till the whole becomes a glutinous mass. Strain off into a dish or form. When cool, it is fit for use. This preparation may be flavored with rose-water, orange-flower water, lemon-juice, as may best suit the palate of the patient, or as directed by the physician. Iceland Moss Jelly. Take of Iceland moss two ounces; water, one quart. First wash the moss in some cold water; then put it into the quart of water, and boil slowly till very thick, adding white sugar till sufficiently sweet, then strain through a cloth. When cold, it will be fit for use, and may be eaten with spices, if allowed. Irish moss jelly may be prepared in the same way. Sago Jelly. Take four tablespoonfuls of sago, one quart of water, juice and rind of one lemon; sweeten to the taste. Mix all the ingredients well together; let it stand for half an hour; then put it on to boil, till the particles are entirely dissolved; it should be constantly stirred. It is very much improved by the addition of wine. Calves' Feet Jelly. Boil two calves' feet in one gallon of water, down to a quart; then strain it, and, when cold, skim off all the fat: take up all the clear jelly. Put the jelly into a saucepan, with a pint of wine, half a pound of loaf sugar, the juice of four lemons, the white of six or eight eggs beaten into a froth. Mix all well together. Set the saucepan upon a clear fire, and stir the jelly till it boils. When it has boiled ten minutes, pour it through a flannel bag till it runs clear. APPENDIX. 521 Essence of Beef . This is prepared from lean meat, by cutting it into small pieces, adding a little salt, then introducing into a wide-mouth bottle, corked tightly, and heating it gradually by immersing in a kettle of water, to which heat is ap- plied till it boils. After a few hours digesting in this way, the juice is drawn off, and constitutes the most concentrated form of nourishment. Beef Tea. Take of lean beef one-quarter of a pound, a pint and a half of water, salt sufficient to season it. When it begins to boil, skim it fiye minutes ; then add two blades of mace; continue the boiling ten minutes longer, when it will be ready for use. Chicken Broth. Clean half a chicken; on it pour one quart cold water, and a little salt; put in a spoonful of rice : boil two hours, very slowly, and tightly covered; skim it well; just before using it, put in a little chopped parsley. Chicken Jelly. Cut up a chicken; put it into a stone jar ; break all the bones; cover very closely ; set the jar into boiling water; keep it boiling three hours and a half; strain off the liquor; season with salt and a very little mace. Rice Jelly. Boil a quarter of a pound of the best rice flour, with half a pound of loaf sugar, in a quart of water, until the whole becomes one glutinous mass; strain off the jelly, and let it stand to cool; this is nutritious and light. Slippery Elm Bark Jelly. Four large spoonfuls of the bark, chipped; pour on it one quart of cold water ; let it stand all night; stir it, and let it settle ; the next morning pour off the water; slice the rind of a lemon very thinly, and, with the juice, put it in the water strained: let it simmer, very gently, fifteen minutes; then sweeten, and pour in a mould to cool and harden; take out the rind before putting in the mould. Wine Whey. Boil a pint of new milk; add to it a glass or two of white wine; put it on the fire until it just boils again; then set it aside till the curd settles ; pour off the clean whey; sweeten to the taste; cider is as good as wme to curdle, if it is good country cider. Corn Meal, or Oatmeal Gruel. Put in a clean saucepan one pint of water to boil; when boiling mix of oatmeal two large spoonfuls, in a half pint ™n°™°n ** a I be considered the same work.-Dr. Ranking's Ab- knowledge of uterine diseases becomes more appre- , ciated, t£is work will be proportionably established ■ stract- as a text-book in the profession.—The Lancet. 4 BLANCHARD & LEA'S MEDICAL BROWN (ISAAC BAKER), Surgeon-Accoucheur to St. Mary's Hospital, &c. ON SOME DISEASES OF WOMEN ADMITTING OF SURGICAL TREAT- MENT. With handsome illustrations. One vol. 8vo. (At Press.) Publishing in the "Medical News and Library" for 1855 and 185G. See preceding page. Mr. Brown has earned for himself a high reputa- ! and merit the careful attention of every surgeon- tion in the operative treatment of sundry diseases and injuries to which females are peculiarly subject. We can truly say of his work that it is an important addition to obstetrical literature. The operative suggestions and contrivances which Mr. Brown de- scribes, exhibit much practical sagacity and skill, accoucheur.—Association Journal. We have no hesitation in recommending this book to the careful attention of all surgeons who make female complaints a part of their study and practice. —Dublin Quarterly Journal. BENNETT (J. HUGHES), M.D., F. R. S. E., Professor of Clinical Medicine in the University of Edinburgh, &c. THE PATHOLOGY AND TREATMENT OF PULMONARY TUBERCU- LOSIS, and on the Local Medication of Pharyngeal and Laryngeal Diseases frequently mistaken for or associated with, Phthisis. In one handsome octavo volume, with beautiful wood-cuts. pp. 130. (Lately Issued.) BILLING (ARCHIBALD), M. D. THE PRINCIPLES OP MEDICINE. Second American, from the Fifth and Improved London edition. In one handsome octavo volume, extra cloth, 250 pages. BLAKISTON (PEYTON), M. D., F. R. S., &c. PRACTICAL OBSERVATIONS ON CERTAIN DISEASES OF THE CHEST, and on the Principles of Auscultation. In one volume, 8vo., pp. 384. BURROWS (GEORGE), M.D. ON DISORDERS OF THE CEREBRAL CIRCULATION, and on the Con- nection between the Affections of the Brain and Diseases of the Heart. In one 8vo. vol., with colored plates, pp. 21b". BUDD (GEORGE), M. D., F. R. S., Professor of Medicine in King's College, London. ON DISEASES OF THE LIVER. Second American, from the second and enlarged London edition. In one very handsome octavo volume, with four beautifully colored plates, and numerous wood-cuts. pp. 468. New edition. (Lately Issued.) The full digest we have given of the new matter introduced into the present volume, is evidence of the value we place on it. The fact that the profes- sion has required a second edition of a monograph such as that before us, bears honorable testimony to its usefulness. For many years, Dr. Budd's work must be the authority of the great mass of British practitioners on the hepatic diseases ; and it is satisfactory that the subject has been taken up by so able and experienced a physician.—British and Foreign Medico-Chirurgical Review. BUSHNAN (J. S.), M. D. THE PHYSIOLOGY OF ANIMAL AND VEGETABLE LIFE; a Popular Treatise on the Functions and Phenomena of Organic Life. To which is prefixed a Brief Expo- sition of the great departments of Human Knowledge. In one handsome royal 12mo. volume, with over one hundred illustrations, pp. 234. Though cast in a popular form and manner, this work is the production of a man of science, and presents its subject in its latest development, based on truly scientific and accurate principles. It may therefore be consulted with interest by those who wish to obtain in a concise form, and at a very low price, a resume of the present state of animal and vegetable physiology. BIRD (GOLDING), A. M., M. D.. &c. URINARY DEPOSITS: THEIR DIAGNOSIS, PATHOLOGY, AND THERAPEUTICAL INDICATIONS. A new and enlarged American, from the last improved London edition. With over sixty illustrations. In one royal 12mo. volume, extra cloth, pp.372. The new edition of Dr. Bird's work, though not increased in size, has been greatly modified, and much of it rewritten. It now presents, in a com- pendious form, the gist of all that is known and re- liable in this department. From its terse style and convenient size, it is particularly applicable to the student, to whom we cordially commend it.—The Medical Examiner. It can scarcely be necessary for us to say anything of the merits of this well-known Treatise, which so admirably brings into practical application the re- sults of those microscopical and chemical researches regarding the physiology and pathology of the uri- nary secretion, which have contributed so much to the increase of our diagnostic powers, and to th« extension and satisfactory employment of our thera- peutic resources. In the preparation of this new edition of his work, it is obvious that Dr. Golding Bird has spared no pains to render it a faithful repre- sentation of the present state of scientific knowledge on the subject it embraces.— The British and Foreign Medico-Chirurgical Review. BY THE SAME AUTHOR. ELEMENTS OF NATURAL PHILOSOPHY; 'being an Experimental Intro- duction to the Physical Sciences. Illustrated with nearly four hundred wood-cuts. From the third London edition. In one neat volume, royal 12mo. pp. 402. AND SCIENTIFIC PUBLICATIONS. 5 BARTLETT (ELISHA), M. D., Professor of Materia Medica and Medical Jurisprudence in the College of Physicians and Surgeons, New York. IHE HISTORY, DIAGNOSIS, AND TREATMENT OF THE FEVERS OF THE UNITED STATES. Third edition, revised and improved. In one octavo volume, of six hundred pages, beautifully printed, and strongly bound. Of the value and importance of such a work, it ia needless here to speak; the profession of the United States owe much to the author for the very able volume which he has presented to them, and for the careful and judicious manner in which he has exe- cuted his task. No one volume with which we are acquainted contains so complete a history of our fevers as this. To Dr. Bartlett we owe our best thanks for the very able volume he has given us, as embodying certainly the most complete, methodical, and satisfactory account of our fevers anywhere to be met with.—The Charleston Med. Journal and Review. The masterly and elegant treatise, by Dr. Bartlett is invaluable to the American student and practi- tioner.—Dr. Holmes's Report to the Nat. Med. Asso- ciation. We regard it, from the examination we have made of it, the best work on fevers extant in our language, and as such cordially recommend it to the medical public.—St. Louis Medical and Surgical Journal.J Take it altogether, it is the most complete history of our fevers which has yet been published, and every practitioner should avail himself of its con- tents.— The Western Lancet. BUCKLER (T. H.), M. D., Formerly Physician to the Baltimore Almshouse Infirmary, &c. ON THE ETIOLOGY, PATHOLOGY, AND TREATMENT OF FIBRO- BRONCHITIS AND RHEUMATIC PNEUMONIA. In one handsome octavo volume, extra cloth, pp. 150. BOWMAN (JOHN E.), M.D. PRACTICAL HANDBOOK OF MEDICAL CHEMISTRY. In one neat volume, royal 12mo., with numerous illustrations, pp. 288. BY THE SAME AUTHOR. INTRODUCTION TO PRACTICAL CHEMISTRY, INCLUDING ANA- LYSIS. With numerous illustrations. In one neat volume, royal 12mo. pp. 350. BARLOW (GEORGE H.), M. D. A MANUAL OF THE PRINCIPLES AND PRACTICE OF MEDICINE. With Notes and Additions by the American Editor. In one octavo volume. (Nearly Ready.) BEALE (LIONEL JOHN), M. R. C. S., &.C. THE LAWS OF HEALTH IN RELATION TO MIND AND BODY. A Series of Letters from an old Practitioner to a Patient. In one handsome volume, royal 12mo., extra cloth, pp. 296. BLOOD AND URINE (MANUALS ON). BY JOHN WILLIAM GRIFFITH, G. OWEN, REESE, AND ALFRED MARKWICK. One thick volume, royal 12mo., extra cloth, with plates, pp. 460. BRODIE (SIR BENJAMIN C), M. D., &c. CLINICAL LECTURES ON SURGERY. 1 vol. 8vo., cloth. 350 pp. COLOMBAT DE LMSERE. a ttj^ATTSE ON THE DISEASES OF FEMALES, and on the Special ci • - «f thPir Sex Translated, with many Notes and Additions, by C. D. Meigs, M. D. SeS edi ion, revised and improved. In one large volume, octavo, with numerous wood-cuts. pp. 720. The treatise of M. Colombat is a learned and la- borious commentary on these diseases, indicating ve y consWerable research, great accuracy of .judg- ment and no inconsiderable personal experience With the copious notes and additions of its expert enced and very erudite translator and editor, Dr. Meigs, it peesents, probably, one of the most com- plete and comprehensive works on the subject we possess.—American Med. Journal. CURLING (T. B.), F. R.S. Surgeon to the London Hospital, &c. * PTfAPTTCAL TREATISE ON DISEASES OF THE TESTIS, SPERMA- A ^uvn a tvji-i cirTCOTUM. Second American, from the second and enlarged English edi- tTonC Tone h^sonS avo volume, with numerous illustrations. (At Press.) ™, ,",-.■ ~(tw author will be found to bring this work on a level with the improvements ol theFdaey aid to mln'ain ilsreputatiou as the standard practical treatise on the subject. COPLAND (JAMES), M. D., F. R. S., &.C. nv THE CAUSES, NATURE, AND TREATMENT OF PALSY AND APOPLEXY, and of the Forms, Seats, Complications, and Morbid Relations oi Paralytic and ipoplectic Diseases. In one volume, royal 12mo., extra cloth, pp. 326. 6 BLANCHARD & LEA'S MEDICAL CARPENTER (WILLIAM B.), M. D., F. R. S., &.C., Examiner in Physiology and Comparative Anatomy in the University of London. PRINCIPLES OF HUMAN PHYSIOLOGY; with their chief applications to Psychology, Pathology, Therapeutics, Hygiene, and Forensic Medicine. A new American, from the last and revised London edition. With nearly three hundred illustrations. Edited, with addi- tions, by Francis Gurney Smith, M. D., Professor of the Institutes of Medicine in the Pennsyl- vania Medical College, &c. In one very large and beautiful octavo volume, of about nine hundred large pages, handsomely printed and strongly bound hi leather, with raised bands. (Now Ready.) The most complete work on the science in our language.—Am. Med. Journal. The most complete exposition of physiology which any language can at present give.—Brit, and For. Med.-Chirurg. Review. We have thus adverted to some of the leading "additions and alterations," which have been in- troduced by the author into this edition of his phy- siology. These will be found, however, very far to exceed the ordinary limits of a new edition, "the old materials having been incorporated with the new, rather than the new with the old." It now certainly presents the most complete treatise on the subject within the reach of the American reader; and while, for availability as a text-book, we may perhaps regret its growth in bulk, we are sure that the student of physiology will feel the impossibility of presenting a thorough digest of the facts of the science within a more limited compass.—Medical Examiner. The greatest, the most reliable, and the best book on the subject which we know of in the English language.—Stethoscope. The most complete work now extant in oar lan- guage.—N. O. Med. Register. The changes are too numerous to admit of an ex- tended notice in this place. At every point where the recent diligent labors of organic chemists and micrographers have furnished interesting and valu- able facts, they have been appropriated, and no pains have been spared, in so incorporating and arranging them that the work may constitute one harmonious system.—Southern Med. and Surg. Journal. The best text-book in the language on this ex- tensive subject.—London Med. Times. A complete cyclopaedia of this branch of science. —N. Y. Med. Times. The standard of authority on physiological sub- jects. * * # In the present edition, to particularize the alterations and additions which have been made, would require a review of the whole work, since scarcely a subject has not been revised and altered, added to, or entirely remodelled to adapt it to the present state of the science.—Charleston Med. Journ. Any reader who desires a treatise on physiology may feel himself entirely safe in ordering this.— Western Med. and Surg. Journal. From this hasty and imperfect allusion it will be seen by our readers that the alterations and addi- tions to this edition render it almost a new work— and we can assure our readers that it is one of the best summaries of the existing facts of physiological science within the reach of the English student and physician.—N. Y. Journal of Medicine. The profession of this country, and perhaps also of Europe, have anxiously and for some time awaited the announcement of this new edition of Carpenter's Human Physiology. His former editions have for many years been almost the only text-book on Phy- siology in all our medical schools, and its circula- tion among the profession has been unsurpassed by any work in any department of medical science. It is quite unnecessary for us to speak of this work as its merits would justify. The mere an- nouncement of its appearance will afford the highest pleasure to every student of Physiology, while its perusal will be of infinite service in advancing physiological science.—Ohio Med. and Surg. Journ. BY the same author. (Now Ready.) PRINCIPLES OF COMPARATIVE PHYSIOLOGY. New American, from the Fourth and Revised London edition. In one large and handsome octavo volume, with over three hundred beautiful illustrations, pp. 752. The delay which has existed in the appearance of this work has been caused by the very thorough revision and remodelling which it has undergone at the hands of the author, and the large number of new illustrations which have been prepared for it. It will, therefore, be found almost a new work, and fully up to the day in every department of the subject, rendering it a reliable text-book for all students engaged in this branch of science. Every effort has been made to render its typo- graphical finish and mechanical execution worthy of its exalted reputation, and creditable to the mechanical arts of this country. This book should not only be read but thoroughly studied by every member of the profession. None are too wise or old, to be benefited thereby. But especially to the younger class would we cordially commend it as best fitted of any work in the English language to qualify them for the reception and coin- prehension of those truths which are daily being de- veloped in physiology.—Medical Counsellor. Without pretending to it, it is an Encyclopedia of the subject, accurate and complete in all respects— a truthful reflection of the advanced state at which the science has now arrived.—Dublin Quarterly Journal of Medical Science. A truly magnificent work—in itself a perfect phy- siological study.—Ranking's Abstract. This work stands without its fellow. It is one few men in Europe could have undertaken; it is one no man, we believe, could have brought to so suc- cessful an issue as Dr. Carpenter, ft required for its production a physiologist at once deeply read in the labors of others, capable of taking a general, critical, and unprejudiced view of those labors, and of combining the varied, heterogeneous materials ut his disposal, so as to form an harmonious whole. We feel that this abstract can give the reader a verv imperfect idea of the fulness of this work, and no idea of its unity, of the admirable manner in which material has been brought, from the most various sources, to conduce to its completeness, of the lucid- ity of the reasoning it contains, or of the clearness of language in which the whole is clothed. Not the profession only, but the scientific world at large, must feel deeply indebted to Dr. Carpenter for this great work. It must, indeed, add largely even to his high reputation.—Medical Times. BY the same author. (Preparing.) PRINCIPLES OF GENERAL PHYSIOLOGY, INCLUDING ORGANIC CHEMISTRY AND HISTOLOGY:. With a General Sketch of the Vegetable and Animal Kingdom. In one large and very handsome octavo volume, with several hundred illustrations. The subject of general physiology having been omitted in the last edition of the author's " Com- parative Physiology," he has undertaken to prepare a volume which shall present it more tho- roughly and fully than has yet been attempted, and which may be regarded as an introduction to his other works. AND SCIENTIFIC PUBLICATIONS. 7 CARPENTER (WILLIAM B.), M. D., F. R. S., Examiner in Physiology and Comparative Anatomy in the University of London. ELEMENTS (OR MANUAL) OF PHYSIOLOGY, INCLUDING PHYSIO- LOGICAL ANATOMY. Second American, from a new and revised London edition. With one hundred and ninety illustrations. In one very handsome octavo volume, pp. 566. In publishing the first edition of this work, its title was altered from that of the London volume, by the substitution of the word " Elements" for that of " Manual," and with the author's sanction the title of " Elements" is still retained as being more expressive of the scope of the treatise. To say that it is the best manual of Physiology now before the public, would not do sufficient justice to the author.—Buffalo Medical Journal. In his former works it would seem that he had exhausted the subject of Physiology. In the present, he gives the essence, as it were, of the whole.—JV. Y. Journal of Medicine. Those who have occasion for an elementary trea- tise on Physiology, cannot do better than to possess themselves of the manual of Dr. Carpenter.—Medical Examiner. The best and most complete expose" of modern Physiology, in one volume, extant in the English language.—St. Louis Medical Journal. With such an aid in his hand, there is no excuse for the ignorance often displayed respecting the sub- jects of which it treats. From its unpretending di- mensions, it may not be so esteemed by those anxious to make a parade of their erudition; but whoever masters its contents will have reason to be proud of his physiological acquirements. The illustrations are well selected and finely executed.—Dublin Med. Press. by the same author. (Nearly Ready.) THE MICROSCOPE AND ITS REVELATIONS. In one handsome volume, with several hundred beautiful illustrations. Various literary engagements have delayed the author's progress with this long expected work. It is now, however, in an advanced state of preparation, and may be expected in a few months. The importance which the microscope has assumed within the last few years, both as a guide to the practising physician who wishes to avail himself of the progress of his science, and as an indis- pensable assistant to the physiological and pathological observer, has caused the want to be severely felt of a volume which should serve as a guide to the learner and a book of reference to the more advanced student. This want Dr. Carpenter has endeavored to supply in the present volume. His great practical familiarity with the instrument and all its uses, and his acknowledged ability as a teacher, are a sufficient guarantee that the work will prove in every way admirably adapted to its purpose, and superior to any as yet presented to the scientific world. BY THE SAME AUTHOR. A PRIZE ESSAY ON THE USE OF ALCOHOLIC LIQUORS IN HEALTH AND DISEASE. New edition, with a Preface by D. F. Condie, M. D., and explanations of scientific words. In one neat 12mo. volume, pp. 178. (Just Issued.) CHELIUS (J. M.), M. D., Professor of Surgery in the University of Heidelberg, &c. A SYSTEM OF SURGERY. Translated from the German, and accompanied with additional Notes and References, by John F. South. Complete in three very large octavo volumes, of nearly 2200 pages, strongly bound, with raised bands and double titles. We do not hesitate to pronounce it the best and most comprehensive system of modern surgery with which we are acquainted.—Medico-Chtrurgical Re- The fullest and ablest digest extant of all that re- lates to the present advanced state of surgical pa- thology.— American Medical Journal. The most learned and complete systematic treatise now extant.— Edinburgh Medical Journal. CLYMER (MEREDITH), M. D., &.C. FEVERS: THEIR DIAGNOSIS, PATHOLOGY, AND TREATMENT. Prepared and Edited, with large Additions, from the Essays on Fever m Tweedie's Library ol Practical Medicine. In one octavo volume, of 600 pages. CHRISTISON (ROBERT), M. D., V. P. R. S. E., &c. A DISPENSATORY; or, Commentary on the Pharmacopoeias of Great Britain and the United States; comprising the Natural History, Description, Chemistry, Pharmacy, Ac- tions, Uses, and Doses of the Articles of the Materia Medica. Second edition revised and im- proved, with a Supplement containing the most important New Remedies. With copious Addi- tions and two hundred and thirteen large wood-engravings By R. Eglesfeld Griffith, M. D. In one very large and handsome octavo volume, of over 1000 pages It is not needful that we should compare it with the other pharmacopoeias extant, which enjoy and merit the confidence of the profession : it is enough to say that it appears to us as perfect as a Dispensa- tory, in the present state of pharmaceutical science, could be made. If it omits any details pertaining to this branch of knowledge which the student has a right to expect in such a work, we confess the omis- sion has escaped our scrutiny. We cordially recom- mend this work to such of our readers as are in need of a Dispensatory. They cannot make choice of a better.—Western Journ. of Medicine and Surgery. There is not in any language a more complete and perfect Treatise.—N. Y. Annalist. In conclusion, we need scarcely say that we strongly recommend this work to all classes of our readers. As a Dispensatory and commentary on the Pharmacopoeias, it is unrivalled in the English or any other language.—The Dublin Quarterly Journal, We earnestly recommend Dr. Christison's Dis- pensatory to all our readers, as an indispensable companion, not in the Study only, but in the Surgery also.—British and Foreign Medical Review. 8 BLANCHARD & LEA'S MEDICAL CONDIE (D. F.), M. D., &.C. A PRACTICAL TREATISE ON THE DISEASES OF CHILDREN. Fourth edition, revised and augmented. In one large volume, 8vo., of nearly 750 pages. (Lately Issued.) From the Author's Preface. The demand for another edition has afforded the author an opportunity of again subjecting the entire treatise to a careful revision, and of incorporating in it every important observation recorded since the appearance of the last edition, in reference to the pathology and therapeutics of the several diseases of which it treats. In the preparation of the present edition, as in those which have preceded, while the author has appropriated to his use every important fact that he has found recorded in the works of others, having a direct bearing upon either of the subjects of which he treats, and the numerous valuable observations—pathological as well as practical—dispersed throughout the pages of the medical journals of Europe and America, he has, nevertheless, relied chiefly upon his own observations and experience, acquired during a long and somewhat extensive practice, and under circumstances pe- culiarly well adapted for the clinical study of the diseases of early life. Every species of hypothetical reasoning has, as much as possible, been avoided. The author has endeavored throughout the work to confine himself to a simple statement of well-ascertained patho- logical facts, and plain therapeutical directions—his chief desire being to render it what its title imports it to be, a practical treatise on the diseases of children. Dr. Condie's scholarship, acumen, industry, and practical sense are manifested in this, as in all his numerous contributions to science.—Dr. Holmes's Report to the American Medical Association. Taken as a whole, in our judgment, Dr. Condie's Treatise is the one from the perusal of which the practitioner in this country will rise with the great- est satisfaction —Western Journal of Medicine and Surgery. One of the best works upon the Diseases of Chil- dren in the English language.—Western Lancet. Perhaps the most full and complete work now be- fore the profession of the United States; indeed, we may say in the English language. It is vastlj' supe- rior to most of its predecessors.—Transylvania Med. Journal. We feel assured from actual experience that no physician's library can be complete without a copy of this work.—JV. Y. Journal of Medicine. A veritable pediatric encyclopaedia, and an honor to American medical literature.—Ohio Medical and Surgical Journal. We feel persuaded that the American medical pro- fession will soon regard it not only as a very good, but as the vert best "Practical Treatise on the Diseases of Children."—American Medical Journal. We pronounced the first edition to be the best work on the diseases of children in the English language, and, notwithstanding all that has been published, we still regard it in that light.—Medical Examiner. COOPER (BRANSBY B.), F. R. S.: Senior Surgeon to Guy's Hospital, &c. LECTURES ON THE PRINCIPLES AND PRACTICE OF SURGERY. In one very large octavo volume, of 750 pages. (Lately Issued.) For twenty-five years Mr. Bransby Cooper has been surgeon to Guy's Hospital; and the volume before us may be said to consist of an account of the results of his surgical experience during that long period. We cordially recommend Mr. Bransby Cooper's Lectures as a most valuable addition to our surgical literature, and one which cannot fail to be of service both to students and to those who are actively engaged in the practice of their profes-" sion.—The Lancet. COOPER (SIR ASTLEY P.), F. R. S., &c. A TREATISE ON DISLOCATIONS AND FRACTURES OF THE JOINTS. Edited by Bransby B. Cooper, F. R. S., &c. With additional Observations by Prof. J. C. Warren. A new American edition. In one handsome octavo volume, of about 500 pages, with numerous illustrations on wood. BY THE SAME AUTHOR. ON THE ANATOMY AND TREATMENT OF ABDOMINAL HERNIA. One large volume, imperial 8vo., with over 130 lithographic figures. BY THE SAME AUTHOR. ON THE STRUCTURE AND DISEASES OF THE TESTIS, AND ON THE THYMUS GLAND. One vol. imperial 8vo., with 177 figures, on 29 plates. BY THE SAME AUTHOR. ON THE ANATOMY AND DISEASES OF THE BREAST, with twenty- five Miscellaneous and Surgical Papers. One large volume, imperial 8vo., with 252 figures, on 36 plates. These last three volumes complete the surgical writings of Sir Astley Cooper. They are very handsomely printed, with a large number of lithographic plates, executed in the best style, and are presented at exceedingly low prices. CARSON (JOSEPH), M. D., Professor of Materia Medica and Pharmacy in the University of Pennsylvania. SYNOPSIS OF THE COURSE OF LECTURES ON MATERIA MEDICA AND PHARMACY, delivered in the University of Pennsylvania. Second and revised edi- tion. In one very neat octavo volume, of 208 pages. (Now Ready.) AND SCIENTIFIC PUBLICATIONS. 9 CHURCHILL (FLEETWOOD), M. D., M. R. I. A. ON THE THEORY AND PRACTICE OF MIDWIFERY. A new American, from the last and improved English edition. Edited, with Notes and Additions, by D. Francis Condie, M. D., author of a "Practical Treatise on the Diseases of Children," &c With 139 illustrations. In one very handsome octavo volume, pp. 510. (Lately Issued.) To bestow praise on a book that has received such marked approbation would be superfluous. We need only say, therefore, that if the first edition was thought worthy of a favorable reception by the medical public, we can confidently affirm that this will be found much more so. The lecturer, the practitioner, and the student, may all have recourse to its pages, and derive from their perusal much in- terest and instruction in everything relating to theo- retical and practical midwifery.—Dublin Quarterly Journal of Medical Science. A work of-very great merit, and such as we can eonfidently recommend to the study of every obste- tric practitioner.—London Medical Gazette. This is certainly the most perfect system extant. It is the best adapted for the purposes of a text- book, and that which he whose necessities confine him to one book, should select in preference to all others.—Southern Medical and Surgical Journal. The most popular work on midwifery ever issued from the American press.—Charleston Med. Journal. Were we reduced to the necessity of having but one work on midwifery, and permitted to choose, we would unhesitatingly take Churchill.—Western Med. and Surg. Journal. It is impossible to conceive a more useful and elegant manual than Dr. Churchill's Practice of Midwifery.—Provincial Medical Journal. Certainly, in our opinion, the very best work on the subject which exists.—N. Y. Annalist. No work holds a higher position, or is more de- serving of being placed in the hands of the tyro, the advanced student, or the practitioner.—Medical Examiner. Previous editions, under the editorial supervision of Prof R. M. Huston, have been received with marked favor, and they deserved it; but this, re- printed from a very late Dublin edition, carefully revised and brought up by the author to the present time, does present an unusually accurate and able exposition of every important particular embraced in the department of midwifery. * * The clearness, directness, and precision of its teachings, together with the great amount of statistical research which its text exhibits, have served to place it already in the foremost rank of works in this department of re- medial science.—N. O. Med. and Surg. Journal. In our opinion, it forms one of the best if not the very best text-book and epitome of obstetric science which we at present possess in the English lan- guage.—Monthly Journal of Medical Science. The clearness and precision of style in which it is written, and the great amount of statistical research which it contains, have served to place it in the first rank of works in this departmentof medical science. — N. Y. Journal of Medicine. Few treatises will be found better adapted as a text-book for the student, or as a manual for the frequent consultation of the young practitioner.— American Medical Journal. BY THE SAME AUTHOR. ON THE DISEASES OF INFANTS AND CHILDREN. handsome volume of over 600 pages. In one large and We regard this volume as possessing more claims to completeness than any other of the kind with which we are acquainted. Most cordially and earn- estly, therefore, do we commend it to our profession- al brethren, and we feel assured that the stamp of their approbation will indue time be impressed upon it. After an attentive perusal of its contents, we hesitate not to say, that it is one of the most com- prehensive ever written upon the diseases of chil- dren, and that, for copiousness of reference, extent of research, and perspicuity of detail, it is scarcely to be equalled, and not to be excelled, in any lan- guage.—Dublin Quarterly Journal. After this meagre, and we know, very imperfect notice of Dr. Churchill's work, we shall conclude by saying, that it is one that cannot fail from its co- piousness, extensive research, and general accuracy, to exalt still higher the reputation of the author in this country. The American reader will be particu- larly pleased to find that Dr. Churchill has done full justice throughout his work to the various American authors on this subject. The names of Dewees, Eberle, Condie, and Stewart, occur on nearly every pa»-e, and these authors are constantly referred to by the author in terms of the highest praise, and with the most liberal courtesy.—The Medical Examiner. The present volume will sustain the reputation acquired by the author from his previous works. The reader will find in it full and judicious direc- tions for the management of infants at birth, and a compendious, but clear account of the diseases to which children are liable, and the most successful mode of treating them. We must not close this no- tice without calling attention to the author's style, which is perspicuous and polished to a degree, we regret to say, not generally characteristic of medica. works. We recommend the work of Dr. Churchill most cordially, both to students and practitioners, as a valuable and reliable guide in the treatment of the diseases of children.—Am. Journ. of the Med. Sciences. We know of no work on this department of Prac- tical Medicine which presents so candid and unpre- judiced a statement or posting up of our actual knowledge as this.—N. Y. Journal of Medicine. Its claims to merit both as a scientific and practi- cal work, are of the highest order. Whilst we would not elevate it above every other treatise on the same subject, we certainly believe that very few are equal to it, and none superior.—Southern Med. and Surgical Journal. BY THE SAME AUTHOR. FSSAYS ON THE PUERPERAL FEVER, AND OTHER DISEASES PE- ptttiAK TO WOMEN. Selected from the writings of British Authors previous to the close of the Eighteenth Century. In one neat octavo volume, of about four hundred and fifty pages. To these papers Dr. Churchill has appended notes, embodying whatever information has been laid be- fore the profession since their authors' time He has also prefixed to the Essays on Puerperal Fever, fihich occupy the larger portion of the volume, an SeresUng historical sketch of the principal epi- demies of that disease. The whole forms a very valuable collection of papers, by professional writers of eminence, on some of the most important accidents to which the puerperal female is liable.—American Journal of Medical Sciences. 10 BLANCHARD & LEA'S MEDICAL CHURCHILL (FLEETWOOD), M. D., M. R. I. A., &c. ON THE DISEASES OF WOMEN; including those of Pregnancy and Child- A new American edition, revised by the Author. With Notes and Additions, by D Fran- bed. In one large eis Condie, M. D., author of "A Practical Treatise on the Diseases of Children. and handsome octavo volume, with wood-cuts, pp. 684. (Just Issued.) larity. This fifth edition, before us, is well calcu- lated to maintain Dr. Churchill's high reputation. We now regretfully take leave of Dr. Churchill's book. Had our typographical limits permitted, we should gladly have borrowed more from its richly stored pages. In conclusion, we heartily recom- mend it to the profession, and would at the same time express our firm conviction that it will not only add to the reputation of its author, but will prove a work of great and extensive utility to obstetric practitioners.—Dublin Medical Press. Former editions of this work have been noticed in previous numbers of the Journal. The sentiments of high commendation expressed in those notices, have only to be repeated in this; not from the fact that the profession at large are not aware of the high merits which this work really possesses, but from a desire to see the principles and doctrines therein contained more generally recognized, and more uni- versally carried out in practice.—N. Y. Journal of Medicine. We know of no author who deserves that appro- bation, on " the diseases of females," to the same extent that Dr. Churchill does. His, indeed, is the only thorough treatise we know of on the subject; and it may be commended to practitioners and stu- dents as a masterpiece in its particular department. The former editions of this work have been com- mended strongly in this journal, and they have won their way to an extended, and a well-deserved popu- It was revised and enlarged by the author, for his American publishers, and it seems to us that there is scarcely any species of desirable information on ita subjects that may not be found in this work.—The Western Journal of Medicine and Surgery. We are gratified to announce a new and revised edition of Dr. Churchill's valuable work on the dis- eases of females We have ever regarded it as one of the very best works on the subjects embraced within its scope, in the English language; and the present edition, enlarged and revised by the author, renders it still more entitled to the confidence of ths profession. The valuable notes of Prof. Huston have been retained, and contribute, in no small de- gree, to enhance the value of the work. It is a source of congratulation that the publishers have permitted the author to be, in this instance, his own editor, thug securing all the revision} which an author alone is capable of making.—The Western Lancet. Asa comprehensive manual for students, or a work of reference for practitioners, we only speak with common justice when we say that it surpasses any other that has ever issued on the same sub- ject from the British press.—The Dublin Quarterly Journal. DICKSON (S. H.), M. D., Professor of Institutes and Practice of Medicine in the Medical College of South Carolina. ELEMENTS OF MEDICINE; a Compendious View of Pathology and Thera- peutics, or the History and Treatment of Diseases. In one large and handsome octavo volume of nearly 800 pages. (Now Ready.) As a text-book on the Practice of Medicine for the student, and as a condensed work of reference for the practitioner, this volume will have strong claims on the attention of the American profession. Few physicians have had wider opportunities, than the author, for observation and experience, and few perhaps have used them better. As the result of a life of study and practice, therefore, the present volume will doubtless be received with the welcome it deserves. From the Preface. The present volume is intended as an aid to young men who'have engaged in the study of medi- cine, to physicians who have recently assumed the responsibilities of practice, and to my felloW professors of the Institutes of Medicine, and private instructors who have felt the difficulty of com- municating to the two first classes the knowledge which they are earnestly seeking to acquire. Having been a teacher of medicine for thirty years, and a student more than forty, I must have accumulated some experience in both characters. I have prepared and printed for those in attend- ance on my lectures many successive manuals or text-books. I have alsowritten and published several volumes on medical subjects in general. The following pages are the result of a careful collation of all that has been esteemed valuable in both, with such matter as continued study and enlarged experience has enabled me to add. DEWEES (W. P.), M.D., &c. A COMPREHENSIVE SYSTEM OF MIDWIFERY. Illustrated by occa- sional Cases and many Engravings. Twelfth edition, with the Author's last Improvements and Corrections. In one octavo volume, of 600 pages. (Just Issued.) BY THE SAME AUTHOR. A TREATISE ON THE PHYSICAL AND MEDICAL TREATMENT OF CHILDREN. Tenth edition. In one volume, octavo, 548 pages. (Just Issued.) BY THE SAME AUTHOR. A TREATISE ON THE DISEASES OF FEMALES. Tenth edition. In one volume, octavo, 532 pages, with plates. (Just Issued.) DANA (JAMES D). ZOOPHYTES AND CORALS. In one volume, imperial quarto, extra cloth, with wood-cuts. Also, AN ATLAS, in one volume, imperial folio, with sixty-one magnificent plates, colored after nature. Bound in half morocco. DE LA,BECHE (SIR HENRY T.), F. R. S., &c. THE GEOLOGICAL OBSERVER. In one very large and handsome octavo volume, of 700 pages. With over three hundred wood-cuts. (Lately Issued.) AND SCIENTIFIC PUBLICATIONS. 11 DRUITT (ROBERT), M.R. C.S., &c. THE PRINCIPLES AND PRACTICE OF MODERN SURGERY. A new American, from the improved London edition. Edited by F. W. Sargent, M. D., author of " Minor Surgery," &c. Illustrated with one hundred and ninety-three wood-engravings. In one very handsomely printed octavo volume, of 576 large pages. Dr.Druitt's researches into the literature of his subject have been not only extensive, but well di- rected ; the most discordant authors are fairly and impartially quoted, and, while due credit is given to each, their respective merits are weighed with an unprejudiced hand. The grain of wheat is pre- served, and the chaff is unmercifully stripped off. The arrangement is simple and philosophical, and the style, though clear and interesting, is so precise, that the book contains more information condensed into a few words than any other surgical work with which we are acquainted.—London Medical Times and Gazette, February 18, 1S54. No work, in our opinion, equals it in presenting bo much valuable surgical matter in so small a compass.—St. Louis Med. and Surgical Journal. Druitt's Surgery is too well known to the Ameri- can medical profession to require its announcement anywhere. Probably no work of the kind has ever been more cordially received and extensively circu- lated than this. The fact that it comprehends in a comparatively small compass, all the essential ele- ments of theoretical and practical Surgery—that it is found to contain reliable and authentic informa- tion on the nature and treatment of nearly all surgi- cal affections—is a sufficient reason for the liberal patronage it has obtained. The editor, Dr. F. W. Sargent, has contributed much to enhance the value of the work, by such American improvements as are calculated more perfectly to adapt it to our own views and practice in this country. It abounds everywhere with spirited and life-like illustrations, which to the young surgeon, especially, are of no minor consideration. Every medical man frequently needs just such a work as this, for immediate refe- rence in moments of sudden emergency, when he has not time to consult more elaborate treatises.—The Ohio Medical and Surgical Journal. The author has evidently ransacked every stand- ard treatise of ancient and modern times, and all that is really practically useful at the bedside will be found in a form at once clear, distinct, and interest- ing.—Edinburgh Monthly Medical Journal. Druitt's work, condensed, systematic, lucid, and practical as it is, beyond most works on Surgery accessible to the American student, has had much currency in this country, and under its present au- spices promises to rise to yet higher favor.—The Western Journal of Medicine and Surgery. The most accurate and ample resume of the pre- sent state of Surgery that we are acquainted with.— Dublin Medical Journal. A better book on the principles and practice of Surgery as now understood in England and America, has not been given to the profession.—Boston Medi- cal and Surgical Journal. An unsurpassable compendium, not only of Sur- gical, but of Medical Practice.—London Medical Gazette. This work merits our warmest commendations, and we strongly recommend it to young surgeons as an admirable digest of the principles and practice of modern Surgery.—Medical Gazette. It may be said with truth that the work of Mr . Druitt affords a complete, though brief and con- densed view, of the entire field of modern surgery. We know of no work on the same subject having the appearance of a manual, which includes so many topics of interest to the surgeon; and the terse man- ner in which each has been treated evinces a most enviable quality of mind on the part of the author, who seems to have an innate power of searching out and grasping the leading facts and features of the most elaborate productions of the pen. It is a useful handbook for the practitioner, and we should deem a teacher of surgery unpardonable who did not recommend it to his pupils. In our own opinion, it is admirably adapted to the wants of the student.— Provincial Medical and Surgical Journal. DUNGLISON, FORBES, TWEEDIE, AND CONOLLY. THE CYCLOPAEDIA OF PRACTICAL MEDICINE: comprising Treatises on the Nature and Treatment of Diseases, Materia Medica, and Therapeutics, Diseases of Women and Children, Medical Jurisprudence, &c. &c. In four large super royal octavo volumes, of 3254 double-columned pages, strongly and handsomely bound. *** This work contains no less than four hundred and eighteen distinct treatises, contributed by six-ty-eight distinguished physicians. The most complete work on Practical Medicine extant; or, at least, in our language.—Buffalo Medical and Surgical Journal. For reference, it is above all price to every prac- titioner.—Western Lancet. One of the most valuable medical publications of the day—as a work of reference it is invaluable.— Western Journal of Medicine and Surgery. It has been to us, both as learner and teacher, a work for ready and frequent reference, one in which modern English medicine is exhibited in the most advantageous light.—Medical Examiner. We rejoice that this work is to be placed within the reach of the profession in this country, it being unquestionably one of very great value to the prac- titioner. This estimate of it has not been formed from a hasty examination, but after an intimate ac- quaintance derived from frequent consultation of it during the past nine or ten years. The editors are practitioners of established reputation, and the list of contributors embraces many of the most eminent professors and teachers of London, Edinburgh, Dub- lin, and Glasgow. It is, indeed, the great merit of this work that the principal articles have been fur- nished by practitioners who have not only devoted especial attention to the diseases about which they have written, but have also enjoyed opportunities for an extensive practical acquaintance with them, and whose reputation carries the assurance of their competency justly to appreciate the opinions of others, while it stamps their own doctrines with high and just authority.—American Medical Journ. DUNGLISON (ROBLEY), M.D., Professor of the Institutes of Medicine in the Jefferson Medical C ollege, Philadelphia. HUMAN HEALTH; or, the Influence of Atmosphere and Locality, Change of Air and Climate, Seasons, Food, Clothing, Bathing, Exercise, Sleep, &c. &c, on Healthy Man; constituting Elements of Hygiene. Second edition, with many modifications and additions. In one octavo volume, of 464 pages. 12 BLANCHARD & LEA'S MEDICAL DUNGLISON (ROBLEY), M.D., Professor of Institutes of Medicine in the Jefferson Medical College, Philadelphia. MEDICAL LEXICON; a Dictionary of Medical Science, containing a concise Explanation of the various Subjects and Terms'of Physiology, Pathology, Hygiene, Therapeutics, Pharmacology Obstetrics, Medical Jurisprudence, &c. With the French and other Synonymes; Notices of Climate and of celebrated Mineral Waters; Formulae for various Officinal, Empirical, and Dietetic Preparations, etc. Twelfth edition, revised. In one very thick octavo volume, ol over nine hundred large double-columned pages, strongly bound in leather, with raised bands. (Just Issued.) Every successive edition of this work bears the marks of the industry of the author, and of his determination to keep it fully on a level with the most advanced state of medical science. Thus nearlv fifteen thousand words have been added to it within the last few years. As a complete Medical Dictionary, therefore, embracing over FIFTY THOUSAND DEFINITIONS, in all the branches of the science, it is presented as meriting a continuance of the great favor and popularity which have carried it, within no very long space of time, to a twelfth edition. Every precaution has been taken in the preparation of the present volume, to render its mecha- nical execution and typographical accuracy worthy of its extended reputation and universal use. The very extensive additions have been accommodated, without materially increasing the bulk of the volume by the employment of a small but exceedingly clear type, cast for this purpose. The press has been watched with great care, and every effort used to insure the verbal accuracy so ne- cessary to a work of this nature. The whole is printed on fine white paper; and, while thus exhi- biting in every respect so great an improvement over former issues, it is presented at the original exceedingly low price. We welcome it cordially; it is an admirable work, and indispensable to all literary medical men. The labor which has been bestowed upon it is something prodigious. The work, however, has now been done, and we are happy in the thought that no hu- man being will have again to undertake the same gigantic task. Revised and corrected from time to time, Dr. Dunglison's ''Medical Lexicon" will last for centuries.—British and Foreign Med. Chirurg. Review. The fact that this excellent and learned wort has passed through eight editions, and that a ninth is rendered necessary by the demands of the public, affords a sufficient evidence of the general apprecia- tion of Dr. Dunglison's labors by the medical pro- fession in England and America. It is a book which will be of great service to the student, in teaching him the meaning of all the technical terms used in medicine, and will be of no less use to the practi- tioner who desires to keep himself on a level with the advance of medical science.—London Medical Times and Gazette. In taking leave of our author, we feel compelled to confess that his work bears evidence of almost incredible labor having been bestowed upon its com- position.— Edinburgh Journal of Med. Sciences. A miracle of labor and industry in one who has written able and voluminous works on nearly every branch of medical science. There could be no more useful book to the student or practitioner, in the present advancing age, than one in which would be found, in addition to the ordinary meaning and deri- vation of medical terms—so many of which are of modern introduction—concise descriptions of their explanation and employment; and all this and much more is contained in the volume before us. It is therefore almost as indispensable to the other learned professions as to our own. In fact, to all who may readers to its peculiar merits; and we need do little more than state, in reference to the present reissue, that, notwithstanding the large additions previously made to it, no fewer than four thou- sand terms, not to be found in the preceding edi- tion are contained in the volume before us.,— Whilst it is a wonderful monument of its author's erudition and industry, it is also a work of great practical utility, as we can testify from our own experience; for we keep it constantly within our reach, and make very frequent reference to it, nearly always finding in it the information we seek. —British and Foreign Med.-Chirurg. Review. It has the rare merit that it certainly has no rival in the English language for accuracy and extent of references. The terms generally include short physiological and pathological descriptions, so that, as the author justly observes, the reader does not possess in this work a mere dictionary, but a book, which, while it instructs him in medical etymo- logy, furnishes him with a large amount of useful information. The author's labors have been pro- perly appreciated by his own countrymen ; and we can only confirm their judgment, by recommending this most useful volume to the notice of our cisat- lantic readers. N o medical library will be complete without it.—London Med. Gazette. It is certainly more complete and comprehensive than any with which we are acquainted in the English language. Few, in fact, could be found better qualified than Dr. Dunglison for the produc- tion of such a work. Learned, industrious, per- severing, and accurate, he brings to the task all the peculiar talents necessary for its successful performance; while, at the same time, his fami- liarity with the writings of the ancient and modern " masters of our art," renders him skilful to note . the exact usage of the several terms of science, have occasion to ascertain the meaning of any word an(j tne vari0us modifications which medical term- belonging to the many branches of medicine. From a careful examination of the present edition, we can vouch for its accuracy, and for its being brought quite up to the date of publication ; the author states in his preface that he has added to it about four thou- sand terms, which are not to be found in the prece- ding one. — Dublin Quarterly Journal of Medical Sciences. On the appearance of the last edition of this valuable work, we directed the attention of our inology has undergone with the change of theo- ries or the progress of improvement. — American Journal of the Medical Sciences. One of the most complete and copious known to the cultivators of medical science.—Boston Med. Journal. The most comprehensive and best English Dic- tionary of medical, terms extant.—Buffalo Medical Journal. BY THE SAME AUTHOR. THE PRACTICE OF MEDICINE. A Treatise on Special Pathology and The rapeutics. Third Edition. In two large octavo volumes, of fifteen hundred pages. Upon every topic embraced in the work the latest information will be found carefully posted up.— Medical Examiner. The student of medicine will find, in these two elegant volumes, a mine of facts, a gathering of precepts and advice from the world of experience, that will nerve nim with courage, and faithfully direct him in his efforts to relieve the physical suf- ferings of the race.—Boston Medical and Surgical Journal. It is certainly the most complete treatise of which we haveany knowledge.— Western Journal of Medi- cine and Surgery. One of the most elaborate treatises of the kind we have.—Southern Med. and Surg. Journal. AND SCIENTIFIC PUBLICATIONS. 13 DUNGLISON (ROBLEY), M.D., Professor of Institutes of Medicine in the Jefferson Medical College, Philadelphia. HUMAN PHYSIOLOGY. Seventh edition. Thoroughly revised and exten- sively modified and enlarged, with nearly five hundred illustrations. In two large and hand- somely printed octavo volumes, containing nearly 1450 pages. It has long since taken rank as one of the medi- cal classics of our language. To say that it is by far the best text-book of physiology ever published in this country, is but echoing the general testi- mony of the profession.—N. Y. Journal of Medicine. There is no single book we would recommend to the student or physician, with greater confidence than the present, because in it will be found a mir- ror of almost every standard physiological work of the day. We most cordially recommend the work to every member of the profession, and no student should be without it. It is the completest work on Physiology in the English language, and is highly creditable to the author and publishers.—Canadian Medical Journal. The most complete and satisfactory system of Physiology in the English language.—Amer. Med. Journal. The best work of the kind in the English lan- guage.—Silliman's Journal. The most full and complete system of Physiology in our language.—Western Lancet. BY THE same author. (Jitst Issued.) GENERAL THERAPEUTICS AND MATERIA MEDICA; adapted for a Medical Text-book. Fifth edition, much improved. With one hundred and eighty-seven illus- trations. In two large and handsomely printed octavo vols., of about 1100 pages. The new editions of the United States Pharmacopoeia and those of London and Dublin, have ren- dered necessary a thorough revision of this work. In accomplishing this the author has spared no pains in rendering it a complete exponent of all that is new and reliable, both in the departments of Therapeutics and Materia Medica. The book has thus been somewhat enlarged, and a like im- provement will be found in every department of its mechanical execution. As a convenient text- book for the student, therefore, containing within a moderate compass a satisfactory resume of its important subject, it is again presented as even more worthy than heretofore of the very great favor which it has received. In this work of Dr. Dunglison, we recognize the same untiring industry in the collection and em- bodying of facts on the several subjects of which he treats, that has heretofore distinguished him, and we cheerfully point to these volumes, as two of the most interesting that we know of. In noticing the additions to this, the fourth edition, there is very little in the periodical or annual literature of the profession, published in the interval which has elapsed since the issue of the first, that has escaped the careful search of the author. As a book for reference, it is invaluable.— Charleston Med. Jour- nal and Review. It may be said to be the work now upon the sub- jects upon which it treats.—Western Lancet. Asa text-book for students, for whom it is par- ticularly designed, we know of none superior to it.—St. Louis Medical and Surgical Journal. It purports to be a new edition, but it is rather a new book, so greatly has it been improved, both in the amount and quality of the matter which it contains.—N. O. Medical and Surgical Journal. We bespeak for this edition, from the profession, an increase of patronage over any of its former ones, on account of its increased merit. — N. Y. Journal of Medicine. We consider this work unequalled.—Boston Med. and Surg. Journal. BY THE SAME AUTHOR. NEW REMEDIES, WITH FORMULA FOR THEIR ADMINISTRATION. Sixth edition, with extensive Additions. In one very large octavo volume, of over 750 pages. One of the most useful of the author's works.— Southern Medical and Surgical Journal. This well-known and standard book has now reached its sixth edition, and has been enlarged and improved by the introduction of all the recent gifts to therapeutics which the last few years have so richly produced, including the anaesthetic agents, &c. This elaborate and useful volume should be found in every medical library, for as a book of re- ference, for physicians, it is unsurpassed by any other work in existence, and the double index for diseases and for remedies, will be found greatly to enhance its value.—New York Med. Gazette. The great learning of the author, and his remark- able industry in pushing his researches into every source whence information is derivable, has enabled him to throw together an extensive mass of facts and statements, accompanied by full reference to authorities; which last feature renders the work practically valuable to investigators who desire to examine the original papers.—The American Journal of Pharmacy. DE JONGH (L. J.), M. D., &c. THE THREE KINDS OF COD-LIVER OIL, comparatively considered, with their Chemical and Therapeutic Properties. Translated, with an Appendix and Cases, by Edward Carey, M. D. To which is added an article on the subject from « Dunglison on New Remedies." In one small 12mo. volume, extra cloth. DAY (GEORGE E.), M. D. A PRACTICAL TREATISE ON THE DOMESTIC MANAGEMENT AND MOT?F IMPORTANT DISEASES OF ADVANCED LIFE. With an Appendix on a new Successful mode of treating Lumbago and other forms of Chronic Rheumatism. One volume, octavo, 226 pages. FRICK (CHARLES), M. D. RENAL AFFECTIONS; their Diagnosis and Pathology. One volume, royal 12mo., extra cloth. With illustrations. 14 BLANCHARD & LEA'S MEDICAL ERICHSEN (JOHN), Professor of Surgery in University College, London, &c. THE SCIENCE AND ART OF SURGERY; being a Treatise on Surgical Injuries, Diseases, and Operations. Edited by John H. Brinton, M. D. Illustrated with three hundred and eleven engravings on wood. In one large and handsome octavo volume, of over nine hundred closely printed pages. (Just Issued.) It is, in our humble judgment, decidedly the best book of the kind in the English language. Strange that just such books are not oflener produced by pub- lic teachers of surgery in this country and Grea Britain. Indeed, it Is a matter of great astonishment, but no less true than astonishing, that of the many works on surgery republished in this country within the last fifteen or twenty years as textbooks for medical students, this is the only one, that even ap- proximates to the fulfilment of the peculiar wants of young men just, entering upon the sludy of this branch of the profession.— Western Jour, of Med. and Surgery. Embracing, as will be perceived, the whole surgi- cal domain, and each division of itself almost com- plete and perfect, each chapter full and explicit, each subject faithfully exhibited, we can only express our extimate of it in the aggregate. We consider it an excellent contribution to surgery, as probably the best single volume now extant on the subject, and with great pleasure we add it to our text books — Nashville Journal of Medicine and Surgery. Its value is greatly enhanced by a very copious well-arranged index. We regard this as one of the most valuable contributions to modern surgery. To one entering his novitiate of practice, we regard it the most serviceable guide which he can consult. He will find a fulness of detail leading him through every step of the operation, and not deserting him until the final issue of the case is decided. For the same rea- son we recommend it to those whose routine of prac- tice lies in such parts of the country that they must rarely encounter cases requiring surgical manage- ment.—Stethoscope. Prof. Erichsen's work, for its size, has not been surpassed; his nine hundred and eight pages, pro- fusely illustrated, are rich in physiological, patholo- gical, and operative suggestions, doctrines, details, and processes; and will prove a reliable resource for information, both to physician and surgeon, in the hour of peril.— N. 0. Med. and Surg. Journal. We are acquainted with no other work wherein so much good sense, sound principle, and practical inferences, stamp every page. To say more of the volume would be useless; to say less would be doing injustice to a production which we consider above all others at the present day, and superior and more complete than the many excellent treatises of the English and Scotch surgeons, and this is no small encomium.—American Lancet. ELLIS (BENJAMIN), M.D. THE MEDICAL FORMULARY: being a Collection of Prescriptions, derived from the writings and practice of many of the most eminent physicians of America and Europe. Together with the usual Dietetic Preparations and Antidotes for Poisons. To which is added an Appendix, on the Endermic use of Medicines, and on the use of Ether and Chloroform. The whole accompanied with a few brief Pharmaceutic and Medical Observations. Tenth edition, revised and much extended by Robert P. Thomas, M. D., Professor of Materia Medica in the Philadelphia College of Pharmacy. In one neat octavo volume, of two hundred and ninety-six pages. (Lately Issued.) After an examination of the new matter and the alterations, we believe the reputation of the work built up by the author, and the late distinguished editor, will continue to flourish under the auspices of the present editor, who has the industry and accu- racy, and, we would say, conscientiousness requi- site for the responsible task.—American Journal of Pharmacy, March, 1854. It will prove particularly nseful to students and young practitioners, as the most important prescrip- tions employed in modern practice, which lie scat- tered through our medical literature, are here col- lected and conveniently arranged for reference.— Charleston Med. Journal and Review. FOWNES (GEORGE), PH. D., &c. ELEMENTARY CHEMISTRY; Theoretical and Practical. With numerous illustrations. A new American, from the last and revised London edition. Edited, with Addi- tions, by Robert Bridges, M. D. In one large royal 12mo. volume, of over 550 pages, with 181 wood-cuts, sheep, or extra cloth. (Now Ready.) The work of Dr. Fownes has long been before We know of no better text-book, especially in the difficult department of organic chemistry, upon which it is particularly full and satisfactory. We would recommend it to preceptors as a capital " office book" for their students who are beginners in Chemistry. It is copiously illustrated with ex- cellent wood-cuts, and altogether admirably "got up."—N. J. Medical Reporter, March, 1854. A standard manual, which has long enjoyed the reputation of embodying much knowledge in a small space. The author has achieved the difficult task of condensation with masterly tact. His book is con- cise without being dry, and brief without being too dogmatical or general.— Virginia Med. and Surgical Journal. the public, and its merits have been fully appreci- ated as the best text-book on chemistry now in existence. We do not, of course, place it in a rank superior to the works of Brande, Graham, Turner, Gregory, or Gmelin, but we say that, as a work for students, it is preferable to any of them.—Lon- don Journal of Medicine. A work well adapted to the wants of the student. It is an excellent exposition of the chief doctrines and facts of modern chemistry. The size of the work, and still more the condensed yet perspicuous style in which it is written, absolve it from the charges very properly urged against most manuals termed popular.—Edinburgh Monthly Journal of Medical Science. FLINT (AUSTIN), M. D., Professor of the Theory and Practice of Medicine in the University of Louisville, Sec. THE PRINCIPLES AND PRACTICE OF PHYSICAL EXPLORATION, applied to the Diagnosis of Diseases affecting the Organs of Respiration. In one handsome octavo volume. (Nearly Ready.) The reputation already acquired by the author with resrtect to his researches on this and kindred topics, is sufficient guarantee that he will accomplish his object in presenting the student with a good practical text-book, which will facilitate the acquirement of a knowledge of this difficult sub- ject. The work will be ready in time for the Fall sessions. AND SCIENTIFIC PUBLICATIONS. 15 FERGUSSON (WILLIAM), F. R. S., Professor of Surgery in King's College, London, &c. A SYSTEM OF PRACTICAL SURGERY. Fourth American, from the third and enlarged London edition. In one large and beautifully printed octavo volume, of about seven hundred pages, with three hundred and ninety-three handsome illustrations. (Just Issued.) No work was ever written which more nearly comprehended the necessities of the student and practitioner, and was more carefully arranged to The most important subjects in connection with practical surgery which have been more recently brought under the notice of, and discussed by, the surgeons of Great Britain, are fully and dispassion- ately considered by Mr. Fergusson, and that which was before wanting has now been supplied, so that we can now look upon it as a work on practical sur- gery instead of one on operative surgery alone. There was some ground formerly for the complaint before alluded to, that it dwelt too exclusively on operative surgery ; but this defect is now removed, and the book is more than ever adapted for the pur- poses of the practitioner, whether he confines him- self more strictly to the operative department, or follows surgery on a more comprehensive scale.— Medical Times and Gazette. that singlepurpose than this.—IV. Y. Med. and Surg. Journal. The addition of many new pages makes this work more than ever indispensable to the student and prac- titioner.—Ranking's Abstract. Among the numerous works upon surgery pub- lished of late years, we know of none we value more highly than the one before us. It is perhaps the very best we have for a text-book and for ordi- nary reference, being concise and eminently practi- cal.— Southern Med. and Surg. Journal. GRAHAM (THOMAS), F. R. S., Professor of Chemistry in University College, London, &c. THE ELEMENTS OF CHEMISTRY. Including the application of the Science to the Arts. With numerous illustrations. With Notes and Additions, by Robert Bridges, M. D. Sic. &c. Second American, from the second and enlarged London edition PART I. (Lately Issued) large 8vo., 430 pages, 185 illustrations. PART II. (Preparing) to match. The great changes which the science of chemistry has undergone within the last few years, ren- der a new edition of a treatise like the present, almost a new work. The author has devoted several years to the revision of his treatise, and has endeavored to embody in it every fact and inference of importance which has been observed and recorded by the great body of chemical investigators who are so rapidly changing the face of the science. In this manner the work has been greatly increased in size, and the number of illustrations doubled; while the labors of the editor have been directed towards the introduction of such matters as have escaped the attention of the author or as have arisen since the publication of the first portion of this edition in London, inl&)0. Printed in handsome style, and at a very low price, it is therefore confidently presented to the pro- fession and the student as a very complete and thorough text-book of this important subject. GRIFFITH (ROBERT E.), M. D., &.C. A UNIVERSAL FORMULARY, containing the methods of Preparing and Ad- ministering Officinal and other Medicines. The whole adapted to Physicians and Pharmaceu- tists Second Edition, thoroughly revised, with numerous additions, by Robert P. Ihomas, M D Profe. neat volume, royal 12mo., extra cloth, pp. 384. 16 BLANCHARD completion will be issued immediately on its appearance in News and Library for 18J£ ana ^ tfae pearanCe of the preceding portion of the work cTnave tto^&X A - remittance of $2 50 to the pubHshers. TOYNBEE (JOSEPH), F. R. S., Aural Surgeon to St. Mary's Hospital, &c. x MANUAL OF AURAL SURGERY; being a complete Treatise on Diseases .-.uvo,. Illustrated with numerous engravings on wood, from original di of the Ear octavo v UAL OF AURAL ibUXt»jrJiiXVX ; uemg a uuinpiete ±reanse on Disei ir Illustrated with numerous engravings on wood, from original drawings. In ofume. (Preparing.) one J"". AN Oil ..HO te LiiA'S ML OlO TANN£R (T. H.), M. D., Physician to the Hospital for Women, &c. A ft NUAL OF CLINICAL MEDICINE AND PHYSICAL DIAGNOSIS. To which is added The Code of Ethics of the American Medical Association. In one neat voMme, small 12mo., extra cloth. (Now Ready.) Th . object of this little work is to furnish the practitioner, in a condensed and convenient com- pass, and at a trifling cost, with a guide for the daily exigencies of his practice. A large portion of the volume is occupied with details of diagnostic symptoms, classified under the different seats of disease. This, in itself, is well worth the price of the book, but in addition, there will be found an immense amount of information, not usually touched upon in the systematic works, or scattered throughout many different volumes—such as general rules for conduct, taking notes, clinical exami- nation of children and of the insane, post-mortem examinations, medico-legal examinations, exami- nations for life insurance, instruments employed in diagnosis, such as the microscope, tests, the spirometer, dynamometer, stethometer, stethoscope, pleximeter, ophthalmoscope, speculum, uterine sound, &c.; directions for the chemical and microscopical examination of the blood, urine, sputa, &c. &c.; with many other subjects of equal importance which hitherto the young practitioner has had to learn in a great measure from experience alone. Although necessarily treated in a condensed manner, the topics will be found to embrace the latest and most approved modes of procedure, while the addition of the admirable " Code of Ethics" of the American Medical Association renders it complete as a guide for the student and as a manual of daily reference for the younger practitioner. Those who desire to use it as a vade-mecum for the pocket, can obtain copies neatly done up in flexible cloth. TAYLOR (ALFRED S.), M. D., F. R. S., Lecturer on Medical Jurisprudence and Chemistry in Guy's Hospital. MEDICAL JURISPRUDENCE. Third American, from the fourth and improved English Edition. With Notes and References to American Decisions, by Edward Hartshorne, M. D. In one large octavo volume, of about seven hundred pages. (Just Issued.) We know of no work on Medical Jurisprudence i none could be offered to the busy practitioner of which contains in the same space anything like the either calling, for the purpose of casual .or hasty same amount of valuable matter .—N. Y. Journal of\ reference, that would be more likely to afford the aid Medicine desired. We therefore recommend it as the best and No work upon the subject can be put into the safest manual for daily use—American Journal of hands of students either of law or medicine which Medical sciences. will engage them more closely or profitably; and] BY THE SAME AUTHOR. ON POISONS, IN RELATION TO MEDICAL JURISPRUDENCE AND MEDICINE. Edited, with Notes and Additions, by R. E. Griffith, M. D. In one large octavo volume, of 688 pages. The most elaborate work on the subject that our I One of the most practical and trustworthy works literature possesses.—British and Foreign Medico- on Poisons in our language.—Western Journal of Chirurgical Review. \ Medicine. THOMSON (A. T.), M. D., F. R. S., &c. DOMESTIC MANAGEMENT OF THE SICK ROOM, necessary in aid of Medical Treatment for the Cure of Diseases. Edited by R. E. Griffith, M. D. In one large royal 12mo. volume, with wood-cuts, 360 pages WATSON (THOMAS), M.D., &c. LECTURES ON THE PRINCIPLES AND PRACTICE OF PHYSIC. Third American, from the last London edition. Revised, with Additions, by D. Francis Condik, M.D., author of a "Treatise on the Diseases of Children," &c. In one octavo volume, of nearly eleven hundred large pages, strongly bound with raised bands. Confessedly one of the very best works on the principles and practice of physic in the English or any other language.—Med. Examiner. Asa text-book it has no equal; as a compendium of pathology and practice no superior.—New York Annalist. We know of no work better calculated for being placed in the hands of the student, and for a text- book; on every important point the author seems to have posted up his knowledge to the day. — Amer. Med. Journal. One of the most practically useful books that ever was presented to the student. — N. Y. Med. Journal. To say that it is the very best work on the sub- ject now extant, is but to echo the sentiment of the medical press throughout the country. — N. O. Medical Journal. Of the text-books recently republished Watson is very justly the principal favorite.—Holmes's Rep. to Nat. Med. Assoc. By universal consent the work ranks among the very best text-books in our language.—Illinois and Indiana Med. Journal. Regarded on all hands as one of the very best, if not the very bestvsystematic treatise on practical medicine extant.—St. Louis Med. Journal. WHAT TO OBSERVE AT THE BEDSIDE AND AFTER DEATH, IN MEDICAL CASES. Published under the authority of the London Society for Medical Observation. A new American, from the second and revised London edition. In one very handsome volume, royal 12mo., extra cloth. (Now Ready.) The demand which has so rapidly exhausted the first edition of this little work, shows that the advantages it offers to the profession have been duly appreciated, and has stimulated the authors to render it more worthy of its reputation. It has therefore been thoroughly revised, and such im- provements (among which is a section on Treatment) have been made as further experience in its use has shown to be desirable. To the observer who prefers accuracy to blunders I One of the finest aids to a young practitioner we and precision to carelessness, this little book is in- have ever seen.—Peninsular Journal of Medicine. valuable.—N. H. Journal of Medicine. I ___,„_ AND SCIENTIFIC v LEi., Mv;:',, J -: ; —j£4s_____ WILSON (ERASMUS), M.D., F. Lecturer on Anatomy, London. A SYSTEM OF HUMAN ANATOMY, General and S !. F n ih An can, from the last English edition. Edited by Paul B. Goddard, A. x.x., _1.: v ..,-,, n dred and fifty illustrations. Beautifully printed, in one large octavo volume, of neariv six n dred pages. ' In many, if not all the Colleges of the Union, it bas become a standard text-book. This, of itself, is sufficiently expressive of its value. A work very desirable to the student; one, the possession of which will greatly facilitate his progress in the study of Practical Anatomy.—New York Journal of Medicine. Its author ranks with the highest on Anatomy.- It offers to the student all the assista»\<.e ^^ cu^ be expected from such a work.—Medical Examiner. The most complete and convenient manual f.,r t)je student we possess.—American Journal of Medical Science. In every respect, this work as an anatomical guide for the student and practitioner, merits our warmest and most decided praise.—London Medical Southern Medical and Surgical Journal. I Gazette BY THE SAME AUTHOR. THE DISSECTOR; or, Practical and Surgical Anatomy. Modified and Re- arranged, by Paul Beck Goddard, M. D. A new edition, with Revisions and Additions. In one large and handsome vo.ume, royal 12mo., of 458 pages, with 115 illustrations. In passing this work again through the press, the editor has made such additions and improve- ments as the advance of anatomical knowledge has rendered necessary to maintain the work in the high reputation which it has acquired in the schools of the United States, as a complete and faithful guide to the student of practical anatomy. A number of new illustrations have been added, espe- cially in the portion relating to the complicated anatomy of Hernia. In mechanical execution the work will be found superior to former editions. BY THE SAME AUTHOR. ON DISEASES OF THE SKIN. Third American, from the third London edition. In one neat octavo volume, of about five hundred pages, extra cloth. (Just Issued.) Also, to be had done up with fifteen beautiful steel plates, of which eight are exquisitely colored; representing the Normal and Pathological Anatomy of the Skin, together with accurately colored delineations of more than sixty varieties of disease, most of them the size of nature. The Plates are also for sale separate, done up in boards. The "Diseases of the Skin," by Mr. Erasmus I nothing to be desired,sofaras excellence of delinea- Wilson, may now be regarded as the standard work | tion and perfect accuracy of illustration are con- in that department of medical literature. The I cerned.—Medico-Chirurgical Review. plates by which this edition is accompanied leave | BY THE SAME AUTHOR. ON CONSTITUTIONAL AND HEREDITARY SYPHILIS, AND ON SYPHILITIC ERUPTIONS. In one small octavo volume, beautifully printed, with four exqui- site colored plates, presenting more than thirty varieties of syphilitic eruptions. by the same author. (Now Ready.) HEALTHY SKIN; A Popular Treatise on the Skin and Hair, their Preserva tion and Management. Second American, from the fourth London edition. One neat volume, royal 12mo., of about 300 pages, with numerous illustrations. Copies can be had done up in paper covers for mailing, price 75 cents. WHITEHEAD (JAMES), F. R. C. S., &c. THE CAUSES AND TREATMENT OF ABORTION AND STERILITY: being the Result of an Extended Practical Inquiry into the Physiological and Morbid Conditions of the Uterus. Second American Edition. In one volume, octavo, 368 pages. (Now Ready.) Such are the advances made from year to year in this department of our profession, that the practi- tioner who does not consult the recent works on the complaints of females, will soon find himself in the rear of his more studious brethren. This is one-of the works which must be studied by those who would know what the present state of our knowledge is respecting the causes and treatment of abortion and sterility.—The Western Journal of Medicine and Surgery. WALSHE (W. H.), M. D., Professor of the Principles and Practice of Medicine in University College, London. DISEASES OF THE HEART, LUNGS, AND APPENDAGES; theii Symptoms and Treatment. In one handsome volume, large royal 12mo., 512 page%, We consider this as the ablest work in the En- | the author being the first stethoscopist of the day.— glish language, on the subject of which it treats; | Charleston Medical Journal. WILDE (W. R.), Surgeon to St. Mark's Ophthalmic and Aural Hospital, Dublin. AURAL SURGERY, AND THE NATURE AND TREATMENT OF DIS- EASES OF THE EAR. In one handsome octavo volume of 476 pages, with illustrations. This work certainly contains more information on laws, and amenable to the same general methods of the subject to which it is devoted than any other treatment a3 other morbid processes. The work is with which we are acquainted. We feel grateful to not written to supply the cravings of popular patro- the author for his manful effort to rescue this depart- nage, but it is wholly addressed to the profession, ment of surgery from the hands of the empirics who and bears on every page the impress of the reflections nearly monopolize it. We think he has successfully of a sagacious and practical surgeon.— Va. Surg, and shown that aural diseases are not beyond the re- Med. Journal. sources of art; that they are governed by the same : \X fc LEA'S SCIENTt !••; PUBLICATIONS. W^T (CHARLES), M. D., physician to the Hospital for Sick Children, &c. ECTURES ON THE DISEASES OF INFANCY AND CHILDHOOD. Second American, from the Second and Enlarged London edition. In one volume, octavo, of nearly five hundred pages. (Just Issued.) We take leive of Dr. West with great respect for i:is attainments, a due appreciation of his acute .tower?of observation, and a deep sense of obliga- tion for this valuable contribution to our profes- sional literature. His book is undoubtedly in many respects the best we possess on diseases of children. The extracts we have given will, we hope, satisfy our readers of its value; and yet in all candor we must say that they are even inferior to some other parts, the length of which prohibited our entering upon them. That the book will shortly be in the hands of most of our readers we do not doubt, and it willgiveus much pleasure if ourstrong recommend- ation of it may contribute towards the result.—The Dublin Quarterly Journal of Medical Science. Dr. West has placed the profession under deep ob- ligation by this able, thorough, and finished work upon a subject which almost daily taxes to the ut- most the skill of the general practitioner. He has with singular felicity threaded his way througfr-aJl the tortuous labyrinths of the difficult subject he hap » undertaken to elucidate, and has in many of thtjA darkest corners left a light, for the benefit of sucj^ ceeding travellers, which will never be extinguished'ni Not the least captivating feature in this aumirabit j performance is its easy, conversational style, which r acquires force from its very simplicity, and leave^ an impression upon the memory, of the truths j/s conveys, as clear and refreshing as its own purity . The author's position secured him extraordinary fa-' u: cilities for the investigation of children's diseases, J' and his powers of observation and discrimination have enabled him to make the most of these great ' advantages.—Nashville Medical Journal. BY THE SAME AUTHOR. (Just Issued) AN ENQUIRY INTO THE PATHOLOGICAL IMPORTANCE OF ULCER- ATION OF THE OS UTERI. Being the Croonian Lectures for the year 1854. In one neat octavo volume, extra cloth. WILLIAMS (C. J. B.), M.D., F. R. S., Professor of Clinical Medicine in University College, London, &c. PRINCIPLES OF MEDICINE; comprising General Pathology and Therapeu- tics, and a brief general view of Etiology, Nosology, Semeiology, Diagnosis, Prognosis, and Hygienics. Edited, with Additions, by Meredith Clymer, M. D. Fourth American, from the last and enlarged London edition. In one octavo volume, of 476 pages. (Lately Issued.) It possesses the strongest claims to the attention of the medical student and -practitioner, from Hie admirable manner in which the various inquiries in the diflerent branches of pathology are investigated, combined, and generalized by an experienced practical physician, and directly applied to the investigation and treatment of disease.—Editor's Preface. The best exposition in our language, or, we be- lieve, in any language, of rational medicine, in its present improved and rapidly improving state.— British and Foreign Medico-Chirurg. Review. Few books have proved more useful, or met with a more ready sale than this, and no practitioner should regard his library as complete without it. —Ohio Med. and Surg. Journal. BY THE SAME AUTHOR. A PRACTICAL TREATISE ON DISEASES OF THE RESPIRATORY ORGANS; including Diseases of the Larynx, Trachea, Lungs, and Pleurae. With numerous Additions and Notes, by M. Clymer, M. D. With wood-cuts. In one octavo volume, pp. 508. YOUATT (WILLIAM), V. S. THE HORSE. A new edition, with numerous illustrations; together with a general history of the Horse; a Dissertation on the American Trotting Horse ; how Trained and Jockeyed; an Account of his Remarkable Performances; and an Essay on the Ass and the Mule. By J. S. Skinner, formerly Assistant Postmaster-General, and Editor of the Turf Register. One large octavo volume. BY THE SAME AUTHOR. THE DOG. Edited by E. J. Lewis, M. D. With numerous and beautiful illustrations. In one very handsome volume, crown Svo., crimson cloth, gilt. ILLUSTRATED MEDICAL CATALOGUE, BLANCHARD & LEA have now ready a Catalogue of their Medical, Surgical, and Scien- tific Publications, containing descriptions of the works, with Notices of the Press, and Fp.-cimens of the Illustrations, making a pamphlet of sixty-four large octavo pages. It has beon prepared with great care, and without regard to expense, forming one of the most beau- tji ii specimens of typographical execution as yet issued in this country. Copies will be r\it by mail, and the postage paid, on application to the Publishers, by inclosing two three c; it postage stamps. Catalogues of Blancharcl & Lea's numerous Miscellaneous and Educational Publications wi 1 be forwarded free by mail, on application. :-vS